PDF Mitel SX 200D Generic 1005 Vol. 2 Install & Admin
SX-200D Generic 1005 Vol 2 Install & Admin SX-200D Generic 1005 Vol 2 Install & Admin
User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 1142
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Generic1005 PracticesIndex NOTICE The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mite1Corporation (MITELB). The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by Mite1or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mite1and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes. Revision 0 9109-0964IOO-NA Issue 1 G ENERAL This Section contains a list of Practices for the SX-2O@ DIGITAL Private Automatic Branch Exchange, with the following software variants: Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1003, Generic 1004, Generic 1005, Generic 1005 FPKGI , and Generic 1005 LIT96. Doctimentation 1.1 index The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX documentation is contained in 2 volumes as follows: Volume 1 Features and Services, Hardware (9109-096-001-NA) contains a system description, feature operation information and hardware descriptions of circuit cards and peripheral equipment. Volume 2 Installation and Administration (9109-096-002-NA) contains system installation, testing, data entry information, engineering, troubleshooting and maintenance information. 9109-096-0004A Issue1 Revision 0 Generic 1005 Practices Index Table l-l VOLUME 1 ?ractice Generic 1005 FDI Practices Features and Services, 31094984004A Generic 1005 Practices Index 31&J-09&-iOO-NA General Description 3109-096-I Features Description 310949622O-NA 3109-09&221 Automatic -NA 9109496401 Hardware r Route Selection and Toll Control Station Message Detail Recording 3109-096-23O--NA Tenanting 3109-096-45O-NA Traffic Measurement 3109-096-602-NA Hotel / Motel Feature Package Description 3109-096-62O-NA ACD TELEMARKETER8 3109-096-625-NA Automated 3109-096-I 25-NA Circuit Card Descriptions 3109-09&l 26-NA Peripheral Devices Installation VOLUME 2 Practice Number Attendant Application Application and Administration Generic 1005 Practices Index 9109-09&2034A Safety Instructions 9109-09&20O-NA Installation Information 9109-096-21 Customer Data Entry 9109-096-35O-NA Troubleshooting 910943963514lA R!S-232 Maintenance Terminal 9109-096-353-NA General Maintenance Information 9109-096-355-NA Field-Replaceable 9109-096-I Engineering 2 8O-NA Package Package 9109-095-002-NA Title d109-096-0004A O-NA -NA Title Number 05-NA Index Units Information Revision 0 9109-096-OOO-NA Issue 1 SX-ZOO@DIGITAL PABX Safety Instructions . m, @-Tmdenm&ofMltelCofporaUon. 0 copydghi 1982, Hlbal corpontlon. All rights re%mwd. Rlnted In Canada MITEL 8 Safety Instructions NOTICE The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mite1 Corporation (MITELQ. The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mite1 and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes. ii Revision 0 9109-096-203-NA Issue 1 Table of Contents 1. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS General ................................................................... UseofNotices ............................................................. UseofSymbols ............................................................ General Installation Summary ................................................. Fuse and Component Replacement ............................................. Identification and Location of Circuit Card for Installation .............................. General Description ..................................................... ........................................................ EquipmentGrounding Approved Configurations of Product (United States Of America) ....................... Installation of Telecommunication Wiring ......................................... 203 203 203 203 203 203 .’ 203 203 203 203 l-1 l-l l-2 l-2 l-3 l-3 l-3 l-6 l-l 3 l-14 List of Figures Figure l-l Figure l-2 336 Port Cabinet Circuit Card Locations 672 Port Cabinet Circuit Card Locations Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure SX-ZOO8 FD Circuit Card Locations .................................. PFT Circuit Card Locations (All Cabinets except SX-200 FD) .............. 336 Port Cabinet Ground Connection Point ............................. 672 Port Control Cabinet Ground Connection Point ...................... 672 Port Peripheral Cabinet Ground Connection Point .................... SX-200 FD Cabinet Ground Connection Point .......................... l-3 l-4 l-5 l-6 l-7 l-6 ............................... ............................... 203 l-4 203 l-5 203 203 203 203 203 203 l-6 l-7 l-9 l-10 l-11 l-12 . 9109-096203-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 a.. III Safety Instructions iv Revision 0 9109-096-203-NA Issue 1 1. IMPORTANT SAFETY INS’TRUCTIONS These instructions are intended as a general guide to provide basic installation information which is necessary for the proper and safe functioning of this equipment. Failure to follow afl instructions and/or risk of electric shock. may result in improper equipment operation ; General . Read and understand all instructions. Keep these instructions with the equipment. . Do not attempt to install or service this equipment unless you are skilled in the installation and maintenance of electronic telecommunication equipment and have successfully completed specific training for this equipment. . This product must be installed and serviced in accordance with this document and the information contained in this set of Technical Practices. Practice 9109-096-000-NA is the Practice Index document. 0 Install all assemblies using the procedures 9109--09&20CLNA, Installation Information. . . Follow all procedures outlined in the practices in the sequence that is given. described in Practice e Configure this product with only the assemblies specified and in the locations stated in this set of Technical Practices. . Replace all guards or barriers. Close and lock doors at the completion of installation or before returning the equipment to service. . Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication equipment. Never operate telecommunication equipment with the grounding conductor disconnected. . Ensure grounding conductor is installed before connecting telecommunication cabling to any system. Use of Notices 1.1 The following information provides an explanation of the notices which appear on the product and in the practices for this product: 9109-096203-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 203 l-l Safetv Instructions DANGER Danger indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. WARNING Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or damage to the equipment or property. ; 1.2 The following information provides an explanation of the symbols which appear on the product: A A DANGEROUS VOUAGE l MilRuclloNs The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a significant risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The ground symbol within a circle identifies the terminal which is intended for connection to an external protective conductor. This connector must be connected to earth ground prior to making any other connections to the equipment. pAOTECllVE GROUNDHO TERNINAL . General Installation Summary 203 l-2 Power Source This product is intended to operate from an electrical branch circuit source rated at 120 volts RMS, 60 Hz,15 amperes. Equipment Location This product shall only be situated in a clean and dry environment in accordance with the environmental and other installation requirements specified in Practice 9109-096-20O-NA, Installation Information. AC Power Cord Use only the 3 -wire power cord supplied with this product. Replace the power cord only with one having the same number of conductors, electrical rating, and usage rating. Revision 0 9109-096-203-NA Issue 1 ImportantSafety Instructions I Fuse and Component Replacement Unauthorized repair of this product may result in a fire or shock hazard, and/or defective operation and/or equipment damage. Do not repair or replace components on circuit card assemblies or other parts of this equipment unless there is a specific description of the procedure provided in this set of technical practices. Return ail inoperative assemblies to an authorized MITEL agent for repair. 13 \ Fuses identified with an electrical rating (voltage, current, type) shall be replaced with only the same type and rating. Never replace fuses with devices having different electrical ratings. Only those fuses installed in fuse-clips or fuseholders shall be replaced in the field as directed by instructions in this set of Technical Practices. Do not replace or attempt to bypass soldered in fuses on circuit card assemblies. Refer to the appropriate documents in this document set for information on the proper method of troubleshooting and servicing of this product. Practice 9109-09S-OO&NA is the Practice index document. Identification and location of Circuit Card for Installation General Description 1.4 The mechanical design consists of an enclosure, a card cage, and an interconnecting backplane which define the arrangement and position of circuit card assemblies. Installation of the circuit card assemblies is performed either by sliding it into the appropriate slot in the card cage or by attaching it to the side rails using screws. These two methods are described below: Method 1 -The assembly physically interconnects into the system by first positioning it in front of the appropriate slot and then sliding the cards along the card cage guides until the card is firmly seated into the mating connector on the backplane. Most circuit cards are installed in this manner. Refer to Figure I-1, Figure 1-2 and Figure l-3 for the specific locations of the assemblies. Method 2-The assembly attaches to the internal side rails of the cabinet using screws. Power Fail Transfer (PFT) cards are installed using this method. Refer to figure Figure I-4 for the specific location of the assemblies. Revisinn fl 3m 1-q Safety Instructions CONTROL VOlCEjDATA CABINET CARDS: 6aFiCUITTRUNKCARDS i2ammm,MmuuNECAm eatmJrrcov, OPS UNE CARDS UNIVERSALCARDS 1 ClRCUlr(~CNANNEL)Tl TRUNKCARD Figure l-l 336 Port Cabinet Circuit Revision 0 Card Locations 9109-096-203-NA Issue 1 Important CONTROL PERIPHERAL CABINET Safety Instructions CABINET . VOICE/DATA CARDS 384 PORTS 288 PORTS VOWDATA CARDS: 6CRCUlTTRUNKCARDS 12 ClRCUiTONS, DIGITALLINE CARDS 6ClRCUlTCOV,OPSLlNECARDS UNIVERSALCARDS 1 CIRCUIT (24 CHANNEL)Tl TRUNK CARD Figure l-2 9109-096-203-NA Issue 1 CC0107 672 Port Cabinet Circuit Card Locations Revision 0 203 l-5 Safety Instructions PERIPHERAL CABINET CONTROL CABINET . ....................,.. : :::,:~:~:~:,.,.,.,.,.,. ” “ZZ.. .: :.:.:,,:.:..:.:..:.,.. ......._,. ...........2:..,:.:.: ..... :..:,,. ..,.:.: yf> ‘~.,.~.,.,‘,‘,.~.,.,.,~ ‘=+.. ......A.. ...... ................................................................................._..... :5.x .......................................................A ..........................................<....................... .....A ...“.............i..... . . .. .................<.......2: .._.......,......._..._.._..._......._. :w .........A... .............................-...... ............:..... ............................ :.:.:.:.:.: :::::::::::: :m y::::::::: :::::::::::: ::::::::::: ::::::::::: $$g A....... DISK DIWE ::::::::::; $$$$ ::::::::::. .........A ....A... ::::::::::: gg$ ::::::::::. ;$Jg ::::::::::: DISK DWVE ::::::::::: :::ZJ:p .:.,.,.,.,.: ~~~~ #$:y; pgg .......~.y. *::::::A :f#$ ..y...:. ::::::::zg i&: g&j v........ :::::::::::: m :::::::::::: ::::::: :::::::::::: ::::*<. ggg ::::yg fT$gg $$$$ ::::::::::: :;:;:::::::: :::::::::< :::::;:::::: :::::::j:: :;:;:;:::::: y:::::::: :::::::::::: ::::::::::: :;:;:;:;:;:: :::::<:::: :::::;:w ::::::::::: :;:;:;:;:$: $gg :::$$::j: :::;:;:;:;:: ::::::::::: :$#::::: $$g $g:y; v........ z$## ::::<::g v........ ~~~~$~ ::::::::::: m v........ gg$ m v........ s.3 ::::::::::: ::::::::::: $;$jtJ ::::::::::: ii:::::::: m :<::j::::: :B $$g .......A.. gg g$$; :::::::x ::$gg .:.:.:.:.:: :$gg; g$$ y::::::::: $g&:: ........A :m ::gg$ .:;:;:;:;::: $$j# :m v......... g$$ ggg $~~~$~~~ ::::::::::x .::::::::::: ::::::::::: $$gg $$$g :.:.:.:.:.: :w y$$$$ ::::::::::: ........... m .:.:.:.:.> ::::::::::: ........7 :::::;z m ::::yQz :::::m @ m ::::::::::: .:::::::<:: w :$g$$ $$$g ::w.: :w::; 96 PORTS VOICE/DATA CARDS: 6ClRCUlTTRUNKCARDS 12 CIRCUITCM, DIGITAL UNE CARDS 6 URCUlT COV,OPS UNE CARDS UNIVERSALCARDS I afnm(24 ~~ANNEL)T~ TRUNKCAM Cml71 Figure 13 203 l-6 SX-200 FD Circuit Card Locations Revision 0 9109-09&203-NA Issue 1 Important Safety Instructions - :::: :::: ;::: ; PFrCARD . . a. :: ,. .s . . I/ . . . . . . .JII.,Q . : :: . Figure 14 9109-096-203-NA d . . 1 . . , . :: . - PFrCARlJ - PFTCARD PFT Circuit Card Locations (All Cabinets except SX-200 FD) Issue 1 Revision 0 203 l-7 Safety Instructions Equipment Grounding 1.5 Redundant and independent equipment grounding conductors (see Note 1) are to be installed between the product and the wiring system ground. One of the equipment’s grounding conductors shall be an insulated grounding conductor (see Note 2) that is not smaller in size and is equivalent in insulation material and thickness to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductor, except that it is green, with or without one or more yellow stripes. The grounding conductor is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies that product or system and is to be connected to ground at the service equipment. ; ‘The other conductor (see Note 3) shall comply with the general rules for grounding contained in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, or Section IO of the Canadian Electrical Code, CSA C22.1, but shall not depend on the cord and plug of the product. Notes: 1. There are two grounding conductors required to be installed with this equipment. One ground conductor is provided as part of the three wire 15 A branch circuit from which the product derives AC power. The other ground conductor is the supplementary or telecommunications ground, The SX-200 FD control cabinet does not require a separate and independent equipment grounding conductor. The supplementary ground is only required if the cabinet contains telecommunications interfaces that connect to exposed or outside plant leads. These generally include LS/GS and DID trunk cards and OPS line cards. Please refer to Figure l-6. The power cord for this product should only be replaced with one having the same number of conductors, gauge, insulation and usage ratings. The telecommunications ground conductor shall be installed before installing other telecommunications wiring to the system. Muiti-cabinet system installations may share a common ground conductor. Refer to Practice 9109-096-20O-NA, installation Information, for specific instructions for car- rect system grounding. 2. This grounding conductor is provided as part of the AC power cord-set provided with the equipment. The size of this conductor is allowed as stated in the National Electrical Code (NEC) in the United States NFPA/ANSI 70 Section 250-95, Exception No. 1 which provides for compliance through Section 240-4, Exception No. 1. . 3. This grounding conductor is referred to as the telecommunications ground or supplementary ground as permitted in Section 250-91 (c) of the NEC. This shall be an insulated #6 AWG, green or green and yellow striped wire which is to be connected to the protective grounding stud within the cabinet. The following symbol is located adjacent to the stud to identify the connection point for the grounding conductor: 203 l-6 Revision 0 9109-096-2&NA Issue 1 Important Safety Instructions 1 To Fans n FROM LINE FILTER CABINET ’ GROUND STUD . p-0 W ONDUND -_ EW Figure l-6 Ql fWa-WLXn-NA Issue 1 QRWND I 1”1 0 I- - d WINES TO BUILDINGWATER FIFE GROUND WIRES 336 Port Cabinet Ground Connection Point Revision 0 211.1 l-4 r Safety Instructions Tolha sl FROM LINE CABINET -GROUND STUD .. -DG QROLIND -,EDG GRDUND wms TO BUllDlNG WATER PIPE GROUND I‘ dd 0 I- - I~c9binet WIRES --------~AcPowEFtcMLGG Figure l-6 203 l-10 672 Port Control Cabinet Ground Connection Point Revision 0 9109-09&203-NA Issue 1 Important Safety Instructions -0 W -_ EDG GNDUND GROUND WIRES lntetcabinei WIRRS ~ACFWVERCABLES Figure l-7 9109496-203-NA 672 Port Peripheral Cabinet Ground Connection Point Issue 1 Revision 0 203 l-11 Safety Instructions CONTROL CABINET PERIPHERAL CABINET _ 4C INPUTS-WIRE CONNECTIONONLY (POWERAND GROUND) -AC SYSTEM GROUND STUD Figure I-8 203 1-12 INPUT 3-WlRE CONNECTIONONLY (POWERAND GROUND) SFr 0uTPur CONNECTOR SX-200 FD Cabinet Ground Connection Point Revision 0 9109-496-2O&NA Issue 1 Important Safety instructions Approved 1.6 Configurations of Product (United States Of America) This product has been evaluated and listed with Underwriters’ Laboratories Incorporated to their Standard for Safety 1459,“Telephone Equipment”, Second Edition. The following assemblies have been investigated and determined suitable for use in this product: Marketing _’ Description Number / Common Name 9109-002-005-SA MEMORY MODULE - 4 MEG 9109-002~03-SA MEMORY MODULE -2 MEG 9 109-004-00&SA DX MODULE I 9109-005-OO&SA 1 I I 9109-006-OO&SA I SWITCH MATRIX CARD 9109~06-OO&SA I BAY POWER SUPPLY 12OV UNIVERSAL CARD ONS LINE CARD 9109-01 O-000-SA 9109~11-001-SA LS/GS TRUNK CARD GCCT-CSA 9109-012-000-SA DIGITAL LINE CARD I 9109-013-000-SA 1 E&M TRUNK MODULE I 9109~16-00O-SA I DTMF RX/RELAY MODULE BAY CONTROL CARD 9109-017-000-SA 9109-016-00O-SA MUSIC/PAGING MODULE COV LINE CARD 9109-02O-OO&SA I I 9109-021-00O-SA I Tl TRUNK CARD AND ADAPTOR 9109-023-000-SA II PFT CARD I 9109-025-00&SA CONSOLE MODULE 9109-031-00O-SA DID TRUNK CARD 9109-03~O&SA MAIN CONTROL LESS MODULES 9 109-04&00&SA OPS LINE CARD I I- 9109-043-OOO-SA I 9109-060-00O-SA II I 9109-061-00O-SA I I 9109-124-OO&SA I I 9400-I 00-301-NA 940&l 00-30O-NA MODULE Tl CLOCK MODULE STRATUM 3 Tl CLOCK MODULE STRATUM 4 1 9 109-I 25-OOO-SA 9400-I 00-303-NA LS/GS CONVERSION 5.25” FLOPPY DISK DRIVE ASSY 3.5” DISK DRIVE ASSY I I PERIPHERAL CONTROL FIM CARRIER RESOURCE CARD SWITCH MATRIX MODULE 9400-300-30l-NA FIBER INTERFACE MODULE 9400-300-30!5-NA FLOPPY DISK DRIVE 9400-300-302-NA QUAD FIM CARRIER 9109-096-203-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 203 l-13 Safetv Instructions Installation 1.7 of Telecommunication Wiring Telecommunication wiring to this product shall conform to all applicable safety and electrical wiring regulations. Installation of telecommunication wiring shall be performed following precautions in accordance with standard industry practice. The precautions to be followed include: _’ 1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. 2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. ; ‘3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. 4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. 5. Any fiber cabling used to connect the SX-200 FD control and peripheral cabinets should not be encased in a metal sheath so as to ensure isolation between the two cabinets. Conduit may be used to encase fiber cabling as long as the conduit does not contact the cabinets. 6. The SFT (System Fail Transfer) output connector (see Figure 1-8) shall not be connected to an off-premise application. Any connection of the assemblies listed below to an outside plant lead, an offpremlse application or any other exposed plant application may result In a fire or shock hazard, and/or defective operation and/or equipment damage. )I Marketlng Number Description 9109-010-000SA Name ONS LINE CARD 91094124004A DIGITAL LINE CARD 9109-016-00&SA I / Common MUSIC/PAGING MODULE 9109-020-00O-SA COV LINE CARD 9109-021-00O-SA Tl TRUNK CARD 136051301, SFT FILTER ASSY Rev. 1 Examples of installations which shall not be permitted for connection to these interfaces are those which: (a) Require protectors in accordance with the National Electrical Code for the United States, NEC, NFPA / ANSI 70, Article 800-30, or, (b) Are “Exposed Plant”as defined in the Canadian Electrical Code-CSAC22.1, paragraph 60-I 00 which states; “Exposed plant means where any portion of the circuit is subject to accidental contact with electric lighting or power conductors operating at a voltage exceeding 300V between conductors or is subject to lightning strikes.” 203 I-14 Revision0 9109-096--203-NA Issue 1 lmoortant Safetv Instructions Note: TheTl Trunk Card may be connected to an outside plant lead, an off-premiseapplication, or any other exposed plant lead, only through a Customer Service Unit (CSU) which has been suitably investigated and approved by the FCC or DOC, and the appropriate authority for safety. 9109-09&-2034/A Issue 1 Revision 0 203 1-15 Safety Instructions . 203 1-16 Revision 0 9109-096-203-NA Issue 1 SX-ZUU@ DIGITAL PABX Installation Information N, @-Trademark of MM Cotpomtlon. 0 copyllgm lss2, MM corporauon. All rIgIds resewed. PrInted In Canada w MITEL Installation Information NOTICE The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mite1 Corporation (MITELB). The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mite1and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes. VT700” ii is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corp. Revision 0 9109-0962004A Issue 1 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Failure to follow ail instructions may result in improper equipment operation and/or the risk of electric shock. l This product is to be installed and serviced only by qualified personnel. l Read all instructions before attempting to install or use this product. l Install all assemblies using the procedures described in this Practice. _ Configure this product with only the assemblies specified in this Practice. l \ * Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication equipment. Never operate telecommunication equipment with grounding conductor disconnected. Ensure grounding conductor is installed before connecting telecommunication cabling to any system. EXPLANATION OF USE FOR SYMBOLS AND NOTICES The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, triangle, is intended to alert the user to the uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute electric shock to persons. A A DANGEROUS VOLTAGE within an equilateral presence of an product’s enclosure that a significant risk of The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. l INSTRUCTIONS The ground symbol within a circle identifies the terminal which is intended for connection to an external protective conductor. This connector must be connected to earth ground prior to making any other connections to the equipment. PROTECTNE GROUNDING TERMINAL L I Danger indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not 1 avoided, will result in death or serious injury. I I 1 1 DANGER 1 WARNING I I 1 CAUTION 9109-09&20O-NA Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not 1 avoided, could result in death or serious injury. I I Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not 1 avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or damage to the equipment or property. Issue 1 Revision 0 ... III Installation Information iv Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Table of Contents 1. INTRODUCTION Installation Information ....................................................... Intent of this Document ................................................. 200 l-l ; . 200 l-l SX-2OOI0 DIGITAL PABX Configurations ..................................... SX-200 FD PABX Configurations ........................................... ,Peripheral Devices, Software and Documentation ............................... Summary of Practice Contents ............................................. How to-Use this Practice ................................................... Hew to Use an Installation Chart ........................................... How to Complete a Repair Tag ............................................. Prerequisites To Installation ................................................... ToolsNeeded ........................................................... Training Requirements .................................................... Referenced Documents ................................................... 2. INSTALLING - l-l l-2 l-2 l-2 200 i 200 200 200 200 200 200 l-5 l-6 l-7 l-9 l-9 l-9 l-9 SX-ZOO DIGITAL AND SX-200 FD SYSTEMS Installing the 336-part SX-200 Digital PABX ...................................... Introduction ............................................................ Equipment Part Numbers .................................................. Installation Charts ....................................................... Installing the 672-part SX-200 DIGITAL PABX .................................... Introduction ............................................................ Equipment Part Numbers .................................................. Installation Charts ....................................................... Installing the SX-200 FD PABX ................................................ Introduction ............................................................ Equipment Part Numbers .................................................. Installation Charts ....................................................... Prepare for Installation ....................................................... 3. INSTALLING 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 2-l 2-l 2-4 2-9 2-l 0 2-10 2-15 2-20 2-22 2-22 2-24 2-26 2-28 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 3-l 3-l 3-4 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-13 3-17 3-l 7 200 200 200 200 3-19 3-23 3-24 3-27 CABINETS Install Control Cabinet ....................................................... Unpack and Inspect SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet ........................... Install SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet ...................................... Unpack and Inspect SX-200 FD Control Cabinet ............................... OpenandCloseSX-2OOFDCabinetFrontDoor ............................... Install SX-200 FD Control Node Cabinets ..................................... Install Second FIM Carrier (SX-200 FD PABX) ................................. InstallPeripheralCabinets .................................................... Unpack and Inspect the 672-par-t Peripheral Cabinet ............................ Install 672-part Peripheral Cabinet .......................................... Unpack and Inspect SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet ............................. Install SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinets ....................................... .................................................... VerifyGroundConnections 9109-096-2OO-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 V Installation Information 4. INSTALL DIGITAL PERIPHERAL Install Digital Peripheral Install Digital Peripheral 5. HANDLING BAYS IN SX-200 DIGITAL CABINETS 200 4-l Bay With Shelf .......................................... Bay without Shelf ........................................ 200 4-8 PRINTED CIRCUIT CARDS Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards ........................................ Remove and Return Printed Circuit Cards ........................................ 6. INSTALLING DIGITAL CONTROL 200 5-1 200 5-5 CARDS Install theMain Control Card ............................................... Remove a Module from the Main Control Card .................................... .: . 200 6-l 200 6-9 200 6-l 0 Install Switch Matrix Card (672-pat-t Configuration) ................................. Install a Control Resource Card (SX-200 FD PABX) ................................ 200 6-11 200 6-12 200 6-13 Install Fiber Interface Modules (SX-200 FD PABX) ................................. Install Floppy Disk Driie ...................................................... InstallBayPowerSupply ..................................................... ................................................... InstallaBayControlCard.. Install Peripheral 7. INSTALLING FIM Carrier and FIM (SX-200 200 6-16 200 6-18 FD PABX) ........................... 200 6-20 POWER FAIL TRANSFER 200 7-l 200 7-l Introduction.. .............................................................. Install Power Fail Transfer Card In SX-200 DIGITAL PABX .......................... Install System Fail Transfer Unit for SX-200 FD PABX .............................. 8. INSTALL DIGITAL PERIPHERAL CARDS Install Universal Card and Modules ............................................. Install Line (ONS, OPS, COV, and Digital) and DID Trunk Cards ................................................. lnstallanLS/GSTrunkCard.. Install aTl-DSl Trunk Card 200 7-8 200 8-1 ...................... .................................................. 200 8-7 200 8-9 200 8-11 9. BRING SYSTEM INTO SERVlCE Connect Optical Fiber Cables between SX-200 FD Nodes ........................... 200 9-l 200 9-l Fiber Link Specifications .................................................. Fiber Cable Handling Guidelines ............................................ FiberCablelnstallation ................................................... - 200 9-l 200 9-2 Connect Cables Between PABX and Cross-Connect Field ........................... PowerUpControlCabinet.. .................................................. 200 9-4 200943 Power Up Peripheral Cabinet .................................................. Install Diskettes in Disk Drives on SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ........................... 200 9-9 200 9-l 0 200 9-12 200913 Install Diskettes in Disk Drives on the SX-200FD PABX ............................. .................................................. CheckSystemlnitialization.. RemoveDiskettesfromDiskDrives.. ........................................... 10. INSTALLING PERIPHERAL 2009-13 EQUIPMENT lntroduction................................................................ vi 200 10-l Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Table of Contents Peripheral MITELB Equipment and Applications Peripheral Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-3 Install A Maintenance Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-3 Install a Local Maintenance Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s . . . . 200 1 O-3 Install a Remote Maintenance Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : . 200 1 O-8 Install an LCD Console as a Maintenance Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-l 2 Install a SUPERCONSOLE 7000” Attendant Console as a Maintenance Console . . . . . 200 1 O-l 3 Install a System Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-l 5 Install Call Announce Port on a SUPERSET Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-l 6 Install Night Bell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . : 200 10-18 Install‘Paging Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 10-22 Install Music On Hold Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-23 Install Alternate Music Source for ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 1 O-24 11. CABLING AND CROSS CONNECTIONS System Cabling APPENDIX Al. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 11-l A. SYSTEM UPGRADE INTRODUCTION KIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-l Upgrading an SX-200 PABX to an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-l Upgradingaporttoa672-portSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-l UpgradeProcedures....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . ..-.... 200 A-2 Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-2 A2. UPGRADE AN SX-200 PABX TO AN SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (456-PORT) . . . . . . . . . 200 lntroduction................................................................ 200 Install Control Cabinet . , . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-3 A-3 A-5 A-9 Install Digital Control Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-l 0 Install Digital Peripheral Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-11 Install Analog Peripheral Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-l 3 Install Digital Interface Card . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-13 Install Analog Control and Peripheral InstallCOTrunkCard .......... Install E&M Trunk Card . . . . . . . . . Install DID/Tie Trunk Card . . . . . . . - Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =. . . . . . . . . . . . 0 . . . 200 A-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-27 Bring Upgraded SX-200 DIGITAL System Into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-31 Cable to Cross-connect Field and Power Up Control Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s . . . 200 A-31 Reconfigure SX-200 PABX Cabinet as Peripheral Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-31 Install Diskettes on Disk Drives A3. UPGRADE APPENDIX Bl. A336-PORT . . . . . . m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-34 SYSTEM TO A 672-PORT B. PERIPHERAL DEVlCE CONNECTION LOOP LENGTH SPECIFICATIONS 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 SYSTEM . . 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 A-35 TO THE DIGITAL LINE CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 B-l Revision 0 vii Installation Information List of Figures Figure l-l Figure 2-l Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 3-l Figure 3-2 Figure 3-3 Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5 Figure 3-6 Figure 3-7 Figure 3-6 Figure 3-9 Figure 4-l MITEL Repair Tag ............................................... Fully Equipped 336-port Configuration SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Fully Configured 672-part SX-200 Digital PABX ................... 200 l-6 ........... 200 2-3 .: .. SX-200 FD PABX Control Node and Peripheral Bay .................... External Packaging of an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Cabinet ............... 336-par-t Configuration Control Cabinet With Digital Peripheral Shelf 672-Pat-t Control Cabinet With Digital Peripheral Shelf .................. 200 3-3 ....... SX-20UFDControlNodeCabinet .............................. Second (Optional) FIM Carrier in the SX-200 FD Control Node ............ Cable Connections for the Second (Optional) FIM Carrier ................ Installation of Intercabinet Cable Assembly ........................... 672-Pat-t Peripheral Cabinet ....................................... SX-200 200 2-14 200 2-23 200 3-6 200 3-7 ..y .. FD Peripheral Cabinet 200 3-12 200 3-15 200 3-16 200 3-21 200 3-22 ..................................... Installation of Digital Peripheral Shelf and Panel ....................... Backplane and Cardfile Ground Connection Details (336port configuration) 200 3-26 200 4-2 . 200 4-4 . 200 4-5 Figure 4-5 Figure 4-6 Figure 4-7 Backplane and Cardfile Ground Connection Details (672-par-t configuration) Power and Grounding - 672-port Control Cabinet ...................... Power and Grounding - 672-port Peripheral Cabinet .................... PCM Cables - 336-par-t Control Cabinet ............................. PCM Cables - 672-part Control Cabinet ............................. Figure 4-6 PCM Cables - 672-pat-t Peripheral Cabinet Figure 4-2 Figure 4-3 Figure 4-4 Figure 5-l Figure 6-l Figure 6-2 Figure 6-3 Figure 6-4 Figure 6-5 Figure 6-6 Figure 6-7 Figure 6-6 Figure 6-9 Figure 6-l 0 Figure 7-1 Figure 7-2 Figure 7-3 Figure 7-4 Figure 7-5 Figure 7-6 Figure 7-7 Figure 6-l Figure 6-2 ... VIII ........................... Printed Circuit Card Packaging ..................................... Main Control Card Jumpers and Switches ............................ Installation of Modules (336-pat-t Configuration) ........................ Installation of Modules (672-part Configuration) ........................ Installation of Modules (SX-200 FD System) .......................... Main Control Card and Decryption Module ............................ Installation of a Tl Clock Module onto an MCC ........................ DIGITAL PABX) ...................... DIGITAL PABX) ...................... Bay Control Card-Switch Locations ................................ Installation of the Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM on the BCC (SX-200FDPABX). ............................................. PFT Card and LS-to-GS Module ................................... PFT Card Location in the Control Cabinet ............................ 5 l/4” Floppy Disk Drive (SX-200 3 l/2" Floppy Disk Drive (SX-200 PFT Card Connections (336-port Configuration) ....................... ....................... PFT Card Connections (672-port Configuration) System Fail Transfer Unit General view .............................. SFT Connector on SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet Backplate 200 4-6 200 4-7 200 4-l 0 200 4-11 200 4-12 200 5-4 200 6-4 200 6-5 200 6-6 200 6-6 200 6-7 200 6-6 200 6-14 200 6-15 200 6-19 200 6-21 200 7-4 200 75 200 74 200 7-7 200 7-9 ............. 200 7-l 0 SFT Connectors in the SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet .................. 200 7-11 Universal Card and Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . 200 6-2 Installation of Module onto Universal Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 6-5 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Table of Contents Figure Figure Figure Figure 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-6 Figure 9-l Figure 9-2 Figure 9-3 Figure 9-4 Figure 1O-1. Figure\1 O-2 Figure 1O-3 Figure 1O-4 Figure 10-5 Figure 10-6 Figure A2-1 Figure A2-2 Figure A23 Figure A2-4 Figure A25 Figure A2-6 Figure A2-7 Figure A2-8 Figure A2-9 Figure A2-10 Figure A2-11 Figure A2-12 Figure A2-13 Figure m-14 ............................................... LS/GSTrunkCard 200 8-10 Installation of a Tl Adapter Card on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Backplane . . 200 8-14 Installation of Tl Adapter Cable Assembly on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ... 200 8-15 Installation of Tl Adapter Assembly on the SX-200 FD PABX Peripheral Backplate .............................................. 200 8-16 Ferriie Installed onto a Cable ...................................... 200 9-5 SX-200 DIGITAL 336-par-t Control Shelf Backplane .................... 200 9-6 SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet Backplate ............................ 200 9-7 5 l/4” Disk Drives in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ....................... 200 9-11 Music, Relay, and Paging Connections on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ....... 200 1 O-2 Maintenance Terminal Connection - SX-200 FD Peripheral Bay ............ 200 1 O-6 Maintenance Terminal Connections - SX-200 FD Control Node ........... 200 1 O-7 Maintenance Terminal Connections - SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet ..... 200 IO-9 Call Announce Port Installation ..................................... 200 1O-l 7 Night Bell With Auxiliary Relay ..................................... 200 1O-21 Control Cabinet Wiih Digital Peripheral Shelf (456-part Configuration) ...... 200 A-7 Rear view of 456-par-t Control Cabinet - Signal Cables .................. 200 A-8 Digital Interface Card ............................................. 200 A-14 Location of PCM Cables .......................................... 200 A-15 CO Trunk Card (Types -Oll/lll) 200 A-17 ................................... CO Trunk Card (Type -211/311) .................................... 200 A-18 Trunk Busy Switch Settings ........................................ 200 A-22 High Impedance Switch Settings (Type -211/311 CO Trunk Card) .......... 200 A-22 E&MTrunkCard ................................................ 200 A-23 Trunk Busy Switch Settings ........................................ 200 A-26 Trunk Control Switch Settings ...................................... 200 A-26 DID/Tie Trunk Card .............................................. 200 A-27 Trunk Busy Switch Settings ........................................ 200 A-29 Trunk Control Switch Settings ...................................... 200 A-30 List of Tables - Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table l-l i-2 2-l 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 lnstallationlnformation ............................................ MITEL Referenced Documents ..................................... Bay Combinations of the 336-part SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ............... Equipment Installed in Variations of the 336-par-t PABX .................. Equipment Part Numbers ......................................... Charts to Follow to Install the 336-par-t System ......................... Bay Combinations of the 672-par-t SX-200 Digital PABX ................. Equipment Installed in Variations of the 672-part PABX .................. Equipment Part Numbers .......................................... Charts To Follow To Install The SX-200 Digital PABX in 672-port Configuration Equipment Installed in SX-200 FD PABX ............................. 9109-09&20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 ,200 ,200 ,200 .200 ,200 .200 .200 ,200 ,200 200 ,200 l-3 l-9 2-l 2-l 2-4 2-9 2-l 0 2-11 2-15 2-20 2-22 ix Installation Information Table 2-l 0 Equipment Part Numbers Table 2-l 1 .......................................... Charts to Follow to Install the SX-200 FD System Table 6-l Control Resource Card Switch Settings Table 7-l SX-200 Table 8-l Module Power Rating 200 2-24 ................................ FD System Fail Transfer (SFIJ Connector 200 6-11 Pin-Cuts ............... Table 8-3 .......................................... Music on Hold/Paging Module Specifications ............................ E & M Trunk Module Switch Settings .................................. Table 9-l - Fiber Link Specifications Table 1 O-l Equipment Table 1 O-2 MITEL Peripheral Table 1 O-3 Maintenance Panel W-232 Table 1 O-4 Maintenance Panel RS-232 Connector Table 1 O-5 SX-200 FD Printer Port Pinout Table II-I CableTerminations Table 8-2 200 2-26 ....................... and Requirements 200 7-9 .' ... 200 8-6 200 8-6 ............................ 200 9-l Installed in Variations of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ............. Equipment ..................................... Connector Pins at DTE Port .................. Pins at DCE Port 200 8-l ................. ..................................... 200 1 O-l : .. 200 IO-3 200 1 O-5 ,200 1 O-II .200 1 O-15 200 II-I Table II-2 ................................................ Digital Bay Tip and Ring Assignments ............................... .200 II-2 Table II-3 Tip and Ring Assignments .200 1l-4 Table II-4 Tipand for Universal Card Modules ................... 200 116 Table II-6 RingAssignments .......................................... 6-circuit PFT Card Tip and Ring Assignments ........................... 12-circuit PFT Card lip and Ring Assignments .......................... Table II-7 Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments ................................ 200 II-12 Table II-8 Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments ................................ 200 II-14 Table II-5 200 1l-8 200 II-IO Table II-9 Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments ............................... ,200 1l-l 6 Table II-IO Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments ............................... .200 II-18 Table II-II Interconnect .200 II-20 Table II-12 USOC Connector .200 II-22 Table Al-l Upgrade Procedures .200 A-2 Table Al-2 Table A2-1 336 .200 . ,200 A-2 A-4 Table A2-2 Trunk Busy Switch Settings Card Tip and Ring Assignments Pin Designations .......................... .................................. ............................................. to 672-par-t Upgrade Kit Part Numbers ........................... Charts to Follow to Upgrade an SX-200 PABX to an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ,200 A-21 TableA ........................................ Settings for Switches A and B ...................................... .200 A-30 Table B-l Loop Lengths for Digital Peripheral .200 B-2 Devices ........................... List of Charts Chart l-l Chart l-2 How to Use This Practice 200 l-6 200 l-7 Chart l-3 HowtoFillOutaRepairTag Chart 2-l Prepare For Installation Chart 3-l Unpack and Inspect an SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet Chart 3-2 Install an SX-200DlGlTALControl Chart 3-3 Unpack and Inspect an SX-200 FD Control Node Cabinet X 200 l-5 ......................................... How to Use an Installation Chart .................................... ....................................... .......................................... Cabinet 200 2-28 ................ ........................... Revision 0 200 3-l 200 3-4 ................ 9109-096-20O-NA 200 3-8 Issue 1 Table of Contents Chart 34 Chart 3-5 Chart 3-6 Chart 3-7 Chart 3-8 Chart 3-9 Chart 3-l 0 Chart 3-l 1 Chart 4-l Chart 4-2 Chart 5-l Chart 5-2 Chart 6-l Chart 6-2 Chart 6-3 Chart 6-4 Chart 6-5 Chart 6-6 Chart 6-7 Chart 6-8 Chart 6-9 Chart 7-l Chart 7-2 Chart 8-l Chart 8-2 Chart 8-3 Chart 8-4 Chart 9-l Chart 9-2 Chart 9-3 Chart 9-4 _ Chatt9-5 Chart 9-6 Chart 9-7 Chart 9-8 Chart 1O-l Chart 1O-2 Chart 1O-3 Chart 1 O-4 Chart IO-!5 Chart IO-6 Chart 1 O-7 Chart 1 O-8 Open and Close SX-200 FD Cabinet Front Door ....................... Install an SX-200 FD PABX Control Node Cabinet ...................... Install Second FIM Carrier in SX-200 FD Control Node .................. Unpack and Inspect 672-Port Peripheral Cabinet ...................... Install 672-Port Digital Peripheral Cabinet ............................ Unpack and Inspect an SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet .................. Install an SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet ............................. VeriiGroundConnections ........................................ Install Digital Peripheral Bay with Shelf ............................... Install Digital Peripheral Bay without Shelf ............................. Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards ............................. Remove and Return Printed Circuit Cards ............................ Install The Main Control Card ...................................... Remove a Module from the Main Control Card ........................ Install Switch Matrii Card in a 672-par-t Control Cabinet ................. Install Control Resource Card in the SX-200 FD Control Node ............ Install Fiber Interface Modules in the SX-200 FD Control Node ............ Install Floppy Disk Drives in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ................. InstallBayPowerSupply .......................................... Install a Bay Control Card ......................................... Install Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM in an SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet . . Install Power Fail Transfer Card in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ............ Connect System Fail Transfer to the SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet ........ Install Universal Card and Modules .................................. Install Line or DID Trunk Cards ..................................... Install LS/GS Trunk Card ......................................... Install aTl-DSl Trunk Card ....................................... Connect Optical Fiber Cables Between Nodes ......................... Connect Cables Between PABX and Cross-Connect Field ............... Power Up Control Cabinet ......................................... Power Up Peripheral Cabinet ...................................... Install Diskettes Into Disk Drives on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ........... Install Diskettes Into Disk Drives on the SX-200 FD PABX ............... Check System Initialization ........................................ RemoveDiskettefromDiskDrive ................................... InstallaLocalMaintenanceterminal ................................. Install a Remote Maintenance Terminal .............................. Install an LCD Console as a Maintenance Console ..................... Install a SUPERCONSOLE 7000 Attendant Console as a Maintenance Console Install a System Printer ........................................... Install Call Announce Port on a SUPERSET 4 Telephone ................ lnstallNightBell(DirectConnect) ................................... Install Night Bell (Auxiliary Relay) .................................. 9109-096--20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 3-9 200 3-10 200 3-13 200 3-l 7 200 3-19 200 3-23 200 3-24 200 3-27 200 4-3 200 4-8 200 5-2 200 55 200 6-2 200 6-9 200 6-l 0 200 6-11 200 6-12 200 6-13 200 6-16 200 6-18 200 6-20 200 7-2 200 7-8 200 8-3 200 8-8 200 8-9 200 8-11 200 9-2 200 9-4 200 9-8 200 9-9 200 9-10 200 9-12 200 9-13 2009-14 200 IO-4 200 10-I 0 200 1 O-l 2 200 1 O-l 3 200 1 O-15 200 1 O-l 6 200 l&l9 200 IO-20 xi Installation Information Chart Chart Chart Chart Chart Chart Chart Chart Chart Chart Chart Chart Chart xii 1 O-9 1 &l 0 1 &ll A2-1 A2-2 A23 A2-4 A2i5 A2-6 A2:7 A2-8 A2-9 A3-1 Install Paging Equipment .......................................... 200 1 O-22 Install Music On Hold Equipment ................................... 200 1 O-23 Install Alternate Music Source -Automatic Call Distribution Only .......... 200 l&24 Label Bays and Relocate Ground 200 A-6 .................................. Identify Analog Card Locations ..................................... 200 A-l 0 Install aTl-DSl Trunk Card in the Upgraded SX-200 DIGITAL PABX ...... 200 A-12 Install Digital Interface Card ....................................... 200 A-13 Install Analog Peripheral Cards .................................... 200 A-l 6 Install CO Trunk Card ............................................ 200 A-l 6 Install E&M Trunk Card ....................................... .I . 200 A-24 Install DID/Tie Trunk Card ........................................ 200 A-28 Reconfigure SX-,200 PABX Cabinet as Peripheral Cabinet ............... 200 A-32 Upgrade a 336-part Basic System to a 672-port System ................. 200 A-35 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 1. INTRODUCTION Installation Information ..- 1.I\ Intent of this Document This practice describes the installation procedures for all configurations of the SX-2008 DIGITAL PABX and the MITEL peripheral equipment designed to be used with it. Intended Audience: MITEL-trained installation and maintenance technicians. SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Configurations The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is available in 336port, 456port, and 672-port configurations. Each configuration of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is installed by adding peripheral bay expansion kits to a basic system. The functionality of each configuration depends on the number and type of peripheral cards installed in each peripheral bay. The Basic System: The basic SX-200 DIGITAL system consists of a control cabinet containing a control shelf with two digital bays, which hold control cards and peripheral (line and trunk) cards for the PABX. Expansion Kits: Additional bays can be added to the basic system, either at the time the basic system is installed, or at any time the customer wants to enhance operational capabilities. These additional bays are shipped as expansion kits, and are added to the original control cabinet, or are installed in a second cabinet called a peripheral cabinet. Basic System and Expansion Kits Configuration Basic system plus two digital peripheral bays Fully configured 336-pat-t system Basic system plus one digital peripheral bay in the control cabinet; two analog peripheral bays in the peripheral cabinet Fully configured 456-par-t system Basic 672-portsystem plus three digital bays in the control cabinet; four digital peripheral bays in the peripheral cabinet Fully configured 672-port system The basic system and the expansion kits come with the necessary control cards, cabling, and hardware. Line and trunk cards, software, and peripherals are not included with the expansion kits, and are shipped separately. Available expansion kits, cards, and peripherals are defined in Practice 9109-096-355-NA; Field-Replaceable Units. 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 l-l installation Information SX-200 FD PABX Configurations The SX-ZOOFD PABX is available in 96port to 672-par-t configurations. The basic 96port configuration of the SX-200 FD PABX can be expanded up to 672 ports by adding peripheral digital bays, housed in separate cabinets, to the basic system of one control cabinet and one peripheral bay cabinet. The functionality of each configuration depends on the number and type of peripheral cards installed in each peripheral bay. _’ The Basic System: The basic SX-200 FD system is a 96port configuration. It consists of a Control Node, containing the digital control cards and 2 floppy disk drives, and a Peripheral Node, which consists of 1 digital bay for up to 8 peripheral cards. Optical fiber cabling between cabinets allows the Peripheral Node to be located up to \I km away from the Control Node. System Expansion: The system may be expanded by adding Peripheral Nodes, to a maximum of 7 Peripheral Nodes. Each Peripheral Node is a 96-part digital bay. Additional bays can be added to the basic system, either at the time the basic system is installed, or at any time the customer wants to enhance operational capabilities. Peripheral Devices, Sofhware and Documentation Peripheral Cards: Peripheral cards are either line cards (cards that provide lines for telephones or other peripherals) or trunk cards (cards that interface the PABX to the telephone company.) These cards are either analog (voice-only) or digital (voice and data) peripheral cards, depending on the type of bay kit installed. The number and type of line and trunk cards vary with the operational requirements of the customer’s system. Sofhnrare: This document describes the installation of all configurations with Generic 1001,1002,1003,1004, or 1005 software. The software is provided on floppy diskettes. Spare diskettes are available. Peripheral Equipment: All configurations FD PABX support datasets. However, software. of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX and SX-200 such MITEL peripheral devices as consoles, telephones, and datasets are not supported with Generic 1005 FPKGI or LIT96 Documentation: I A set of MITEL Technical Practices is delivered 1001, 1002,1003, 1004, or 1005 software; a list of these documents Index at the front of this binder. with the Generic is in the Practices Summary of Practice Contents Practice 9109-096200-NA; Installation Information, provides installation procedures for the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX and SX-200 FD PABX configurations (basic systems, expansion kits, line and trunk cards, and software), and peripherals as shown in Table l-l. 200 l-2 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Introduction Table l-l Installation Information Part Title Contents Part 2 Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems Equipment Part Numbers and outlines of installation procedures for: -the 336-par-t SX-200 DIGITAL PABX -the 672-part SX-200 DIGITAL PABX - the SX-200 FD PABX Prepare for installation Part 3 Installing Cabinets Installation of: -the SX-200 DIGITAL Control cabinet - SX-200 DIGITAL Peripheral cabinet -the SX-200 FD Control cabinet - SX-200 FD Peripheral cabinet(s) Verify ground connections Part 4 Installing Digital Peripheral Bays in Cabinets (SX-200 DIGITAL PABX) Installation of: - digital peripheral shelf with bay - digital peripheral bay without shelf Part 5 Handling Printed Circuit Cards - Unpack and handle printed circuit cards - Remove and return printed circuit cards Part 6 Installing Digital Control Cards Installation of: -the Main Control Card and modules -the Switch Matrii Card (672-part configuration) -the Control Resource Card (SX-200 FD PABX) -the Fiber Interface Modules (SX-200 FD PABX) -the Floppy Disk Drive (SX-200 DIGITAL PABX) -the Bay Power Supply -the Bay Control Card -the Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM (SX-200 FD PABX) Part 7 Installing Power Fail Transfer Systems Installation of: - Power Fail Transfer Card (SX-200 DIGITAL PABX) - System Fail Transfer Unit (SX-200 FD PABXJ Part 8 Installing Digital Peripheral Cards Installation of: -the Universal Card -the ONS, OPS, COV and Digital Line Cards -the DID Trunk Card -the LS/GS Trunk Card -the Tl-DSl Trunk Card raqe 9109-096209-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 i OT z 200 l-3 Installation Information Table l-l Title Part Part 9 Installation Information (continued) Contents Bring System into Service - Connect Fiber Cables between Nodes (SX-200 FD PABX) - Connect cables between PABX and Crossconnect Field - Power Up Cabinets - Install Diskettes in Disk Drives -Check System Initialization Cabling and Cross Connections -Tip and Ring Assignments - PFT connections - external plug and jack connections connect field - interconnect card connections - USOC connector pin connections \ Part 10 Part 11 Installing Peripheral Appendix A Upgrading Equipment Installation of: -terminals - printers - call announce port for a SUPERSET telephone - night bells - paging equipment - music on hold equipment - alternate music source for ACD. Installed Systems Appendix B Peripheral Device Connection the Digital Line Card to the cross- 4 Upgrading: - an SX-200 PABX to a 456port SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. - a 336-par-t SX-200 DIGITAL PABX to a 672-part SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. to - Maximum loop lengths for peripheral device connection to the Digital Line Card Page 2 of 2 200 l-4 Revision 0 9109-09620&NA Issue 1 introduction How to Use this Practice Refer to the following charts for information 9 How to use this practice l l How to use installation on: to install the SX-200 charts DIGITAL PABX (Chart (Chart I-2). How to fill out the MITEL repair tag necessary when returning equipment received for the installation (Chart 1-3). Chart l-l Step l-i). defective How to Use This Practice Action or damaged ; Comments Install Equipment 1. Refer to the appropriate part of this document for the PABX configuration you are installing. ‘art 2: 336-port configuration ‘art 3: 672-port configuration ‘art 4: SX-200 FD system 2. Consult the tables at the beginning of each part. The tables tell you what equipment is to ,e installed, and the sequence in which :o install it. nstaiiation: Installation of one variant >f a PABX configuration, such as a aasic 336-pat-t PABX. Expansion: Change of an already nstalled PABX configuration from one variant to another, such as from a basic 336-port PABX to a fully configured 336-port PABX. 3. Perform the installation charts in the sequence given in the table. Install Peripheral 4. s Equipment When the cabinet(s) and circuit cards are installed, refer to practice 9109-096-l 26-NA, Peripheral Devices, for information on how to install optional equipment such as terminals, data sets, and modems. Cabling and Cross Connections 5. Go to Part 6 for information on tip and ring assignments, power fail transfer connections, backplane connector pinouts to the cross-connect field, interconnect card connections, and USOC connector pin designations. Upgrade 6. Older Equipment If you are upgrading equipment, such as an SX-200 PABX to an SX-200 DIGITAL 456-port PABX , or a 336-Port PABX to a 672-part PABX go to Appendix A for information. 9109-096-20O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 Upgrade: A change from one PABX configuration to another, such as a 336-port PABX to a 672-port PABX. 200 l-5 Installation Information How to Use an Installation Chart Refer to the following chart for information Parts 2 to 6 and Appendix A. Chart l-2 step on how to follow the installation How to Use an Installation charts Chart Comments Action Read The lnformatlon 1. Read the information chart. in r at the beginning of the This information includes: -A list of what you will accomplish when you complete the chart. - Information installing. about the item you are 2. Read the tasks outlined in the chart. The chart is divided into major activities called tasks. These tasks are the same as the list of what you will accomplish when you finish the chart. Tasks are identified by headings like this: Install Card. Tasks are not numbered. 3. Read the action and comments for each step before you do ft. The comments give extra information you need to complete the action. 4. If an action is in italics, perform the action only if it is necessary in your circumstances. These circumstances are usually stated in italics at the beginning of the action. For instance, If you are installing a COV card means “Perform this action only if you are installing a COV card. Otherwise, go on to the next step.” Complete The Actions 5. Follow the steps in sequence. 6. Do the action associated 7. When you are finished, go on to the next chart. 200 l-6 The steps are numbered beginning at 1. with each step. Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Introduction How to Complete a Repair Tag Each unpacked item should be inspected for damage. If an item is damaged, the MITEL repair tag should be filled out and attached to it. This makes sure that the item is set aside for repacking and return. Refer to Chart 13. Notes: 1. Any item that is damaged or faulty when you unpack it, or install it, must be returned with a properly filled out MITEL repair tag. See Figure l-l. 2. A repair tag is shipped with each item. 3. The more information that is provided on the tag, the easier it is to have the item repaired. Chart l-3 Step How to FM Out a Repalr Tag Comments Actlon W Out Repair Tag -ill in the information required on the front of the ag. Date: The date the item is being returned on. Location: Address of installation site. Company: Installing company name. Product Name: for instance, SX-200 DIGITAL System Serial Number: on the front of the cabinet. Software ID Generic: for example, Generic1 003 Software Revislon: for example, 336P/D66.6 SSep-1986 Assembly Number: the assembly part number of the item being returned (such as DTMF receiver module 9109416-000-4A.) Assembly Serlal Number: of the item being returned. This is a white sticker located on circuit cards. Alarm/Error Dlsplays: Any pertinent alarm or error displays such as alarm LEDs, seven-segment displays, console or maintenance terminal error messages, or maintenance log messages. Trouble Symptoms: A brief description of what happened. Failure Occurred: During Installation In Service Page 1 of 2 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 l-7 Installation Information Chart 13 How to Fill Out a Repair Tag (continued) Comments Step Action 2. Use the back of the tag for any other information that might be useful to the repair staff. 3.. -Attach the tag to the damaged or defective item. Page 2 of 2 1. Date: bmue 9.. Lo&ii Further 3 Details 3. Compmny: 4. Product Name a systonl sorid a solhim M0.z I I I I ID ewwic: Rovirion: 7. haombly No.: a Srlal Aaumbly 0. Alarm/Error I I I I I No.: Dbplrym: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I muIscc?lI/uY 11. Fdlun Dccurrod A) During B) In Bwvico lnrtallation 0 q CAUTIONi PLEASE ENSURE PCB ASSEMBLY RETURNED IN ANTISTATIC BAG. IS I CCOME Figure l-l 200 1-8 MITEL Repair Tag Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Introduction Prerequisites To Installation Never install telephone wiring during a lightning Never install telephone jacks in wet locations signed for wet locatlons. storm. unless the jack is specifically Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals has been disconnected at the network interface. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone unless the telephone lines. de- line ; Tools Needed 1.2 The SX-200 set of tools, DIGITAL PABX and SX-200 FD PABX can be installed with a standard Training Requirements Only those who have successfully completed a MITEL installation and maintenance training course for the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX should install an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. The same applies to the SX-200 FD PABX. Referenced Documents The MITEL documents that are referred Table l-2 to in this practice MITEL Referenced are listed in Table 1-2. Documents installation procedures for those 9109496-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 Installation Information _’ 200 l-10 Revision 0 9109-09620SNA Issue 1 2 ’ INSTALLING SX-200 DIGITAL AND SX-200 FD SYSTEMS Installing the 336-part SX4W DIGITAL PABX Introduction ’ 2.1 The SX-200 combinations. DIGITAL PABX in 336-port See Table 2-l. Table 2-l Bay Combinations configuration of the 336port Variation Basic 336-part can be installed bay SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Control Cabinet system in several Equipment 1Control shelf (Bays 1 and 2*) 336-pat-t system with digital peripheral Bay 3 Control shelf (Bays 1 and 2) and digital peripheral Bay 3 336-par-t system with digital peripheral Bays 3 and 4 Control shelf (Bays 1 and 2), digital peripheral Bav 3, and digital Peripheral Bav 4 * In the basic system, Bay 2 always contains cards. Bay 1 can be empty. The equipment to be installed to create the bay combinations DIGITAL PABX is shown in Table 2-2. Table 2-2 Equipment Basic 339por-t Installed in Variations of the 336-port of the 336-part SX-200 PABX system’. Control Cabinet Hardware - digital control shelf a maintenance panel a six-circuit Power Fail Transfer card Control cabinet shipped installed Digital Control Cards - Main Control Card -two Bay Power Supplies -two Floppy Disk Drives Page 1 of 2 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 2-l Installation information Table 2-2 Equipment Digital Peripheral Cards Add a digital peripheral Installed in Variations (continued) of the 33Cport Any of: - universal card and modules - ONS line card - OPS line card - COV line card - Digital Line Card - LWGS trunk card - DID trunk card - Tl-DSl trunk card r Bay 3*= Control Cabinet Hardware - one digital peripheral shelf - one digital backplane - one blanking panel Control Cards -one Bay Power Supply -one Bay Control Card Digital Peripheral PABX Cards Any of: - universal card and modules - ONS line card - OPS line card - COV line card - Digital Line Card - LS/GS trunk card - DID trunk card - Tl-DSl trunk card Add a digital peripheral Bay 43* Control Cabinet Hardware - one digital backplane Control Cards - one Bay Power Supply - one Bay Control Card Digital Peripheral Cards Any of: - universal card and modules - ONS line card - OPS line card - COV line card - Digital Line Card - LS/GS trunk card - DID trunk card - Tl -DSl trunk card Page 2 of 2 Notes: 1. The Control cabinet and the control cards make up the basic system.The basic system does not come equipped with digital peripheral cards. These cards are ordered separately and installed in the basic system to provide functionality. Table 2-3 shows the contents of the basic system. 2. The digital peripheral Bay 3 kii does not come equipped with digital peripheral cards. These cards are ordered separately and installed in the basic system to provide functionality. Table 2-3 shows the contents of the digital peripheral bay kit (with shelf). 3. The digital peripheral Bay 4 kii does not come equipped with digital peripheral cards. These cards are ordered separately and installed in the basic system to provide functionality. Table 2-3 shows the contents of the digital peripheral bay kii (without shelf). 200 2-2 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems Figure 2-1 shows a fully equipped 336-port SX-200 cards are identified as “voice or data” cards. DIGITAL PABX; digital peripheral VOICEI DATACARDS 6 CCT/CARDTRNK 12 CCT/CARDON PREMlSESTATION 12 CCf/CM DlGmALLINE 6 CCT CONTROL OVERVOlCE 6 CCT OFF PREMISESTAllON 6CCT DIRECTWARD DlAL TlIDSl TRUNK UNimAl. Figure 2-l 91 b-096-20O-NA Fully Equipped 336-port Configuration Issue 1 Revision 0 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX 200 2-3 Installation Information Equipment Part Numbers The part numbers of equipment to be installed DIGITAL PABX are shown in Table 23. Table 2-3 Equipment Equipment as the 336-part Basic System (United States) 91O9-OOO-OOOSA Basic System (Canada) 9109-000-011-NA SX-200 Part Numbers Part Number Name configuration Comments The basic system is made up of: . - Control cabinet - control shelf assembly - blank rear door with fans - maintenance panel - six-circuit PFT card - PFT cutover monitor cable - Main Control Card - DX module - Floppy Disk Drive - Bay Power Supply Cabinet and hardware Control cabinet with control shelf and maintenance panel. 9106-000-001-01 United States 9109-000-011-01 Canada 9106-000-005-01 230V Six-circuit Power Fail Transfer kit ( card and PFT cable) 9109-030-00O-SA One card shipped installed - LS/GS conversion module 9109-043-00OSA Six-circuit PFT card 9109-023-OOO-SA Digital control cards Main Control Card 9109~36-OOO-SA - Memory module Included with software 9109-002-003-SA 9109-002-005SA Without modules 2 Meg 4 Meg (needed for ACD, Generic 1004 and up) - DX module 9109-004-OOO-SA - Decryption module Included with software - Tl clock module 9109-060-00O-SA 9109-061 aOO-SA STFtAT 3 STRAT 4 Bay Power Supply 9109-006-00O-SA 115v 9109-006-002-NA 230V 9109-017-OOO-SA Bay Control Card Floppy Disk Drive: 5 l/4” 9109-124-OOOSA required for Generic 1001 - Generic 1004 software Page 1 of 5 200 2-4 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems Table 2-3 Equipment Part Numbers (continued) Equipment Name Part Number 3 l/2” 9109-l 25-OOO-SA Comments required for Generic 1005 software Digital peripheral cards --Receiver/relay module - Music on hold/pager module - Console module - Bay Control Card Page 2 of 5 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 Installation Information Table 23 Equipment Name Equipment Part Numbers (continued) Part Number Comments Softwan+ Generic 1001 software .’ 9108-518-001-SA Spare’system diskettes (Generic 1001 base) 9108-034-OOO-NA Generic 1002 software (base) 9109-5 18-l OOSA Spare system diskettes (Generic 1002 base) 9109-034-001 Generic 1003 software (base) 9109-518-3OO-SA Includes: - Generic 1003 software (base) - memory module - Decryption module - system documentation Generic 1003 software (ACD) 9109-518-31O-SA Includes: - Generic 1003 software (plus ACD) - 4 Meg memory module - Decryption module - system documentation (plus ACD) Generic 1003 software (base upgrade) without memory module 9109-51832O-SA Includes: - Generic 1003 software (base upgrade) - Decryption module - system documentation . Spare system diskettes 9109-034-301 Includes: - Generic 1001 software - memory module - Decryption module - system documentation Includes: - Generic 1002 software - memory module - Decryption module - system documentation -NA -NA (Generic 1003 base) Spare system diskettes (Generic 1003 plus ACD) 9109-034-302-NA Generic 1004 software (base) 9109-518-4OO-SA Includes: - Generic 1004 software (base) - 4 Meg memory module - Decryption module - system documentation Page 3 of 5 200 2-6 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing SX-200 Table 2-3 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems Equipment Part Numbers (continued) enenc 1004 software (plus ACD) ic 1004 software (plus MAI) - Generic 1004 software (plus ACD (ACD and MAI) ocumentation (plus ACD enetk 1005 software (plus ACD) - memory module - Decryption module -system documentation (plus ACD) Generic 1005 software (ACD) without memory module 9109-513-52O-SA Includes: - Generic 1005 software (plus ACD) - Decryption module - system documentation (plus ACD) Generic 1005 software (base) without memory module 9lO9-513-53o-sA Includes: - Generic 1005 software (base) - Decryption module - system documentation Page 4 of 5 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 2-7 Installation Information Table 2-3 Equipment Name Equipment Part Numbers (continued) Part Number Comments Generic 1005 software (MAI) 9109-51%54OSA Includes: - Generic 1005 software (plus MAI) - 4 Meg memory module - Decryption module - system documentation (plus MAI) Generic 1095 software (MAI and ACD) 9109-516-56OSA Includes: - Generic 1005 software (plus MAI and ACD) - 4 Meg memory module - Decryption module - system documentation (plus MAI and ACD) Spare system diskettes (Generic 1005 base) 9109-034-5OOSA Documentation*. System documentation 9109-035-004-NA Technical documentation with software - Included Page 5 of 5 Notes: 1. Part numbers for expansion kits are for ordering and shipping control (invoicing) only. The components of kks are shipped packaged separately. During unpacking and installation, the components of expansion kits can be identified by the component’s part number on each shipping container, not by the kit part number. 2. System software diskettes, Decryption module, kit. The documentation is packaged separately. software diskettes: it has no part number. 200 2-6 memory module, and documentation The Decryption module is packaged Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA are ordered as a with the system Issue 1 Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems Installation Charts Table 2-4 indicates which charts to follow system. in sequence to install: l a new basic 336-port (See Basic .) l a 336-port system with digital peripheral Bay 3. (See Add Bay 3;) l a 336-port system with digital peripheral Bay 4. (See Add Bay 4.) Table 2-4 Charts to Follow to Install the 336-part Activity Basic System Add Bay 3 Add Bay 4 Chart Prepare for Installation Prepare for Installation X X X Chart 2-1 Install Cabinet Unpack and Inspect Control Cabinet x Chart 3-l Install Control Cabinet X Chart 3-2 Verify Ground Connection X Chart 3-l 1 Install Digital Peripheral Bays in Cabinet Install Digital Peripheral Bay 3 Install Digital Peripheral Bay 4 Handle Prlnted X Chart 4-l X Chart 4-2 X Chart 5-l Circuit Cards Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards X Remove and Repack Printed Circuit Cards @ Install Dlgltal Control X Chart 5-2 Cards Install Power Fail Transfer Install Six-circuit Power Fail Transfer Card @ Chart 7-l Install Universal Card and Modules # Chart 8-l Install Line (ONS, OPS, COV, or Digital) and DID Trunk Cards # Chart 8-2 Install Digital Peripheral Cards Page 1 of 2 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 2-9 Installation Information Table 2-4 Charts to Follow to Install the 336-port (continued) Activity Basic System Add Bay 3 Add Bay 4 Chart Install LS/GS Trunk Card # # # Chart 6-3 Install ., Tl-DSl # # # Chart 6-4 Connect Cables Between System and Crossconnect Field X X X Chart 9-2 Control Cabinet Power On X X X Chart 9-3 Install Diskette(s) X X X Chart 9-5 Check System Initialization X X X Chart 9-7 Remove Diskette(s) @ @ @ Chart 9-6 Put System Trunk Card Into Service Into Disk Drive(s) From Disk Drive(s) Page 2 of 2 X means: @ means: # means: Dothischar Do this chart as required. Type and number of circuit cards to be installed vary according to customer requirements. Installing the 672-part SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Introduction 2.2 The SX-200 combinations. DIGITAL PABX in 672-port See Table 24. Table 2-5 Bay Combinations Variation Basic 672-part system Control configuration of the 672-part Cablnet Equlpment can be installed in several SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Peripheral Cablnet Equipment Control shelf (Bays 0 and 1) No peripheral cabinet 672 with digital peripheral Bay 2 and/or 3 Control shelf (Bays 0 and 1) and digital peripheral Bay 2 and/or 3 No peripheral cabinet 672 with dlgltal peripheral Bay 4 Control shelf (Bays 0 and 1) Digital peripheral Bay 4 672 with digital perlpheral Bay 2 and/or 3, dlgital peripheral Bay 4, and/or digital peripheral Bays 5,6,7. Control shelf (Bays 0 and I), and digital peripheral Bay 2 and/or 3 Digital peripheral Bay 4, and Bays 5, 6, and/or 7. 200 2-10 Revision 0 bay 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems The equipment to be installed to create the bay combinations configuration SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is shown in Table 2-6. Table 2-6 Basic 672-port Equipment Installed in Variations of the 672-part of the 672~~0r-t PABX system’. Control cabinet Hardware -digital control shelf - a maintenance panel - a six-circuit PFT card r - Control cabinet Hardware shipped installed in cabinet. - Bay 0 to Bay 1 PCM cable Digital Control Cards Bay 0: - Main Control Card - Switch Matrii Card - Bay Power Supply -Two Floppy Disk Drive(s) Bay 1: - Bay Power Supply - Bay Control Card Digital Peripheral Cards 4dd a digital peripheral Any of: - universal card and modules - ONS line card - OPS line card - COV line card - Digital Line Card - LS/GS trunk card -DID trunk card - Tl-DSl trunk card Bay 2/3l. y*. Control cabinet Hardware Bay 2: - one digital peripheral shelf - one digital backplane - Bay 0 to Bay 2 PCM cable - one blanking panel Bay 3: - one digital backplane - Bay 0 to Bay 3 PCM cable Digital Control Cards - one Bay Power Supply for each bay - one Bay Control Card for each bay Page 1 of 3 910949f%200-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 2-11 Installation Information Table 2-6 Equipment Installed In Variations (continued) Digital Peripheral Cards _‘. PABX Any of: - universal card and modules - ONS line card - OPS line card - COV line card - Digital Line Card - LWGS trunk card - DID trunk card -Tl-DSl trunk card .* \ Add a digital peripheral of the 672-part ; Bay 4/52- y3= Peripheral Cabinet Hardware Bay 4: - digital peripheral cabinet - 672-part intercabinet cable assembly - one digital peripheral shelf - one digital backplane - one six-circuit PFT card Hardware shipped installed in cabinet. Bay 5: - one digital backplane Digital Control Cards - one Bay Power Supply per bay - one Bay Control Card per bay Digital Peripheral Cards Any of: - universal card and modules - ONS line card - OPS line card - COV line card - Digital Line Card - LS/GS trunk card -DID trunk card - Tl-DSl trunk card Add a dlgltal peripheral Bay 6/72- g3- Peripheral Cabinet Hardware Bay 6: - one digital peripheral shelf - one digital backplane - one blanking panel Bay 7: - one digital backplane Page 2 of 3 200 2-12 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems Table 2-6 Equipment Installed in Varlatlons (continued) of the 672-part Control Cards - one Bay Power Supply per bay - one Bay Control Card per bay Digital Peripheral Cards Any of: - universal card and modules - ONS line card - OPS line card - COV line card - Digital Line Card - LS/GS trunk card - DID trunk card - Tl-DSl trunk card PABX ‘ Page 3 of 3 Notes: 1. The Control cabinet and the control cards make up the basic .system.The basic system does not come equipped with digital peripheral cards. These cards are installed in the basic system to provide functionality. The cards are ordered separately. Table 2-6 shows the contents of the basic system. Only control cards can be installed in Bay 0. 2. The digital are ordered peripheral separately. bay Idit (with shelf) does not come equipped with digital Table 2-3 shows the contents of the basic system. 3. The digital peripheral bay kii (without shelf) does not come cards are ordered separately. Table 2-6 shows the contents 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 peripheral equipped with digital of the basic system. peripheral cards. The cards. cards The 200 2-13 Installation Information Figure 2-2 shows a fully configured 672-pat-t SX-200 digital peripheral cards are identified as “voice/data” CONTROL CABINET DIGITAL cards. PABX. In this figure the PEFuPHERAlcAmEr VOlCE!DATACARB 384 PORTS 288 P0Flr.s Figure 2-2 Fully Configured 672-part SX-200 DIGITAL PABX 200 2-14 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue1 Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems Equipment Part Numbers The part numbers of equipment are shown in Table 2-7. to be installed Table 2-7 Equipment Equipment Name Basic System as the 672-port DIGITAL PABX Part Numbers Part Number 9109-000-002-SA 9109-00&003-BA 9109-000-012-NA SX-200 Comments (US) (23OV) (Canada) The basic system is made up of: - Control cabinet - control shelf assembly - blank rear door with fans - maintenance panel -six-circuit PFT card - PFT cutover monitor cable - Main Control Card - DX module - Switch Matrix Card - Bay Control Card - 2 Floppy Disk Drives - 2 Bay Power Supplies Cabinet hardware 4S/GS conversion module Dlgltal control cards Main Control Card 9109-036-OOOSA - Memory module Included with software 9109-002-003-SA 9109-002-005-SA -Decryption -Tl module Without modules 2 Meg 4 Meg (needed for ACD, Generic 1004 and up) Included with software clock module 9109-06O-OOOSA 9109-061-00O-SA STPAT 3 STPAT 4 Page 1 of 5 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 2-15 Installation Information Table 2-7 Equipment Part Numbers (continued) Equipment Name Bay Power Supply Bay Control Card Comments 9109-006-00O-SA 115v 9109-006-002-NA 230V 9109-017-OOO-SA Floppy Disk Drive: \ 5 l/4” 9109124-OOOSA required for Generic 1001 - Generic 1004 software 3 l/2” 9109125-OOOSA required for Generic 1005 software Switch Matrix Card Digital peripheral 9109-006-OOO-SA cards Universal Card -Receiver/relay Part Number 9109-005-OOO-SA module 9109-016-OOO-SA -Music on hold/pager module 9109-016-OOO-SA -Console 9109-025-OOO-SA module -E&M trunk module 9109-013-00OSA ONS line card 9109-010-00OSA COV line card 9109-020-00OSA OPS line card 9109-04O-OOOSA Digital Line Card 9109-012-00O-SA LS/GS trunk card 9109-011-001-SA DID trunk card 9109-031-OOOSA Digital Peripheral Without modules cabsnet and hardware Peripheral cabinet 9109-000-0O4-SA 9109-000-014-NA 9109-000-0045A 9109-000-014-NA 9109-000-004-BA (US) (Canada) (230 V) contains: - shelf and one backplane - blank rear door with fans - Bay Control Card - Bay Power Supply - Intercabinet cable assembly (672-part) (Canada) (230 V) 672 port Peripheral Cabinet 9109-000-004-01 for 672 port configurations (for use in United States) only 672 port Peripheral net 9109-000-014-00 for 672 port configurations (for use in Canada) only Cabi- Page 2 of 5 200 2-16 Revision 0 91 Om96-20O-NA Issue 1 lmII Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems Table 2-7 Equipment Part Numbers (continued) Equipment Name Part Number Comments 672 port Peripheral Cabinet 9109-000-004-02 for 672 port configurations - 240 volt only intercabinet cable assembly (672-part) 9109-026-OOO-NA for 672 port configurations only Six-circuit Power Fail Transfer kit (card and cable) 9109-03O-OOO-SA One card shipped installed 4S/GS conversion module 9109-043-OOO-SA Six-circuit PFT card 9109-023-OOOSA Shelf kits’ (with shelf) 230V Software2 Generic 1003 software (672 base) 9109-09620O-NA 9109-516-33OSA Issue 1 Includes: - Generic 1003 software - memory module - decryption module - system documentation Page 3 of 5 Revision 0 200 2-17 installation Information Table 2-7 Equipment Part Numbers (continued) Equipment Name Part Number Comments Generic 1003 software @CD) 9109-51834O-SA Includes: - Generic 1003 software - memory module - decryption module - system documentation Generic 1003 software (base upgrade) without memory module 9109-51835O-SA Spare system diskettes (base) 9109-034311-NA Spare system diskettes @CD) 9109-034-312-NA Generic 1004 software (672 base) 9109-518-40OSA Includes: - Generic 1004 software - 4 Meg memory module - decryption module - system documentation Generic 1004 software @CD) 9109-518-41O-SA Includes: - Generic 1004 software (ACD) - 4 Meg memory module - decryption module - system documentation Generic 1004 software (ACD) without memory module 9109-518-42OSA Includes: - Generic 1004 software (plus ACD) - Decryption module - system documentation (plus ACD) Generic 1004 software (MAI) 9109-518-44O-SA Includes: - Generic 1004 software (plus MAI) - 4 Meg memory module - Decryption module - system documentation (plus MAI) Generic 1004 software (ACD and MAI) 9109-518-46OSA Includes: - Generic 1004 software (plus ACD and MAI) - 4 Meg memory module - Decryption module - system documentation (plus ACD and MAI) Spare system diskettes (Generic 1004) 9109-034-40O-NA Includes: - Generic 1003 software upgrade) - decryption module - system documentation (ACD) ; (base Page 4 of 5 200 2-18 Revision 0 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems Table 2-7 Equipment Part Numbers (continued) - Generic 1005 software (plus ACD) (ACD) without memory module enehc 1005 software (base) module c 1005 software (plus MAI) 1005 software (plus MAI eg memory module - Decryption module - system documentation (plus MAI Documentation System documentation 9109-035-004-NA Technical documentation with software - included Page 5 of 5 Notes: 1. Part numbers for expansion kits are for ordering and shipping control (invoicing) only. The components of kii are shipped packaged separately. During unpacking and installation, the components of expansion kits can be identified by the component’s part number on each shipping container, not by the kit part number. 2. System software diskettes, decryption module, kit. The documentation is packaged separately. software diskettes: it has no part number. 910949&20O-NA Issue 1 memory module, and documentation The decryption module is packaged Revision 0 are ordered as a with the system 200 2-19 Installation Information Installation Charts Table 2-6 indicates a new digital digital digital digital digital Table 2-6 which charts to follow in sequence basic 672-part peripheral Bay peripheral Bay peripheral Bay peripheral Bay peripheral Bay system. 2. (See 3. (See 4. (See 5 or 7. 6. (See to install: (See Basic System column.) Add Bay 2 column.) Add Bay 3 column.) Add Bay 4 column.) (See Add Bay 5 or 7 column.) Add Bay 6 column.) Charts To Follow To Install The SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX in 672-part Actlvlty Basic Add Bay2 Add Bay3 Add Bay4 Add Bay 6or7 Configuration Add Bay 6 Chart Prepare for lnstallatlon Prepare for Installation X X Chart 2-1 Install Cabinets Install Digital Peripheral Bays In Cablnets Install Digital Peripheral Bay 2 (Bay with Shelf) X Install Digital Peripheral Bay 3 (Bay without Shelf) Chart 4-l X Chart 4-2 Install Digital Peripheral Bay 5 or 7 (Bay without Shelf) in Peripheral Cabinet X Install Digital Peripheral Bay 6 (Bay with Shelf) in Peripheral Cabinet Chart 4-2 X Chart 4-l Handle Prlnted Circuit Cards Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards X X X X X X Chart 5-l Remove and Repack Printed Circuit Cards X X X X X X Chart 5-2 Page 1 of 2 200 2-20 Revision 0 9109-096-20MVA Issue 1 Installing SX-,200 DIGITAL and SX-200 Table 2-6 Charts To Follow To Install The SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX in 672-part (continued) Activity Install Digital Control Basic Add Bay2 Add Bay3 Add Bay4 FD Systems Configuration Add Bay 5or7 Add Bay 6 Chart @ @ Chart 7-1 Cards Install Power Fail Transfer Install 6-circuit PFT Card I X means: @ means: # means: Do this chart. Do this chat-l as required. Type and number of circuit I cards 1 to be installed I vary according I to customer I I Page 2 of 2 requirements, .. 9109496-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 2-21 Installation Information Installing the SX-- FD PABX Introduction 2.3 . The SX-200 FIBER DISTRIBUTED (FD) PABX can be installed with up to seven 96-part peripheral bays. The basic system consists of one Control Node, containing all of the Control cards and disk drives, and a peripheral cabinet/bay containing a Bay Control card and all of the digital peripheral cards. Up to 7 peripheral bays can be installed in an SX-200 FD system. Fiber optic interconnection allows the peripheral bays to be distributed up to 1 km away from the Control Node. Theequipment to be installed to create the SX-200 FD system is shown in Table 2-9. ‘Some of the equipment listed as requiring installation may be shipped already installed. If that is the case, that equipment should be removed and reseated during the installation procedure. Table 2-9 Equipment Installed in SX-200 FD PABX >ontrol Node Shipped installed: - Power Supply Unit (PSU) -two 3 l/2” Floppy Disk Drives - 1 or 2 FIM Carriers - MCC Carrier - Control Node cabinet Requiring installation: - Main Control card - Switch Matrii Module - 4 Meg memory module - up to 7 Fiber Interface Modules (FIMs) - Control Resources card (CRC) ‘eripheral Shipped installed in each Peripheral Bay: - Peripheral Backplane - Peripheral cabinet Requiring installation in each Peripheral Bay: - Bay Control card - Peripheral FIM Carrier - one FIM - Bay Power Supply - up to 8 digital peripheral cards - System Fail Transfer (SFT) Unit Cabinet/Bay(s) Digital Peripheral Cards 200 2-22 Any of: - Universal card and modules - ONS line card - OPS line card - COV line card - Digital Line Card - LS/GS trunk card - DID trunk card - Tl-DSl trunk card Revision 0 9199-098-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems Figure 2-3 shows the SX-200 FD PABX Control Node and a peripheral bay. Figure 2-3 SX-200 FD PABX Control Node and Peripheral Bay 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 2-23 Installation Information Equipment Part Numbers The part numbers Table 2-10. of equipment Table 2-10 Equipment Name to be installed Equipment in the SX-200 FD PABX are shown Part Numbers Part Number Comments ; Cabinet and Hardware Control Node cabinet 9400-l 00-l 00-NA 9400-300302-NA Quad FIM Carrier Floppy Disk Drive 9400-300305-NA Peripheral Bay cabinet 940&l Peripheral FIM Carrier 9400-l 00-301 -NA Digital Control 00-l 1 O-NA Cards Main Control Card 9109-036-OO&SA Without modules - 4 Meg Memory module 9109-002~0~SA Included with software. See Note. - Switch Matrix module 9400-l 00-300-NA Included with software. See Note. - Decryption module - Tl clock module 9109-06O-OO&SA 9109-061-000-SA Power Supply Unit 9400-300-200-NA Control Resource Card 940&l Bay Power Supply 9109-006-OO&SA 115V 9 109-006-002-NA 230V 00-303-NA Bay Control Card 9 109-017-000-SA Fiber Interface Module 9400300301 Digltal Perlpheral -NA Cards 9109-005-00O-SA Universal Card - Receiver/relay STRAT 3 STRAT 4 module Without modules 9109-016-OOO-SA - Music on hold/pager module 9109-016-00OSA - Console module 9109-02!5-OOO-SA - E&M trunk module 9109-013-000-SA ONS line card COV line card 9109-OlmO&SA OPS line card 9109-04O-OOO-SA Digital Line Card 9 109-012-OOO-SA LS/GS trunk card 9109-011~01SA 9 109-02O-OO&SA Page 1 of 3 200 2-24 Revision 0 910m96-20O-NA Issue 1 in Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 Table 2-10 Equipment Name DID trunk card Software FD Systems Equipment Part Numbers (continued) Part Number Comments 9109-031-00&SA (see Note) - Generic 1005 software (base) - 4 Meg memory module . - Decryption module system documentation ic 1005 software (plus ACD) Nithout memory module - Generic 1005 software (plus MAI) - 4 Meg memory module - Decryption module - Generic 1005 software (plus ACD and - 4 Meg memory module - Decryption module - system documentation (plus ACD and (FPKG 1) - Generic 1005 software (LIT96) 9109-516-59O-SA Spare system diskettes (Generic 1005 base) 9109-034-50O-SA Generic 1005 software (FPKG 1) 4 Meg memory module Decryption module system documentation Includes: - Generic 1005 software (LIT96) - 4 Meg memory module - Decryption module - system documentation Pane . -a- 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 3 - nf-’ 3- 200 2-25 Installation Information Table 2-10 Equipment 1 Documentation I Name Equipment Part Numbers (continued) Part Number Comments (see Note) I System _’ documentation Technical documentation software - Included with I I Page 3 of 3 Note: System sofhwre diskettes, documentation is packaged bt has no part number. Decryption separately. module, memory The Decryption module, and documentation are ordered as a kii. The module is packaged with the system software diskettes: Installation Charts Table 2-l 1 indicates which charts to follow in sequence to install the SX-200 FD PABX. Table 2-11 Charts to Follow to Install the SX-200 FD System Activity Basic Chart X Chart 2-l Unpack and Inspect Control Node X Chart 33 Open and Close Node Front Door X Chart 3-4 Install Control Node X Chart 3-5 Install Second FIM Carrier @ Chart 3-6 Unpack and Inspect Peripheral Cabinet X Chart 3-9 Install Peripheral Cabinet X Chart 3-l 0 Verify Peripheral Ground Connection X Chart 3-l 1 Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards X Chart 4-l Remove and Repack Printed Circuit Cards @ Chart 4-2 Install the Main Control Card X Chart 6-l Remove a Module From the Main Control Card X Chart 6-2 Install Control Resource Card X Chart 6-4 Page 1 of 2 Prepare for Installation Prepare for Installation Install Cabinets Handle Prlnted Clrcult Cards Install Digital Control 200 2-26 Cards Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing SX-200 DIGITAL and SX-200 FD Systems Table 2-11 Charts to Follow to Install the SX-200 FD System (continued) Activlty Basic Chart Install Fiber Interface Modules in the Control Node X Chart 6-5 Install Bay Power Supply X Chart 6-7 Install Bay Control Card X Chart 6-8 Install Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM x . Chart 6-9 Install System Fall Transfer Connect System Fail Transfer Unit to Peripheral Cabinet @ Chart 7-2 Install Universal Card and Modules # Chart 8-l Install Line (ONS, OPS, COV, and Digital) and DID Trunk Cards # Chart 8-2 Install LS/GS Trunk Card # Chart 8-3 Install Tl-DSl # Chart 8-4 X Chart 9-l X Chart 9-2 Control Cabinet Power On X Chart 9-3 Peripheral Cabinet Power On X Chart 9-4 Install Diskettes Into Disk Drives X Chart 9-6 Check System Initialization X Chart 9-7 Remove Diskettes From Disk Drives @ Chart 9-8 Install Digital Perlpheral Put System Cards Trunk Card Into Service Connect Optical Fiber Cables between Nodes Connect Cables Between System and Cross-connect Field Page 2 of 2 X means: @ means: # means: 9109-996-2OO-NA Do this chart. Do this chart as required. Type and number of circuit Issue 1 cards to be installed vary Revision 0 according to customer requirements. 200 2-27 Installation Information Prepare for Installation 2.4 When you have completed Chart 2-l you will have: l Made sure the site survey information l Made sure the system l Assembled configuration the material information is available. you need for the installation. Chart 2-l Step is available. Prepare For Installation Comments Action Prepare For Installation 1. Make sure all stations, trunks, and other equipment to be connected to the system are identified This information is usually prepared by a customer service representative before installation begins Refer to System Configuration 2. Check that the quantities and types of printed circuit cards to be installed have been identified. Practice 9109-096-l 8O-NA ; Engineering Information, gives configuration rules 3. Make sure that stations and trunks are assigned to specific cards. This ensures proper handling and distribution of traffic. 4. Make sure cards are assigned to specific slots in the cabinet. Prepare Support 5. Material Make sure that all material required for the installation is available. 200 2-28 Revision 0 Such as telephone sets, cables, cross-connection blocks 9109-096-200-NA Issue 1 3 ’ INSTALLING CABINETS Install Control Cabinet Unpack and Inspect SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet 3.1. When you have completed \ l Chart 3-1: Other items will be set aside to be unpacked 0 The SX-200 9 Defective DIGITAL PABX Control items will be repacked Chart 3-l cabinet will be inspected and ready to install. for return. Unpack and Inspect an SX-ZOO DIGITAL Control Action Step Receive Control later. Cabinet Comments Cabinet 1. Identify the Control cabinet. The cabinet is shipped in a triwall :arton held by retaining straps. 2. Set aside all other packaged items for later unpacking and installation. Unpack - 3. Cut and remove retaining straps. 4. Open and remove triwall carton and other packing material. Shown in Figure 3-l. 6. Remove the cabinet from the shipping pallet. -oam pads are glued to the pallet mder the cabinet. 6. Remove the plastic sheet from the cabinet. ‘acking material should be kept until :abinet is inspected, in case it must )e returned. Inspect Control Cablnet 7. Remove keys.osition. 3ptical fiber cabling allows a peripheral :abinet to be located up to 1 km away from he Control Node. Equipment Location: The location MUST be: - Dry, clean, well ventilated - Well lit - Readily accessible The location MUST NOT be: - Near a sprinkler, sweating pipes, steam pipes, or steam vents. - In temperatures less than 0” C or greater than 40” C (32” F to 104” F). - Near corrosive fumes or machinery exhaust. - Near a copying machine or power transformer. Minimum 3 m (10 ft) from a copying machine without a filtering system. It is recommended that: - all trunking connections be placed in one peripheral cabinet -that cabinet be located next to the cross-connect block. 2. flake sure there is adequate room for access and cabinet ventilation. The rear and sides of the cabinet must be unobstructed and not too close to a wall or other equipment so that the air vents are clear. 3. Vlake sure it is within reach of the ac .eceptacle. The plug should be accessible enough so you can unplug the cabinet for maintenance. However, you shouldn’t be able to unplug the cabinet accidentally. Step Do&ion Cablnet - Page 1 of 2 200 3-24 Revision 0 9109-096-2007NA Issue 1 EnII Installing Cabinets Chart 3-10 install an SX-200 FD Peripheral (continued) Action Step Cabinet Comments Check Power Requirements - Sys tern Power Requirements: The power requirements of the SX-200 FD system are as follows: - The cabinets of an SX-200 FD system may share a branch circuit dedicated to that one system only. - Each receptacle of the branch circuit should have ratings of 120 V, 60 Hz, 15 A (or 230 V, 50 Hz, 8 A circuit for 230V systems). - More than one receptacle may be installed on the branch circuit if more power rating or plugs are required. - If the total power requirements of the entire system exceed the rating of one branch circuit, individual dedicated branch circuits may be installed per cabinet. Cabinet Power Requirements: Each cabinet has a line cord with a threr+prong plug. There must be one single-phase power receptacle for each cabinet, as follows: - The power receptacle must be a three-wire type, with the ground wire connected to the ground of the electrical system. - There must be no attempt to defeat the grounding conductor. - The power receptacle must not be controlled by a switch. 4. >heck the power and power receptacles jrovided. 5. Utach a warning tag to the plug end of the lower cord to prevent its accidental .emoval . Page 2 of 2 .. ‘,- . . 9109-09&200-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 3-25 Installation Information _’ J 1 Figure 3-9 SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet 200 3-26 Revision 0 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Installing Cabinets Verity Ground Connections 3.3 When l l l l \ l you have completed Ground requirements Chart 3-11: will be checked. Voltage and resistance acceptable limits. between the ground On the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, the ground stud in the Control cabinet. lug and the ground wire will be connected In the 672-port configuration with a peripheral netted to the common stud in both cabinets. cabinet, to the common the ground wire will be con- On the SX-200FD PABX, the ground wire will be connected terminal in the peripheral cabinet. Notes: wire will be within to the common ground 1. Before installation, an insulated #6 AWG green ground wire must be connected between the equipment location and an approved ground (metallic cold water pipe where it enters the building, or equivalent). 2. SX-200 FD PABX: A ground connection to the Peripheral cabinet is only required for Outside Plant Interfaces (i.e., trunks, OPS lines). Cabinets supporting only on-premise equipment do not require #6 ground wire. Chart 3-11 Verify Ground Step Action Check Ground 1. - Connections Comments Requirements Make sure ground requirements have been met. The ground wire shall be installed in accordance with national and local regulations and/or regulations of other authorities having jurisdiction. References: United States of America: NEC - NFPA/ANSI 70 National Electrical Code Article 250 Canada: CEC - CSA C22.1 - Canadian Electrical Code, Section 10. All Systems: All circuit commons in the cabinet, and all system hardware, must deriie ground from a single ground concentration point in one of the cabinets. This point must derive ground from a cold water pipe or other equally grounded point, using a #6 AWG insulated green wire connected directly to both points only. The cabinet and associated ducting hardware must not be exposed to any ground source other than that described above. AC service wires bringing ac to the cabinet must not share an enclosure or raceway with other system grounds, dc power distribution wires, or signaling wires. Page 1 of 3 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 3-27 Installation Information Chart 3-11 Verify Ground (continued) Connections Step Comments 411sources of external ground (eg, system signaling ground to the approved ground source) must :onnect only to the system single ooint ground. SX-200 DIGITAL PABX: . 4 separate grounding conductor [minimum size 14 AWG) must be run ‘ram the system single point ground to :he communications ground system on :he cross-connect field. 411doors, shelves, and similar assemblies are to be connected by straps to their designated connection >oints on the cabinet. Measure Voltage 2. SX-ZOO DIGITAL PABX: Turn off equipment circuit oreakers. 3. derii the wiring of the ac outlet. Jse a locally approved plugin circuit :ester, to confirm that the ground :onnection is good. 4. SX-200 FD PABX: If this is an SX-200 FD Control Vode, or peripheral cabinet with no Outside Plant nterfaces, no further ground verification is necessary. Proceed to the next cabinet in the system. 5. ‘lug the ac line cord into the building ac *eceptacle. Insure that the ac ground is good. 6. Measure the ac voltage between the PABX ground ug and the “approved” ground wire. The #6 AWG green ground wire should be connected to an approved ground but not to the PABX. 7. f the voltage is greater than 1 .O V, locate another approved ground. The customer’s engineering support group is responsible for providing the approved ground. 6. ,f the voltage is less than 1 .O V, measure the resistance. 9. If the resistance is greater than 5 ohms, take corrective action to reduce it to less than 5 ohms. - Resistance should be less than 5 ohms. The customer’s engineering support group is responsible for providing the approved ground. 10. Unplug ac line cord. Page 2 of 3 200 3-28 Revision 0 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Installing Cabinets Chart 3-11 Verify Ground (continued) step I Connect 11. Action Comments Ground SX-ZOO DIGITAL PABX: Connect the verified ground wire to the common ground stud in the cabinet. SX-200 FD PABX: Connect the veriied ground wire to the common ground terminal on the rear of the peripheral cabinet. Verify Ground Connection 12. Connections SX-200 Perform SX-200 cabinet, cabinet in All Cabinets DIGITAL 672-part configuration: steps 1. to 11. for each cabinet. FD PABX: Perform steps 1. to 3. for every and steps 5. to 11. for each peripheral with Outside Plant Interfaces. Page 3 of 3 9109496-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 3-29 200 3-30 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 .-... 4 I INSTALL DIGITAL PERIPHERAL BAYS IN SX-200 DIGITAL CABINETS Install Digital Peripheral Bay With Shelf ; 4.1 In the 336-par-t configuration, the first bay in the upper shelf of the Control Cabinet is Bay 3, and in the 672-port configuration, it is Bay 2. Chart 4-1 describes the installation of a Digital Peripheral Shelf with Bay in a 336-port configuration or a 672-par-t configuration. Where there are differences in the installation procedures it will be noted. In a 672-port configuration, a digital peripheral shelf with bay may also be installed in the peripheral cabinet. The Peripheral cabinet is delivered with the lower peripheral shelf and one bay (Bay 4) already installed. The following instructions apply to the installation of the upper peripheral shelf and Bay 6 in the peripheral cabinet. See Figure 3-6 for peripheral cabinet bay numbering. When you have completed Chart 4-1: The equipment to be installed as digital peripheral Bay 3 in the 336-part configuration, or Bay 2 or 6 in the 672-par-t configuration, will be inventoried, unpacked, and inspected. l 0 The Bay Control l The shelf and backplane Shelf grounds l l Card and the Bay Power Supply will be set aside, not unpacked. will be installed. will be connected. PCM cables will be connected. Note: The Digital Peripheral - Bay With Shelf kit contains: peripheral shelf digital peripheral backplane blanking panel PCM cable ground wires hardware kii bay control card bay power supply .: 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 4-l Installation Information I BLMWNG PANEL II iw I I II III II Figure 4-l 200 4-2 Installation of Digital Peripheral Shelf and Panel Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Install Digital Peripheral Bays in SX-200 DIGITAL Cabinets Chart 4-l Step install Digital Peripheral Bay with Shelf Action Comments Unpack, inspect \ 1. Check off received items against packing list and equipment list, above. 2. Do not unpack the Bay Control Card or the Bay Power Supply at this time. Set these boxes aside. 3. Unpack the remaining cartons. 4. Tag defective items. 5. Fill in the relevant portion of damage report. 0. Repack tagged items and return according to local procedures. Install Shelf 7. 3pen the front door of the Control (or Peripheral) cabinet. 0. Slide the digital peripheral shelf onto top of existing shelf, and fasten it to the front rails with eight 10-32 K 0.5 in. screws. Shown in Figure 4-l. 9. Install the blanking panel above the shelf, and fasten it to the front rails with two 10-32 x 0.5 in. screws. Shown in Figure 4-l. 10. Close the front door. Connect Shelf Ground Wires 11. Open the rear door. 12. Connect the ground wires from the new shelf to the cabinet frame using a l&32 x 0.5 in. screw and external tooth lock washer. Connect 13. 336-part Configuration: Details of ground connections are shown in IFigure 4-2. I672+101-t Configuration: Details of !ground connections are shown in IFigure 43, and Figure 4-4 for the IControl cabinet, and Figure 4-5 for 1the Peripheral cabinet. ! ICAUTION: The connector plug must Ibe positioned so the cable hangs Idownwards from it. If a connector Iplug is reversed, equipment function 1will be impaired. PCM Cables Control Cab/net: Connect PCM cable to J17A on the backplane of the control shelf, and J17A on the backplane of Bay 3 in the 336-part configuration, Bay 2 in the 672-part configuration. ,Shown in Figure 4-6 for the 336-pat-t configuration, and the 672-part iFigure 4-7 for Iconfiguration. Page 1 of 2 9109-09620WNA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 4-3 Installation Information Chart 4-l Install Digital Peripheral (continued) Comments Action Step Bay with Shelf Peripheral Cabinet: At the rear of the 672-part configuration peripheral cabinet, connect PCM cable to J17A on the backplane of Bay 6 and to J42B on the backplane of Bay 0, in the control cabinet. 14. Connect PCM ground leads to associated connectors. 15. Close rear door. Shown in Figure 4-6. PCM cables come from Bay 0 through the 672-part intercabinet cable assembly and are an integral part of the cabinet assembly. r Faston Page 2 of 2 Figure 4-2 Backplane and Cardfile Ground Connection Details (336-port configuration) 200 4-4 Revision 0 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Install Digital Peripheral Bays in SX-200 DIGITAL Cabinets LDuwAERm DNDUND WIRE ECCRCW EDD CDNNECTIDN EDD CMLE -11 II Figure 4-3 Backplane and Cardfile Ground Connection Details (672-po1t configuration) 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 44 Installation information w Do SHELF ..B:: . .:‘“I. Figure 4-4 Power and Grounding - 672-part Control Cabinet 200 4-6 Revision 0 9109-096-200-NA issue 1 Install Digital Peripheral Bays in SX-200 .. .... DIGITAL Cabinets ........ mNs E se. “-. mrlOASINST. ..“.n . .. ,. ...... .... . .. .... .. .... ........ . . .... .. .. .... .. ‘7 Do oRouNo mflEs -_ EW OROUND WIRES 0Ml.E hssEMaLv m-T) ~Ac-wwwLEs Figure 4-6 Power and Grounding - 672-port Peripheral Cabinet 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 4-7 Installation Information Install Digital Peripheral Bay without Shelf 4.2 _’ In the 336-port configuration, the second bay in the upper shelf of the Control Cabinet is Bay 4, and in the 672-port configuration, it is Bay 3. This bay is installed in a an already installed digital peripheral shelf. Chart 4-2 describes the installation of a Digital Peripheral Bay without a Shelf in a 336port configuration or a 672-port configuration. Where there are differences in the installation procedures it will be noted. In a 672-par-t configuration, a second bay may also be installed in either shelf of the peripheral cabinet. The following instructions apply to the installation of the Bay 5.(lower ,shelf) or Bay 7 (upper shelf) in the peripheral cabinet. See Figure 3-6 for peripheral cabinet bay numbering. When you have completed l Chart 4-2: The equipment to be installed as digital peripheral Bay 4 in the 336-part configuration or Bay 3,5 or 7 in the 672-part configuration, will be inventoried, unpacked, and inspected. l The Bay Control l The backplane, Card and Bay Power Supply will be set aside, not unpacked. shelf grounds, and PCM cables will be installed. Note: The Digital Peripheral Bay Without Shelf kit contains: - digital peripheral backplane - PCM cable - ground wires - hardware kit - Bay Control Card - Bay Power Supply Chart 4-2 Install Digital Peripheral Bay without Shelf I Step Actlon Inventory, Unpack, Comments Inspect Check off received items against packing list and equipment list, above. Do not unpack the Bay Control Card or the Bay Power Supply at this time. Set these boxes aside. Unpack remaining cartons, and tag defective items. Fill in relevant portion of damage report. Page 1 of 2 200 4-8 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Install Digital Peripheral Bays in SX-200 DIGITAL Cabinets Chart 4-2 Step 5. Action 6. Shelf Comments Backplane Attach backplane to cardfile with six screws, flat washers, and lock washers (as existing bay) Connect 7. Bay without Repack tagged items and return according to local procedures. Attach 6. Install Digital Peripheral (continued) The double tab Faston connector goes at the lower left corner instead of a flat washer. Ground Wlres Connect ground wires between bays, using hex nuts and split lock washers. 336port ConfiguratIon: Shown in Figure 4-2. 672-port Configuration: Shown in Figure 4-3, and Figure 4-4 for the Control cabinet and Figure 4-5 for the Peripheral cabinet. Connect CAUTION: The connector plug must be positioned so the cable hangs downwards from it. If a connector plug is reversed, equipment function will be impaired. PCM Cable 336port Configuration: Bay 4: At the rear of the cabinet, connect PCM cable from J17A of digital peripheral bay backplane to J17B on the control bay backplane. 672-part Configuration: Bay 3: At the rear of the Control cabinet, connect the Bay 3 PCM cable from J17A on the backplane of Bay 3 to J4OC on the backplane of Bay 0 (control bay backplane). Bay 5: At the rear of the Peripheral cabinet, connect the Bay 5 PCM cable from J17A on the backplane of Bay 5 to J42A on the backplane of Bay 0 in the Control cabinet. Bay 7: At the rear of the Peripheral cabinet, connect the Bay 7 PCM cable from J17A on the backplane of Bay 7 to J42C on the backplane of Bay 0 in the Control cabinet. 9. Connect the ground lead to the double tab Faston connector at the lower left corner of the backplane. 10. On the control shelf backplane, connect the PCM ground leads to nearby associated Faston connectors. 11. Close rear door. Shown in Figure 4-6. Shown in Figure 4-7. Shown in Figure 4-8. Shown in Figure 4-3. Page 2 of 2 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 4-9 installation Information ,. . ,. : MAlFmNANCE PANELAND CONNECTORS HwiNfss cc01u3Rz Figure 4-6 PCM Cables - 336-part Control Cabinet 200 4-10 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Install Digital Peripheral Bays in SX-200 DIGITAL Cabinets ‘PFT CARD ,BAY3 ‘PFrCARD PFT CARD 1 TO PERIPHERAL CABINET Figure 4-7 PCM Cables - 672-part Control Cabinet 9109-096-2OO-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 4-11 Installation Information PFr CARD BAY6 - BAY7 PFT CARD ‘Fr CARD BAY4 - eAY5 FFIOM CONTROL CABINET Figure 44 200 4-12 PCM Cables - 672-part Peripheral Cabinet Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 5 q HANDLING CARDS PRINTED CIRCUIT Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards 5.1 \ When you have completed Chart 5-1: l You will know how to unpack printed circuit cards safely. l You will know how to handle printed circuit cards without damaging them. Notes: 1. Circuit Cards in the 33&port Configuration: The basic 338-part system with Bay 2 has a Main Control Card, a Bay Power Supply, and a Floppy Disk Drive (drive A). Bay 2 has 4 digital peripheral cards (2 rows of 2). Digital peripheral Bay 1 has a Bay Power Supply and 8 digital peripheral cards (2 rows of 4). Bay 1 includes the second Floppy Disk Drive (drive B); however, this drive is powered by the Bay 2 Bay Power Supply. Digital peripheral Bay 3 has a Bay Control Card, a Bay Power Supply, and 8 digital peripheral cards (2 rows of 4). Digital peripheral Bay 4 has a Bay Control Card, a Bay Power Supply, and 8 digital peripheral cards (2 rows of 4). 2. Circuit Cards in the 672-port Configuration: Digital Bay 0 contains a Main Control Card, a Bay Control Card, a Bay Power Supply, a Switch Matrii Card, and 2 Floppy Disk Drives, but no peripheral cards. Digital Bays 1 to 7 each have a Bay Control Card, a Bay Power Supply, and up to 8 peripheral cards (2 rows of 4). 3. Circuit Cards in the SX-200 FD PABX: The SX-200 FD system Control Node has a Main Control Card with a 4 Meg memory module and a Switch Matrix module, a Control Resource Card, 2 Floppy Disk Drives, and up to 7 FIMs. The peripheral bay has a Bay Control Card, a Peripheral FIM Carrier, a FIM, a Bay Power Supply, and up to 8 digital peripheral cards. There may be up to 7 peripheral bays. 4. Circuit Card Packaging All printed circuit cards are packed separately. Each card is packed in an antistatic bag. Any accessories such as battery packs or hardware are packed in 9109-09%20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 5-l Installation Information zip-lock bags. The cards and accessories are packed in a cushioned box with the name of the card on it. Packaged cards are shipped in cartons, usually 5 or 10 to a carton. Packaging is shown in Figure 5-l. Read these Instructions carefully, and follow described in Chart 6-1 to Chart 84. Chart 5-l Unpack and Handle Printed them when performing Circuit Cards Action Step procedures Comments ’ When Unpacking 1. Make sure the PABX ground is connected. 2. Put on the antistatic wrist strap when unpacking and handling cards. The antistatic wrist strap must be connected to the PABX chassis, which must be connected to an approved ground to provide protection from static discharges. 3. Remove the card from its MITEL packing sleeve. The card is packed in an antistatic bag. 4. Momentarily touch the antistatic bag to a known good ground. 6. When you are ready to put the card in its slot, open the antistatic bag, and remove the card. The card should stay protected in the bag until it is installed. 6. Keep the sleeve, foam packing, and antistatic bag in case the card has to be returned. Shown in Figure 5-l. When Handling Cards 7. Handle printed circuit cards by their edges only, except when seating connectors. 6. Do not touch the gold edge connectors. 9. Avoid contact with any exposed electrical connections. Identifying - 10. Handling the card faces or components may cause damage. CAUTION: Do not install cards yet. Card installation is described in Chart 6-l to Chart 6-4. Digltal Card Posltions Identify the appropriate slots for digital control cards in the control shelf and the digital peripheral bay. The system configuration and/or the Tip and Ring forms identify which card type goes into each slot. Symbols on the face of each card show which slot it should be installed in. Control cards have symbols that match symbols on the appropriate slots in the Control cabinet. Main Control Card: star Bay Control Card: semicircle Bay Power Supply: right triangle Floppy Disk Drlve: equilateral triangle Switch Matrlx Card: equilateral triangle (672-part configuration only) Control Resource Card: (SX-200 FD system only) Page 1 of 200 5-2 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA 2 Issue 1 Handling Printed Circuit Cards Chart 5-l Step 11. Unpack and Handle Printed (continued) Action Circuit Cards Comments Identify the appropriate card slot for digital peripheral cards in the control shelf and the digital peripheral bay. Cards with a square on their faceplates are high-power digital peripheral cards and are installed only in upper slots: - COV Line card - OPS Line card - DID Line card ; - Universal card - Tl-DSl Trunk card Cards with a circle on their faceplates are low-power digital peripheral cards and are installed in upper or lower slots: - LS/GS Trunk card - Digital Line card - ONS Line card When installing 12. Cards CAUTION: Do not install cards yet. Card installation is described in Chart 6-l to Chart 8-4. If installing control cards, make sure power is off. If installing peripheral cards in an operating system, power may be left on. - CAUTION: Power must be off when inserting the Main Control Card, Switch Matrix Card, Control Resource Card, Bay Control Card, Bay Power Supply, and Floppy Disk Drive. The cards that must not be inserted while the system power is on carry a Caution notice. 13. Set switches on circuit cards requiring it. Instructions for setting switches are included in card installation charts for: - Main Control card - Control Resource card - Bay Control card - Universal card - Tl -DSl Trunk card 14. Lift the card extractor, and slide the card into the slot. Press on the extractor after it mates with the notch in the shelf to seat the card firmly. Each digital peripheral card has one card extractor. The extractor helps seat the card firmly in the backplane. The extractor is also used to provide leverage to pull the card free of the backplane connector. 15. When finished, replace the antistatic wrist strap in the cabinet. Page 2 of 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 2 200 5-3 installation Information Figure 5-I Printed Circuit Card Packaging 200 5-4 Revision 0 9109496-20O-NA Issue 1 Handling Printed Circuit Cards Remove 5.2 and Return Printed Circuit Cards When you have completed Chart 5-2: l You will know how to remove l You will know how to repack circuit cards from the PABX. printed circuit cards for return. Power must be off when the main control card, control resource card, switch matrix card, bay control card, bay power supply, and floppy disk drlve are being removed. jYGiiq Read these lnstructlons carefully, and follow described In Chart &l to Chart 8-4. them when performing Cards that are not correctly packed In antistatic returned will not be covered by any warranty- Chart 5-2 Remove and Return Printed Action Step Removlng I bags and foam packing when Circuit Cards Comments Cards CAUTION: The cards that must not be removed while the system power is on carry a Caution notice. These cards are: Maln Control Card, Control Resource Card, Switch Matrix Card, Bay Control Card, Bay Power Supply, and Floppy Disk Drlve. 1. If you are removing cards from an operating system, turn power off, if possible. 2. Make sure the PABX ground is connected. 3. Put on the antistatic wrist strap when removing and repacking cards. The antistatic wrist strap must be connected to the PABX chassis, which must be connected to an approved ground to provide protection from static discharges. 4. Remove the card by using the extractor as a lever and pulling the card towards you. Each digital peripheral card has one card extractor.The extractor helps seat the card firmly in the backplane. The extractor is used to provide leverage to pull the card free of the backplane connector. Repacking Packaging is shown in Figure 5-l. e ,- procedures Cards 5. Follow the steps in Chart 5-l to handle the cards properly. 6. Use the sleeve, foam packing, and antistatic bag kept after unpacking. The original, or similar, packaging material should be used. Page 1 of 2 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 5-5 installation Information Chart 5-2 Remove and Return Printed (continued) Step Action 7. Momentarily touch the antistatic bag to a known good ground, before putting a card into it. 8.. Put a card in an antistatic bag as soon as you remove it from its slot. Circuit Cards Comments Suspected faulty cards should be placed in antistatic bags to prevent krrther possible damage. CAUTION: Cards that are not correctly packed in antistatic bags and foam packing when returned will not be covered by any warranty. 9. 10. When you are finished, replace the antistatic wrist strap in the cabinet. If you have powered down the system, power it up again. Return Card 11. Return a damaged card according to local procedures. Page 2 of 2 200 !3-6 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA issue 1 6 ’ INSTALLING DIGITAL CONTROL CARDS Install the Main Control Card 6.1 \ The Main Control Card (MCC) controls PABX operation. It has a digital interface through the backplane to the cards in the control shelf, and through the PCM cables to each peripheral bay. It can control up to six B-oircuit PFT cards. When you have completed l The Main Control l The memory l The DX module l The Switch Chart 6-1: Card (MCC) will be unpacked module will be installed will be installed Matrix module 0 The Decryption module The Tl clock module l The MCC will be installed. Notes: on the MCC. on the MCC (33B-port will be installed will be installed l and inspected. will be installed configuration on the MCC (SX-200 only). FD system only). on the MCC. on the MCC (optional). 1.366+ort Configuration: The MCC is located in the control shelf in Bay 2. It is powered by the Bay 2 power supply unit. 2. 672~port 3. SX-200 Configuration: The MCC is located in the control shelf in Bay 0. FD PABX: The MCC is located in slot 1 of the Control Node. 4. The MCC contains alarm LEDs, a reset switch, and other system indicators. The MCC can carry up to four modules: Memory Module: has a dynamic RAM that system software and customer data resides on when the system is started. This module is provided with the system software diskettes. DX Module: the 336-port links incoming and outgoing channels. This module is only used in configuration. or Switch Matrix Module: links incoming and outgoing channels. This module is only used in the SX-200 FD system. Decryption Module: allows the loading of specific system software and customer data to the memory module. This module is provided with the system software diskettes. T7 CIock Modules synchronizes the system clock to incoming Tl trunks. It is only necessary if a Tl trunk is installed. 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 6-l Installation lnformatioin Remove conductive Main Control Card. articles Chart 6-I Step such as rings and watches install The Main Control Action before handling the Card Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general procedures for handling circuit zards. Unpack and inspect MCC 2. Wach the antistatic wrist strap. 3. Unpack the Main Control Card (MCC) from its MITEL packing box and antistatic bag, and inspect the MCC for damage. 4. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. 5. Put the MCC, component side up, onto the bag on top of the PABX or any nearby firm surface. Do not put it on a deformable surface. 6. 3iven in Chart 5-l and Chart s-2. Make sure that the jumpers (if applicable) are correctly positioned on the MCC and that the S3 switches are set to the OFF or OPEN position. CAUTION: The card may bend as 3ressure is applied to seat the zonnectors. Shown in Figure 6-l. Mote: Only Revision 3 and 4 MCCs -equire properly installed jumpers. There are no jumpers on Revision A v1CC.s. The revision number is Drinted on the card. Install Standoffs 7. Install the plastic standoffs on the MCC (where required to mate with the modules). Do not attempt to install standoffs into holes that are obstructed by components or wire. Install Memory - Shown in Figure 6-2. Module 6. Position the memory module over the J3 connector on the MCC. 9. Press its connector into place with the palm of your hand. 10. Press the standoffs into place. 11. Reseat the connector. install DX Module (336-part Configuration 12. Unpack the DX module. 13. Position the DX module over the Jl and J2 connectors on the MCC. Shown in Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3. only) Shown in Figure 6-2. Page 1 of 2 200 6-2 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing Digital Control Cards Chart 6-l Install The Main Control (continued) Actlon \ 14. Press its connector hand. 15. Press the standoffs into place. Install Switch only) FD System 16. Unpack the Switch Matrii module. 17. Position the Switch Matrii module over the Jl and J2 connectors on the MCC. 16. Press its connector hand. 19. Press the standoffs into place. Shown in Figure 6-4. into place with the palm of your Module 20. Unpack the Decryption module. t is packaged with the system software diskette. Each software -elease has a unique Decryption nodule. 21. Position the Decryption module over the J5 connector on the MCC. Shown in Figure f3-5. 22. Press its connector hand. There are no standoffs for it. into place with the palm of your Install Tl Clock Module - Comments into place with the palm of your Matrix Module (SX-200 Install Decryption Card (optlonal) This module is used only for Tl :runks, Generics1 003 and 1004. 23. At the top front of the card, locate connector J4. 24. Remove the jumper clip from within the connector. 25. Position the module over J4 and the standoff mounting holes. 26. Press into place with the palm of your hand. 27. Press standoffs into place. 26. Reseat the connectors. Shown in Figure 6-6. Install MCC 29. Slide the MCC into its slot. The MCC and its card slot are each narked with a star. Page 2 of 2 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 6-3 Installation lnformatioin Figure 6-I 200 6-4 Main Control Card Jumpers and Switches Revision 0 91094X-20kNA Issue 1 Installing Digital Control Cards ANWSTATIC WRIST ST DECRYPTIONMODULE \ J5 CCOlS4 Figure 6-2 Installation of Modules (336-part Configuration) .. 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 6-5 Installation lnformatioin J2 STAND-OFF WR!ST STRAP J5 CCOl39Rl Figure 6-3 Installation of Modules (672-port Configuration) SWrrCH M4TlUX MODULE J5 cc0181 Figure 6-4 Installation of Modules (SX-200 FD System) 200 6-6 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing Digital Control Cards \ DECRWllON MODULE Figure 6-5 Main Control Card and Decryption Module 9109-09&20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 6-7 Installation lnformatioin Figure 6-6 Installation of a Tl Clock Module onto an MCC 200 6-8 Revision 0 9109-096-2OCWA Issue 1 Installing Digital Control Cards Remove a Module from the Main Control Card When you have completed 6.2 l A module Chart 6-2: will be safely removed Remove conductive Main Control Card. articles from the MCC. such as rings and watches before handling the Do not use a screwdriver or any similar object to pry the modules away from the Main Control Card. Damage to components or circuit card tracks may result. Chart 6-2 Remove a Module from the Main Control Step Action Follow 1. Comments General Procedures Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. Remove Given in Chart 5-1 and Chart 5-2. the Module 2. Pop the module from the standoffs by applying pressure with your thumb onto the short portion of the standoff projecting through the hole in the module, while pinching with one or two fingers on the opposite side of the module right near the standoff, 3. Carefully separate the connectors by applying pressure at each end of connector. 4. Lift the module from the MCC. DO NOT BEND OR FLEX the module by pulling up on the corners. 9109-096-20SNA Card Issue 1 Revision 0 This “pinching action” avoids bending the circuit card any more than is necessary to release it from the standoff. 200 6-9 Installation lnformatioin Install Switch Matrix Card (672-porf Configuration) 6.3 The Switch Matrix Card is only installed When you have completed _’ in a 672-par-t Control cabinet. Chart 6-3: l The Switch Matrix l The Switch Matrix Card will be installed Notes: configuration Card (SMC) will be unpacked and inspected. in the Control cabinet. 1 .The SMC provides the DX switching matrix and the resources of the digital signal r processor. 2.The SMC takes the place of the DX module which is used on the MCC in the 336and 45f%port configurations. Chart 6-3 Install Switch Matrix Card ln a 672-port Step Actlon Control Cablnet Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general procedures cards. for handling circuit Siven in Chart 5-l and Chart 5-2. Unpack and Inspect 2. Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect the SMC. 3. Return damaged or defective items, and report missing items according to local procedures, Install Switch Matrlx Card 4. Slide the SMC into its slot in Bay 0. 200 6-10 The SMC and its slot are each narked with an equilateral triangle. Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing Digital Control Cards Install a Control Resource Card (SX-200 FD PABX) 6.4 The Control Resource Card (CRC) is only installed you have completed Chart 6-4: l The Control Resource l The CRC will be installed Card (CRC) will be unpacked in the SX-200 Remove conductive articles Control Resource Card. Chart 6-4 in the SX-200 install Control and inspected. FD PABX Control such as rings and watches Resource Node. before handling Card in the SX-2UO FD Control Action Step FD PABX. When the Node Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Given in Chart 3-4, Chart 5-l Chart 5-2. Follow the general procedures for opening the Control Node front door and handling circuit cards. Unpack and inspect and CRC 2. Attach the antistatic wrist strap. 3. Unpack the Control Resource Card (CRC) from its MITEL packing box and antistatic bag, and inspect the CRC for damage. 4. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. 5. Put the CRC, component side up, onto the bag on top of the PABX or any nearby firm surface. Do not put it on a deformable surface. CAUTION: The card may bend as pressure is applied to seat the connectors. install CRC 6. Set the 4 dip switches on the CRC faceplate as described for Forced Maintenance to Control in Table 6-l. The dip switches allow a maintenance person to switch connectivity to either the Control or Peripheral Cabinet. The default position is to the Control Cabinet. Slide the CRC into slot 2 of the Control Node. Table 6-l Control Resource Card Switch Settings Switch Settings Forced Maintenance to Control Forced Maintenance to Perioheral 9109~9&20O-NA Issue 1 Sl s2 s3 s4 Open or Closed Open Not Used Not Used Open Closed Not Used Not Used Revision 0 200 6-11 Installation lnformatioin Install Fiber Interface 6.5 Modules (SX-200 FD PABX) Fiber Interface Modules (FIMs) are only installed have completed Chart 6-5: . The Fiber Interface l Modules One FIM for each peripheral Node. (FIMs) will be unpacked bay will be installed Chart 6-5 Install Fiber Interface Step 1. Modules FD PABX. When you and inspected. in the SX-200 FD PABX Control in the SX-200 FD Control Action Follow in the SX-200 Node . Comments General Procedures Follow the general procedures for opening the Control Node front door and handling circuit cards. Unpack and Inspect Given in Chart 3-4, Chart 5-l and Chart 5-2. FIM 2. Attach the antistatic wrist strap. 3. Unpack the Fiber Interface Module (FIM) from its MITEL packing box and antistatic bag, and inspect the FIM for damage. 4. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. 5. Put the FIM, component side up, onto the bag on top of the PABX or any nearby firm surface. Do not put it on a deformable surface. CAUTION: The card may bend as pressure is applied to seat the connectors. Install FlMs In FIM Carrier - 6. On the rear of the Control Node, remove the filler plate from the FIM slot opening, by unscrewing the 2 screws holding it in place. 7. Slide the FIM into the empty slot to mount on the appropriate DIN connector on the FIM Carrier backplane. The screw holes on the FIM should align with the screw holes on the node rear panel. Fasten the faceplate to the panel using the screws removed in step 6. 200 6-12 Revision 0 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 installing Digital Control Cards Install Floppy Disk Drive Disk Drives must be installed in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX 336- and 672-port configurations. The SX-200 FD PABX has two 3 l/2” Floppy Disk Drives already installed in the Control Node. When you have completed Chart 6-6: 6.6 Floppy * The Floppy Disk Drive(s) will be unpacked 0 The Floppy Disk Drive(s) will be installed. Notes: and inspected. 1. The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX with Generic 1002,1003,1004, or 1005 software requires two disk drives (Generic 1001 software requires only Driie A in Bay 2). 2. One or two 5 l/4” floppy disk drives are required with Generic 1001 through 1004 software, and two 3 l/2” floppy disk drives are required for Generic 1005 software. The installation procedure for both disk drive types is the same, and they are installed in the same slots. 3.33~port Configuration: Disk drive A is installed in Bay 2. It receives power from the BPS in Bay 2. Disk drive B is installed in Bay 1. It also receives power from the BPS in Bay 2. 4.672-port Configuration: The Floppy Disk Drives are both installed in Bay 0, and powered from the Bay 0 Bay Power Supply. Chart 6-6 Install Floppy Disk Drives In the SX-200 DIGlTAL PABX Actlon Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general procedures cards. for handling circuit Given in Chart 5-l and Chart 5-2. Unpack and Inspect 2. - While wearing antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect disk drive(s). Shown in Figure 6-7 (5 l/4” drive) and Figure 6-8 (3 l/2” drive). Install Floppy Disk Drlve A 3. 333-part Configuraflon: slot in Bay 2. Install disk drive A into its 67Z-port Configuration: Install disk drive A into its slot in Bay 0 (right hand position). 4. The disk drive and its slot are each marked with an equilateral triangle. The disk driie plugs directly into the backplane. Secure it with its extractor and locking screw. Page 1 of 2 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 6-13 Installation lnformatioin Chart 6-6 Install Floppy Step Actlon Install Floppy 5. 6. Disk Drlves in the SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX (continued) 336-part Comments Disk Drlve B Configuration: install disk drive B (if present) in Bay 1. The disk drive and its slot are each marked with an equilateral triangle. 672-poff Configuration: Install disk drive A into its slot in Bay 0 (left hand position). The disk drive plugs directly into the backplane. Secure it with its extractor and locking screw. Page 2 of 2 Figure 200 6-14 6-7 5 l/4” Floppy Disk Drive (SX-200 Revision 0 DIGITAL PABX) 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing Digital Control Cards ,’ LATCH tws1a9-1 ZE-OOL? CC0170 Figure 6-8 3 112” Floppy Disk Drive (SX-200 DIGITAL PABX) 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 6-15 Installation lnformatioin Install Bay Power Supply 6.7 When l l l you have completed The Bay Power Supply Chart 6-7: (BPS) will be unpacked In the 336-pat-t configuration, the BPS will be installed digital peripheral Bays 3 and 4. In the 672-port configuration, the BPS will be installed in digital peripheral Bays 1 through 7. l tn the SX-200 l The power cable will be plugged \ and inspected. Notes: FD PABX, The BPS will be installed in the control shelf and in in the control bay (Bay 0) and in the each peripheral cabinet. into the unit. 1. The BPS is an ac-todc converter. The BPS faceplate is labeled “Bay PSU”. It has a ringing voltage generator used by the card slots it supports. There should be one BPS for each digital peripheral bay. 2. In the 336-port configuration, a BPS is not needed in Bay 1 when only a Floppy Disk Drive is installed in Bay 1. The Bay 1 Floppy Disk Drive is powered by the BPS in Bay 2. 3. In the SX-200 FD PABX, a BPS must be installed in each Peripheral BPS is not required in the Control Node. cabinet. A Chart 6-7 Install Bay Power Supply Step Action Follow 1. Comments General Procedures Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. Given in Chart 5-l and Chart 5-2. Unpack and Inspect - 2. Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect the BPS. 3. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. Page 1 of 2 200 6-16 Revision 0 9109-09620&NA Issue 1 Installing Digital Control Cards Chart &7 r. Install Bay Power Supply (contlntied) Step 4. Comments Insert the BPS into its slot, and tighten the :humbscrew at the upper front of the BPS to secure it to the cardfile. -he BPS and its slot are each narked with a right triangle. The slot s located in the upper right corner of rach bay. 136port Configuration: The first 3PS must be installed in Bay 2. If ny cards are to be installed in any bther digital bay, a BPS must also be nstalled in that bay. 572-part Configuration: The first 3PS must be installed in Bay 0. If my cards are to be installed in any lther digital bay, a BPS must also be nstalled in that bay. ix-200 FD PABX: A BPS must be nstalled in each peripheral bay. 5. Make sure that the BPS I/O (on/off) switch is in the 0 (off) position. 6. If this is an SX-200 FD system, then go to step 11. Route Power Cable - upper dlgltal bays 7. At rear of the cabinet, cut off the cable ties securing the power cable to the bottom of cabinet. 6. Route the power cable from ac distribution inside of the cardfile side plates. 9. Tie the power cable and the braided ground cable to the cardfile. . Connect IO. The power supply cables to the upper digital bays are long cables hat are coiled in the bottom of the :abinet. along the Power - upper and lower bays Connect the plug to the BPS. Route Power Cable - SX-200 FD PABX 11. Remove the cover plate from the internal ac power cord access cutout on the node backplate. 12. Plug the internal ac power cord into the back of the Bay Power Supply, directly under the access cutout. 13. Replace the access cover plate over the cutout and attach with the 2 screws removed in step 11. Page 2 of 2 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 6-17 Installation lnformatioin Install a Bay Control Card 6.8 When you have completed 9 The Bay Control l l _’ The Bay Control Card (BCC) will be unpacked Card will be installed In the SX-200 FD PABX, the Peripheral be installed on the Bay Control Card. Notes: \ Chart 6-8: and inspected. each peripheral bay. FIM Carrier and Fiber Interface Module will 1. A Bay Control Card performs such lower-level real-time control tasks for adigital peripheral bay as scanning for activity on ONS ports, controlling CO trunks and E&M trunks, tone cadencing, and communicating to consoles. 2. In the 336-part configuration, one BCC is installed in digital peripheral Bay 3, and one BCC is installed in digital peripheral Bay 4. 3. In the 672-part through 7. configuration, one BCC is installed in digital peripheral Bays 1 4. In the SX-200 FD PABX, one BCC is installed in each digital peripheral bay (1 through 7). Chart 6-8 Install a Bay Control Step Action Card Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. Siven in Chart 5-l and Chart 5-2. Unpack and Inspect - 2. Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect the BCC. 3. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. 4. Set all 4 switches (2 pairs) on the circuit card to the closed position, for normal operation. 5. If this is a 336-part step 7. or 6721301-t configuration, See Figure 6-9 for switch locations go to Install BCC In Digital Bays 6. SX-200 FD PABX: Install the Peripheral FIM Carrier and Fiber Interface Module on the BCC, as described in Chart 69. 7. Slide the BCC into its slot in each digital peripheral bay. 200 6-18 Revision 0 The BCC and its slot are each marked with a semicircle. 91094X%-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing Digital Control Cards Figure 6-9 Bay Control Card - Switch Locations 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 6-19 Installation lnformatioin Install Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM (SX-200 FD PABX) 6.9 A Peripheral FIM Carrier and a Fiber Interface Module SX-200 FD PABX. When you have completed Chart 6-9: l The Peripheral FIM Carrier l The Fiber Interface l The Bay Control Module will be installed on the Bay Control will be installed in the Peripheral Card will be ready to install in the peripheral Chart 6-9 Install Peripheral Step are only required Card. FIM Carrier. bay. FIM Carrier and FIM in an SX-200 FD Peripheral Actlon in the Cabinet Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general procedures for opening the cabinet front door and handling circuit cards. liven in Chart 34, md Chart 5-2. Chart 5-l Unpack and Inspect 2. Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect the Peripheral FIM Carrier and the Fiber Interface Module. 3. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. 4. Ensure that steps 1. through 3. of Chart 6-6 have been completed. Install Peripheral FIM Carrier on the BCC 5. Position the Peripheral FIM Carrier on the component side of the BCC so that the connectors are properly aligned. 6. Snap the Peripheral FIM Carrier into place on the BCC. Install Fiber Interface see Figure 6-l 0. Module Slide the FIM into the Peripheral FIM Carrier until it connects firmly with the DIN connector on the Carrier. ‘6. Fasten the FIM faceplate to the FIM Carrier with 2 screws. Connect Fiber Cable to FIM 9. Unstrap the 2 internal optical fiber cables from the inside panel of the Peripheral cabinet. Remove the protective caps from the cable connectors on the cables, and from the TX and RX connectors on the FIM faceplate. IO. Connect the internal optical fiber cable from the FIX connector on the cabinet backplate to the RX connector on the FIM faceplate, and the cable from the TX connector on the backplate to the TX connector on the FIM faceplate. 200 6-20 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing Digital Control Cards FIM FIBREOFW CANES PERIPHERALFIMCARRIER ccol67 Figure 6-10 Installation of the Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM on the BCC (SX-200 FD PABX) 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 6-21 installation 200 6-22 lnformatioin Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA issue 1 7. INSTALLING POWER FAIL TRANSFER Introduction 7.1 \ In the event of a temporary power failure to the PABX, certain station lines and central office trunks may be directly connected, so that some telephdne service can be maintained. In the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, this function is facilitated by the Power Fail Transfer card. In the SX-200 FD PABX, a System Fail Transfer Unit containing up to 5 System Fail Transfer cards serves the same purpose. Install Power Fail Transfer Card In SX-200 DIGITAL PABX 7.2 The Power Fail Transfer card is installed in an SX-200 DIGITAL the procedures outlined in Chart 7-l. When you have completed l A loop start/ground start (LS to GS) module Transfer (PFIJ card. will be installed PABX according Chart 7-1: on each Power to Fail 0 The PFT card(s) will be installed. 0 An alarm will be connected Notes: (optional). 1. The PFT card connects central office trunks to selected station lines when there is a power failure. Each PFT card can connect a maximum of six telephone lines to six trunk lines. Dial pulse trunks must connect to rotary dial telephones. DTMF trunks can connect to either DTMF or rotary dial telephones. 2. During a power failure, calls in progress are dropped. Calls made in PFT mode and in progress when the system returns to normal operation are not dropped and end normally when the call ends. 3. The PFT relays are controlled from Bay 2 in the 336port (control backplane) in the 672-part configuration. configuration, and Bay 0 4. The basic 336-par-t system is delivered with a six-circuit PFT card installed. Two more six-circuit PFT cards can be added in the Control cabinet. 5. The basic 672-part configuration with digital Bays 0 and 1 is delivered with one six-circuit PFT card installed. Two more cards may be added to the Control cabinet. The peripheral cabinet is delivered with one six-circuit PFT card installed. Two more cards may be added to the cabinet. The PFTs in the peripheral cabinet can be connected to the optional PFT alarm. 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 7-l Installation Information Chart 7-l install Power Fail Transfer Step Action Unpack, Comments inspect 1. Open rear door of cabinet. 2: Attach antistatic wrist strap. 3. Carefully unpack PFT card and LS/GS Conversion Module. install LS to GS Conversion 4. Card in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX 4 PFT card and LS/GS Conversiqn Module is shown in Figure 7-l. Module Position an LS to GS conversion module (as required) on each card and attach it to the standoffs with the screws supplied. install Card 5. Position the PFT card immediately under the already installed PFT card, line up with holes, and screw on with the two self-tapping screws. 6. Repeat to install a third PFT card (if required). Connect 7. Wiring Harness Shown in Figure 7-2. The PFT card is already installed. in ail Configurations Make sure the wiring harness from J13 of the control shelf backplane is connected to J3 of the upper PFT card. Shown in Figure 7-3 for the 336-pat-t Eonfiguration, and Figure 7-4 for the 672-port configuration. CAUTION: If installing PFT card in an operating system: Do not disconnect the connector from J13. This could sause damage while the system is powered up. - 6. Connect the wiring harness from J2 of the upper card to J3 of the second card. 9. Connect the wiring harness from J2 of the second card to J3 of the third card. 10. If this is a 336-part configuration, Connect Wiring Harness Configuration 11. 12. go to step 15. in 672-part Control Cab/net: Connect the PFT cable of the 672-part intercabinet cable assembly to J2 of the lower (third) PFT card in the Control cabinet. CAUTION: The PFT cable of the intercabinet assembly should not be connected to J2 if there are no PFT cards in the peripheral cabinet. Peripheral Cabinet: Connect the PFT cable of the 672-port intercabinet cable assembly to J2 of the upper (first) PFT card in the peripheral cabinet. Page 1 of 2 200 7-2 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing Power Fail Transfer Chart 7-l Install Power Fall Transfer Card in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (continued) Step Action 13. Connect the wiring harness from J2 of the upper card to J3 of the middle card (if present). 14. Connect the wiring harness from J2 of the upper card to J3 of the bottom card (ii present). Connect Optional Comments Alarm The PFT card supplies a closed contact signal when in PFT mode. \ 15. For the first (upper) PFT card: connect the ALARM pair TBlG?/red and TB14/black of the upper PFT card to the optional remote alarm (customersupplied). 16. For the remaining PFT cards: connect the ALARM pair from TBl-l/red and TBlXVblack the upper card to TBl-2/red and TB14/black respectively, of the card below it. Shown in Figure 7-3 for the 336-part configuration, and Figure 74 for the 672-port configuration. Maximum of contact ratings are: 11Ovac: 0.3 A 24 vdc: 1 .O A Page 2 of 2 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 7-3 installation Information I I POWERFAILTMNSFER CARD I 0 OPTIONU LSES CONVEIWON MODULEFOR PFT CARD Figure 7-l 200 7-4 PFT Card and LS-to-GS Revision 0 Module 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing Power Fail Transfer ‘I RIGHT H4ND SIDE OF CABINET (FROM REAR) I Figure 7-2 PFT Card Location in the Control Cabinet 9109-0962OO-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 7-5 Installation information I 10 TBi , -. I .“’ J13 I 25 PAIRCROSSXONNEl BLOCKAT MDF 25 PAlRCROS-CONNECl BLOCKATMDF 25 PAIRCROSSCONNECT BLOCKAT MDF CC0118 Figure 73 200 7-6 PFT Card Connections (33Gport Configuration) Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA issue 1 Installing Power Fail Transfer Figure 74 9109-096-20O-NA PFT Card Connections (672-port Configuration) Issue 1 Revision 0 200 7-7 installation Information Install System Fail Transfer Unit for SX-200 FD PABX 7.3 The System Fail Transfer Unit is installed for an SX-200 FD PABX according to the procedures outlined in Practice 9109-096-201 -NA. Each System Fail Transfer (SFT) card provides system fail transfer functionality for one peripheral cabinet. Up to 7 SFT cards may be installed, in as many SFT Units as required. The SFT unit connects central office trunks to selected station lines when there is a power failure. Calls in progress are dropped. Calls made in SFT mode and in progress when the system returns to normal operation are not dropped and end normally when the call ends. Dial pulse trunks must connect to rotary dial telephones. DTMF trunks can connect to either DTMF or rotary dial telephones. When you have completed Chart 7-2, each Peripheral card in the wall-mounted SFT Unit. The pinouts for the SFT Relay Connector Table 7-l. Notes: Cabinet will be cabled to an SFT on the Peripheral FIM Carrier are shown in 1. Up to 5 Peripheral bays can be connected to SFT cards in one SFT Unit; normally only one Peripheral bay of trunk cards is required. 2. Each SFT Unit contains a maximum of 5 SFT cards, each with 12 circuits. A maximum of 60 station lines can be directly connected to 60 trunk lines, provided there are 5 SFT cards installed and the appropriate number of trunk lines connected. Chart 7-2 Step Connect System Fail Transfer to the SX-200 FD Peripheral Action Comments Connect SFT Relay Cable to SFT Connector ripheral Backplate on Pe- 1. Set all zone switches on the SFT unit to 0. See Figure 7-5. 2. Plug the SFT relay cable from the MDF into the System Fail Transfer RJll modular jack on the lower Periphera cabinet backplate. See Figure 7-6. - Connect tor SFT Internal Cable to SFT Relay Connec- 3. Unstrap the internal SFT cable from the inside panel of the Peripheral cabinet. 4. Connect the internal SFT cable from the SFT Connector Assembly on the cabinet backplate, to the SFT Relay Connector on the bottom front of the Peripheral FIM Carrier. 200 7-8 Cabinet Revision 0 See Figure 7-7. Pinouts for the SFT Relay Connector shown in Table 7-l. 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Installing Power Fail Transfer CARD FACEPLATE (a) UNIT WITH COVER REMOVED FOR CLARITY BACKPlATE I CARD CAGE POWER CABLEGROUNDING STUDS STR4lN RELIEF FITI-INGS (b) CLOSED CONFIGURATION Figure 7-S System Fail Transfer Unit General view Table 7-l 9109-09&20O-NA SX-200 FD System Issue 1 Fail Transfer Revision 0 (SFT) Connector Pin-Outs Installation Information COMMUNICATIO SFT CONNECTOR SYSTEMGROUND LUG ccol7s Figure 7-6 200 7-10 SFT Connector on SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet Backplate Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA issue 1 Installing Power Fail Transfer n :: :d ;rI MAlNKNAtKiETERMlN4l FORT BAYCONrR0LCARD PERIPHERALFM CARRIER FIBERINIERFACEMODULE(FIMJ FM ‘XIRIW SFT RELAYCONNECTOR (CASLEDTOSFTCONNECTORASSEMBLY) SFT CONNECTORASSEMBLY Cal76 Figure 7-7 SFT Connectors in the SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet 9109-09&20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 7-11 Installation Information 200 7-12 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 8 ’ INSTALL DIGITAL PERIPHERAL CARDS Install Universal Card and Modules 8.1 \ When you have completed . The Universal Card will be unpacked 9 The modules to be installed l The modules l The card will be installed. Notes: Chart 8-1: and inspected. will be unpacked will be installed and inspected. on the card. 1. The Universal Card carries up to four plug-in modules: Console Module - provides the digital interface to an LCD console. DTMF Receivef/Re/ay Module - has four dual-tone multbfrequency receiver circuits, and two relays for night bells, or alarms. (DTMF) Music/Paging Module - provides one 60O-ohm balanced audio (music) input, a 20O-ohm output to a paging amplifier, and one relay contact for controlling an amplifier. E&M Trunk Module - Interfaces the PABX to one standard E&M trunk. 2. Up to four modules can be mounted on a Universal Card as long as the total power rating is 10 or less. See Table 2-5. Table 8-l I Module I Module Power Rating Power Rating Console 5 Receiver/Relay 2 1 Maximum/Card I 2 4 I Music on Hold/Paging I E & M Trunk I 1 4 3 3 I I 3. Night Bell Connectlon: On the 672-part configuration, the night bell connection must be made from the ringing voltage connector on the control shelf backplane. A DTMF receiver/relay module must be installed on the Universal Card. The card must be installed in Bay 1 or 2. Refer to Section 4. 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 6-l Installation Information - MUSICON HOLD/PAGER MODULE REcmLE~MY MODULE E8M TRUNK CONSOLE MODULE gcgc- V OL Figure 8-l 200 8-2 swrrcH MODULE’ I I MODULE2 MODULE3 MODULE4 Universal Card and Modules Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Install Digital Peripheral Cards Chart 8-l Step Install Universal Card and Modules Actlon Comments Follow General Procedures .I. Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. Given in Chart 5-l and Chart 5-2. Unpack and Inspect \ 2. While wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack the Universal Card(s) and its modules. 3. Inspect for loose or missing components, damage. 4. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. Figure 8-l shows a Universal Card and modules. and for Verlfy Power Ratlngs 5. - Verify the power ratings for each Universal Card. Total power rating per Universal Card ,cannot exceed 10. If it exceeds 10, the system indicates an alarm and ignores ithe Universal Card when it is powered Iup. Shown in Table 8-l. Install Typical installation is shown in IFigure 8-2. Console Module(s) 6. Insert each console module into its assigned location (optional). 336-part Configuration: The default Ilocation is Bay 2, slot 3, circuit 1. 672-part Configuration: The defautt Ilocation is Bay 1, slot 5, circuit 1. SX-200 FD System: The default Ilocation is Bay 1, slot 5, circuit 1. The system maximum is 11 consoles (including DNIC consoles). 7. Press it until it snaps into its standoffs. Make sure that connectors are properly seated. IFigure 8-l shows a Universal Card Install DTMF/Receiver Module and modules. Typical installation is shown in IFigure 8-2. 6. Insert each DTMF/receiver its assigned location. module (optional) into The number of modules is determined 80-NA, Iby calculations in 9109-098-I IEngineering Information. Page 1 of 3 9109-09&20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 8-3 Installation information Chart 8-l Step Install Universal Card and Modules (continued) Actlon Comments Two relays (not associated with the DTMF receivers) can be used to control system functions such as night bells or alarms. Each relay provides a contact closure across a Tip-Ring pair. Ratings: 90 Vrms at 0.1 48 Vdc at 0.5 A CAUTION: The relay contact is only used to control the paging amplifier. It may be connected only to a secondary circuit that has no direct connection to a primary circuit, and receives its cower from a transformer, converter, or equivalent isolation device situated Nlthin the equipment. 9. %ess it until it snaps into its standoffs. ,hat connectors are properly seated. nstall Music/Paging 10. Make sure Module nsert each music/paging assigned location. \nodule specifications Table 8-2. module (optional) into its Typical installation =igure 8-2. are shown in is shown in Music/paging equipment is: - Outside the PABX. - Should be in an environment specified by the suppliers. - Connected to the PABX through the cross-connect field. CAUTION: This relay contact may be zonnected only to a secondary circuit that has no direct connection to a primary circuit, and receives its power from a transformer, converter, or equivalent isolation device situated within the equipment. s 11. Press it until it snaps into its standoffs. that connectors are properly seated. Make sure Install E & M Trunk Module Typical installation is shown in Figure 8-2. 12. Set the eight DIP switches for the type of trunk in use. Shown in Table 2-7. 13. Insert the trunk module (optional) into its assigned location. Interfaces to Type 1 and Type 5 E&M trunks. Page 2 of 3 200 8-4 Revision 0 9109-098-20CNA Issue 1 Install Digital Peripheral Cards Chart 6-l Install Universal Card and Modules (continued) - 14. Comments Action Step Press it until it snaps into its standoffs. that connectors are properly seated. Install Universal Make sure Card I-5. Insert the Universal Card into its assigned slot in the card shelf. A Universal Card can plug into any of the upper peripheral slbts in a digital shelf. The card has a square on the faceplate.lt can be matched to any slot with a square. If a night bell is to be installed, the Universal Card must be in peripheral Bay 1 or 2 (in the 336-par-t configuration) only. 16. If a console module is not being installed as in step 6., remove the maintenance panel cable from J27 of the backplane. Applies to 336-par-t and 672-part configurations only. Page 3 of 3 Figure 9109-09620O-NA S-2 Issue 1 Installation of Module onto Universal Card Revision 0 200 6-5 Installation Information Table 8-2 Music on Hold/Paging Music on Hold Input Paging Output Module Specifications input impedance 600 ohms input level -6 dBm output impedance (low) 200 ohms output level into 600 ohms -6 dBm maximums 90 Vrms at 0.1 A _ Relay Contact 48 Vdc at 0.5 A Table 84 E & M Trunk Module Function Switch Settings Switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 3dB 0 x x x x x x x -13 dB 1 x x x x x x x Type1 x x x x x 1 x x Type 5 x x x x x 0 x x PABX to Line Gain Line to PABX Gain Transmission Signaling 0 = open, 200 8-6 1 = closed, X = not applicable Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Install Digital Peripheral Cards Install line (ONS, OPS, COV, and Digital) and DID Trunk Cards 8.2 The following chart applies to the ONS, COV, OPS, and Digital DID Trunk card. When you have completed Chart &2: l The line or trunk card will be unpacked Line cards, and the and inspected. 9 The line or trunk card will be installed. Notes: 1 .The ONS line card interfaces up to 12 standard telephone sets (rotary or DTMF). The ONS line card ports can interface alternate music sources for the Automatic Call Distribution feature. An alternate music source must be either an FCC Part 66- and DOGapproved recorded announcement device connected to an ONS circuit, or another source connected through an FCC Part 66-and DOGapproved voice coupler or voice connecting arrangement to an ONS circuit. 2. The COV line card provides six interface circuits for either SUPERSET SUPERSET 4 telephones. 3. The OPS line card contains six off-premises side the building housing the PABX. or line circuits used for lines going out- 4. The Digital Line Card is a 12-circuit card that interfaces the PABX to the following peripherals: SUPERSET 3DN, SUPERSET4DN, SUPERSET401, SUPERSET 410, SUPERSET 420, and SUPERSET telephones, SUPERCONSOLE 7000TM attendant console, SUPERSET” DSS Module, and the DATASET 1100 and 2100 series of products. See Appendix B for the loop length rules applying to the installation of the above listed peripheral devices. 5. The DID trunk card interfaces to six one-way 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 direct inward dial circuits, 200 8-7 Installation Information 1 WARNING ( Any connection of an ONS, COV, or digital line card to an off-premise application, an out-of-plant application, or to any other exposed plant application, may result in a safety hazard, and/or defective operation, and/or equipment damage. Chart 8-2 Step Install Line or DID Trunk Cards Action Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. Siven in Chart 5-l and Chart 5-2. Unpack and inspect 2. Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect the line or trunk card. 3. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. Install the Line or Trunk Card 4. Slide the line or trunk card into its slot(s), Cards with squares on their faceplates are high-power digital peripheral cards and are installed only in upper slots in the digital peripheral bays. The COV and OPS line cards, and the DID trunk card are high-power digital peripheral cards. Cards with circles on their faceplates are low-power digital peripheral cards and can be installed in any upper or lower slot in a digital peripheral bay. The ONS and Digital line cards are low-power digital peripheral cards. 200 8-8 Revision 0 33wort Configuration: Up to six ZOV, OPS, or DID cards can be nstalled in the control shelf (Bays 1 and 2), and up to four COV, OPS, or 3lD cards in each digital peripheral cay. 672-poft Configuration: Up to four ZOV, OPS, or DID cards can be nstalled in each digital peripheral Day. SX-200 FD System: Up to four SOV, OPS, or DID cards can be nstalled in each digital peripheral cay. The Digital Line Card must be nstalled in an upper (high-power) slot if used with a SUPERCONSOLE 7000 attendant console. 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Install Digital Peripheral Cards Install an LS/GS Trunk Card 8.3 When you have completed Chart 83: l The loopstart/groundstat-t (LS/GS) l The LS/GS trunk card will be installed. Note: trunk card will be unpacked and inspected. The LS/GS trunk card provides interfaces to six central office trunks. Each trunk circuit can operate as a loop start or a ground start. Chart 8-3 Install LS/GS Trunk Card Step Action Comments Follow General Procedures 1. =ollow the general procedures for handling :ircuit cards, 3iven in Chart 5-1 and Chart 5-2. Identify Trunk Circuits 2. dentify trunk circuits by bay, slot, circuit and ype (loopstart or groundstart). This is available from the configuration nformation prepared by the customer service representative. Unpack and Inspect Nearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and nspect the LS/GS trunk card(s) and jumpers. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. Set LS/GS Trunk Card Jumpers 5. - Set the jumpers into position for each of the six trunks on the card. Position the marked end to G for a ground start or L for a loop start trunk. Shown in Figure 8-3. Install LS/GS Trunk Card 6. Slide the LS/GS trunk card(s) into its slot(s). 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Cards with a circle on their faceplates are low power digital peripheral cards and can be installed in any upper or lower slot in a digital peripheral bay. Revision 0 200 8-9 Installation Information MARKEDEND stlDwN FOR LDDP STARTTRUNK I I I I -----;-------;-------; I---- l I I I I I 0 TRWK 1 I . I i I I l 0 TRUNK 2 I 0 TRUNK 3 I I Figure 8-3 LWGS Trunk Card 200 8-10 Revision 0 9109-096-20CbNA issue 1 Install Digital Peripheral Cards Install a Tl-DSl 8.4 When you have completed Chart S-4: . The Tl-DSI trunk card will be unpacked . The Tl-DSI trunk card will be installed. l l Trunk Card The Tl adapter card will be installed. The Tl trunk adapter Notes: and inspected. cable will be attached. I. The Tl -DSl trunk card interfaces to a single Tl trunk circuit. The system supports one TI-DSI trunk card per digital bay. 2. The Tl clock module must already be installed on the Main Control Card (see Chart 6-l and Figure 6-6). 3. The Tl trunk card kit includes: - Tl -DSl trunk card - Tl backplane adapter card/assembly - Tl adapter cable assembly (SX-200 DIGITAL PASX only) - hardware kii Chart 8-4 Install a Tl-DSl Step Trunk Card Action Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. &en in Chart 5-l and Chart 5-2. Unpack and Inspect 2. Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect the Tl trunk card. 3. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. - 4. Set Switches The eight DIP switches set appropriate line equalization for cable engths up to 200 m (655 ft) from the :hannel service unit (CSU). Set DIP switches for cable length from the CSU. oto149ft: Sl CLOSED; S2-80PEN 150to449ft: S24CLOSED; Sl , S5-8 OPEN 450to655ft: S5-7CLOSED; Sl-4, S8 OPEN Uote: The lengths shown are cable engths (distance between the digital runk card and the channel service .rnit), not loop lengths. Page 1 of 3 9109-09&20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 8-11 Installation information Chart 84 Step Trunk Card Comments Action Install Tl-DSI 5. Install a TI-DSI (continued) Trunk Card Insert the Tl-DSl slot. trunk card into its appropriate 336-part Configuration: Digital Bay 1: slot Digital Bay 2: slot Digital Bay 3: slot Digital Bay 4: slot 6 4 6 6 only only only only : 672-part Configuration: Digital Bays 1 - 7: slot 6 only SX-200 FD System: Digital Bays 1 - 7: slot 6 only The II-DSI trunk card is a high-powered card. There can be only one Tl Trunk card in a bay. 6. If this is an SX-200 FD system, go to step 18. Install Tl Adapter Card Also described in 9109-953-011 -NA, Install a Tl Trunk Adapter Card and Tl Adapter Cable Assembly. 7. At the backplane connector associated with the Tl trunk card slot, remove the hex nuts and the strain relief assembly. CAUTION: The plastic connector shroud must not be removed. Shown in Figure 8-4 (on the left side of the figure). 6. Replace the nuts with the hex-slotted long standoffs that come in the kit with the card. Do not put a washer under the standoff. 336-po1-t Configuration: Digital Bay 1, slot 6: Connector J5. Digital Bay 2, slot 4: Connector J25 Digital Bay 3, slot 6: Connector J5 Digital Bay 4, slot 6: Connector J5 672-part Con figuration: Digital Bays 1 - 7, slot 6: Connector J5. Install Tl Adapter Card -Connector Screws Installed from Card Side of Backplane Note: Some older systems had the connector screws installed from the card side of the backplane. The hardware kit contains parts to adapt to this. 9. At the backplane connector associated with the Tl trunk card slot, remove the screws and the strain relief assembly. Retain the screws for use in step 14. CAUTION: The plastic connector shroud must not be removed. Shown in Figure 8-4 (on the right side of the figure). 33tSport ConfiguratIon: Digital Bay 1, slot 6: Connector J5. Digital Bay 2, slot 4: Connector J25 Digital Bay 3, slot 6: Connector J5 Digital Bay 4, slot 6: Connector J5 672-part Configuration: Digital Bays 1 - 7, slot 6: Connector J5. 10. Replace the screws with the short standoffs from the kii. Do not put a washer under the standoff. s Page 2 of 3 200 8-12 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Install Digital Peripheral Cards Chart 6-4 Install a TI-DSI (continued) Step Action Plug Adapter Trunk Card Comments Card In 11. Tighten the standoffs with a screwdriver are firm, but not too tight. until they 12. Plug the Tl adapter card into the backplane connector. 13. Fasten the adapter card using the two screws and washers in the kit. 14. Connector Screws Originally Installed from Card Side of Backplane: Fasten the card using the This adapter provides a l-in DSub connector for the Tl facility, and a 25-pair connector to maintain access to the adjacent odd-numbered card slot. screws removed in step 9. Attach Adapter Cable 15. Attach the Tl trunk adapter cable to the Tl adapter card. Fasten with two screws. Shown in Figure 3-5. 16. Fasten the cable adapter bracket to the cabinet left side rail with two self-tapping screws and two external tooth lo&washers. Shown in Figure 8-5. 17. Connect the Tl trunk cable from the CSU to the other end of the Tl trunk adapter cable. Installation is now complete for the SX-200 DIG ITAL PABX. The CSU is provided by the telephone company. Install Tl Adapter System - Assembly on SX-ZOO FD 16. At the backplate connector associated with the Tl trunk card, remove the hex nuts and the strain relief assembly from the connector. Digital Bays 1 - 7, slot 6: Connector 55. 19. Plug the Tl Adapter Assembly connector into the backplate connector, so that the 4 screw holes on the housing align with holes on the backplate. Shown in Figure 3-6. 20. Fasten the Tl Adapter assembly using the 4 screws and washers in the kit, in the 2 metal tabs on the left-hand side of the housing and the metal lip on the bottom side of the housing. Page 3 of 3 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 3-13 Installation Information me$lc&la strain r&f. CAUTION Take - and metd cable stein r&f. CAUTION:Take cue nottoremwenle mrnectci plasuc ) PbrgReTl Adapter Cad into the bac+@anacame&. Fastm the card u&g themtsandwsshecs removed in step 1. CC0115 Figure 8-4 Installation of a Tl Adapter Card on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Backplane 200 8-14 Revision 0 9109-096-20O+lA Issue 1 Install Digital Peripheral Cards i.AttachtheTl Adap$rCableAsemblytotheTiAdspterCsrd,esshown. 2.CmectiheT1TnmkCabletotheTl AdwtetCabteAssmbl~,as~~. Tl ADARER CABLEASSEMBLY 0r- LEFr HAND CABINET SIDE RAILONLY Tl TRUNK CABLE TO CHANNELSERVICEUNIT Cml7Rl Figure 8-5 Installation of Tl Adapter Cable Assembly on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABY 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 8-15 Installation Information - SX-& FD PERIPHERUBACWl.ANE Fl Tl ADAPTERASSEMBLY Figure 8-6 Installation of Tl Adapter Assembly on the SX-200 FD PABX Peripheral Backplate 200 6-16 Revision 0 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 9 ’ BRING SYSTEM INTO SERVICE Connect Optical Fiber Cables between SX-200 FD Nodes Fiber Link Specifications 9.l \ In the SX-200 FD PABX, 62.5/125 mm glass cable replaces copper PCM cables interconnecting peripheral bays to the control bay. Optical fiber cables allow cabinets to be located up to 1 km apart. Fiber link specifications are listed in Table 9-1. Table 9-l Fiber Link Specifications Maximum Distance (cable length) Fiber diameter Payload and Requirements 1 km 62.5/l 25 mm 8 x 2 MB links (4 Circuit Switch links + 4 Message links + FIM Maintenance) 16.384 MB Data Rate Line Coding Fiber Link Bit Rate Transmitter Wavelength Transmitter Source Fiber Cable Type Connector System Maximum Optical Loss 4B5B 20.48 MB (10.24 MHz) 850 nm. LED Glass Multi-mode “ST 10 dB (including splices and connections) The grade ortypa of cable used must be suitableforthe local building codes and your Fiber Cable supplier. installation (Le. light or heavy duty, plenum, outdoor, etc). Consult Fiber Cable Handling Guidelines The following basic guidelines Connectors apply to installation l l Cleanliness of the Connector Ferrule (or tip) is important Never touch the tip of a Fiber Connector. Always place the Dust Caps onto the connectors connecting. . Ferrule l l and precautions for the handling of Fiber Cable and or servicing of the SX-200 FD system. Tips on Connectors can be cleaned for error free transmission, and Cables immediately after dis- with ethyl-alcohol. Fiber-Optic cables are often more easily installed and pulled than Copper because of their light weight and flexibility. However, care must be taken not to exceed specifications for minimum Bend Radius and maximum Tensile Strength. Procedures for the repairing, splicing from Fiber component manufacturer’s; purpose. 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 or assembling of Fiber Cables are available many of which offer training courses for this Revision 0 200 9-l Installation Information Fiber Cable Installation When you have completed Chart 9-1, optical fiber cables will be connected each Peripheral Bay and the Control Node of the SX-200 FD PABX. between Fiber Optic sources emit infrared light invisible to the human eye which can damage the retina. Never look directly into a source or into the end of a fiber energized by a source. piiq When working with raw Fiber Optic Cable be careful of fiber ends or slivers that can puncture the skin and cause irritation. Chart %I Step Connect Optical Fiber Cables Between Comments Action Connect Cables to Control Nodes Node 1. Remove the dust caps from the 2 connector ferrules at one end of the optical fiber cable. iach cable has 2 connectors at each ?nd. 2. Remove the dust caps from the Transmit (TX) and Receive (RX) connector ferrules on the faceplate of each FIM. iach FIM has 2 fiber cable zonnectors and 2 LEDs on the ‘aceplate. 3. Attach the 2 connectors of one cable to the 2 connectors of one FIM faceplate. Repeat for each installed FIM. 4. Run each cable to the location of the Peripheral Bay for which it is intended, following the handling guidelines listed here, and as specified by the cable manufacturer. Connect Cables to Peripheral Bays 5. Remove the dust caps from the 2 connector ferrules at the Peripheral Bay end of the optical fiber cable. 6. Remove the dust caps from the Transmit (TX) and Receive (RX) connector ferrules on the Peripheral Bay backplate. - Page 1 of 2 200 9-2 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Bring System into Service Chart 9-1 Connect Step Optlcai Fiber Cables Between (continued) Action Nodes Comments 7. Connect TX fiber connector on the 3ay, and the RX connector on the cable connector to the FIX lower backplate of the Peripheral cable connector to the TX Peripheral Bay. a. Repeat steps 5 to 7 for each Peripheral Bay. With the Control Node powered on, the TX cable may be determined by using an optometer. When the fiber cables are connected correctly, both LEDs on the Control Node faceplate will stay on steadily (not flashing). if the FIM LEDs continue to flash after connecting the cable to the Peripheral Bay, switch the TX and FIX connectors on the FIM or the Peripheral Bay. For further information on FIM LED indicators, see Practice 910949643504lA, Troubleshooting. Page 2 of 2 I 9109-09&20O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 200 9-3 Installation Information Connect 9.2 Cables Between When you have completed Connection l Cables will be connected l Cables will be run from the cross-connect l Cables will be connected at the connection Connect Install Connection field to the cabinet(s). at the cross-connect Cables Between plugs, and the cables will be field. PABX and Cross-connect Field Comments Blocks Install required connection cross-connect field. Connect blocks. to the cabinet Action Step 1. blocks will be installed. Cable connectors will be attached dressed inside the cabinet(s). Chart 9-2 Field Chart 9-2: l l \ PABX and Cross-Connect blocks at Cables 2. Connect 25-pair cables to connection blocks. 3. Mark each cable connector or plug with its corresponding cabinet plug number. >ross-connection Section 11. tables are shown in Run Cables 4. Run the 25-pair cables between the cross-connect field and the cabinet. 5. SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX: Route cables through cable duct at rear of cabinet, and position all cables within control cabinet. Attach - Cabinet Cable Connectors .6. Attach each cable connector to its cabinet plug, and tighten connector retaining screw or strap. 336-part Configuration: Backplane connections are shown in Figure 9-2. SX-200 FD PABX: Peripheral cabinet backplate connections are shown in Figure 9-3. 7. Install split ferrites around each 25-pair cable which exits the system. The ferrites should be located approximately 4 inches from the case of the connector (see Figure 9-l). The split ferrites supplied consist of two ferrite cores contained in a hinged plastic housing (see Figure 9-l). Page 1 of 2 200 9-4 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 r Bring System into Service Chart 9-2 Connect Step Action 0. Dress cables inside cabinet, attach strain reliefs. SX-ZOO DlGlTAL PABX: Pull excess cable through cable duct. Cross Connect \ Cables Between PABX and Cross-connect (continued) 9. Field Comments Cables at Cross-connect Field Cross connect station lines, CO trunks, other trunks, and equipment to cross-connection blocks for cables from within PABX. The Tip and Ring assignment tables in Section 11 identify which equipment connects to each pin on the connecting block. Page 2 of 2 CONNECTORTO BACKMANE ;EFiFi;EllLLED - SPLIT FERRITE, CASE OPEN Cc0145 Figure 9-l 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Ferrite Installed onto a Cable Revision 0 200 9-5 Installation Information BAY 2 SLOT 3t4 1 BAY 1 SLOT 7t8 , BAY 1 SLOT 5t5 0 ABC 1 F3 \I 11 :, II 15P3 BAY 2 SLOT 1 t2 BAY 1 SLOT 3t4 NOTE: BAY 1 SLOT 1t2 Jl9 = LCCALIS-232 COFP\IECTORON MAMENMCE PAt.EL J21= FiEMOTER-S-232CONNECTORON CABIMT REARCABLE PANEL Figure 9-2 SX-200 DIGITAL 336-part Control Shelf Backplane 200 9-6 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Bring System Into Service I - Tl ADAPTrRASSEMBLY PlN94m-ia?4n2-N4 (OPTIONAL-SHoWNINSTALLED BAY PSU AC PLUG ACCESSPANEL TXOPllCALFiBERCABLECONNECTOR SFT CONNECTOR SYSTEM GROUND u1G CC0179 Figure 9-3 SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet Backplate 9109-09&20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 9-7 Installation Information Power Up Control Cabinet 9.3 When you have completed The SX-200 l 1 WARNING ( \ DIGITAL Chart 93: or SX-200 FD PABX Control cabinet will be turned on. SX-200 DIGITAL PABX: The fans In the upper back door of the Control cabinet are high-&flow devices. Loose foreign objects placed near the fans can be pulled into the impellers. Ser_ vice and installation personnel must keep a safe distance away from the fans to prevent loose clothing or hair from being entangled In the fans. The covers over the fans prevent accidental contact with rotating parts and must always be lnstalled. SX-200 FD PABX: The fan in the upper backplate of the control node cabinet Is a high-airflow device. Loose foreign objects placed near the fan can be Entangled in the impeller. Service and installation personnel must keep a safe distance away from the fan to prevent loose clothing or hair from belng entangled in the fan. Chart g-3 Power Up Control Step - Action Cabinet Comments 1. Make sure that all cards are in place and well seated, and that all cables within the cabinets, including optional Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), are connected. SX-200 FD PABX: It is recommended that a UPS be used with all cabinets (but particularly the Control cabinet) of an SX-ZOO FD system. 2. Plug the line cord into the ac receptacle. If the Control cabinet has a UPS, plug the line cord into the UPS, and the UPS line cord into the ac receptacle, according to manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Turn on UPS (ii present), and then the main switch on the rear door or backplate of the Control cabinet. 4. SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX: Turn Bay Power Supplies on. 200 9-a Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Brina Svstem Into Service Power Up Peripheral Cabinet 9.4 The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX 672-port configuration may have a peripheral cabinet as well as a control cabinet. The SX-200 FD PABX has at least one peripheral cabinet as well as the Control Node. When you have completed Chart 9-4: l l The SX-200 turned on. DIGITAL PABX (672-part The SX-200 FD PABX peripheral configuration) cabinet(s) peripheral will be turned cabinet will be on. 672-Part Configuratlon: The fans in the upper back door of the peripheral cabinet are high-airflow devices. Loose foreign objects placed near the fans can be pulled into the impellers. Service and installation personnel must keep a safe distance away from the fans to prevent loose parts of clothing or hair from becoming entangled in the fans. The covers over the fans prevent accidental contact with rotating parts and must always be Installed. Chart g-4 Power Up Peripheral Action Step Cabinet Comments Power On Cabinet Make sure that all cards are in place and well seated, and that all cables within the cabinet (including optional UPS in the SX-200 FD Peripheral Bay) are connected. Run the line cord. Plug the line cord into the ac receptacle. SX-200 FD PABX: It is recommended used with all cabinets of an SX-200 If this is an SX-200 that a UPS be FD system. If the Peripheral Bay has a UPS, the line cord should be plugged into the UPS, and the UPS line cord into the ac receptacle, according to manufacturer’s instructions. FD PABX, go to step 8 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX 672-part 5. Turn on breaker at rear of cabinet. 6. Turn Bay Power Supplies on. 7. Close and lock all cabinet doors. Configuration: AC power LED is on. SX-200 FD PABX: 6. Turn on UPS (if present), and then the main switch on the backplate of the peripheral cabinet. Open the peripheral opened. bay front door panel, if not already Given in Chart 8-4, Page 1 of 2 9109498-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 Installation Information Chart 9-4 Power Up Peripheral (continued) Step Cabinet Comments Action IO. Turn Bay Power Supply on. 11. Close the peripheral bay front door panel. 12. Repeat steps 1 to 11 for each peripheral cabinet. Given in Chart 3-4. Page 2 of 2 Install Diskettes in Disk Drives on SX-200 DIGITAL PABX 9.5 When you have completed l Packing material . The diskettes Chart 9-5: will be removed will be installed from the disk drives. in the disk drives. Note: An SX-200DIGlTALPABX with Generic 1002,1003,1004, drives (Generic 1001 software requires only 1 drive). Insert a diskette into the disk drive only when when system power is on. Before using a diskette, ment. Chart g-5 Install Diskettes Step - acclimatize it for 24 hours in the operating envlron- Into Disk Drives on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Comments Action Remove Packing or 1005 software has two disk Material 1. Unlatch the disk drive(s). Some disk drive units have a door. Some disk drives have a latch. Others have a button. Shown in Figure g-4 (for the 5 l/4” disk drive). 2. Remove the cardboard guard. The cardboard is installed for shipping. Install Diskette(s) 3. Make sure the system power is on. 4. Make sure diskette has been acclimatized operating environment. 5. Make sure the LED on the disk drive is off. to the There should be no read/write activity in progress on the system. Page 1 of 2 200 9-10 Revision 0 910%096-20O-NA Issue 1 Bring System Into Service Chart 9-5 Install Diskettes Step 6. Into Dlsk Drives on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (continued) Action Comments Handle diskettes properly. 33Gport Diskettes should not be touched, paperclipped, bent, squeezed, heated, written on with ballpoint pens, or put near a magnetic field. Configuration: 7. Insert diskette A into the Bay 2 disk drive. 0. Insert diskette B into the Bay 1 disk drive. 672-part Configuration: 9. Insert diskette A into Disk Drive A. 10. Insert diskette B into Disk Drive B. Both Configurations: 11. Close the latch(es) on the drive(s). Shown in Figure 9-4, for the 5 l/4” disk drive. If this is a 3 l/2” disk drive, there is no latch or door on the drive. 12. Press the system reset button on the Main Control Card and hold in for at least 3 seconds. Page 2 of 2 UNIT WlTH LATCH UNIT WITH BUITON Figure 9-4 5 l/4” Disk Drives in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 9-11 Installation Information Install Diskettes in Disk Drives on the SX-200 FD PABX 9.6 When you have completed l The diskettes Chart 9-B: will be installed in the disk drives. Note: An SX-,200 FD PABX has two disk drives at the top of the Control Node. The front door panel must be removed to access them. Insert a diskette \ into the disk drive only when when Control Before using a diskette, ment. acclimatize Chart 9-6 Install Diskettes Step it for 24 hours in the operating environ- Into Disk Drives on the SX-200 FD PABX Action Access Control Node power is on. Comments Node Disk Drives 1. Open the Control Node front door panel, if not already opened. 2. Press the button on each disk drive slot to release the latch. 3. Remove the cardboard guards from the drive slots. Given in Chart 3-4. The cardboard is installed for shipping. Install Diskettes - 4. Make sure the cabinet power is on. 5. Make sure diskette has been acclimatized operating environment. 6. Make sure the LED on the disk drive is OFF. There should be no read/write activii xogress on the system. 7. Handle diskettes properly. Diskettes should not be touched, )aperclipped, bent, squeezed, heated, ,vntten on with ballpoint pens, or put iear a magnetic field. 6. Insert diskette A into the upper disk drive. 9. Insert diskette B into the lower disk drive. 10. Press the system reset button on the Main Control Card and hold in for at least 3 seconds. 200 9-12 to the Revision 0 9109-09620GNA in Issue 1 r Bring System into Service Check System Initialization When you have completed 9.7 l Initialization Chart 9-7: of the SX-200 DIGITAL or SX-200 FD PABX will be complete. Chart 9-7 Check System initialization Check InitializatPon \ 1. Wait for the initialization procedures to complete. The system goes into self-test 2. Check the MCC alphanumeric display for a sequence of numbers followed by a “b.“. The MCC display shows a series of numbers up to 09. it then begins to load software from the diskette(s). The MCC displays a ‘II” followed by a ‘lb.“. 3. Check the MCC display for a “- - ” and a flashing green LED. When the download is complete and successful, each display on the MCC shows a “I- ‘I. 4. Check the MCC display for a series of numbers. These are diagnostic tests on programmed card locations, test line, maintenance console. The bays boot up one at a time.The system checks the position of the bay cards, and the display stops indicating the last bay position checked. 5. On the SX-ZOO FD PABX, close the Control Node front door panel. Given in Chart 3-4. Proceed wtth CDE Described in 9109-096-21 mode. O-NA. Remove Diskettes from Disk Drives 9.8 When you have completed l The diskettes Notes: Chart 9-B: will be removed from the disk drives. 1. An SX-200 DIGITAL PABX with Generic 1002,1003,1004, or 1005 software has two disk drives (Generic 1001 software requires oniy 1 drive). 2. An SX-200 FD PABX has two disk drives at the top of the Control Node. The front door panel must be removed to access them. 9109-096-20O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 200 9-13 Installation Information piiKi-/ Make sure there is no read or write activity Chart 98 Step Remove a diskette. Diskette from Disk Drive Action Remove when you are removing Comments Diskettes 1. On the SX-200 FD PABX, open the Control Node front door panel, if not already opened. 2. Make sure system/cabinet 3. Make sure the LED on the disk drive is off. There should be no read/write activity in progress on the system. 4. On the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, open the door of the disk driies (if present). Not all disk drive units have a door. 5. On the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, press the reset button on the Main Control Card and hold it for at least 3 seconds. 6. Open the latch on each disk drive. 7. 336port configuration: Remove diskette A from the Bay 2 disk drive, and diskette B from the Bay1 disk drive. 672-poti configuration: Remove diskette A from Disk Drive A, and diskette B from Disk Drive B. SX-200 FD PABX: Remove diskette A from the upper disk drive, and diskette B from the lower disk drive. Remove each diskette by pulling it straight out with your thumb and index finger. Shown in Figure 94. 6. Insert the diskette into its protective sleeve to prevent damage. Diskettes should not be touched, paperclipped, bent, squeezed, heated, written on with a ballpoint pen, or put near a magnetic field. 9. On the SX-200 FD PABX, close the Control Node front door panel. Given in Chart 3-4. power is ON. - 200 9-14 Given in Chart 3-4. Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 10 ’ INSTALLING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT Introduction Peripheral Equipment and Applications ’ 10.1 Table 1 O-l shows the peripheral equipment and applications that can be installed on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. Figure 10-l shows typical connections for several peripheral devices. Procedures for installation of Attendant Consoles, SUPERSET telephones, and datasets are described in practice 9109-09&l 26-NA, Peripheral Devices. Table IO-I Equipment Installed in Variations of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX 9109-096-126 :; 9109496-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 10-l Installation Information CROSS-CONNECTION FlELD MODULE Till PAIR Y Tl RI T2 DlGlTAL UNE CARD GN e-- Fl2 R MWC SOURCE -a--- I SYkd I I I CONTROL PAlR MUSICON HOLD/PAGINGMODULE .m---- EoM0N J33 I ~USTOMERSUPPUED mm--- 1 I EOUIPMENT --- I BACKPLANE -l -1 (UNNERSALCABINETONLY) (MGHT BELL CONNECTlONj I ’ FROM RELAYON RELAY MODULE ~~T~MEF+SUPPUED mm- NIGHT BELL -J I I 3mo$h!s SUBClRCUil 6 FIELAYMODULE NOTE 4. Fa 236 end 480 port CUlfgualiCO~therday fcitherdghtbellmustbe hdkjtdbaylor2. NOTES. Fa627portrmPgurah, therdayforfhedghtbdl may be h any pmlphd bay. NOTE 6. The Supmxvw~le ~oorR attendant Figure IO-I 200 10-2 Music, Relay, and Paging Connections on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 installing Peripheral Equipment MITEL Peripheral Equipment Table 10-2 lists the part numbers for MI-TEL peripheral equipment discussed in this Section. This equipment applies to 336-+01-t, 456-port, 672-port and SX-ZOO FD configurations. A full list of MITEL peripherals can be found in Practice 9109-096--355-NA, Field-Replaceable Units. Table 10-2 MITEL Peripheral Equipment Equipment \ LCD Attendant Part Nuinber Console SUPERCONSOLE 91 O&007401-NA 1000 Attendant Console 9189-000-001 -NA Telephone 9163-000-200-NA SUPERSET 4DN Telephone 91 &l-000-200-NA SUPERSET3DN SUPERSET SUPERSET 407 Telephone 401 Telephone SUPERSET 4 10 Telephone 9114-000-000-NA SUPERSET 420 Telephone 9115-000-000-NA 430 Telephone ~9116-00&001-NA SUPERSET Details on other MITEL peripheral (single unit) (box of 6 units) equipment are found 9113-OOO-OO&NA 9113-000-060-NA in practice 9109496-l I I 26-NA. Install A Maintenance Terminal Install a Local Maintenance Terminal 10.2 When you have completed l Chart 1 O-l : The VT700TM, or equivalent, 0 The VT100 terminal will be unpacked and inspected. will be installed. l Permanently connected l The terminal will be powered Notes: terminal cable will be routed through the cabinet. up. 1. On the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, a maintenance terminal can be connected either to the local port, or to the remote port making use of a modem. Both cannot be connected at one time. 2. On the SX-200 FD PABX, a maintenance terminal can be connected to the local port on the Control Node backplate, or to the remote port on the Peripheral FIM Carrier in the peripheral bay. 3. The RS-232 maintenance terminal is described in Practice 9109-096351-NA, RS-232 Maintenance Terminal. 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 lo-3 Installation Information Chart IO-1 Step install a Local Maintenance Comments Action nventory, Unpack, terminal inspect 1. Check off received items against packing list and equipment list, above. 2. Jnpack cartons. 3. rag defective items. 4. -ill in relevant portion of damage report. 5. Repack tagged items and return according to local xocedures. >osftion Terminal 6. %rt the terminal in its assigned position. Jlaximum cable length is 15 m (50 t) without a modem. Positioning is shown in Figure 10-4. Connect to an SX-200 DfGfTAL PABX 7. Run an FG-232 cable between the terminal and the ocal (maintenance) port on the maintenance panel. 4 flat ribbon cable should be used if he cable is to be permanently :onnected, to allow the door to :lose. 6. Set the maintenance port selection switch at the right of the maintenance panel to TERMINAL (DTE). The local (DTE or data terminal equipment) port is designed to nterface with a terminal. Pin 2ssignment.s are shown in rable 1 O-3. Connect to an SX-200 FD PABX 9. - Connect the other end of the 25-pin RS-232 maintenance terminal cable to a 25tc+9 pin RS-232 adapter arrangement (connector adapter or cable adapter). Then connect the adapter arrangement to the maintenance port on the node. Note: A maintenance terminal may be connected to any node of the system. However, the Peripheral Cabinet maintenance port is a service-only port. No cable should be left connected to this port. It can only be used at time of service. Set Up Terminal 10. The maintenance port on the Control Vode is located on the lower aackplate; the maintenance port on :he Peripheral Node is located on :he upper front edge of the ‘eripheral FIM Carrier, attached to :he Bay Control Card. See Figure 1 C&3 and Figure 1 O-2. Data Characteristics Set up the terminal data characteristics. 3 data bits 1 start bii 1 stop bit no parity 30&9600 baud Page 1 of 2 200 lo-4 Revision 0 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Installing Peripheral Chart 10-I Step Install a Local Maintenance (continued) Equipment terminal Action Comments Route Cable On the SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX: If the cab/e is 11. permanently connected, route it between the maintenance panel and the peripheral shelf to the back of the control cabinet, and out of the cabinet with the connectorized cables. On the SX-200 FD PABX: In general, only a Only one maintenance session may be conducted at any one time. Maintenance terminal connected to the Control Node should be permanently cabled. No special cable routing is necessary. Power Up 12. Plug in the terminal, and turn it on. Page 2 of 2 Table 10-3 I SX-200 DIGITAL RS-232 Pln Maintenance Panel RS-232 Connector SX-200 FD RS-232 Pin’. Pins at DTE Port RS-232 Signal Local DTE Port I TRANSMIT from terminal DATA RECEIVE DATA I I I 5 I 6*. I 7 t I 8 I 5 I 14, 93. 44, DATA TERMINAL pins 6,8, 4. DTE pins are located bay. There pin 5 are tied together 1 and 4 are tied together Issue 1 READY on the Control Node backplate is no maintenance panel. and 20 are tied together 3. DTE pin 20 and DCE 910949620O-NA I 1. In the SX-200 FD PABX, the DTE ports Peripheral FIM Carrier in the peripheral 2. J5 DTE I DETECT I I Notes: I from terminal to terminal I to terminal I I I CARRIER I 202. DATA SET READY I SIGNAL GROUND I 8’. CLEAR TO SEND I 6 I REQUEST TO SEND to terminal Revision 0 to terminal from terminal and on the I I Installation Information The Peripheral Bay maintenance port is a servic+oniy port. No cable should be left connected to this port. It oan only be used at the time of service. Figure 1O-2 Maintenance Terminal Connection - SX-200 FD Peripheral Bay Revision 0 91094X-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing Peripheral Equipment 9 PIN-25 PIN CONNECTOR ADAPTOR. REMOTELYLOCATED TERMINAL REMOTE-DIAL-UP 9PIN-25PIN CONNECTOR ADAPTOR TO PASXVIA CENMLOFflCE “,--- II CONNECT r I I 17 NOTE: THEAmMNSWER MODEM1s PERMANENTLYCOK NECTEDTO ONE LOCALSTATKINClRCUlT(EXTEK SION) Figure 103 9109-096-20O-NA . . I I c I I ASSlGNEDTIP 8 RING PAIRFORAUTC-ANSWER MODEM. MODEM REMOTELYLOCATED TERVINAL Maintenance Terminal Connections - SX-200 FD Control Node Issue 1 Revision 0 200 10-7 Installation Information Install a Remote Maintenance Terminal When you have completed l The VTIOO, or equivalent, l The modems l The VT100 terminal Notes: Chart 1 O-2: terminal will be unpacked will be unpacked and inspected. and inspected. and modems will be installed. 1, On the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, a maintenance terminal can be connected either to the local port, or to the remote port with the use of a modem. Both cannot be connected at one time. 2. A remote maintenance terminal is a means to perform maintenance checks (logs and alarms), and customer data entry, without visiting the customer site. 3. There are two methods of connecting a remote terminal; by dialing up to an autoanswer modem connected to a dedicated network trunk (direct access), or to an autoanswer modem connected to an ONS port (dial-up access) on an as-required basis. Refer to Figure 1 O-4. 4. The R!S-232 maintenance terminal is described in Practice 9109496351-NA, RS-232 Maintenance Terminal. 5. On the SX-200 FD PABX, a maintenance terminal can be connected either to the Control Node port, or to the peripehral bay remote port. Both should not be connected at the same time. A modem cannot be connected to a peripheral cabinet maintenance port, See Figure 1 O-2 and Figure 1 O-3. 200 10-3 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing Peripheral Equipment REMOTE - DEDICATED, PUBLIC NEIWORK Rx REMOTELYLOCATED TERMINAL TX REMOTE - DIAL-UP TO PABXVA CENMLOFFICE MODEM ASSIGNEDTIP 8 RING PAIR FOR AliTO-AMWER MODEM. Figure 1O-4 Maintenance Terminal Connections - SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 10-9 Installation Information Chart 10-2 Step Install a Remote Maintenance Actlon Inventory, Unpack, Terminal Comments Inspect 1. Check off received items against packing list and equipment list, above. 2. Unpack cartons. 3. Tag defective items. 4. Fill in relevant portion of damage report. 5. Repack tagged items and return according to local procedures. Install the Modem 6. Set up the modem data characteristics. 3 data biis I start bii I stop bit 10 parity 300-9600 baud 7. SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX: Connect the modem to the remote port on the power distribution panel on the rear of the cabinet using an RS-232 cable. The remote (DCE or data :ommunication equipment) port is designed to interface with a modem. ‘in assignments are shown in rable 1 O-4. SX-200 FD PABX: Connect the modem to a 2!5-to-9 pin RS-232 adapter arrangement (connector adapter or cable adapter). Then connect the adapter arrangement to the maintenance port on the Control Node backplate. Uote: A modem cannot be 6. Connect the Tip/Ring pair of the modem to the dedicated trunk, or to the ONS port. 9. Set the maintenance port selection switch at the right of the maintenance panel to MODEM (DCE). s 200 l&10 Revision 0 zonnected to the remote naintenance port on the Peripheral ‘IM Carrier in the peripheral bay. Note: A terminal can not be :onnected directly to the remote zonnector on the SX-200 DIGITAL ‘ABX. 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Installing Peripheral Equipment I~~~_ Table 10-4 1 Pin W-232 Maintenance 1 3 I Note: I DATA Pins at DCE Port Remote DCE Port to modem I from modem 4 REQUEST TO SEND to modem 5* CLEAR TO SEND from mqdem 6 DATA SET READY from modem 7 SIGNAL GROUND * DCE 9109-096-20O-NA Signal RECEIVE DATA I 8 I W-232 TRANSMIT 2 _’ Panel RS-232 Connector CARRIER DETECT pin 5 and DTE from modem pin 20 are tied together Issue 1 Revision 0 200 lo-11 Installation Information Install an LCD Console as a Maintenance Console When you have completed l The LCD Attendant Console. Chart 1 O-3: Console will be connected to the system as a Maintenance Notes: 1. 336-, 466-part configurations: The console jack on the maintenance panel provides a connecting point for the maintenance console. To allow access to this ..console jack with an LCD consol,e, a universal card is required in bay 2 slot 3 with a console module in circuit 1 position. The default database provided for the system shows a universal card in this position. Circuit 1 of the card is : programmed as a console module. . \ 672-pat-t configuration: The console jack on the maintenance panel provides a connecting point for the maintenance console. To allow access to this console jack with an LCD console, a universal card is required in bay 1 slot 5 with a console module in circuit 1 position. The default database provided for the system shows a universal card in this position. Circuit 1 of the card is programmed as a console module. 2. SX-200 FD system: Any LCD console installed in the default manner (see Practice 9109-096-l 26-NA, Peripheral Devices) can be used as a maintenance terminal. There is no console jack on the SX-200 FD system Control or Peripheral cabinets. Chart IO-3 SW 1 as a Maintenance Console Action Comments 336-, 456-part configurations: Connect the console to the maintenance console jack on the maintenance panel on the front of the control cabinet. 672+off configuration: Connect the console to the maintenance console jack on the maintenance panel on the front of the 672-part control cabinet. 336-, 456port configurations: Bay 2, slot 3 must have a universal card installed. 672-part configuration: Bay 1, slot 5 must have a universal card installed. Connect 1. Install an LCD Console 200 IO-12 Console Revision 0 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Installing Peripheral Equipment Install a SUPERCONSOLE When you have completed l l A SUPERCONSOLE console. 7000 Attendant as a Maintenance Console Chart 1 O-4: 1000 Attendant A printer will be connected Notes: Console Console will be installed as a maintenance to it (optional). 1. 336-, 466~port Configurations: The Tip/Ring (green/red) pair of the console jack on the maintenance panel is connected to position bay 2, slot 3, circuit 2 of the control cabinet. To allow access to this console jack with a S(JPERCONSOLE 7000 Attendant Console, a digital line card is required in bay 2 slot 3. The default database provided for the system must be modified to show a digital line card in this position (the default universal card and modules programming must be replaced by “digital line card”). Circuit 2 of the card must be programmed as a console. 672-part ConfiguratIons The Tip/Ring (green/red) pair of the console jack on the maintenance panel is connected to position bay 1, slot 5, circuit 2 of the control cabinet. To allow access to this console jack with a SUPERCONSOLE 7000 Attendant Console, a digital line card is required in bay 1 slot 5. The default database provided for the system must be modified to show a digital line card in this position (the default universal card and modules programming must be replaced by “digital line card”). Circuit 2 of the card must be programmed as a console. FD System: Any SUPERCONSOLE 7000 Attendant Console installed in the defauft manner (see Practice 9109-096-126-NA, Peripheral Devices) can be used as a maintenance terminal. There is no console jack on the SX-200 FD system Control or Peripheral cabinets. 2. SX-200 Chart IO-4 Install a SUPERCONSOLE Step Console as a Maintenance Console Actlon Comments 33&, 456-part configurations: Connect the console to the maintenance console jack on the maintenance panel on the front of the control cabinet. 672-part configuration: Connect the console to the maintenance console jack on the maintenance panel on the front of the 672-part system control cabinet. 336-, 456-port configurations: Bay 2, slot 3 must have a digital line card installed. CDE must be modified accordingly. Connect 1. 1OOOAttendant Console 672-potf configuration: Bay 1, slot 5 must have a digital line card installed. CDE must be modified accordingly. Page 1 of 2 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 lo-13 Installation Information Chart IO-4 Install a SUPERCONSOLE 1000 Attendant Console as a Maintenance Console (continued) Step Action Connect 2. Comments Printer (Optional) Connect the printer to the W-232 x-r the back of the console. printer connector Pln 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 , Signal frame ground transmit data receive data ready to send clear to send data set ready signal ground carrier detect data terminal ready Maximum 50 ft between the printer and the printer port on the SUPERCONSOLE 7000 Attendant Console , 3. Set the printer baud rate. Maximum baud rate is 2400 baud. Page 2 of 2 200 10-14 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing Peripheral Equipment Install a System Printer 10.3 When you have completed Chart 1 O-5: l The system printer will be connected l The system printer will be powered Chart IO-5 to the control up. Install a System Printer Action , SW Connect System cabinet. Commeirts Printer 1. Connect one end of a standard 25-pin RS-232 cable to the RS-232 port of the printer (or similar output device). 2. SX-200 DIGITAL PABX: Connect the other end of the 25-pin RS-232 cable to the system printer port on the power distribution panel at the rear of the control cabinet (socket J29 on the backplane of bay 58 printer pins 6, 8, and 20 are tied together. 2). SX-200 FD PABX: Connect the other end of the 25-pin RS-232 cable to a 25-to-9 pin S-232 adapter arrangement (connector adapter or cable adapter). Then connect the adapter arrangement to the printer port (Jll) located on the lower backplate of the Control Node. 3. Set up the printer data characteristics. B data bits 1 start bit 1 stop bit no parity 30&9600 baud (system default baud rate is1200 baud) Power Up 4. Plug in the printer and turn it on. Table IO-5 SX-200 FD Printer Port Pinout RS-232 Pin RS-232 Signal Printer Port 2 RECEIVE DATA to printer 3 I TRANSMIT DATA I 5 I 7 I REQUEST TO SEND 8 1 CLEAR TO SEND 1 9109-096-20O-NA I from printer SIGNAL GROUND Issue 1 Revision 0 I I from printer I I to printer I 200 10-15 installation Information Install Call Announce 10.4 Port on a SUPERSET 4 Telephone When you have completed Chart 1 O-6: 9 Class of service (COS) options ( executive busy override and override announce) will be enabled for the telephones that are able to access the Call Announce Port. Notes: 1. The Call Announce Port of the SUPERSET 4 telephone connects to an OPS digital line card, a COV (digital) line card, or an eight-station (analog) line card. It does not connect to a SUPERSET line card, or an ONS (digital) line card. 2. The call announce circuit is not assigned a directory number in CDE. \ ’ 3. The following must have been assigned in CDE: - a feature access code for executive busy override. - a call announce circuit to the SUPERSET Call Announce Port - override and override announce to the SUPERSET 4 telephone’s COS Chart IO-6 Step Port on a SUPERSET4Telephone Actlon Connect 1. Install Call Announce Call Announce Comments Port Connect the lip and Ring of the Call Announce Port circuit to the yellow (lTp) and black (Ring) leads of the associated SUPERSET 4 modular telephone jack. 200 lo-16 Revision 0 The yellow and black leads connect through the cross-connect field to the Tip and Ring circuits on the OPS card. Shown in Figure 10-5. The red and green leads connect through the cross-connect field to the Tip and Ring circuits on the COV card. 9109-09620CLNA Issue 1 Installing Peripheral Equipment PABXEQUIPMENT CABINET TIP GREEN A 7 A 7 A 7 A T RING SUPERSET LINECARD ORCOVLINECARD 1 RED YELLOW CALL ANNOUNCE PORT BLACK 1 CROSS CONNECT FIELD I I : SfJPERSET4@ TELEPHONE OF’SLINECARD TIP RING Cc0174 Figure IO-5 Call Announce Port Installation 9109-09&20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 . _. Installation Information Install Night Bell 10.5 Chart IO-7 describes the procedure for installing a Direct Connect night bell, and Chart 1 O-8 describes the procedure for an Auxiliary Relay night bell. When you have completed Chart 1 O-7 or Chart 1 O-8: l The DTMF receiver/relay l -The night bell will be installed. l The night bell will be connected. ,Notes: module will be installed. 1. Incoming and internal calls can be directed to a common alerting device (bell). The bell is activated by a relay on the DTMF receiver/relay module on the universal card. The calls can be answered from the attendant console, or from any station with the trunk access from any station (TAFAS) feature access assigned to it. 2. The night bell, the auxiliary relay (normally open) and independent are customer-supplied. ringing supply 336-or 672-porf configurations: The night bell is connected to the night bell ringing voltage provided on the control shelf backplane or to a customer supplied source. 456+ort configurations: The night bell is connected to the night bell ringing voltage provided on the control shelf backplane, the back door power supply, or to a customer supplied source. On the SX-200 FD system, the night bell must be a “Buzzer” style unit which does not require ringing voltage. A power source other than the PABX is required. 3. Direct Connect Method: Night bells can be connected directly if the total current requirement does not exceed the relay contact ratings. 4. Auxiliary Relay method: Night bells must be connected through an auxiliary relay if the total current requirement exceeds the relay contact ratings. An additional dc voltage source may be required to drive the auxiliary relay for the 338-part or 672-part configuration. The fused OV and -48V outputs of the back door power supply can be used for the 458-par-t configurations. 5. All wiring must be done in accordance with local electrical codes. 200 lo-18 Revision 0 9109-09820O-NA Issue 1 r Installing Peripheral Equipment Chart 10-7 Action Step nstall DTMF Receiver/Relay 1. Install Night Bell (Direct Connect) Comments Module flake sure the DTMF receiver/relay nstalled on the universal card. module is 336, 456port configurations: The relay for the night bell must be in digital bay 1 or 2. 672-part configuration: The relay for the night bell can be in any peripheral bay. I nstall Bell 2. Fzollow manufacturer’s (sonnect 3. 4. instructions to install the bell. Bell (Direct Connect) (Connect one side of the night bell through the (xoss-connect field to the ringing voltage connector .133 on the universal control cabinet backplane (or (Ither ringing supply). On the SX-200 FD system, it Inust be connected to another power source. See I=igure 1O-l. (Connect one side of the relay contact from the I3TMF receiver/relay module to ground and the other :side of the relay contact to the other side of the night IaelI. 9109-096-20O-NA The equipment should be installed in the environment specified by the manufacturer. Issue 1 Revision 0 336,456port configurations: The ringing voltage connector is on the control shelf backplane (bays 1 and 2). 672-pott configuration: The ringing voltage connector is on bay 0. Note: Relay contacts may be connected only to a secondary circuit that has no direct connection to a primary circuit, and receives its power from a transformer, converter, or equivalent isolation device situated within the equipment. Relay contact ratings: 90 Vrms at 0.1 A 48 Vdc at 0.5 A 200 10-19 Installation information Chart IO-8 Action Step Install DTMF Receiver/Relay 1. install Night Bell (Auxiliary Relay) Comments Module Make sure the DTMF receiver/relay installed on the universal card. module is ?36-, 456-port configurations: The elay for the night bell must be in ligital bay 1 or 2. ;72+ort configuration: The relay for he night bell can be in any beripheral bay. Install Bell 2. Follow manufacturer’s Connect The equipment should be installed in he environment specified by the nanufacturer. Relay 3. Connect one side of the auxiliary relay coil through the cross-connect field to the fused -48V of the back door power supply (or customer supplied DC source). On the SX-200 FD system, it must be connected to a customer supplied power source. See Figure 1 O-6. 3336,456-port configurations: The ,inging voltage connector is on the :ontrol shelf backplane (bays 1 and ?). 972-poff configuration: The ringing /oltage connector is on bay 0. 4. Connect one side of the relay contact from the DTMF receiver/relay module to fused OV of the back door power supply (or ground) and the other side of the relay contact to the other side of the auxiliary relay coil. Uote: Relay contacts may be :onnected only to a secondary :ircuit that has no direct connection :o a primary circuit, and receives its lower from a transformer, converter, lr equivalent isolation device Gtuated within the equipment. 3eiay contact ratings: 90 Vrms at 0.1 A 48 Vdc at 0.5 A Connect I Auxiliary instructions to install the bell. Bell to Auxiliary Relay 5. Connect one side of the bell to one side of the auxiliary relay contact. s. Connect the other side of the bell to one side of the independent ringing source. 7. Connect the other side of the auxiliary relay contact to the other side of the independent ringing source. 200 10-20 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing Peripheral Equipment PABX I (INDEPENDENTRINGING SOURCE) RELAYON RELAY MODULE CU3TOMER4UPPLlED~ NIGHT BELL I EX~EFWIL DCSUPPLY-WV 0.5A WtJ CCO175 Figure 1O-6 Night Bell With Auxiliary Relay 9109-09~20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 10-21 Installation information Install Paging Equipment 10.6 When you have completed l The music on hold/paging 9 The paging equipment l Chart 1 O-9: The paging equipment module will be installed. will be connected. Notes: 1. The paging equipment \ 2. The PABX supports up to nine separate paging zones. Each zone requires ‘a paging module. Chart 10-g is customer-supplied. install Paging Equipment Action Step install the Music on Hold/Paging 1. will be installed, Make sure the Music on Hold/Paging installed on the universal card. Comments Module module is install Paging Equipment 2. Follow manufacturer’s instructions to install the paging equipment. See Figure 1 O-l. Connect The equipment should be installed in the environment specified by the manufacturers. Paging Equipment 3. Connect the output from POA and POB on the Music on Hold/Paging module through the cross-connect field to the paging equipment. Output Output 4. Connect the relay contact from the Music on Hold/Paging module (PKA and PKB) to the control circuit of the paging equipment. Note: Relay contacts may be connected only to a secondary circuit that has no direct connection to a primary circuit, and receives its power from a transformer, converter, or equivalent isolation device situated within the equipment. Relay contact ratings: 90 Vrms at 0.1 A 48 Vdc at 0.5 A - 200 10-22 Revision 0 impedance (low): 200 ohm level into 600 ohm: -6dBm 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Installing Peripheral Equipment Install Music On Hold Equipment 10.7 When you have completed Chart 1 O-l 0: l The Music on Hold/Paging module l The Music on Hold source will be installed. l The Music on Hold source will be connected. Notes: will be installed. 1. An external music source can be connected to the system using a Music on Hold/Paging module on the universal card. Music on hold is used with the camp-on and hold features. Calls on hold hear music instead of silence; camp-on calls hear music instead of busy tone. 2. The PABX supports only one music on hold source. 3. This equipment also provides the background music played through the speakers of the SUPERSET4, SUPERSET3DN, SUPERSET4DN, SUPERSET410, SUPERSET 420, or SUPERSET 430 while the set is idle (background music feature). 4. The music source is customer-supplied, Chart IO-IO Step install Music On Hold Equipment Comments Action install the Music on Hold/Paging 1. and can be a tape recorder or radio. Make sure the Music on Hold/Paging installed on the universal card. Module module is install Music Source 2. I Follow manufacturer’s instructions to install the music source. See Figure 1 O-1. Connect 3. Music Source Connect the input from the music source through the cross-connect field to MIA and MIB on the Music on Hold/Paging module. 9109-096-20O-NA The equipment should be installed in the environment specified by the manufacturers. Issue 1 Revision 0 input impedance: 600 ohm input level : -6dBm 200 10-23 Installation Information Install Alternate 10.8 Music Source for ACD When you have completed . The alternate Notes: Chart 1 O-l 1: music source for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) will be installed. 1. An alternate music source for the ACD feature package must be either: - an FCC Part 66- and DOG approved recorded announcement connected to an on-premises (ONS) line card circuit device - any other source which is connected through an FCC Part 66- and DOCapproved voice coupler or voic-onnecting arrangement to an ONS circuit. \ 2. The equipment is used to provide music and recorded announcements tain callers waiting for an ACD agent. 3. The equipment Chart 10-11 is customer-supplied. install Alternate Step that enter- Music Source -Automatic Action Call Distribution Only Comments install ONS Line Card 1. Make sure an ONS line card is installed. install Recorded 2. Install the recorded announcement to manufacturer’s instructions. Connect 3. - Recorded Announcement Device device according Device Connect the recorded announcement device through the cross-connect field to a circuit on the ONS card. Connect 4. Announcement rhis card can be installed in any slot n any digital bay. Voice Coupler If the recorded announcement device to be installed is not FCC Part 66- and DOG approved, install a voice coupler or other type of voice connector between the recorded announcement device and the cross-connect field. 200 10-24 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 11 ’ CABLING AND CROSS CONNECTIONS System Cabling 1l.j This section the SX-200 gives the Tip-Ring Assignment DIGITAL PABX and the SX-200 Table 11-l tables for cabling and crossconnecting FD PABX. Table 11-I Ii&s these tables. Cable Terminations Contents Table Table 11-2 Tip and Ring Assignments J5 and J9 for Digital Bays 1 through 7 (672-pat-t and SX-200 FD PABX), or Bays 1, 3 and 4 (336port), or Bays 1 and 3 (456-part), or J25 for Bay 2 (336 or 456-part) Table 11-3 Tip and Ring Assignments for Universal Card Modules J5 and J9 for Digital Bays 1 through 7 (672-part and SX-200 FD PABX), or Bays 1, 3 and 4 (336port), or Bays 1 and 3 (456-part), or J25 for Bay 2 (336 or 456-part) Table 11-4 Tip and Ring Assignments J7 and Jll for Digital Bays 1 through 7 (672-part and SX-200 FD PABX), or Bays 1, 3 and 4 (336port), or Bays 1 and 3 (456-part), or J31 for Bay 2 (336 or 456-part) Table 11-5 18-circuit Table 11-6 I12-circuit PFT Card Tip and Ring Assignments Pm Card Tip and Ring Assignments Table 1 l-7 Bay 4 Pl , or Bay 5 P7 Connections to Cross-Connect Field Table 11-6 1Bay 4 P2, or Bay 5 P8 Connections to Cross-Connect Field Table 11-9 I Bay 4 P8, or Bay 5 P9 Connections to Cross-Connect Field Table 11-l 0 Bay 4 P4, or Bay 5 PI 0 Connections Table 11-11 Bay 4 PI9 Connections Table 11-12 I USOC Connector 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 to Interconnect to Cross-Connect Field Card Pin Deslgnations Revision 0 200 11-l Installation Information Table 11-2 Digital Bay Tip and Ring Assignments J5, J7, and J9 for Digital Bays: 1,3, and 4 (336-part) or 1 and 3 (456-part) or 1 through 7 (672-pat-t and SX-200 FD) or J25.for Digital Bay 2 (336,456-pat-t) Lead Designation Slot - Plug \ 2 J7 or 6 J5 or 8 J9 or 4 J25 Pin Pair Cct ONS or DLC Cct LS/GS Cct COV Cct 26 1 W-BL BL-W 1 Tl Rl 1 Tl Rl 1 Tl Rl 1 27 2 28 3 W-O o-w W-G G-W 2 2 29 W-BR 4 MM1 Ml T2 FE MM2 4 30 5 BR-W W-S S-W 5 31 6 R-BL BL-R 6 T6 R6 32 7 R-D O-R 7 17 R7 33 8 R-G G-R 8 T8 R8 34 9 35 10 R-BR BR-R R-S S-R 9 T9 R9 TlO RlO 5 36 11 BK-BL BL-BK 11 Tll Rll 6 37 12 BK-D 0-BK 12 T12 R12 38 BK-G 3 10 T2 FE T3 R3 T4 2 R4 T5 R5 3 5 R4 T5 M2 T3 R3 MM3 M3 4 4 FQ T3 R3 T4 3 6 MM4 M4 T5 R5 MM5 M5 T6 R6 MM6 M6 Tl Rl 2 T2 FE? 3 T3 R5 T6 R6 T4 R4 OPS or DID R3 4 T4 R4 5 T5 R5 6 T6 R6 SPARE Page 1 of 2 200 11-2 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Cabling and Cross Connections Table 11-2 Digital Bay Tip and Ring Assignments (continued) Lead Designation Slot Plug 1 J7 or 5 J5 or 7 J9 or 3 J25 Pin Pair Cct O;f;r 13 GBK 39 14 40 15 BK-BR BR-BK BKS S-BK 41 16 42 17 Y-BL BL-Y Y-O O-Y 3 Rl T2 I%? T3 4 R3 T4 43 Cct LS/GS Cct COV Cct OPS or DID 1 Tl Rl 2 T2 FE 3 T3 R3 4 T4 R4 5 T5 SPARE 1 2 Tl Y-G GY 5 18 44 19 45 20 Y-BR BR-Y Y-S S-Y 6 R4 T5 R5 T6 7 R6 T7 46 21 47 22 48 V-BL BL-V V-C o-v V-G 8 23 49 24 50 25 GV V-BR BR-V v-s S-V 1 2 Tl RI 1 MM1 Ml T2 I32 MM2 2 4 M2 T3 R3 MM3 M3 T4 5 R4 MM4 M4 T5 3 9 R7 T8 R8 T9 10 R9 TIO R5 MM5 RIO Tll Rll T12 M5 T6 R6 MM6 M6 11 12 6 R12 3 4 5 6 Tl Rl T2 FE T3 R3 T4 R4 15 R5 T6 R6 ; R5 6 T6 R6 Page 2 of 2 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 Installation information Table 11-3 Tip and Rlng Assignments I5 and J9 for Digital Bays: for Universal Card Modules 1 through 7 (672-part and SX-200 FD) or 1 ,3, and 4 (336-pat-t) or 1 and 3 @%-port) or I25 for Digital Bay 2 (336,456-par-t) Lead Deslgnation Slot - Plug \ 6 J5 Cct DLIC Cct MOH/ Pager Cct 26 1 27 2 28 W-BL BL-W W-O O-W W-G 1 Tl RI 1 MIA1 1 3 2 MIBI POAI POBI PKAI PKBI MIA2 J9 4 30 J25 5 31 S-W R-BL 6 32 7 33 8 34 BL-R R-O O-R R-G G-R 29 or 4 Pair G-W W-BR BR-W w-s or 8 Pln 9 35 10 36 11 R-BR BR-R RS S-R BK-BL BL-BK 37 12 BK-O 0-BK 38 BK-G T2 I32 2 Tl Rl T2 3 Tl RI 3 T2 I32 4 Tl RI T2 R2 4 Cct : E&M Trunk 1 Tl Rl TRI K5Al K5Bl K6Al K6Bl 2 MIB2 POA2 POB2 PKA2 PKB2 FE! DTMF Relay 2 K5A2 K5B2 K6A2 K6B2 MIA3 MIB3 3 POA3 POB3 PKA3 PKB3 MIA4 3 K5A3 K5B3 K6A3 MIB4 POA4 POB4 PKA4 PKB4 4 K5A4 K5B4 K6A4 K6B4 E3 M3 T4 R4 TR4 RR4 E4 M4 SPARE m--rage 200 II-4 RR2 E2 M2 T3 R3 TR3 RR3 K6B3 4 RR1 El Ml T2 FE TR2 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA 4 -a2 n I OT z Issue 1 Cabling and Cross Connections Table II-3 Tip and Ring Assignments (continued) for Universal Card Modules Lead Designation Slot Plug 5 J5 or 7 J9 or 3 J25 Pin Pair 13 G-BK 39 14 40 15 41 BK-BR BR-BK BK-S S-BK Y-BL 16 42 17 BL-Y Y-O O-Y 43 Y-G 18 G-Y 44 19 45 20 46 Y-BR BR-Y Y-S S-Y V-BL 21 47 22 48 23 BL-V v-o o-v V-G G-V 49 24 50 25 V-BR BR-V v-s S-V Cct DLIC Cct MOH/ Pager Cct DTMF Relay Cct E&M Trunk 1 Ti Rl TRl RR1 SPARE 1 2 3 Tl Rl T2 I32 Tl Rl T2 FE! Tl Rl T2 1 2 3 I32 4 Tl Rl T2 FE MIA1 MIBl POAl POBl PKAl PKBl MIA2 MIB2 POA2 POB2 PKA2 PKB2 MIA3 MIB3 POA3 POB3 PKA3 PKB3 MIA4 MIB4 POA4 POB4 PKA4 PKB4 1 K5Al K5Bl K6Al K6Bl 2 2 K5A2 K5B2 K6A2 K6B2 3 3 K5A3 K5B3 K6A3 K6B3 4 4 K5A4 K5B4 K6A4 K6B4 El Ml T2 FE TR2 RR2 E2 M2 T3 R3 TR3 RR3 E3 M3 T4 R4 TR4 RR4 E4 M4 Page 2 of 2 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 11-5 Installation Information Table 11-4 Tip and Ring Assignments 17 and Jli for Digital Bays: 1 through 7 (672-part and SX-200 1 ,3, and 4 (336-par-t) or 1 and 3 (456-par-t) or FD) or 131_’for Digital Bay 2 (336-, 456-port) Lead Designation Slot \ - 2 Plug J7 or 4 Jll or 2 J31 Pin Pair cct ONS or DLC cct LSIGS 26 1 W-BL BL-W 1 Tl Rl 1 27 2 W-O o-w 2 28 3 W-G G-W 3 T2 R2 T3 R3 Tl RI MM1 Ml T2 FE 29 W-BR BR-W WS S-W R-BL BL-R R-O O-R 4 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 R-G G-R 8 34 9 R-BR BR-R 9 35 10 R-S S-R 10 TlO RlO 36 11 37 12 BK-BL BL-BK BK-O O-BK 11 Tll Rll T12 R12 38 BK-G 5 6 7 12 2 T4 R4 T5 R5 T6 R6 T7 R7 3 4 T8 R8 T9 R9 5 6 MM2 M2 T3 R3 MM3 M3 T4 R4 MM4 M4 T5 R5 MM5 M5 T6 R6 MM6 M6 SPARE Page 1 of 2 200 11-6 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Cabling and Cross Connections .<- Table 114 Tip and Ring Assignments (continued) Lead Designation Slot Plug Pin Pair 13 G-BK 39 14 BK-BR BR-BK 1 Tl Rl 1 Tl Rl 40 5 BKS S-BK 2 2 Y-BL BL-Y 3 J7 41 16 T2 R2 T3 R3 Y-O O-Y 4 Jll 42 17 T4 R4 MM1 Ml T2 FE MM2 5 T5 R5 \ or or J31 cct ONS or DLC cct LSIGS SPARE 43 Y-G 18 GY 44 19 Y-BR BR-Y 6 16 R6 45 20 Y-S S-Y 7 17 R7 46 21 V-BL BL-V 8 T8 R8 47 22 V-C o-v 9 T9 R9 48 23 V-G GV 10 TlO RlO 49 24 V-BR BR-V 11 Tll Rll 50 25 V-S S-V 12 T12 T12 2 3 4 5 6 M2 T3 R3 MM3 M3 T4 R4 MM4 M4 T5 R5 MM5 M5 T6 R6 MM6 M6 Paae 2 of 2 - ,_ : L‘. -.. 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 11-7 Installation information Table 11-5 64rcuit PFT Card Tip and Ring Assignments Pin Color Jl Lead Designations 26 W-BL BL-W W-C Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk Rl Tl R2 T2 R3 Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk T3 R4 T4 R5 T5 R6 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 .~ - C-W W-G G-W W-BR BR-W W-S s-w R-BL BL-R R-C O-R R-G G-R R-BR BR-R R-S S-R BK-BL BL-BK BK-C C-BK BK-G G5K BK-BR BR-BK BK-S S-BK Y-BL Trunk T6 Trunk Circuit Trunk Circuit Trunk Circuit Trunk Circuit Trunk Circuit Trunk Circuit Rl Tl R2 T2 R3 T3 Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk Trunk Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit R4 T4 R5 T5 R6 Trunk Circuit Spare Spare Line Circuit Line Circuit Line Circuit 16 Circuit Ciecuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Circuit Rl Tl R2 BL-Y Y-O O-Y Y-G G-Y Line Line Line Line Line Line Line T2 R3 T3 R4 T4 R5 T5 Y5R BR-Y Line Circuit R6 Line Circuit T6 Page 1 of ; 200 11-8 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Cabling and Cross Connections /’ : Table ii-5 ‘. .- &-circuit PFT Card Tip and Ring Assignments (continued) Pin Color Ji Lead Designations 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 Y-s S-Y V-BL BL-V v-o C-V V-G GV V-BR BR-V V-S S-V Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Rl Tl R2 T2 R3 T3 R4 T4 R5 T5 R6 T6 : Page 2 of 2 Notes: 1. There are six circuits 2. More than 9109-096-200+/A one per PFT PFT card Issue 1 may card. be present. Revision 0 200 11-9 Installation Information Table 11-6 Pin Color 26 1 27 W-BL BL-W W-O o-w 2 28 3‘ 29 4 30 5 - W-G G-W W-BR BR-W W-S S-W 31 6 32 7 33 R-BL BL-R R-O R-O R-G 8 34 9 35 10 36 G-R R-BR BR-R RS S-R BK-BL 11 37 12 38 13 BL-BK BK-O O-BK BK-G G-BK 39 14 40 ‘. 15 41 BK-BR BR-BK BKS S-BK Y-BL BL-Y Y-O 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 O-Y Y-G G-Y Y-BR BR-Y 124rcult PFT Card Tip and Ring Assignments P20 Lead Designations P21 Lead Deslgnatlons Station Tl Station RI Line Circuit Tl Line Circuit RI Trunk Tl Station T7 Station R7 Line Circuit T7 Line Circuit R7 TrunkT7 Trunk RI Trunk Circuit Tl Trunk Circuit RI Station T2 Station R2 Trunk R7 Trunk Circuit T7 Trunk Circuit R7 Station T8 Station R8 Line Circuit T2 Line Circuit R2 Trunk T2 Trunk R2 Trunk Circuit T2 Trunk Circuit R2 Line Circuit T8 Line Circuit R8 Trunk T8 Trunk R8 Trunk Circuit T8 Trunk Circuit R8 Station T3 Station R3 Line Circuit T3 Line Circuit R3 Trunk T3 Station T9 Station R9 Line Circuit T9 Line Circuit R9 Trunk T9 Trunk R3 Trunk Circuit T3 Trunk Circuit R3 Station T4 Station R4 Line Circuit T4 Line Circuit R4 Trunk R9 Trunk Circuit T9 Trunk Circuit R9 Station TlO Station RlO Line Circuit TIO Line Circuit RI 0 Trunk T4 Trunk R4 Trunk Circuit T4 Trunk Circuit R4 Station T5 Station R5 Trunk Tl 0 Trunk RIO Trunk Circuit TIO Trunk Circuit RI 0 Station Tll Station RI 1 Line Circuit T5 Line Circuit R5 Trunk T5 Trunk R5 Line Circuit Tll Line Circuit Rll Trunk Tll Trunk RI 1 ; Page 1 of 2 200 II-IO Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Cabling and Cross Connections Table 11-6 124rcuit PFT Card Tip and Ring Assignments (continued) Pin Color 45 20 -46 21 Y-s S-Y V-BL Trunk Circuit T5 Trunk Circuit R5 Station T6 Trunk Circuit Tll Trunk Circuit Rll Station T12 BL-V V-C C-V V-G GV Station R6 Line Circuit T6 Line Circuit R6 Trunk T6 Trunk R6 Station R12 Line Cirouit T12 Line Circuit R12 Trunk T12 Trunk R12 V-BR BR-V V-S Trunk Circuit T6 Trunk Circuit R6 Spare Spare Trunk Circuit T12 Trunk Circuit R12 Spare Spare -47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 P20 Lead Designations s-v P21 Lead Designations Page 2 of 2 9109496-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 11-11 Installation Information Table 11-7 Pl for Analog Bay 4 (456-part) Slot 1 \ or P7 for Analog Bay 5 (456-par-t) cct Pin Color Lines co DID/TIE E&M 1 26 1 W-BL BL-W Tl Rl Tl Rl Tl Rl Tl Rl 2 27 2 28 3 w-o O-W W-G G-W T2 XT2 Fe T3 R3 XT1 T2 R2 4 29 4 W-BR BR-W T4 R4 1 30 5 w-s S-W Tl Rl 2 31 6 R5L BL-R T2 R2 3 32 7 33 8 G-R T3 R3 T4 R4 T2 Ft2 4 R-O O-R R-G 3 2 3 Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments Tl Rl XT2 XT1 1 34 9 R-BR BR-R Tl Rl Tl Rl 2 35 10 36 11 37 RS S-R T2 I32 12 BK5L BL5K BK-O 05K T3 R3 T4 R4 XT2 XT1 T2 FE 1 38 13 BK-G G5K Tl Rl Tl Rl 2 39 14 3 40 15 41 16 T2 FE T3 R3 T4 R4 XT2 XT1 T2 R2 4 BK-BR BR-BK BK-S SBK Y5L 3 4 4 BL-Y TRl Rhl El Ml Tl Rl Tl Rl TRl RR1 El Ml Tl Rl Tl Rl TRl RR1 El Ml Tl RI Tl Rl TRl RR1 El Ml Page 1 of 2 200 11-12 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Cabling and Cross Connections Table 11-7 Slot Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments (continued) cct Pin Color Lines co DIDDIE E&M 1 42 17 43 18 44 Y-O O-Y Y-G G-Y Y-BR Tl Rl T2 Tl Rl Tl Rl Tl Rl TRl 19 45 20 BR-Y Y-S S-Y 46 21 47 V-BL BL-V 2 5 3 4 1 2 6 4 Tl Rl T2 R2 T3 R3 V-C o-v V-G G-V V-BR 22 48 23 49 24 3 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4 RR1 El Ml Tl Rl XT2 XT1 Tl Rl T2 I32 Tl Rl TRl RR1 El Ml T4 R4 BR-V 50 25 XT2 XT1 T2 FE V-S S-V SPARE SPARE Page 2 of 2 Note: For 2-wire 9109-096-20O-NA E&M Trunk Issue 1 operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads. Revision 0 200 11-13 installation Information Table 114 Analog Bay Tlp and Ring Assignments P2 for Analog Bay 4 (456-pat-t) or P8 for Analog Bay 5 (456-part) Slot 1 \ cot Pin Color Lines co 5 26 1 W-BL BL-W T5 R5 T3 R3 6 27 2 W-O o-w T6 R6 XT4 XT3 7 28 3 W-G G-W T7 R7 14 R4 8 29 4 W-BR BR-W T8 R8 5 30 5 W-S S-W T5 R5 T3 R3 6 31 6 32 7 33 8 R-BL BL-R R-O O-R R-G G-R T6 xl-4 R6 T7 R7 T8 R8 xl-3 T4 R4 34 9 R-BR BR-R T5 R5 T3 R3 6 35 10 R-S S-R T6 R6 XT4 XT3 7 36 11 T7 R7 T4 R4 8 37 12 BK-BL BL-BK BK-O O-BK 5 38 13 BK-G G-BK T5 R5 T3 R3 6 39 14 BK5R BR5K T6 R6 XT4 XT3 7 40 15 41 16 BKS S-BK Y5L BL-Y T7 R7 T8 R8 T4 R4 - 2 7 8 5 3 4 8 DlDnlE T2 FL? E&M T2 Fz2 TR2 E2 M2 T2 FE T2 Fi2 TR2 RR2 E2 M2 T2 FE T2 FE TR2 RR2 E2 M2 T8 R8 T2 FE T2 FE! TR2 RR2 E2 M2 Page 1 of 2 200 11-14 Revision 0 9109-096-20SNA Issue 1 Cabling and Cross Connections Table 11-8 Analog Slot cct Pin Color Llnes co DID/TIE E&M 5 42 17 43 18 44 Y-O O-Y Y-G T5 R5 T6 T3 R3 XT4 T2 FE G-Y Y-BR BR-Y Y-S S-Y R6 T7 R7 T8 R8 XT3 T4 R4 T2 FE TR2 RR2 E2 V-BL T5 T3 T2 BL-V V-C C--V V-G G-V R5 T6 R6 T7 R7 R3 XT4 xr3 T4 R4 Fz2 24 V-BR BR-V T8 R8 50 25 V-S S-V 6 -5 7 8 6 Bay Tip and Ring Assignments (continued) 19 45 20 5 46 21 6 47 22 48 23 49 7 8 M2 T2 FE TR2 RR2 E2 M2 SPARE SPARE Page 2 of 2 Note: For 2-wire 9109-096-20O-NA E&M Trunk Issue 1 operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads. Revision 0 200 11-15 Installation Information Table 11-9 Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments 33 for Analog Bay 4 (456-par-t) or P9 for Analog Bay 5 (456-part) Slot 7, cct Pin Color Lines co DID/TIE E&M . 1 26 1 W-BL BL-W Tl Rl 27 2 W-O O-W Tl Rl XT2 XT1 Tl Rl 2 Tl Rl T2 I32 3 28 3 W-G G-W T2 Fi2 4 29 4 W-BR BR-W T3 R3 T4 R4 30 5 W-S S-W Tl Rl 2 31 3 6 32 7 R-BL BL-R R-O O-R 4 33 8 R-G G-R T2 I32 T3 R3 T4 R4 1 34 9 R-BR BR-R 2 35 10 3 36 11 37 - Tl Rl XT2 XT1 T2 FE Tl Tl Rl Rl TRl RR1 El Ml Tl Rl Tl Rl 11 Rl Tl Rl R-S S-R T2 FE 12 BK-BL BL-BK BK-O O-BK T3 R3 T4 R4 XT2 XT1 T2 R2 1 38 13 BK-G G-BK Tl Rl Tl Rl 2 39 3 14 40 15 BK-BR BR-BK BK-S S-BK Y-BL BL-Y T2 FE T3 R3 T4 R4 XT2 Xl-1 T2 Fl2 1 8 9 TRl Rkl El Ml 4 10 4 41 16 TRl RR1 El Ml Tl Rl Tl Rl TRl RR1 El Ml Page 1 of 2 200 11-16 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Cabling and Cross Connections Table II-9 Slot Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments (continued) cct Pin Color Lines co DID/TIE E&M 1 42 17 Y-O O-Y Tl Rl Tl RI Tl 2 43 3 18 44 19 T2 FE? T3 R3 T4 R4 Tl Rl XT2 Rl TRI RR1 El Ml 4 45 20 Y-G G-Y Y-BR BR-Y Y-S S-Y 1 46 21 V-BL BL-V Tl Rl Tl Rl 2 47 22 V-C o-v T2 FE XT2 XT1 Tl RI TRI RR1 3 48 23 V-G G-V T2 R2 El Ml 4 49 24 V-BR BR-V T3 R3 T4 50 25 V-S S-V 11 12 XT1 T2 R2 Tl RI R4 SPARE SPARE IY--rage Note: For 2-wire 9109-096-20O-NA E&M Trunk Issue 1 operation DO NOT connect .3 -z n z OT z RR and TR leads. Revision 0 200 11-17 Installation Information Table 11-10 P4 for Analog Bay 4 @S-port) Slot 7 \ Pin Color Lines co DID/TIE E&M 5 26 1 27 T5 R5 T6 T3 R3 XT4 T2 R2 6 W-BL BL-W W-O T2 FE TR2 7 2 28 3 O-W W-G GW xr3 T4 R4 8 29 4 W-BR BR-W R6 T7 R7 T8 R8 5 30 5 W-S S-W T5 R5 T3 R3 31 6 32 7 33 8 R-BL BL-R R-O O-R R-G GR T6 R6 l7 R7 T8 R8 XT4 XT3 T4 R4 34 9 35 10 R-BR BR-R R-S S-R T5 R5 T6 R6 T3 R3 xl-4 7 36 11 BK-BL BL-BK 8 37 12 BK-O 0-BK T7 R7 T8 R8 5 38 13 BK-G GBK T5 R5 T3 R3 6 39 14 BK-BR BR-BK T6 R6 XT4 XT3 7 40 15 41 16 BK-S !S-BK Y5L BL-Y T7 R7 T8 R8 T4 R4 - 6 7 8 5 6 10 or PI 0 for Analog Bay 5 (456-part) cct 8 9 Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments 8 RR2 E2 M2 T2 Pi2 T2 FEZ XT3 T4 R4 T2 FE TR2 RR2 E2 M2 T2 FE TR2 RR2 E2 M2 T2 FE! T2 FE? TR2 RR2 E2 M2 Page 1 of 2 200 11-18 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Cabling and Cross Connections Table 11-10 Slot - 11 12 Analog Bay Tip and Ring Assignments (continued) cct Pin Color Lines 5 42 17 Y-O O-Y 6 43 18 Y-G G-Y T5 R5 T6 R6 7 44 19 Y-BR BR-Y 8 45 20 Y-S S-Y R8 5 46 21 V-BL BL-V T5 R5 T3 R3 6 47 22 V-C C-V T6 R6 XT4 XT3 7 48 23 49 24 V-G G-V V-BR BR-V T7 R7 T8 R8 T4 R4 50 25 V-S S-V 8 17 R7 18 co DlDnlE T2 FE T3 R3 XT4 XT3 T4 R4 E&M T2 R2 TR2 RR2 E2 M2 T2 Ft2 T2 Ft2 TR2 RR2 E2 M2 SPARE SPARE Page 2 of 2 Note: For 2-wire 9109-09&20O-NA E&M Trunk Issue 1 operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads. Revision 0 200 11-19 Installation Information Table 11-11 interconnect Card Tip and Ring Assignments P19 for Analog Bay 4 (456-part) _’ 8 W-BL 27 W-O o-w T8 R8 W-G T7 R7 T4 R4 2 \ 7 SPARE SPARE BL-W 28 3 29 4 G-W W-BR BR-W T6 R6 XT3 XT4 5 30 5 W-S S-W T5 R5 T3 R3 8 31 6 R-BL BL-R T8 R8 7 32 7 33 8 R-O O-R R-G G-R 17 R7 T6 R6 T4 R4 XT3 XT4 34 9 R-BR BR-R T5 R5 T3 R3 8 35 10 R-S S-R T8 R8 7 36 6 11 37 12 BK-BL BL-BK BK-O 05K T7 R7 T6 R6 T4 R4 XT3 XT4 5 38 13 BK-G G5K T5 R5 T3 R3 4 39 14 BK5R BR5K T4 R4 3 40 15 41 16 BKa S-BK Y5L BL-Y T3 R3 T2 FE 42 17 Y-O O-Y Tl Rl 15 6 14 6 5 13 15 2 1 200 11-20 26 1 Revision 0 T2 FE XT1 XT2 Tl Rl E2 T2 Fe T2 I32 M2 TR2 RR2 T2 Ft2 E2 M2 TR2 RR2 T2 FE E2 M2 T2 Fl2 TR2 RR2 12 FE El Ml Tl Rl 9109-096-20O-NA TRl RR1 Tl Rl Page 1 of 2 Issue 1 Cabling and Cross Connections Table 11-11 Slot Interconnect Card Tip and Ring Assignments (continued) cct Pin Color Lines 4 43 18 Y-G G-Y Y-BR T4 3 14 2 44 19 45 20 co R4 T3 R3 BR-Y Y-S S-Y T2 I%! T2 FE! XT1 XT2 Tl Rl 1 46 21 V-BL BL-V Tl Rl 4 47 V-C C-V T4 R4 3 22 48 23 49 24 V-G G-V V-BR BR-V T3 R3 T2 I32 FE XT1 xi2 50 25 V-S S-V Tl Rl Tl Rl 13 2 1 DIDFIE E&M El Tl Rl T2 Ml TRl RR1 Tl Rl El Ml TRl Tl Rl RR1 Tl Rl Page 2 of 2 Note: For 2-wire E&M Trunk operation DO NOT connect RR and TR leads. . 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 11-21 Installation information Table Ii-12 200 11-22 USOC Connector Pin Designations 32 R-o T T T 7 O-R R R R 33 R-G T E Tl 8 G-R R M RI 34 R-BR T T E 9 BR-R R R M 35 R-S T E T 10 S-R R M R 36 BK-BL T T Tl 11 BL-BK R R RI 37 BK-O T E E 12 O-BK R M Revision 0 9109-09620O-NA M i3e.s.r. 4 -& r) Issue 1 Cabling and Cross Connections Table 11-12 USOC Connector (continued) Pin Designations Connector _’ I RJ2lX RJPEX RJSGX 38 BK-G T T T 13 G-BK R R R 39 BK-BR T E Tl 14 BR-BK R M Rl 40 BK-B T T E 15 B-BK R R M 41 Y-BL T E T 16 BL-Y R M R 42 Y-O T T Tl 17 O-Y R R Rl 43 Y-G T E E 18 G-Y R M M 44 Y-BR T T T 19 BR-Y R R R 45 Y-S T E Tl 20 S-Y R M Rl 46 V-BL T E 21 I Type BL-V I R M 47 V-C I T T 22 o-v R R 48 V-G T Tl 23 G-V R Rl 49 V-BR T E 24 BR-V R M I 50 I 25 V-B spare I S-V spare Page 2 of 2 Notes: 1. RJ21X is a standard trunk. 2. RJ2EX is a two-wire E&M trunk. 3. FIJPGX is a four-wire E&M trunk. 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 11-23 200 11-24 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A. SYSTEM UPGRADE KIT INSTALLATION PROCEDURES Al. ’ Al .1 INTRODUCTION Upgrading is changing one configuration There are two types of upgrades: l l An SX-ZUUPABX uration). can be upgraded of PABX to another to an SX-ZUUDIGITAL An SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (336-par-t configuration, configured, can be upgraded to a 672-port PABX. configuration PABX (466port either basic system of PABX. configor fully Upgrading an SX-200 PABXto an SX-200 DIGITALPABX Al .2 The MITEL SX-200 PABX can be upgraded to an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. In this procedure, the original welded Control cabinet becomes a peripheral cabinet. A new Control cabinet is added to the system. In Chart A2-1 to Chart A2-6 of the procedure, the new Control cabinet is installed beside the original SX-200 Control cabinet. It is equipped with a new console, new stations, trunks or features for bays 1, 2, or 3, and powered up. All testing can be completed, and the new database entered with CDE, including all equipment in the existing SX-200 system. In ChartA2-9 of the procedure, the existing SX-200 Control cabinet is reconfigured as a peripheral cabinet. It is then powered up and added to the operating SX-200 DIGITAL system. Upgrading a 336-part to a 672-part System Al .3 The MI-TEL SX-200 DIGITAL PABX in 336-part configuration, can be upgraded to the 672-port configuration. In this procedure, the original Control cabinet becomes a peripheral cabinet. A new 672-pat-t Control cabinet is added to the system. 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 A-l Installation Information Upgrade Procedures Upgrade Al .4 procedures are listed in Table Al-l. Table Al-l Installation Upgrade Procedures Procedure Chart Upgrade an Existing SX-200 PABX to an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Chart M-1 to Chart A219 \ Upgrade a 336port This chart only 672-par-l system or Basic System to a 672-port describes the conversion of the original will not be complete. Outlines installation System* Chart A3-1 Control cabinet into a peripheral cabinet. procedures for the 672-part system. Installation of the Part Numbers Al .5 Part numbers for the 336- to 672-port upgrade kit are shown in Table Al-2. r Table Al-2 356 to 672-part Upgrade Kit Part Numbers Part Number 200 A-2 9109-l 29-01 O-NA Canada 9109-129-OOO-SA United States Revision 0 9109-09620CMA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures A2. UPGRADE AN SX-200 (45sPORT) PABX TO AN SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Introduction A2.1 Table A2-1 indicates which charts to follow in sequence to upgrade to an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. When these charts are completed: l l l l A new SX-200 PABX. DIGITAL Control cabinet will be installed an SX-200 beside the original The SX-200 tions, trunks, DIGITAL system will be equipped with a new attendant and features for Bays 1, 2, or 3. The SX-200 DIGITAL system will be powered The original system will have become PABX, analog Bays 4 and 5. Notes: PABX SX-200 console, sta- up. an integral part of the SX-200 DIGITAL 1 .This procedure assumes that most of the existing stations and trunks remain the same in the peripheral cabinet as they were in the SX-ZOO system. 2. Expansion is provided by adding the new Control cabinet. The control cards from the SX-ZOO PABX are not needed except for the Scanner card. 3. The following circuits will be disconnected from the SX-200: - music on hold source - paging voice lines - paging control lines - night bell control line 4. The following SX-200 PABX connections SX-200 DIGITAL PABX: are not used after an upgrade to an - console connections, including the connector on the maintenance panel. -test line terminals (still connected to Bay 4, slot 1, circuit 1. - special connections described in Note 3. - RMATS modem or modules - recorded announcement cards @AC). 5. An SX-7008 PABX can also be upgraded to an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX by following this procedure; however, there will never be an analog Bay 5. 6. When positioning the Control cabinet, allow room for any PABX accessories, such as a UPS or ac surge suppressor, or peripherals such as a maintenance terminal. 7. When referring to charts that include instructions for both 336-par-t and 672-part configurations of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, use only those instructions applying to the 336-par-t configuration. 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 A3 installation Information Table A2-1 Charts to Follow to Upgrade an SX-200 PABX to an SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX Activity Basic Chart X Chart 2-l X Chart 3-l Install SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet X Chart 3-2 Label Bays and Relocate Ground Connection X Chart A2-1 Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards X Chart 5-l Identify Analog Card Positions @ Chart A2-2 Install the Main Control Card X Chart 6-l Remove a Module From the Main Control Card X Chart 6-2 Install Floppy Disk Drive X Chart 6-6 Install Bay Power Supply X Chart 6-7 Install Universal Card and Modules # Chart 8-l Install Line (ONS, OPS, COV, or Digital) and DID Trunk Cards # Chart 8-2 Install LS/GS Trunk Card # Chart 8-3 Install Tl-DSl Trunk Card # Chart A2-3 Install Analog Peripheral Install Digital Interface Card # Chart A2-4 Install Analog Peripheral Cards (Peripheral Control, Scanner, Eightstation Line, or SUPERSETLine cards) # Chart A2-5 Install CO Trunk Card (all types) # Chart A2-6 Install E&M Trunk Card # Chart A2-7 Install DID/Tie Trunk Card # Chart A2-8 X Chart 9-2 Power Up Control Cabinet X Chart 94 Add Stations, Trunks and Features to Database X Prepare for Installation Prepare for Installation Install Control Cabinet Unpack and Inspect SX-200 DIGITAL Control Cabinet Handle Printed Circuit Cards Install Digital Control Cards Install Dlgltal Peripheral Cards Cards Bring System Into Service Connect Cables Between System and Cross-connect Field described in para. A2.7 Page 1 of 2 200 A-4 Revision 0 9109-096-20&NA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit installation Table AZ-1 Procedures Charts to Follow to Upgrade an SX-200 PABX to an SX-200 DIGlTAL PABX (continued) Activity Basic, Chart SX-200 PABX Cabinet as Peripheral Cabinet X Chart A2-9 Install Diskettes into Disk Drives on the System X Chart 9-5 Check System Initialization X Chart 9-7 Reconfigure Page 2 of 2 X means: @ means: .# means: Do this chart. Do this chart as required Type and number of circuit cards to be installed vary according to customer requirements. Install Control Cabinet A2.2 To convert an SX-200 PABX to an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, an SX-200 DIGITAL Control cabinet must be added to the existing SX-200 PABX. The procedures for installing the Control cabinet are described in Section 3: Install Cabinets, of this practice. Refer to the following charts to unpack, inspect and install the Control cabinet: 0 Chart 3-1: Unpack and Inspect 9 Chart 3-2: Install SX-200 When you have completed and relocate the grounding SX-200 DIGITAL DIGITAL Control those charts, connection. proceed Control Cabinet Cabinet to Chart M-1, below, to label bays The covers must always be installed over the fans to prevent accidental contact with rotatlng parts.The fans In the upper back door of the Control cabinet are high-airflow devices. Loose foreign objects placed near the fans can be pulled into the impellers. Service and installation personnel must keep a safe distance away from the fans to prevent loose parts of clothing or halr from becoming entangled In the fans. 9109--096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 A-5 Installation Information Chart A2-1 Step Label Bays and Relocate Ground Comments Action Label Bays 1. Remove the bay numbering the fkont door. labels from inside 2. Stick the appropriate cardfile at the back. label onto the inside of each say numbering is shown in :igure A2-1. In 456-par-t configuration, lays 1 and 2 will hold the control shelf. say 3 will be a digital peripheral bay. 3. Keep unused numbers for new bays as the PABX is expanded. Jumbers are supplied for two cabinets. Relocate Ground 4. Connect a temporary jumper between the SX-200 cabinet and the ground wire. 5. Relocate the #6 AWG system ground to the common ground stud in the Control cabinet. 6. Install the intercabinet cabinets. 7. Connect the braid to the ground stud in each cabinet. Do not connect the signal part of the cable. 6. Disconnect the temporary jumper installed in Step 4. Connect s 9. -his keeps up a continuous connection letween the PABX and the building lround (to keep the ground start trunks operational) . Jote: Lighter gauge wire can be used, ‘ince the connection is only needed for I few minutes. cable between the Slgnal Cables on Backplate Signal cabling on the rear of the Control cabinet is shown in Figure A2-2. 200 A-6 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kii Installation I PERIPHERALSHELF Procedures I MAINTENANCE PANEL CONTROL SHELF FOWER DISTFiIB~ION AC FILTER Figure A2-1 Control Cabinet Wiih Digital Peripheral Shelf @%-port Configuration) 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 A-7 Installation Information PFrCmE FCM CABLE MAlNTENhNCE PANELANC CONNECTORS YbnhKcP , Figure A2-2 Rear View of 456-port Control Cabinet - Signal Cables 200 A-8 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures Unpack A2.3 and Handle Printed Circuit Cards Cards are unpacked and handled for the upgraded SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (456-port) as for any SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. The procedures for handling, installing, and removing printed circuit cards are described in Section 5: Handle Printed Circuit Cards, of this practice. Refer to Chart 5-1: Unpack and Handle Printed Circuit Cards, for procedures on handling and installing printed circuit cards in the upgraded system. _’ In the 456-port configuration, analog peripheral cards are used as well as digital peripheral cards. Chart A2-2: Install Analog Peripheral Cards, provides additional ’ instructions for installing analog peripheral cards in the system. Note: Circuit Cards in the 455-part Configuration PABX: The basic 456-par-t system with Bay 2 has a Main Control Card, one Bay Power Supply, and one Floppy Disk Drive (drive A). Bay 2 has up to four digital peripheral cards (two rows of two cards). Digital peripheral Bay 1 has one Bay Power Supply and up to eight digital peripheral cards arranged in two rows (two rows of four). Bay 1 includes the second Floppy Disk Drive (drive B); this drive is powered from Bay 2. Digital peripheral Bay 3 has one Bay Power Supply, a Bay Control Card (BCC), and up to eight digital peripheral cards arranged in two rows (two rows of four), Analog peripheral Bay 4 has a Digital Interface Card, a Scanner card, a Peripheral Interface Card, and up to15 analog peripheral cards . Analog peripheral Bay 5 has a Digital Interface Card and up to12 analog peripheral cards. 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 A-9 installation information Chart A2-2 Step Identify Analog Card Locations Comments Action Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general instructions for unpacking, handling, and installing printed circuit cards. Given in Chart 5-l. Identify CAUTION: Do not install cards yet. Card installation is described in ; Chart A2-4 to Chart A2-8. Analog Card Positions 2. identify the appropriate slots for the analog control cards in the analog peripheral bays. Digltai interface Card: slot 18, analog Bay 4 and 5 (yellow extractors) Peripheral Control Card: slot 20, analog Bay 4 (red extractors) Scanner card: slot 19, analog Bay 4 (orange extractors) 3. Put the line or trunk cards in positions with blue or black color-coded stripes in the analog peripheral bays. The card name is printed on each card. Line cards should be installed in the lowest numbered card positions in the analog peripheral bays. Trunk cards should be installed in the highest numbered card positions in the analog peripheral bays. 4. Lii the card extractors, and slide the card into the slot. Press on the extractors after they mate with the notches in the sheif to seat the card firmly. Each analog peripheral card has two card extractors. The extractors help seat the card firmly in the backplane. Extractors are also used to provide leverage to pull the card free of the backplane connector. Install Digital Control Cards A2.4 The Main Control Card, Floppy Disk Drives and the Bay Power Supply are installed as described in Section 6: Installing Digital Control Cards, of this practice. Refer to the following charts to install the cards listed above: l Chart 6-1: Install the Main Control l Chart 6-6: Install Floppy l Chart 6-7: Install Bay Power Supply Card Disk Drive Where alternative procedures are provided for different configurations, instructions for the 336-pat-t configuration in the above charts. 200 A-10 Revision 0 9109-09820O-NA follow the issue 1 II Em Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures Install Digital Peripheral Cards IQ.5 Digital peripheral cards are installed in the upgraded 8: installing Digital Peripheral Cards, in this practice. install digital peripheral cards: Chart 8-1: l Install Universal Card and Modules 9 Chart 8-2: Install ONS Line Card l Chart 8-2: Install OPS Line Card l Chart 8-2: Install COV Line Card l Chart 8-2: Install Digital Line Card l Chart 8-2: Install DID Trunk Card \ system as described in Section Refer to the following charts to 0 Chart 8-3: Install LS/GS Trunk 9 Chart 8-4: Install Tl-DSI Card Trunk Card Where alternative procedures are provided for different configurations, instructions for the 338-par-t configuration in the above charts. follow the Additional instructions for installing the Tl-DSI Trunk card in the upgraded SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (458-par-t configuration) are provided in Chart A2-3. When you have completed Chart A2-3: l The Tl-DSI trunk card will be unpacked l The Tl-DSI trunk card will be installed. l The Tl adapter l The Tl trunk adapter Notes: and inspected. card will be installed. cable will be attached. I. The Tl-DSl trunk card interfaces to a single Tl trunk circuit. The system supports one Tl-DSl trunk card per digital bay. 2. The Tl clock module must already be installed on the Main Control Card. 3. The Tl trunk card kii includes: Tl-DSl trunk card Tl backplane adapter card Tl adapter cable assembly Hardware kit 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 A-11 Installation Information Chart A23 Install a Tl-DSI Trunk Card in the Upgraded Actlon Step SX-200 DlGlTAL PABX Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general instructions for installing the Tl-lXl Trunk card. Install TI-DSI 2. Given in Chart A2-2 and Chart 6-4. The only changes for the 456-par-t configuration are the slot and connector numbers, listed below. Trunk Card Insert the Tl-DSl slot. Trunk card into its appropriate Dlgltal Bay 1: slot 6 only Dlgltal Bay 2: slot 4 only Dlgital Bay 3: slot 6 only The Tl-DSl trunk card is a high-powered card.There can be only one trunk card in a bay. Install Tl Adapter 3. Also described in Practice 9109-953-011-NA; Install aT1 Trunk Adapter Card and Tl Adapter Cable Assembly. Card Install the Tl Adapter card at the backplane connector associated with the Tl trunk card slot. Digital Bay 1, slot 6: Connector J5 Digital Bay 2, slot 4: Connector J25 Digltal Bay 3, slot 6: Connector J5 Shown in Figure 6-4 (on the left side of the figure). 200 A-12 Revision 0 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures Install Analog Peripheral Cards Install Digital Interface Card A2.6 When you have completed . The Digital Interface l The Digital Interface Chart A2-4: Card will be unpacked Card will be installed and inspected. in analog peripheral bays 3, 4 and 5. Note: The Digital Interface Card has three functions: (a) It converts analog voice signals to digital PCM format and vice versa. (b) It transmits voice signals in digital PCM format between the analog peripheral shelf and the Main Control Card. (c) It provides a message link between the Main Control Card and the Peripheral Control Card on the analog peripheral shelf. Chart A24 Step install Digital Interface Action Card Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. Given in Chart 5-1 and Chart A2-2. Unpack and inspect 2. Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect the Digital Interface Card. 3. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. install Dlgltai interface I 4. 5. Card Slide the Digital Interface Card into its slot(s). Connect Analog Bay 4: slot 18 Analog Bay 5: slot 18 PCM Cable Connect intercabinet PCM cable PN 9108-028-OOO-NA from the Control cabinet to J2 of the DIC card in Bay 4, slot 18. 9109-098-20O-NA The card is shown in Figure A2-8. Issue 1 CAUTION: The connector plug must be positioned so the cable hangs downwards from it. If a connector plug is reversed, equipment function will be impaired. Page 1 of 2 Revision 0 200 A-13 Installation Information Chart A2-4 Install Digltal Interface (continued) Card Step Actlon Comments 6. Connect intershelf PCM cable PN 9108-027-00O-NA between Digital Interface Cards in Bay 4, slot 18, Jl , and Bay 5, slot 18, J3. The intershelf cable connector on Bay 4, Slot 18, Jl only, has the cable exiting in an upward direction. Cable locations are shown in Figure A2-4. Page 2 of 2 Figure 200 A-14 A2-3 Digital Interface Card Revision 0 9109-098-20O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures Jl J2 - J3 / Figure A24 9109-096-200-NA Issue 1 II BAY4 Location of PCM Cables Revision 0 200 A-15 Installation Information Install Analog The following -the -the -the - the .’ Control and Peripheral chart describes ’ l the installation of: Peripheral Control Card (PCC) Scanner Card Eight-station Line Card SUPERSET Line Card. When you have completed l Cards The analog Chart A2-5: peripheral circuit card will be unpacked The analog peripheral circuit card will be installed eral bay and slot (Bay 4 and/or 5). Notes: and inspected. in the appropriate ( analog periph- 1. The PCC controls all basic functions of the analog peripheral shetf cards such as debouncing switchhooks, tone cadencing, signaling on trunks and monitoring hardware activity. It reports to the Main Control Card via the Digital Interface Card. 2. The Scanner card scans the analog peripheral shelf ports to detect signals that require processor action, such as off-hook signals. 3. The Eight-station or DTMF). Line card interfaces up to eight standard telephone sets (rotary 4. The SUPERSETLine telephones. Chart A2-5 Step card interfaces up to eight SUPERSETS Install Analog Peripheral Actlon or SUPERSET 4 Cards Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. liven in Chart 5-l and Chart A2-2. Unpack and Inspect - 2. Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect the circuit card being installed. 3. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. Install Analog Peripheral 4. Cards Slide the Peripheral Control card into analog peripheral Bay 4, slot 20. Slide the Scanner card into analog peripheral Bay 4, slot 19. Slide the Eight-station Line card into its slot(s). Slide the SUPERSET Line card into its slot(s). 200 A-16 Revision 0 rhis card also controls analog leripheral Bay 5. rhis card also controls analog )eripheral Bay 5. 9nalog peripheral bays 4 and 5. 4nalog peripheral bays 4 and 5. 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit installation Procedures ,!’ Install CO Trunk Card The CO Trunk card is available as a type -011/211 or as a type -211/311 card. The installation of both types is described here. When you have completed Chart A2-5: l The CO (central l The trunk busy switches will be set. l The 1oopstarVgroundstat-t switches l The trunk control l The CO trunk card will be installed Notes: office) trunk card will be unpacked switches and inspected. will be set. will be set. in analog peripheral bays 4 and 5. 1. The CO trunk card serves four central office 1oopstaFVgroundstat-t trunks. 2. The type -Oll/lll CO trunk card is shown in Figure A24 3. The type -211/311 CO trunk card is shown in FigureA2-6. TRUNK CDNTRDL SWITCNES MODULAR TYPE ” Figure A2-5 CO Trunk Card (Types -011/111) 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 A-17 Installation Information II In OPEN A i 0 PROMS lOlrm[l[ 1 TRUNK CONTROL SWITCHES Figure A24 CO Trunk Card (Type -211/311) Chart A2-6 install CO Trunk Card Action Step Comments Follow General Procedures - 1. Identify trunk circuit by card position, type and circuit number. 2. Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. Given in Chart 5-1 and Chart A2-2. Unpack and Inspect 3. Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect the CO trunk card. 4. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. The type -Oll/lll CO trunk card is shown in Figure A25. The type -21 l/311 CO trunk card is shown in FigureA24. Page 1 of 4 200 A-18 Revision 0 9109-096-20&NA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures Chart A2-6 Install CO Trunk Card (continued) Step _’ 5. Comments jet Trunk Busy Switches There are eight trunk busy DIP switches. Set trunk busy switches to the required :onfiguration. Usual setting is: l-4 OPEN, 5-8 CLOSED. Settings are described in Figure A2-7 and Table A2-2. 3et Loopstart/Groundstart 6. Switch Set loopstart/groundstart switch to LOOP (1) for 3 loopstart trunk, or to GROUND (2) for a lroundstart trunk. The method of finding out whether a trunk is loopstatt or groundstart is described in Practice 3109-09%35CWA, Troubleshooting in the appendix called Loop Start vs Ground Start Check. jet Trunk Control Switches ‘for trunks with PROMS 80304-0100, 30304-0101,80304-0102,80304-0103, 30304-0004.) Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Set third-wire Function 3rd wire trunk 1 3rd wire trunk 2 3rd wire trunk 3 3rd wire trunk 4 Ignore reversals Release time A Make/break ratio Release time B Not used Not used 7. switches to CLOSED. The usual setting is closed. ‘f trunk is to be used as a dictation trunk, or XT The third-wire lead (when required) is lead is used to give a busy condition, or XT lead is connected to the local exchange: used to record meter pulses, set third-wire - to record meter pulses (extended switches (switches 1, 2,3,4) to OPEN. from the CO) - when dictation or code calling equipment has been taken into service by other trunks and is causing a busy condition. OPEN: recognize earth (ground) from the local exchange as a busy condition CLOSED: no effect 6. If trunk is to ignore line reversals as an incoming call, set IGN REVS (switch 5) to OPEN. If trunk is to recognize line reversals as a incoming call, set IGN REVS to CLOSED. The usual setting is open. Page 2 of 4 9109-098-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 A-19 Installation Information Chart A2-6 Install CO Trunk Card (continued) Comments Set the release time switches (switches 6 and 8) :o the required release time setting. The usual setting is closed. Type 4100 to -0103 PROMS: Valid trunk release times are recognized by the following release time settings on: OPEN: greater than 50 ms of NO LOOP current. CLOSED: greater than 500 ms of NO LOOP current. Type -0004 PROMS: Valid trunk release times are recognized by the following release time settings: Set the make/break CLOSED. switch (switch 7) to Release Time Open Closed Open Closed Closed 50 ms Closed 500ms Open 2.5 s Open Infinite (nonrelease) Trunks with PROM 80304-0004 only. OPEN: 33/66 make/break ratio CLOSED: 40/60 make/break ratio Set switches 9 and 10 to CLOSED. Set Xl Switches A B (Type -211/311 These switches are not used. Card) Dual DIP switches on the module There is one XT switch per trunk. Set XT switch to -48 V or to GND. -48 V: The circuit responds to a -48 Vdc signal (meter pulse or busy condition). GND: The circuit responds to an ground signal (meter pulse or busy condition). Page 3 of 4 200 A-20 Revision 0 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kii Installation Procedures Chart A2-6 Step Action Set High-Impedance Card) 13. install CO Trunk Card (continued) Comments Switch (Type -211/311 Set the high-impedance NORM. switch to HI-Z or Dual DIP switches on the module (shown in Figure A2-8). The high-impedance switch allows the proper impedance on incoming calls. HI-Z: presents the normal impedance to incoming ringing signals, but a high blocking impedance to incoming voice signals. NORM: presents a normal impedance to both ringing signals and voice signals. CAUTION: In Canada, the high-Z switch must be set to HI-Z. Install CO Trunk Card 14. Slide the CO trunk card into its slot(s), Analog peripheral bays 4 and 5. Page 4 of 4 Table A2-2 Outgolng Busy Switch Set To: Trunk Busy Switch Settings Incoming Busy Switch Set To: Result The followlng settlngs IDLE BUSY This is the normal switch setting. If the trunk is made busy by the attendant (using the attendant trunk busy-out feature from the console), an outgoing busy/incoming busy condition results. See BUSY/BUSY, below. BUSY BUSY This is the recommended setting if a trunk is not installed, or is faulty and has to be taken out of service. The trunk cannot be used, either incoming to the PABX, or outgoing from the PABX. The followlng settings are recommended: are NOT recommended: BUSY IDLE Outgoing calls receive a busy tone. Incoming calls receive ringing tone but cannot be answered.Telephone service is paralyzed. IDLE IDLE The trunk operates normally. However, if the trunk is made busy by the attendant (using the attendant trunk busy-out feature from the console), an outgoing busy/incoming idle condition results. See BUSY/IDLE, above. 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 A-21 Installation Information NORMAL 8 = 7 = 6 = 5 = 4 = 3 = 2 = 1= SETTING CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN Figure A2-7 Trunk Busy Switch Settings HIGHIMPEDANCE SWITCHES I / apEN--GND HIOH2 NORMALSEmNo I l=OPEN z=closED Figure A2-G High Impedance Switch Settings (Type -211/311 CO Trunk Card) 200 A-22 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures install E&M Trunk Card When you have completed Chart A2-7: l The E&M trunk card will be unpacked l The trunk busy switches l The trunk impedance l The trunk control l The E&M trunk card will be installed Note: and inspected. will be set. switches switches will be set. will be set. in analog peripheral bays 4 and 5. The E&M trunk card provides two 2- or 4-wire E&M tie trunks. The E&M trunk card is shown in Figure A2-9. won r--l TKUNK 1 I IMPKMNcK 0 0 M Figure A2-9 E&M Trunk Card 9109-096-20O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 200 A-23 Installation Information Chart A2-7 Step 1. Install E&M Trunk Card Actlon Comments dentii trunk circuit by card position, type and :ircuit number. Follow General Procedures 2. =ollow the general procedures for handling circuit :ards. Given in Chart 5-l and ChartA2-2. Unpack and Inspect 3. Nearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and nspect the E&M trunk card. 4. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any famaged or incorrect items. The card is shown in Figure A2-9. 3et Trunk Busy Switches There are eight trunk busy DIP switches on the trunk card faceplate. 5. Set switches 7 and 8 to OUTGOING IDLE or 3UTGOING BUSY as required for the trunks. Normal setting is closed (outgoing idle). Settings are described in Figure A2-10. 6. Set switches 5 and 6 to INCOMING IDLE or NCOMING BUSY as required for the trunks. Normal setting is open (incoming busy). Settings are described in Figure A2-10. 7. Set switches 3 and 4 to STOP DIAL or NOT STOP IIAL as required for the trunks. Normal setting is closed (not stop dial). Stop dial means there can be a delay in transmitting dialed digits. If the delay is more than 4.5 seconds, the PABX assumes the call has been answered. 6. Set switches 1 and 2 (M lead) to M LEAD VORMAL or M LEAD INVERT as required for the :runks. Normal setting is closed: (M lead normal) The position of the M lead switch determines the condition appearing the M lead: Switch Conditions Idle Seized normalinvert ground -48 Vdc -48 Vdc ground on INVERT is necessary when two E&M trunks are connected back to back. jet Trunk Impedance 9. Switches Set the trunk impedance switch(es) to 600 ohms or For 600 or 9OO-ohm operation. The 300 ohms as required for the trunk(s). switches are on the rear face of the trunk card. Page 1 of 2 200 A-24 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures Chart A2-7 step Install E&M Trunk Card (continued) Action Set Trunk Control Comments Switches There are ten DIP switches in the center of the side of the card. The card is shown in Figure A2-11. 10. Set the gain switch(es) (switches 1 and 2) to NORMAL or SPECIAL as required for the trunk(s). Normal setting is closed (normal gain). Normal: provides 0.5 dB insertion loss. Special: provides signal level of +7 dB on the receive pair and -16 dB on the transmit pair, for four-wire applications such as microwave or RF transmission. 11. Set the two-wire/four-wire switches (switches 3 and 4) to 2-WIRE or 4-WIRE as required by the trunk(s). Two-wire: Audio is received on two wires and transmitted on the same two wires (Tip and Ring). Four-wire: Audio is received on two wires (Tip and Ring) and transmitted on two different wires flp and Ring), 12. Set the incoming wink switch(es) (switches 5 and 6) to INCOMING WINK or NOT INCOMING WINK as required by the trunk(s). The normal setting is closed (NOT INCOMING WINK). Incomlng wink: a 180-msec assertion pulse on the M lead that signals the calling party that the trunk is ready to accept digits. 13. Set the outgoing wink switch(es) (switches 7 and 8) toOUTGOING WINK or NOT OUTGOING WINK as required by the trunk(s). The normal setting is closed (NOT OUTGOING WINK). Outgolng wink: The trunk waits for a 100 msec assertion pulse on the M lead before sending digits. 14. Do not set switches 9 and 10. These switches are not used. Install E&M Trunk Card s ‘I 15. Slide the E&M trunk card into its slot(s). Analog peripheral bays 4 and 5. Page 2 of 2 9109-096206-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 A-25 installation Information NORMAL 8 7 6 6 4 3 2 1 SElTiNG CLOSED = CLOSED = OPEN q OPEN = CLOSED = CLOSED q CLOSED q CLOSED q Figure A2-10 Trunk Busy Switch Settings NORMALSElllNG lO=NOTUSED q NOT USED 6 q CLOSED 7 = CLOSED 6 = CLOSED 5 = CLOSED 4 = OPEN3 = OPEN 2 = CLOSED 1= CLOSED .9 Figure A2-11 Trunk Control Switch Settings 200 A-26 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kii Installation Procedures Install DID/Tie Trunk Card When you have completed 9 The DID/tie Chart A2-8: (direct inward 9 The trunk busy switches dial/tie) trunk card will be unpacked will be set. l The trunk impedance switches l The trunk control l The DID/tie trunk card will be installed switches and inspected, will be set. will be set. in analog peripheral bays 4 and 5. Note: The DID/tie trunk card providestwo direct inward dial trunks or looptie trunks. The DID/tie trunk card is shown in Figure A2-12. Figure A2-12 DID/Tie Trunk Card 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 A-27 Installation Information Chart A2-8 Step Actlon f‘allow 1. Install DID/Tie Trunk Card Comments General Procedures I dentify trunk circuit by card position, type and number. C:ircuit 2. F-allow the general procedures for handling circuit C:ards. Given in Chart 5-l and ChartA2-2. ‘I Jnpack and Inspect 3. 4. \rwearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and iInspect the DID trunk card. The card is shown in Figure A2-12. (>omplete repair tag, repack, and return any or incorrect items. Cjamaged Ejet Trunk Busy Switches There are eight trunk busy DIP switches on the trunk card faceplate. C 5. set switches 7 and 8 to OUTGOING IDLE or i OUTGOING BUSY as required for the trunks. Normal setting is closed (outgoing idle), as described in Table A2-3. 8. C jet switches 5 and 6 to INCOMING IDLE or i NCOMING BUSY as required for the trunks. Normal setting is open (incoming busy), as described in Figure A2-13. 7. C jet switches 3 and 4 to STOP DIAL or NOT STOP ; IIAL as required for the trunks. Normal setting is closed (not stop dial). Stop dfal means there can be a delay n transmitting dialed digits. If the jelay is more than 4.5 seconds, the ‘ABX assumes the call has been answered and sends the digits. 8. C set switches 1 and 2 (BG-PULS) to LOOP ; IJLSING or BAmERY AND GROUND PULSING i IS required for the trunks. Vormal setting is closed (loop oulsing). Loop pulsing: When this is set, Tip Decomes 98 V, and Ring becomes 0 V. Since the distant party has normal battery feed, the effective Tip-Ring voltage drop is 98 V. This allows for longer loop dialing. s 9. !Set Trunk Impedance Switches 4Set SW1 , SW2, and SW3 switches to 600 ohms or I300 ohms as required for the trunks. !set Trunk Control 10. Switches For 600- or 9OO-ohm operation. There are 10 trunk control switches in the middle of the board. !Set switches 1,2, (switch B) and 3 and 4 (switch I4) as required for the trunk(s). Shown in Figure A2-14 and Table A2-3. Page 1 of 2 200 A-28 Revision 0 9109-09620&NA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kii Installation Procedures Chart A2-8 Step Action Comments 11. Set the Incoming wink switches incoming wink switch(es) (switches 5 and 6) to INCOMING WINK or NOT INCOMING WINK as required by the trunk(s). The normal setting is closed (NOT INCOMING WINK). lncomlng wink: a 18&msec assertion pulse on the M lead that signals the calling party that the trunk is ready to accept digits. 12. Set the outgoing wink switch(es) (switches 7 and 8) to OUTGOING WINK or NOT OUTGOING WINK as required by the trunk(s). The normal setting is closed (NOT OUTGOING WINK). Outgoing wink: The trunk waits for a 1 OO-msec assertion pulse on the M lead before sending digits. 13. Do not set switches 9 and 10. These switches are not used. \’ \ Install DID/Tie Trunk Card (continued) Install DIDme 14. Trunk Card Slide the DID/Tie trunk card into its slot(s). Trunk cards should be installed in highest numbered slots. Page 2 of 2 NORMAL 8 7 8 5 4 3 2 1 q q = = q = = = SEITING CLOSED CLOSED OPEN OPEN CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED Figure A2-13 Trunk Busy Switch Settings 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 A-29 Installation Information ,-OPEN TRUNKTVPE BEE TABLE) ’ I I!cYEt \ 10 = NOT USED 9 = NOT USED 6 = CLOSED 7 = CLOSED 6 = CLOSED 5 = CLOSED I[ Figure A2-14 Trunk Control Switch Settings Table A2-3 for Switches A and B Switch A Trunk Type DID trunk Settings I CLOSED Switch B I CLOSED Loop tie trunk CLOSED OPEN Incoming dial - outgoing auto OPEN CLOSED Not used OPEN OPEN I 200 A-30 Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit Installation Procedures Bring Upgraded SX-200 DIGITAL System Into Service Cable to Cross-connect A2.7 Field and Power Up Control Cabinet The upgraded SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, 456port configuration, is cabled to the cross-connect field and powered up in the same manner as the 336-port configuration. The procedures for bringing the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX into service are described in Section 9: Bring System into Service, of this practice. Refer to the following charts to cable to the cross-connect field and power up the Control cabinet: 9 Chart 9-2: Connect . Chart 93: Cables Power Up Control Between PABX and Cross-connect Field Cabinet Existing station and trunk connections should be kept the same for both systems. This minimizes wiring changes. These stations can be located beside the SX-200DIGlTAL PABX to make testing easier. It also minimizes disruption to the existing PABX. Stations, trunks and features must be added to the database. Procedures for CDE changes are described in Practice 9109-096-210-NA: Customer Data Entry. ) WARNING The fans in the upper back door of the 456-port Control cabinet are high-airflow devices. Loose foreign objects placed near the fans can be pulled into the impellers. Service and installation personnel must keep a safe distance away from the fans to prevent loose parts of clothing or hair from becoming entangled in the fans. The covers over the fans prevent accidental contact with rotattng parts and must always be installed. ( Reconfigure SX-ZOO PABX Cabinet as Peripheral Cabinet This chart provides the procedure to follow for upgrading cabinet to a new SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Peripheral completed Chart A2-9: l The original SX-200 l It will be reconfigured 0 The “new” peripheral Notes: cabinet will be powered as a peripheral cabinet down. cabinet. will be added to the system. 1. Expansion is provided by adding the new Control cabinet. The control cards from the SX-200 PABX are removed except for the Scanner Card. 2. The following circuits must be disconnected - music on hold source - paging voice lines - paging control lines - night bell control lines 3. The upgrade is completed 9109-09~20O-NA an existing SX-200 PABX Cabinet. When you have Issue 1 from the SX-200 PABX: at a time when there is no traffic. Revision 0 200 A-31 Installation Information Chart A2-9 Reconfigure Step SX-200 PABX Cabinet Action as Peripheral Cabinet Comments Dower Down SX-200 PABX 1. _’ Jnlock and open the front door of the operating >ontrol cabinet. 2. set the main cabinet ac power input switch to OFF. 3. Disconnect the main ac power input to the cabinet. 4. Jnlock and open rear door. 3emove Circuit Cards 5. Nearing the antistatic wrist strap, remove the ,ollowing circuit cards from the old SX-200 PABX: - console - RCP -tone - IPC - memory (if present in position 21 or 22) - receiver -PAD -RAC 6. Dackage the cards in antistatic bags and shipping :artons for return to the supplier. Remove Cables and Interface s qrom the - 6. Remove console interface boards. 9. Replace the antistatic wrist strap. 10. ixisting station and trunk cards, and he Scanner card, remain in their original positions. Boards 7. Connect PABX .ocated on lower half of rear door of he operating Control cabinet. : rear of the cabinet, remove the following: console cables intershelf cables Pl 01 and P102 printer cable The shelf must be loosened and noved forward to access the screws n the boards. Printer Cable to SX-200 DIGITAL Connect the printer cable, if present, to the printer port on the back of the cabinet. Remove Consoles 11. Remove all existing SX-200 PABX consoles from the system. Page 1 of 2 200 A-32 Revision 0 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kit installation Chart A2-9 Reconfigure Action Step Connect 12. SX-200 PABX Cabinet as Peripheral (continued) PFT Card in Peripheral Cabinet Install Circuit Cards in Peripheral Add Peripheral Control Card to Bay 4 slot 20 and the Digital Interface Card to Bay 4 (and Bay 5) slot 18 14. If peripheral shelf card assignments are to be changed, reposition the cards at this time. 15. Add new cards. PCM Cables in Peripheral In Control Cabinet Cabinet Install miscellaneous features such as music on hold, paging, and night bells. Power Up Peripheral - Existing station and trunk assignments in the SX-200 cabinet should not be changed at this time. This minimizes wiring changes. Connect the PCM cables. Install Features 17. Note: In the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, TBl-7 is called TB401-7. An SX-700 cabinet can be upgraded to an SX-200 DIGITAL cabinet by tollowing this chart; however, there cannot be a Bay 5. In an SX-700 cabinet, the PFT monitor cable should be connected between P18 of the Interconnect Card and J14. Cabinet 13. 16. Cabinet Comments Connect a PFT monitor cable between P18 of the interconnect card , and TBl-7 of the PFT card in the SX-200 cabinet (now the SX-200 DIGITAL peripheral cabinet). Connect Procedures These features were removed from the SX-200 cabinet. Cabinet AC power LED on the back door power supply is on. 16. Plug the line cord into the ac receptacle. 19. Turn on breaker at rear of cabinet on the back door power supply. 20. Open the front door of the peripheral cabinet. 21. On the maintenance switch to ON. 22. Close and lock the front door. panel, set the system power SYSTEM POWER LED lights. Power supply EQUIPMENT SHELF POWER LED lights. Page 2 of 2 9109-99820O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 A-33 Installation Information Install Diskettes on Disk Dr’nres When the system has been powered up, floppy Refer to the following charts for the appropriate l Chart 9-5: Install Diskettes l Chart 9-7: Check System disks can be installed procedures: into Disk Drives on the SX-200 on the system. DIGITAL Initialization Where alternative procedures are provided for different configurations, instructions for the 335-part configuration in the above charts. 200 A-34 PABX Revision 0 9109-096-20O-NA follow the Issue 1 Appendix A - System Upgrade Kii Installation Procedures A3. UPGRADE A3.1 A 336-PORT When you have completed 0 The existing Control 672-port system. Notes: SYSTEM TO A 672-PORT SYSTEM Chart A3-1: cabinet will be converted to the peripheral cabinet for a 1. When you have finished this chart, installation of the 672-part system will not be complete. Refer to Section 3 for installation procedures for the 672-par-t system. 2. The Upgrade Kii contains: -blanking panel (narrow) - blanking panel (wide) - conversion hardware - adapter plate - peripheral cardfile with one backplane - EDG cable 75 cm (30 in.) - bay number labels Chart A3-1 Upgrade Step a 336-part Basic System to a 672-part System Comments Actlon Power Down System - 1. Unlock and open the front door of the operating Control cabinet. 2. Unlock the disk drive doors and latches. 3. Remove any diskettes from the disk drives. 4. Set to off, the main cabinet ac power input switch. 5. Disconnect the main ac power input to the cabinet. 6. Unlock and open rear door. 7. Remove the line cords from the bay power supply cards. 6. Cut the tie wraps holding power cords to the sides of both card files. The driies must not be active when diskettes are removed. ,ocated on lower half of rear door of :he operating Control cabinet. Remove Cables 9. Identify and remove the PCM cables from the backplane. 10. Identify and remove the telecommunication from the backplane. cables Page 1 of 4 9109-09620O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 200 A-35 Installation Information Chart A3-1 Upgrade Step a 336-port Basic System to a 672-port (continued) Action System Comments qemove Cards The cards are reused in the new ;72-port system. IT.’ Nearing the antistatic wrist strap, remove all the zards from the cabinet. Described in Section 2. 12. Store each card in an antistatic bag. 13. and e) points to the line of information which may be modified. 3. The cursor line: this area repeats the line of data marked data which may be modified. 4. The softkey area: this is usually 2 lines, and contains actions within the form. 9109-096-21O-NA Issue1 Revision 0 by the cursor, and contains the softkeys used to perform 210 2-l Customer Data Entry Column Tiile Area Display Area Cursor Line Softkey Area -I - - 1 6 3 8 2 7 4 9 5 0 Figure 2-l CDE Terminal Display Areas Attendant Console 2.2 On-site Customer Data Entry can be performed via the Attendant Console. The Console’s softkeys and display facilitate this task. The display has four lines of 80 characters. These lines are: the header line, the command line (which displays the data that can be edited) and two lines for the 10 softkeys. Note that there are some forms which have two header lines and only one line for the softkey display. Figure 2-2 shows the 3 main screen areas of atypical they are: CDE form on a terminal 1. The column title area: this is used to title the columns of information 2. The cursor line: this area repeats the line of data marked data which may be modified. s 3. The softkey area: this is usually 2 lines, and contains actions within the form. 210 2-2 Revision 0 interface; in the CDE form. by the cursor, and contains the softkeys used to perform 9109-096-21O-NA issue 1 Equipment Used for Customer Data Entry - Column Tie Area Display Area F Sofckey Area - [Fl [Fe F2 F7 F3 v3 [F4 [F5 IF9 FO Figure 2-2 CDE Console Display Areas Levels of Access to Customer 2.3 Data Entry The system provides five password are, in descending order of priority: l Installer l Maint 1 l Maint 2 l Supervisor l Attendant protected levels of CDE access. These The access for any of these levels (except Installer) can be set to ‘read/write ‘no access’ or ‘read only access’ for each CDE form. levels access’, An attendant may be restricted, for example, to moves of station numbers and review of Pickup Groups only. Similarly, a maintenance person may be given access to Class-of-Service modifications and station/SUPE/?SET” telephone additions but not to ARS programming. Installers must be able to access the entire database. When programming from a console, the user can exit CDE Mode (for Call Handling) by pressing any hardkey on the Attendant Console. Pressing the FUNCTION key and then the APPLICATION softkey automatically returns the console to CDE Mode. 9109-09&21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 2-3 Customer 210 2-4 Data Entry Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 3 ’ OPERATION Loading of System Software 3.1. When initializing the system, 1. Bay 2 or Bay 0 (672-part are inserted. the following systems) steps are necessary for correct operation: power supply must be on before the two diskettes 2. Position diskette A in Bay 2 disk drive and diskette B in Bay 1 disk drive; refer to the illustration on the disk drive door for proper diskette insertion. Refer also to Practice 9109-096200-NA, Installation Information, for the power-up procedures. 3. The SX-200 FD requires kettes are inserted. the control node power supply be on before the two dis- 4. For the SX-200 FD, position diskette A in the upper disk drive and diskette B in the lower disk drive. Refer to Practice 9109-096200-NA, Installation Information, for the power-up procedures. (1 Bay power supply must not be turned on or off while diskettes are In place. CDE Access from a terminal 3.2 The login procedure for initial CDE access steps, These steps are: 1. Specify the terminal (from a terminal) consists of four basic type: I- VT100 COMPATIBLE 2- TTY TYPE (suppresses 3-IBM PC graphic characters) 2. Select the function: I- MAINTENANCE 2- CDE 6 QUIT 3. Enter the level of access: INSTALLER, MAI NT1 , MAINT2, SUPERVISOR ATTENDANT or 4. Enter the password 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 (the default password is 7000). Revision 0 210 3-1 Customer Data Entry After log in, the terminal numbers of the available :57 displays the top level CDE form - a list of the names forms (see Figure 3-l). 28-NOV-89 alarm status and = MAJOR FORMS 81 83 ES 87 89 II 13 = = = = = = = 15 = 17 19 21 23 25 27 = = = = = = ENTER j-QUIT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION COS DEFINE TENANT INTERCONNECTION TABLE CONSOLE ASSIGNMENTS STATIONS/SUPERSET TELEPHONES DATA CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTORS DIAL-IN TRUNKS HUNT GROUPS CALL REROUTING TABLE ARS: DiSf ZONE DEFINITION ARS: ROUTE DEFINITION ARS: ROUTE PLANS ARS: MAXIMUM DIALED DIGITS FORM NUM : 82 64 86 66 16 12 14 16 16 20 22 24 FEATURE ACCESS CODES SYSTEM OPTIONS/SYSTEM TIMERS q TENANT NIGHT SWITCHING CONTROL q ATTENDANT LDN ASSIGNMENTS = PICKUP GROUPS q DATA ASSIGNMENT q NON-DIAL-IN TRUNKS = TRUNK GROUPS q MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM PORTS = ARS: COR GROUP DEFINITION q ARS: MODIFIED DIGIT TABLE q ARS: ROUTE LISTS 26 q ARS: DIGIT STRINGS 26 q FORM ACCESS q q RESTRICTION DEF'N m 7-TOP &BOTTOM 9- B- Figure 3-1 CDE Top Level Form The command line displays ENTER FORM NUMBER:. Select aform by entering form number. It is not necessary for the desired form number to be selected display area. Press the ENTER softkey. CDE Access from the Attendant 3.3 The login procedure following steps: Console consists of the key. 2. Press the APPLICATION s Console for initial CDE access from the Attendant 1. Press the FUNCTION avalid in the softkey. 3. Press the CDE softkey. 4. Select a level of access. 5. Enter the password 6. Press the ENTER (default is lOOa). softkey. When the CDE application has been selected, CDE Form. See Figure 3-2. 210 3-2 Revision 0 the Console LCD displays the top level 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Operation FORMS 01 = SYSTEMCONFIGURATION 02 = FEATUREACCESS CODES ENTER FORM NUM: [F6 QUIT [F7 TOP [F8 BOTTOM IF9 W Figure 3-2 Available Forms: Attendant Console Display The lower command a valid form number. the upper command line displays ENTER FORM NUMBER:. Select a form by entering It is not necessary to have the desired form number displayed on line. Press the ENTER softkey. Form Editing General 3.4 The forms in the CDE package have several columns and lines of information. On the Attendant Console, or on a terminal that has cursor control keys, the left and right arrow keys ( + and + ) move the cursor from field to field on the command line. On a terminal, the TAB and DEL keys perform an equivalent function. Note that both the DEL and left arrow keys delete edited data as the cursor moves left. The up and down arrow keys move the cursor up and down the form. On a terminal, the LINE FEED key also moves the cursor down the form. Note also that the RETURN key on a terminal performs the same function as the ENTER softkey. On the Attendant Console, cursor movement is indicated by the underscore character (J. On the terminal, cursor movement is indicated by a flashing solid block and by a line pointer (represented by > < characters at the ends of the screen line). From the Top Level CDE Form On the terminal interface, the line at the cursor position is displayed on the command line. Press the cursor control keys to move the cursor through the list a line at a time. When the cursor reaches the bottom (or top) data line, the list will scroll up (or down) if there are more items on the list to display. Press the TOP or BOllOM softkeys to move immediately to the top or bottom of the list. On the console interface, the word FORMS is on the header line. Under this are two command lines and one row of softkeys. See Figure 3-2. The upper command line displays the names and numbers of the first two available forms. Press the cursor control keys to display the names and numbers of subsequent forms, two at a time. Press the TOP or BOTTOM softkeys to move immediately to the top or bottom of the list. Refer to Table 3-1 for the complete list of available forms for each software generic. Exit from CDE 3.5 To exit from CDE, press the QUIT softkey at the Forms level. The terminal the application level; the system is now ready for another application Maintenance). 9109-096-21 O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 returns to (such as 210 3-3 Customer Data Entry Table 3-l Number (Generic Customer (All Cther Form Name Generics)* 01 02 03 System Configuration Feature Access Codes COS Define System Options/System Timers Tenant Interconnection Table Tenant Night Switching Control Console Assignments Attendant LDN Assignments StationsBUPERSETTelephones Pickup Groups Data Circuit Descriptor Data Assignment Trunk Circuit Descriptors Non-DiaHn Trunks DiaCln Trunks Trunk Groups Hunt Groups Miscellaneous System Ports Call Rerouting Table ARS: COR Group Definition ARS: Day Zone Definition ARS: Modified Digit Table ARS: Route Definition ARS: Route Lists ARS: Route Plans ARS: Digit Strings ARS: Maximum Dialed Digits Form Access Restriction Def’n. DTE Profile Device Interconnection Table System Abbreviated Dial Entry CDE Data Print Account Code Entry Directed IO Global Find Access Code Modem Assignment Guest Rm SUPERSET Keys Template ACD Keys Template ACD Agent Groups ACD Supervisors ACD Paths Tl Link Descriptors Tl Link Assignment Network Synchronization Key System Telephones Key System Toll Control 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11+ 12* 13 14 15 16 17 16 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 26 13 14 15 16 17 16 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 29* 30 31 32 33 29 30 31 32 34* 35 36** 3F 3639404142** 43** 44* 4546rrn ** These * Generics” Forms Not available refers to Generic are not available in Generic 1002, 1002, in Generic Generic Generic 1002, 1003 1003, Generic Forms 45 and 46 are available only in Generic 1004. 4 These Forms in Generic FPKG are not available Generic 1005 (Non-ACD), * 210 3-4 Forms Number 1001) 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 06 09 10 11 12 * “All Other Data Entry 1005 1004, FPKG Generic 1 and Generic Revision 0 and Generic 1 and Generic 1005 FPKG 1005 1005. 1005 LIT96. 1 and Generic 1005 LITQ6. LIT96. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Operation ,’ Softkeys Available in Most CDE Forms : 3.6 The following softkeys appear in most regardless of which form they appear in. forms. They have the same purpose, QUIT: Pressing the QUIT softkey exits from the current form and returns the display to the previous -another form, or the level where the forms are selected (see Figure 3-1). Also, if another softkey was activated, pressing the QUIT softkey returns the display to the previous state. CANCEL: This softkey appears after a programming error has occurred. Pressing the CANCEL softkey returns the display to the level where the programming error was made. The CANCEL softkey appears with an error message. Refer to Appendix A for a list of these error messages. BAY/SLT/CCT: Instead of moving the line pointer to the desired line of the form, the programmer can call it up directly by specifying the bay, slot and circuit. Pressing the BAY/SLT/CCT softkey displays Bay: Slot: Circuit: on the command line. The cursor appears to the right of the Bay: prompt. A single digit specifies the bay location. When a valid digit has been entered, the TAB or => cursor key can move the cursor to the Slot field. If the programmer enters an invalid number, the system inhibits subsequent cursor movement. Use the DEL or c= cursor key to delete the incorrect entry. When the slot number has been entered, the ENTER softkey appears. DELETE: This softkey appears when the command line is displaying data. Pressing the DELETE softkey followed by the ENTER softkey removes the selected entry from the form. ENTER: This softkey appears only after data for an entry has been modified. Pressing the ENTER softkey stores the change in the database. Note: in some forms, it is necessary to press ENTER for every change. Form 01 is one exception to this rule. TOP: Pressing the TOP softkey moves the line pointer to the first line of the form. The command line displays the first line. BOTTOM: Pressing form. The command the BOTTOM line displays softkey moves the line pointer to the last line of the this line. * MORE *: When the MORE softkey is pressed, a new set of softkeys are displayed, Most forms with this softkey have two sets of softkeys; some forms have three. ,:’ 910949~21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 3-5 210 3-6 Revision 0 91094X6-21 O-NA Issue 1 4 ’ CDE FORM DESCRIPTIONS Form 01 - System Configuration 4.1- \ This form specifies the intended location of each peripheral card for the system (see Figure 4-l). If the peripheral cards are installed before the system is programmed, this form enables the configuration of the system according to the actual installation. If the system is programmed prior to the peripheral card installation, this form acts as a guide during the installation process. If the installed card type does not match the card type in the PROGRAMMED field, then that device does not function. and the card alarm LED will flash. When the system is programmed, the CDE software uses the PROGRAMMED field of this form to generate a list of physical location (bay, slot and circuit) numbers that can be programmed in subsequent forms. These forms include: 9 Form 07, Console Assignments l Form 08, Attendant l Form 09, Station and SUPERSETTelephones l Form 12, Data Assignment l Form 14, Non-Dial-In l Form 15, Dial-In l Form 18, Miscellaneous 0 Form 36, Modem LDN Assignments Trunks Trunks System Ports Assignment l Form 43, Tl Link Assignment l Form 44, Tl Network Synchronization l Form 46, Key System Telephones When a device is assigned to a physical appropriate card type in this form. 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 location, Revision 0 the system first checks the 210 4-l Customer Data Entrv -89 BAY SLT 01 01 i: El 02 03 04 85 05 05 85 65 86 86 06 01 81 t: 01 i: :: 01 l-LINE CARDS ;-QUIT alarm CCT PROGRAMMED ONS LINE status INSTALLED q MAJOR COMMENTS CARD LS/GS TRUNK CARD UNIVERSAL CARD CONSOLE MODULE 03 04 - MUSIC PAGER MODULE UNIVERSAL CARD E & M TRUNK MODULE E & M TRUNK MODULE ImS LINE 2-TRUNK CARD CARDS 7+&YlSLT/CCT Figure 4-l 1 3-UNIVERSAL 4-SYSTEM TYPE 5-CONFIGURE B-DELETE g-VERIFY DATA 0- Form 01 Layout Field Description BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields specify the physical location of each card type. The circuit number represents the physical location of each module on the Universal Card. PROGRAMMED: Specifies the intended location of the required card types. Data can be assigned to the PROGRAMMED field before the cards are installed. INSTALLED: The data in the INSTALLED field reflects the actual installed system updates this field; the installer cannot edit it. COMMENTS: programmer’s cards, The This field stores additional data (a maximum of 20 characters), for the reference. The system does not use this information for call processing. Softkeys I LINE CARDS: Programs the selected card slot as a line card. For digital bay equipment, 4 softkeys are presented: ONS LINE, OPS LINE, DIGITAL LINE and COV LINE. For analog bay equipment, 2 more softkeys are presented: STATION and SUPERSET, ONS LINE: Programs the selected card slot as an ONS Line Card. Pressing the ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED field displays the ONS LINE CARD prompt. OPS LINE: Programs the selected card slot as an OPS Line Card. Pressing the ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED field displays the OPS LINE CARD prompt. The OPS Line Card is a high power card and is restricted to the upper slots of any digital bay. DIGITAL LINE: Programs the selected card slot as a DIGITAL line card. Pressing the ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED field displays the DIGITAL LINE prompt. 210 4-2 Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions COV LINE: Programs the selected card slot as a COV Line Card. Pressing the ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED field displays the COV LINE prompt. The COV Line Card is a high power card and is restricted to the upper slots of any digital bay. STATION: Programs the selected card slot as a Station Line Card. Pressing the ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED field displays the STATION LINE CARD prompt. The Station Line Card is an analog bay card and is restricted to analog bay programming. SUPERSET: Pressing the field displays is an analog Designates the selected card slot as a SUPERSET Line Card. ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED the SUPERSETLINE CARD prompt. The SUPERSETLine Card bay card and is restricted to analog bay programming. TRUNKCARDS: Programs the selected card slot as atrunk card. If the slot is in a digital peripheral bay, three softkeys appear for selection of trunk card type: LS/GS TRUNK, 6 CCT DID and Tl TRUNK. For analog bay equipment, 3 different softkeys are presented: CO TRUNK, E&M TRUNK and DID/TIE. LS/GS TRUNK Programs the selected card slot as a LS/GS Trunk Card. Pressing the ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED field displays the LWGS TRUNK CARD prompt. Tl TRUNK: Programs the selected card slot as a Tl Trunk Card. Pressing the ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED field displays the Tl TRUNK CARD prompt. Tl Trunk cards can be programmed in slot 6 in digital bays only (exception - Combo Bay 2: slot 4 only). Only 1 Tl Trunk card is permitted per bay. 6 CCT DID: Programs the selected card slot as a DID Trunk Card. Pressing the ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED field displays the DID TRUNKCARD prompt. The 6 CCT DID card is a high powered card and is restricted to the upper slots of any digital bay. The system generates an error message if this card is placed in any other slot. CO TRUNK Programs the selected card slot as a CO Trunk Card. Pressing the ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED field displays the CO TRUNK CARD prompt. The CO Trunk Card is an analog bay card and is restricted to analog bay programming. E & M TRUNK: Programs theselected card slot as an E&M Trunk Card. Pressing the ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED field displays the E 81 M TRUNK CARD prompt. The E&M Trunk Card is an analog bay card and is restricted to analog bay programming. DID/TIE: Programs the selected card slot as a DID/Loop Tie Trunk Card. Pressing the ENTER softkey completes the selection and the PROGRAMMED field displays DID/TIE TRUNK CARD prompt. The DID/Loop Tie Trunk Card is an analog bay card and is restricted to analog bay programming. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 Customer Data Entry UNIVERSAL: Designates that card slot as the Universal Card. Three further softkeys are presented for the programming of the Universal card modules: MUSIC PAGER, E&M MODULE and CONSOLE. Note that the Universal Card can only be assigned to those card slots rated for high power consumption (these are denoted by a square symbol on the card shelf; low power slots are denoted by a circle symbol). Note: The system automatically programs DTMF Receivers where they are installed, provided nothing is already programmed for that circuit. These circuits must be in place in order to program night bell relays and alarms in CDE Form 18. .’ - MUSIC PAGER: Programs the selected module as a Music on Hold/Pager Module. The PROGRAMMED field displays MUSIC PAGER MODULE. Each MOH/Pager Module has a power rating of 1. Therefore, a Universal Card can support four of these modules. \ E&M MODULE: Programs the selected module as an E&M module. The PROGRAMMED field displays E&M. Each E&M module has a power rating of 3 (a maximum of three per Universal Card). CONSOLE: Programs the selected circuit as a Console Module. The PROGRAMMED field displays CONSOLE MODULE. Since the Universal Card has a power rating of 10, and each Console Module has a power rating of 5, a Universal Card can support a maximum of two Console Modules. SYSTEM TYPE: There are 5 system variants, two of which are interchangeable: l 336Port - This variant is digital and cannot be changed. l 456Port - This variant can be interchanged with the 48O-port. l 480-Port - This variant can be interchanged with the 456-part. l 672-Port - This variant is digital and cannot be changed. l SX-200 FD -This variant is digital and cannot be changed. The SYSTEM TYPE softkey appears only on 336,456, or 48O-por-t systems. On these systems the programmer cannot select the 672-pat-t or the FD variant. Note: the 672-part variant is not available with Generic 1001 or Generic 1002. Note: The SX-200 FD is only available with Generic 1005. Pressing the SYSTEM TYPE softkey identifies the current system type and displays a prompt requesting the user to enter the new system type via one of two softkeys available (48&PORT, 336-PORT, 4!5&PORT). Entering a new system type, and pressing the ENTER softkey, resets the system and the following is displayed on the command line: Update is in progress and SYSTEM RESET will follow. Please wait. CONFIGURE: Before the system can function properly, the PROGRAMMED field must match the INSTALLED field. Pressing the CONFIGURE softkey matches the PROGRAMMED field to the INSTALLED field. Note that devices can be assigned to the 210 44 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions cards in the PROGRAMMED field but the card type cannot change. The CONFIGURE softkey cannot be pressed if any device is specified (e.g., defining a station in Form 09, Station/SUPH?SETTelephones). When a new peripheral card is added to the system, it is necessary to manually update the PROGRAMMED field. The INSTALLED field updates upon exiting and t-e-entering this form. DATA: Pressing the VERIFY DATA softkey begins a series of system tests on the database. The command line displays a message as each test completes successfully. These messages are: VERIFY _ PLID TO SWID CONVERSION SUCCESSFUL ALL RECEIVERS ARE IN VALID STATES ALL HUNT GROUPS ARE VALID ALL TRUNK GROUPS ARE VALID ALL PICKUP GROUPS ARE VALID ALL SUPERSET KEYS ARE VALID ALLTRUNKNUME3ERSAREVALID DISK TO RAM DATA BASE COMPARISON INlTMTED. DISK DATA BASE IS (VALID)/(CORRUPTED) PLEASE WAIT..... If a test fails, the command line displays an error message and creates a maintenance log. Refer to Practice 9109--096--35&NA, Troubleshooting. When all tests are complete, the form reverts to the original softkey display. The standard softkeys BAY/SLT/CCT, CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, **MOREkX and QUIT are also provided. Note: Before a card can be deleted, any devices programmed on the card, or associated with circuits on the card must be deleted or disassociated first, using the appropriate form. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4.45 Customer Data Entry Form 02 - Feature Access Codes 4.2 .’ This form specifies the Feature Access Codes for the system (see Figure 4-2). Feature Access Codes can be a maximum of five digits (except Callback Busy and Executive Busy Override access codes which must be only one digit). Generally, the codes must be unique; they cannot match any listed directory number dr other access code in the system (two exceptions: the Callback Busy and Executive Busy Override access codes). See Table 4-l for a complete list of the access codes. To check assigned access codes, refer to Form 35, Global Find Access Code. The system updates this form each time a code is entered during CDE. :E9 PM 14-NOV-91 alarm status FEATURE FEATURE 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 Account Cods Access Auto-Anwer Activation Call Forwarding - All Calls Call Forwarding - Internal Only Call Forwarding - External Only Call Forwarding - I’m Here Call Forwarding - Cancel I’m Here Dial Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Do Not Disturb Extension General Attendant Access Paging Access To Default Zone(s) 75 05 Call EP Forwarding t- 2- S-QUIT 7-FEATURE NUM NAME - External = M&lOR ACCESS CODE 61 E *6 **0 *6 **6 60 E #I Only 3- 4-TOP SBOTTOM &DELETE 9- 0- Figure 4-2 Form 02 Layout Field Description FEATURE: Lists the feature numbers in numerical order. The FEATURE field cannot be modified. - FEATURE NAME: Lists the names of the features. The FEATURE NAME field cannot be modified. ACCESS CODE: Displays the access code for each feature. Softkeys Feature Num: Allows the user to select a Feature Access Code by number. Pressing this key clears the command line and positions the cursor after the ENTER FEATURE NUM: prompt. Entering the 1 -or 2-digit feature number displays that access code with its name on the command line. The cursor moves to the start of the ACCESS CODE field on the command line ready for a new access code entry. The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, BOTTOM, TOP, and QUIT are also provided, where applicable. 210 4-6 Revision 0 9109-096-2104A Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Parameters Please note: the 9109-096-I 05-NA, following Features are not Description, feature descriptions; refer for complete descriptions. to Practice Account Code Access: This code is dialed prior to the entry of an independent account code. Auto-Answer deactivation Activation: This code is dialed (dial 2), of the Auto Answer feature. prior to the activation (dial I), or Call Forwarding -All Calls: Allows an extension to forward internal and external calls either: ALWAYS (dial Ol), BUSY (dial 02), NO ANSWER (dial 03) or BUSY/NO ANSWER (dial 04). This is available when COS Option 260 - Call Forward Internal/External Split is disabled. The NO ANSWER option allows an extension to forward calls that are not answered within a selected time-out period. Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Call Forwarding - Internal Only: Allows an extension to forward internal calls either: ALWAYS (dial Ol), BUSY (dial 02), NO ANSWER (dial 03) or BUSY/NOANSWER (dial 04). This is available when COS Option 260 - Call Forward Internal/External Split is enabled. Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Call Forwarding - External Only: Allows an extension to forward external calls either: ALWAYS (dial Ol), BUSY (dial 02), NO ANSWER (dial 03) or BUSY/NO ANSWER (dial 04). This is available when COS Option 260 - Call Forward Internal/External Split is enabled. Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Call Forwarding - I’m Here: Allows extension an extension to redirect its calls to another from that other extension. Call Forwarding - Cancel I’m Here: Allows a station user to cancel Call Forwarding - I’m Here, from the other station. Available in Generic Call Forwarding - Busy: Allows a station to forward Generic 1001, Generic 1002 and Generic 1004 and Generic calls when 1005. busy. Available in 1003. Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer: Allows a station to fonnrard calls that are not answered within a selected and Generic 1003. time-out period. Available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002 Call Forwarding - Busy/Don’t Answer: Allows a station to fotward calls when either busy, or when not answered within a selected time-out period. Available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002 and Generic 1003. Call Forwarding - Follow Me: Allows Available in Generic 1001, Generic a station to forward 1002 and Generic 1003. calls unconditionally. Dial Call Pickup: Allows a station to retrieve calls ringing other stations pickup group. Groups. 9109-096-21 O-NA Stations Issue 1 using this feature must be programmed Revision 0 in the same in Form IO - Pickup 210 4-7 Customer Data Entry Table 4-l 30 31 32 33 34 35 * * - 210 4-6 Feature Access Codes Generic 1002 Generic 1004 29 29* 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Feature Names ADL Disconnect RESERVED ExecutiveBusyOverride< AutomaticWakeup CallPark Node ID Maid In Room SUfERSET4Tel.RoomStatusDisplay Page 1 of 2 Not available in Generic 1002. Notavailable in Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96 Not available in Non-ACD Generic Loads. Revision 0 9109496-21 D-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Generic 1002 Generic Feature Names’ 1004 i=PKGi or Generic 1005 LIT96. Directed Call Pickup: Allows a station to retrieve calls ringing other stations. must dial the access code, followed by the extension number of the ringing The user station. Do Not Disturb: Allows a station to prevent any incoming calls from ringing. The calling party receives whatever is programmed in Form 19 - Call Rerouting Table. This code is dialed prior to the activation (dial I), or deactivation (dial 2) code. Extension General Attendant Access: This code (usually 0) allows a station to access an attendant directly, without knowing the specific extension number or an LDN number of a specific attendant as defined in CDE Form 19. Paging Access to Default Zone(s): Allows astation to access the default paging zone equipment. The paging equipment must be programmed in Form 18 - Miscellaneous System Ports, and COS Option 312 must be set to a default value. Paging Access to Specific Zones: Allows a station to access specific paging zones. The access code is dialed, followed by the number corresponding to the paging zone number. The station must have access to the zone(s) via COS Options 303 through 311 (paging zone 1 through 9). TAPAS - Any: Allows a station to answer incoming devices 9109-096-21 (night bells) in any tenant O-NA Issue 1 group, provided Revision 0 calls ringing at common alerting COS option 248 has been enabled. 210 4-9 Customer Data Entry TAFAS - Local Tenant: Allows a station to answer incoming alerting devices (night bells) within the station’s has been enabled. calls ringing at common tenant group, provided COS option 249 Hold Pickup Access: Allows a station to connect to a held call in an attendant console hold slot. Typically, the attendant will relay the digits to dial: the Hold Pickup Access code, the console/subattendant ID number, followed by the hold slot number, through the system’s zone paging equipment. Console Lockout Access Code: Allows an attendant to render the console “harmless” (typically, while left unattended). The console is returned to its normal state by r&entering the code. \ Maintenance Functions: Allows the test line telephone line functions. Refer to Practice 9109-096-353-NA, Information, for further details. to access the available test General Maintenance Direct Inward System Access: This is the DISA security code. Refer to Practice Features Description, under Trunk Operation - DISA, for further 9109-096-106-NA, information, Callback Busy: Allows an extension user then hangs to set a callback on another (busy) extension, The up. Call Hold: Allows an extension to put a call on hold and go on-hook. may then be used to make other calls. The extension Call Hold Retrieve - Local: Allows a user to retrieve a held call at the extension the call was originally where held. Call Hold Retrieve - Remote: Allows a user to retrieve a held call from any extension. The user must dial the Call Hold Retrieve - Remote Feature Access Code, followed by the number of the extension where the call was originally held. Abbreviated s Dial Access: Allows users rather than having to dial entire digit strings original numbers and their corresponding Form 31 - System Abbreviated Dial (Form to dial pre-programmed index numbers (which can be up to 26 digits in length). The index numbers must be programmed into 30 in Generic 1001). Clear All Features: Allows the user to clear features currently activated extension with a single access code. The features affected are: all flavors Forwarding, Do Not Disturb and Callbacks. at the of Call SUPERSET Telephone Loopback Test: Allows a SUPERSET telephone perform a loopback test on the set. Going on-hook terminates the test. user to Tone Demonstration: Allows a user to listen to all of the possible tones available the system. Going on-hook terminates the demonstration. ADL Call Setup: Allows originate 210 4-10 on an Associated Data Line (ADL) configured extension a data call. Refer to Practice 9109-096-I 06-NA, Features Description, Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA to for issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions further information. 1005 LIT96. Not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1005 FPKGI and Generic ADL Disconnect: Allows an ADL configured extension to disconnect a data call. Refer to Practice 9109-096-l 05-NA, Features Description, for further information. Not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1005 FPKGI and Generic 1005 LlT96. Executive Busy Override: Allows an extension a single code while listening to override busy extensions by dialing to busy tone. Automatic Wakeup: Allows an extension to an attendant. 24-hour format user to set up a wakeup call without talking The user dials the Automatic Wakeup code, followed by the time (in - 2 hour digits followed by 2 minute digits). Call Park: Allows an extension to park an active call, and go on-hook. may not make other calls, but may access paging equipment. Node ID: Allows a uniform numbering Refer to Networking” plan in a network of SX-200 Practice 9109-096-l 05-NA, Features Description, for further information. The extension DIGITAL under systems. “Analog Maid In Room: Allows a maid to change the status of the room using the telephone the room. The maid dials the Maid In Room code, followed by one of: l-maid 2-maid not in room, 3-roam clean, 4-roam to be inspected. in in room, SUPERSET Room Status Display: Allows SUPERSET and SUPERSET4” users to view room status information. Refer to Practice 9109-096-602-NA, Hotel/Motel Feature Package Description, for further information. DN Direct To ARS: Allows an extension to access ARS immediately, without dialing ARS leading digits. The system automatically dials the Direct To ARS code upon the set going off-hook, or after an account code. UCD Agent Login/Logout: Allows a UCD agent to log in and out of a UCD agent hunt group, to control the arrival of calls from the hunt group. This code is dialed prior to the login (dial I), or logout (dial 2) code. Not available in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002. Analog Network Access Callers Extension: Used by the system to display caller’s extension numbers on display sets during cross-node network calls. This code is entered into the ARS: Modified Digit Table. Refer to Practice 9109-09&105-NA, Features Description, under “Analog Networking” for further information. Not available in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002. SUP&RSET4 Maid In Room Stat. Display: Allows a SUPERSET SUPERSET4DN station toview or Generic 1002. room status information. Not available or in Generic 1001 Send Message: Allows an extension user to send a message to another extension. The message is in the form of one of: a flashing lamp, a display indication, or a distinctive ringing pattern. Refer to Practice 9109496-l 05-NA, Features Description, under “Messaging - Call Me Back”, for further information. Not available in Generic 1001. 9109-096-21O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-11 I Customer Data Entry Call Message Sender of Oldest Message: Allows an extension to call the sender of the oldest message without having to dial the extension number. Not available in Generic 1001. Callback- No Answer: Allows an extension to set a callback on an extension that does not answer, while listening to ringback. Not available in Generic 1001. ACD Login/Logout: Allows an ACD position to log in and out at a SUPERSET 4 telephone. Refer to Practice 9109-096-620-NA, ACD TELEMARKETER@ Application Package, for further details. Not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1005 FPKGI and Generic 1005 LIT96. r ‘ACD Silent Monitoring: Allows an ACD supervisor to silently monitor calls of ACD agents. Refer to Practice 9109-096-62&NA, ACD TELEMARKETER Application Package, for further details. Not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1005 FPKGI and Generic 1005 LIT96. Flash Over Trunk: Allows an extension to access Central Office CENTRmfeatures (sends a flash out over a trunk). Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Program Feature Key: Allows users of SUPERSET3”DN and SUPERSET4DN sets to program feature keys on their own sets, from their own sets. This eliminates the need to access CDE through the console or terminal interface to make these changes. Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Key System - Direct Paging: Allows a key system set to directly page another (idle) key system set through the set’s speaker. The user can page a specific set, or the entire page group. Page groups are programmed in Form 45 - Key System Telephones. Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Key System - Group Page - Meet Me Answer: Allows a key system extension to respond to a group page by dialing a single access code. Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Key System - Direct CO Line Select: Allows a key system extension to access a specific trunk. The user dials the code, followed by the trunk number. Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. . Key System -Store Personal Speed Call: Allows a key system extension to store up ‘to 5 dial access personal speed call numbers. Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Key System-Retrieve Personal Speed Call: Allows a key system extension to make a call using previously stored dial access Personal Speed Call numbers. Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Double Flash Over Trunk: Allows a Centrex extension to be reconnected to the CENTREX extension that it put on softhold while attempting to reach a second CENTREX extension. Available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. 210 4-12 Revision0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue1 CDE Form Descriptions Form 03 - COS Define 4.3 This form defines the Classes of Service for the system (see Figure 4-3 for the form layout). Classes of Service group together stations with common feature operations and restrictions. The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX accommodates a maximum of 50 Classes of Service. Each device (including attendants, data devices and all trunks) are supplied with a Class of Service. COS options are listed in groups. . Refer to Table 4-2 for the total list of COS options. :55 [COS: Xi-NOV-89 alarm 1 0moN 1 (DISPLAYING Attendant-Timed Recall Attendant-Timed Recall Attendant-Timed Recall Attendant Call Forward Attendant Setup Time/Date Alarm Call Call Forwarding - Busy Call Forwarding - Don't Call Forwarding - External Call Forwarding - Follow Call Hold And Retrieve Can Flash If Talking To (NO ANS) (HOLD) (CAMPON) No Answer Attendant-Timed (NO Recall L- Z-COPY X$JIT 7-OPTION ENABLED &disable 10-240 9=disable Timer 1 SThTUS cos ANSI 3-COS NLM s s ii 38 ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED 115 116 117 118 122 202 206 287 208 269 211 212 5-248 s 0 115 NUMBER B-SHOW MAJOR DPTIOk! 38 s Trunk &disable q 5-248 seconds 5-249 1&24B Answer me Access An Incoming status DISABLE 38 4-TOP 9-CDS NUM 5-BOTTOM NAME 9- Figure 4-3 Form 03 Layout Field Descriptions The header line indicates the Class of Service being programmed and which set of options are selected for either the enabled or disabled options list. The command line displays the current indexed option. When Form 03 - COS Define is selected, the command line displays the first enabled option of the first Class of Service. . OPTION NAME: This field lists the option titles. The actual option names cannot be modified. The option names are classified into two groups: enabled options and disabled options. STATUS: This field displays the status of each option; either DISABLED, ENABLED or a timer value. OPTION NUM: This field displays the number of each Class of Service option, The actual option number cannot be modified. Softkeys DISABLE/ENABLE: This softkey enables and disables COS options. The DISABLE softkey appears when the form shows the enabled options list. Pressing the DISABLE softkey followed by pressing the ENTER softkey twice disables the selected option. The ENABLE softkey appears when the form shows the disabled options list. Pressing 9109-09&21O-NA Issue1 Revision0 210 4-13 Customer Data Entrv the ENABLE softkey followed by pressing selected option. Notes the ENTER softkey twice enables the 1. For those COS options which have a status other than ‘ENABLED’ or ‘DISABLED’, this softkey has no function or indication. 2. If the ENTER softkey is not pressed twice after each selection, softkeys 2 and 3 are not available until the data is completely entered. COPY COS: Pressing the COPY COS softkey copies the contents of one Class of Service to another. This is useful when two Classes of Service are similar. The ,command line displays the COPY FROM COS prompt; the user enters the l-or e-digit COS number. The command line then displays the TO COS prompt; the user enters the second l- or 2-digit COS number. Pressing the ENTER softkey twice completes the copy process. COS NUMBER: Pressing the COS NUMBER softkey prompts the user for a COS number (one or two digits) which selects a specific COS number. The header line displays the new COS number. OPTION NUM: This softkey selects a specific COS option. Pressing the OPTION NUM softkey displays the ENTER OPTION NUM: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid option number (100 to 908). The command line displays that COS option name, status and number. SHOW DISABLE/SHOW ENABLE: This softkey has two functions: it displays the disabled or enabled COS options for the selected COS. Pressing the SHOW DISABLE softkey displays the currently disabled COS options, This softkey now shows the SHOW ENABLE prompt and softkey 1 displays the ENABLE prompt. Pressing the SHOW ENABLE softkey shows those COS options that are enabled. This softkey returns to the SHOW DISABLE prompt and softkey 1 displays the DISABLE prompt. Note: Those options with a status other than “ENABLED” or “DISABLED” are listed when the SHOW ENABLE softkey is pressed. COS NAME: When the programmer presses the COS NAME softkey, the system requests a name for the Class of Service. The COS name can be up to 8 characters in length. COS Name is not available in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002. . The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, BOlTOM, ‘provided, where applicable. 210 4-14 Revision 0 TOP, and QUIT are also 9109496-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Table 4-2 Generic ** V Class Of Service Options Class Of Service 1004 Option Name * Not available in Generic 1002. Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl / LIT96. Not available in Genetic 1004. VVNot available in Generic 1004 or Generic 1005 FPKGI / LIT96. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-15 Customer Data Entry Table 4-2 Class Of Sewice (continued) Options COS Option Numbers For I Generic 1002 Generic 1001 Generic 1003 210 210 .211 211 212 212 I\ 213 - 1 213 2J4 214 215 215 216 216 I t 217 -217 .. -.~ 218 218 219 219 220 220 221 221 222 222 ----223 223 224 224 225 w!i I I LLf LLI LLI 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 244 245 246 247 248 249 -Irn 244 245 246 247 248 249 3cl-l 244 245 805 808 246 247 r)“O I * * Y Generic 1004 Generic 1005 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 iii3 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 I Class Of Service Option Name CallForwardingInhibiton Dial-inTrunks CellHoldand RetrieveAccess Can FleshIf Talkinoto an lncominaTrunk Can FleshIf Talkingto an OutooinaTrunk CannotDiala Trunkafter Flashing CannotDiala Trunkif Holdingor in Conferencewith One Data Securitv 1DirectTo ARS DirectedCellPickup Disoriminatinn DialTone Do Not Disturb ClearAll Features ud Inhibiton HoldTimeout 1 CallForws FleshDisable Fleshfor Attendant Hold Pioku~fAttendentPaaedAccess) L”bn”“L Nal I I, l-l&J&JllcTa ManualLine(Dial0 Hotline) COVVoiceMailPort 1 MessaaeReaisterOverflowAlarm MessapeWeitinaSetup- Bell MessageWeitinaS&P - Lamp Nevera Consultee Nevera Forwerdee OriainateOnlv RoomStatusDisplav AbbreviatedDielinaAccess SMDR-Extended Record SMDR- RecordMeter Pulses TAFASAnvAccess TAFASAccessTenant nmc ~~~~ nllrinn nlIl cnndm 1 TransferDialTone 249 251 251 250 252 Broker’sCallwith Transfer - .252 253 253 CellForward- Don’tAnswerTimer12- 6 Rinnsl 251 Page 2 of 5 Not available in Generic 1002 except in software load DO9 and above. Not available in Generic 1002. * Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl / LIT% Not available in Generic 1004. VV Not available in Generic 1004 or Generic 1005 FPKGl / LIT96. 210 4-16 Revision 0 9104-096-21 SNA issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Table 4-2 Class Of Service Options (continued) Class Of Service Option Name Generic 1002 Generic 1001 *i V Generic 1003 Generic 1005 * Not available in Generic 1002. Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl / LIT96. Not available in Generic 1004. VYNot available in Generic 1004 or Generic 1005 FPKGl / LIT96. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 Customer Data Entry Table 4-2 Generic 1002 Class Of Service Options (continued) Generic 1004 Class Of Service Option Name Generic 1001 ** V Not available Not available in Generic in Generic 1005 FPGKl / LIT96. 1004. VVNot available * Not available in Generic 1002. in Generic 1004 or Generic 1005 FPKGl Revision 0 9109-096-21SNA / LIT96. Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Table 4-2 Generic 1002 * * V Class Of Service Options (continued) Class Of Service Option Name Generic 1004 Not available in Generic 1002 except in software load DO9 and above. Page 5 of 5 * Not available in Generic 1002. Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl / LIT96. Not available in Generic 1004. VVNot available in Generic 1004 or Generic 1005 FPKGl / LIT96. 91 OQ-O96-21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-19 Customer Data Entrv Parameters Please note: the following are not feature descriptions; refer to Practice 91 OQ-O95-105-NA, Features Description, for complete descriptions, Attendant Bell Off: Allows the attendant to mute the console ringer. Attendant O/G Restriction/Room Status Setup: Allows the attendant to restrict outgoing calls, This feature is part of the Hotel/Motel feature package. Attendant Display of System Alarms: Allows the attendant to receive and view alarm logs-at the console without logging in to maintenance. Attendant DISA Code Setup: Allows the attendant to change the DISA access code, without accessing CDE. Attendant Flexible Night Service Setup: Allows the attendant to change the night service assignment for non-dial-in trunks. Attendant Guest Room Key: Allows the attendant to access Hotel/Motel features via the GUEST ROOM softkey. This feature is part of the Hotel/Motel feature package. Attendant New Call Tone: Allows the attendant to be notified of incoming calls by a single tone burst, while engaged in a call. Attendant Automatic Call Forward - No Answer: Allows unanswered calls to be rerouted to a secondary answer point. The call is automatically rerouted after it rings for a predetermined length of time. See COS Option 118 - Attendant Automatic Call Forward - No Answer Timer. Attendant Audible Lockout Alarm: Allows for an audible alarm to ring at the console when a suitably programmed station goes into the lock-out state. Attendant Serial Call: Allows the attendant to force an incoming trunk call to recall to the console after the trunk is released from the call. Attendant Abbr. Dial Confidential Number Display: Allows the attendant to view abbreviated dial numbers which have been programmed as “confidential”. Attendant Abbreviated Dial Programming: Allows the attendant to program numbers into the system’s abbreviated dial table. Attendant Station Busy Out: Allows the attendant to busy out (and return to service) any station in the system. Attendant Call Block Key: Allows the attendant to block station to station (room to room) calls. This feature is part of the Hotel/Motel feature package. Attendant Trunk Busy Out: Allows the attendant to busy out (and return to service) any trunk in the system. Attendant Timed Recall (No Ans): This sets the no answer recall timer. If set to 0, the feature is disabled. 210 4-20 Revision0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue1 CDE Form Descriptions Attendant Timed Recall (Busy): This sets the busy recall timer. If set to 0, the feature is disabled. Attendant Timed Recall (Campon): This sets the campon recall timer. If set to 0, the feature is disabled. Attendant Call Forward - No Answer Timer: This sets the Call Forward - No Answer timer for the Attendant Automatic Call Forward Feature. Attendant Tone Signalling: Allows the console to transmit DTMF tones during an established call. Attendant Conference Disable: Disallows the console from making conference calls. Attendant Hold Position Security: This option gives the Attendant error beeps when the Attendant is on a call and presses a HOLD key that is already in use. Attendant Station Do Not Disturb: Allows attendant or sub-attendant to change DND status on a station in its tenant group. Attendant Setup Time/Date: Allows attendant or sub-attendant to set the system time and/or date. Attendant Multi - New Call Tone: When at least one call is waiting to be answered by an Attendant who is busy on a call, the Console will get a short beep at the programmed interval (provided Attendant New Call Tone is enabled). Attendant Call Forward Setup/Cancel: Allows attendant or sub-attendant to change the call forward status of a station in its tenant group. Sub-Attendant Station Setup Advisory Message: Allows a subattendant to set up advisory messages on sets within the tenant group. Account Code Forced Entry - External Calls: Forces an extension to enter an account code before allowing external calls. Account Code Forced Entry - Long Distance Calls: Forces an extension to enter an account code before allowing long distance calls. Alarm Call: Allows an extension to be programmed to ring at a specific time. Broker’s Call: Allows an extension flash to be interpreted as a swap rather than a conference attempt. Call Block Applies: Allows the extension to be affected when the attendant applies the Call Block feature. This feature is part of the Hotel/Motel feature package. Call Distribution Agent Position: Allows a SUPERSETtelephone to be used as a UCD agent position, with a headset (Generic 1001 only). In other generics, COS Option 612 is used to allow headset operation regardless of the application. 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-21 CustomerData Entrv Flash For Waiting Call: Allows a user to place a call (2-party or multi-patty) on consultation hold and connect to a waiting call, via a flash of the switchhook. This is not available in Generic 1001. Call Forward - Busy: Allows the extension to set up call forwarding on busy. Call Forward - Don’t Answer: Allows the extension to set up call forwarding on no answer. Call.UForward - External: Allows the extension to set up call forwarding to external numbers. ; Call Forward - Follow Me: Allows an extension user to set up call forwarding from another station. Call Forward Inhibit On Dial In Trunks: Prevents calls from Dial-In trunks from being forwarded to stations with this item in their COS. Call Hold and Retrieve Access: Allows the extension to use the Call Hold and Call Hold Retrieve access codes. Can Flash If Talking To An Incoming Trunk: Allows an extension to flash the switchhook when connected to an incoming trunk. Can Flash If Talking To An Outgoing Trunk: Allows an extension to flash the switchhook when connected to an outgoing trunk. Cannot Dial a Trunk After Flashing: Prevents an extension from accessing a trunk after flashing the switchhook. Cannot Dial a Trunk if Holding or in Conf With One: Prevents an extension from accessing a trunk if that extension already has a trunk on hold, or is in conference with a trunk. Data Security: Prevents the system from transmitting any intrusion or warning tones on an established call. . Direct To ARS: Allows an extension to be routed directly to ARS upon going off-hook. The system automatically dials the ARS Leading Digit String. Directed Call Pickup: Allows the extension to dial the Directed Call Pickup access code, and answer a call ringing at another extension. Discriminating Dial Tone: Allows an extension to have a special distinctive dial tone, informing the user that feature(s) are active. Do Not Disturb: Allows the extension to prevent incoming calls from ringing. Clear All Features: Allows an extension to turn off all features currently active. These features include all flavors of Call Forwarding, Do Not Disturb and Callbacks. Call Forwarding Inhibit on Hold Timeout: Causes call forward no answer to be ignored when a held party times out and begins ringing back the holding set. 210 4-22 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Flash Disable: Prevents an extension from using any feature that required the use of the switchhook flash. Flash For Attendant: Allows an extension to ring the attendant immediately upon flashing the switchhook. Hold Pickup: Allows an extension to connect to a caller waiting in an attendant console hold slot position. Inward Restriction: Prevents an extension from receiving incoming calls from DID trunks. ; Lockout Alarm Applies: Causes an alarm to be raised at the attendant console when the set goes into the lockout state. Manual Line: Causes an off-hook origination to ring the attendant. Calls are received in the normal manner. COVVoice Mail Port: Causes the port to be designated as an interface to a COVVoice Mail system. Refer to 9150-953-019NA, VX Voice Processor Installation and Repair Manual VX-2OO/VX4OO/VX-800 Systems. Message Register Overflow Alarm: Allows an alarm to be raised at the attendant console, and a maintenance log to be generated when the extension’s message register overflows. Message Waiting Setup - Bell: Allows the attendant to set up a message waiting condition on a extension not equipped with a lamp. Message Waiting Setup - Lamp: Allows the attendant to set up a message waiting condition on an extension equipped with a lamp. Never a Consultee: Prevents other extensions calling when they have a consultation hold in progress. Never a Forwardee: Prevents an extension from having calls forwarded to it by another extension. Originate Only: Prevents an extension from receiving any calls, unless they are forwarded. Outgoing Trunk Callback: Allows Callback - Busy on outgoing trunks. Outgoing Trunk Camp-On: Allows Camp-On on outgoing trunks. Override Security: Prevents other extensions from overriding calls. Priority Dial 0: Provides a second class of dial-0 access to the attendant. This class may then have its own LDN appearance on the attendant console(s). Line Privacy: Prevents one SUPERSETtelephone from overriding the key line being used by another SUPERSETtelephone. 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-23 Customer Data Entry Receive Only: Prevents an extension from initiating calls. Repeated Camp-On Beeps: Provides for repeated notification beeps, indicating that a trunk is camped on. Non-Busy Extension: Causes calls to the busy extension to override automatically, and join the conversation. Room Status Applies: Allows an extension to have its room status changed - this feature is part of the Hotel/Motel feature package. Abbreviated Dialing Access: Allows access to the system Abbreviated Dialing tables. SMDR - Record Meter Pulses: Allows meter pulses received from the Central Office to be counted, and recorded. TAFAS Access During Day Service (prior to Generic 1004 this is known as TAFAS Any Access): Allows the extension to answer incoming calls appearing at night bells, regardless of the tenanting. TAFAS Tenant Access: Allows an extension to answer incoming calls appearing at night bells, providing that they are within the same tenant group. TAFAS Any Access: Allows an extension to answer incoming calls appearing at night bells, only during day service. Transfer Dial Tone: Allows an extension to have a special distinctive dial tone, informing the user that there is a call on consultation hold. Broker’s Call With Transfer (prior to Generic 1003 this is known as Transfer With Privacy): Same as Broker’s Call, except that a transfer is possible when the extension goes on-hook. Call Forward Don’t Answer Timer: Sets the number of times the set will ring before the call is forwarded. I Call Hold Recall Timer: Sets the time between when a call was placed on hold, and when the held call recalls. Repeated Campon Beeps Timer: Sets the period for the repeated campon beeps, UCD Music On Hold Timer: Sets the length of time an incoming UCD caller hears music before being routed to an overflow answer point. Flash Over Trunk: Allows an extension to send a switchhook flash out on a trunk. Display Prime as Forwarder: Allows the option of displaying the forwarder’s extension or logical line access code when a call is forwarded. Message Sending: Allows telephone sets to send Call Me Back messages to other extensions. 210 4-24 Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Internal/External Split Call Forwarding: Allows an extension to split call forward setup between internal calls and external calls. ONS Voice Mail Port: Causes an ONS line port to be designated as an interface to an ONS Voice Mail system. ONS Voice Mail functionality is only included in ACD Loads, Refer to Practice 9109-096105-NA, Features Description. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. Automatic Callback: Allows an extension to arrange for a call to a busy extension to be completed when that extension becomes idle. Camp-On: Allows an extension to notify a busy extension (via a beep) that communication is desired. The camped-n call rings when the called party goes on-hook. Flash-In Conference: Allows an extension to create 4 or 5 party conferences, Paging Zone Access: Allows an extension to have access to one or more paging zones. Zones 1 through 9 are programmable. Paging Default: Sets the default paging zone for the station. 0 enables all zones. COTrunk to CO Trunk Connect: Allows an extension to connect 2 CO trunks together. CO Trunk to Tie Trunk Connect: Allows an extension to connect a CO trunk and aTie trunk together. CO Trunk to DID Trunk Connect: Allows an extension to connect a CO trunk and a DID trunk together. Tie Trunk to Tie Trunk Connect: Allows an extension to connect 2 Tie trunks together. Tie Trunk to DID Trunk Connect: Allows an extension to connect a Tie trunk and a DID trunk together. DID Trunk to DID Trunk Connect: Allows an extension to connect 2 DID trunks together. Extension Non-CO Trunk to Trunk Connect: Allows an extension to connect any non--CO type trunk to any other trunk. Transparent Multi-Console Operation: Allows consoles within a tenant group to read/cancel messages set by other consoles in the group. Also, any console in the group can answer recalls for any other console. Account Code, Forced Entry - Data Internal Calls: Requires an extension to enter an account code before making internal data calls. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. Account Code, Forced Entry - Data External Calls: Requires an extension to enter an account code before making external data calls. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-25 Customer Data Entry Account Code, Forced Entry-Data Long Dist Calls: Requires an extension to enter an account code before making long distance data calls. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. Contact Monitor: Allows a line circuit port to be used as an alarm contact relay. See Practice 9109-096-l 05NA, Features Description, for further information. Call Park: Allows an extension to park a call and go on-hook. New calls may not be received or originated, but paging equipment may be accessed. Long Loop: Designates the OPS port as having a loop length of over 2 km. This adds ; a compromise balance network into the circuit. \ Trunk Recall Partial Inhibit: Prevents a trunk from ringing the extension back while the extension is dialing, and goes on hook (phantom ringback). Recording Failure to Hangup Timer: Sets the time a recording device has to hang up. If the timer expires before the device hangs up, it is placed into the Do Nof Disturb state. Override: Allows an extension to override (intrude into the conversation 09 a busy extension. Override Announce: Allows an overriding party to call or override to the Call Announce port of a SUpERSET telephone, rather than intruding into the conversation. Display ANVDNIS Information: Allows the display of ANI and/or DNIS digits on SUPERSETtelephones and consoles. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGl , Generic 1005 LIT96 and Generic 1004. SUPERSETTelephone -Auto Answer: Allows incoming calls to ring briefly, then are automatically answered in Hands Free mode. SUPERSETTelephone - Auto Hold Disable: Disables the auto-hold feature. Auto hold allows a user to press another line appearance key, automatically placing a caller on the original line on hold. b SUPERSETTelephone - Background Music: Allows aset to play music (from MOH) over the set speaker, when idle. SUPERSET Telephone - Disconnect Alarm: Allows for an alarm indication (log message is generated) when the set is unplugged. SUPERSET - Immediate Line Select: See SUPERSET Telephone - Automatic Outgoing Line for more information. PBX SUPERSET Telephone - Automatic Outgoing Line (called SUPERSET Immediate Line Select in Generic 1001, 1002, 1003): Allows a set to automatically select the first free line when the user begins dialing. If disabled, the user must first either go off-hook, or press a line appearance key. Note that this does not apply to SUPERSET 401 telephone sets. 210 4-26 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions SUPERSET Telephone - Message Program: Allows changing/programming of advisory messages from the set. SUPERSET- Subattendant - See SUPERSETTelephone - Enhanced Answering Position for more information _’ SUPERSET Telephone - Enhanced Answering Position (called SUPERSET Subattendant in Generic 1001, 1002, 1003): Allows a SUPERSET telephone to be used as an enhanced answering position (see Practice 9109-096-l 05NA, Features Description, under Sub-Attendant - Enhanced Answering Positkm) . SUPERSET Telephone - Associated Modem Line: Allows a SUPERSET 4 or SUPERSET4DN telephone to be associated with an ONS port connected to modem. The telephone can initiate either a data call or voice call. Simultaneous voice and data calls are permitted. SUPERSET Telephone - Room Status Display: Allows a SUPERSET 4 or SUPERSET4DN telephone to check room status. This feature is part of the Hotel/Motel feature package. SUPERSET Telephone - Night Service Switching: Allows a SUPERSET 4 or SUPERSETlDN telephone to change the night service status of the system or a tenant group. SUPERSETTel. - Guest Rm Template (C&3) (DN) (called SUPERSET- 3DN/4DN Guest Room Templates in Generic 1003): Allows certain configurations of Speed Dial keys and Feature Keys. Not available to the SUPERSET 401”. See Practice 9109-096-602-NA, Hotel/Motel Feature Package Description. This feature is part of the Hotel/Motel feature package. SUPERSET Telephone - Limited New Call Ring: Limits the new call ring for sets which have a high amount of traffic on one or more line appearances. SUPERSETTelephone - Headset Operation: Allows a SUPERSETtelephone to be used as with a headset. Display ANI Information Only: Allows ANI digits only (never DNIS digits) to be displayed on SUPERSETS Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI , Generic 1005 LIT96 and Generic 1004. ACD -Agent Template: Allows certain configurations of Speed Dial keys and Feature Keys. See Practice 9109-096-620-NA, ACD TELEMARKETERApplication Package. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96. ACD - Supervisor Template: Allows certain configurations of Speed Dial keys and Feature Keys. See Practice 9109-096-62&NA, ACD TELEMARKETER Application Package. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LlT96. ACD - Senior Supervisor Template: Allows certain configurations of Speed Dial keys and Feature Keys. See Practice 9109-096-620-NA, ACD TELEMARKETER Application Package. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-27 Customer Data Entry ACD -Agent Always Auto-Answer: Allows an ACD agent to be in auto answer mode at all times. See Practice 9109-096-62&NA, ACD TELEMARKETER Application Package. Not available Key System-Direct Feature Access in Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LlT96. CO Access: Allows a key set to directly access a CO trunk using Code 50. Key Set/Sub Att - Call Hold Notify Timer: Sets the time between _’ placed when a call was hold key and when the held call recalls. on hold on a programmable Key- System - Auto Answer - Internal Calls: Allows a SUPERSET 3DN or a ,SUPERSETdDN key system set user to respond handsfree to a directed page call. Key System - Direct Paging Handsfree Answerback: Allows a SUPERSET U”, SUPERSET420” or a SUPERSET430” key system set user to access the handsfree answerback feature for directed page calls. Not available SMDR - Does Not Apply: Prevents calls from having in Generic 1004. SMDR records. No Dial Tone: Inhibits dial tone. SMDR - Overwrite Buffer: Allows older records to be overwritten by newer records when the SMDR buffer becomes full. If disabled, a full buffer will result in further calls requiring SMDR to not be allowed. Message Register Applies: Causes the system to count and report (SMDR) the number of outgoing calls made by a station and the number of incoming meter pulses received. This feature is part of the Hotel/Motel Feature Package. Incoming/Internal a Dataset. Modem Pooling Access: Allows a modem user to make a call to Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic Automatic Overflow from Attendant: Allows incoming predetermined answer queue. period to be rerouted to a recording ANI Applies: Provides for ANI information . Incoming Trunk Call Rotary: Instructs 1005 LIT96. calls not answered within a device while remaining in the being transmitted on outgoing a trunk to ignore incoming DTMF digits. Limited Wait For Dial Tone: Instructs a trunk to wait a predetermined tone from the far end before sending digits. SMDR - Drop Calls c n Digits: Prevents SMDR from reporting than a pre-determined an SMDR period for dial on calls which are less length. SMDR - Drop Incomplete Outgoing Calls: Prevents generating trunks. incomplete outgoing calls from report. Trunk No Dial Tone Alarm: Allows the system to raise an alarm if dial tone cannot be detected 210 4-28 on it. The system will also take such a trunk out of service. Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions SMDR - Record Incoming Calls: Causes incoming trunk calls to be recorded by SMDR. SMDR - Display Private Speedcall: numbers in SMDR. Controls the display of private speedcall SMDR - Extended Record: Allows for 8 additional columns in the record to accommodate 12-digit account codes and the system identifier. This increases the number of characters for an SMDR record to 88. Special DISA: Allows for DISA users to enter verified account codes rather than the r DISA access code. (Feature Access Code 19). Standard Ring Applies: Allows for incoming trunks to provide standard ringing cadence; ignoring of the Discriminating Ringing feature. DISA During Night Service Only: Allows for a trunk to be a DISA trunk only when the system (or tenant group) is in night service. ANI/DNIS Trunk: Allows an incoming trunk to receive ANVDNIS information. Trunks must use DTMF signalling, have a wink timer and one of the following trunk circuit descriptors: ‘71 E&M”, “Tl E&M DISA”, ‘71 DID/TIE” or “Ti TIE DISA”. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI , Generic 1005 LIT96 and Generic 1004. LoopStartTrunktoACD Path Connect:Allowsloopstert DISAtrunkstoaccessACD. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. SMDR -Record ANVDNIS: Allows ANI/DNIS information to be reported in the SMDR trunk record. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKG 1, Generic 1004 or Generic 1005 LIT96. Data Station Queuing: Allows queuing on to busy data stations. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. DTRX Herald: Allows a programmable message to appear when connection is made to the DTRX. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. . DTRX Message Code: Allows for DTRX message codes to be displayed. See Practice 9109-096-l 05-NA, Features Description, under Data Transceiver, for further information, Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. DTRX Message Code Text: Allows for DTRX status messages to be displayed. See Practice 9109-096-I 05-NA, Features Description, under Data Transceiver, for further information, Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. DTRX Complete Message Code Text: Allows for DTRX message codes and status messages to be displayed. See Practice 9109-096-I 05-NA, Features Description, under Data Transceiver, for further information. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96. 9109-09fS21O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 4-29 Customer Data Entry DTRX Herald Text Select: Allows for a choice of DTRX herald messages. 9109-096-I information. See Practice 05-NA, Features Description, under Data Transceiver, for further Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. DATA SMDR - Does Not Apply: Prevents available in Generic 1005 FPKGI data calls from having SMDR records. or Generic 1005 LIT96. Not DATA SMDR - Extended Record: Allows for the system identifier to be included in the SMDR record. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. DATA SMDR - Overwrite Buffer: Allows older records to be overwritten by newer records when the SMDR buffer becomes full. If disabled, afull bufferwill result in further ‘calls requiring SMDR to not be allowed. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. 210 4-30 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA issue 1 CDE Form Describtions Form 04 - System Options/System Timers 4.4 This form specifies the system’s options and timers that are system Table 4-3 for the complete list and Figure 4-4 for the form layout. 55 39-NOV-69 System Options alarm (Displaying ENABLED Options) status wide, See = MAJOR STATUS OPTION 24 Hour Clock Automated Attendant Discriminating Ringing Host Command Interface Incoming to Outgoing Call Forward SMDR Indicate Long Calls SUPERSET Telephone Last Number Redial RESERVED Switch-Hook Flash DATA SMDR Indicate Long Calls Message Register Follows Talker Automatic Call Distribution ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED El 16 :: 21 28 29 30 38 39 48 41 24 El ABLED 01 NUM _’ Hour Clock .-DISABLE 2- 3- i-QUIT 7-OPTION NW B-SHOW DISABLE 4-TOP S-BOTTOM 9- Ei- Figure 4-4 Form 04 Layout Field Description The header line indicates which set of options are selected; either the enabled or disabled options. Note that the system timers are included with the enabled options. STATUS: This field specifies which options are enabled, disabled or the value of the timers. OPTION NUM: This field lists the option number for each option or timer. Softkeys . DISABLE/ENABLE: This softkey has two functions: it disables or enables System Options. The DISABLE softkey appears when the form shows the enabled options. Pressing the DISABLE softkey disables the selected option. The STATUS field shows the DISABLED prompt. The ENABLE softkey appears when the form displays the disabled options. Pressing the ENABLE softkey enables the selected option. The STATUS field shows the ENABLED prompt. Note: The enable (or disable) process is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey. VARIABLE: This softkey appears only when System Option 55 on the command line). Pressing the VARIABLE softkey sets Option 55 to Variable; the STATUS field shows the VARIABLE is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey. Account Codes Account Code Entry, can be from 1 to 12 digits in length. 9109-09S21O-NA Issue1 Revision 0 is selected (displayed the status of System prompt. The selection entered into Form 33, 210 4-31 Customer Data Entrv INTERNAL: This softkey appears only when System Options 57 and 58 are selected (displayed on the command line). Pressing the INTERNAL softkey sets the status of System Options 57 and 58 to Internal (for telephones with “Room Status” enabled) and only internal calls can be made. The selection is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey. The INTERNAL prompt disappears from the softkey display and the STATUS field now displays the INTERNAL prompt to indicate this selection. LOCAL: This softkey appears only when System Options 57 and 58 selected (displayed on the command line). Pressing the LOCAL softkey sets the status of System Options 57 and 58 to Local (for telephones with “Room Status enabled) and only internal and local calls can be made. The selection is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey. The LOCAL prompt disappears from the softkey display and the STATUS field now displays the LOCAL prompt. LONG DIST: This softkey appears only when System Options 57 and 58 are selected (displayed on the command line). Pressing the LONG DIST softkey enables long distance calls. For telephones with “Room Status” enabled, internal, local and long distance calls can be made. The selection is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey. The LONG DIST prompt disappears from the softkey display and the STATUS field displays the LONG DIST prompt. OPTION NUM: This softkey selects a specific System Option or System Timer. Pressing the OPTION NUM softkey displays the ENTER OPTION NUM: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid option number (1 to 58). The command line displays that System Option (or System Timer) name, status and number. SHOW DISABLE/SHOW ENABLE: This softkey has two functions: it displays the disabled or enabled System Options. Pressing the SHOW DISABLE softkey displays the currently disabled System Options; the softkey now shows the SHOW ENABLE prompt. Pressing the SHOW ENABLE softkey shows those System Options that are enabled; the softkey returns to the SHOW DISABLE prompt. Note: Those options with a timer value are listed when the SHOW ENABLE softkey is pressed. .- ENTER TIME: This softkey only appears when System Timer 56, Auto Room Status Conversion/Auto Wakeup Print Timer, is selected (displayed on the command line). Pressing the ENTERTIMEsoftkey, displays the ENTERTIME (HH:MM): prompt on the command line. The time selection is completed by entering the time (0O:OOto 23:59 are valid) in a 24-hour format and then pressing the ENTER softkey. The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, BOTTOM, TOP, and QUIT are also provided. 210 4-32 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Table 4-3 System Options and Timers System Options / System Timers * 44 * Not available Not available Not available 9109-09&21 in Generic in Generic in Generic O-NA 1002. 1005 FPGKl or Generic 1005 LIT96. 1003 (Non-ACD) and Generic 1002. Issue 1 Revision 0 Page 1 of 2 210 4-33 CustomerData Entry Table 44 Generic 1002 Generic 1003 System Options (continued) Generic 1004 Generic 1005 and Timers System Options / System Timers Page 2 of 2 * Not available in Generic 1002. ** Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl or Genetic 1005 LIT96. WR Not available in Generic 1003 (Non-ACD) and Generic 1002. . Parameters Please note: the following are not feature descriptions. Refer to Practice 9109-096-I 05NA, Features Description, for complete descriptions. 24 Hour Clock: If enabled, system runs on 24-hour clock. If disabled, system runs on 12-hour clock. Message Lamp Test Enable: When enabled, allows testing of telephone message lamps by the system. Single Paging Amplifier: Enable if system has only one paging amplifier output. Allows one user at a time to access the paging feature. 210 4-34 Revision 0 9109-096-21 CLNA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Message Waiting & Message Register Clear Print: If enabled, a message is printed on the default printer whenever a message register is cleared or a message waiting is cancelled. Verified Account Codes: Enable if verified account codes are to be used. Analog Networking SMDR: Enable if SMDR records are to be kept for calls made via analog networking. Cancel S&Hour Message Waiting: Allows the system to automatically cancel message waiting indicators after 24 hours. FiveDigit SMDR: Allows SMDR to record 5 digit telephone extension numbers rather than the usual 4. Used in networking and hotel/motel applications. Attendant Call Block: Allows call blocking on the system. (Hotel/Motel Feature). Attendant Conference Beeps: Allows for warning beeps to be heard by the source and destination parties of a call, before the attendant enters into a conference with them, and during the conference. Automatic Wakeup: Enables the Automatic Wakeup feature. Automatic Wakeup Alarm: Allows an alarm to be raised at the attendant console when a wakeup alarm is unanswered three times. Automatic Wakeup Print: Allows a message to be printed on the default printer whenever a wakeup call is set up, cancelled, answered or honored. Automatic Wakeup Music: Allows music (MOH) to be heard upon answering a wakeup call. Data Demultiplexer: Enable if a Data Demultiplexer is connected to the system’s printer port. See Practice 9160-080-300-NA, Data Demultiplexer, for further information. Automated Attendant: Enables the Automated Attendant Feature Package - refer to Practice 9109-096-625-NA, Automated Attendant Application Package, for further information. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. Discriminating Ringing: Enables the Discriminating Ringing feature. Discriminating Ringing Always: Causes discriminating ringing to be the normal ringing pattern for all calls on the system. Mite1 Application Interface: Allows for the use of the Application Platform Package (APP). Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. Holiday Messages: When enabled, the system automatically sets up holiday messages on SUPERSE74 and SUPERSET4DN telephones at Christmas and the New Year. 9109-09&21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-35 CustomerData Entrv Incoming to Outgoing Call Forward: Allows call forwarding to external numbers by incoming trunks. Last Party Clear - Dial Tone: Allows the last party remaining in a call to receive dial tone rather than silence. Message Reg. Count Additional Supervisions: Allows meter pulses to be counted after supervision has been received from an outgoing trunk. _’ Message Register Audit: Allows the attendant to print the message register count for all rooms that have a count greater than zero. ‘Message Register Zero After Audit: Allows the system to automatically clear all message registers after an audit. No Overlap Outpulsing: Forces ARS to collect all dialed digits before outpulsing them on a trunk. Room Status Audit: Allows room status printouts. SMDR Indicate Long Calls: Allows the SMDR record to flag calls which are greater in duration than 5 minutes. SUPERSETTelephone Last Number Redial: Allows SUPERSETtelephone and attendants to redial the last manually-dialed number with a single key. users Satellite PBX: Enable if the system is to serve as a satellite PBX. Outgoing Call Restriction: Prevent unauthorized trunk calls after a guest has checked out of the room (Hotel/Motel application). Room Status: Allows room status statistics to be maintained by the system. Auto Room Stat. Conversion/Auto Wakeup Print: Allows an automatic change of room status and wakeup audit daily. - Property Management System: Enable if system is equipped with a PMS system. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. End of Dial Character: Allows the user to dial a special character (#) to indicate to the system that there are no more characters coming. This eliminates the end of dial timer. Calibrated Flash: Allows the system to create the proper flash time to prevent confusion between a flash and a hang-up attempt. This applies to rotary-dial telephones, and DTMF sets with flash buttons. Not available in Generic 1001. Switch-hook features. Flash: Allows stations to flash the switch-hook to access system Data SMDR Indicate Long Calls: Provides an identifying character in column 1 of the SMDR report to indicate the approximate length of a call. Not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LlT96. 210 4-36 Revision0 9109-096-21&NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Message Register Follows Talker: Allows the last party connected to a trunk to be charged with the register count. Not available in Generic 1001. Automatic Call Distribution: Enables ACD. Not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. ACD Silent Monitoring: Allows silent monitoring of ACD agents by ACD supervisors. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. ACD Silent Monitoring Beeps: Enables the ACD agent to be notified when being monitored by the ACD supervisor. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96. ACD Reports: Changes SMDR reports into the format required by the ACD ELEMARKEER Reporting Package. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. Digit Translation Plan: Chooses one of 4 available digit translation plans for rotary dial signalling. See Digit Translation, in Practice 9109-096-105-NA, Features Description. ARS Unknown Digit Length Time-out: Sets the time ARS will wait for more digits when dialing a digit string which includes a variabl*length account code (2 - 15 set). Limited Wait For Dial Tone: Sets the time a trunk will wait before outpulsing digits (1 - 15 set). Pseudo Answer Supervision Timer: Sets the time a trunk will wait while providing pseudo answer supervision (10 - 60 set). Dialing Conflict Timer: Sets the time that the system will wait for conflict dialing (2 IO set). Final Ring Time-Out: Sets the time the system will allow an unanswered station to ring (1 - 30 min) before dropping the call. Minimum Flash Timer: Sets the minimum time a set must be on-hook before it is recognized as a flash (20 -50 ms, in IO ms increments). Maximum Flash Timer: Sets the maximum time a set can be on-hook to be recognized as a flash. If this time is exceeded, it is recognized as an on-hook hang-up (20 - 150 ms, in IO ms increments). DISA Answer Timer: Sets the time between seizure of the incoming DISA trunk and the provision of dial tone. Account Code Length: Sets the length of account codes (VARIABLE, or any fixed length between 4 and 12). Auto Room Status Conversion/Auto Wakeup Print Timer: Sets the time when the conversion/audit takes place (the default time is 0O:OO). Vacant/Reserved Room Default Call Restriction: Sets default call restriction for vacant/reserved rooms; one of INTERNAL, LOCAL or LONG DISTANCE. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 4-37 Customer Data Entrv Occupied Room Default Call Restriction: Sets default call restriction for occupied rooms; one of INTERNAL, LOCAL or LONG DISTANCE. Receivers Reserved for Non-AutcbAttendant Use: Reserves receivers for standard PBX call processing to safeguard against the auto-attendant feature from using all of the available receivers. Not available in Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96. Tone Plan: Sets the system tone plan - one of NA (North America), HK (Hong Kong), MX (Mexico), MA (Malaysia) or TW (Taiwan). Form 05 - Tenant Interconnection Table 4.5 This form specifies which Tenant Groups may be connected together (see Figure 4-5). The system allows for a maximum of 25 Tenant Groups. Each group specifies its own trunk answering points, attendant answering points and night service status. alarm status = MAJOR 81 82 63 84 65 66 67 88 89 IO 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 26 21 22 23 24 25 >aio* * ******** az*o********* 63** o********************** 64***D******?************** 65****0******************** ************as* ************** 86*****0****************+** 67******~****************** @g*******o***************** fls*t******o**************** ~~*********or************** iI** * ******* o* 12*********** x******:* **** o*********r*** @lo[*********************** l- 2- B-QUIT 7-TENANT NLbi 3- 4-TOP 5-BOTTDM &-DISALLOW s- E- Figure 4-5 Form 05 Layout Field Description Initially, the system interconnects all Tenant Groups. The asterisk (*) character indicates this condition. When the system inhibits Tenant Group interconnection, it is indicated bythe period (.) character. TheTenant Group numbers are listed in the header line and the first column. The letter (0) functions as a marker and cannot be modified, Softkeys TENANT NUM: The TENANT NUM softkey allows a user to select a Tenant Group by number. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER TENANT GROUP NUM: prompt. 210 4-38 Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue1 CDE Form DescriDtions Entering the 2-digit tenant number (1 to 25) displays that Tenant Group with a series of I*’ characters (allow interconnection) and ‘,’ characters (disallow interconnection), Cursor movement on the command line is controlled by the right and left cursor control keys. DISALLOW/ALLOW: This softkey has two functions: it enables or disables interconnection between Tenant Groups. Pressing the DISALLOW softkey disables the interconnection between the Row Tenant (displayed by the command line) and the Column Tenant (highlighted by the cursor) in one direction only. For example, when modifying connections for Tenant Group 5 (the command line displays line 5) and the DISALLOW softkey is pressed when the cursor is under the sixth column, then Tenant Group 5 cannot call Tenant Group 6. However, Tenant Group 6 can still call Tenant Group 5. Total interconnection is inhibited only when a ‘.’ (disallow) character is inserted at row 6 (Tenant Group 6) under the fifth column (Tenant Group 5). The softkey now displays the ALLOW prompt. Pressing the ALLOW softkey enables the unidirectional interconnection between the selected Tenant Groups; the ‘*’ character replaces the ‘,’ character. The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, BOTTOM, TOP, and QUIT are also provided. Form 06 - Tenant Night Switching 4.6 Control In some systems it is necessary for one attendant to control the Night Service switching of more than one Tenant Group. This form specifies which Tenant Groups are switched to Night Service simultaneously and which Tenant has control, Note: The system defaults to Tenant Groups switching to Night Service independently of each other. See Figure 4-6 for the form layout. ?:57 3R-NOV-69 El 82 03 alarm E-4 85 86 87 88 89 18 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 status 19 28 q 21 81 0 82.0::::::::::::::::::::::: 83. . 0 04...o::::::::::::::::: 22 M&JOR 23 24 25 1::: 0 Liz:::: 07....:.;1 88.......i::::::::::::::::: 89. . . lL........o::::::::::::::: ll.... 0':::::::::::::::::: . lz...........i::::::::::::~ . . rn. . . 0 . . ..o ElO~........*............., l- 2- B-QUIT 7-TENANT NUM 3- 4-TOP 5-BOTTOM 8-SWITCHED 9- 8- Figure 4-6 Form 06 Layout 9 109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-39 Customer Data Entrv Field Description Initially, the system inhibits Tenant Groups from switching each other into Night Service. This condition is indicated by the period (.) character. When the system permits Tenant Groups to switch each other into Night Service, it is indicated by the asterisk (*) character. The Tenant Group numbers are listed in the header line and the first column. The letter (0) functions as a marker and cannot be modified. Softkeys TENANT NUM: The TENANT NUM softkey allows a user to select a Tenant Group by number. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER TENANT GROUP NUM: prompt. ,Entering the I- or 2-digit tenant number displays that Tenant Group with a series of I.’ characters (single Tenant Group entry into Night Service) and ‘*’ characters (multiple Tenant Group entry into Night Service). Cursor movement on the command line is controlled by the right and left cursor control keys. SWITCHED/NOT SWITCHED: This softkey has two functions: it enables or disables multiple Tenant Group switching into Night Service. This softkey displays the SWITCHED prompt when the cursor is at a period (.) character. Pressing the SWITCHED softkey specifies that the Tenant Group being programmed (as indicated by the row number) can switch the other Tenant Group (as indicated by the column number) into Night Service. The system reflects this modification by replacing the I.’ character with the ‘*’ character. The softkey now displays the NOT SWITCHED prompt. Pressing the NOT SWITCHED softkey specifies that the Tenant Group being programmed cannot switch the other Tenant Group into Night Service. The ‘.’ character replaces the ‘*’ character and the softkey now displays the SWITCHED prompt. The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, BOTTOM, TOP, and QUIT are also provided. 210 4-40 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descrirxions Form 07 - Console Assignments 4.7 This form specifies the physical location of each Attendant Console. Refer to Figure 4-7 for the form layout. The system provides an entry line in Form 07 for each Console Module and for each Digital Line circuit in a high power (upper) slot not assigned to a SUPERSETTelephone or DATASEI: The system can support a maximum of 11 Attendant Consoles. There can be no more than two Console Modules per Universal Card or four per Digital Line Card. The default location for an Attendant Console is Bay 2, Slot 3, Circuit 1 in 336,456 and 48O-por-tsystems; in 672-pot-t and SX-200 FD systems it is Bay 1, Slot 5, Circuit 1. Each Attendant Console is provided with a Class of Service (COS), a Class of Restriction (COR), a Tenant Group number and an extension number. The extension number enables calls between Attendant Consoles. These calls appear on the INTERNAL softkey. Note that the provision of a COR means that Attendant Consoles are not necessarily toll-allowed on all calls. 59 BAY 3E-NW-El9 alarm SLT CCT EXl NlJM : ti 01 10 1511 01 01 01 1 1 2 Em 08 03 11 12 01 2311 01 01 01 1 05 01 01 01 01 1 ~511 cos GOR status TENANT = MAJOR COfdMENTS l- 2- 3- 4- 5- ?-QUIT 7-BAY/SLT/CCT O-DELETE 9- E- Figure 4-7 Form 07 Layout Field Description EXT NUM: This field displays the extension number of each Attendant Console. Calls directed to the console’s extension number route to softkey 2 on the Attendant Console. COS: This field lists the Class-of-Service number specification for each console (1 to 50) rn COR: This field lists the Class-of-Restriction number specification for each console (1 to 25). TENANT: The Tenant Group for each Attendant Console is specified in this field (1 to 25). 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-41 Customer Data Enttv COMMENTS: This field is reserved for notes about each characters. The COMMENTS maximum of 15 alphanumeric system but not used. console. It contains a field is stored by the Softkeys The standard provided. Form 08 -Console 4.8 softkeys BAY/SLT/CCT, CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are LDN Assignments This form specifies the LDN assignments for the consoles (see Figure 4-8). A maximum of nine LDN assignments can be programmed for each Attendant Console. The attendant LDNs are assigned to the softkeys. Console softkey 1 is reserved for the RECALL function. Each LDN assignment is identified by a directory number. The directory numbers are subject to the same constraints as all Listed Directory Numbers (i.e., number conflicts are not allowed). If there are many Attendant Consoles in one Tenant Group and if “DIAL 0” calls are shared, then a common Listed Directory Number must be specified for the consoles. Note that this form is related to the Form 09 and Form 45 Expand Set Subforms, where LDN keys are programmed for subattendants. : 12 3E-NOV-89 BAY,‘SLT/CCT alarm : ELE5-El KEY DIR 5 4 E ;: 9 0 2 [I NLbiBER status COMMENTS LABEL 222 200 223 224 22s 226 227 228 229 Internal LDN 1 LDN 2 LDN 3 LDN 4 LDN 5 LDN 6 LDN 7 LDN 8 222 Internal = MAJOR I- 2- 3- 4-TOP 5-BOTTOM ;-QUIT 7-B&Y/SLT/CCT B-DELETE 9-HEXT 0- Figure 44 Form 08 Layout Field Description BAY/SLT/CCT: This field specifies the physical location of the Attendant programmed. This form relates to the programmed consoles KEY: This field displays the console softkeys 2 through KEY field cannot 210 4-42 Console in Form 07. IO (10 is displayed being as 0). The be modified. Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions DIR NUMBER: This field is reserved for assigning a directory number for console softkeys 2 to IO. This number (a maximum of five digits) links this form to Form 19 (Call Rerouting Table), and to Form 14 (Non-Dial-In Trunks), where the call type is defined for the directory number. An LDN directory number can only appear once per console. If it is required that two consoles share the same LDN, then both consoles must be in the same Tenant Group. _’ _ LABEL: This field specifies the actual text that the console LCD displays as softkey prompts. The LABEL field provides for a maximum of 12 characters. The label for console softkey 1 defaults to RECALL and cannot be modified. The label for console softkey 2 defaults to INTERNAL. Softkey 2 is shared between the extension number programmed in the DIR NUMBER field and calls directed to the Attendant Console’s extension number (as defined in the EXT NUM field of Form 07, Console Assignments). Console softkeys 2 to IO can be edited. COMMENTS: This field further specifies the Attendant LDN assignments with text. The COMMENTS field has a maximum of 15 characters. It is stored by the system but not used. Softkeys NEXT: Pressing the NEXT softkey displays the physical location (bay, slot and circuit numbers) of the next programmed Attendant Console. If the physical location of the last programmed console is displayed, then pressing this softkey again displays the bay, slot and circuit numbers of the first programmed console. The standard softkeys BAY/SLT/CCT, CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, BOTTOM, TOP, and QUIT are also provided. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-43 Customer Data Entry Form 09 - Stations/SUPH?S~Telephones 4.9 This form assigns stations and SUPERSET telephones to the system. See Figure 4-9 for the form layout. 3 : 56 xl-NOV-69 IBAY SLT alarm CCT TEN EmN COS COR TYP 1 1 I 1 I 1 llB1 1182 1183 1184 1185 1186 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I 1 I 1 1 1111 1 1 1 I 1781 1782 1 1 1186 1 IP-FIND EM ANNOUNCE NAME status = MAJOR COMMENTS ASSOC _’ I > 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 81 El 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 87 67 El 82 83 84 85 86 89 18 11 12 El 82 1 El 66 l-MOVE 6-PUIT rjl 743AY/SLT/CCT 1 1 stn Stn Stn Stn Stn Stn Stn Stn Stn Stn cov cov 1 Stn SCOTT 1% &DELETE VAILLANT PILLING. O'DELL GORBY AWEUNG SCOTT D. Manager Manager Accounts Accounts Accounts Secretary FERGUSON Pub CARDINAL ABBC A SW supp. Test D. 14g-REVIEW < Relatns Secretary 5-RANGE 0- Figure 4-9 Form 09 Layout Field Description BAY, SLOT and CCT: These fields list the physical location number of each station or SUPERSETtelephone. They are generated by the system based on what was entered in the PROGRAMMED field of Form 01, System Configuration. This field cannot be modified. TEN: This field lists the Tenant Group number for each station or SUPERSET telephone. Default tenant number is one. s EXT NUM: This field lists the extension number of each station or the Prime Line extension number of each SUPERSETtelephone. COS: This field lists the Class-of-Service number for each station or SUPERSET telephone, Default COS number is 1. COR: This field lists the Class-of-Restriction number for each station or SUPERSET telephone. Default COR number is 1. TYP: When a station is being programmed, the TYP field displays STN. For a SUPERSETtelephone, the field displays SET. For a SUPERSETDSS” module, BLF is displayed. For a SUPERSET 4DN programmed as an enhanced sub-attendant, (Generic 1004 only) SUB is displayed. When a physical location (Bay, Slot and Circuit) is defined as a Call Announce Port, CAP is displayed. The Call Announce Port can be a Station Circuit, a SUPERSET Telephone Circuit, a COV Circuit or OPS Circuit. Hardware restrictions prevent an ONS Circuit from being a Call Announce Port and only 210 444 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions a SUPERSETtelephone can own one. This field can be modified for DNIC circuits only; it is generated by the system based on what was entered in the PROGRAMMED field of Form 01, System Configuration. Note: For Generic 1005 only,the following differencesapply to the TYP field: For a SUPEffSETtelephone, the TYP field will display COV for a SUPERSET 3” and a SUPERSET 4, DN for a SUPERSET 3DN and a SUPERSET 4DN, 401 for a SUPERSET401,410 for a SUPERSET 4 IO, 420 for a SUPERSET 420 and 430 for a SUPERSET 430. For a SUPERSET 4DN or a SUPERSET 430 programmed as an enhanced sub-attendant, SUB is displayed. ANNOUNCE: This field is reserved for programming the call announce port to SUPERSET telephones. Refer to Practice 9109-096-I 05NA, Features Description, for details on the CALL ANNOUNCE feature. NAME: This field is reserved for a set name up to IO characters long. The name’s first letter must NOT be *. This is not available in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002. ASSOC: Associates the device in the TYP field with another device. A SUPERSET telephone can be associated with a modem (enter the ONS port extension number), and a SUPERSET DSS module can be associated with an attendant console, subattendant or a SUPERSETtelephone (enter the extension number). A modem may be associated with more than one SUPERSETtelephone, but a SUPERSETtelephone may be associated with only one modem. Two SUPERSET DSS modules can be associated to the same device, but a SUPERSETDSS module can be associated with only one device. For further information, refer to Practice 9109-096-I 05NA, Features Description, under Associated Modem Line, Busy Lamp Field, or Line Types and Appearances. The device in the TYP field device may be disassociated with the device in the ASSOC field simply by entering another device extension number, or erasing the existing extension number (enter a space). Note: This field is updated automatically if the extension number of the associated device is changed. This field is not available in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002. BLF: This field is seen only in Generic 1001 and Generic 1002, and is not used. COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 15 characters), It is stored by the system but not used. Softkeys MOVE: This softkey relocates a device via its bay slot, and circuit numbers. When the MOVE softkey is pressed, the command line requests the FROM location (BAY SLOT: CCT: ), When the location is specified and the ENTER softkey is pressed, the command line requests the TO location. The new location is designated and the ENTER softkey is pressed. Note entering invalid numbers inhibits cursor movement. FIND EXT: This softkey selects a device by its extension number. Pressing the FIND EXTsoftkey displays the ENTER EXTENSION NUM: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering an extension number of a station or the Prime Line 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 445 Customer Data Entry number of a SUPEFfSETtelephone. The selected device information appears on the command line. EXPAND SET: Pressing this softkey displays the Expand Set subform. Refer to Expand Set Subform. Note: This softkey is valid only when reviewing or programming a SUPERSETtelephone or a SUPERSETDSSmodule, and appears only when theTYP field on the command line says SET, BLF or SUB. .’ Note: For Generic1005 only, this softkey appears only when the TYP field on the commandline says COV, DN, 410,420,430, BLF or SUB. RANGE: This softkey facilitates block programming for consecutive stations and SUPERSETtelephones. Pressing this softkey displays the prompt: FROM BAY SLOT CIRCUIT. Enter valid Bay, Slot and Circuit numbers for the first device and press the ENTER softkey. The system then prompts TO BAY SLOT: CIRCUII:. Enter valid Bay, Slot and Circuit numbers for the last device and press the ENTER softkey. Enter Tenant Group, Extension Number, COS and COR for the first device, if this has not been done already. Press the ENTER softkey. The system automatically assigns incremented extension numbers, the same COS, COR and Tenant Group numbers to the rest of the devices in the block. Note: A range program cannot be done over a SUPERSETDSS module circuit. Note: For Generic 1005 only, when range programming on COV circuits, the system will automatically fill in COV in theTYP field. When range programming on DNIC circuits, the DEVICE TYPE softkey will appear when the extension number for the first circuit is assigned. The following device types are offered: 3/4DN, SS401, SS410, SS420 and ss430. REVIEW: Pressing the REVIEW softkey displays a new form (refer to Review List Subform). This form lists all programmed appearances of the selected extension number (orthe Prime Line number) on other SUPERSETtelephones. This key appears only when an extension has been defined. - DEVICE TYPE: Allows the line circuit to be programmed as one of: SUB An, BLF or SUPERSET, This softkey appears only when a circuit is not programmed. Programming any other fields ‘freezes” the device type at its current value. After this, only the fields valid for that device type are available. The device type can be changed by deleting all of the programmed entries - the DEVICE TYPE softkey will then reappear. BLF: Sets theTYPfield to BLF, and designates the device type as a SUPERSET DSS module. SUB ATT: Sets the TYP field to SUB and designates the device type as a Subattendant. (Enhanced Subattendant for Generic 1004 only). For further information, see Subattendant - Enhanced Functions, in Practice 9109-09&l 05-NA, Features Description. SUPERSET: Sets the TYP field to SET, and designates the device type as a normal SUPERSETtelephone. 210 4-46 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Note: For Generic 1005 only, the DEVICE TYPE softkey allows the line circuit to be programmed as one of: SUB Am, BLF, 3/4DN, SS401, SS410, SS420 or SS430. SUB ATT: Sets the TYP field to SUB and designates the device type as an Enhanced Subattendant. Note: This refers to a SUPERSET 4DN and a SUPERSET 430 only. For further information, see Subattendant - Enhanced Functions, in Practice 9109-096-I 05-NA, Features Description. 3/4DN: Sets the TYP field to DN and designates the device type as either a SUPERSET3DN or a SUPERSET4DN. SS401: Sets the TYP field to 401 and designates the device type as a SUPERSET 401. SS410: Sets the TYP field to 410 and designates the device type as a SUPERSET 4 10. SS420: Sets the TYP field to 420 and designates the device type as a SUPERSET 420. SS430: Sets the TYP field to 430 and designates the device type as a SUPERSET 430. The standard softkeys BAY/SLT/CCT, CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, *MORP and QUIT are also provided. Note: Generally, before a card can be deleted, any devices programmed on the card, or associated with circuits on the card must be deleted or disassociated first, using the appropriate form. An exception to this is a console may be deleted when there is a SUPERSETDSS module associated with it in Form 09; the module then becomes a stand-alone module. 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-47 Customer Data Entrv Expand Set Subform for Form 09 4.10 This form appears when the EXPAND SET softkey is pressed in the StationlSUPERSETTelephones form. It is used to program SUPERSETtelephones line appearances and feature keys. Refer to Figure 4-10 for the form layout. This form is not available to the SUPERSET401. :36 3E-NOV-69 KEY alarm TYPE 61 62 63 84 ES 86 87 88 89 10 11 12 DIR Prime Multiple Multiple MultiDle In/Out hfout I/C In/Out O/G In/Out 86 t-601'H WAY ;-QUIT b -IN 7-KEY RING 1 SEC Immed Immed Delay None None Immed No No No No No No Immed No DSS status EXT NUMITRK MU+1 q MAJOR L&EEL 1701 1104 1105 1106 4= 2 2 ONLY 5- S-DELETE g-REVIEW 0- Figure 4-10 Form 09 Expand Set Subform Layout Field Description KEY: This field lists the SUPERSETTelephone Line Select key numbers and cannot be modified. If the expanded set is one of 2 SUPERSETDSSmodules associated with another device, the key numbers are preceded by a 1 or a 2, indicating that the module is the first or second module associated with that device. The key numbers on a SUPERSETDSSModule (Generic 1003, Generic 1004 and Generic 1005) correspond to those in Figure 4-11. . Note: The SUPERSET 410 has 6 programmable keys; SUPERSET and SUPERSET 430 each have 12 programmable keys. The error message “Invalid key for set in use” will appear if the user attempts to program keys 7 to 12 of a SUPERSET 70 which has been installed on a circuit which as been programmed for a SUPERSET or a SUPERSET430. TYPE: This field lists the key function. If it is a Speed Dial key, the default assignment, the words “Speed Dial” are shown. If it is a line appearance, the line type is shown. If it is a feature key, the feature name is shown. If the line is a BLF Appearance or a DSS Key, the key type is “Busy Lamp”. DIR: If the key is a line appearance, Incoming) is shown. This field appears 210 4-48 the directional variant of the line (In/Out in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Revision 0 9109-096-2 1 O-NA Issue 1 or CDE Form Descriptions DIRECTION: Same as DIR. This field appears in Generic 1001, Generic 1002 and Generic 1003. RING: If the key is a line appearance, the ringing variant of the line (Immed, Delay, or None) is shown. SEC: If the key is a line appearance, this field indicates (Yes or No) whether the secretarial variant is enabled. For a Busy Lamp key, setting this field to YES causes an immediate release when the DSS key is pressed. This field appears in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Key 16 Key 32 Key 01 Key 17 Figure 4-11 SUPERSETDSS Module Key Locations For Programming SECRETARIAL: Same as SEC. This field appears in Generic 1001, Generic 1002 and Generic 1003. DSS: A YES in this field indicates that the key is a DSS key. This field does not appear in Generic 1001, and it is not used in Genericl002. EXT NUM: This field contains the extension number of the line. This applies to the Prime Line, Key lines, Multiple Call lines, Personal Outgoing lines or BLF/DSS lines, When this field is filled for a specific key, no entry is allowed in the corresponding TRUNK NUMBER field. The EXT NUM field is blank if the key directly selects a trunk. 9109-09&21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-49 Customer Data Entry KEY12 WV10 KEY06 Kc106 KEY04 KEY02 KcIc8’ ‘KEY05 KEY04 ~KEYa.3 KEYM .KEYOl SUPERSET Figure 4-l 2 SUPERSET SUPERSE7-420 and SUPERSET Key Locations For Programming TRK NW: If the key is assigned as DTS or Private Trunk, this field contains the trunk number. Trunk numbers are defined in Form 14, Non-Dial-In Trunks and Form 15, Dial-In Trunks. Note that when this field is filled for a specific key, no entry is allowed in the corresponding EXT NUM field. This field appears in Generic 1002, Generic 1003, ,Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. TRUNK NUMBER: Same as TRK NUM. This field appears in Generic 1001 only. LABEL: Only appears if the softkey type is LDN, and the device type is a subattendant. The only exception is, if the softkey type is Recall, the LABEL field is automatically RECALL. For all other LDN softkeys, any character string may be entered up to 12 characters in length. This field appears in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. 210 450 Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions KEY11 ,Ki309 KM08 KC107 KEY06 KEY-3 KEY04 KEY03 woz KEY01 ’I I ’ SUPERSET EEWP Figure 4-13 SOPERSET430 Key Locations For Programming Softkeys KEY LINE: Pressing this softkey assigns the selected SUPERSE”I”key as a Key Line appearance. “Key” appears in the TYPE field. Then use the TAB or => key to move the cursor to the DIRECTION field. . PERSONAL O/G: This softkey appears after the * MORE * softkey is pressed. Pressing the PERSONAL O/G softkey designates the selected SUPERSET key as a personal outgoing line. No other fields can be edited. Press the ENTER softkey. “Personal” appears in the TYPE field. “Outgoing” appears in the DIRECTION field. “None” appears in the RING field. MULTI-CALL: Pressing this softkey assigns the selected SUPERSET key as a Multiple Call Line appearance. “Multiple” appears in the TYPE field. Then use the TAB or => key to move the cursor to the DIRECTION field. ‘\ PRIVATE TRK: This softkey appears after the * MORE *x softkey is pressed. Pressing PRIVATE TRK designates the selected SUPERSET key as a Private Line. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-51 Customer Data Entry FEATURE: Pressing this softkey assigns the selected SUPERSETline appearance key as a feature access key. This softkey appears only if the set is a SUPE/?SET3DN, SUPERSET 4DN, SUPERSET 410, SUPERSET 420 or SUPERSET 430 telephone. The following softkeys appear when the cursor is at the TYPE field and the FEATURE softkey is pressed: \ l AUTO ANSWER l DO NOT DIST (Do Not Disturb) l PRIVACY l OVERRIDE REL (Privacy Release) 9 PAPAGING l CAMPON l MUSIC l CALL FORWARD l CALL PICKUP l NIGHT ANSWER l CALLBACK l SWAP (Trade Calls) l CALL/AnN l DATA DISC (Data Call Disconnect) l ACCOUNT CODE l FORWARD CALL Note: (Data Call Connect) Refer to Practice 9109-096105-NA, Features Description, for a description feature keys available for digital SUPERSETtelephones. BLF/DSS: Appears after the * MORE* softkey is pressed. Programs the selected as a busy lamp field appearance (for the associated extension number). of the key DIR TRK ACC: Pressing this softkey programs the selected SUPERSET key as a .Direct Trunk Access line. “DTS” appears in the TYPE field. Then use the TAB or + key to move the cursor to the DIRECTION field. KEY: This softkey selects a SUPERSET key by number. displays the ENTER KEY NUM: prompt on the command may be selected except for Key 01 (Prime Line). Pressing the KEY softkey line. Any SUPERSET key LDN: Appears after the ** MORE * softkey is pressed twice. Programs the selected key as an enhanced sub-attendant LDN key. LDN is displayed in the TYPE field. At this point, a ring type can be selected, an extension number entered, and a label entered. The label is displayed on the SUPERSET 4DN and the SUPERSET 430 display. An enhanced sub-attendant may have up to 3 LDN positions. This is available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. 210 4-52 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 rmI CDE Form Descriptions HOLD POS: Appears after the * MORE ++ softkey is pressed twice. Programs the selected key as an enhanced sub-attendant hold slot. Hold Slot is displayed in the TYPE field. No other fields may be programmed. An enhanced sub-attendant may have up to 3 hold slots. This is available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. - \ RECALL: Appears after the kR MORE kR softkey is pressed twice. Programs the selected key as an enhanced sub-attendant Recall key. Recall is displayed in the TYPE field. The only other field that may be programmed is the RING field. An enhanced sub-attendant may have only one Recall Key. This is available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. REVIEW: Pressing the REVIEW softkey displays a new form (refer’to Review Lisf Subform). This form displays a list of all programmed appearances of the selected Line Select key on all devices. BOTH WAY: Pressing this softkey enables the selected SUPERSET key (line appearance) to originate and receive calls. The DIR / DIRECTION field displays the In/Out indication. IN ONLY: Pressing this softkey restricts the selected SUPERSET key (line appearance) to receiving incoming calls only. No call originations are permitted. The DIRECTION field displays “Incoming”. IMMED RING: Pressing this softkey programs the selected SUPERSET key (line appearance) to ring the SUPERSFTtelephone immediately for incoming calls. The form displays lmmed in the RING field to indicate this condition. DELAY RING: Pressing this softkey causes incoming calls to flash the selected key (line appearance) for a programmable period of time and then ring the SUPERSET telephone for incoming calls. The Delay indication appears in the RING field. NO RING: Pressing this softkey prevents incoming calls from ringing the SUPERSET telephone ringer. Only the line appearance flashes. The None indication appears in the RING field. DSS: Appears only in the DSS field. Enables the DSS key associated with a BLF appearance. The YES indication appears in the DSS field. NON DSS: Appears only in the DSS field. Disables the DSS key associated with a BLF appearance. The NO indication appears in the DSS field. NON SECR: Pressing this softkey disables the secretarial function for the selected SUPERSETkey (line appearance). The No indication appears in the SECRETARIAL field. SECRETARIAL: Pressing this softkey enables the secretarial function for the selected SUPERSETkey (line appearance). The Yes indication appears in the SECRETARIAL field. When a Line Select key is set as a secretarial key, then the user can override the DO NOT DISTURB feature on the SUPERSETtelephone corresponding to that line appearance. For a DSS key, this enables the secretarial option. The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, * MORE * and QUIT are also provided. QlOQ-09621 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 443 CustomerData Entrv Review List Subform for Form 09 4.11 This form appears when the REVIEW softkey is pressed in the Station/SUPERS,!3 Telephones Form or the SUPERSETTelephone Lines Form. This form can be used at any time to find where any particular extension number or line appears. When entered from the StationlSUPERSET Form, this form displays a list of all programmed appearances of the selected extension number. When entered from the Expand Set Subform, the form displays all appearances of the selected key’s extension number, trunk number, or Sub Attendant LDN number. See Figure 4-14 for the form layout. Note that the data in this form cannot be modified. 34 3B-NOW39 PBX SET alarm : 1701 BAY SLOT CCT EXT 1 1 1 87 l- 2- S-TRUNK 6-QUIT 7- 8- El 0 NUMBER NLIM status q MAJOR SET TYPE KETl 1701 1702 PBX SET PEX SET 1 2 1701 PBX 1 SET 4-LDN NUM 5- S-EXT NLJM E- Figure 4-14 Form 09 Review List Subform Layout Field Descriptions . The header line displays the selected line appearance access number. For telephones, the type (set, station, subattendant) and application (PBX or KEY system) is shown, along with the extension number. For trunks, the type (trunk number, CO Line CO Line group) is shown along with the trunk number, or leading ARS digits. Extension numbers are also shown for LDNs and logical lines. BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields list the bay, slot and circuit numbers of each extension or SUPERSETtelephone that has an appearance of the selected line. These fields cannot be modified. The system generates them based on the PROGRAMMED field of Form 01, System Configuration. STN/SUPERSET: This field displays the listed device type; STATION indicates an industry standard telephone set and SUPERSETindicates a SUPERSETtelephone. This field is not available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005 - it is replaced by the SET TYPE field. SET TYPE: This field displays the listed device type. PBX STATION indicates an industry standard telephone; PBX SET indicates a SUPERSETtelephone within a PBX 210 4-54 Revision0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions tenant group; Key SET indicates a SUPERSETtelephone within a Key System tenant group; Key SUB-An indicates a Sub Attendant for a Key System Tenant group; PBX SUB-An indicates a Sub Attendant for a PBX tenant group; and CONSOLE indicates an attendant console. KEY: For listed SUPEfISETtelephones, the line appears. the KEY field displays the key number where EXT NUM: This field displays the prime extension number assigned to a particular Bay/Slot/Circuit. Softkeys TRUNKNUMBER: This softkey selects a trunk to review by its trunk number. Pressing this softkey displays ENTER TRUNK NUM: prompt on the command line. The trunk selection is completed by entering a valid trunk number (1 - 200), and pressing the ENTER softkey. EXT NUM: This softkey selects an extension to review. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER EXTENSION NUM: prompt. The selection is completed by entering a valid extension number and then pressing the ENTER sottkey. LDN NUM: This softkey selects an LDN to review. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER LDN NUM: prompt. The selection is completed by entering a valid LDN number and then pressing the ENTER softkey. The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided. . 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 4-55 Customer Data Entrv Form 10 - Pit kup Groups 4.12 This form specifies the members of each Pickup Group. See Figure 4-l 5 for the form layout, Memberships are specified by the extension number of an industry standard telephone set or the Prime Line number of a SUPERSETtelephone. Attendant Consoles are not allowed. The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX supports a maximum of 50 Pickup Groups; each group supports a maximum of 50 members. _’ [ PICKUP GROUP : 1 ] EXT NUM BAY SLT CCT 01 01 01 01 01 El 01 01 El 01 06 ES 84 83 02 01 1106 1105 1104 1183 1182 1101 t: lB6 IS-QUIT 17- 86 3-INSERT 4- B-DELETE 9-EXT COMMENTS Secretary Accounts Accounts Accounts Manager Manager +h-y 5-PICKUP #Lbi GROUP I@- Figure 4-15 Form 10 Layout Field Descriptions EXT NUM: This field displays the Pickup Group member extension number. BAY/SLT/CCT and COMMENTS: These fields cannot be modified. The form displays the BAY/SLT/CCT and COMMENTS fields from the corresponding lines of Form 09, Station/SUPERSET Telephones. . Softkeys INSERT: This softkey adds a new member to the Pickup Group on a new line just above the current line pointer. Pressing the INSERT softkey clears the command line and moves the cursor to the EXIT NUM field. Enter a valid extension number and press the ENTER softkey. Note: This softkey only appears if there is data present in this form. PICKUP GROUP: This softkey selects the Pickup Group to be displayed. Pressing the PICKUP GROUP softkey displays the ENTER PICKUP GROUP NUM: prompt on the command line. Enter the Pickup Group number and press the ENTER softkey. 210 4-56 Revision 0 9109-09621O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions EXT NUM: This softkey selects a Pickup Group member by its extension number (or Prime Line number). Pressing the EXT NUM softkey displays the ENTER EXTENSION NUM: prompt on the command line. Entering the extension number displays that member with its bay, slot and circuit location, and (if any) comments. Note that if the selected extension number is not in the current Pickup Group, then the system automatically displays the Pickup Group where the selected device is located. The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided. _’ ; Form 11 - Data Circuit Descriptor 4.13 A data circuit descriptor specifies the parameters the data processing software and attached DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) require. This form provides 25 programmable descriptors. The main form displays the descriptor numbers and the number of circuits associated with each descriptor (see Figure 4-16). The system generates the data in this form based on the entries in Form 12, Data Assignment. The user can modify only the COMMENTS field. A softkey provides access to the individual parameters of each descriptor via a sub-form. This form is not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LlT96. 4:El 3E-NW-89 alarm status = MAJOR Figure 4-16 Form 11 Layout Field Descriptions DESCRIPTOR: This field lists the circuit descriptors, numbered 01 to 25. NUMBER OF DATA CIRCUITS ASSIGNED: This field records the number of devices assigned to each descriptor. COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 20 characters). It is stored by the system but not used. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-57 Customer Data Entry Softkeys DESCRIPTOR NUMBER: The DESC NUM softkey allows the user to select a DESC NUM by number. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER DESC NUM: prompt. Entering a valid descriptor number and pressing the ENTER softkey, completes the selection, SELECT OPTION: Pressing this softkey displays a new form. This form provides options associated with the data circuit that is assigned to Table 4-4, Data Circuit Descriptor Options. to a descriptor number. the Refer REVIEW: The RWIEW softkey appears only if at least one circuit has been assigned the descriptor displayed on the command line. Pressing this softkey displays a new form (Review List Subform). This form displays the BAY, SLOT, CIRCUIT and SUBCIRCUIT location of all devices assigned that descriptor. The standard softkey QUIT is also provided. Data Circuit Descriptor Options SUBFORM 4.14 This form appears when the SEL. OPTION softkey is pressed (see Figure 4-17). It lists the programmable parameters of the descriptor. See Table 4-4 for the complete list of options (they are described below, under Parameters). 4:85 3B-NOV-89 [ DESCRIPTOR alarm NUMBER : 1 1 PARAMETER status NAME VALUE Session Inactivity Disconnect Timer 8 - 255 minutes Guard Timer E - 99 seconds Mlnimun Baud Rate Default Baud Rate MaHlmum Baud Rate Always Use Default Baud Rate When Called DTR Off Disconnect Timer 0 - 99 seconds DTR To CTS Delay Timer 0 - 9986 msec ( 188 msec DTR Forced High RTS Farced High DSR Is Held High When Device Is Idle CTS Is Held High When Device Is Idle Default l- 12B8 Baud 2-?- 6-l&lIT = MAJOR B 1 inc 110 9608 19288 NO 5 IBE NO NO YES YES > Rate 2408 < cl 9608 3- 4688 4- 5- 8- 19288 9- Ei- ** MORE ** Figure 4-l 7 Select Options Subform Layout Field Descriptions The header line displays the descriptor number. PARAMETER NAME: This field lists the parameters. the valid range of values. 210 4-58 Revision 0 For numerical parameters, 9109-096-21O-NA it lists Issue1 CDE Form Descriptions VALUE: This field lists the option or numeric value selected for each parameter. Softkeys ._ The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided. The other softkeys depend on the parameter displayed on the command line (see Parameters for details). Generally, for numeric parameters, only the QUIT softkey appears, When a value is typed in, the ENTER softkey appears. Press ENTER once to terminate the entry, then again to commit it to the database. While the ENTER softkey is present and has not been pressed, the QUIT softkey cancels the new entry and restores the previous value. For parameters with YES and NO options, softkey 1 appears, marked with the option opposite to the current setting. ‘ Table 44 Data Circuit Descriptor Options Session Inactivity Disconnect Timer (O-255 minutes) Guard Timer (O-Q9 seconds) Minimum Baud Rate Default Baud Rate Maximum Baud Rate Always Use Default Baud Rate When Called DTR Off Disconnect Timer DTR to CTS Delay Timer DTR Forced High RTS Forced High DSR Is Held High When Device is Idle CTS Is Held High When Device is Idle Originate a DTRX Call Wll A Low->High Transition of DTR Action Taken If The Idle DTE Has DTR Low (Auto Answer) Pooled Modem Communication Established indicator First Modem Tone Second Modem Tone ASYNC: Keyboard Origination Allowed ASYNC: ADL Auto Baud ASYNC: Flow Control ASYNC: XON Character ASYNC: XOFF Character ASYNC: ASYNC: ASYNC: ASYNC: ASYNC: ASYNC: Break Key Function PBX Attention Character Parity Character Length Number of Stop Bits Autobaud To Host Character 1 ASYNC: Autobaud To Host Character 2 ASYNC: Delay Between Autobaud Characters DS2100: Operating Mode SYNC: Rate Adaption Scheme SYNC: Clock Source 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-59 Customer Data Entry Table 4-5 Data Communication Term Abbreviation CT!3 DCD DCE DSR DTE DTR DTRX RI ADL Abbreviations Clear To Send Data Carrier Detect Data Communication Equipment Data Set Ready Data Terminal Equipment Data Terminal Ready Data Transceiver Ring Indicator Associated Data Line Parameters The Data Circuit Descriptor is used by ADL calls, DTRX calls, printer monitors, the PMS port and Pooled Modems. The parameters are ordered so that timers and baud rate options appear at the top of the form. These parameters apply to all data device types. Next are the parameters dealing with EIA leads. These also apply to all data devices but the parameter’s meaning can depend on whether a modem adapter is in the RF-232 connection. The last options are device type dependent parameters, usually indicated by a prefix. Session Inactivity Disconnect Timer: The DATASET monitors the time from the last transmitted or received character. If the programmed time period is exceeded, the data call is dropped. This timer has a range of 0 to 255 minutes. It is disabled if set to 0 minutes. Set to 0 for synchronous operation. Guard Timer: After a DATASET has disconnected, the Guard Timer keeps the DATASET unavailable for a short time period to allow the far end to clear down. This timer has a range of 0 to 99 seconds in 1 second increments. Minimum And Maximum Baud Rate: These two fields specify the minimum and data rate capacities of the attached device. The maximum baud rate must be set greater than or equal to the minimum baud rate. Valid baud rates are 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200. If a range of baud rates is specified, it is assumed the system can use any of these baud rates to establish communications. If it is undesirable to have the system change the baud rate, a range should NOT be programmed. That is, the baud rate parameters should all be set equal. maximum - Default Baud Rate: The specified default baud rate is used as the initial baud rate for non-autobaud datasets. Always Use Default Baud Rate When Called: When this parameter is enabled, the system will set the baud rate of the destination dataset to the default, even if a range of baud rates has been programmed. The system will not change the data rate when attempting to establish communications. DTR Off Disconnect Timer: This timer specifies how long the system will wait to disconnect the data call after the attached device has dropped DTR. If a modem Revision0 9109496-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions adapter is inserted in the RS-232 connection, the system monitors DSR instead. This timer has a range of 0 to 99 seconds, in 1 second increments. Note: If the attached device is a Pooled Modem, the timer has no effect; when the Pooled Modem drops DSR, the data call is dropped immediately. DTR “To CTS Delay Timer: This timer specifies how long the system waits before asserting CTS to the dataset after the attached device has asserted DTR. The timer has a range of 0 to 9900 milliseconds, in 100 millisecond increments. DTR Forced High: With this option enabled, the system assumes DTR of the attached device is high, regardless of its actual state. If a modem adapter is;inserted in the RS-232 connection, this option applies to DSR instead. RTS Forced High: With this option enabled, the system assumes RTS of the attached device is high, regardless of its actual state. If a modem adapter is inserted in the RS-232 connection, this option applies to DCD instead. DSR Is Held High When Device Is Idle: This option specifies the state of system DSR to an idle device, until a data call is connected. When enabled, DSR is held high; when disabled, DSR is held low. If a modem adapter is inserted in the RS-232 connection, this option applies to DTR instead. Note: This parameter MUST be enabled to provide Keyboard Origination. CTS Is Held High When Device Is Idle: This option specifies the state of system CTS to an idle device, until a data call is connected. When enabled, CTS is held high; when disabled, CTS is held low. With this parameter disabled, the DTR to CTS Delay Timer is not applicable because CTS will not be asserted until the call is connected. Note: This parameter MUST be enabled to provide Keyboard Origination. Originate A DTRX Call With A Low + High Transition Of DTR: With this option enabled, the system initiates a DTRX call when the attached device changes DTR from low to high (e.g. when the attached terminal is turned on). This option is typically enabled for Hotline services. . Action To Be Taken If The Called DTE Has DTR Low ( Auto Answer ): This parameter specifies which EIA signal the system applies to an idle DTE which is called and has DTR low. The attached DTE must respond with DTR high within one minute. The options available are: Toggle RI: The system alerts the DTE by toggling RI with a cadence of 2.5 seconds on, 2.5 seconds off. If DTR is high when the DTE is called, the call is barred. RAISE DSR: The system alerts the DTE by raising DSR. If DTR is high when the DTE is called, the call is barred. RAISE DCD: The system alerts the DTE by raising DCD. If DTR is high when the DTE is called, the call is barred. REFUSE: The DTE is only seized when DTR is high. If DTR is low when the DTE is called, the call is barred. 9109496-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-61 CustomerData Enttv Pooled Modem Communication Established Indicator: When the system is establishing data communication between a Pooled Modem and a remote modem, this parameter identifies which EIA lead indicates that communication is established. The options available are DCD and DSR. First Modem Tone: When the system is establishing outgoing communication between a pooled modem and a remote modem, this parameter identifies which modem tone the pooled modem can detect (2025,210O or 2225 Hz). Once the system .’ detects the tone, and recognizes it as a valid tone, it connects the call. Secgnd Modem Tone: When the system is establishing outgoing communication between a pooled modem and a remote modem, this parameter identifies a second modem tone the pooled modem can detect (2025,210O or 2225 Hz). Once the system detects the tone, and recognizes it as a valid tone, it connects the call. ASYNC: Keyboard Origination Allowed (Auto Baud): The dataset can perform autobaud detection on a carriage return character. With this option enabled, the system receives a baud rate report from the dataset and attempts to establish the data call at this rate. If the originator’s baud rate must be changed, the system notifies the user with a message on the terminal. The following parameters must also be enabled: l DSR Is Held High When Device Is Idle l CTS Is Held High When Device Is Idle ASYNC: ADL Auto Baud: With this option enabled, after dialing the ADL access code an ADL caller must enter a carriage return to set the baud rate. With this option disabled, the system attempts to establish the ADL call at the originator’s last used baud rate. ASYNC: Flow Control: This parameter specifies the flow control method the dataset uses. The options are CTS, PIN 25HI/CTS, PIN 25LO/CTS, XON/XOFF or NONE. Note: The CTS method offlow control is unidirectional. When instructed to stop the dataflow, the dataset drops CTS. The attached DTE should recognize this signal and stop transmitting data. When the dataset is instructed to start the flow again, it raises CTS and the attached DTE should begin transmitting again. b ASYNC: XON Character: This character resumes transmission between the dataset and the attached device. It is programmed as the decimal equivalent of the desired ASCII character. The most widely used XON character is Control-Q, whose decimal ,equivalent is 17. ASYNC: XOFF Character: This character stops transmission between the dataset and the attached device. It is programmed as the decimal equivalent of the desired ASCII character. The most widely used XOFF character is Control-S, whose decimal equivalent is 19. ASYNC: Break Key Function: This parameter specifies the function of the BREAK key. The options are: 210 4-62 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions SYS ATT: the current DTRX data call is dropped and the user is prompted to dial another data call. If the current data call is via ADL, SYS A7T simply drops the call. TRANSPARENT: No action by DTRX. Passed on to destination. - ASYNC: PBX Attention Character: This parameter (+127) specifies the incoming character the dataset expects as the Attention character. When the dataset detects this character, it informs the PABX. If the current data call is via DTRX, the user is prompted to dial another data call; if the call is via ADL, it is simply dropped. The value of the parameter is decimal equivalent of the desired ASCII character. The NUL character (00) should be programmed to disable this feature. ASYNC: Parity: This parameter specifies the parity type of the device attached to the dataset.The options are: mark parity, space parity, even parity, odd parity or no parity. If the character length is set to 8 bits, NO PARITY is assumed. ASYNC: Character Length: This parameter specifies the UART character length, 7 or 8 bits. If 8 bits are selected, NO PARITY is assumed. ASYNC: Number Of Stop Biis: This parameter specifies the number of stop bits per character, 1 or 2. ASYNC: Autobaud To Host Character 1 And 2: These are the characters sent to the attached device when the Dataset is switched to the B-channel. The value of the parameter (O-l 27) is the decimal equivalent of the desired ASCII character. To disable this feature, program a NULL (00) character into both Autobaud To Host Characters. If Character 1 is non-zero and Character 2 is zero, only Character 1 is sent. However, if Character 1 is zero and Character 2 is non-zero, both characters are sent. This feature is designed for attached devices which can automatically set their baud rate and/or parity from specific characters, If the attached device does not have this capability, one of the following should be done: * Set Minimum Baud Rate = Maximum Baud Rate = Default Baud Rate l Enable the “Always Use Default Baud Rate When Called” parameter With one of the above options selected, the Autobaud To Host characters can still be programmed for other purposes. For example, some data devices return a prompt in response to a carriage return (decimal equivalent = 13). ASYNC: Delay Between Autobaud Characters: This timer specifies the interval between the start of transmission of one autobaud character and the next. It is also applied after the Dataset has disconnected from the D channel and before the first autobaud character is sent to the attached device. The timer has a range of 0 to 1270 msecs in increments of 10 msecs. To disable this timer, set it to 0 msecs. DS2100: Operating Mode: This parameter is for the DATASET 2100 series only. It selects the operating mode of the Dataset, Asynchronous or Synchronous. SYNC: Rate Adaptation Scheme: In synchronous operation of the DATASET 2100, this parameter defines synchronous operation as either Transparent Mode (MiNET) or X.31 Mode. 9109-09&21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-63 I CustomerData Entrv SYNC: Clock Source: This parameter selects the clock source for synchronous operation of the DATASET 2100. The options are: INTERNAL: This option applies when the DATASET 00 is operated as a DCE. The DTE Transmit clock signal comes from the DATASET’s internal baud rate generator which is not synchronized to the PBX timing. The DTE Receive clock signal comes from the DATASET’s receiver Phase Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL extracts the timing from the data received from the far end DATASET. \ SYSTEM: This option applies when the DATASET 2100 is operated as a DCE. Both the DTE Transmit and Receive clock signals come from the DATASET’s receiver Phase Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL extracts the timing from the data received from the far end data set. TX EXT: This option applies to both DCE and DTE operation, The DTE Receive clock signal comes from the DATASET’s receiver PLL. The PLL extracts the timing from the data received from the far end DATASET. When the DATASET 2100 is operated as a DCE, the DTE Transmit clock signal comes from an external clock signal on M-232 pin 24 from the attached device. When the DATASET 2100 is operated as a DTE, the external clock signal is derived from the DCE’s received data. TX & RX EXT: This option applies when the DATASET 2100 is operated as a DTE. Both the Receive and Transmit data clocks come from the attached DCE. The external Transmit clock is derived from the modem’s received data (Pin 17) and is remapped to pin 24 on the dataset via the DCE adapter. The external Receive clock is derived from the modem’s transmit data (Pin 15) and is remapped to the dataset pin 18 using the DCE adapter. . 210 4-64 Revision0 9109-096-21CLNA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Review List Subform for Form 11 4.15 This form appears when the REVIEW softkey is pressed in Form 11 - Data Circuit Descriptor. This form lists all the users of a particular descriptor, identified by their physical location (BAY/SLOT/CIRCUIT). See Figure 4-18 for the form layout. Note: The data in this form cannot be modified. 4:86 38-NOV-89 [ DESCRIPTOR alarm NUMBER : 1 ] BAY SLT CCT I 1 a 8 12 2 01 I- 2- B-QUIT 7-DESC NUMBER 811 status XT = MAJOR COMMEWTS < 2 2 3- 4- 5- 8- 9- a- Figure 4-18 Review List Subform Layout Field Descriptions The header line displays the descriptor number and the location of the descriptor. DESCRIPTOR NUMBER: This field displays the descriptor number selected for review. BAY, SLT, CCT, SCT: These fields list the physical location of each data circuit. COMMENTS: This field displays any additional information that was entered in Form data in this field is stored by the system but not used. 12. The Softkeys DESC NUMBER: Pressing this softkey causes the system to request which Descriptor number to display. Complete the entry by pressing ENTER. The standard softkey QUIT is also provided. 9109-09&21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-65 Customer Data Entry Form 12 - Data Assignment 4.16 When a Digital Line card is programmed in the System Configuration Form, the system creates an entry line for each of its circuits in Form 09, StationslSUPERSET Telephones, Form 45, Key System Telephones and in Form 12, Data Assignment. See Figure 4-19 for the form layout. If the card is in an upper (high power) slot, the system also creates entry lines for its circuits in Form 07, Console Assignments, -This-form is not available in Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. When the programmer assigns a Digital Line Card port as a DATASET, the system removes the corresponding line from Form 09 or Form 45. The exception ‘is the DATASET 1101 Data Cartridge; when one of these is programmed, the line in Form 09 remains to allow programming of the Digital SUPERSETtelephone. When the programmer assigns a Digital Line Card port as a SUPERSET3DN or a SUPERSET4DN Telephone, the only data device type that can be selected on the corresponding line in Form 12 is the Data Cartridge, DATASET 1101. When a SUPERSET410, SUPERSET420or SUPERSET is programmed in Form 09 or Form 45, the only data device type available is 1101M. Digital Line Card ports which appear in Form 07 are removed if assigned as a Digital SUPERSETtelephone or DATASET. Likewise, a port assigned as a console is removed from Form 09. Then the only data device type that can be selected on the corresponding line in Form 12 is DSCONS, the console printer port. :21 30-NOV-89 BAY SLT alarm CM TYPE TEN EXT NUM COS COR CDN DTE I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 . 88 08 86 88 88 88 88 88 88 BB 01 02 85 06 87 88 89 10 11 12 1 1 1 1812 1822 1852 i 3 111 1 1 1 3 AVL status HOTLINE MAJOR COMMENTS Is Is hs 1 1 q data data data port port port i 1 l-DATA 6-QUIT 06 86 0 DEV TYP P-FIND EKT 7-BhY/SLT/CCT S-FIND AVL 8- 4- 5-RANGE 9- E- Figure 4-19 Form 12 Layout 210 4-66 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Field Descriptions BAY/SLT/CCT/: This field specifies the physical location of each device. This list is generated by the system based on what was entered in the programmed field of Form 01, System Configuration. Note: This field cannot be modified. _’ TYP: This field identifies the type of data device programmed. The available devices are: DSI 101, DS1102, DS1103, DS2102, DS2103, DSCONS and 1101M. TEN: The tenant group for each device is specified in this field. EXT NUM: This field displays the assigned extension number of a dafa line. COS: This field lists the Class-of-Service number specification of each device (1 to 50). COR: This field lists the Class-of-Restriction number specification of each device (1 to 25). CDN: This field lists the Circuit Descriptor Number assigned to a device (1 to 25). DTE: Thisfield liststhe DataTerminal Equipment Profile number (1 to 25). Adatadevice must have a DTE Profile number to access a DTRX. Otherwise, this field should be left blank. AVL: This field lists the Associated Voice Line (directory number) used to associate a DATASET with a Voice set, so the ADL (Associated Data Line) can be used. HOTLINE: This field lists the directory number of the destination DTE. COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 15 characters). It is stored by the system but not used. Softkeys DATA DEV NP: Pressing the DATA DEVTYP softkey displays softkeys which assign the type of data device connected to the circuit displayed on the command line. If a SUfWfSET3DN or a SUPERSET4DN telephone is programmed for the circuit, only the DSllOl device type softkey appears. If a SUPERSET410, SUPERSET or a SUPERSET telephone is programmed for the circuit, only the 1101M device type softkey appears. DS1103: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been pressed. Pressing this softkey assigns the device as an Asynchronous Stand-alone dataset. DS1102 CCTI: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been pressed. Pressing this softkey assigns the device type for subcircuit 1 of the port as an Asynchronous Rack Mount Dataset. Because the DATASET 1102 is a dual DATASET, a second line appears for subcircuit 2 of the port. DS1102 CCT2: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been pressed on the second line of a port assigned as a DATASET 1102. It is the only softkey 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 4-67 Customer Data Entry available in this situation. Pressing the DSII 02 CCT2 softkey assigns the device type for subcircuit 2 of the port as an Asynchronous Rack Mount Dataset. DSIIOI: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been pressed. Pressing this softkey assigns the device type as a data cartridge. DS2102: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been pressed. Pressing this softkey assigns the device type as an Asynchronous/Synchronous Rack Mount DATASET. DS2j03: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been pressed. ,Pressing this softkey assigns the device type as an Asynchronous/Synchronous Rack Mount DATAS ET. DSCONS: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been pressed. Pressing this softkey assigns the device type as a Mk 2 Console printer port. 1101M: This softkey appears after the DATA DEV TYP softkey has been pressed, followed by the * MORE * softkey. Pressing this softkey assigns the device type as an asynchronous MiLink Data Module. FIND EXT: Pressing the FIND EXT softkey displays the ENTER EXTENSION NUM prompt. When a valid extension number of a DATASET is entered, its physical location is displayed on the command line. FIND AVL: Pressing this softkey prompts the user to enter an extension number. When avalid extension number of an associated voice set is entered, and the ENTER softkey is pressed, the physical location of the DATASET which is associated with the selected voice set is displayed on the command line. . RANGE: This softkey facilitates block programming of data devices. Pressing this softkey displays FROM BAY SLOT: and CIRCUIT TO BAY SLOT: CIRCUIT: prompts on the command line. The range of devices is then specified by entering valid bay, slot and circuit numbers for the first and last devices. The entry is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey. When the extension number for the first device is entered, the system automatically assigns incremented extension numbers, the same COS, COR, CDN, and DTEfor each device in the block. Adual circuit DATASET cannot be included in range programming. DELETE FIELD: This softkey appears when the cursor is positioned in the AVL or HOTLINE field, when a value has been already programmed. Pressing the DELETE FIELD softkey removes the value which is programmed in that field. The deletion is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey. The standard softkeys DELETE, ENTER, BAY/SLT/CCT and QUIT are also provided. 210 4-68 Revision0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Form I3 - Trunk Circuit Descriptors 4.17 Trunk circuit descriptors are similar to Classes of Service. A trunk circuit descriptor specifies the hardware options for each type of Trunk Card. Refer to Figure 4-20 for the form layout. Trunk circuit descriptors are complemented by the switch settings on the 9105/9110 type Trunk Cards. Refer to the Trunk Card Switch Assignments Forms in Practice 9109-096-125-NA, Circuit Card Descriptions; also, refer to the 9105/9110 documentation. The trunk circuit types are as follows: 4-Circuit CO 5Circuit CO 4-Circuit DISA 6-Circuit DISA 2-Circuit DID/TIE E&M Module 6Circuit DID DID/TIE E&M Trunk CARD E&M Module DISA 2 Circuit TIE DISA Tl Tl Tl Ti Tl Tl LS/GS CO DISA E&M ’ E&M DISA DID/TIE TIE/DISA Each circuit descriptor type has its own set of parameters as detailed in Table 4-6, Trunk Hardware Options. The system supports a maximum of 25 trunk circuit descriptors. 4 : 39 38-NOV-69 DESCRIPTOR TRUNK 01 82 83 84 85 TYPE NUMBER 4-CIRCUIT CO 4-CIRCUIT CO 4-CIRCUIT CO 6-CIRCUIT CO 6-CIRCUIT CO P-CCT DID/TIE 2-CCT DID/TIE 2-CCT DID/TIE 2-CCT DID/TIE 06 B7 B6 B9 18 II 12 CCT CO 6-QUIT OF TRW ASSIGNED MAJOR i B i 8 t B CO 2-6 DISA 3-E&M MODULE 4-6 NUMBER B-SEL. OPTION 9-0111 MOD DISA 7-DESC = COMVENTS 0 4-CIRCUIT CCT status B E 0 2-CCT DID/TIE 4-CIRCUIT DISA 4-CIRCUIT DIM El l-6 alarm E CM DID 5- ** MORE ** B- . Figure 4-20 Form 13 Layout Field Descriptions DESCRIPTOR: This field lists the trunk circuit descriptors, of 25 different descriptors numbers 01 to25 (maximum in total). TRUNK TYPE: This field lists trunk circuit type for each trunk circuit descriptor. Note that the selected trunk type (the one that appears on the command line) is not displayed on the softkeys. Tl Trunks are not availabie with Generic 1001 or Generic 1002. Note: Trunk type cannot be changed if there are 1 or more trunks assigned to the descriptor. 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-69 Customer Data Entry NUMBER OF TRKS ASSIGNED: This field records the number each trunk circuit descriptor. The trunk circuit descriptor can be type only if this field is zero. To clear the NUMBER OF TRKS trunks must first be deassigned. Refer to Form 14 (Non-Dial-In (Dial-In Trunks). When a trunk type is assigned to a trunk circuit prohibits any changes by clearing those softkeys that can alter COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional It is stored by the system of trunks which use assigned a new trunk ASSIGNED field, the Trunks) and Form 15 descriptor, the system the trunk types. data (a maximum of 20 characters). but not used. Softkeys . ‘6 CCT CO: Pressing this softkey specifies Trunk type. the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a CO 4 CCT CO: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed. Pressing this softkey assigns the CO Trunk type to the selected trunk circuit descriptor. Note: This circuit type applies only to the analog bays of 480 and 456 port systems. Tl LS/GS: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed for the second time. Pressing this softkey defines the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a Tl Trunk simulating an LS/GS Trunk. Tl CO DISA: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed for the third time. Pressing this softkey defines the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a Tl Trunk simulating a CO DISA Trunk. 6 CCT DISA: Pressing circuit descriptor. this softkey assigns the DISA Trunk type to the selected trunk 4 CCT DISA: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed. Pressing this softkey selects the DISA Trunk type for that trunk circuit descriptor. Note: This circuit type applies only to the analog bays of 480 and 456 port systems. Tl E&M: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed for the second time. Pressing this softkey defines the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a Tl Trunk simulating an E&M Trunk. Tl E&M DISA: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed for the second time. Pressing this softkey defines the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a Tl Trunk simulating an E&M DISA Trunk. E&M MODULE: Pressing this softkey an E&M Trunk Module. programs the selected trunk circuit descriptor as E&M TRUNK: This softkey Pressing Card. this softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed. programs the selected trunk circuit descriptor as an E&M Trunk Tl DID/TIE: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed for the second time. Defines DID/TIE trunk. 210 4-70 the selected trunk circuit descriptor Revision 0 as a Tl trunk simulating 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 a CDE Form Descriptions ,. Tl TIE DISA: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed for the third time. Pressing this softkey defines the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a Tl Trunk simulating a TIUDISA Trunk. 6 CCT DID: Pressing this softkey programs the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a DID Trunk. DID/TIE: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed. Pressing this softkey specifies the selected trunk circuit descriptor as a DID/Tie Trunk. The TYPE field displays 2-CCT DID/T1E. DESC NUM: Pressing this softkey displays ENTER DESC NUM: prompt. This softkey selects atrunk circuit descriptor number. The selection is completed by entering avalid number (1 to 25). SEL. OPTION: Pressing the SEL. OPTION softkey displays a new form. This form displays the options (parameters) associated with the trunk type that is assigned to that trunk circuit descriptor. Refer to Options Subform. EM TRK DISA: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed. Pressing this softkey commits the (E&M) analogue trunk as a DISA trunk. EM MOD DISA: Pressing this softkey programs the selected trunk circuit descriptor as an EM MOD DISA. REVIEW: Pressing the REVIEW soitkey displays a new form (Review List Subform). This form displays a list of trunks that use the selected trunk circuit descriptor. Note that this softkey appears only if “NUMBER OF TRKS ASSIGNED” on command line is greater than zero. TIE DISA: This softkey appears when the MORE softkey has been pressed. Pressing this softkey commits the DID/TIE (analog) trunk as a DISA trunk. The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, WORE* 9109-09~21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 and QUIT are also provided. 210 4-71 CustomerData Entty Options Subform for Form 13 4.18 This form appears only when the SEL. OPTION softkey is pressed (see Figure 4-21). This form displays the options (parameters) associated with each trunk type assigned to each trunk circuit descriptor. See Table 4-6 for a list of the p,ossible options, and see Parameters for descriptions of them. 4:44 sa-NOV-89 [ 4 CCT alarm CO TRUNK: i I omo~ NAME [SUPERVISION status PARAMETER MAJOR q ST&TlJS f Reverse to Idle Far-end gives arwer supervision Inhibit automatic supervision No seize alarm No release alarm Toll office Is this a CO DTMF Impedance Dictation trunk Reverse to NO 'NO NO NO NO NO YES YES COMPLEX NO Idle II l-YES 2- 3- 4- S- 6-QUIT 7- a- 9- a- NO Figure 4-21 Select Option Subform Layout Field Descriptions The header line displays the trunk type, the trunk circuit descriptor number and the type of parameter under observation. STATUS: This field lists the option selected for each parameter. Softkeys s YES, NO, COMPLEX, 600 OHM, 60/40, IMMEDIATE: This softkey toggles the status of the parameters. 30/20, WINK: This softkey toggles the status of the parameters. 66/33, DELAY: This softkey toggles the status of the parameters. DELAY INTEG: This softkey toggles the status of the parameters. LOOP FLSH/RING GND: Toggles between an opened loop current type flash (LOOP FLSH), or a grounded ring type of flash (RING GND). The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided. 210 4-72 Revision0 9109496-21O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Table 4-6 Trunk Options 4-CIRCUIT CO TRUNK and 4-CIRCUIT DISA Reverse to Idle Far-End Gives Answer Supervision Inhibit Automatic Supervision No Seize Alarm No Release Alarm Toll office Is this a CO DTMF Save Busy-Cut Status Impedance (600 Ohm or Complex) Dictation Trunk 6-CIRCUIT CO TRUNK and 6-CIRCUIT DISA Reverse to Idle Far-End Gives Answer Supervision Inhibit Automatic Supervision No Seize Alarm No Release Alarm Toll Office Is this a CO DTMF Save Busy-Cut Status Impedance (600 Ohm or Complex) Post Call Metering (0 => 15 seconds) Calling Party Disconnect Timer (1 => 12 minutes) Dictation Trunk Ignore Remote Disconnect Disconnect Timer (100 => 9900 ms) (1 DO ms increments) Supervision Direction: Incoming Trunk Calls Also Guard Timer (0 => 3000 ms) (100 ms increments) Ring Cycle Timer (6 => 10 seconds) Ignore Line Reversal During Seizure Ringing Expected Ringing Debounce >mer (5 => 12 seconds) Seize Timer (10 => 60 s) (10 s increments) Flash Timer (200 => 700 ms) (100 ms increments) Flash Type (Loop Flash, Ring Ground) Flash Over Trunk Interdigit Timer (300 => 800 ms) (100 ms increments) Digit Outpulsing Ratio (60/40,30/20,66/33) Tl LS/GS TRUNK and 11 CO DISA . No Seize Alarm No Release Alarm Toll Cffice Is this a CO DTMF Save Busy-Cut Status Loop Start or Ground Start (Tl LS, Tl GS) Calling Party Disconnect ‘limer (1 => 12 minutes) Disconnect Timer 100 => 9900 ms (100 m.s inc) Guard Timer (0 =z 3000 ms) (100 ms inc) Ring Cycle Timer (6 => 10 s) Ringing Expected Ringing Debounce Timer (5 => 12 seconds) Seize Timer (10 => 60 s) (10 s increments) Flash Trmer (200 => 700 ms) (100 ms inc) flash Type (Loop Flash, Ring Ground) Flash Over Trunk Interdigit Timer (300 => 800 ms) (100 ms inc) Page 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 1 of 4 210 4-73 Customer Data Entry Table 4-6 Trunk Options (continued) E&M MODULE and E&M MODULE DISA Reverse to Idle Sr-End Gives Answer Supervision nhibit Automatic Supervision Vo Seize Alarm Uo Release Alarm roll offlce Is this a CO DTMF Save Busy-Cut Status ;mpedance ** use dip switch on the module to program +* (600 E Lead Invert M Lead Invert * required for type 5 operation ** Disconnect Timer (150 => 300 ms) (50 ms increments) Release Acknowledge Timer (2000 => 9900 ms) (100 ms inc) Guard Timer (200 => 1000 ms) (100 ms increments) Dictation Trunk Incoming Start Type (Immed, Wink, Delay) Debounce Timer (20 => 150 ms) (10 ms increments) tink Timer (150 =-> 300 ms) (50 ms increments) Outgoing Start Type (Immed, Wrnk, Delay or Delay Integ) Digit Outpulsing Ratio @O/40,30/20, 66/33) Outpulse Delay Timer (100 => 2000 ms) (100 ms inc) Flash Timer (200 => 700 ms) (100 ms increments) Flash Type (Loop Flash or Ring Ground) Flash Over Trunk lnterdiglt Timer (300 => 600 ms) (100 ms increments) Wait for Delay Timer (300 => 5000 ms) (100 ms inc) Remote End is a Satellite Remote End is a Satellite with OPS tines Ohm or Complex) 2-CCT DID/TIE and 2 CCT TIE DISA Reverse to Idle Far-End Gives Answer Supervision Inhibit Automatic Supervision No Seize Alarm No Release Alarm Toll Office Is this a CO DTMF Save Busy-Cut Status Impedance (600 Ohm or Complex) Remote End is a Satellite Remote End is a Satellite with OPS tines 6-CCT DID Reverse to Idle Far-End Gives Answer Supervision Inhibit Automatic Supervision No Seize Alarm No Release Alarm Toll Office Is this a CO DTMF Save Busy-Cut Status Impedance (600 Ohm or Complex) Disconnect Timer (150 => 300 ms) (50 ms increments) Release Acknowledge Timer (2420 seconds) Guard Timer (200 =r 1000 ms) (100 ms increments) Start Type (Immed, Wrnk, Delay) Debounce Trmer (20 => 150 ms) (10 ms increments) Wink Timer (150 => 300 ms) (50 ms increments) Remote End is a Satellite Remote End is a Satellite with OPS Lines Page 2 of 4 210 4-74 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Table 4-6 Trunk Options (continued) Tl E&M and Tl E&M DISA Reverse to Idle Far-End Gives Answer Supervision Inhibit Automatic Supervision No Seize Alarm No Release Alarm Toll OHice Is this a CO DTMF Save Busy-Cut Status Disconnect Timer (150 => 300 ms) (50 ms inc) Release Acknowledge Trmer (2-240 s) (2 s inc) Guard Timer (200 => 1000) (100 ms inc) Incoming StartType (Immed, Wink or Delay) Debounce Timer (20 => 150 ms) (10 ms inc) Wink Timer (150 => 300 ms) (50 ms inc) Outgoing Start Type (Immed, Wink, Delay or Delay Integ) Digit Outpulsing Ratio (60/40,30/20, 66/33) Outpulse Delay Timer (100 => 2000 ms) (100 ms inc) Flash Timer (200 => 700 ms) (100 ms inc) Flash Type (Loop Flash, Ring Ground) Flash Over Trunk Interdigit Timer (300 => 800 ms) (100 ms inc) Walt for Delay Timer (300 => 5000 ms) (100 ms inc) Remote end is a satellite Remote end is a satellite with OPS Lines Tl DID/TIE and Tl TIE DISA Far-End Gives Answer Supervision Inhibit Automatic Supervision No Seize Alarm No Release Alarm Toll office Is this a CO DTMF Save Busy-Cut Status Disconnect Timer (150 => 300 ms) (50 ms inc) Release Acknowledge Timer (2=> 120 s) Guard Timer (200 => 1000 ms) (100 ms inc) Incoming StartType (Immed, Wink or Delay) Debounce Timer (20 => 150 ms) (10 ms inc) Wink Timer (150 => 300 ms) (50 ms inc) Outgoing Start Type (Immed, Wink, Delay or Delay Integ) Diglt Outpulsing Ratio (60/4O, 30/20, 66/33) Outpulse Delay Timer (100 => 2000 ms) (100 ms inc) Flash Timer (200 => 700 ms) (100 ms inc) Flash Type (Loop Flash, Ring Ground) Flash Over Trunk Interdigit Timer (300 => 800 ms) (100 ms inc) Walt for Delay Timer (300 => 5000 ms) (100 ms inc) Remote End is a Satellite Remote End is a Satellite With OPS Lines Page 3 of 4 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-75 Customer Data Entry Table 4-6 Trunk Options (continued) 1 E&M TRUNK CARD Reverse to idle Far-End Gives Answer Supervision Inhibit Automatic Supervision No Seize Alarm No Release Alarm Toll office Is this a CO DTMF Save Busy-Out Status Impedance (600 Ohm or Complex) Remote End is a Satelliie Remote End is a Satellite with OPS Dictation Trunk Lines I Page 4 of 4 Parameters Calling Party Disconnect Timer: This defines how long the system will wait for the far-end, a ground start trunk, to acknowledge a trunk release. Debounce Timer: This timer specifies the period for which an incoming seizure is to be debounced before being recognized as a valid incoming seizure. Dictation Trunk: If selected, this maintains trunk dialingforthe duration of the call. See DICTATION TRUNK. Digit Outpulsing Ratio: This field specifies the break/make ratio during outpulsing. It can be set to 60/40, 66/33, or 30/20. Disconnect Timer: This defines the time a release signal must be continuously present before a call is disconnected. Note: For digital DID trunks, the range is 150-300 ms. DTMF: If selected, forces DTMF digits to be transmitted on the trunk when dialing. If not selected, digits are pulsed onto the trunk. - Save Busy Out Status: If selected, all trunks in this descriptor type which were in the busy-out state before a system reset will be in that state after the reset. This option applies to Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Note: In Generic 1002 and Generic 1003 this is not an option, but is done automatically. In Generic 1001 this function is not provided. E Lead Invert/ M Lead Invert: These two fields provide the flexibility to specify the polarity of the E and M leads to match the far end connection. M Lead Invert must be enabled for type 5 operation. Far-End Gives Answer Supervision: If selected, answer signals are expected, and acted upon when received on the trunk; answer signals are not generated internally. If not selected, answer signals received are ignored. 210 4-76 Revision0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Flash Timer: This defines the duration of a flash transmitted onto a trunk in a digital bay. Note: this is not programmable for some analog trunks; in these cases, the flash timer is always 200 ms. Flash Type: Specifies whether the flash will be done by opening the current loop (LOOP FLSH) or grounding the ring (RING GRND). This is available’in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. ._ Flash Over Trunk: Enables the Flash Over Trunk feature for the descriptor number. This is available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Guard Timer: This defines how long the system will wait after releasing the trunk before seizing it again for an outgoing call. Ignore Line Reversal During Seizure: If selected, line reversal is not recognized as an incoming seizure. Ignore Remote Disconnect: If selected, release signals from the far-end are ignored. If not selected, release signals cause disconnection of the call. Impedance: “600” should be selected if the trunk is to be connected to a carrier facility, or the cable is short. This setting provides a 600 ohm + 2mF termination impedance match for the incoming line. “Complex” should be selected if the trunk is to be connected directly to cable facilities. This setting provides the standard AT&T complex balance network as a termination impedance for the incoming line. Incoming start type: This field specifies the incoming type of the trunk, which can be set to immediate incoming, wink start incoming, or delay dial incoming. “Wink start incoming” must be set for the following trunk circuit descriptors in order to obtain ANI/DNIS digits: Tl E&M, Tl E&M DISA, Tl DID/TIE or Tl TIE DISA. Inhibit Automatic Supervision: If selected, the system waits for the far-end to provide answer supervision before providing answer supervision to an incoming Tie or DID trunk. Is this a CO?: Select if trunk is to terminate at the Central Office. If NO, a 2dB pad is added in the circuit. Refer to Practice 9109-096-l 80-NA, Engineering Information. Interdigit Timer: This defines the time gap inserted between outpulsed digits. Loop Start or Ground Start: This defines trunk signaling type (Tl only). No Release Alarm: If selected, a trunk failing to release is removed from service and maintenance is notified. The trunk can only be returned to service manually. If not selected, the trunk remains in service. No Seize Alarm: If selected, a trunk failing to return a seize acknowledgement on three successive occasions is removed from service; maintenance is not notified. If not selected, the trunk remains in service. If the trunk originates, the no seize count is reset. As well, if the trunk had been removed from service due to a no seize count, the trunk is returned to service and the incoming call on the trunk is processed. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-77 Customer Data Entry Outgoing Start Type: This field specifies the outgoing type of the trunk, which can be set to immediate outgoing, wink start outgoing, delay dial outgoing or delay dial with integrity. Outpulse Delay Timer: This timer specifies the pause between seizing and the start of dialing, applicable to immediate outgoing trunks only. This value should be specified after determining the far end characteristics. Post Call Metering: This defines how long the system will wait for and record meter pulses after the release signal is received. Release Acknowledge timer: This specifies the time-out period to wait for a release ‘acknowledge signal from the far end. Remote End is a Satellite: Select if the trunk is to terminate at a satellite PABX. Refer to Practice 9109-096-I 80-NA, Engineering Information, for details of loss/gain. Remote End is a Satellite with OPS lines: Select if the trunk is to terminate at a satellite PABX with OPS lines. Refer to Practice 9109-096-180-NA, Engineering Information, for details of loss/gain. Reverse to Idle: In some central offices, upon seizure, the CO reverses the polarity on the trunk. When the call ends, the CO again reverses the polarity, returning the trunk to its normal idle state. When the Reverse to Idle option is enabled, the PABX treats the reversal to idle condition as a disconnect signal from the CO. The Far-End Gives Answer Supervision option has no effect. Ring Cycle Timer: This defines a period during which a minimum ring burst (250 ms) must be present before the system will recognize it as an incoming call. Ringing Debounce Timer: This defines the duration during which the system tries to detect the minimum ring burst, indicating the persistence of an incoming call. Ringing Expected: If selected, incoming calls are not reported unless ringing is recognized. If other seize signals are received before ringing, the trunk is busied-out for outgoing calls, but the incoming call is not reported until ringing is received. . Seize Timer: This defines the time the system will wait for a seize acknowledge from a ground start trunk. Also see Option “No Seize Alarm” in this list. ‘Toll Office: Select if the CO trunk is to be connected to a Toll Office. This option is applicable to systems using the North American loss plan. It provides a 3 dB loss for trunk-to-OPS line connections, and a 6 dB loss for trunk-to-ONS line connections. If not selected, “normal” through switch loss is provided. Refer to Practice 9109-096-I 8&NA, Engineering Information. Wait For Delay Timer: This timer specifies the period to wait for the delay signal from the far end. It is only applicable if the trunk is of type delay dial outgoing (without integrity). Wink Timer: This timer specifies the duration of the wink signal sent to the far end if the trunk is programmed as a Wink Start Incoming or Delay Start incoming, 210 4-78 Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Describtions Review list Subform for Form 13 4.19 This form appears when the RR/lEW softkey is pressed in Form 13 - Trunk Circuit Descriptors. The form lists the trunks that use the selected trunk circuit descriptor. Refer to Figure 4-22 for the form layout. Note: The data in this,form cannot be modified. alarm [TIE&M TRUNK: I] TRK NLIM 40 0 48 l- 2- S-QUIT 7-DESC NUMBER status BhY SLT CCT 1 6 1 16 MAJOR q COMMENTS * 1 9- 4- S- B- 9- 0- Figure 4-22 Form 13 Review List Subform Layout Field Descriptions The header line displays the descriptor number and the trunk type. TRK NUM: This field lists the trunk numbers assigned to the selected trunk circuit descriptor number. Trunk numbers are arbitrarily assigned to the trunks in Form 14 (Non-Dial-In Trunks) and Form 15 (Dial-In Trunks). BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields list the physical location of each trunk number according to their bay, slot and circuit numbers. COMMENTS: This field displays any additional information about each trunk as it was entered on Form 14 (Non-Dial-In Trunks) and Form 15 (Dial-In Trunks). The COMMENTS field stores a maximum of 15 characters. The data in this field is stored by the system but not used. Softkeys DESC NUMBER: This softkey selects a trunk circuit descriptor number. Pressing the DESC NUMBER softkey displays the ENTER DESC. NUM: prompt. The selection is completed by entering a valid number (1 to 25). The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided. 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-79 Customer Data Entry Form 14 - Non-Dial-In Trunks 4.20 This form specifies the characteristics of the system’s Non-Dial-In Trunks. These trunks cannot dial any digits into the PABX and are usually a CO Trunk. The Day, Ni , N2 answer points are assigned in this form. Alternate recall points are assigned in Form 19 (Call Rerouting Table). Refer to Figure 4-23 for the form layout. 4:Sl 38-NOV-a9 BAY SLT CCT alarm COS TEN 1848111 164821 184831 1 84 1 1 84 I 1 1 El4 85 184 86 I : 1 84 06 1 1 01 DAY 2311 2311 2311 2311 2311 2311 Nl N2 CDN 2311 2311 I.- 2- 3-TRUNK 6-QUIT 7-BAY/SLT/CCT &DELETE TK MUM TK 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 2 : 4 6 NUMBER E status q NAME MAJOR COMMENTS NE1 NY ME2 NE3 NE4 NE5 NE16 NY NY BOS BOS CLE NEW CLE 4- 5- 9- e- Figure 4-23 Form 14 Layout Field Descriptions BAY, SLT, and CCT: These fields list the physical location of each Non-Dial-In Trunk. They are generated by the system based on what was entered in the PROGRAMMED field in Form 01, System Configuration. This field cannot be modified. COS: This field specifies COS is 1. - TEN: This field specifies default Tenant the Class of Service of each Non-Dial-In the Tenant Group number is 1. Group number Trunk. The default of each Non-Dial-In Trunk. The DAY, Nl and N2: These fields are reserved for the Day, Night1 and Night2 answer points. The answer points may be specified as an LDN on the Attendant Console, a console extension number, a station, a Hunt Group, a Night Bell, a logical line, a data station, or an ACD Path access code. Note: An LDN and Night Bell cannot be rung simultaneously. Notes: 1. In Generic 1004 and Generic 1005, these fields may be left blank. 2. In all generics previous to Generic 1004, the DAY field must be programmed. If the Nl or N2 field is not specified, then the system defaults the night answer points to the day answer point. If only one of the night answer points is specified, then the other night answer point defaults to the specified night answer point. 210 4-80 Revision 0 91 OQ-OQQ-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions CDN: The CDN (Circuit Descriptor Number) field links this form to Form 13, Trunk Circuit Descriptors, which defines the trunk hardware parameters. Note: This field must be filled in before any changes for the selected physical location are stored in the database. ._ TK NUM: This field lists the trunk identification numbers. Note: This field must be filled in before any changes for the selected physical location are stored in the database. In this field, trunks are listed according to their trunk number (1 to 200). This method of identifying trunks is used for the following: l \ l l l SMDR records of a trunk call (only three digits are allocated for trunk identification) Identification of a trunk in a call on the Attendant Console or on the SUPERSET telephone LCD, Attendant Direct Trunk Select (DTS) capability, Form 09 for SUPERSETtelephone line appearance programming (DTS or Private Trunk) . Form 16 for listing members of Trunk Groups. TK NAME: This field lists the trunk names. Names can be up to 8 characters long. COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 15 characters). It is stored by the system but not used. Softkeys TRUNKNUMBER: This softkey selects atrunk by its trunk number. Trunk numbers are assigned in Form 14 and Form 15. Pressing the TRUNK NUMBER softkey displays the ENTER TRUNK NUM: prompt on the command line. Entering a valid trunk number (1 to 200) selects that Non-Dial-In Trunk and displays it on the command line. DELETE FIELD: This softkey appears when the cursor on on a programmed DAY, Nl or N2 field. It allows the field to be deleted, without affecting the other Wo fields. Note: This softkey appears in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. The standard softkeys CANCEL, BAY/SLT/CCT, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided. .. 9109-09&21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-81 Customer Data Entrv Form 15 - Dial-In Trunks 4.21 This form specifies the characteristics of the system’s Dial-In Trunks. This form also designates where incoming calls on Dial-In Trunks are routed by modifying the incoming digits. See Figure 4-24 for the form layout. :42 38-NOV-89 3AY SLT 18681 1 86 alarm CLYT COS B2 COR 1 1 N bl 0 1 100 a 1 1 1 0 I 1BSEl~ TEN X CDN TK 19 19 L- 2- S-TRUNK ;-QUIT 7-BAY/SLT/CCT &DELETE NUMBER WWJOR COMMENTS N&ME < 7 7 t t q 8 19 n NUM TK status 4- 5- 9- 0- Figure 4-24 Form 15 Layout Field Descriptions BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields list the physical location identification of each Dial-In Trunk. They are generated by the system based on what was entered in the PROGRAMMED field of Form 01, System Configuration. This field cannot be modified. COS: This field specifies the Class of Service for each entry. The COS defaults to 1. COR: This field lists the Class of Restriction for each entry. The COR defaults to 1. b TEN: Tenant Group specifications are listed in this field. The Tenant Group number defaults to 1, N: This field lists the number of expected digits. For Generic 1004 and below, the range is 1 to 9. For Generic 1005 only, the range is 0 to IO. If a value is specified in this field, then digit translation on incoming calls does not commence until the system receives the specified number of digits. Note: This field must be filled for a DID Trunk. Otherwise, this field defaults to 0, and the trunk is treated as a TIE trunk (regardless of the circuit descriptor). M: This field specifies the number of digits (0 to 8) that must be absorbed after the incoming trunk is seized. The M field defaults to 0. This field is applicable for any type of Dial-In Trunk. X: This field specifies a maximum of two digits that may be inserted before the digit string, This field is applicable for any type of Dial-In Trunk. 210 4-82 Revision0 9109-09621O-NA issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions CDN: The CDN (Circuit Descriptor Number) field lists the circuit descriptor numbers for each Dial-In Trunk. This field links this form to Form 13 (Trunk Circuit Descriptors), which defines the trunk hardware parameters. Note thatthis field must be filled in before any changes for the selected physical location are stored in the database. ._ TK NUM: This field displays the Dial-In Trunks according to their trunk number. Note that this field must be filled in before any changes for the selected physical location are stored in the database. Trunk numbers range from 1 to 200 and are used for the following: l l l SMDR records of a trunk call (only three digits are allocated for trunk identification), Identification of a trunk in a call on the Attendant Console or on the SUPERSET telephone LCD, Attendant Direct Trunk Select (DTS) capability, . Form 09 for SUPE/?SETtelephone line appearance programming (DTS or Private Trunk) and l Form 16 for listing members of Trunk Groups. TK NAME: This field lists the trunk names. Names can be up to 8 characters long. COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 15 characters). It is stored by the system but not used. Softkeys TRUNK NUMBER: This softkey selects a trunk by its trunk number. Pressing the TRUNK NUMBER softkey displays the ENTER TRUNK NUM: prompt on the command line. Entering a valid trunk number (1 to 200) selects that Dial-In Trunk and displays it on the command line. The standard softkeys CANCEL, BAY/SLT/CCT, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided. 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-83 Customer Data Entry Form 16 - Trunk Groups 4.22 This form specifies the members of each Trunk Group by trunk numbers. The trunk number is assigned in Form 14 (Non-Dial-In Trunks) and Form 15 (Dial-In Trunks). The system supports a maximum of 50 Trunk Groups and each group supports a maximum of 50 members. See Figure 4-25 for the form layout. :51 [GRP: 38-NW-89 alarm l-NOR-EAST] [SMDR ][TERM] TK /-j L-NO SMDR S-QUIT status NUM BAY SLT CCT 1 2 3 4 81 01 01 01 84 84 04 84 i t: rl 01 02 03 04 05 06 NY NY NY BOS BOS GLE 1 011 04 01 NY 2-CIRCULAR 3-IldSERT 4-TK 7- &DELETE 9- GRP NAME = MAJOR COMMENTS 5-TRUNK GROUP 0- Figure 4-25 Form 16 Layout Field Descriptions The header line indicates the Trunk Group being programmed, via a number and a name (maximum of eight characters). This line also indicates the presence of the SMDR option and WhethertheTrunk Group is subjected toTerminal Hunting or Circular Hunting. - TK NUM: This field lists the members of each Trunk Group according to their trunk number. Members are added by entering a valid trunk number (1 to 200) when the cursor is at the TK NUM field on the command line. The Trunk Group is displayed on the header line. BAY, SLT, CCT and COMMENTS : These fields are informational fields only. They cannot be modified in this form. When a trunk number is added to the Trunk Group, the physical identification (BAY, SLT and CCT) and the COMMENTS fields from Form 14 (Non-Dial-In Trunks) or Form 15 (Dial-In Trunks) are automatically displayed. Softkeys SMDR/NO SMDR: This softkey enables and disables the outgoing Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) feature for the Trunk Group. When the SMDR feature is enabled, the header line displays [SMDR ] and the softkey displays NO SMDR. Pressing the NO SMDR softkey disables the SMDR feature for that Trunk Group. The softkey now displays SMDR and the header line displays [NO SMDR]. 210 444. Revision0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions CIRCULAR/TERMINAL: This softkey selects Circular or Terminal hunting. When the Trunk Group is defined as a Terminal type, the header line displays [TERM] and the softkey displays CIRCULAR. Pressing the CIRCULAR softkey programs the selected Trunk Group as a Circular type. The header line now displays [CIRC] and the softkey displays TERMINAL. Refer to Practice 9109-096-105-NA, Features Description, for details on Circular and Terminal Trunk Groups. INSERT: This softkey adds new members to the Trunk Group. Pressing the INSERT softkey clears the command line and moves the cursor to the TK NUM field. The addition is completed by entering avalid trunk number. The system inserts the addition before the line previously displayed on the command line. Note that this softkey only appears if there is data present in this form. TKGRP NAME: This softkey specifies a character name for the selected Trunk Group. Pressing the TK GRP NAME softkey displays the following prompt on the command line: ENTER TRUNKGROUP NAME:. The name specification is completed by entering a character name (a maximum of eight characters). The Trunk Group name is displayed on the header line beside the Trunk Group number. TRUNK GROUP: This softkey selects a Trunk Group. Pressing the TRUNK GROUP softkey displays the ENTER TRUNK GROUP NUM: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid Trunk Group number (1 to 50). The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided. 9109-096-21O-NA issue1 Revision0 210 4-85 CustomerData Entry Form 17 - Hunt Groups 4.23 This form specifies the members of each Hunt Group by extension or DATASET numbers (see Figure 4-26). The system supports a maximum of 50 Hunt Groups (100 in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005). Each group supports a maximum of 50 members. Only DATASETs can be added to a data hunt group and data hunt groups can only contain DATASETs. Only modems can be added to a modem hunt group and modem hunt groups can only contain modems. _‘. .._ :54 alarm 30-NOW39 [GRP ~:--I[TERMI[sTN~T 1 EXT NUM 1101 1104 1105 1186 ~1106 l-GROUP TYPE &QUIT P-CIRCULAR 7-ACCESS CODE status = MAJOR BAY SLT CCT 01 01 01 Manager hccounts Accounts Secretary Secretary i: x: 01 01 04 05 06 01 81 06 COMMENTS 3-INSERT 4-OPTIONS 5-HUNT &DELETE 9-EXT 0- NW GROUP Figure 4-26 Form 17 Layout Field Descriptions The header line indicates which Hunt Group is being programmed, its access code, the type of hunting used (Terminal or Circular) and the type of hunt group (Stn/set, Agent, Recording). - EXT NUM: This field lists the members of each Hunt Group according to their extension numbers. Valid numbers include extension numbers of Rotary Dial or DTMF sets and SUPERSETPrime Line and DATASET numbers. BAY, SLT, CCT and COMMENTS : These fields are informational fields only, They cannot be modified in this form. When an extension or DATASET number is added to a Hunt Group, the corresponding physical location number (BAY, SLT and CCT) and the COMMENTS fields from Form 09 (Station/SUPE/?SflTelephones) and Form 12 (Data Assignment) are automatically displayed. Softkeys GROUP TYPE: Pressing this softkey displays softkeys which represent the alternative Hunt Grouptypes. (Softkeys GROUPTYPE and CIRCULAR/TERMINAL do not appear until the hunt group exists. A hunt group is not created until the first member is defined), Note that the selected group type does not appear on the softkey display. 210 4-66 Revision0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue1 CDE Form Descriptions STN/SET: Pressing this softkey programs the selected Hunt Group as a StationlSUPERSETTelephone type. A bay/slot/circuit number of any type of line card can be used with this type of Hunt Group. The header line displays the [STN/SETj prompt to indicate this type of Hunt Group. _ DEFAULT: This softkey appears when the first modem hunt group is’established. (All the devices are modems; the header reads MODEM). Pressing the DEFAULT softkey makes the hunt group the default modem pool; the header reads MODEM/D. All members of the Default Modem Pool must be in BOTH mode. Not available in Generic 1001. DEFAULT OFF: This softkey appears only if the hunt group is the default modem pool. Pressing it removes the hunt group’s default status. Not available in Generic 1001. RECORDING: Pressing this softkey programs theselected Hunt Group as a Recording type. Only those bay/slot/circuit numbers referring to the ONS Line Card can be used with this type of Hunt Group. The header line displays [RECORD]. This appears only if the hunt group contains industry standard telephones. The SUPERSET cannot be programmed as a member of this hunt group. AGENT: Pressing this softkey programs the selected Hunt Group as a UCD Agenttype. The header line displays [AGENT 1. CIRCULAR/TERMINAL: This softkey has two functions. It specifies the selected Hunt Group as a Circular or Terminal type. Refer to Practice 9109-095-I 05-NA, Features Description, for details on Circular and Terminal Hunt Groups. When the Hunt Group is defined as a Terminal type, the header line displays FERMI and the softkey displays CIRCULAR. Pressing the CIRCULAR softkey programs the Hunt Group as a Circular type. The header line now displays [CIRC] and the softkey displays TERMINAL. AUTO ATT.: Programs the selected hunt group as an Automatic Attendant hunt group. The header displays [AUTO All-j. Only ONS line circuits may be entered in this type of hunt group (these would be connected to RADs - see Practice 9109--095-525-NA, Automated Attendant Application Package, for further information. This is available in Generic 1003, Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. The SUPERSET 401 cannot be programmed as a member of this hunt group. INSERT: This softkey adds new members to the selected Hunt Group. Pressing the INSERT softkey clears the command line and moves the cursor to the MT NUM field. The addition is completed by entering avalid extension number. The system inserts the addition on the line preceding the current line. Note that this softkey only appears if there is data present in this form. OPTIONS: This softkey allows access to the various Options Subforms, which allows selection of options for the different hunt group types. Value inputs are entered on the command line in the usual manner. Not available in Generic 1001. HUNT GROUP: This softkey selects a Hunt Group. Pressing the HUNT GROUP softkey displays the ENTER HUNT GROUP NUM: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid Hunt Group number (1 to 50 in Generic 1001, Generic 1002 and Generic 1003); (1 to 99 in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005). 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-87 Customer Data Entrv ACCESS CODE: This softkey assigns an access code for each Hunt Group. Pressing the ACCESS CODE softkey displays the ENTER NEW ACCESS CODE: prompt on the command line. The access code specification is completed by entering a valid number which must be unique in the database. The access code is displayed on the header line and can be a maximum of five digits. EXT NUM: Pressing this softkey displays ENTER EXTENSION NUM on the command line. When a valid number is entered, followed by pressing the ENTER softkey, the screen displays the appropriate Hunt Group and the command line displays the number and its location BAY/SLT/CCT. ,DELETE FIELD: Appears in any of the Options Subforms. Deletes programmed data on the command line. Will not appear if there is no data on the command line. The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided. Option Parameters Overflow: Allows the programmer to assign adestination where calls can be answered when all members of the hunt group are busy. Name: Allows the programmer to assign a name to the Hunt Group. The name can be up to 12 characters long. The first character must not be *, # or a number; the name cannot contain blanks or dashes. Not available in Generic 1002. DTRX Enable/Disable: Allows for immediate DTRX access. DTRX DISABLED also provides DTRX access, but only after the interdigit time-out has expired (about 15 seconds). This applies to modem type hunt groups only. Message Length: Applies only to recording or auto attendant type hunt groups. The length is entered in minutes and seconds. The default value is 10 seconds; the maximum is 4 minutes. The timer should be set at least 3 seconds longer than the actual message length. Default Destination: This is the destination for incoming calls - if the caller does not dial digits, the call connects to this destination. Not available in Generic 1002. I Dialing Over Recording: If enabled, allows for dialing digits while listening to a recording. Not available in Generic 1002. Prefii Digits: These are added to the digit the caller dials in response to (or while listening to) a recorded announcement. Not available in Generic 1002. Wait For Resources: This is the time that an incoming caller will wait for connection to a resource. When this times out the call is routed to the Default Destination. Not available in Generic 1002. 210 4-88 Revision0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions :36 3E-NOV-89 [GRP 2:-- N&-II@ Message alarm ][TER#][RECORD. I ] 0:10 l2- b- Id- 5- -?- 8- 9- 0- j-QUIT Figure 4-27 Recording Hunt Group Options Subform Layout alarm 30-NOV-89 5:-- ][CIRC][AUTO status ATT] = MAJOR OPTIONS N3lle Message Length Default Destination Dialing ovsr recurding Prefix digits Wait for resources . MAJOR [1 I- [GRP q OPTIONS Length Naklle 5:54 status Pi:10 ENABLED I:00 B-QUIT 7- Figure 4-28 Auto Attendant Hunt Group Options Subform Layout 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 e- 9- Revision 0 0- 210 4-89 Customer Data Entry 5:Ei2 Xi-NW-89 [GRP I:788 alarm ][TERM][STN/SE-T status q ] MAJOR OPTIONS Publications 1511 NEllill? Dverflow .- II Overflow l- 2- 3- 4- E+lIT 7- B- g-DELETE 1511 5- FIELD B- Figure 4-29 Station / Set Hunt Group Options Subform Layout Revision 0 9109-096-21 CkNA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Form 18 - Miscellaneous System Ports 4.24 This form assigns a physical location to three types of devices and three alarms. The devices are a Music on Hold source, Paging equipment and Night Bells equipment. The alarms are Minor, Major and Critical. The system supports 25 night bells, nine paging zones and one Music on Hold source. Refer to Figure 4-30 for the form layout, :55 30-NOV-99 ENTRY alarm NUMBER DESCRIPTION 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 Music Pager Pager Pager Pager Pager Pager Pager Pager Pager Minor Major On Hold 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Alarm Alarm 01 Music On Hold L- 2- S-QUIT 7-ENTRY HUM Figure 440 BAY SLT CCT 01 01 05 05 04 04 01 02 85 04 01 1 081 XT status = MAJOR EXTENSION NUMBER 3- 4-TOP 5-BOTTOM &DELETE 9- 0- Form 18 Layout Field Descriptions ENTRY NUMBER: This field lists the entry numbers for the miscellaneous ports. There is a total of 38 entry numbers. The ENTRY NUMBER field cannot be modified. DESCRIPTION: This field lists the titles assigned to the entry numbers. The DESCRIPTION field cannot be modified. BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields list the bay, slot and circuit numbers of the device being programmed. SCT: The SCT (subcircuit) field specifies the relay location on each module for each night bell and each alarm circuit. Refer to Figure 4-31, Universal Card Circuits and Subcircuits. EXTENSION NUMBER: This field applies only to the night bell entries. The EXTENSION NUMBER field lists the extension numbers (a maximum of five digits) assigned to the night bells. This field links the night bell designations to Form 19 (Call Rerouting Table). This field also links the incoming trunks of Form 14 (Non-Dial-In Trunks) to the night bell designations. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 4-91 Customer Data Enttv Softkeys ENTRY NUM: This sofikeyselects an entry number. Pressing the ENTRY NUM softkey displays the ENTER ENTRY NUM: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid entry number (1 to 38). This entry number can now be specified by its bay, slot, circuit and, if applicable, subcircuit numbers. The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, TOP, BOlTOM and QUITare also provided. Table 4-7 Miscellaneous System Ports Entry Number Entry Number 210 4-92 In 336-part systems - Title 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Note: Designations Music on Hold Pager 1 Pager 2 Pager 3 Pager 4 Pager 5 Pager 6 Pager 7 Pager 8 Pager 9 Minor Alarm Major Alarm Critical Alarm Night Bell l Night Bell 2 Night Bell 3 Night Bell 4 Night Bell 5 Night Bell 6 Night Bell 7 Night Bell 8 Night Bell 9 Night Bell 10 Night Bell 11 Night Bell 12 Night Bell 13 Night Bell 14 Night Bell 15 Night Bell 16 Night Bell 17 Night Bell 18 Night Bell 19 Night Bell 20 Night Bell 21 Night Bell 22 Night Bell 23 Night Bell 24 Night Bell 25 only Bays 1 and 2 support Night Bells. Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions I - RECElVEFi/RElAY MODULE b MODULE1 I MODULE2 T e FJODUlE3 04-- I MODULE4 Figure 4-31 Universal Card Circuits and Subcircuits 9109-096-21 O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-93 Customer Data Entry Form 19 - Call Rerouting Table 4.25 This form designates where intercepted and attendant-directed calls will route based on Day Service, Night1 Service and Night2 Service. Refer to Figure 4-32 for the form layout and to Table 4-8 for Call Rerouting Options. Each Tenant Group requires a Call Rerouting Table. “DIAL 0” calls can be directed to an LDN, Rotary Dial or DTMF set, SUPE/?SET telephone or Night Bell extension number, or to an individual console. For further information, refer to Practice 9109-096-I 05-NA, Feature Descriptions (under Call Rerouting). :I36 3a-NOV-69 [TENANT : alarm 1 I TYPE OF CALL DAY Station Dial El Routing Priority Dial 0 Routing DID Recall Points On Busy DID Recall Points On No Answer DID Routing For Calls Into This Tenant DID Illegal # Intercept For This Tenant DID Vacant Number Routing For This Tenant DID Attendant Access Night Points Non-Dial-In Trunks Alternate Recall Points Dial-In Tie Recall Points On Busy Dial-In Tie Recall Points On No Answer Dial-In Tie Routing For Calls Into This Tenant Station Dial E Z-TENANT S-QUIT 7-TENANT Figure 442 MAJOR w2 1511 ----- 1511 w NAME q Nl 1511 Routing l- status 3- 4-TOP 5-BOTTOM 8-DELETE 9- 0- Form 19 Layout Field Descriptions The header line displays the Tenant Group number being programmed. DAY: This field designates a directory number for each type of call in Day Service Mode. The directory number is defined in one of the following forms: Form 07, Console Assignments Form 08, Attendant LDN Assignments Form 09, StationISUPERSETTelephones Form 17, Hunt Groups Form 18, Miscellaneous System Ports Form 41, ACD Paths Form 45, Key System Telephones If this field is blank, the call does not reroute (such as no answer or busy forwarding) or reorder tone is heard (such as vacant number intercept or Do Not Disturb intercept). Nl: This field specifies where calls route during Night1 Service Mode by the extension number. If this field is blank, the call reroutes to the number specified in the DAY field, 210 4-94 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions N2: This field specifies where calls route during Night2 Service Mode by the extension number. If this field is blank, the call does not reroute. Table 4-8 Call Rerouting Options Call Type Station Dial 0 Routing Priority Dial 0 Routing DID Recall Points on Busy DID Recall Points on No Answer DID Routing for Calls into this Tenant DID Illegal # Intercept for this Tenant 1 DID Vacant Number Routing for this Tenant DID Attendant Access Night Points Non-Dial-In Trunks Alternate Recall Points Dial-In Tie Recall Points on Busy Dial-In Tie Recall Points on No Answer Dial-In Tre Routing for Calls into this Tenant Dial-In Tie Illegal # Intercept for this Tenant 2 Dial-In Tie Vacant Number Routing for this Tenant Dial-In Tie Attendant Access Night Points DND Intercept Routing for this Tenant Automatic Wake+up Routing for this Tenant UCD/Attendant Recording for this Tenant 3 UCD on Hold TimHut for this Tenant DISA Day Service Routing for this Tenant Station Vacant Number Routing for this Tenant CO Line Routing Points on No Answer 4 CSN/Autovon Precedence Recall Busy/No Answer 5 Station Illegal Number Routing for this Tenant 1 In Generic 2 In Generic 3 In Generic 1001, 1001, 1001, this is named this is named this is named “DID Intercept Routing for Calls into this Tenant” “Dial+ Tie Intercept for Calls into this Tenant” “UCD Recording Routing for this Tenant” 4 This is available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. 5 Available only with Autovon Feature Package-refer Autovon Feature Package Description. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 to Practice Revision 0 9109-096-630-NA, 210 4-95 Customer Data Entrv Softkeys TENANT: This softkey selects aTenant Group. Pressing the TENANT softkey displays the ENTER TENANT GROUP NUM: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid number (1 to 25). The system displays the selected Tenant Group number on the header line. TENANT NAME: Allows a name to be programmed for the selected tenant group. The name may have a maximum of 8 characters. Not available in Generic 1001, The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also-provided. Form 20 - ARS: Class of Restriction Groups 4.26 Class of Restriction groups together users with the same outside call capabilities, A COR is assigned to each Attendant Console, station, SUPERSETtelephone and Dial-In Trunk. This form specifies the Class-of-Restriction (COR) Group members, Refer to Figure 4-33 for the form layout. The system supports a maximum of 50 COR Groups with up to 25 CORs per group. Each COR Group specifies by COR number those extensions which are restricted from accessing the route. 12:44 PM II-JIJM-90 c:OR GROUP > - alarm COR GROUP M~BERS (SEPARATE WITH status SPACES) COMMENTS 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 19-22 l-12 5 7 14 Long WhTS nnn 03 fg 7 14 nnn Il- 2- E;-QUIT 7-COR GROUP = MAJOR Distance DDD band 2 access 3- 4-TOP 5-BOTTM G-DELETE 9- 0- Figure 4433 Form 20 Layout Field Descriptions COR GROUP: This field lists the COR Group numbers from 1 to 50. Note: The COR GROUP field cannot be modified. COR GROUP MEMBERS: This field lists the separate members of each COR Group. Note: The COR Group members must be separated by a space (the + key, TAB key or space bar on the terminal or the 3 key on the console). Consecutive numbered 210 4-96 Revision0 9109-098-21O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions CORs can be separated by a dash (by pressing the “2’ key on the terminal or the ninth softkey on the console). COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 20 characters). It is stored by the system but not used. Softkeys COR GROUP: This softkey selects a Class-of-Restriction (COR) Group. Pressing the COR GROUP softkey displays the ENTER COR GROUP NUM: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid number (1 to 50). The selected COR Group number is displayed on the command line. ; ‘-‘: This softkey is available only while a COR group is being edited. Pressing this softkey inserts a dash between a set of consecutive COR Group members. It is valid only when it is inserted between consecutive COR Group members. For example, 1 2 3 4 5 is equivalent to l-5. The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, TOP, BOlTOM, and QUIT are also provided. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 4-97 Customer Data Entry Form 21 - ARS: Day Zone Definition 4.27 This form defines the day zones for each day of the week. There are a maximum of three day zones. Note: All days of the week must have a zone specification before this form can be saved. Refer to Figure 4-34 for the form layout. 2:51 PM ll-JUN-98 alarm DAY ZONE MON. TUE. WED. THU. FRI. El * * * * * status q SAT. * 82 83 * El * * * * SUN m * 0 l-ENABLE 2- 3- 4- 5- 6-QUIT 7- a- 9- B- Figure 434 MAJOR Form 21 Layout Field Descriptions DAY ZONE: This field lists the day zones for the system. Pressing the up and down arrow keys select different day zones. Note: This field cannot be modified. MON., TUE., WED., THU., FRI., SAT. and SUN. : These fields list the zone specification. Pressing the right and left arrow keys (or the TAB key on the CRT terminal) select separate days. Note: Only one Day Zone number can be assigned to each day of the week. When a day is assigned to a day zone, the form displays an asterisk (*) in that day field. . Softkeys ‘ENABLE/DISABLE: This softkey has two functions; it enables and disables the day zone specification for each day. Pressing the ENABLE softkey sets the selected day to the day zone that is displayed on the command line. The form displays an asterisk (* ) in the selected day field opposite the chosen day zone. When the cursor is at an asterisk, this softkey displays DISABLE. Pressing the DISABLE softkey removes that day specification from the selected day zone. The asterisk disappears and the softkey displays ENABLE again. The standard 210 4-98 softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided. Revision 0 9109-096-21&NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Form 22 - ARS: Modified Digit Table 4.28 This form specifies, those digits that modify the user-dialed digits. The digit modification prepares the dialed digits for dialing out on certain trunks such as Fx, TIE and WATS. Refer to Practice 9109-096~220-NA, Automatic Route Selection and Toll Control, for details. Refer to Figure 4-35 for the form layout. ENTRY 61 02 03 a4 05 06 07 El8 B9 10 II 12 1 1 1 I 03 DIGITS QTY TO DEL I TO BE INSERTED CObiMENTS *141Ei X1617 * 1662 Tie Tie Tie Line: Line: Line: ToPonto * 1602 Tie Line: Phoenix Ba&t.on Phoenix I 1 l- 2- s-QUIT 7-ENTRY NUM 3- 4-TOP 5-BOTTW11 8-DELETE 9- 8- Figure 4-35 Form 22 Layout Field Descriptions ENTRY NUM: This field lists the entry numbers. There are a maximum of 50 entry numbers for Generic 1001 and a maximum of 100 entry numbers for Generic 1002, Generic 1003, Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. The ENTRY NUM field links this form to Form 23, ARS: Route Definition. This field cannot be modified. QTY TO DELETE: This field lists the quantity of digits that the system removes from the user-dialed digits before outpulsing on a trunk. A maximum of 25 digits can be deleted from each entry number. The digit “1” instructs the system to delete the first dialed digit. DIGITS TO BE INSERTED: This field lists those digits that the system adds to the user-dialed digits for each entry number. A maximum of 38 digits can be inserted; including any pauses and wait for dial tone symbols. Special number sequences are: *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 9109-09&21O-NA = = = = = = = = = Pause for 5 Seconds Wait for Dial Tone Switch to DTMF for Subsequent Digits Do not Display Further Modified Digits on Sets or SMDR Pause 10 Seconds Insert caller’s ID (for analog networking - not in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002) Insert caller’s dialed account code (for analog networking -not in Generic 1001 or Generic Insert PBX node ID number (for analog networking - not in Generic 1001 /Generic 1002) Pause for 1 second. (Generics 1003,1004 and 1005 only). Issue 1 Revision 0 1002) 210 4-99 Customer Data Entrv The asterisk (*) character is generated on the Attendant Console and the terminal by pressing the* key. If however, the asterisk character is required in a string of characters, the * key must be pressed twice. COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional It is stored by the system but not used. data (a maximum of 20 characters), Softkeys .ENTRY NUM: This softkey selects an entry number line. Pressing the command \ and displays it on the command the ENTRY NUM softkey displays the ENTER ENTRY NUM: prompt on line. The selection is completed by entering a valid number (1 to 100). CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are The standard softkeys also provided. Form 23 - ARS: Route Definition 4.29 This form defines each ARS Route by specifying the Trunk Group number, COR Group number and the Modified Digit Entry. Refer to Figure 4-36 for the form layout. 1:13 PM ROUTE II-JUN-SE NUM alarm TRUNK GROUP COR GROUP 11 2 :: 83 04 ES 86 87 98 R9 MOD DIGIT status ENTRY = MAJOR CDMMENTS 21 1 21 3 Long Local Band Distance DDD 2 WATS 1 3 Band 2 WATS 3- 4-TOP 5BDTTDM &DELETE 9- 0- DDD < 16 11 12 83 . LIP l- 2- 6-QUIT 7-ROUTE NUM II Figure 446 Form 23 Layout Field Descriptions ROUTE NUM: This field lists the Route numbers. cannot be modified. There is a maximum Note that the ROUTE of 200 Route numbers. TRUNKGROUP: This field displays the Trunk Group number specification NUM field (1 to 50) for each Route number. 210 4-100 Revision 0 9109-096-21CkNA issue1 CDE Form Descriptions COR GROUP: This field lists the COR Group number specification (1 to 50) for each Route number. This field links this form to Form 20 (refer to Form 20, ARS: COR Group Definition), Those users with CORs in the listed COR Group number are restricted from using this route. If no COR Group number is specified, then all users can use this route. ., MOD DIGIT ENTRY: This field lists the entry number specification (1 to 50 for Generic 1001 and 1 to 100 for Generic 1002, Generic 1003, Generic 1004 and Generic 1005) for each Route number. This field links this form to Form 22 (refer to Form 22, ARS: Modified Digit Table). COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 20 characters). It is stored by the system but not used. Softkeys ROUTE NUM: This softkey selects a Route number and displays it on the command line. Pressing the ROUTE NUM softkey displays the ENTER ROUTE NUM: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid number (1 to 200). The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also provided. Form 24 - ARS: Route lists 4.30 This form specifies the order that the Route numbers are selected. There are 100 Route List numbers; each Route List number accommodates a maximum of six Route numbers. Refer to Figure 4-37 for the form layout, :54 PM LIST ll-JUN-98 MUM alarm FIRST 1 SECOND (VT1 2 3 ON El 82 83 84 85 86 87 08 09 10 11 12 . THIRD T FOURTH I B-QUIT 7-LIST NUM Figure e37 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 S-DELETE WT FIFTH status = MAJOR 7 - T 7 SIXTH - 4-TOP 9- 51-0- - Form 24 Layout Revision 0 210 4-101 I CustomerData Entry Field Descriptions LIST NUM: This field displays the Route List numbers. Note that the LIST NUM field cannot be modified. There is a maximum of 100 list numbers. FIRST, SECOND, THIRD, FOURTH, FIFTH and SIXTH : These fields specify the Route numbers for each Route List number. Valid entries are 01 to 200. These fields link this form to Form 23 (ARS: Route Definition). WT: There are five of these; one for each of the SECOND, THIRD, FOURTH, FIFTH and SIXTH fields. ON in this field indicates that the chosen Route number is an expensive route. The system indicates this by providing an audible warning tone when that route is selected. Softkeys LIST NUM: This softkey selects a Route List number and displays it on the command line. Pressing the LIST NUM softkey displays the ENTER ROUTE LIST NUM: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering avalid Route List number (01 to 100). DELETE/ADD: This softkey appears when the pointer is pointing to data (i.e., data on the command line). This softkey has two functions; it deletes and adds data to the form. Pressing the DELETE softkey removes the data from the selected field. The deletion is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey. If the delete key is pressed while the cursor is in the [FIRSTI field, data on that line is deleted. The field is ready for new data and the softkey blanks. When the cursor is at a blank WT field on the command line, this softkey displays ADD. Pressing the ADD softkey enables the warning tone. The WT field displays ON and the softkey now displays DELETE. The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also provided. 210 4-102 Revision0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Form Descriptions CDE Form 25 - ARS: Route Plans 4.31 This form assigns the Route Lists to the time and day zones. There are 18 time zones (six for each day zone). Each time zone has a start time that can be set by the installer. The last specified start time creates a time period from its start time to the first specified start time of that day zone. If a time zone has no assigned Route List number, then all calls during that time period are restricted from this Route Plan, There are a maximum of 50 Route Plans. Refer to Figure 4-38 for the form layout. _’ :48 II-JUN-SE Phi rIME \ ZONE DAY ZONE 1 HOUR ROUTE START El alarm LIST DAY ZONE 2 HOUR ROUTE START LIST status q M&JOR DAY ZONE'3 HOUR ROUTE START LIS-I 12 003 14 085 18 018 12 003 14 005 18 018 < E 04 05 86 01 11 I-QUIT 7-ROUTE PLAN Figure 448 B-DELETE 9- E- Form 25 Layout Field Descriptions TIME ZONE: This field lists the six time zones for each day zone. The TIME ZONE field cannot be modified. START HOUR: There are three of these fields (one for each day zone). The START HOUR field specifies the starting time of each time zone. The time is represented by two digits in 24 hour format. For example, 18 represents 18:O0. . ROUTE LIST: There are three of these fields (one for each day zone). The ROUTE LIST field displays the Route List numbers and links this form to Form 24 (ARS: Route Lists). Valid entries are 01 to 100. Softkeys ROUTE PLAN: This softkey has two functions. It displays the selected Route Plan number and enables the user to select an alternate Route Plan. Pressing the ROUTE PLAN softkey displays the following on the command line: CURRENT ROUTE PLAN: XX ENTER ROUTE PLAN NUM: ROUTE PLAN: where XX is Route Plan number 01 to 50. The Route Plan selection is completed by entering a new Route Plan number. The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 4-103 Customer Data Entry Form 26 - ARS: Digit Strings 4.32 This form (and its nested form) link the digits dialed by the user to the appropriate Route, Route List or Route Plan. It selects the relevant Route (if there is only one route), or Route List (if there is more than one route and the time of day is not important), or Route Plan (if the choice of routes vary with the time of day) by the user-dialed digits. Refer to Figure 4-39 for the form layout. Refer to Practice 9109-096-220-NA, Automatic Route Selection and Toll Control, for details. :23 PM 14-NW-91 LEADING alarm RETURN DIGITS DIAL TONE status RESTRICTED B-QUIT FLEADING DIG Unrestricted Unrestricted YES Unrestricted &DELETE MAJOR COR GROUP YES NO 3-INSERT q sg-SHOW STRINGS E- Figure 4-39 Form 26 Layout Field Descriptions LEADING DIGITS: This field displays thefirst digits of each digitstringfor digit analysis. The maximum number of digits in this field is five. I RETURN DIAL TONE: If this field displays YES, the system provides a dial tone after the leading digits have been dialed. Alternately, the system does not provide a temporary dial tone when NO is displayed in this field. Refer to Practice 9109-095-220-NA, Automatic Route Selection and Toll Control, for details. RESTRICTED COR GROUP: This field lists the COR Group which cannot dial the specified leading digit(s). If this field is left blank, then every COR Group can access the specified leading digit(s). Softkeys YES/NO: This softkey has two functions; it enables or disables system dial tone for each entry, Pressing the YES softkey enables the system dial tone when that leading digit is accessed. The RETURN DIAL TONE field displays YES and the softkey now displays NO, Pressing the NO softkey disables the system dial tone when that leading digit is accessed. The RETURN DIAL TONE field displays NO and the softkey displays 210 4-104 Revision0 91M9&21O-NA Issue1 CDE Form Descriptions YES again. Note that this softkey only appears when the cursor is in the “RETURN DIAL TONE” field. INSERT: This softkey adds new entries to the form. Pressing the INSERT softkey clears the command line and moves the cursor to the LEADING DIGITS field. The addition is completed by entering the new data for each field and pressing the ENTER softkey. Note that the system inserts the addition after the line that was displayed on the command line. _’ LEADING DIG: This softkey selects an entry in the LEADING DIGITS field. Pressing the LEADING DIG softkey displays the ENTER LEADING DIGITS: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid number. SHOW STRINGS: Pressing this softkey accesses the nested form for any defined Leading Digits entry. Refer to the ARS: Nested Digit Strings subform. The standard softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, *MORP provided. and QUIT are also Digit Strings Subform For Form 26 4.33 This form is reserved for specifying subsequent digits for each entry in the LEADING DIGITS field of the previous form. It can only be accessed from the previous form. Refer to Figure 440 for the form layout. Refer to Practice 9109-096-220-NA, Automatic Route Selection and Toll Control, for details. 4:34 PM 14-NW-91 alarm status q MAJOR . Figure 4-40 Digit Strings Subform Layout 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 e-lo5 CustomerData Entry Field Descriptions TO BE ANALYZED: This field displays those digits for digit analysis. Digit analysis is required so that the appropriate Route, Route List or Route Plan can be selected. The total number of digits in this field, the number of digits in the QTY TO FOLLOW field plus the digits in the LEADING DIGITS field in the previous form (refer to the top level Digit Strings form) cannot exceed 26. DIGITS This field lists the number of digits that the user dials AFTER the analyzed digits. The Unknown prompt in this field indicates that the number of subsequent digits is unknown to the system. QTY TO FOLLOW: DISTANCE: This field specifies which digit string entries require “long distance” management. Several features (account codes, Hotel/Motel, etc.) use this to control access to ARS. Default condition is NO. LONG TERM TYPE AND NUM: This field specifies where the digit string terminates. If there is only one route, then ROUTE is selected. If there is more than one route, but the time of day is not important, then LIST is selected. If the choice of routes vary with the time of day, then PLAN is selected. Softkeys This softkey only appears when the cursor is at the LONG DISTANCE field. Pressing the YES softkey indicates to the system that this entry requires “long distance” management. The default condition is no “long distance” management required as indicated by NO in the LONG DISTANCE field. YES/NO: This softkey appears only when the cursor is at the QTY TO FOLLOW field. Pressing the UNKNOWN softkey indicates to the system that the quantity of dialed digits AFTER the analyzed digits is unknown. UNKNOWN: - INSERT: This softkey adds new entries to the form. Pressing the INSERT softkey clears the command line and moves the cursor to the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. The addition is completed by entering the new data for each field and pressing the ENTER softkey. Note that the system inserts the addition one line afterthe line that was displayed on the command line. The system automatically places all inserted or added strings in numerical ascending order with relation to existing strings. NOX: This softkey functions as a wild card sequence, where N is any digit from 2 to 9. It represents half of the area codes in North America. Pressing this softkey displays NOX in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. Note that this softkey can only be pressed at the beginning of a digit string. ROUTE: This softkey only appears when the cursor is at the TERM TYPE AND NUM field. Pressing the ROUTE softkey terminates that entry at a Route (the Route number must still be defined). ROUTE appears in the TERM TYPE AND NUM field. X: This softkey functions as a wild card digit; it represents any digit from 0 to 9. Pressing this softkey displays X in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. Note that this softkey can only be pressed at the end of a digit string. 210 4-106 Revision0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue1 CDE Form Descriptions PLAN: Thissoftkey only appears when the cursor is at theTERMTYPEAND NUM field. Pressing the PLAN softkey terminates that entry at a Route Plan (the number must still be defined). PLAN appears in the TERM TYPE AND NUM field. This softkey selects an entry in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. Pressing the FIND STRING softkey displays the ENTER DIGIT STRING: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid digit string. Note: The entered digit string does not have to be an exact match; the system accepts subsets of digit strings and moves the cursor to the closest entry. FIND STRING: _’ 1. NIX: This softkey functions as a wild card sequence, where N is any digit from 2 to 9. It represents half of the area codes in North America. Pressing this softkey displays NIX in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. Note that this softkey can only be pressed at the beginning of a digit string. LIST: This softkey appears only when the cursor is at the TERM TYPE AND NUM field. Pressing the LIST softkey terminates that entry at a Route List (the number must still be defined). LIST appears in the TERM TYPE AND NUM field. 1 NIX, 1 NOX, ONIX, ONOX:For area codes not specifically identified, and where dialing is preceded by a 1 or 0 (long distance access code), these wildcard sequences followed by 7 digits would cover all unspecified area codes. This allows wild card restriction of 555 and 976 numbers. These softkeys can only be pressed at the beginning of a digit string and are available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. They are accessed by pressing the * MORE * softkey once. These wildcard sequences, designed for the call aggregator market (i.e. hotels, motels, hospitals, universities), prevent unauthorized calls from being billed to the originating line, while allowing consumers access to the long distance carriers of their choice. These softkeys can only be pressed at the beginning of a digit string and are available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. IOXXXONOX, IOXXXONIX, 1OXXXONIX and 1OXXXI NOX are accessed by pressing the * MORE * softkey twice; 1OXXXO and 1OXXXI are accessed by pressing the ** MORE * softkey three times, IOXXXONOX, IOXXXONIX, IOXXXINOX, The standard softkeys CANCEL, 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 DELETE, IOXXXINIX, ENTER, Revision 0 IOXXXO, IOXXXI: and QUIT are also provided. 210 4-107 Customer Data Entry Form 27 - ARS: Maximum 4.34 Dialed Digits This form specifies the maximum number of dialed digits allowed for each Class of Restriction. The purpose of this form is to accommodate countries with open numbering plans, where it is generally not possible to determine from the leading digits the number of digits to follow. Note: For North America, the specified’default value of Unlimited applies. Refer to Practice 9109-09622&NA, Automatic Route Selection and Toll Control, for detailed information and additional CDE considerations if a value other than Unlimited is chosen. See Figure 4-41 for the I xm layout. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001. 1:21 PM 11-JIJN-98 alarm I MAXIMAI NWBER OF DIALED status q MAJOR DIGITS Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited Unlimited I In 1 Unlimited l- 2- S- 4-TOP !i-BOlTI3.4 &QUIT -?- B-COR 9- 0- Figure 441 Form 27 Layout Field Descriptions COR: This field lists the COR (1 => 25). Note: The COR field cannot be modified. - Maximum Number of Dialed Digits: This field lists the allowed number of dialed digits, 1 to 25, plus the default value of Unlimited. Note: 26 is equivalent to UNLIMITED. therefore, when 26 is entered the value UNLIMITED is displayed. Softkeys UNLIMITED: Pressing the UNLIMITED softkey enters the default value of unlimited in the Maximum Number of Dialed Digits field. If the cursor is positioned at the default value, “Unlimited” is not displayed. COR: When this softkey is pressed the user is prompted with ENTER COR NUMBER. After entering the COR number and pressing the ENTER softkey, the cursor is positioned to the COR specified. If the COR selected is out of range, the message “The value xx is outside valid range for COR (1 => 25)” is displayed. The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also provided. 210 4-108 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Form 28 - Form Access Restriction Def’n 4.35 _’ I This form specifies the level of access for the various CDE forms. There are five levels of access; the Installer level has the highest degree of access and the Attendant has the lowest. Each form is defined as Read Only, Read/Write or No Access, When the system is first initialized, the Installer and MAINTI level have a Read/Write access for each form; the rest of the levels default to No Access. Note that at each level of access the user can only modify those forms plus the forms at the lower levels of access. For example, the user at the SUPERVISOR level can only modify those forms at SUPERVISOR and ATTENDANT levels. Refer to Figure 4-42 for the form layout. Note: In Generic 1001, this is Form 27. 1:24 PM ll-JUN-98 FORM alarm NAME INST El B2 93 04 85 86 87 GG 89 i9 q 11 = 12 q SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FEATURE ACCESS CODES COS DEFINE SYS QPTIDNS/SYS TIMERS TENANT INTERCONNECTION TENANT NIGHT SWITCHING GLINSCILE ASSIGNMENTS ATTENDANT LDN ASGN STATIONSh'UPERSET TELEPHON PICKUP GROUPS DATA CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR DATA ASSIGNMENT 85 q TENANT INTERCONNECTION ONLY 2-READ/WRITE 3- 7-SET &ALL q = = = = = = = q .-READ I-QUIT PASSWORD MAINTI MAINTZ SUPER none none none none none none none R/w none RI-W none none none % R/W WW Ra'W R/W $i R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W none none none none none none none R/W none WV none none R/w WW none R/W lz R/w R/W R/W R/W RI/W R/W 4-TOP FORMS g-FORM status = MAJOR ATT none none none none none none none R none R/W none none cb one S-BOTTOM NUN B- Figure 4-42 Form 28 Layout Field Descriptions . FORM NAME: This field lists all the form numbers and names of the CDE package. The FORM NAME field cannot be modified. INST, MAINTl , MAINT2, SUPER and AlT: These fields represent the five levels of access and list the access type (Read Only, Read/Write or No Access) for each form. Note: The selected level of access is not displayed on the softkeys. The INST field cannot be modified. Softkeys READ ONLY: Pressing the READ ONLY softkey restricts the user to viewing the selected form; no modifications can occur. The R prompt appears beside the selected form and under the selected access level. READ/WRITE: Pressing the READ/WRITE softkey enables the user to view and modify the selected form. The form displays the R/W prompt to indicate this state. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-109 Customer Data Enttv NO ACCESS: Pressing the NO ACCESS softkey displays the none prompt to indicate this state. restricts form access. The form SET PASSWORD: This softkey changes the password for Customer Data Entry. Pressing the SET PASSWORD softkey shows a new softkey display (ATTENDANT, SUPERVISOR, MAINTZ, MAINTI, and INSTALLER) and the following prompt: SELECT LEVEL OF ACCESS:. The user cannot change the password for a level of access higher than the current one. For example, a user logged on as MAINT2 cannot change the password for MAINTI . After the user selects a level of access, the system prompts ENTER XXXXXXXX NEW PASSWORD:. When the new password is entered, the system prompts ENTER XXXXXXXX NEW PASSWORD TO VERIFY. When ,changing the current level’s password, the system first prompts ENTER XX>O(XXXX OLD PASSWORD:, where XXXXXXXX is the selected level of access. ALL FORMS: This softkey allows a user to change the level of access to all forms for a lower level user. For example, INSTALLER may use this to change the access for MAINTI, and MAINT2 may use this to change the access for SUPERVISOR. Not available in Generic 1001. FORM NUM: This softkey selects a form by number. Pressing the FORM NUM softkey displays the ENTER FORM NUMBER: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid form number (1 to 35). The standard provided. 210 4-110 softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Form 29 - DTEProfile 4.36 In order for the Data transceiver (DTRX) to communicate with the attached data terminal equipment (DTE), it is necessary to specify the programmable options which define the characteristics of the terminal. The Data transceiver circuit provides data devices with the ability to dial a destination via a keyboard. The DTE profile form provides 25 programmable profiles. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. . I:39 \ I PM PROFILE ll-JUN-90 alarm NUMBER NUMBER OF DATA SETS 02 03 04 05 06 07 06 09 18 11 12 02 I P- 6-QUIT 7-PROFILE NUM I14-TOP B-SEL. OPTION MAJOR Gp 1 0 I P- q COMMENTS Terminal 0 I IIII ASSIGNED 3 El 0 0 0 0 Ei 0 El 0 0 0 01 > status 9- I 5-EXITTOM 0- Figure 4-43 Form 29 Layout Field Descriptions PROFILE NUMBER: This field lists all the profile numbers 01 to 25. The PROFILE NUMBER field cannot be modified. NUMBER OF DATA SETS ASSIGNED: This field lists the number of data sets assigned to each profile number. COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 20 characters). It is stored by the system but not used. Softkeys PROFILE NUM: The PROFILE NUM softkey allows a user to select a device by number. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER PROFILE NUM: prompt. When the number has been entered, the command line updates and the line pointer moves to profile number. The selection is completed by pressing the ENTER softkey. SEL. OPTION: A new form is displayed when the SEL. OPTION softkey is pressed. Refer to the Options Subform for Form 29. 9109-09&21O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 4-111 Customer Data Entry REVIEW: A new form is displayed Review Subform greater than 0. The standard provided. when the REVIEW softkey is pressed. Refer to the for Form 29. This softkey appears when the number of DATASETs is softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also Options Subform For Form 29 4.37 The system displays this form when the programmer presses the SEL. OPTION \ softkey in Form 29, Data Terminal Equipment Profile. The options displayed are for the Profile Number that was on the command line of Form 29. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. I:39 PM [ II-JUN-98 PROFILE alarm NUMBER : 1 1 DTE q OPTIONS Terminal type Language DTRX Echoplex Editing Editing character delete (Ei - 127, Editing line dlsplay (8 - 127, Inject after Number of pads after (8 - 7) Number of pads after (8 - 7) DTRX Inactivity Timer 1 - 68 Terminal status MAJOR VALUE VIDEO TERM ENGLISH DISABLED DISABLED Decimal Decimal value value of of ASCII ASCII code) code) i ALWhYS :: 16 seconds type DIDEO l-TELEPRINTER 2- 3- 4-TOP 5-BDTTOM 6-QUIT 7- 8- 9- R- TERM Figure 4-44 Options Subform Layout b Field Descriptions The header displays the Profile Number. VALUE: The VALUE field displays the current setting for each option. Softkeys Some of the softkeys displayed are the alternative settings for the option displayed on the command line. Refer to Parameters, below. The following softkeys are continuously present: TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT. Parameters Terminal Type: This parameter defined 210 4-112 on a video or teleprinter is used to determine how the delete character is terminal. A teleprinter terminal displays a ‘r/,,when the Revision 0 9109-096-21CbNA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions delete character is used and the video terminal transmits a , , . : Language: Commands and responses for the DTRX can be English or French. DTRX Echoplex: This parameter determines whether the DTRX (Data Transceiver), will echo back transmitted characters to the originating station. The exception is programmed keys in the DTE and data circuit descriptor forms. ._ Editing: Enabled, this option provides the user with editing function DTRX delete character, and DTRX display line. Editing Character Delete: An ASCII code in decimal form is used to define a character as a delete key. If echoplex and DTRX editing options are enabled, a ‘I/” appears as the delete character on a teleprinter and a , , , is transmitted back to a video terminal. Editing Line Display: An ASCII code in decimal form is used to define a character as a display line key. When DTRX editing is enabled and the ASCII code for Display Line is transmitted, the current DTRX command line and the input digits are displayed on a new line. Inject After : This field is used to accommodate terminal variations in the handling of carriage returns ( ). Some terminals automatically insert line feed (cLF>) after carriage return. While connected to the Data Transceiver the following options are available: NEVER: No linefeed insertions after detected. FROM DTE: Insert cLF> after from DIE if the echoplexfeature is enabled. The and is returned to the Data Terminal Equipment by the Data Transceiver after a was received from the DTE. All messages originated by the DTRX (Data Transceiver) would only have a . The DTE would typically provide this. FROM SYSTEM (DTRX): Insert after from DTRX. All messages originated by the DPABX that have a will have a cLF> injected. This does not include which are echoed back to the DTE. This option would be used if the DTE provided local echoing of characters transmitted. ALWAYS: The cLF> will be injected if the is originated from the DTE or DTRX. Number of Pads after : This field is used for terminals that require delays after a carriage return before receiving printable characters (printers with small or no buffers). Values entered range from 0 to 7. This option is valid only if echoplex is enabled. . k Number of Pads after : This field is used for terminals that require delays after a line feed return before receiving printable characters (printers with small or no buffers). Values entered range from 0 to 7. This option is valid only if echoplex is enabled. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-113 Customer Data Entry DTRX Inactivity Timer: This field specifies the length of time between the last character received or transmitted from a data device and the DTRX being dropped. Values range between 1 to 60 seconds; default is 10 seconds, Review List SUBFORM for Form 29 4.38 This form appears when the REVIEW softkey is pressed in Form 29, DTE Profile. The’form provides a list of users of a particular profile identified by their physical location. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. r :40 PM [ PROFILE ll-JUN-SE alam NUMBER : a] BhY 1 18 18 SLT CCT SCT a 1 2 5 ; 18 l- 2- X$JIT 7-PROFILE Figure 445 NU# status 2 q MAJOR C@MMENTS 1s term 1s term hs term 1s term 12 3- 4- S- 8- 9- E- Review List Subform Layout Field D&criptions The header line displays the Profile number. . BAY, SLT, CCT, SCT: These fields list the bay, slot, circuit and subcircuit of the device programmed. These fields cannot be modified. COMMENTS: This field displays the comments for each device from the Data Assignment form. It cannot be modified. Softkeys PROFILE NUM: When this softkey is pressed the command line displays “ENTER PROFILE NUM:“. After entering a valid number and pressing the ENTER softkey, the screen will display the list of users of that DTE Profile, if any. The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER and QUIT are also provided. Revision0 9109-096-21CMA Issue1 CDE Form Descriotions Form 30 - Device Interconnection Table 4.39 This form specifies which devices may be connected together. See Figure 4-46 for the form layout. The system allows for a maximum of 25 devices, Note: In Generic 1001, this is Form 29. :41 PM ll-JUN-98 El 02 03 64 alarm 65 86 fll*******X**** * * * 83X*......******x**x*r***xr 84Xx.-....***************** B5**..,...***************** 02* * * 87 88 69 18 11 12 * * * * * * 13 14 16 16 17 18 ***8***L***** * * * * * * status 19 28 * * q 21 22 * * MAJOR 23 *;* 24 2: * 86”*..,...*******xu******** 07**..,..,***?****~******** m* * Eg**;;;;;;**f********++t*** 10************ 11************************* ***************** ********t**** 12************************* qzp***********************I l- 2- &QUIT 7-INTERCON 3- 4-TOP 5-BOTTOM g-REVIEW E- NUM 6-DISALLOW Figure 4-46 Form 30 Layout Field Descriptions Initially, the system interconnects all devices except trunks. The asterisk (*) character indicates the device the row represents is allowed to connect to the device the column represents. When the system inhibits device interconnection, it is indicated by the period (.) character. The device numbers are listed in the header line and the first column. The devices these numbers represent are listed in the nested REVIEW form. Softkeys INTERCON NUM: The INTERCON NUM softkey allows a user to select a device by number. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER INTERCONNECT NUM: prompt. Entering the interconnect number (1 to 25) displays that device with a series of ‘*’ characters (allow interconnection) and I.’ characters (disallow interconnection). Cursor movement on the command line is controlled by the right and left cursor control keys. DISALLOW/ALLOW: This softkey has two functions; it enables and disables interconnection between devices. Pressing the DISALLOW softkey disables the interconnection between those two devices unidirectionally. For example, when modifying connections for device 5 (the command line displays line 5) and the DISALLOW softkey is pressed when the cursor is under the sixth column, then device 5 cannot communicate with device 6. However, device 6 can still communicate with device5. Total interconnection is inhibited only when a’.’ (disallow) character is inserted at row 6 (device 6) under the fifth column (device 5). The softkey now displays the 9109-09&21O-NA Issue1 Revision 0 210 4-115 Customer Data Entry ALLOW prompt. Pressing the ALLOW softkey enables the unidirectional interconnection between the selected devices; the ‘*’ character replaces the ‘,’ character. REVIEW: Pressing the REVIEW softkey displays a new form (refer to Review List Subform for Form 30). This form lists all the device types, The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also provided. r Review list Subform for Form 30 4.40 This form appears when the REVIEW softkey is pressed in Device Interconnection Table Form. When entered from Form 30, this form displays a list of the device types. Refer to Figure 4-47 for the form layout. Note that the data in this form cannot be modified. Phi II-JUN-SE I:42 ENTRY alarm DEVICETYPE NUM Station/Set Console Loop Start Trunk Ground Start Trunk DID/Tie Trunk E&l Trunk ( if-Wire RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED II El DESCRIPTION status = MKIOR INTERCONNECT NLM 1 2 3 4 5 or 4-Wire ; 8 9 10 11 12 Station/Set l- 2-EKTRY i-QUIT 7-IMERCON NLM 3- 4-TOP NUM Ei- 9- R- Figure 4-47 Review List Subform Layout . Field Descriptions ENTRY NUM: This field lists the entry numbers for the device types. There is a total of 25 entry numbers. The ENTRY NUM field cannot be modified. DEVICE TYPE DESCRIPTION: This field lists the titles assigned to the entry numbers, The DEVICE TYPE DESCRIPTION field cannot be modified. The last 13 entries are reserved for future use. INTERCONNECT NUM: This field lists all the interconnect numbers; it links this form to the previous form (refer to Form 30, Device Interconnection Table). The interconnect numbers range from 1 to 25. The INTERCONNECT NUM field cannot be modified. 210 4-116 Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue1 CDE Form Descriptions Softkeys ENTRY NUM: This softkeyselects an entry number. Pressing the ENTRY NUM softkey displays the ENTER ENTRY NUM: on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid entry number (1 to 25). .’ .- INTERCON NUM: This softkey selects a device type by its interconnect number. Pressing the INTERCON NUM softkey displays ENTER INTERCONNECT NUM: on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid interconnect number (1 to 25). The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also provided. Form 31 - System Abbreviated 4.41 Dial Entry This form specifies System Abbreviated Dial numbers. Refer to Practice 9109-096-l 05NA, Feature Descriptions (under Abbreviated Dial). for details. See Figure 4-48 for the form layout. Note: In Generic 1001, this is Form 30. :46 PM ll-JUN-98 INDEX NUMBER alarm DIGIT STRING PRIVATE 5551209 PRIVATE 19; 688 5558812 12285558698 5551868 PRIVATE FP 5551EEEi PRIVATE 22 . l- 2-FIND 6-QUIT 7- INDEX status 3- 4-TOP 5-BOTTM B-DELETE 9-NON-PRIV&TE B- = MAJOR Figure 4-48 Form 31 Layout Field Descriptions INDEX NUMBER: This field lists the index numbers; one for each entry in the form. The System Abbreviated Dial Access Code followed by the Index number forms the Abbreviated Dial number. Each index number can be a maximum of three digits. DIGIT STRING: This field lists the digit strings; one for each Index number. The digit string can be a maximum of 26 digits for a non-private number, 25 digits for a private number. The following special characters may be entered: 9109-096-21 O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-117 I Customer Data Entry *l = Pause for 5 seconds (for ONS Voice Mail feature; Generic 1004/Generic 1005) *3 = Wait for user to manually insert digits (2 digits expected) *5 = Call to Call Announce Port. This code must be at the end of the number; it cannot have digits following it. *6 = Insert caller’s ID (for ONS Voice Mail feature; Generic 1004/Generic 1005) *9 = Pause for 1 second (for ONS Voice Mail feature; Generic 1004/Generic 1005) * = DTMF digit * (Generic 1004/Generic 1005) # = DTMF digit # PRIVATE: This field specifies which entries are Private (as indicated with the PRIVATE .’ prompt) and which are non-Private (as indicated by a blank). Softkeys ‘FIND INDEX: This softkey selects an Index Number. Pressing the FIND INDEXsoftkey displays ENTER INDEX NUM: on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid Index Number (a maximum of three digits). INSERT: This softkey adds new digit strings to this form. Pressing the INSERT softkey clears the command line and moves the cursor to the INDEX NUMBER field. The addition is completed by entering a valid index number and digit string. The system inserts the addition in numerical ascending order according to the INDEX NUMBER field. Note that if there is no data in this form or the line pointer is pointing to the last line of data, then this softkey does not appear. PRIVATE/NON-PRIVATE: This softkey has two functions. Pressing the PRIVATE softkey sets the selected digit string entry to Private; the PRIVATE prompt appears in the PRIVATE field and the softkey now displays the NON-PRIVATE prompt. Pressing the NON-PRIVATE softkey sets the selected digit string to non-private; the PRIVATE field blanks and the softkey displays the PRIVATE prompt once again. The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, DELETE, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also provided. 210 4-118 Revision0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Form 32 - Customer 4.42 Data Print This form lists all the Customer Data options that can be sent to an output device, such as a printer or a terminal. The options are selected by Print Option Number. Note that this form cannot be modified. Refer to Table 3-1 for a complete list of the form numbers and to Figure 4-49 for the form layout. Print Options with I‘*” are subforms of the preceding form. Note: In Generic lb01 , this is Form 31. 1:46 PM 11-JUN-9B PRINT OPTION 81 CDE DATA status = MAJOR PRINT Ei; EIEI 09 09* 10 11 System Configuration Feature Access Codes COS Deflnltion System Options/System Timers Tenant Interconnection Table Tenant Night Switching Console Assignments Attendant LDN Assignments Statlon/SUPERSET Telephones Line/SUPERSET Telephone Appearances Pickup Groups Data Circuit Descriptors 01 System E 04 05 I alarm Configuration _- Z-PRINT ALL 3- 4-TOP 5-BOTTOM i-QUIT 7-PRINT OPTION B- g-PRINT E- Figure 4-49 Form 32 Layout Field Descriptions PRINT OPTION: This field lists the print option numbers for the CDE options that can be sent to an output device (a terminal or a printer). There is a maximum of 50 print option numbers. The PRINT OPTION field cannot be modified. CDE DATA PRINT: This field lists the form names associated with the print option numbers. The CDE DATA PRINT field cannot be modified. . Softkeys PRINT ALL: This softkey transmits the contents of all the CDE Data Print option ranges to an output device (printer or terminal). Pressing the PRINT ALL softkey blanks the softkey display (with the exception of the QUIT softkey). This softkey is not available in Generic 1001. Further CDE is prohibited while PRINT ALL is in effect. The command line sequentially prompts the user to enter the desired ranges for options. The softkey ENTER must be pressed after each entry. The following lists the Data Print options: 1. PRINT 2. PRINT 3. PRINT QlM-fKG-Plh-hlA FROM ITtOM FROM COS START: To COS END TRK CCT DESC START To TRK CCT DES-2 END DATA CCT DESC START To DATA CCT DESC END Issue1 Revisit-m 0 31n A-1lQ Customer Data Entrv 4. PRINTPROMDTEPROFTLESZ4RTTODTEPROFILENUM.END 5.PRINTFROMnLWKDESC.START:TOnLINKDESC.END. When printing starts, the command softkey available is ABORT. line displays: CDEDAIIAPRINTINPROGRESS and the only Note: The system does not generate an error message if the specified printer is not operational. ABORT: cancels This softkey appears whenever the current active printout. a print is in progress. Pressing this softkey ,PRINT OPTION: This softkey OPTION softkey displays is completed by entering selected option. selects a print option number. Pressing the PRINT ENTER PRINTOPTION: on the command line. Theselection a valid print option number. The command line displays the PRINT: This softkey transmits the contents of the selected print option to an output device (printer or terminat). Pressing the PRINT softkey blanks the softkey display (except forthe ABORT softkey) for the duration of the print operation. When completed, the system displays CDE DATA PRlNT OPTION XX HAS COMPLETED PRINTING where XX is the Print Option number. The softkey display returns to the original format. The standard softkeys also provided. 210 4-120 CANCEL, ENTER, DELETE, TOP, BOlTOM, and QUIT are Revision 0 9109496-21O-NA Issue1 CDE Form Descriptions Form 33 - Account Code Entry 4.43 This form specifies the Account Codes in the database. If the Account Codes are verified, they are stored in the Account Code database. Refer to Figure 4-50 for the form layout. Refer also to Practice 9109-096-221-NA, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR). This form can only be accessed if System Option 05, Verified Account Codes is enabled. Note: In Generic 1001, this is Form 32. :52 PM II-JUN-98 alarm status = t4AJOR R ACCOUKT CODE COR ACTIVE; 10Ei001 100802 108803 100B04 106005 123456 ACTIVE ACTIVE hCTIVE INACTIVE 4CTIVE ACTIVE l- 2- B-QUIT I 3- I7-DELETE I RANGEISI I9-FIND IB- I I I II 1 II Figure 4-50 Form 33 Layout Field Descriptions ACCOUNT CODE: This field lists the stored Account Codes entries. The length of the Account Code is specified in Form 04, System Options/System Timers (System Option 55, Account Code Length). Depending on the status of System Option 55, Account Codes can be variable from 1 to 12 digits or fixed to a set value from 4 to 12 digits. COS: This field specifies a COS number for each ACCOUNT CODE entry. This COS number replaces the caller’s COS number for the duration of the call. When the call is finished, the system restores the caller’s original COS number. If this field remains blank, then the caller’s original COS number is used for the call. COR: This field specifies a COR number for each Account Code entry. The system replaces the caller’s COR numberwith this COR number for the tenure of the call. Upon call completion, the caller’s original COR number is restored. If there is no specified COR number, then the caller’s original COR number is used for the call. ACTIVE: This field specifies which Account Codes can be accessed (as marked by the ACTIVE prompt) and which Account Codes are denied access (as marked by the INACTIVE prompt). 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 4-121 I Customer Data Entry Softkeys ACTlVE/INACTIVE: This sofikey has two functions. Pressing the ACTIVE softkey sets the selected Account Code entry to Active; that Account Code can now be accessed. The ACTIVE prompt appears in the ACTIVE field and the softkey now displays the INACTIVE prompt. Pressing the INACTIVE softkey sets the selected Account Code entry to Inactive; that Account Code can no longer be accessed. The ACTIVE field now displays the INACTIVE prompt and the softkey displays the ACTIVE prompt once again. Note that this softkey only appears when the cursor is in the ACTIVE field. NULL COWNULL COR: This softkey has two functions; it deletes selected COS and COR number entries. When the cursor is in a COS field which has a COS number, the \NULL COS prompt appears on the softkey display. Pressing the NULL COS softkey erases the data in the COS field; the NULL COS prompt disappears only when the cursor moves to the next field. Similarly, when the cursor is in a COR field which has a COR number, the NULL COR prompt appears on the softkey display. Pressing the NULLCOR softkey erases the data in the COR field; the NULL COR prompt disappears only when the cursor moves to the next field. INSERT: The INSERT softkey adds a new account code to this form. Pressing this softkey opens a window with a clear command line and moves the cursor to the ACCOUNT CODE field. The new account code is programmed by entering an Account Code value, a COS number and a COR number (if required). The system inserts the new account in its appropriate sequential position. The line pointer now points to the new account code. Note that if there is no data in this form or if the line pointer is pointing to the last line of data, then this softkey does not appear. DELETE RANGE: Pressing the DELETE RANGE softkey displays the FIRST ACCOUNT CODE TO DELETE: prompt on the command line. After an Account Code has been entered, the display returns the LAST ACCOUNT CODE TO DELETE: prompt. The deletion is completed by entering an Account Code. All Account Code entries between and including these specified Account Codes are removed from the form. If an invalid account code is entered the system will display ‘Non-existent account code value has been entered’. Pressing CANCEL followed by QUIT returns the display without any modifications. . FIND: This softkey selects an Account Code and appears only when there is an account code in the form. Pressing the FIND softkey displays the ENTER ACCOUNT CODE: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid Account Code. The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, DELETE, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also provided. 210 4-122 Revision0 9109-096-21&NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Form 34 - Directed IO 4.44 -. This form allows the user to specify the printers available in the system. Printouts and printout types will also be defined for each printer, as well as designating whether the printout is guaranteed or not (will or will not print.) Data outputs, such as Traffic Measurement, SMDR, Hotel/Motel can be routed to any data port with an asynchronous DATASET. If no new point is specified, printouts continue to default to the system printer RS-232 port. If the printer specified is currently active, then any request to print is queued. The system can support 7 different printers. When the form is entered for the first time the default printer routing is displayed for all valid printouts. See Figure 4-51 for the form layout. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96. 1:53 PM Printer Printer Printer Printer Printer Printer Printer Printer ll-JUN-BE Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port alarm Traffic CDE Data Hotel/Motel Hotel/Motel status q MAJOR Meas Print Wakeup Audit Figure 4-61 Form 34 Layout Field Descriptions EXT NUM: This field lists printer ports and extension numbers of programmed DATASETs. This form is linked to Form 12, Data Assignment. PRINTOUT: This field lists the specified data outputs from each programmed printer such as Traffic Measurement, SMDR, Hotel/Motel, DATASMDR, etc. Values in this field are entered through softkey commands. See Softkeys. Note that the PMS (Property Management System) softkey is displayed only if the PMS system option is enabled. PRINTOUT TYPE: This field lists the type of printout provided for each data output such as Autoprint, Directed and Monitor. Values in this field are entered through softkeys. The softkeys displayed will depend upon the data output programmed in the PRINTOUT field. Table 4-9 lists available softkeys as determined by the PRINTOUT field. 9109-09621O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 4-123 Customer Data Entry Table 4-9 Available Application Maintenance I Softkeys Printout Type Options Logs AUTOPRINT, DIRECTED, Traffic Measurement AUTOPRINT, DIRECTED SMDR AUTOPRINT CDE Data Print DIRECTED Hotel/Motel Wakeup AUTOPRINT Hotel/Motel Audit DIRECTED PMS AUTOPRINT ACD Agent Summary AUTOPRINT ACD Monitor Print DIRECTED ACD Group Summary MONITOR MAl* * Available 1 in Generic 1004 and Generic MONITOR ; AUTOPRINT 1005. GUARANTEED: This field is only modifiable for SMDR and Data SMDR printouts. The field defaults to NO in all other cases. If yes, SMDR records are guaranteed to print without losing records. Softkeys ADD: This softkey appears upon entry to the form and is used to insert additional printer locations and/or extension numbers of DATASETs. When the ADD softkey is pressed, the form is in the ADD mode. See Commands: Add Mode below. b DELETE: Pressing the DELtE softkey deletes from the form the printout listed at the cursor position. The ENTER softkey must then be pressed to change the database. The user is alerted if the printout is currently active (printing or queued to print) before the delete is performed. If the printout is active, the user can cause the immediate deletion ,of the printout by pressing the CONTINUE softkey or cancel the delete operation by pressing the CANCEL softkey. When the deletion is completed the message ‘DELETION COMPLETED’ is returned. The printer is deleted when the last printout directed to it is deleted. PRINTER PORT: This softkey appears when the cursor is positioned on the EXT NUM field, The programmer can enter a valid DATASET number or press the PRINTER PORT softkey to enter Printer Port in the EXT NUM field. SMDR: This softkey defines the printout as an SMDR printout. CDE DATA: This softkey appears after the MORE softkey has been pressed. It defines the selected printout as a CDE DATA record, allowing the user to print the CDE programmable data to a specified printer. 210 4-124 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions DATA SMDR: This softkey defines the printout as a DATA SMDR. DATA SMDR is a record of internal data calls. ACD AGT SUM: This softkey appears after the MORE softkey has been pressed. Available only if system software contains ACD Option. Refer to Practice 9109-096-520-NA, AC/3 TELEMARKETER Application Package, for further information. ACD MONITORS: This softkey appears after the MORE softkey has been pressed. Available only if system software contains ACD Option. Refer to Practice 9109-095--52&NA, ACD TELEMARKETER Application Package, for further . information. ACD GRP SUMMARY: This softkey appears after the MORE softkey has been pressed. Available only if system software contains ACD Option. Refer to Practice 9109-095-52&NA, ACD TELEMARKETER Application Package, for further information. TRAFFIC: This softkey defines the printout as a Traffic Measurement report. MAINT LOGS: This softkey defines the printout as a Maintenance Log printout. HM WAKEUP: This softkey defines the printout as a report of Wakeup calls. HM AUDIT: This softkey defines the printout as an Audit report. PMS: This softkey appears only if Property Management System is enabled in the CDE System Options/System Timers form. When the programmer presses the PMS softkey, “PMS Port” appears in the PRINTOUTfield the AUTOPRlNTsoftkey appears. Pressing the AUTOPRINT softkey completes programming of the PMS port. MAI: This softkey appears only if Mite1 Application Interface is enabled in the CDE System Options/System Timers form. When the programmer presses the MAI softkey, “MAI” appears in the PRINTOUT field the AUTOPRINT softkey appears. Pressing the AUTOPRINT softkey completes programming of the MAI port (available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005). AUTOPRINT: The printout occurs automatically when a certain condition in the system is met. DIRECTED: The printout occurs at the user’s request. MONITOR: This softkey is available only if the PRINTOUT field is set to Maintenance Logs. The logs are printed as they occur. YES: Pressing YES guarantees the printing of the record. By default, the GUARANTEED field is set to NO. NO: This softkey appears if the GUARANTEED field has been set to YES. Pressing this softkey restores it to NO. The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, DELETE, TOP, BOlTOM, *MORp, QUIT are also provided. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 and 210 4-125 Customer Data Entrv Form 35 - Global Find Access Code 4.45 This form lists the access codes in the CDE database, including ARS Leading Digits. Callback Busy and Executive Busy Override are excluded, as they can only be dialed when receiving busy tone. This form exists to provide access code information conveniently to the user. Codes can be assigned, modified or deleted only in the appropriate forms. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001, : 16 PM ACCESS 0 II-JUN-9B alarm CODE DEFINED 1812 1813 1852 2101 2311 7 8 9 EEEi Data Station Data Station Data Station PBX Station Console ARS Leading ARS Leading ARS Leadlng AR'S Leading 1812 Data I BAY 2- S-QUIT 7-ACCESS q MAJOR CCT 1 1 1 2 2 El 82 85 El 01 Digit Digit Digit Digit Station l- status 1 CODE 88 El M/A 2 3- 4-TOP 5-BOTTOM B- 9- 0- Figure 4-52 Form 35 Layout Field Descriptions ACCESS CODE: This field lists all programmed access codes as assigned in numerical order by the first digits, for example 10, 111, 1210, 132, 20. DEFINED: This field lists the areas where access codes have been assigned. BAY, SLOT, CCTand SCT: These fields list the physical location of devices, and LDNs. . MULTIPLE APP.: This indicates if there are multiple appearances of number (LDNs or extension numbers) -this will be one of YES, NO or N/A. ‘Softkeys ACCESS CODE: Pressing the ACCESS CODE softkey displays ENTER ACCESS CODE prompt on the command line. Upon entering the access code and pressing the ENTER softkey, the code is then verified by the system. If the number entered is not presently used as an access code, the following message is displayed: The access code xxx does not exist. NEXT: This softkey is displayed when an unassigned number is entered at the ENTER ACCESS CODE prompt, and is cancelled. Pressing this softkey displays the next access code that exists numerically after the one requested. The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also provided. 210 4-126 Revision0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descridions Form 36 - Modem Assignment 4.46 This form assigns Pooled Modems to the system database. A Pooled Modem consists of a modem connected to an ONS or OPS circuit and a DATASET connected to a Digital Line Circuit. Each line of the form establishes the software association between the ONS or OPS circuit and the Digital Line Circuit for one Pooled Modem. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. :26 PM 3AY SLT ll-JUN-SE CCT CDN BAY SLT 2 El a2 2 01 a1 04 83 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 El El 81 El 01 El 01 01 alarm 05 06 87 08 89 1E 11 12 CCT EXTN TEN DTE COS COR MODE status DIAL COMMENTS 1 2 84 El 1120402 2 04 03 2401 2402 2403 1 1I 2 22 1 11 1 1I ORIG ALIT0 AUTO NON 1 04 2404 1 I 2 2 NON EXT S- 4- 5- 8- 9- E- 2 04 2 01 El6 0 L-MOVE ORIG ANS = MAJOR modem modem modern ic-1 gp gp gp 1 I 1 I 2-FIND 7-BAY/SLT/CCT Figure 4453 Form 36 Layout Field Descriptions BAY/SLT/CCT:The three left-most columns contain the BAY/SLT/CCT numbers of all unassigned ONS and OPS circuits. The system provides this information. CDN: A Circuit Descriptor Number (CDN) must be assigned to each DNIC device. The default CDN is 1. Circuit Descriptors are programmed in the CDE Data Circuit Descriptor Form. BAY/SLT/CCT: The second set of BAY/SLT/CCT columns lists the DNIC circuits associated with each ONS (or OPS) circuit. BAY/SLT/CCT numbers assigned here do not appear in the Data Assignment form or the Stations/SUPERSETTelephones form. EXTN: This column lists the extension numbers assigned to the pooled modems, TEN: This column lists the tenant numbers to which the pooled modems are assigned. The default tenant number is 1. DTE: This column lists the optional DTE Descriptor that applies to each pooled modem. The DTE Descriptor is needed for incoming or internal modem pooling calls that require a DTRX. DTE Descriptors are programmed in the CDE DTE Descriptor Form. 9109-09GYO-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 4-127 Customer Data Entry COS: This column lists the Class of Service (COS) of each pooled modem. The default COS is 1. COR: This column lists the Class of Restriction (COR) of each pooled modem. The default COR is 1. This is required because outgoing calls connect to trunks and are routed via ARS. MODE: This column lists the mode of operation for each modem. The options are ANSWER, ORIGINATE, or BOTH. The default is BOTH. DIAL: This column lists the auto-dial capability of each modem. The options ; are AUTODIAL or NON AUTODIAL. The default is NON AUTODIAL. COMMENTS: There is a COMMENTS field of 15 characters for each modem listed. Softkeys MOVE: This softkey relocates a device via its bay slot, and circuit numbers. When the MOVE softkey is pressed, the command line requests the FROM location (BAY SLOT CCT ). When the location is specified and the ENTER softkey is pressed, the command line requests the TO location. The new location is designated and the ENTER softkey is pressed. Note: Entering invalid numbers inhibits cursor movement. FIND EXT: This softkey locates a pooled modem by its extension number. ANSWER: This softkey appears when the cursor is on the MODE field. Pressing it enables the modem to operate in Answer mode only. NON AUTODIAL: This softkey appears when the cursor is on the DIAL column. Pressing it tells the system that the modem does not dial automatically. AUTODIAL: This softkey appears when the cursor is on the DIAL column. Pressing it tells the system that the modem can dial automatically. ORIGINATE: This softkey appears when the cursor is on the MODE field. Pressing it enables the modem to operate in Originate mode only. . BOTH: This softkey appears when the cursor is on the MODE field and the ANSWER .or ORIGINATE softkey has been pressed. Pressing the BOTH softkey enables the modem to operate in both Answer and Originate modes. DELETE FIELD: This softkey appears when the cursor is on the DTE field and a DTE Descriptor number has been entered. Pressing the-DELETE FIELD softkey restores the field to its default, blank. The standard softkeys CANCEL, BAY/SLT/CCT, ENTER, DELETE, TOP, BOTTOM, and QUIT are also provided. I 210 4-128 Revision0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descrintions Form 37 - Guest RM SUPERSET Keys Template 4.47 Form 37 (see Figure 4-54) provides 3 preprogrammed sets (templates) of Speed Dial and Feature Keys for Hotel/Motel guest room phones, In each COS, the programmer can enable one template which will apply to all S~PERSET 3DN, SUPERSET 4DN, SUPERSET 410, SUPERSET 420 and SUPERSET 430 telephones in that COS that have Room Status Applies enabled. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002. 2:29 PM TEMPLATE ll-JIJN-SE 1 status alarm KEY TYPE Speed Speed Do Not Override Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed E 04 05 06 t; a9 1E 11 12 05 SPEED Dial Dial Dist DIAL q MAJOR PRIVATE NLIMBER PRIVATE PRIVATE 95551221 95555552 Dial Dial Dial Dial Dial Dial Dial [pverrlde .- 2- 3-FEATURE 4-TEMPLATE i-QUIT 7-KEY &DELETE 9- Figure 4-!54 ND 50- Form 37 Layout Field Descriptions KEY: The SUPERSET3DN, SUPERSET4DN, SUPERSET410, SUPERSET420, and SUPERSET 430 Telephone column of line appearance keys are numbered from the bottom. Key 01 is the Prime Line key and cannot be re-programmed. This field cannot be changed. The form provides a line for each key. TYPE: This field lists the function of each key, either Speed Dial (the default) or a feature (e.g. Do Not Disturb). SPEED DIAL NUMBER: If the key is a Speed Dial key, the programmer enters the number here. PRIVATE: If the key is a Speed Dial key, the programmer can prevent the user from displaying the number by selecting the PRIVATE feature for this field. 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-129 Customer Data Entrv Softkeys FEATURE: Pressing following softkeys this softkey appear: AUTO ANSWER DO NOT DIST PRIVACY REL OVERRIDE PA PAGING * CAMPON MUSIC * Prior to Generic 1004, makes the set key a Feature Access key. The CALL FORWARD CALL PICKUP NIGHT ANSWER CALLBACK SWAP CALUATTN DATA DISC this is called PAGING. These softkeys are the same ones that appear in the nested Expand Set form of the Stations/SUPERSETTelephones form. Refer to Form 09 for more information. TEMPLATE NO: Pressing the TEMPLATE NO softkey prompts the user to “ENTER TEMPLATE NUMBER:“. Valid template numbers are 1,2 and 3. When avalid template number is entered, the new template form is displayed. KEY: Pressing this key prompts the key number is 2 - 12. the user to “ENTER KEY NUM:“. The valid range for PRIVATE: This softkey appears when a speed dial number has been entered and the cursor is on the PRIVATE field. Pressing this key makes a non-private speed dial number private. When a speed dial number is entered under the SPEED DIAL NUMBER column, just tab overtothe PRIVATE column and press the PRlVATEsoftkey to make the number private. The word PRIVATE will appear under the PRIVATE column. NON PRlVATE: This softkey appears when the cursor is on the PRIVATE field of a line containing a private speed number non-private. The standard 210 4-130 softkeys dial number. Pressing this key makes a private speed dial CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER and QUIT are also provided. Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Form 38 - ACD Keys Template 4.48 The ACD KEYS TEMPLATE FORM provides up to 3 different function key configurations for each ACD position: Agent, Supervisor and Senior Supervisor. In each COS, however, only one template for one position type can be enabled. Line appearance keys assigned in the StationslSUPERSET Telephones form have priority over ACD Feature keys. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. 2:33 PM AGENT ll-JUW-9Ei alarm [I] KEY 82 83 84 05 06 87 08 89 :Y :z 84 TYPE Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Make Queue Speed Dpeed SPEED Dial Dial Dial Dial Dial Dial Dial Dial Dial Busy Status Dial DIAL status NLMBER = MAJOR PRIVATE 955522 12 8888 95564411 Dial 95554411 I-AGENT 2-SUPERVISOR 3-SENIOR 4- 5- S-QUIT 7-KEY B-DELETE 9- E- Figure 4-455 Form 38 Layout Field Descriptions The Header lists the ACD position to which the template applies and the template number (1,2 or 3). Key: This field lists the Line Select keys, The keys are numbered on the set from bottom to top. Key 01, the Prime Line key, is not shown because it cannot be reprogrammed. . Type: This field lists the function of each key. The default is Speed Dial. Speed Dial Number: This field lists the Speed Dial number for each Speed Dial key. Private: The word Private in this field indicates the Speed Dial number is private and cannot be displayed at the set. Softkeys AGENT: Pressing the AGENT softkey prompts the user to enter an agent template number “ENTER AGENT TEMPLATE NUMBER: “. When a valid template number (l-3) is entered, the selected agent keys template is displayed. The title line is updated with the agent template number. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-131 I Customer Data Entrv SUPERVISOR: Pressing the SUPERVISOR softkey prompts the user to enter a supervisor template number “ENTER SUPERVISOR TEMPLATE NUMBER:“. When a valid template number (i-3) is entered, the selected supervisor keys template is displayed. The title line is updated with the supervisor template number. SENIOR: Pressing the SENIOR softkey prompts the user to enter a senior supervisor template number “ENTER SENIOR SUPERVISOR TEMPLATE NUMBER: “. When a valid template number (l-3) is entered, the selected senior supervisor keys template is displayed. The title line is updated with the senior supervisor template number. ACIJ KEYS: Pressing the ACD KEYS softkey provides a set of softkeys used to assign ,ACD feature keys to the set’s Line Select keys. The feature keys presented depend on the type of keys template being programmed. All templates have a QUEUE STATUS key available. In addition, an Agent template can have a MAKE BUSY key and a Supervisor template can have an AGENT STATUS key. Both the SUPERVISOR and SENIOR SUPERVISOR can be provided with a SHIFT key. KEY: Pressing the KEY softkey prompts the user to enter a key number a valid line key number is entered, displays the line, ready for editing. (2-15). When the cursor points to that line. The command line PRIVATE: Pressing the PRIVATE softkey makes the programmed Speed Dial number private. NON PRIVATE: Pressing number The standard 210 4-132 the NON PRIVATE softkey makes a private Speed Dial non-private. softkeys QUIT and DELETE are also provided. Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Form 39 - ACD Agent Groups 4.49 The ACD AGENT GROUPS CDE form lists the agents in each ACD group. It cannot be accessed unless the “ACD Enable” system option is enabled. The title line contains the agent group number and name. Entries in this form are sorted by ID. See Figure 4-56. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96. :37 PM II-JUN-93 [ACDGRP: alarm 1 i GRP NAME &-QUIT 2-FIND 7-AGENT ID GROUP q AGENT NAME AGENT ID j-l 114 l-ACD status MARY All. MbJOR ; cos 28 &ADD 4-TOP S-BOTTOM G-DELETE '&OPTIONS 0- Figure 4-66 Form 39 Layout Field Descriptions The header shows the ACD Group Number, and ACD Group Name. AGENT ID: This field lists the Agent ID. This is an access code that identifies the agent to the system. The form lists the Agents in numerical order by Agent ID. . AGENT NAME: This field lists the Agent Name. Use of this field is optional, but recommended. COS: This field lists the Agent’s Class of Service. Softkeys ACD GRP NAME: Pressing the ACD GRP NAME key displays ENTER ACD GROUP NAME : on the command line. This softkey appears only if there is at least one agent in the group, because a group cannot exist without members. The name can be up to 8 characters long. FIND ID: Pressing the FIND ID key displays ENTER AGENT ID : on the command line. The system searches the data base for the requested agent. If found, the group containing this agent is displayed with the cursor pointing at the agent, 9109-09~21O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 4-133 Customer Data Entrv ADD: Pressing the ADD key permits the programmer to enter the information needed to add an agent to the displayed group. When the Agent ID has been entered, the ENTER softkey appears. Optionally, the programmer can fill in the Agent Name and COS fields priorto pressing the ENTER softkey. If nothing is entered, the name defaults to blanks and the COS to 1. The added agent will appear in the correct position in the sot-ted list. If the agent is already assigned to another agent group, the system warns the programmer on the command line and asks the programmer to CONFIRM or CANCEL the entry via softkeys. If the programmer confirms it, any previous group assignment for that agent is deleted. Agents can be reassigned in this way at any time, even while the agent is active. When reassigning an agent, only the ID field should be filled-in. The NAME and COS fields will be filled automatically when the ENTER.key is pressed. AGENTGROUP: PressingtheAGENTGROUPsoftkeydisplaysENTERACDGROUP NUM: on the command group is displayed. line. When the ACD Group OPTIONS: Pressing the OPTIONS not provided The standard key displays number the Options is entered, the requested sub-form. This softkey is if the group is empty. DELETE, TOP, BOTTOM and QUIT are also provided. softkeys Options Subform for Form 39 4.50 For each Agent Group a set of options can be set to control environment (see Figure 4-67). Note: This form is not available Generic 1002, Generic 1 005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. 2:37 PM [ACDGRP: II-JUN-98 alarm ] 1 Afterwork Timer (t&i:SS) Overflow Timer (MM:SS) First Status Threshold Second Status Threshold After-work Timer OPTIONS status the ACD Group in Generic 1001, q MAJOR SThTUS 8:ElEl 9:08 3:80 6:EE (MM:SS) (W:SS) (MM:%) l- 2- i-QUIT ?- Figure 4-57 Option Subform Layout 210 4-134 Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue1 nnI CDE Form Descriptions Field Descriptions OPTIONS: This field displays the Option name. For options that have a numerical value, the format and units of measure are given in brackets (e.g. MM:SS for minutes:seconds). STATUS: This field displays the current setting of the option. Softkeys The standard softkey QUIT is provided. Parameters Afterwork Timer: After an ACD call has ended, this timer provides a time period for the Agent to complete paperwork. The Agent will receive no ACD calls during this period. The timer has a range of 0O:OOto 1500. The default is 0O:OO. Overflow Timer: This timer specifies the maximum time a call can wait for answer in this ACD Group. When the time period has elapsed, the call is sent to the Overflow destination, The timer has a range of 0O:OOto 54:00 (MinutesSeconds). The default is 0O:OO. First Status Threshold: This threshold time provides a visual indication to the Supervisor that the system has reached a defined level of activity. When any call has waited for the defined time period, the supervisor’s Queue Status LCD shows a light circle in a dark square. The threshold has a range of 0O:OOto 54:OO(MinutesSeconds). The default is 03:OO.The First Threshold time must be less than the Second Threshold time. Second Status Threshold: This threshold time provides a visual indication to the Supervisor that the system has reached a defined level of activity. This is a higher level of activity than the First Status Threshold represents. When any call has waited for the defined time period, the supervisor’s Queue Status LCD shows a dark square. The threshold has a range of 0O:OOto 54:00 (Minutes:Seconds). The time must exceed that defined for the First Status Threshold. 9109-09&21O-NA Issue1 Revision 0 210 4-135 Customer Data Entry Form 40 - ACD Supervisors 4.51 The ACD SUPERVISORS form shows the ID numbers and names of ACD senior supervisors. A subform lists the supervisors. These forms cannot be accessed unless the “ACD Enable” system option is enabled. Refer to Figure 4-58. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. :4E PM ll-JUN-9Ei ACD SENIOR alarm SUPERVISOR ID CODES 301 302 303 /I303 l-FIND GROUP ?-QUIT P-FIND SUPER 7- Figure 468 status q NAME MAJOR cos J. NAN-TILL 21 E. 0. LEGAULT FELSBG ;: D. FELSBG 21 3-ADD 4-TOP 5-BOlTOM B-DELETE g-EXPAND 0- Form 40 Layout Field Descriptions SENIOR SUPERMSOR IDS: This field lists the Senior Supervisor ID codes. The form is sorted by ID code. NAME: Senior supervisor and supervisor names are carried to the set where they log on. Their ID’s are used for logging on. . COS: This field specifies the Class of Service of each Senior Supervisor. The range is 1 to 50. Softkeys FIND GROUP: The FIND GROUP softkey displays ENTER ACD GROUP NUM: on the command line. When the group number is entered, the requested group is displayed. If the requested group is assigned to a senior supervisor, that senior supervisor’s sub-form is shown, with the cursor pointing at the requested group. FIND SUPER: The FIND SUPER softkey displays ENTER SUPERVISOR OR SENIOR SUPERVISOR ID : on the command line. The data base is searched for this senior supervisor or supervisor ID. If the requested senior supervisor exists, the top level form is shown, with the cursor pointing at the requested ID. If the requested supervisor exists, the sub-form is shown, with the cursor pointing at the requested ID. 210 4-136 Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions ADD: This softkey appears upon entry to the form and is used to add additional senior supervisors to the form. When assigning an agent as a Senior Supervisor, only the ID field needs to be filled in. The NAME field will be filled automatically when the ENTER key is pressed. When the ADD softkey is pressed, the form is in the ADD mode. To leave ADD mode, use the QUIT softkey. EXPAND: The EXPAND softkey displays the Expand sub-form, which lists all the groups of the supervisors under the current senior supervisor. The sub-form is sorted by supervisor ID code. All groups reporting directly to the Senior Supervisor are listed at the end of the form in order of group number. The standard DELETE, TOP, BOTTOM and QUIT are also provided. softkeys Expand Sub-form for Form 40 4.52 For each Groups desired EXPAND senior supervisor, this form, shown in Figure 4-59, and their supervisors. The programmer positions Senior Supervisor in the ACD Senior Supervisors softkey. ’ 3:Ol PM II-JUN-99 GRPS alarm OF E. LEGAULT 382 SUPER 12 10 2 1 . GROUP &QUIT ID 107 108 189 NO SUPER 187 P l-FIND lists the assigned ACD the line pointer at the form and Dresses the P-FIND SUPER (7- 3-BDD 4-TOP G-DELETE 9-NO status SUPER = MAJOR NAME COS H. FERGSON C. BRAZEALl C.J.CHAT 21 2B 20 H. 21 FERGSON 5-BOTTOM SUPER B- Figure 4-59 Expand Subform Layout Field Descriptions The subform header shows the senior supervisor’s name and ID. If the senior supervisor has no name programmed, the header will show the senior supervisor’s number. GRPS OF: This field lists the Agent Groups groups bottom 9109-09621O-NA reporting to the Senior Supervisor. All reporting directly to the Senior Supervisor (with no Supervisor) are listed at the of the form, sorted by Agent Group number. Groups that have Supervisors are issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-137 Customer Data Entrv sorted by Supervisor ID. Groups with the same Supervisor are sorted by Agent Group number. SUPER ID: This field lists the Supervisor ID number for each Supervisor under the Senior Supervisor. If a group has no supervisor, the field displays NO SUPER. SUPER NAME: The Supervisor’s name can be programmed in this column. It can be up to 10 characters long; it must not begin with the character I*“. COS: This field lists the Class of Service of each Supervisor. ; ,Softkeys FIND GROUP: The FIND GROUP softkey displays ENTER ACD GROUP NUM: on the command line. When the group number is entered, the requested group is displayed. If the requested group is assigned to a senior supervisor, that senior supervisor’s sub-form is shown, with the cursor pointing at the requested group. FIND SUPER: The FIND SUPER softkeydisplays ENTER SUPERVISOROR SENIOR SUPERVISOR ID : on the command line. If the requested senior supervisor exists, the top level form is shown, with the cursor pointing at the requested ID. If the requested supervisor exists, the sub-form is shown, with the cursor pointing at the requested ID. ADD: Pressing the ADD key assigns a group and its supervisor to the displayed senior supervisor. Any previous assignment for that group is deleted. Groups can be reassigned at any time, even while active. NO SUPER: The NO SUPER key assigns the Agent Group directly to the Senior Supervisor; the group has no Supervisor. The standard softkeys DELETE, TOP, BOlTOM and QUIT are also provided. 210 4-138 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriotions Form 41 - ACD Path 4.53 This CDE form defines routing for ACD calls. It cannot be accessed unless the “ACD Enable” System option is enabled. Each path has its own form. Note: This form is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1005 FPKGI or Generic 1005 LIT96. 3:82 PM II-JUN-98 alarm status q MAJOR .._ [ ACD PATH: \ 1 1 OPTIOMS Access Code For This ACD Primary AGD Agent Group Delay For Ringback (MM:%) Recording 1 : Start Time Access Code Music Source Recording 2 : Start Time hceess Code Music Source Recording 3 : Start Time Access Code MUSIC Source Path Access Path Code For This .- 2- ;-QUIT 7-AGD KD STATUS . (W:SS) Following (MM:SS) Following (EIM:SS) Follulling PATH 11 3- 4- 5- 8- 9- @- Figure 4-60 Form 41 Layout Field Descriptions The header displays the ACD Path number and name. OPTIONS: The Options field lists the programmable timers and options for the ACD Path. STATUS: The status field is the only field that can be edited; however, no fields on an ACD path can be edited without first assigning the “Access Code For This ACD Path”, and the “Primary ACD Agent Group” (the first two lines on the form). Softkeys PATH NAME: The PATH NAME softkey displays ENTER PATH NAME: on the command line. When the name (up to 8 characters) is entered, it appears on the form top line, beside the path number. This softkey appears only after the first two lines of the form are both filled. ACD PATH: Pressing the ACD PATH softkey displays on the command line. This softkey either both filled or both empty. appears whenever ENTER ACD PATH NUMBER: the first two lines of the form are DELETE PATH: Pressing the DELETE PATH softkey displays the CANCEL and CONFIRM softkeys. Pressing CONFIRM deletes the ACD path. Pressing CANCEL restores the softkeys without deleting the ACD Path. 9109-096-21O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-139 Customer Data Entry DELETE FIELD: Blanks the current status field. DROP CALL: Appears only when the cursor is in the “interflow -the Point Access Code” line STATUS will be set to “DROP CALL”. YES/NO: Enables / disables the “Allow Overflow “Interflow Enabled” to Interflow Point Before Timeout” or parameters. Parameters ACD PATH PARAMETERS Access Code For This ACD Path Primary ACD Agent Group Delay For Ringback (MM:SS) Recording 1 : Start Time (MM:SS) Access Code Music Source Following Recording 2 : Start Time (MM:SS) Access Code Music Source Following Recording 3 : Start Time (MM:SS) Access Code Music Source Following Recording 4 : Start Time (MMSS) Access Code Music Source Following Overflow 1 Agent Group Overflow 2 Agent Group Overflow 3 Agent Group Interflow Enabled Inter-flow Timeout (MM:SS) Interflow Point Access Code (Default = DROP CALL) Allow Overflow to Inter-flow Point Before Timeout Priority Service Time Access Code For This ACD Path and Primary ACD Agent Group must be defined to establish an ACD Path. Until this is done, no other options Delay For Ringback (MM:SS): Allows connected the caller to hear can be edited. ringback before being to an agent. Recording n: Start Time (MM:SS) is counted from when a caller has finished the Delay For Ringback period. The range of this timer is 0O:OO to 54:O0. Recording I must be defined before Recording 2, Recording 2 before Recording 3, Recording 3 before Recording 4. For example, the programmer cannot edit “Recording 3: Start Time”, unless “Recording 2” and “Recording 1” are both defined. If is pressed from a blank “Recording n: Start Time” field, the cursor moves to “Overflow 1 Agent Group”. Each recording’s start time must be later than the preceding recording’s start time. 210 4-140 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Recording n: Access Code must be an access code for a Recording Hunt Group. The programmer cannot make an entry for this option until a Start Time is defined for the recording. Once a recording start time is entered, the programmer can only move back and forth between the Start Time and Access Code fields for that recording, until both fields are filled or deleted (by the DELETE FIELD key). PATH NAME, ACD PATH, and DELETE PATH keys are removed during this time too. ._ Music Source Following defines, for each recording, an ONS port to which the caller will be connected when the recording ends. The ONS port is permanently off-hook with a music source connected. The caller stays connected until the call is answered or another scheduled recording plays. If no music source is defined, the Music on Hold source is used. If this is not provided, the caller receives silence. Overflow 1 Agent Group must be defined before Overflow 2 Agent Group, Overflow 2 Agent Group before Overflow 3 Agent Group. If is pressed from a blank “Overflow X Agent Group”, the user is positioned at the “Interflow Timeout” field. Interflow Enabled, when set to YES, allows the waiting ACD call to exit ACD and be answered at a defined Interflow Point. Default is NO. Interflow Timeout (MM:SS) specifies when a waiting ACD call should be directed to the Interflow Point. The timer has a range of 0O:Ol to 54:O0. The default is 54 minutes. Interflow Point Access Code can be an extension number, another ACD Path, a Hunt Group (including a UCD Agent Hunt Group), a System Abbreviated Dial number, Night Bells or DROP CALL. Priority for the ACD Path has a range of 1 (highest priority) to 99. Calls are answered in order of priority. Default priority is 99. Service Time: Defines a standard time to answer, used in the measurement of ACD path performance. Statistics can be seen from the ACD Path Monitors and Path Summary Reports (see Practice 9109-09&620-NA, ACD TELEMA/?KETER Application Package). Can be set from 1 second to 54 minutes. 9109-09~21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-141 Customer Data Entrv Form 42 - Tl Link Descriptors 4.54 The Tl Link Descriptors define the parameters that control the behavior of each Tl link. The form provides IO programmable descriptors. The main form displays the number of users of each descriptor. A 20-character comment field is provided for each descriptor. Note: This form is unavailable in Generic 1001 and Generic 1002. 3:83 PM II-JUN-9Ei alarm DESCRIPTOR > LINK El1 El2 03 E 86 x;: 09 10 TYPE Tl Tl Tl Tl Tl Tl Tl Tl Tl Tl DSl DSI DSI DSl DSI DSl DSl DSI DSl DSI Tl DSl NUMBER OF LINKS status ASSIGNED = MAJOR COMVENTS e I- I El 0 l- 2- 3- 6-QUIT 7- 8-SEL. OPTION 4- 5- 9- 0- Figure 4-61 Form 42 Layout Field Descriptions DESCRIPTOR: This field lists the Descriptor numbers. It cannot LINKTYPE: This field lists the type of link for each descriptor. This field cannot be changed. Only Tl DSl is available. NUMBER OF LINKS ASSIGNED: This field lists the number descriptor in the Tl Link Assignment of links assigned this form. COMMENTS: This 2O-oharacter system be edited. field is provided does not use this information. for the programmer’s notes, The Softkeys SEL. OPTION: Pressing the SELECT Options subform for the descriptor OPTION softkey displays on the command line. the Link Descriptor REVIEW: Pressing descriptor 0. the REVIEW softkey displays the Review List subform for the on the command line. This appears only if the number of links is greater than The standard 210 4-142 softkey QUIT is also provided. Revision 0 9109-096-210+/A Issue 1 rm I CDE Form Descriptions link Descriptor Options Subform for Form 42 Note: Altering this form may have side effects on Tl links in operation. 3:84 PM [ LINK Il-JUN-9B DESCRIPTOR alarm NUMBER Alarm debounce timer f3EZS zero code suppression Slip rate - maintenance Slip rate - service limit Slip rate - network sync BER - maintenance limit EER - service limit Framing losses - maintenance Framing losses - service RTS timer - service limit RTS timer - net slip limit RTS timer - after alarm .- Alarm debounce i-QUIT : 1 ] limit GOING ( 300 - 3200 ( ( limit ( ( 10*+-n J n = ( ( lB**-n n q ( limij. ( limit ( eMceeded ( exceeded ( ( timer 7- IN/OUT E - 9EBE 0 - 9000 0 - 9880 3,4,5,6 3,4,5,6 0 - 9888 0 - 9880 I - 255 I - 255 0 - 308 ( 300 a- status VALUE ms > 2500 NO 255 ;7000 ) /24 hrs ) /24 hrs ) J24 hrs )) / hour )) / hour > /24 hrs ) /24 hrs min ) min ) set ) - 3288 ='MAJDR ms i 3 255 9000 30 30 10 12588 ) 9- o- Figure 4-62 Link Descriptor Options Subform Layout Field Descriptions The Header line displays the Link Descriptor number and the direction of the link. Value: This field lists the selected value for each parameter. Softkeys YES/NO: This softkey appears only when the command line displays the B8ZS Zero Code Suppression parameter. (All other parameters require numeric entries and have no softkeys). Pressing the softkey changes the state of the parameter. If the parameter is set to YES, the softkey is NO, if the parameter is set to NO, the softkey is YES. CONFIRM: This softkey appears when an option value has been changed. Press the CONFIRM softkey to enter the change in the database. The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER and QUIT are also provided. Parameters Alarm Debounce Timer: The Alarm Debounce Timer defines the length of time a fault condition must be present before it is reported to the main controller, and the link is removed from service. The range of the timer is 300 to 3200 ms. The reportable fault conditions are: l Failure of power supply l Loss of incoming signals at 1544 Kbps 9109-096-21O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-143 Customer Data Entrv l Loss of frame alignment (synchronization) l Alarm indication received from the remote end B8ZS Zero Code Suppression: Special encoding is used when a data byte for a channel contains consecutive bits of the same level. There are two of these line code options available: Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) and Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS). In AMI, a 1 is transmitted as a pulse and a 0 is transmitted as no pulse. Consecutive I’s are sent as pulses of opposite polarity. If a channel data byte contains .’ .all O’s, bit 2 is forced to a 1. In B8ZS encoding, consecutive 1‘s are sent as pulses of opposite polarity, as in AMI. A block of eight O’s is replaced by a special eight bit ; sequence. Slip Rate Limits: Slip is the deletion or repetition of a single frame of information in a digital bit stream. There are 3 slip rate limits: maintenance, service and network. The slip rate limit is between 0 and 9000 slips over a 24 hour period. BER Limits: BER is the Bit Error Rate over the last hour. There are 2 BER rate limits: maintenance and service. The bit error rate limit is between IO*-3 (1 error per 1000 bits) and IO**--5 (1 error per 1,OOO,OOO bits) over a 24 hour period. Framing Loss Limits: Framing loss occurs when the digital trunk cannot find the proper framing bit sequence in the incoming bit stream. It is thus unable to ensure correct decoding of the channels. There are 2 framing loss limits maintenance and service. The framing loss error rate is between 0 and 9000 losses over a 24 hour period. Limit Definitions Maintenance: When a maintenance limit is exceeded, the system generates a maintenance log. Service: When a service limit is exceeded, the system generates a maintenance log and removes the link from service. Slip Rate - Network Sync Limit: When this limit is exceeded, the system generates a maintenance log and selects a new sync source. . RTS Timer-Service Limit Exceeded: This timer specifies the minimum time for which the link is removed from service after aservice limit has been exceeded. When thetimer expires, the link is returned to service only if the error rate on the link is less than 1/24th the maintenance limit. The range of the timer is 1 to 255 minutes. RTS Timer -Net Slip Limit Exceeded: This timer specifies the minimum time for which the link is removed as the sync source after the net slip limit has been exceeded. When the timer expires, the link is again available to the system as a sync source only if the number of slips on the link is less than the net slip limit. The range of the timer is 1 to 255 minutes. RTS Timer-After Alarm: This timer specifies how long the link will remain unavailable after an alarm condition has cleared. 210 4-144 Revision0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue1 CDE Form Descriptions Review List Subform for Form 42 4.55 The review form provides a list of users for each descriptor, identified by their physical location . There are no fields that the programmer can edit. See Figure 4-63 for the form layout. 2:59 PM alarm 1%JUL-90 status q MAJOR Figure 4-63 Review List Subform Layout Field Descriptions The header line identifies the link descriptor being reviewed. BAY, SLOT: These fields list the bay and slot location of the Tl trunk cards using this link descriptor. Comments: The text in this field comes from the Comments field of Form 43, Tl Link Assignment. 9109-09&21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-145 Customer Data Entry Form 43 - Tl link Assignment 4.56 Form 43 (see Figure 4-54) assigns one of the ten link descriptors to each link. Note: This form is unavailable in Generic 1001 and Generic 1002. Altering this form may have side effects on Tl links in operation. 3:33 PM II-JUN-9B TRUNK TYPE alarm BAY SLOT 01 06 01 06 LINK 0 DESC status = MAJOR COMMENTS NUM 03 Tl CO 03 Tl CO l- z- 3- 4- 5- 6-QUIT 7- &DELETE 9- 0- Figure 4-64 Form 43 Layout Field Descriptions TRUNK TYPE: This field cannot be edited. BAY, SLOT: This field lists the Bay and Slot location of theT1 trunk cards in the system. LINK DESC NUM: This field lists the Link Descriptor COMMENTS: The comments . that applies to each Tl trunk card. field can store 15 characters. Softkeys CONFIRM: This softkey appears when an option value has been changed. CONFIRM The standard 210 4-146 softkey to enter the change softkeys Press the in the database. ENTER and QUIT are also provided. Revision 0 9109-09621O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Form 44 - Tl Network Sync 4.57 This form, shown in Figure 4-65, determines the order in which the links will be used as the network synchronization clock source. When the error threshold of the first clock source is crossed, the second clock is used as the sync source, etc. Note: This form is unavailable in Generic 1001 and Generic 1002. Altering this form may have side effects on Tl links in operation. 136 PM li-JUN-90 alarm DESCRIPTION \ > First Second Third Fourth Fifth Sixth Seventh Eighth clock clock clock clock clock clock clock clock source source source source source source source source BAY SLOT 1 06 status = MAJOR COt+iENTS Main Link To. Link To. < I + First clock source [1 1 06 I Main L- 2- 3- 4- 5- I-QUIT 7- &DELETE S- 0- Figure 4-65 Form 44 Layout Field Descriptions DESCRIPTION: This field lists the clock sources, first through eighth, for system synchronization to the Tl network. This field cannot be edited. BAY, SLOT: This field lists the Bay/Slot location of the Tl trunk cards in the system. LINK DESC NUM: This field lists the Link Descriptor that applies to each Tl trunk card. COMMENTS: The comments field can store 16 characters. Softkeys CONFIRM: This softkey appears when an option value has been changed, followed by the QUIT softkey. Press the CONFIRM softkey to enter the change in the database and exit the form. The standard softkeys ENTER, DELETE and QUIT are also provided. 9109-096210-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-147 Customer Data Entry Form 45 - Key System Telephones 4.58 This form assigns keys system telephones to the system. See Figure 4-66 for the form layout. Note: This form is available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005 only. 3:46 PM BAY SLT II-JUN-90 q TEN EXTN COS COR TYPE PPGE N&ME 1 1 1 1 1 1 2407 1804 1806 1807 1808 1689 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 420 410 DN DN 410 420 DN 420 410 01 01 01 i: El TINA 3. SONJA S. CARALEE 6. CHANT&L HEATHER C. CONNIE L. R. Coach R. Coach R. Coach R. Coach Corp. Ext. El CONNIE Ext. 88 08 08 88 88 E8 88 08 08 03 04 06 07 08 09 IE 11 12 2 2 84 04 84 06 05 07 88 09 ASSOC MAJOR CCWIENTS Ei DN lBE9 2 l-MOVE Z-FIND EXT 6-QUIT 7+AY/SLT/CCT I status CCT 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 alarm t 01 3 420 3-EXPAND SET B-DELETE L. 4-DEVICE TYPE g-REVIEW S-RANGE E- Figure 4G6 Form 45 Layout Field Descriptions BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields list the physical location number of each SUPERSET telephone. They are generated by the system based PROGRAMMED field of Form 01, System Configuration. on what was entered in the This field cannot be modified. TEN: This field lists the Tenant Group number for each SUPERSETtelephone. tenant number EXTN: This telephone. . is one. field lists the Intercom Line extension COS: This field lists the Class-of-Service Default COS number is I. number COR: This field lists the Class-of-Restriction Default COR number is I. number number Note: For a SUPERSETDSS module, of each SUPERSET for each SUPERSETtelephone. for each SUPERSE~telephone. TYPE: When a SUPERSETtelephone is being programmed, SET. For a SUPERSET 4DN programmed as an enhanced displayed. Default the TYPE field displays sub-attendant, SUB is BLF is displayed. For Generic 1005, the following differences apply to the TYPE field: When a SUPERSET3DN or a SUPERSET4DN telephone is being programmed, the TYPE field displays DN. For a SUPERSET4DN or a SUPERSET programmed as an enhanced sub-attendant, SUB is displayed. When a SUPERSET 401 is being 210 4-148 Revision 0 9109-096-210-+/A Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions programmed, 401 is displayed. For a SUPERSET 410, 410 is displayed. For a is displayed. When a SUPERSET430is being programmed, 430 is displayed. SUPERSET420,420 PAGE: Shows the paging group that the telephone is in (the default is a blank field no paging group). Valid entry is a number between 1 and 50. NAME: This field is reserved for a set name up to IO characters long. The name’s first letter must NOT be *. ASSOC: Associates the device in the TYPE field with another device. A SUPERSET telephone can be associated with a modem (enter the ONS port extension number), and a SUPERSET DSS module can be associated with an attendant console, subattendant or a SUPERSETtelephone (enter the extension number). A modem may be associated with more than one SUPERSETtelephone, but a SUPERSETtelephone may be associated with only one modem. Two SUPERSET DSS modules can be associated to the same device, but a SUPERSETDSSmodule can be associated with only one device. For further information, refer to Practice 9109-095-I 05-NA, Features Description, under Associated Modem Line, Busy Lamp Field, or Line Types and Appearances. The device in the TYP field device may be disassociated with the device in the ASSOC field simply by entering another device extension number, or erasing the existing extension number (enter a space). Note: This field is updated automatically if the extension number of the associated device is changed. COMMENTS: This field is reserved for additional data (a maximum of 15 characters). It is stored by the system but not used. Softkeys MOVE: This softkey relocates a device via its bay slot, and circuit numbers. When the MOVE softkey is pressed, the command line requests the FROM location (BAY: SLOT CCT ). When the location is specified and the ENTER softkey is pressed, the command line requests the TO location. The new location is designated and the ENTER softkey is pressed. Note entering invalid numbers inhibits cursor movement. . FIND EXT: This softkey selects a device by its extension number. Pressing the FIND EXTsoftkey displays the ENTER EXTENSION NUM: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering an extension number of the Intercom Line number of a SUPERSETtelephone. The selected device information appears on the command line. EXPAND SET: Pressing this softkey disptays the Expand Set subform. Referto Expand Set Subform. RANGE: This softkey facilitates block programming for key system telephones. Pressing this softkey displays the prompt: FROM BAY: SLOT CIRCUIT:. Enter valid Bay, Slot and Circuit numbers for the first device and press the ENTER softkey. The system then prompts TO BAY: SLOT CIRCUIT. Enter valid Bay, Slot and Circuit numbers for the last device and press the ENTER softkey. Enter Tenant Group, Extension Number, COS and COR for the first device, if this has not been done already. Press the ENTER softkey. The system automatically assigns incremented extension 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 210 4-149 Customer Data Entry numbers, the same COS, COR and Tenant Group numbers to the rest of the devices in the block. Note: A range program cannot be done over a SUPERSETDSS module circuit. REVIEW: Presents 2 more softkeys: SETAPP: Displays a new form - refer to Review (SetApp) Subform. This form lists all programmed appearances of the selected extension number on other SUPERSETtelephones. This key appears only when a device has been defined. PAGING GROUP: Displays a new form - refer to Review (Paging Group) Sgbform. This form lists all of the sets in the paging group. \ DEVICE TYPE: Allows the line circuit to be programmed as a specific device type. This softkey appears only when a DNIC circuit is not programmed (only the BAY, SLT, CCT and TYP fields have entries). Programming any other fields “freezes” the device type at its current value. After this, only the fields valid for that device type are available. The following softkeys are presented after pressing the DEVICE TYPE softkey: BLF: Sets the TYPE field to BLF and designates the device type as a SUPERSET DSS module. SUB All’: Sets the TYPE field to SUB and designates the device type as an Enhanced Subattendant. For further information, see Subattendant - Enhanced Functions, in Practice 9109-096-l 05NA, Features Description. SET: Sets the TYPE field to SET and designates the device type as a normal SUPERSETBDN or SUPERSET4DN key system telephone. Note: For Generic 1005 only, the DEVICETYPE softkey allows the linecircuitto as one of: SUB AT, BLF, 3/4DN, SS401, SS410, SS420 or SS430. be programmed 3/4DN: Sets the TYPE field to DN and designates the device type as a SUPERSET 3DN or a SUPERStr4DN. SS401: Sets the TYPE field to 401 and designates the device type as a SUPERSET 401. SS410: Sets the TYPE field to 410 and designates the device type as a SUERSET 410. SS420: Sets the TYPE field to 420 and designates the device type as a SUERSET 420. SS430: Sets the TYPE field to 430 and designates the device type as a SUPERSET 430. The device type can be changed by deleting all of the programmed entries - the DEVICE TYPE softkey will then reappear. The standard softkeys BAY/SLT/CCT, CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, *MORN QUIT are also provided. 210 4-150 9109-096-21 O-NA and issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Expand Set Subform for Form 45 4.59 This form appears when the EXPAND SET softkey is pressed in the Key System Telephones form. It is used to program SUPERSETtelephones line appearances and feature keys. Refer to Figure 4-67 for the form layout. Note: This form is not available to SUPERSET401. 3:53 PM II-JUN-90 KEY *01 02 93 EM 85 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 86 l-BOTH alarm TYPE Intercom CO Line CO Line Grp Busy Lamp Do Not Dist Key Speed Dial Speed Dial Speed Dial Speed Dial Speed Dial Speed Dial Key 0 WM 2-IN 6-QUIT 7-KEY DIR RING SEC 1nfout It-l/out O/G Immed Immed None No No No No DSS EXT NIJM TRK No 2101 I/C None No 2101 B-DELETE LABEL . 2101 No ONLY MAJOR q 10 9 None 3-OUT ACC 2407 I/C ONLY status 4-LINE PREF g-REVIEW 5B- Figure 4-67 Expand Set Subform Layout Field Descriptions The asterisk (*) indicates the line preference for the set-see LINE PREF softkey below. KEY: This field lists the SUPERSETTelephone Line Select key numbers and cannot be modified. If the expanded set is one of 2 SUPERSETDSS modules associated with another device, the key numbers are preceded by a 1 or a 2, indicating that the module is the first or second module associated with that device. . Note: The SUPERSET has 6 programmablekeys; SUPERSET420and SUPERSET each have 12 programmable keys. The error message “invalid key for set in use” will appear if the user attempts to program keys 7 to 12 of a SUPERSET 10 which has been installed on a circuit which as been programmed for a SUPERSET or a SUPERSET430. TYPE: This field lists the key function. If it is a Speed Dial key, the default assignment, the words “Speed Dial” are shown. If it is a line appearance, the line type is shown. If it is a feature key, the feature name is shown. If the line is a BLF Appearance or a DSS Key, the key type is “Busy Lamp”. To change the type of an assigned key, the existing assignment must be deleted. Key 1 defaults to the Intercom line and cannot be deleted or modified. Refer to Practice 9109-096-I 05-NA, Features Description, for details on line types. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-151 CustomerData Entry DIR: If the key is a line appearance, the directional variant of the line (In/Out, O/G or I/C) is shown. RING: If the key is a line appearance, the ringing variant of the line (Immed, Delay, or None) is shown. SEC: If the key is a line appearance, this field indicates (Yes or No) whether the secretarial variant is enabled. For a Busy Lamp key, setting this field to YES causes an immediate release when the DSS key is pressed. DSS.: A YES in this field indicates that the key is a DSS key. ‘ucr NUM: This field contains the extension number of the line. This applies to the Intercom Line, Key lines, Multiple Call lines, Personal Outgoing lines or BLF/DSS lines. When this field is filled for a specific key, no entry is allowed in the corresponding TRK ACC field. The EXT NUM field is blank if the key directly selects a trunk. TRK ACC: This is either a trunk number (CO Line) or an ARS Leading Digit String. These come from Form 14, Non-Dial-In Trunks, or Form 26, ARS: Digit Strings. Only non-dial-in trunks may be entered here. Note that when this field is filled for a specific key, no entry is allowed in the corresponding EXT NUM field. LABEL: Only used if the key type is defined as LDN, and the device type is a subattendant. The only exception is, if the key type is Recall, the LABEL field is automatically RECALL. For all other LDN keys, any character string may be entered up to 12 characters in length. Note: These are keys on the set, defined in the TYPE field. Softkeys KEY LINE: Pressing this softkey assigns the selected SUPERSETkey as a Key Line appearance. “Key” appears in the TYPE field. Then use the TAB or => key to move the cursor to the DIRECTION field. - PERSONAL O/G: This softkey appears after the * MORE * softkey is pressed. Pressing the PERSONAL O/G softkey designates the selected SUPERSET key as a personal outgoing line. No other fields can be edited. Press the ENTER softkey. “Personal” appears in the TYPE field. “O/G” appears in the DIR field. “None” appears in the RING field, and “No” appears in the SEC field. ‘MULTI-CALL: Pressing this softkey assigns the selected SUPERSET key as a Multiple Call Line appearance. “Multiple” appears in the TYPE field. Then use the TAB or => key to move the cursor to the DIRECTION field. FEATURE: Pressing this softkey assigns the selected SUPERSET line appearance key as a feature access key. This applies to a SUPERStr3DN, SUPERSET4DN, SUPERSET470, SUPERSET42Uor a SUPERSET430. The following softkeys appear when the cursor is at the TYPE field and the FEATURE softkey is pressed: l AUTO ANSWER l DO NOT DIST (Do Not Disturb) l PRIVACY REL (Privacy Release) 210 4-152 Revision0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue1 CDE Form Descriptions l OVERRIDE l PA PAGING l CAMPON l MUSIC * CALL FORWARD l CALL PICKUP . NIGHT ANSWER . CALLBACK l SWAP (Trade Calls) l CALL/AT-TN (Data Call Connect) l DATA DISC (Data Call Disconnect) l DIRECT PAGE l ACCOUNT CODE l FORWARD CALL Note: Refer to Practice91 09-096-l 05-NA, Features Description for adescription keys available for digital SUPERSETtelephones. of thefeature BLF/DSS: Programs the selected key as a busy lamp field appearance (for the associated extension number). KEY: This softkey selects a SUPERSET key by number. Pressing the KEY softkey displays the ENTER KEY NUM: prompt on the command line. LDN: This applies only to Enhanced Subattendant positions. Programs the selected key as an enhanced sub-attendant LDN key. LDN is displayed in the TYPE field. At this point, a ring type can be selected, an extension number entered, and a label entered. The label is displayed on the SUPERSET 4DN and the SUPERSET 430 display. An enhanced sub-attendant may have up to 3 LDN positions. HOLD POS: This applies only to Enhanced Subattendant positions. Programs the selected key as an enhanced sub-attendant hold slot. Hold Pos is displayed in the TYPE field. No other fields may be programmed. An enhanced sub-attendant may have up to 3 hold slots. RECALL: This applies only to Enhanced Subattendant positions. Programs the selected key as an enhanced sub-attendant Recall key. Recall is displayed in the TYPE field. The only other field that may be programmed is the RING field. An enhanced sub-attendant REVIEW: Presents APP)* may have only one Recall Key. the set application review subform (refer to Review Subform -Set BOTH WAY: Pressing this softkey enables the selected SUPERSET key (line appearance) 9109-096-21 O-NA to originate Issue 1 and receive calls. The DIR field displays the In/Out indication. Revision 0 210 4-153 I Customer Data Entry IN ONLY: Pressing this softkey appearance) to receiving incoming DIR field displays “l/C”. IMMED RING: Pressing restricts the selected SUPERSET key calls only. No call originations are permitted. this softkey programs the selected SUPERSET appearance) to ring the SUPERSET telephone immediately for incoming form displays “lmmed” in the RING field to indicate this condition, (line The key (line calls. The DELAY RING: Pressing this softkey causes incoming calls to flash the selected key (line appearance) for a programmable period of time and then ring the SUPERSET telephone for incoming calls. The “Delay” indication appears in the RING field.. I ‘NO RING: Pressing this softkey prevents incoming calls from ringing the SUPERSET telephone ringer. Only the line appearance flashes. The “None” indication appears in the RING field. DSS: Appears only in the DSS field. Enables the DSS key associated appearance. The YES indication appears in the DSS field, with a BLF NON DSS: Appears only in the DSS field. Disables the DSS key associated appearance. The NO indication appears in the DSS field. with a BLF NON SECR: Pressing this softkey disables the secretarial function for the selected SUPERSETkey (line appearance). The NO indication appears in the SECRETARIAL field. For a DSS key, this disables the secretarial option. SECRETARIAL: Pressing this softkey enables the secretarial function for the selected SUPERSETkey (line appearance). The YES indication appears in the SECRETARIAL field. When a Line Select key is set as a secretarial key, then the user can override the DO NOT DISTURB feature on the SUPERSETtelephone corresponding to that line appearance. For a DSS key, this enables the secretarial option. LINE PREF: Allows selection of the preferred line. This can be one of: INTERCOM key, CO LINE key, CO LINE GRP key, PERSONAL O/G key or MANUAL (must press a line key) - no other line types are permitted to be the preferred origination line. The line programmed as the preferred line will have an asterisk (*) beside its number in the KEY field. CO LINE: Assigns the seleoted SUPERSETkey as a CO Line appearance. This gives the telephone direct access to a trunk. Only Non-Dial In trunks can be specified. Up to 16 telephones can have an appearance of the same trunk. The SEC, DSS, EXT NUM and LABEL fields are not accessible. CO LINE GRP: Assigns the selected key as a CO Line Group key. This gives the telephone direct access to a group of trunks through ARS. Note: It is the responsibility of the installer to program access limitations via CORs (Form 20 and Form 26). The TRK ACC field must match an ARS leading digit string from Form 26. The standard provided. 210 4-154 softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, * MORE *Lr and QUIT are also Revision 0 9109-09621O-NA Issue 1 CDE Form Descriptions Review Subform (SETAPP) for Form 45 4.60 This form appears when the REVIEW and SET APP softkeys are pressed in the Key System Telephones form, or when the REVIEW softkey is pressed in the Expand Set Subform for Form 45. This form lists all programmed appearances of the selected extension number on other SUPERSET telephones. When entered from the Station/SUPERSETForm, this form displays a list of all programmed appearances of the selected extension number. When entered from the Expand Set Subform, the form displays all appearances of the selected key’s extension number, trunk number, or Sub Attendant LDN number. Refer to Figure 4-68 for the form layout. alarm III CO LINE : 10 BAY SLOT CCT EXT status NLIM l- Z-CO fi-QUIT 7- LINE MAJOR SETTYPE I > q KEY I 1 08 03 1 08 03 GRP 3-TRUNK [I NUMBER 8- 2407 Key SET 2 2407 Key SET 2 4-LDN Nlhl s- 9-EXT NUM E- Figure 4-88 Review (Set App) Subform Layout Field Descriptions The header line displays the selected line appearance access number. For telephones, the type (set, station, subattendant) and application (PBX or KEY system) is shown, along with the extension number. For trunks, the type (trunk number, CO Line CO Line group) is shown along with the trunk number, or leading ARS digits. Extension numbers are also shown for LDNs and logical lines. BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields list the bay, slot and circuit numbers of each extension or SUPHSETtelephone that has an appearance of the selected line. These fields cannot be modified. The system generates them based on the PROGRAMMED field of Form 01, System Configuration. SET TYPE: This field displays the listed device type; PBX STATION indicates an industry standard telephone, PBX SET indicates a SUPERSETtelephone, KEY SET indicates a key system telephone, Key SUB-An indicates a Sub Attendant for a Key System Tenant group, PBX SUB-A-TT indicates a Sub Attendant for a PBX tenant group, and CONSOLE indicates an attendant console. KEY: For listed SUPERSETtelephones, the KEY field displays the key number where the line appears. 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-155 Customer Data Entrv EXT NUM: This Bay/Slot/Circuit. field displays the extension number assigned to a particular Softkeys TRUNK NUMBER: This softkey selects a trunk, and shows all sets which have appearances of it. Pressing this softkey displays ENTER TRUNK NUM: prompt on the command line. The trunk selection is completed by entering a valid trunk number (1 .200)+ and pressing the ENTER softkey. EXT NUM: This softkey selects an extension number, and shows all sets which have appearances of it. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER EXTENSION :NUM: ‘prompt. The selection is completed by entering a valid Station Number or SUPERSET telephone Number and then pressing the ENTER softkey. LDN NUM: Selects an LDN number, and shows all sets which have appearances of it. displays the ENTER LDN NUM: prompt. The selection is a valid LDN number and then pressing the ENTER softkey. Pressing this softkey completed by entering CO LINE GRP: Applies only to key system telephones, Selects a CO Line Group access code, and shows all sets which have appearances of it. Pressing this softkey displays the ENTER ARS LEADING DIGIT STRING: prompt. The selection is completed by entering a valid access code and then pressing the ENTER softkey. The standard CANCEL, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided. softkeys Review Subform (PAGING GROUP) for Form 45 4.61 This form appears when the REVIEW and PAGING GROUP softkeys are pressed in the Key System Telephones form. This form lists all of the sets in the paging group, See Figure 4-69 for the form layout. [PAGING GROUP : 11 [R.C. EXTN GP ] BAY 2407 18El4 1806 1887 1808 1609 I3 407 SLT COMMENTS 61 01 01 El El 81 R. R. R. R. El A. Coach Coach Coach Coach cot-p. Ext. Coach 1 I2-NAME II 6-QUIT 7- I3-PAGING GROUPIE- 6- (59-EXT NUM 0- Figure 4-69 Review (Paging Group) Subform Layout 210 4-156 Revision 0 9109-09&2104A Issue1 CDE Form Descriptions Field Descriptions The header line displays the page group, and the page group name (if programmed). EXTN: This field displays the extension number of the page group members. BAY, SLT and CCT: These fields list the bay, slot and circuit numbers of the page group members. COMMENTS: This field displays the COMMENTS field from the corresponding lines in Form 45, Key System Telephones. Softkeys NAME: Specifies a character name for the selected paging group. The “ENTER PAGING GROUP NAME:” prompt is displayed. Selection is completed by entering a character string (maximum 8 characters), followed by the ENTER softkey. The page group name is then displayed in the header line. PAGING GROUP: Selects a paging group. The”ENTER PAGING GROUP:” prompt is displayed. Selection is completed by entering a valid page group number (1 - 50), followed by the ENTER softkey. EXT NUM: This softkey selects a device by its extension number. Pressing this softkey displays the “ENTER EXTENSION NUM:” prompt. The selection is completed by entering a valid Key System SUPERSETtelephone number and then pressing the ENTER softkey. The standard softkeys CANCEL, ENTER, and QUIT are also provided. . 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 4-157 Customer Data Entrv Form 46 - Key System Toll Control 4.62 This form serves to verify dialed digits for the CO Line Key feature. This is similar to, but independent from Form 26 (ARS: Digit Strings). See Figure 4-70 for the form layout, 4:W I’M DIGITS alarm ll-JUN-YU TO BE ANALYZED QT'f TO FOLLOW LONG DST TERM TYPE status q AND NLH MAJOR COR GROUP 416 555 NBX 7 7 Unknown ND bus TRUNK TRUNK TRUNK 12 1B 11 1 1 2 w Unknown YES TRUNK 11 2 l- 2- x 6-QUIT 7-FIND STRING Figure 4-70 3- 4-NEX 5- &DELETE 9-NIX 0- *MOFlPM Form 46 Layout Field Descriptions This field displays those digits for digit analysis. Digit analysis is required so that they can be verified. The total number of digits in this field, plus the number of digits in the QTY TO FOLLOW field cannot exceed 25. DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED: This field lists the number of digits that the user dials AFTER the analyzed digits. The Unknown prompt in this field indicates that the number of subsequent digits is unknown to the system. QTY TO FOLLOW: . This field specifies which digit string entries require “long distance” management. When this field displays YES, the system expects an account code for that digit string entry from users with COS Option 201 (Account Code, Forced Entry Long Distance Calls) enabled. Default condition is NO. LONG DISTANCE: TYPE AND NUM: Allows for selection of a termination type (TRUNK or trunk GROUP) and a number (valid trunk number: I-200; valid trunk group number: I-50). If TRUNK is chosen as the termination type, only non-dial-in trunks may be entered, TERM COR GROUP: Specifies a COR group which is restricted from accessing the digit string. If the field is left blank, all COR groups can access the digit string. This links the form to Form 20 (ARS: COR Group Definition). Valid COR group numbers: I-50. 210 4-158 Revision 0 910949621 O-NA issue 1 CDE Form Descrintions Softkeys YES/NO: This softkey only appears when the cursor is at the LONG DISTANCE field. Pressing theYES softkey indicates tothe system that this entry requires “long distance” management. While NO indicates no “long distance” YES appears in the LONG DISTANCE field. The default condition is no “long distance” management required as indicated by the NO prompt. UNKNOWN: This softkey appears only when the cursor is at the QTY TO FOLLOW .“_ field. Pressing the UNKNOWN softkey indicates to the system that the quantity of dialed digits AFTER the analyzed digits is unknown. INSERT: This softkey adds new entries to the form. Pressing the INSERT softkey clears the command line and moves the cursor to the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. The addition is completed by entering the new data for each field and pressing the ENTER softkey. Note that the system inserts the addition one line afterthe line that was displayed on the command line. The system automatically places all inserted or added strings in numerical ascending order with relation to existing strings. TRUNK: Appears when the cursor is in the TERM TYPE AND NUM field. Sets the termination point device as atrunk. Atrunk number is then entered (1 -200) -this must be a valid non-dial-in trunk number. GROUP: Appears when the cursor is in the TERM TYPE AND NUM field. Sets the termination point device as a trunk group. A trunk group number is then entered (1 50) -this must be a valid trunk group number. NOX: This softkey functions as a wild card sequence, where N is any digit from 2 to 9. It represents half of the area codes in North America. Pressing this softkey displays NOX in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. Note that this softkey can only be pressed at the beginning of a digit string. X: This softkey functions as awild card digit; it represents any digit from 0 to 9. Pressing this softkey displays X in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. Note that this softkey can only be pressed at the end of a digit string. . FIND STRING: This softkey selects an entry in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. Pressing the FIND STRING softkeydisplays the ENTER DIGIT STRING: prompt on the command line. The selection is completed by entering a valid digit string. Note: The entered digit string does not have to be an exact match; the system accepts subsets of digit strings and moves the cursor to the closest entry. NIX: This softkey functions as a wild card sequence, where N is any digit from 2 to 9. It represents half of the area codes in North America. Pressing this softkey displays NIX in the DIGITS TO BE ANALYZED field. Note that this softkey can only be pressed at the beginning of a digit string. 1 NIX, 1 NOX,ONIX, ONOX:For area codes not specifically identified, and where dialing is preceded by a 1 or 0 (long distance access code), these wildcard sequences followed by 7 digits would cover all unspecified area codes. This allows wild card restriction of 555 and 976 numbers. These softkeys can only be pressed at the beginning of a digit 9109-09&21O-NA Issue1 Revision 0 210 4-159 Customer Data Entrv string and are available in Generic 1004 and Generic pressing the W MORE * softkey once. 1005. They are accessed by lOXXXONOX, IOXXXONIX, lOXXXlNOX, IOXXXINIX, IOXXXO, 10xXx1: These wildcard sequences, designed for the call aggregator market (i.e. hotels, motels, hospitals, universities), prevent unauthorized calls from being billed to the originating line, while allowing consumers access to the long distance carrier of their choice. These softkeys can only be pressed at the beginning of a digit string and are available in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. lOXXXONOX, 1 OXXXONIX, 1 OXXXI NOX and 1 OXXXI Ni X are accessed by pressing the * MORE * softkey twice; 1 OXXXO and 1 OXXXI are accessed by pressing the * MORE * softkey three times. . *The standard provided. softkeys CANCEL, DELETE, ENTER, *MORP and QUIT are also . 210 4-160 Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 mI Appendix A. PROGRAMMING MESSAGES ERROR Table A-l Programming Error Messages * must be followed by *, 3,5,6 or 9 s code. Leading Digit Leading Digits Entry Attendant LDN Access Code Pageiofif 9109-09&21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 A-l Customer Data Entrv Table A-l Programming Error Messages (continued) Error Message Meaning Access Code xXxXx conflicts with a Console Access Code The code entered has already been defined as an extension number for a console in Form 07, Console Assignments. Select a new code or change the console extension number. Access Code.XXXXX conflicts with the Feature Access Code for FEATZTRE NUMBER XX The code entered has already been defined as a. Feature Access Code. Select a new code or chahge the code in Form 02, Feature Access Codes, Access Code XXXXX conflicts with a Night Bell Access Code The code entered has already been defined as an extension number for a night bell in Form 18, Miscellaneous System Ports. Select a new code or change the night bell extension number. Access Code XXXXX conflicts with a station number or SUPERSET Prime Line number The code entered has already been defined as a station number or the prime line number of a SUfERSETtelephone. Select a new code or change the station number (or Prime Line number) in Form 09, StationlSUPERSETTelephones. Access Code XXXXX conflicts with SUPERSET line number The code entered has already been defined as a SUPERSETline extension number in Form 09, SUPERSETTelephone Lines. Select a new code or change the SUPERSET line extension number. Access code XXXXX does not correspond to a Stn, Set or logical line Only those access codes (extension numbers) which correspond to a station, SUPERSET key or logical line can be used. The access code xXxXx The selected access code has not been assigned. does not exist Access Code XXXXX does not match with ARS Leading Digits Entry The access code entered does not match the Direct to ARS access code assigned in Form 02, Feature Access Codes. The access code must be a defined ARS leading digit string. Access code entered is not for a station, SUPERSET or logical line An invalid access code has been entered and the ENTER key is pressed. The access code for field XXX is invalid The extension number, Hunt Group Access Code, Night Bell extension number or Attendant Console directory number assigned to one of the DAY, Nl or N2 fields in Form 19, Call Rerouting Table is invalid. Assign a new code in that field. The access codes for fields XXX & Xxx are invalid The extension numbers, Hunt Group Access Codes, Night Bell extension numbers, or Attendant Console directory numbers assigned to two of the DAY, Nl or N2 fields in Form 19, Call Rerouting Table are invalid. Assign new codes in the fields. Page2of 18 210 A-2 Revision 0 9109-098-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Programming Table A-l Error Messages Programming Error Messages (continued) XXX are invalid ._ and N2 fields in Form 14, Non-Dial-In point - an LDN on the Attendant Trunks: Console, already programmed QUEUE STATUS keys are programmed Page3of 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 18 210 A-3 Customer Data Entry Table A-l Programming Error Messages (continued) Meaning Error Message Ul members must be idle before changing blunt Croup type ._ Alternate music sources cannot have keyline x multi+xll line appearances The user attempted to change the hunt group type. The user needs to wait for all of the devices to be free or take them out of service before changing the group type. Music sources cannot be line appearances. ; The ARS Leading Digits XXXX have not xen assigned The access code is valid, but it has not been assigned to any sets. 4ssociated device already has two WPERSET DSS Modules attached An attempt was made to associate more than two SUPERSET DSS modules with a device. Associated device has a key template :stablished in its COS An attempt was made to associate a SUPERSET DSS module with a set that has a key template enabled in its COB Association of SUPERSET DSS Module to SUPERSET must be removed An attempt was made to delete a SUPERSETthat has one or more SUPERSET DSS modules associated with it. Attempting to add invalid access code A PBX SUPERSET DSS Module may only be associated with a PBX set. A Key System SUPERSET DSS Module may only be associated with a Key System set. A SUPERSET DSS Module must be associated with a SUPERSETtelephone; not with a standard telephone set. Attempting to add more than XXX members to this group There are a maximum of 50 members for each Pickup Group, Trunk Group and Hunt Groups. Note: 100 max. for hunt groups in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005. Maximum 16 members in a Paging Group. Attempting to define multiple appearances of LDN XXX on this set An LDN may appear only once on a given set. Attempting to define multiple KEY LINE appearances of xXxXx on this SET An access code for a Key Line appearance cannot be duplicated on another Key Line appearance on that SUPERSETtelephone. Refer to Form 09, (Expand Set Subforrn) SUPERSETTelephone Lines. Attempting to define multiple key types for Access Code XXX In Form 09, StationslSUPERSETTelephones, only one key type can be assigned to each station number. Attempting to define multiple key types for Trunk Number Xx In Form 09, StationslSUPERSETTelephones or Form 45, Key System Telephones, only one key type can be assigned to each Trunk Number. Attempting to delete an ACD path that is currently in use This ACD path cannot be deleted because there are ACD calls currently being handled via this path. Page4of 16 210 A-4 Revision 0 9109-09621O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Programming Table A-l Error Messages Programming Error Messages (continued) ate/delete of a device that is Page5of 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 18 210 A-5 Customer Data Entry Table A-l Programming Error Messages (continued) Error Message Meaning The Bay/Slot/Circuit - XX/XXKX present is not The specified circuit number is not applicable for these bay and slot numbers. Reenter the bay and slot numbers without the circuit number or enter 0 for the circuit number. The Bay/Slot/Circuit - XXKX/XX programmed as a console \ is not The selected bay/slot/circuit is not a console. Refer to Form 01, System Configuration and reprogram this bay/slot/circuit as a console. The Bay/Slot/Circuit -XX/XX&X programmed as a DIAL-IN trunk is not The selected bay/slot/circuit is programmed as a Non-Dial-in Trunk. Refer to Form 14, Dial-In Trunks. The Bay/Slot/Circuit -m programmed as a DNIC is not The selected bay/slot/circuit is not a DNIC circuit. The Bay/Slot/Circuit - XX/XXKX is not programmed as a MUSIC/PAGER MODULE The selected bay/slot/circuit is not a music/pager assignment. Refer to Form 01, System Configuration and reprogram this bay/slot/circuit as a Music/Pager Module. The Bay/Slot/Circuit - JWXX/XX is not programmed as a NON-D&IN trunk The selected bay/slot/circuit is programmed as a Dial-In Trunk. Refer to Form 15, Dial-In Trunks. The Bay/Slot/Circuit - JWXX/XX is not programmed as a RECEIVER MODULE Relays (Subcircuits 5 and 6) are located on the Receiver/Relay Module only. Ensure that there is a Receiver/Relay Module on a Universal Card at that location in Form 01, System Configuration. The Bay/Slot/Circuit - XXKX/XX has incompatible device type programmed. The user attempted to range program over different card types, a circuit that has a BLF programmed or a circuit that has a SUB (enhanced subattendant) programmed. The Bay/Slot/Circuit - XXKX/XX programmed as a trunk The selected trunk number corresponds to a bay/slot/circuit that is not programmed as a trunk. is not The Bay/Slot/Circuit -m is not programmed as a IJNIVBRSAL CARD The selected bay/slot/circuit is not a Universal Card assignment. Refer to Form 01, System Configuration and reprogram this bay/slot/circuit as a Universal Card. Cannot change tenant grp, if a member of Modem Pool Hunt Group The user attempted to change the tenant of a modem which was a member of a modem pool hunt group. Cannot delete last agent while callers are waiting on ACD Group XX The user attempted to delete the last agent from ACD group XX, which would delete group XX itself. However, there are ACD calls waiting for this group, so the deletion cannot be permitted at this time. Camtot disable option when Automated Attendant programming is present The user attempted to disable System Option 16 Automated Attendant when there are Auto Attendant groups programmed in the system. Cannot enable DTRX due to invalid mode or DTE not assigned The user attempted to enable the DTRX option in the hunt group options form for a modem hunt group for which DTRX does not apply. The group has to be in ANSWER or BOTH mode. Page6of 16 210 A-6 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Programming Table A-l Error Messages Programming Error Messages (continued) Circuit -XX/XX be in the same TENANT GROUP COR value is out of range . Page7of 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 18 210 A-7 Customer Data Entry Table A-l Programming Error Messages (continued) Error Message Meaning Delete ACD Croup XX from ACD PATH YY before deleting last agent The user attempted to delete the last agent from group XX, which would have the effect of deleting group XX itself. However, group XX is referenced in the ACD PATH form, for path number YY, so it must be deleted from that form first. Then the user will be allowed to delete the last agent, and thus delete the group. ; Delete ACD Croup XX from ACD SUPERVISORS form before deleting last The user attempted to delete the last agent from group XX, which would delete group XX itself. However, group XX is referenced in the ACD SUPERVISORS form, so it must be deleted from that form first. agent Delete in Hunt Croup Form first The user attempted to delete the last member of a hunt group programmed as an overflow point, which would delete the hunt group itself. The member must be deleted from Form 17 first. DISA trunks cannot have prefix or absorb digits programmed The user was trying to program these fields for a DISA trunk. Disk I/O failure - database may be corrupted Due to the disk i/O failure, the database may be corrupted. Exit CDE Mode, reset the system and then r-nter CDE Mode. Disk is not ready -data was not written to disk The disk was not ready. initiate the write process at a later time. Disk is write-protected -data was not written to disk Remove the write-protect tag from the disk. Reinsert the disk in the disk drive and activate the write process again. DNIC console cannot originate a DTRX call The data port for a DNIC console cannot have the DTE field in Form 12 filled out since it cannot originate a DTRX. DTE field is not programmed for this device First member of a modem hunt group has the DTE field programmed. User attempted to add a member without the DTE field programmed - must be consistent within the hunt group. DTE field is programmed for this device First member of a modem hunt group does not have the DTE field programmed. User attempted to add a member with the DTE field programmed - must be consistent within the hunt group. Entered string is not in the system In Form 26, ARS Nested Digit Strings, the selected digit string is not defined. Page8of 210 A-6 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA II Issue 1 Appendix A - Programming Table A-l Error Messages Programming Error Messages (continued) s restricted to the following: = Pause for 5 seconds, Y = Wait for Dial Tone, *3 = Switch to DTMF for subsequent digits, = Do not display further modified digits on sets or SMDR, = Pause1 0 seconds, = Insert caller’s ID, = Insert caller’s dialed account code, Error in QTY TO DELETE field Can only UPERSET DSS Modu member of HUNT GROUP XX shown. An extension number can be a eature access 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 A-9 Customer Data Entry Table A-l Programming Error Messages (continued) Meaning Error Message First digit in digit string cannot be a ‘*’ This will conflict wlth the Key System - Retrieve Personal Speed Call. If asterisks (7 are required, program them into the Modified Digit Table. Form accessdisallowed; enable verified account codes system option To access Form 33, Account Code Entry, System Option 05, Verified Account Code must first be enabled. Refer to Form 04, System Options/System Timers. \ Form number Xx cannot be accessed The selected form number is reserved for future use or the selected form number has restricted user access. Refer to Form 28, Form Access Restriction Definition for the level of access for each form. Form number out of range The selected Form number is invalid. Refer to Table 3-l. High power card cannot be programmed at this location The Universal Card can only be assigned to those card slots rated for high power consumption. These are the upper slots of any digital bay. The hour value XX is out of range The hour value can range from 01 to 24. Refer to Form 04, System Options/System Timers. Hunt group must have an access code assigned The user attempted to program a name for the hunt group before an access code was programmed. The before name can be programmed access code has to be done first. Incorrect specification of Bay/Slot/Circuit for range programming The specified start bay/slot/circuit numbers must be less than the end bay/slot/circuit numbers. Inserted too many digits Up to 38 allowed, with ‘*n’ counted as 1 The specified entry exceeds the maximum. A maximum of 38 entries are allowed in the DIGITS TO BE INSERTED field in Form 22, ARS: Modified Digit Table. Invalid default destination The user attempted to program an invalid default destination for an auto attendant group. See Practice 9109-098-825-NA, Automated Attendant Application Package, for a list of valid destinations. Invalid digit to insert Use O-9 or “* The specified entry is invalid. The entries in the DIGITS TO BE INSERTED field are restricted to the following: w,3,4,5,*y O~Y -0to9and -the valid asterisk sequences. Invalid key for set in use The user attempted to program invalid keys (7 to 12) for a SUPERSET 470 on expanded set forms for Form 09 and Form 45. Key number XX cannot be programmed as the This can only be one of:INTERCOM Key, CO Line Key, CO Line Group Key, MANUAL, or PERSONAL Origination Line Preference key O/G Key. Page 1Oof 1E 210 A-10 Revision 0 9109-098-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Programming Table A-l Error Messages Programming Error Messages (continued) already assigned one mode and here are still keys programmed on it - a stand alone ule may have only BLF appearances programmed CALL REROUTING TABLE code appears in the CALL REROUTING table (Form the Call Rerouting from the system. Refer Key System Telephones Form iew the list of SUPERSETS rammed in the Hunt Grou Hunt Group Options form 910949S21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 A-11 Customer Data Entry Table A-l Programming Error Messages (continued) Error Message Meaning Must delete all Digit Strings that begin with a Before programming this access code, go to the SHOW STRINGS subform of Form 26 - ARS: Digit Strings, and delete all digit strings beginning with an asterisk (*), ,*, -_ Must delete all key definitions before deleting set The selected SUPERSETtelephone must have all its key definitions deleted before it can be removed from the system. Refer to Form 09, (Expand Set Subform) SUPERSETTelephone Lines. Must delete appearances of xXxXx from answer points in NON-DIAL-IN TRUNKS The selected device must have its access code or extension number deleted from the answer points in Form 14, Non-Dial-In Trunks before it can be removed from the system. Must delete BLF appearances starting on device XXXX before deleting The user attempted to delete a device which has BLF appearances on the specified device. The appearances must be deleted first. \ Must delete the appearances of XXXXX on all All appearances of the station number (or Prime Line sets before deleting set number) must be deleted before that set can be removed from the system. Must enter first choice for route list to be defined (leave no gaps) In Form 24, ARS: Route Lists, the FIRST field must be specified with a valid Route List number before the SECOND field is specified. Must enter LEADING DIGITS To complete the entry in Form 26, ARS: Digit Strings, must enter digits in the LEADING DIGITS field. Must first disable Option 217 in COS ( 1 - 50 Cos Option 217 Direct To ARS must be disabled before the Direct To ARS feature access code can be deleted. ) Must program Direct To ARS access code first The user attempted to enable COS Option 217, Direct To ARS when there is no feature access code programmed in Form 02 for this feature. Form 02 must be programmed first. Neither Option #I248 Nor #%I9 are enabled yet One of these COS Options must be enabled for correct system operation. Night Bell cannot be programmed on bay XX Night Bells can only be programmed systems which are not configured as a 672 port system. No CONSOLE MODULES are programmed The Console Module must be assigned to a bay/slot/circuit/subcircuit in Form 01, System Configuration. No DIAL-IN A card that supports Dial-In Trunks must be defined in Form 01, System Configuration. trunk cards are programmed in bays 1 or 2 for No DNIC cards are programmed To access Form 45, there must be DNIC cards programmed into Form 01. No more space available for comments Subsequent comments that are entered in the CDE Forms are not saved. Page 12 of 18 210 A-12 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Programming Table A-l Error Messages Programming Error Messages (continued) entered Page 13 of IE 9109-09&210-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 A-13 Customer Data Entry Table A-l Programming Error Messages (continued) Error Message Meaning Previous transaction encountered a permanent I/O failure; data was not written to disk Due to the I/O failure, the last write process did not occur. Exit CDE Mode, reset the system and t-Hnter CDE Mode. (1 In Form 32, Customer Data Print, there are only 50 Print Option numbers. Select a new Print Option number. Print Option out of range Valid range is -59) _ ‘Ibis printer specification has already been programmed System already contains printer parameters. Recording 1 Start Time must be > = Delay For Ringback The values for these two items must be adjusted as indicated. ROUTE LIST out of range Valid range is (1 - 100) The selected Route List number is invalid. The range is 1 to 100. Refer to Form 24, ARS: Route Lists. ROUTE out of range Valid range is (l200) ROUTE PLAN out of range Valid range is (1 - 50) The selected Route number is invalid. The range is 1 to 200. Refer to Form 23, ARS: Route Definition. RTE PLN= X, DZ= X, TZ= X, Field= ROUTE LIST: Error= entry must be blank The entered Route List number does not have a corresponding entry in the START HOUR field. Therefore, the ROUTE LIST field must be cleared or a starting time must be specified in the START HOUR field. Refer to Form 25, ARS: Route Plans. RTE PLN= X, DZ= X, TZ= X, Field= START HOUR, Error = Entry c = previous entry The START HOUR field entry is less than or equal to the previous START HOUR field entry. The entries in the START HOUR field must be listed in ascending order. Refer to Form 25, ARS: Route Plans. RTE PLN= X, DZ= X, TZ= X, Field= START HOUR, Error= Entry cannot be deleted A blank entry in the START HOUR field represents 24 hours. Therefore, the subsequent entry in the START HOUR field is less than or equal to the blank entry. Starting times must be listed in ascending order. Refer to Form 25, ARS: Route Plans. Start time of a recording must be c Intefflow timeout Adjust the start time as indicated. Start time of a recording must be < start time of the next recording The recording start times should be adjusted as indicated. A sub-attendant prime cannot have keyline or multi4all line appearances The line must be a single appearance the system. The selected Route Plan number is invalid. The range is 1 to 50. Refer to Form 25, ARS: Route Plans. (the prime) in The SUPERSET has a BLF module and cannot The extension has a SUPERSET DSS Module associated with it and therefore, cannot have a key have a COS with a key template template programmed in its COS. The SUPERSET specified and the SUPERSET DSS Module have the same feature key 210 A-14 The module and the set have been programmed with the same feature key. Page 140f IE Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Programming Table A-l Error Messages Programming Error Messages (continued) 15, Dial-In Trunks, the N field ( d) is restricted to digits 0 to 10. range (0 - 10) . Page 15 of 1E 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 A-15 Customer Data Entry Table A-l Programming Error Messages (continued) Meaning Error Message .- TRUNK NUMBER XXX is a member of TRUNK GROUP XX The selected trunk number is a member of the Trunk Group shown. A trunk number can be a member of only one Trunk Group at a time. Unable to delete -A device is programmed for the Bay/S!ot/Circuit - XXKX/XX Circuits are assigned to the selected card in that bay and slot. Cannot delete the card in that slot until the devices are d&assigned from the forms. ’ Unable to locate extension n The selected extension number is not assigned to any station or set. Refer to Form 09 or Form 45. Unable to locate extension XXXXX assigned to a PICKUP GROUP The selected extension number is not assigned to any station or set. Refer to Form 09 or Form 45. Unable to stop CDE print Try again later The Customer Data print process cannot be halted. Try again later. Undefined access number or digit string In Form 31, System Abbreviated Dial Entry, either the Index Number or the Digit String is blank. Specify the required Index Number or Digit String. Unmatched Account code length; system option account code length enabled The length of the entered Account Code does not match the Account Code Length specified in System Option 49. (See Form 04, System Options/System Timers). Enter a new Account Code or change the Account Code Length option. Update of database failed The changes to the database were not stored properly on the diskette(s). Ensure proper positioning of the diskette(s) in the drive(s). User currently programming feature keys Try again later Cannot EXPAND SET while set user is accessing Program Feature Key feature. Valid COS range must be entered before COS print is initiated Before a print operation can occur, a valid COS range must be entered (1 to 50). Refer to Form 03, COS Define. Valid TRK CCT DESC range must be entered before print is initiated This error occurs in Form 32, Customer Data Print. The valid Trunk Circuit Descriptor range is 1 to 25. The value XX is outside valid range for ACD Agent Group (l-50) The ACD Group number entered is out of range. The value X is outside valid range for BAY (1 -5) The value XX is outside valid range for CIRCUIT(l--XX) The selected bay number is invalid. The range is 1 to The value XX is outside valid range for CIRCUIT DESCRIPTORS (1 - 25) There are a maximum of 25 trunk circuit descriptors. The value XX is outside valid range for COR (1 - 25) The selected COR Group number is out of range. The range is 1 to 25. The value XX is outside valid range for COS (1 - 50) The selected COS number is out of range; the range is 1 to 50. Page 160f 18 210 A-16 5. The selected circuit number is invalid. Revision 0 9109-096-21 CMA Issue 1 50 I Appendix A - Programming Table A-i Error Messages Programming Error Messages (continued) d in Form 09, (Expand Set Subform). Note: be programmed for a SUPERSET DSS selected timer option The value XX is outside valid range for TENANT (1 - 25) 9109-09621O-NA Issue 1 The selected Tenant Group number is invalid; the range is 1 to 25. Tenant Group numbers are used in Revision 0 210 A-17 Customer Data Entry Table A-l Programming Error Messages (continued) Error Message Meaning Verified account codes system option must be enabled first ._ In Form 33, Account Code Entry, the Account Code can only be modified if System Option 05, Verified Account Codes is enabled. Refer to Form 04, System Options/System Timers. Voice port of the DNIC console must be progrFed first The DNIC console must be programmed first in Form 07 before its data port can be programmed in Form 12. Warning: This path will be deleted unless 1st two status lines are assigned The user attempted to QUIT this form with “Access Code for This ACD Path” or “Primary ACD Agent Group” field blank. A path is meaningless without these two pieces of information. The user is now provided with two keys: QUIT, which quits the form and deletes this path, and BACKTO FORM (softkey 0), which returns the user to the form. Warning: Reassigning agent from group XX CONFIRM or CANCEL The inserted ID is one that is already programmed in group XX. This agent will be reassigned now to the current ACD Group. Press either the CONFIRM or CANCEL softkey. Warning: Ret X info will be deleted unless Start Time & Access Code assigned The user attempted to QUIT the form while only one of the indicated status fields for Recording X was assigned. Recording info is meaningless without both these pieces of info. The user is provided with two keys now: QUIT, which quits the form and deletes all entered info about Recording X, and BACK TO FORM (softkey 0) which returns the user to the form. Page 180f 18 210 A-18 Revision 0 9109498-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B. BLANK CDE FORMS _’ .- This appendix contains blank CDE forms intended for use as aids in the planning before data entry. For information on the actual CDE forms, refer to the main body of this document. Further information on individual features is contained in Practice 9109-09&l 05-NA, Features Description. ; Forms that cannot be edited are not shown in this appendix. Not all software generics use the same form numbering scheme. Refer to Chapter 3 for form numbers of a particular software generic (see Table 3-I). 9109-09&21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-l Customer Data Entry FORM Of- SYSTEM CONFIGURATION For the 336Port Varlanf FORM 01 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION BAY SLT CCT PROGRAMMED 336 PORT VARIANT COMMENTS BAY SLT CCT 3 5 -1 universal for PROGRAMMED COMMENTS tj-y--j modules 1 1 universal for 2 I modules 3 onlv 4 117 - onlv 3 4 18 - for 1 universal 2 modules 3 onlv 4 411 - 4 2 - 4 A 3 4 - 6 - onlv 4 4 for 1 universal 2 modules 3 onlv 417 0th 4 - 4 311 312 - 3 13 I-1 3 I4 l-l for 210 B-2 1 universal 2 modules 3 Revision 0 I 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 01- SYSTEM CONFIGURATION For the 456Port Varbnt FORM 01 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 456 PORT VARIANT Revision 0 Customer Data Entry FORM Of- SYSTEM CONF/GU/?AT/ON For the 48U-Port Variant I FORM 01 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION BAY 1 SLT modules 1 CCT I 3 1 PROGRAMMED I 480 PORT VARIANT 1 COMMENTS I 1 BAY SLT CCT 3 4 - 3 5 - 117 4 1121-l 1131-l 3 14 - 3 15 - 4 1 - 4 2 - 1 AlAl-- universal 2 4 5 - modules 3 4 6 - 4 4 7 - onlv COMMENTS 4131-l for PROGRAMMED I 3 3 onlv I I I I I 4161-1 4 -I 4 I 14 I - I 4 1 15 1 - ) 5 I I-I I 5 2 - 5 3 - 5 210 B-4 1131-l Revision 0 I4 l-l 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 07 - SYSTEM CONFlGVRATlON For the 672-Port or SX-200 FD Variants FORM 01 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 672-PORT & SX-200 FD VARIANT CCT 9109-096-21 O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 PROGRAMMED COMMENTS Customer Data Entry FORM 01 - SYSTEM CONFIGUFIATION 672-PORT & SX-200 FD VARIANT (continued) I universal for modules universal for tq-y-1 modules onlv 4 717 for 1 universal 2 1 modules 3 I I universal modules nnlv for 210 B-6 Revision 0 I 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 02 -FEATURE ACCESS CODES FORM 02 - FEATURE ACCESS Feature Numbers GlOOl 1 Cl002 G1003 01 CODES For 1 Cl004 Feature 01 01 AccountCodeAccess Auto-AnswerActivation CallForwarding-All Calls CallForwarding- InternalOnly CallForwarding- ExternalOnly CallForwarding- I AmHere CallForwarding-Cancel I Am Here CallForwardina- Busv CallForwarding-Don’t Answer CallForwarding - - Busy . / Don’tAnswer CallForwarding- FollowMe DialCallPickup DirectedCall Pickup Do Not Disturb ExtensionGeneralAttendantAccess PagingAccessToDefaultZone(s) PagingAccessTo SpecificZones TAFAS- Any TAFAS- LocalTenant HoldPickupAccess(AttendantHoldSlots) ConsoleLockoutAccessCode MaintenanceFunctions@st Line) DirectInwardSystemAccess CallbackBusy< > CellHold CallHold Retrieve(Local) CallHold Retrieve(Remote) AbbreviatedDialAccess 1ClearAll Features 1SUF’ERSFT4TelephoneLoopbackTes 1Tone Demonstration L CallSetuD 1ADLDisconnect F&SERVED ExecutiveBusyDvenide< > AutomaticWakeup Call Park ” . 06 1 06 1 - 17 1 17 1 17 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 I 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 I 20 21 22 23 24 25 -- 1 7 1 30 31 32 29 30 31 32 33 1 1 27 1 2g 30 31 32 33 l Not available in Generic 1002. * Not available in Non-ACD Generic Loads. 9109-096-21O-NA Names Assigned Access Codes G1005 Issue 1 , I I I I I I Page 1 of 2 Revision 0 210 B-7 Customer Data Entry FORM 02 - FEATURE ACCESS * 210 B-8 Not available Not available in Generic 1002. in Non-ACD Genetic CODES (continued) Loads. Revision 0 9 109-096-21 &NA Issue 1 nnI Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 03 - CLASS OF SERVlCE DEFINE FORM 03 - CLASS OF SERVICE OPTIONS .- ‘\_ c H V (UPTO 8 CHARACTERS) (Notavailablein Generic1001 Not available in Generic 1002 except in software load DOSand above. Page 1 of 5 * Not available in Generic 1002. Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl / LIT96. Not available in Generic 1004. VVNot available in Generic 1004, Generic 1005 FPKGl / LIT96. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 Customer Data Entrv FORM 03 - CLASS OF SERVICE OPTIONS (continued) Class Of Service Option Name * V * Not available in Generic 1002. Not available in Genetic 1005 FPGKl I LIT96. Not available in Generic 1004. VVNot available in Generic 1004, Generic 1005 FPKGI / LIT96. 210 B-10 Revision 0 910!3-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 5 I Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 03 - CLASS OF SERVICE OPTIONS (continued) COS Option Numbers For _’ Cl001 246 247 248 249 3Firl 251 252 253 254 --- \ 1 G1002 1 1 G1003 1 248 249 250 I 251 --~ I 1 352 1 G1004 G1005 248 249 250 251 ~ 752 254 255 256 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 1 --. 361 * 262 263 264 265 300 I 301 I ~ 1 . 300 301 300 301 302 303 304 305 1 302 1 303 1 304 I 305 1 302 1 303 ) 304 I 305 308 I I RD8 1 I l-l-l I 308 I1 310 309 1 310 309 1 311 1 311 I 312 1 312 313 314 315 I I VI” RlR V.V 316 .,m- TIE Trunk to TIE Trunk 317 318 319 317 318 319 TIE Trunkto DIDTrunkConnect DIDTrunkto DIDTrunkConnect ExtensionNon-COTrunkto TrunkConnect O-NA I new-.,.-w 317 318 319 9109-09~21 I I AutomaticCallback Camn-On .?lR ..- Not available in Generic I I RESERVED lPaainaZone8Access 1 PaslinnZone7 Access IPwinaZone9A-s nq Default(0 - 9) (0 Giies All EnabledZones1 IPaoil I I COTrunkto CO TrunkConnect CO Trunkto TIETrunkConnect CO Trunkto DID TrunkConnect 313 314 315 I I 1Flash-inConference 1PaainaZone 1 Access PaninaZone 2 Access PartingZone3 Access PaslinnZone4 Access PaninnZone5 Access I PaainaZone6Access -.3% Y Enter COS # (01 to 50) 253 253 - 25B * --259 * 310 309 311 312 313 314 415 Class Of Service Option Name 1 1 TAFASAnyAccess TAFASAccessTenant TMAS Ac,-&ssp~rinnna!r 9cmh-n I TransferDialTorle 1Broker’sCallwithTransfer CallForward- Don’tAnswerTimer(2 - 6 Rinns) CallHoldRecallTimer(PBXTelenhonest 1 - 10 Minutes RepeatedCamp-OnBeepsTimer(5 - 15 Seconds) UCD MusicOn HoldTimer(0 - 50 Minutes) FlashOverTrunk DisulavPrimeas Forwarder MessageSending Internal/ ExternalSplitCallForwardinn 1 ONSVoiceMailPort RESERVED RESERVED 1004. Issue 1 ..-.... _- . .- ..-... II I I I I I I I I It I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I Connect - -....--- VV Not available in Generic 1004, Generic 1005 FPKGl / LIT96. Revision 0 210 B-11 I Customer Data Entrv (continued) FORM 03 - CLASS OF SERVICE OPTIONS Class Of Service Option Name I * V Not available Not available 3in L17 in Generic in Generic 1005 FPGKI / LIT96. 1004. VVNot available * Not available in Generic 1002. in Generic 1004, Generic 1005 FPKGl Rnvisinn 0 !M0!3-096-21O-hlA / LIT96. IGSIIF! 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 03 - CLASS OF SERVICE OPTIONS (continued) fl KevSystem-Direct PagingHandsfreeAnswerback 700 701 702 , I - 700 701 702 703 704* 705 * 706 i 707 800 801 802 803 804 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 807 810 684 700 701 702 703 704 * 705 706 i 707 708 709 710 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 SMDR- DoesNot Applv No DialTone SMDR- OverwriteBuffer MessageFleaisterApplies IncomingI InternalModemPoolinaAccess AutomaticOverflowFromAttend&t RESERVED RESERVED I I I StandardRina. ADDlieS DISADuringNightServiceOnly ANVDNISTrunk 813 814 813 814 YY . * I I - * V I - I 911 Not available in Generic 1002 except in software load DO9 and above. Page 5 of 5 Not available in Genetic 1005 FPGKl / LIT96. *** Not available in Generic 1002. Not available in Generic 1004. VVNot available in Generic 1004, Generic 1005 FPKGl / LIT96. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-13 Customer Data Entry CDE FORM 04 - SYSTEM OPT/OAK & TIMERS FORM 04 - SYSTEM Option Numbers IPTIONS & TIMERS For System Options / System Timers System Option “b”p’~:~1:; StatUS 24 Hour Clock 11 12 13 11 12 13 11 12 13 1A 10 lA 15 15 15 16 17 18 16* 17 18 16* 17 18 20 20 19* 20 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 33 34 35 36 1 I I 1 HolidayMe=+.!= I I 1 MessageRegisterZeroAfterAudit No OverlapOutpulsing RoomStatusAudi SMDRIndicateLong Call SUfERSFTTelephoneLast NumberRedial RESERVED SatelliiePBX OutgoingCallReshiction I I 1 RoomSt&us 1Auto RoomStatusConversionI AutoWakeupPrint PropertyManagementSystem EndOf DialCharacter(#) 37 37 CalibratedFlash * Not available in Generic 1002. * Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl or Generic 1005 LIT96. &% Not available in Generic 1003 (Non-ACD) and Generic 1002. 210 B-14 1 Message - Lamptest SinglePagingAmplifier MessageWaitingand MessageRegisterClear Print VerifiedAccountCodes AnalogueNetworkingSMDR Cancel24-Hour MessageWaking 5-Digit SMDR AttendantCall Block AttendantConferenceBeeps I AutomaticWakeup AutomaticWakeupAlarm AutomaticWakeupPrint AutomaticWakeuoMusic DataDemultiplexer AutomatedAttendant DiscriminatingRinging Discriminating RingingAlways Mite1ApplicationInterface 33 34 35*+ 36 Revision 0 I Page 9109-096-21O-NA 1 1 of 2 Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 04 - SYSTEM OPTIONS & TIMERS Option Numbers Gl 001 I G1002 G1003 For I G1004 G1005 System Options / System Timers Switch-l-lookFlash DATASMDRIndicateLong Calls MessageRegisterFollowsTalker AutomaticCallDistribution(ACD) ACDSilentMonitoring ACDSilentMonitoringBeeps ACD Reports RESERVED I 45 I 45 DigitTranslationPlan(0 - 3) 35 1 46 1 46 ARSUnknownDigitLengthTim&out (2 - 15 Seconds) LimitedWattFor DialTone(1 - 15 Seconds) PseudoAnswerSupervisionTimer(10 - 60 Seconds) DialingConflictTimer(2 - 10 Seconds) 39 I 50 I 50 FinalRingTimeout (I- 30 Minutes) 40 1 51 1 51 MinimumFlashTimer(20 - 50 ms; in 10 msincrements) MaximumFlashTimer(20- 150 ms; in 10 ms increments) DISAAnswerTimer(1- 6 Seconds) Account Code Length (Variableor 4 - 12 Digits) 44 I 55 I 55 Auto RoomStatusConversionI WakeupPrintTimer VacantI ReservedRoomDefaut Call Restriction OccupiedFtoomDefaultCallRestriction ReceiversReservedfor Non-Auto-AttendantUse TonePlan RESERVED RESERVED y-y-+ RESERVED RESERVED 64 1 64 1 64 RESERVED 65 1 65 1 65 .--* Not available in Generic 1ooz. f* Not available in Generic 1005 FPGKl or Generic 1005 LIT96. w Not available in Generic 1003 (Non-ACD) and Generic 1002. 38 39 40 141w . (continued) 9109-096-21 D-NA System Option status 38 39* 40 I 41** Issue 1 Revision 0 Page 2 of 2 210 B-15 Customer Data Entry FORM 05 - TENANT INlEi?CONNECl/ON FORM 05 - TENANT INTERCONNECTION ._ Tenant Name TABLE Tenant I I I I I I I I I I TABLE I I Number I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i r 20 21 22 23 24 25 Page 1 of 1 210 B-16 Revision 0 91094X6-21 O-NA Issue 1 I Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 06 - TENANT NIGHT SWITCHING CONTROL FORM 06 -TENANT NIGHT SWITCHING CONTROL Tenant Number Tenant Name I -1o1o1o1olo1o1o1o1o11I’11l1l111l’1’l’1’l2l2l2 '2345676901234567690,12345 17 16 19 20 21 22 23 I I II II II 24 25 Page 1 of 1 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-17 Customer Data Entry FORM 07 - CONSOLE ASSlGNMElVTS IFORM 07-CONSOLE ASSIGNMENTS . 210 B-18 Revision 0 9109-09621O-NA Issue 1 Appendix FORM 08 -ATTENDANT B - Blank CDE Forms LDN ASSIGNMENTS Sheet - of I I FORM 08 -ATTENDANT LDN ASSIGNMENTS Bay/Slt/Cct:: Console Extension Number: -KEY DIR NUMBER LABEL COMMENTS 2 4 5 6 7 I 6 . 9109-096-21 I I . . O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-19 Customer Data Entrv FORM 09 - STATION / SUPERSETTELEPHONES Sheet m- I I FORM of 09 - STATION / SWERSETTELEPHONES I I I * The NAME & ASSOC fields are not available in Generic 1001 and Generic 1002. Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA issue 1 i Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 09” - “EXPAND SET” SUBFORM SUPERSETTelephone h lines Sheet -- ._ of lFORM OW- SUPERSETTELEPHONE LINES * The SUPERSET has 3 line keys, the SUPERSET has 15 Line keys, the SUPERSET has 6 Line keys, all other sets have 12 Line keys. * The DSS field is not available in Generic 1001 or Generic 1002. * The LABEL field is not available in Generic 1001, Generic 1002 or Generic 1003. 9109-096-210-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-21 Customer Data Entry FORM 09* - “EXPAND SET” SUBFORM SUPERSETDSS Module I FORM Oti* - SUPERSET (This subform does not apply to Generic Lines DSS MODULE LINES 1001 or Generic 1002.) Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 10 - PlCKUP GROUPS Sheet -- of FORM 10 - PICKUP GROUPS ..L GROUP 1 GROUP 1 GROUP NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER (1 - 50): NUMBERS EXTENSION NUMBERS EXTENSION NUMBERS (1 - 50): (1 - 50): I 9109-096-21 EXTENSION O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 I 210 B-23 Customer Data Entrv FORM II - DATA ClRCUiT DESCRIPTORS FORM 11 - DATA CIRCUIT DESCRIPTORS is form does not a to Generic 1001 24 25 * This field is automatically updated by the system based on entries in Form 12. 210 524 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix 6 - Blank CDE Foms FORM II*- “SELECT OPTION” SUBFORM Data Circuit Descriptor FORM Ii*- Options DATA CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR OPTIONS MaximumBaud Rate DSRls Held Hlgh When Deviceis Idle YESor NO YESor NO ASYNC: Keyboard Origination Allowed(Auto Baud) ENABLEor DISABLE .’ : i ASYNC: ADL Auto Baud ENABLEor DISABLE ASYNC: Flow Control CTS,XON/XOFF, NONE,PIN25HI/CTSor PIN25LOICTS Page 1 of 2 910949&2104A Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-25 Customer Data Entry FORM ll*- (continued) DATA CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR OPTIONS ASYNC:’ PBXAttention Character ASYNC: Autobaud to Host Character1 0 -127, Decimalvalueof ASCIIcode ASYNC: Autobaud to Host Character2 0 -127, Decimalvalueof ASCIIcode ASYNC: Delay BetweenAutobaud Characters 0 - 1270msec(10 msecincrements) DS2100: Operating Mode ASYNCHRONOUS or SYNCHRONOUS SYNC: Rate Adaptation Scheme MiNETor X.31 SYNC: Clock Source INTERNAL,SYSTEM,TX MT or TX 8 FIXMT Paae 2 of 2 . 210 B-26 Revision 0 9109-096-21 D-NA Issue 1 nnI Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 12 - DATA ASSIGNMENT Sheet -- of FORM 12 - DATA ASSIGNMENT .._ _’ (This I form I does not apply I 9109-09&21O-NA I to Generic I 1001) I Issue 1 I Revision 0 I I 210 527 Customer Data Entry FORM 13 - TRUNK ClRCUlT DESCRlPTORS I FORM 13 -TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTORS 22 23 24 25 210 528 Revision 0 9109-098-21 O-NA Issue 1 FORM 113*- “SELECT OPTION” SUBFORM 4-Circuit CO / 4-Circuit DISA Trunks FORM 13* -TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR OPTIONS _’ 4-CIRCUl’T CO TRUNKand TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR NUMBER (1 - 25) \ Page 1 of 1 . 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-29 Customer Data Entry FORM 73*6-Ckcuif “SELECT OPT/ON” SUBFORM CO / 6-Circuif DISA Trunks Sheet m- FORM 13* - TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR I (continued) OPTIONS I I I I I I I Paae 210 B-30 Revision 0 of 9109-096-21 O-NA I I 1 of 1 Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 13*- “SELECT OPT/ON” SUBFORM E&M Module / E&M Module DISA Trunks FORM 13* - TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR OPTIONS E&M MODULE and TRUNK E&M MODULE DISA OPTIONS I Reverseto Idle -1 CIRCUIT -2 -3 (continued) DESCRIPTOR -4 -5 -6 NUMBER -7 (I- -0 -9 25) -0 YESor NO Far-End GivesAnswer Supervision ~Inhibit Automatic Supervision YESorNO 1 No SeizeAlarm YESor NO No ReleaseAlarm YESor NO ~Toll Olfice YESor NO Is this a CO YESor NO MYF YESor NO SaveBusy-Out Status YESor NO E Lead Invert YESor NO ~M Lead Invert * for Type5 operation* YESor NO DisconnectTimer 150- 300 ms (50ms inc) Flash OverTrunk YESor NO lnterdlgit Timer 300-6OOms(iOOmsinc) Wait For DelayTimer 300 - 5000 ms (100ms inc) Remote End Is a Satellite YESor NO Remote End Is a Satellitewith OPSLines YESor NO Impedance 6OOOhmsorCOMPLEXI ** usethe DIPswitchon the moduleto program* / ( ( 1 ( 1 I ( 1 Paae 1 of 1 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-31 Customer Data Enttv FORM 73*- “SELECT OPTION” SUBFORM E&M Card / E&M Card DISA Trunks IFORM 13*-TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR E&M CARD and OPTIONS 1TRUNK E&M TRUNK DISA OPTIONS -1 Reverse to Idle YESor NO Far-End Gives Answer Supervlslon YES or NO Inhibit Automatic Supervision YESor NO No Seize Alarm YESor NO No Release Alarm YESorNO 1 Toll Office YESor NO Is this a CO YES or NO DTMF YES or NO Save Busy-Out Status YES or NO Remote End is a Satellite YESor NO Remote End is a Satellite with OPS Lines YESor NO Dictation Trunk YESor NO -2 (continued) CIRCUIT -3 DESCRIPTOR -4 -5 -6 I Impedance 600 NUMBER -7 I -‘e I -0 I I Ohmsor COMPLEX I Paae 210 B-32 (1 - 25) 1 -6 I I Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA 1 of 1 Issue 1 I 5nI Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 13* - “SELECT OPT/ON mSUBFORM Z-Circuit D/D/T/E / Z-Circuit TIE DiSA Trunks Sheet -m of FORM 13* - TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR E&M CARD and OPTIONS (continued) 1TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR NUMBER (1 - 25) Paae 1 of 1 910949&21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-33 Customer Data Entry FORM 13*t&Circuit “SELECT OP7-..ON” SUBFORM DID Trunk Sheet -- l FORM 19 -TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR 6-CIRCUlT DID OPTIONS of (continued) TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR NUMBER (1 - 25) OPTfONS -1 Reverseto Idle YESor NO Far-End GivesAnswer Supervision YESor NO lnhlbit Automatic Supervlslon YESor NO No SeizeAlarm YESor NO No ReleaseAlarm YESor NO Toll Office YESor NO -3 -2 -4 -5 -5 -7 -h .L5 -0 1 Isthlsa CO DTMF YESor NO SaveBusy-Out Status YESor NO DisconnectTimer ReleaseAcknowledge Timer GuardTimer I I 1 1 I I I I I I I 200 - 1000ms (100ms inc) IMMED,WINKor DELAY DebouncsTimer 20 - 150 ms (10ms inc) 150 - 300 rns(50ms inc) I RemoteEnd is a Satellite YESor NO RemoteEnd Is a Satellitewlth OPSLines YESor NO I Impedance I 2-12osec 1 StartType 1 WinkTimer I 150 - 300 ms (50ms inc) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 600 Ohmsor COMPLEX1 I Pane 210 B-34 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA 1 of 1 Issue 1 5n I Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 13* - “SELECT OPT/ON” SUBFORM 17 E&M / 17 E&M DISA Trunks Sheet w- FORM 13* - TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR Tl E&M and OPTIONS of I (continued) TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR NUMBER (1 - 25) Tl E&M DISA OPTIONS 9109-09&21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-35 1 Customer Data Entry FORM 13*- “SELECT OPTION” SUBFORM TI DID/TIE / TI TIE DISA Trunks Sheet -- FORM IF-TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR OPTIONS of (continued) I Tl DID/TIE and 1 TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR NUMBER (1 - 25) 1 Tl TIE DISA OPTIONS Paae 1 of 1 210 B-36 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 I Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM f3* - “SELECT OPTION” SUBFORM T1 LS/GS / TI CO DISA Trunks Sheet -- FORM 13* - TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR OPTIONS of (continued) _’ Tl LS/GS TRUNK and FlashType TRUNK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTOR NUMBER LOOP FLASH or RINGGROUND Flash OverTrunk Interdigit Timer YESor NO 300 - 800 ms (100 ms inc) Pane 9109496-21 (1 - 25) O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 1 nf 1 210 B-37 I Customer Data Entry FORM 14 -NON-DIAL-IN TRUNKS Sheet -- of l 1 FORM 14 - NON-DIAL-IN :. .- rBAY 1SLT rrCCT I TRUNKS COS TEN CDN 1TKNUM 1 TKNAME 1 COMMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I II I II I I I I I I 210 B-38 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 i miI Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms .’ FORM 15 - DIAL-IN TRUNKS Sheet -- . IFORM 15 - DIAL-IN TRUNKS 9109-09&21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 of Customer Data Entry FORM 16 - TRUNK GROUPS sheet m- of I I FORM 16 -TRUNK GROUPS Trunk Group’s Function: TRUNK GROUP NUMBER (I- 50): HUNTING (Terminal or Circular): TRUNK GROUP NAME: SMDR (YES or NO): TRUNK NUMBERS 1 Trunk Group’s Function: TRUNK GROUP NUMBER (I- I 50): HUNTING (Terndnal or Circular): TRUNK GROUP NAME: SMDR (YES or NO): . 1 Trunk Group’s Function: I 1 TRUNK GROUP NUMBER (1 - 50): 1 TRUNK GROUP NAME: 1 HUNTING (Terminal or Circular): 1 SMDR (YES or NO): I 210 B-40 I TRUNK NUMBERS Revision 0 I 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Form FORM 17 - HUNT GROUPS Sheet -- of FORM 17 - HUNT GROUPS _’ 1 Hint Group’s Function: \ HUNTING (Terminal or Circular): OPTIONS Overflow (‘): Msg Length (*) (mm:ss): Default Destination (? I Wait For Resources (3)(mm:@: Dialing Over Recording @)(Y/N): 1 Prefix Digits@: DTRX t4)(Y/N): Default Modem Groupt4) (Y/N): EXTENSION NUMBERS (1 Does not apply to GROUP TYPE “RECORDING” (3 I Applies only to GROUP TYPE “AUTO-All (1 or “AUTC-AIT 2) Applies only to GROUP TYPE “RECORDING” “MODEM” I4) Applies only to GROUPTYPE or “AUTO-ATT - 100) in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005 I Hunt Group’s Function: HUNT GROUP NUM (1 - 50 * ): ACCESS CODE: HUNTING (Terminal or Circular): GROUP TYPE: HUNT GROUP NAME: OPTIONS Overflow (? 1 Msg Length (*) (mm:ss): Default Destination t3): Dialing Over Recordfngt3) (Y/N): Wait For Resources c3)(mm:ss): Prefix Diglts t3): 1 DTRX t4)(Y/N): 1 Default Modem GrOUDf4) (YIN): EXTENSION NUMBERS 1) Does not apply to GROUP TYPE ‘RECORDING” or “AUKbAll I3) Applies only to GROUP TYPE “AUTO-All (1 - 100) in Generic 1004 and Generic 1005 2 Applies only to GROUP TYPE “RECORDING” II4 Applies only to GROUP TYPE “MODEM R~vininn fl or “AUTO-All 3in Rdi Customer Data Entrv FORM 18 - MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM PORTS ELLANEOUS 210 B-42 SYSTEM PORTS Revision 0 910943%21O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms /=O/?M 19 - CALL REROUWVG TABLE Sheet-of FbRM 19 - CALL REROUTING - TABLE r TENANT NUMBER (1 - 25): 7 TYPE OF CALL DAY Nl N2 Station Dial 0 Routing 1 Priority Dial 0 Routing I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I a I I DID Recall Point on Busy DID Recall Point on No Answer DID Routing for Calls into this Tenant 1 DID Illegal # Intercept for this Tenant DID Vacant Number Routing for this Tenant DID Attendant Access Night Points Non Dial-m Trunk Alternate Recall Points Dial-In Tie Recall Points on Busy Dial4 Tie Recall Points on No Answer Dial4 I Tie Routing for Calls into thisTenant Dial-in Tie Illegal # Intercept for this Tenant I Dial-ln Tie Vacant Number Routing for this Tenant Dial-ln Tie Attendant Access Night Points I DND Intercept Routing for this Tenant Automatic Wakeup Routing for this Tenant I UCD/Attendant Recording for this Tenant I UCD On Hold Time-out for this Tenant DISA Day Service Routing for this Tenant Station Vacant Number Routing for this Tenant I Station Illegal Number Routing for this Tenant CO Line Reroutina Points on No Answer I I I I ‘. 91094962104A Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-43 Customer Data Entry FORM 20 - ARS: CLASS OF RESTRKX’ON GROUPS I FORM 20 - ARS: CLASS OF RESTRICTION GROUPS ICOMMENTS: 1 COR GROUP I NUMBER (l-50): COR GROUP MEMBERS (Enter the COR Number of the denied decices below) 1 COMMENTS: I . 1 COR GkOUP NUMBER (1 - 50): COR GROUP MEMBERS (Enter the COR Number of the denied decices below) I I COMMENTS: 210 B-44 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Form FORM 2f - ARS: DAY ZONE DEFlNlTlON FORM 21 - ARS: DAY ZONE DEFINITION I . 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B45 Customer Data Entrv FORM 22 - AK: MOD/F/ED D/G/T TABLE Sheet m- of FORM 22 - ARS: MODIFIED DIGIT TABLE (1 - 50) for Generic 210 B-46 1001 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 23- ARS: ROUTE DEFlNlTlON Sheet -- 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 of I FORM 24 - ARS: ROUTE LIST DCbUNlJ WI lnlnu WI ruunln WI rH-Ill WI SIAIII WI ; 1 -2 n 210 B-48 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 25 - AR3 ROUTE PLANS Sheet m- of FORM 25 - ARS: ROUTE PLANS ROUTE PLAN (I- 50): Route Plan Function : ROUTE PIAN 50): Route Plan Function : (I- DAY 2 3NE 1 s TIME ZONE I START HOUR DAY ZONE 3 DAY 2 3NE 2 ROUTE LIST START HOUR ROVTE LIST START HOUR ROUrE LIST 01 02 03 04 05 ROUTE PLAN (I- 50): Route Plan Function DAY ZONE 1 DAY ZONE 2 ZONE I START HOUR 1 ROWE LIST 9109-096210-NA Issue : 1 START HOUR Revision ROUTE LIST 0 DAY ZONE 3 START HOUR ROUTE LIST 310 R-AQ Customer Data Entry FORM 26 - AR3 D/G/T STRlNGS 1FORM 26 - ARS: DIGIT STRINGS LEADING DIGITS 210 f340 RETURN DIAL TONE Revision 0 RESTRICTED 9109-096-21 COR GROUP O-NA InslIe 1 Awendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 26* - “SHOW STRINGS” SUBFORM ARS: Nested Digit Strings Sheet m- of FORM 26* - ARS: NESTED DIGIT STRINGS Lt%DING DIGITS: RETURN DIAL TONE: DIGITS TO BE ANALYSED 9109-09&21 O-NA Issue 1 QTYTO FOLOW RESTRICTED COR: GROUP: LONG DISTANCE Revision 0 TERM TYPE AND NUM Customer Data Entrv FORM 27 - ARS: MAXIMUM I FORM 27 - ARS: MAXIMUM ‘-COR \ I DIALED DIGITS DIALED DIGITS MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIALED DIGITS 2 3 4 I 9 I 10 11 12 I 13 ! 14 15 I 16 I 17 I ia 19 20 I 21 ! 22 23 24 25 210 B-52 Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue1 FORM 28 -FORM ACCESS RESTRlCllON DEF’N FORM 28 - FORM ACCESS RESTRICTION FC)RM NAME INST FORM I= SYSTEM FORM FORM 2 = FEATURE 3 = CLASS FORM 4 = SYSTEM OPTIONS FORM 5 = TENANT INTERCONNECTION Fuw FORM 6 = TENANT NIGHT Fvw FORM 7 = CONSOLE ASSIGNMENT IN ASSIGNMENT ~~ .._.._ A-ITENDANTLI R/w RAN .*.. STATION R/w FORM81 CONFIGURATION ACCESS FORM 9 = FORM FORM 10 = PICKUP GROUP 11 = DATA CIRCUIT DFSCRlPTnR FORM 12 = DATA ASSIGNMENT FORM 13 = TRUNK =ORM 14 = NON-DIAL-IN -0RM 15 = DIAL-INTRUNKS -0RM 16 = TRUNK . RMI I Y.. .-.. w DESCRIPTOR R/w TRUNKS GROUP. R/w RMI . *.. S 18 = MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FORM 30 = DEVICE INTERCONNECTION FORM 31= ABBREVIATED FORM 32 = CDE FORM 33 = ACCOUNT FORM 35 = GLOBAL FORM 37 = GUEST =ORM 44 = Tl -0RM 45 = KEY SYSTEM TELEPHONES -0RM 46 = KEY SYSTEM TOLL SYSTEM 9109-096-21 ww . .. GROUPS :OORM 17 = HUNT =ORM ATT R/w / SUPERSETTELEPHONES CRICUIT SUPER R/w /TIMERS ---- MAINT2 R/w DEFINE SWITCHING -...--. MAINTl ww CODES OF SERVICE -. DEF’N DATA PORTS TABLE DIAL ENTRY PRINT CODE ENTRY F RM SUPERSET NEIWORK O-NA KEYS SYNCHF CONTROL Issue 1 - .,.. R/w RMI Revision 0 210 853 Customer Data Entry FORM 29 - DTE PROFLE FORM 29 - DTE PROFILE (This form does not apply to Generic 1001) PROFILE NUMBER \ NUMBER OF DATA SETS A AmmA.lFm YA331UNClJ I I COMMENTS 1 2 3 4 5 I 6 I 8 I 9 I 10 I 11 -r- 14 I 15 I 16 17 18 19 I I I I 20 21 22 23 24 25 * This field is automaticah 210 B-54 undated bv the svstem based on entries Revision 0 in Form 12. 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Form FORM 29* - “SELECT OPTION” SUBFORM DTE Profile Options IFORM 29* - DTE PROFILE OPTIONS DTE PROFILE DTE OPTIONS -1 -2 -3 -4 NUMBER(1 -5 -5 -7 - 25) -5 -9 -0 Terminal Type VIDEO TERM or TELEPRINTER Paae 1 of 1 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-55 I Customer Data Entry FORM 30 - DEVICE lA/TERCOlVlVECT’ON TABLE I FORM 3@- DEVICE INTERCONNECTION TABLE DEVICE TYPE RESERVED 210 B-56 25 Revision 0 910949621 O-NA Issue 1 RnI Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 31- SYSTEM ABBREVIATED D/AL ENTRY Sheet m- of I l=QRM 31- _’ SYSTEM ABBREVIATED DIAL ENTRY INDEX NUMB \ 9109-09&21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-57 I Customer Data Entry FORM 33 -ACCOUNT IFORM 33 .r ACCOUNT 210 B-58 CODE ENTRY CODE ENTRY Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 34 - DIRECTED I/O Sheet -l ..’ I of I FCJRM 34 - DIRECTED I/O I (This form does 9109-096-21 not apply O-NA to Generic 1001) Issue 1 I Revision 0 Customer Data Entry FORM 36 -MODEM ASSIGNMENT Sheet -- of FORM 36 - MODEM ASSIGNMENT (l-t& form doe; not apply to Generic 1001 Generic 1002 or Generic 1005 FPKGl and Generic 1005 LIT96.) I f 210 B-60 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 4 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 37 - GUEST ROOM SUPERSETKEYS TEMPLATES Sheet 1 of 2 (This form does not apply to Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.) TEMPLATE 9109-096-2104A Issue 1 2 Revision 0 210 B-61 Customer Data Enttv Sheet 2of 2 FORM 37 - GUEST ROOM SUPERSETKEYS TEMPLATE TEMPLATE KEYI ? TYPE I (continued) 3 SPEED CALL NUMBER 1 PRIVATE 1 ._ 3 4 5 - ; ’ 6 7 I I 210 B-62 Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 38 - ACD KEYS TEMPLATES Sheet 1 of 5 FORM 38 - ACD KEYS TEMPLATE @I& form does 9109-096-21 not apply O-NA to Generic 1001 Issue 1 Generic 1002, Generic 1005 FPKGl AGENT TEMPLATE 1 AGENT TEMPLATE 2 Revision 0 or Generic 1005 LIT96.) Customer Data Entrv Sheet 2 of 5 IFORM 38 - ACD KEYS TEMPLATE AGENT TEMPLATE (continued) 1 1 PRIVATE 1 I I I I 9 SPEED CALL NUMBER 7 8 9 10 11 SUPERVISOR 1 KEY 1 210 B-64 TEMPLATE 1 SPEED CALL NUMBER Revision 0 9109-096-21 1 PRIVATE O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms Sheet 3 of 5 SUPERVISOR KEY TYPE TEMPLATE 3 SPEED CALL NUMBER PRIVATE 2 3 4 5 I 8 9 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-65 Customer Data Entry Sheet 4 of 5 FORM 38 - ACD KEYS TEMPLATE (continued) SENIOR SUPERVISOR I 210 B-66 TEMPLATE 1 SENIOR SUPERVISOR TEMPLATE 2 Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA I Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms Sheet 5 of 5 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-67 Customer Data Entry FORM 39 - ACD AGENT GROUPS Sheet -- 210 B-68 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA of Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 39” - “SELECT OPTiONS” SUBFORM ACD Agent Group Opfions Sheet of I FORM 39* - ACD AGENT GROUP OPTIONS ACD Group Number \ (1 - 50): ACD Group Name: OPTIONS I Afterwork Timer 1 STATUS (mm:@ 0O:OO- 15:OO (default 0O:OO) Overflow Timer (mm:%) 0O:OO- 54:00 (default 09:OO) First Status Threshold (mm:@ 0O:OO- 54:00 (defautt 03:OO) Second Status Threshold (mm:ss) 0O:OO- 54:00 (default 06:OO) IACD Group Number (1 - 50): I Timer First Status Threshold (mm:ss) 0O:OO- 54:00 (default 03:OO) Second Status Threshold (mm:+ (defautt 06:OO) (1 - 50): I 0O:OO- 54:00 Timer 1 STATUS (mm:ss) 0O:OO- 15:OO (defautt 0O:OO) Overflow Timer (mm:@ First Status Threshold (mm:ss) 0O:OO- 54100 (defautt 03:OO) Second Status Threshold (mm:@ ACD Group Number (1 - 50): 0O:OO- 54:00 (defautt 09:OO) 0O:OO- 54:00 (default 06:OO) Overflow Timer (mm:@ Timer 1 STATUS 0O:OO- 15:00 (default 0O:OO) (mm:ss) 0O:OO- 54:00 (default 09:OO) First Status Threshold (mm:ss) 0O:OO- 54:00 (default 03:OO) Second Status Threshold fmm:ssj 9109-096-21 O-NA I ACD Group Name: OPTIONS Afterwork 1 ACD Group Name: OPTIONS Aftemork STATUS (mm:ss) 0O:OO- 15:OO (default 0O:OO) (mm:ss) 0O:OO- 54:00 (default 09:OO) Number I ( Overflow Timer IACD Group I ACD Group Name: OPTIONS Afterwork I Issue 1 0O:OO- 54:00 fdefaut 06:OOI Revision 0 210 B-69 1 Customer Data Entry FORM 40 - ACD SUPERVISORS street -- of I I 1FORM 40 - ACD SUPERVISORS (i”hi; fokn dok not apply to Generic SENIOR SUPERVISOR ID 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96.) NAME Revision 0 cos 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 40* - “EXPAND n SUBFORM FORM 40 - ACD Senior Supervisor Groups Sheet -- of FORM 40 - ACD SENIOR SUPERVISOR GROUPS Sthior Supervisor 1 ACDGROUP 91 MuK~f,-21 ID: NUMBER O-NA Senior Supervisor 1 SUPERVISOR lSSllc? 1 ID 1 Revision Name: SUPERVISOR 0 NAME I cos 31l-l u-71 I Customer Data Entry FORM 41- ACD PATH Sheet -- of FORM 41 -ACD PATH (This form does not apply to Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1005 FPKGl or Generic 1005 LIT96.) ACD Path Number (1 - 99): ACD Path Name: OPTIONS IAccess 1 STATUS Code for this ACD Path I I Primary ACD Agent Group Delay for Ringback Recording 1: Start Time Recording 1: Access Code Recording 1: Music Source Following Recording 2: Start Time Recording 2: Access Code Recording 2: Music Source Following Recording 3: Start Time Recording 3: Access Code Recording 3: Music Source Following Recording 4: Start Time Recording 4: Access Code Recording 4: Music Source Following 1 Overflow 1 Auent Group . Overflow 2 Agent Group Overflow 3 Agent Group (mm:@ 0O:Ol - 54:00 (mm:@ (default 00:03) O&O0 - 54:00 (mm:ss) 0O:OO- 54:00 (mm:+ 0O:OO- 54:00 (mm:@ 0O:OO- 54:00 I I I1 I I interflow Enable YES or NO (default = NO) interflow Timeout (mm:ss) 0O:Ol - 54:00 (default = 54:00) interflow Point Access Code (defautt = DROP CALL) I Allow Overflow to inter-flow Point before Timeout (default = NO) Priority 1 -99 (default = 99, the lowest priority) Service Time fmm:ss\ 0O:Ol - 54%) (default = 03:OOj 210 B-72 1 Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 42 - TI LlNK DESCRIPTORS FORM 42 - Tl LINK DESCRIPTORS (This form does not apply to Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.) DESCRIPTOR 1 LINKTYPE 1 NUM OF LINKS ASSIGNED* 1 FORM 42* - “SELECT OPTION fl SUBFORM FORM 42* - Tl LINK DESCRIPTOR OPTIONS YES or NO . (0 - 9000/24 hrs Slip Rate - Network f0 - 9000/24 hrs (default Sync Limit (default = 7000) = 7) BER - Maintenance Limit (default = 4) (lo* -n, n= 3, 4, 5, 6)/hr BER - Service Limit (default = 3) (lo* +I, n= 3, 4, 5, 6Vhr Framing Losses - Maintenance Limit (0 - 9000)/24 hrs (default = 255) Framing Losses - Service Limit (0 - 9000/24 hrs (default = 9000) RTS Timer - Service Limit Exceeded (default = 30) 1 -225 min RTS Timer - Net Slip Limit Exceeded 1 -225 min (default = 30) FITS Timer - After Alarm 1 -225 min (default 9109-09&21O-NA Issue 1 q 30) Revision 0 COMMENTS Customer Data Entry FORM 43 - TI LlNK ASSIGNMENTS Sheet m- of 1FORM 43 - Tl LINK ASSIGNMENTS I (This foim doe:-not 210 B-74 apply to Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.) Revision 0 9109496-21 O-NA Issue 1 Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 44 - TI NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION 44 - Tl NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION I FORM -“(This form does not apply to Generic 1001 or Generic 1002.) I , DESCRIPTION I BAY 1 SLOT 1 COhMENTS First Clock Source Second Clock Source Third Clock Source Fourth Clock Source I I I Fifth Clock Source Sixth Clock Source Seventh Clock Source Eighth Clock Source 910949&21&NA issue 1 Revision 0 210 B-75 Customer Data Entry FORM 45 - KEY SYSTEM TELEPHONES sheet -- h of 1 FORM 45 - KEY SYSTEM TELEPHONES (Thi$ form 1 I 210 576 does I not apply I to Generic I 1001, Generic I 1002 or Generic I I 1003.) I Revision 0 I I 9109-096-21 I O-NA I Issue 1 ma I Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 45* - “EXPAND SET” SUBFORM KEY SYSTEM - Telephone Lines Sheet -- FORM 45* - KEY SYSTEM TELEPHONE Bay/sitcct LINES Set Type: I I t The SUPERSET I Extension Number: I I has 6 Line keys, all other sets have 12 Line keys. Set Type: ~ t The SUPERSET 9109-096-21 O-NA of Extension Number: has 6 Line keys, all other sets have Issue 1 12 Revision 0 Line keys. 210 B-77 Customer Data Entry FORM 45* - “EXPAND SET” SUBFORM KEY SYSTEM - SUPERSETDSS Module Lines Sheet m- of IFORM 45* - KEY SYSTEM 210 578 SUPERSET DSS MODULE LINES Revision 0 9109-096-21 O-NA Issue 1 BnI Appendix B - Blank CDE Forms FORM 46 KEY SYSTEM TOLL CONTROL Sheet -- of FORM 46 - KEY SYSTEM TOLL CONTROL (This form does not apply 9109-09&21&NA to Generic 1001, Issue 1 Generic 1002 or Generic 1003.) Revision 0 210 B-79 Customer Data Entry _’ 210 B-80 ._ Revision 0 9109-096-21O-NA Issue 1 SX-200@ DIGITAL PABX ._ \ Troubleshooting m,@--TmdemarkolMblcolpomtlo”. 0 CopyrIght lw2, MM Corpomuan. All tights msawd. Printed In Canada MITEL 8 Troubleshooting .’ ._ NOTICE The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mite1Corporation (MITELB). The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mite1and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes. DEC and VT100 are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation, Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Table of Contents 1. INTRODUCTION HowtoUsethis Reasonforlssue Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . , . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . , . , = 350 l-l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 l-l 2. TROUBLESHOOTING - GENERAL EmergerqKProcedures . . . . . . . . ..I........................................... Main Control Card Power-Up Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Methodology . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Gathering and Problem Clarification . . . . . . Problem Confirmation . . . . . . d. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Problem Isolation . . . . . . , . . , , . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . Correction and Documentation ................... 3. PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT TROUBLESHOOTING ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ............. ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... . . m. . .. . .’ .. .. .. .. .. 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 2-l 2-3 2-10 2-10 2-l 0 2-12 2-12 2-12 PROCEDURES Peripheral Interface Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 3-1 ONS / OPS / Station Line Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 3-1 COV / SUPERSm Line Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . 350 3-2 DigitalLineCard.....................................................,... 350 3-3 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 3-3 SHOW ERRORS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 3-4 Additional Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 3-5 Trunk Cards -General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 3-7 Supplemental E&M Trunk Card Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 3-11 Supplemental DID / Loop-Tie Trunk Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . B . . 350 3-12 Ti(DS-l)Trunk . . ..111.........I,I,,...,IIII,.......,...II.....II...I,I 350 3-14 Universal Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I.....,, 350 3-18 DTMFReceivers/Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. B.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , , 350 3-18 MusicOnHold(MOH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~. . . . . . . . . ..=..... . . . . . . . . . . . . ..3503-19 Pager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..=..~... 350 3-20 Analog Junctors / Channels . . . m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . 350 3-20 SpecialSets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~.....................................~.. 350 3-23 AttendantConsole-LCDConsole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..s.... 350 3-25 Attendant Console - SUPERCONSOLE 1000” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , 350 3-27 SUPERSET3” Telephone . . . . . . . 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ . . 350 3-28 SUPERSETBB Telephone . . . . . m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s . . . 350 3-30 SUPERSET3” DN Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m. . . . 350 3-33 SUPERSET4”DNTelephone SUPERSET407” Telephone SUPERSET41O”Telephone SUPERSET 9109-096-35O-NA 420” Telephone Issue 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~.......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3503-35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . 350 3-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lll.l.l.ll.... *,.....,............1...1..1.11.1.. Revision 0 . . . ..m...m. . . . . . ..E... 350 3-39 350 341 ... III Troubleshooting SUPERSET 430” Telephone .............................................. SUPERSETDSS” Module ................................................ DATASET 1103 / DATASET 2103 (DTE Mode) ................................. DATASET 1103/2103 (DCE Mode) ......................................... DATASET .................................................... DATASET1102/DATASET2102 ........................................... Milink’” Data Module ..................................................... DATAtiABINm9000 ..................................................... Supplementary Peripheral Equipment Procedures .............................. 4. SUBSYSTEM s TROUBLESHOOTING 350 343 350 350 350 ..1 .. 350 350 350 350 350 PROCEDURES Main Control Card .......................................................... ........................................................... Configuration MainControlCardPower-UpTests ........................................ First-Step Checks ....................................................... Power-Up Sequence ..................................................... TroubleshootingProcedures ............................................... Digital Bay Control Subsystem ................................................. Configuration ........................................................... Bay Control Power-Up Tests ............................................... First-StepChecks ....................................................... ..................................................... Power-UpSequence ............................................... TroubleshootingProcedures Analog Bay Peripheral Control Subsystem ........................................ Configuration ........................................................... Peripheral Control Subsystem Power-Up Tests ................................ First-StepChecks ....................................................... Power-UpSequence ..................................................... Troubleshooting Procedures ............................................... Floppy Disk Subsystem ...................................................... Configuration ........................................................... Action in Case of Power Loss .............................................. Troubleshooting Procedures ............................................... PowerSubsystem ........................................................... BayPowerSupply ....................................................... SX-ZO@@ FD Control Cabinet Power Supply ................................... RearDoorPowerSupply .................................................. ......................................... UninterruptablePowerSupply(UPS) 5. MISCELLANEOUS TROUBLESHOOTING 350 4-l 350 4-l ..35041 350 4-l 350 4-l 350 4-2 350 4-6 350 4-6 350 4-6 350 4-6 350 4-6 350 4-6 350 4-10 3504-10 350 4-10 350 4-10 350 4-10 350 4-l 0 350 4-12 350 4-12 350 4-13 350 4-l 3 350 4-17 350 4-17 350 4-22 350 4-24 350 4-27 PROCEDURES MaintenanceTerminal ....................................................... SystemPrinters ............................................................ BackplanePrinterPort .................................................... SX-200 FD Control Cabinet Printer Port ...................................... Iv 3-45 347 3-55 3-57 3-61 3-68 3-73 3-76 Revision 0 350 350 350 350 9109-096-35O-NA 5-l 5-5 5-5 5-7 Issue 1 Table of Contents SUPERCONSOLE 7000 Printer Port ......................................... Dataset Printer Port ...................................................... ...................................................... CabinetCoolingSystem ......................................................... PowerFailTransfer 6-Circuit PFT Card ...................................................... ..................................................... 12-Circuit PFTCard SX-,200 FD System Fail Transfer Connector ................................... Modems/ModemPools ...................................................... Recorded Announcement Devices (PADS) ....................................... Night Bell Equipment ........................................................ Hotel/‘Motel ............................................................... Property Management System Interface ......................................... VoiceMaillnterface ......................................................... COVPortVoiceMail ..................................................... ONS PortVoice Mail ..................................................... Application Platform Package Feature Package ................................... 6. SOFTWARE TROUBLESHOOTING A. MAINTENANCE 6-l 6-5 6-8 6-11 6-l 5 6-16 6-17 6-20 350 A-l INFORMATION ......................... APPENDIX B. CALL PROCESSING APPENDIX C. TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX D. LOOP CURRENT APPENDIX E. LOOP START VS GROUND START CHECK APPENDIX MITEL REPAIR TAG .......................................... Issue 1 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 LOG MESSAGES General ................................................................... 9109-096-35O-NA 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-16 5-l 8 5-20 5-22 5-24 5-27 5-28 5-29 5-29 5-30 5-31 PROCEDURES KeySystemFeatures ........................................................ Hotel/Motel Feature Package .................................................. Sub-Attendant(EnhancedFunction) ............................................ Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) .............................................. Automatic Attendant Overflow (AAO) ............................................ AutomatedAttendant ........................................................ ............................................................ CallForwarding ...................................................... SUPERSETTelephones APPENDIX 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 y 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 KIT ................................... MEASUREMENT Revision 0 .......................... ................. 350 B-I 350 C-I 350 D-I 350 E-l 350 F-l V Troubleshooting List of Figures - Figure 2-l Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 24 Figure 2-5 Figure 3-i Figure 3-2 Figure 3-3 Figure 34 Figure35 Figure3-6 Figure 3-7 Figure 3-8 Figure 3-9 Figure 3-l 0 Figure 3-l 1 Figure 3-l 2 Figure 3-l 3 Figure 3-14 Figure 3-l 5 Figure 3-l 6 Figure 3-l 7 Figure 3-l 8 Figure 3-l 9 Figure 3-20 Figure 3-21 Figure 3-22 Figure 3-23 Figure 3-24 Figure 3-25 Figure 3-26 Figure 3-27 Figure 3-28 Figure 3-29 Figure 3-30 Figure 3-31 Figure 3-32 Figure 3-33 Figure 3-34 Figure 3-35 Figure 4-l vi Main Control Card - Flea Clip and Device Locations ..................... 336 / 480 / 456 Port Backplane ................................... 672 Port Backplane ............................................... 480 Port Backplane (Welded Cabinet) ................................ Main Control Card Module Locations ................................. Digital Interface Card ............................................. LS/GS Trunk Jumper Locations ..................................... E&M Trunk Module With Universal Card ............................. E&M Type 1 Trunk Testing ......................................... LoopTrunkTesting.. ............................................. TlTrunkCard.. ................................................. Tl Adapter Card and Cable Assembly Connections ...................... SX-200 FD Peripheral Node Rear View (with optional Tl Adapter) .......... Music, Paging, Relay and Console Connections ........................ Attendant Console ................................................ SURERSET General View ........................................ SUPERSET General View ........................................ SUPERSET Connections ......................................... SUPERSET3DN General View ..................................... SUPERSET 4DN General view ..................................... SUPERSET General View ...................................... SUPERSET General View ...................................... SUPERSET 420 General View ...................................... SUPERSET General View ...................................... SUPERSET DSS Module Configurations .............................. DATASET 1103/2103 Stand-alone DTE Configuration (ADL) ............... DATASET 2103 Indicators and Connectors ............................. DATASET 1103 Indicators and Connectors ............................. DATASET 1103 / DATASET 2103 Modem Configuration .................. DATASET 11 Ol/SUPERSET 4 DN Configuration ........................ DATASET 1101 Indicators and Connectors ............................. DATASET 2102 Card Connectors and Indicators ........................ DATASET 1102 Card Connectors and Indicators ........................ A&Link Data Module, Indicators and Connectors ......................... MiLink Data Module Configuration ................................... DATASHELF 9100 ................................................ Connections at Modem Interconnect Panel ............................. Modem Interconnect Panel ......................................... DATACABINET 9000 - Front View (Typical Installation) ................... DATACABINET 9000 Rear View (Typical Installation) ..................... Control Cards ................................................... Revision 0 350 25 ., .. 350 2-6 350 2-7 350 2-8 350 2-9 350 3-6 350 3-8 .' . 350 3-10 350 3-13 3503-13 3503-15 350 3-l 6 350 3-l 7 350 3-21 350 3-24 350 3-29 350 3-31 350 3-32 350 3-34 350 3-36 350 3-38 350 340 350 3-42 350 344 350 346 350 348 350 3-51 350 3-53 350 3-56 350 3-58 350 3-59 350 3-63 350 3-65 350 3-69 350 3-70 350 3-71 350 3-72 350 3-72 350 3-74 350 3-75 350 4-3 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Table of Contents Figure 4-2 Figure 4-3 Figure 44 Figure 4-5 Figure 4-6 Figure 4-7 Figure 4-8 Figure 4-9:Figure 4-l 0 Figure 4-l i Figure 4-l 2 Figure 4-13 Figure 4-l 4 Figure 4-l 5 Figure 4-l 6 Figure 4-l 7 Figure 4-l 8 Figure 5-1 Figure 5-2 Figure 5-3 Figure 5-4 Figure 5-5 Figure 5-6 Figure 5-7 Figure 5-8 Figure 5-9 Figure 5-l 0 Figure 5-l 1 Figure 5-12 Figure 5-13 Figure 5-14 Figure D-l . Figure E-l FigureF-1 SX-ZOO FD Control Cabinet Front View (front cover removed) . . . . . . . ~. . . , . SX-ZOO FD Control Cabinet Rear view . . . , , , . . . . . . , , . . . . . . ~, , , . . . . . . . Bay Control Card Device Locations .11...1.1......*11.......111....,. Fiber Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , II...,, Location of PCM Cables . . . . . . . , , , , , . . . . , . , , . . . . . . , , , , , , . , . , , , . . , i , 5 l/4” Disk Drives (Generic 1001 to Generic 1004) , , . , , , . , , . , , , , , , . m, , , , 5 l/4” Disk Drive PN 9109-124-OOO-NA (Generic 1001 to Generic 1004) . . , , 3 l/2” Disk Drives, PN940W00305-NA (Generic 1005) . . . . . . . . . . . m. . . , , Floppy Disk Driie Backplane Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a . . . . . 336 Port AC Distribution Panel and Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I 672 Port Control Cabinet AC Distribution Panel and Ground Connections . . . . . 672 Port Peripheral Cabinet AC Distribution Panel and Ground Connections .. Bay Power Supply and Fuse Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Node Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Door Power Supply indicators, Switches, Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Door Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Door Power Supply Power Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SX-ZOO DIGITAL Maintenance Panel . . . , , . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . SX-ZOO FD Peripheral Node Front View (front cover removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . PFT Card Locations .11111.....11..~...1.........111... . . . ..I..... 6-Circuit Power Fail Transfer Card . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . .I...,, PFT Connections (Control Cabinet - Most Variants) ..,,,........,.,...,I PFT Connections (672-Port Variant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m. . . . . . , PFT Cross-Connect Field Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-Circuit PFT Card Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SX-ZOO FD Peripheral Node Rear View (with optional Tl Adapter) . . . . . . . . . . Typical Pooled Modem Configuration ................................, Music, Paging, Relay and Console Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , Night Bell Auxiliary Relay Configuration ............................... PMS Configuration (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m. . . . . . . . . . . , APP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Line Current Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop Start Versus Ground Start Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TheMitelRepairTag . . . . . . . . . . “. m. . . . . . . . . . . . . s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 4-4 4-5 4-8 4-8 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 4-15 4-l 6 4-l 8 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-23 4-25 4-26 4-27 5-3 5-4 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-l 4 5-l 5 5-17 5-19 5-21 5-25 5-26 5-28 5-32 D-2 E-2 F-2 .350 .350 .350 .350 .350 l-l 2-l 2-3 2-l 2 3-l 4-12 4-14 4-14 List of Tables :\ Table Table Table Table Table l-l 2-1 2-2 2-3 3-l SX-200 DIGITAL Maintenance Related Practices Emergency Troubleshooting Procedures ........ Main Control Card Error Code Summary . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ONS Line Card Troubleshooting Summary ...... 910949m5O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 .. .. .. .. .. .. s. ,. .. .. . . . . . . . D. .... .... .... .... . . . . . .... .... .... .... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . . .. .... . . .. .... vii Troubleshootina - Table 3-2 Table 3-3 Table 3-4 Table 3-5 Table 3-6 Table 3-7 Table 3-8 ‘Table 3-9 Table 3-l 0 Table 3-i 1 Tabl\e 3-l 2 Table 3-l 3 Table 3-l 4 Table 3-l 5 Table 3-l 6 Table 3-l 7 Table 3-l 8 Table 3-l 9 Table 3-20 Table 3-21 Table 3-22 Table 3-23 Table 3-24 Table 3-25 Table 3-26 Table 3-27 Table 3-28 Table 3-29 Table 330 Table 331 Table 3-32 Table 3-33 Table 3-34 Table 3-35 Table 3-36 Table 3-37 Table 3-38 Table 3-39 Table 3-40 Table 3-41 Table 3-42 Table 3-43 Table 3-44 Table 345 ... VIII COV Line Card Troubleshooting Summary ............................. Digital Line Card Loop Lengths ...................................... SHOW ERRORS Command ........................................ Trunk Card Troubleshooting Summary ................................. Trunk Voltage and Loop Current Readings .............................. Supplementary E&M Trunk Troubleshooting Procedures .................. Supplementary DID / Loop-Tie Trunk Troubleshooting Procedures .......... Tl Trunk Card Troubleshooting Summary .............................. DTMF Receiver / Relay Troubleshooting Summary ...................... Music On Hold Troubleshooting Summary ......................... Pager Troubleshooting Summary ................................... Analog Junctor Troubleshooting Summary ............................. LCD Console Troubleshooting Summary .............................. Attendant Console Error Indications ................................... SUPERCONSOLE 7000 Troubleshooting Summary ...................... SUPERSET Troubleshooting Summary .............................. SUPERSET Troubleshooting Summary .............................. SUPERSET3DN Troubleshooting Summary ........................... SUPERSET4DN Troubleshooting Summary ........................... SUPERSET Procedures ........................................ SUPERSET Procedures ........................................ SUPERSET Procedures ........................................ SUPERSET 430 Procedures ....................................... SUPERSET DSS Module Troubleshooting Summary ..................... DATASET1103/DATASET2103-DTEMode ......................... DATASET 2100 Switch Settings (Mode Selection) ...................... DATASET 2100 Switch Settings (Asynchronous Flow Controt) ............ DATASET 2100 Switch Settings (Async Speed) ........................ DATASET 2100 Switch Settings (Sync Operating Mode Selection) ......... DATASET 2100 Switch Settings (Synchronous Clock Source) ............ DATASET 2100 Switch Settings (Sync Speed) ......................... DATASET 2103 LED Indicators ..................................... DATASETllO3 Indicators ......................................... DATASETll03/DATASET2103-DCE Mode ......................... DATASET 1101 Cartridge Unit ...................................... DATASETIIOI LEDs ............................................ DATASET 1102 / DATASET 2102 Troubleshooting Summary .............. DATASET 2102 LED Indicators ..................................... DATASET 1102 LED Indicators ..................................... Data Switching Device Status Indicators .............................. MiLink Data Module Procedures .................................... Milink Data Module LEDs ......................................... DATACABINET 9000 Troubleshooting Summary ........................ Supplementary Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Summary ........... Revision 0 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 .I .. 350 .350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 .350 350 .350 .350 ,350 .350 .350 .350 ,350 .350 .350 .350 .350 .350 .350 ,350 ,350 .350 .350 .350 .350 350 9109-096-35O-NA 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-7 3-9 3-11 3-12 3-l 4 3-l 8 3-19 3-20 3-22 3-23 3-25 3-27 3-28 3-30 3-33 3-35 3-37 3-39 3-41 3-43 3-45 3-47 3-48 3-49 3-49 3-49 3-50 3-50 3-52 3-54 3-55 3-57 3-60 3-61 3-64 3-66 3-67 3-68 3-70 3-73 3-76 Issue I Table of Contents Table 4-l Main Control Troubleshooting Summary .............................. Table 4-2 Digital Bay Control Troubleshooting Summary .......................... Table 4-3 Bay Control Card Status LEDs ....................................... Table 4-4 SX-200 FD FIM Status LEDs ...................................... Table 4-5 Analog Bay Control Troubleshooting Summary ......................... Table 4-6 Scanner Card Error Code Summary ................................. Table 4-7 Floppy Disk Troubleshooting Summary ................................ Table 4-8 .- Floppy Disk Drive Error Code Summary ............................... Table 4-9 Bay Power Supply Troubleshooting Summary ......................... Table 4-l 0 Bay Power Supply Test Point Voltages ............................... Table 4-l 1 SX-200 FD Control Node Power Supply Troubleshooting Summary ......... Table 4-l 2 SX-200 FD Control Node Power Supply Voltages ........................ Table 4-l 3 Rear Door Power Supply Troubleshooting Summary .................... Table 4-l 4 Rear Door Power Supply Test Point Voltages ........................... Table 5-l Maintenance Terminal Procedures .................................... Table 5-2 Control Resource Card Switch Settings .............................. Table 5-3 Backplane Printer Port Procedures .................................. Table 5-4 SX-200 FD Control Cabinet Printer Port Procedures .................... Table 5-5 SUPERCONSOLE 1000 Printer Port Procedures ........................ Table 5-6 Dataset Printer Port Procedures ..................................... Table 5-7 Cabinet Cooling System Troubleshooting Summary ...................... Table 5-8 6-Circuit PFT Card Troubleshooting Summary ......................... Table 5-9 12-Circuit PFT Card Troubleshooting Summary ........................ Table 5-l 0 SX-200 FD System Fail Transfer Connector Troubleshooting Summary ...... Table 5-l 1 SX-200 FD System Fail Transfer (SFIJ Connector ..................... Table 5-l 2 Modem / Modem Pool Troubleshooting Summary ...................... Table 5-l 3 RAD Troubleshooting Summary .................................... Table 5-l 4 Supplementary RAD Troubleshooting Procedures ....................... Table 5-l 5 Night Bell Troubleshooting Summary ................................ Table 5-l 6 Hotel / Motel Troubleshooting Summary .............................. Table 5-l 7 PMSProcedures ............................................... Table 5-l 8 COV Voice Mail Procedures ....................................... - Table 5-l 9 ONSVoiceMailProcedures ....................................... Table 5-20 APP Troubleshooting Summary .................................... Table 6-l Key System Troubleshooting ....................................... Table 6-2 Hotel/Motel Troubleshooting ........................................ Table 6-3 Enhanced Function Sub-attendant Troubleshooting ..................... Table 64 ACDTroubleshooting ............................................. Table 6-5 Auto Attendant Overflow Troubleshooting ............................. Table 6-6 Automated Attendant Troubleshooting ................................ Table 6-7 Call Forwarding Troubleshooting .................................... Table 6-8 SUPERSETTelephone Troubleshooting .............................. Table A-l Fault Reports .................................................. Table A-2 AlarmLogReports .............................................. 9109-09&35O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 ,350 4-2 350 4-7 350 4-9 .350 4-9 ,350 4-11 .350 4-11 350 4-l 3 350 4-l 5 .350 4-l 7 j. 350 4-21 .350 4-22 350 4-22 .350 4-24 350 4-24 350 5-l .350 5-2 .350 5-5 .350 5-7 350 5-8 350 5-9 350 5-l 0 .350 5-l 0 .350 5-l 6 350 5-l 8 .350 5-l 8 ,350 5-20 .350 5-22 .350 5-22 ,350 5-24 ,350 5-27 ..35 0 5-28 .350 5-29 ,350 5-30 .350 5-31 .350 6-l ,350 6-5 ,350 6-8 .3506-11 ,350 6-l 5 .350 6-l 6 .350 6-l 7 .350 6-20 ..35 0 A-2 ..35 0 A-21 ix Troubleshooting Table Table Table Table Table Table Table iable Table A-3 A4 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-6 B-l 52 B-3 AlarmResetReasons ........................................... Main Control Reset Log Reports ..................................... Bay Reset Log Reports ............................................. DIC Recovery Log Reports ....................................... Bay Log Reports ................................................ MiscellaneousLog Reports ....................................... Digital Bay to Digital Bay Call ........................................ Analog Bay to Analog Bay Call ....................................... Digital Bay to Digital Bay Call (672 Port System) ......................... ..35 0 350 350 ..35 0 ..35 0 ..35 0 350 350 350 A-22 A-22 A-23 A-23 A-24 A-25 B-l B-2 B-3 List of Charts Chart 2-1 X Information Gathering and Clarification . . . . , . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . , . . . 350 2-10 Revision 0 9109-09&35O-NA Issue 1 Table of Contents _’ 1.. FOR EMERGENCY TROUBLESHOOTING GO TO Table 2-l ON PAGE 350 2-l 9109-09EGW-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 xl Troubleshooting THE FOLLOWING POINTS SHOULD BE CAREFULLY NOTED AND THE INSTRUCTIONS STRICTLY OBSERVED : THEREIN ._ l l l l xii Handle circuit cards by the edges only, and ensure that a an&static damage may otherwise result, strap is used. Card Before replacing a card, remove the original card, check for bent or damaged tors, inspect the backplane, and reseat the original card. If a problem has been eliminated through the replacement of a card, sert the original card to verify that the fault is located therein. connec- temporarily rein- Always provide the maximum amount of relevant data on the card repair tag accompanying a faulty card (see Appendix F) - never return a card without a repair tag. l Return faulty cards, etc. to MITEL for repair. l Ensure that a system fault record is always up-to-date, Revision 0 and kept on site. 9109-09w5MA Issue I 1. INTRODUCTION -- Before troubleshooting is attempted, maintenance personnel should become very familiar with the SX-2Om DIGITAL maintenance system. A complete description of the maintenance system is provided in Practice 9109-096-353-NA, General Maintenance Information. Further maintenance related documentation may be found in the documents listed below: Table l-l SX-200 DIGITAL Maintenance 9109-096-l OO-NA 9109-098-l 0-A General Description Features Description 9109-098-l 8O-NA Engineering Information 9109-098-20CWA Installation Information 9109-098-21 O-NA Customer Data Entry 9109-09%351 -NA Maintenance Related Practices Commands 9109-09%358-NA General Maintenance 9109-098455-NA Field-Replaceable Information Units How to Use this Document 1.1 If the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is not functioning, refer to the Emergency Troubleshooting Procedures in Table g-l on page 350 2-1. If there is a problem or problems with a specific part, or parts of the system, consult the table of contents for the applicable entry. Reason for Issue 1.2 This document is intended to accompany all releases system. This is the first issue of this document. 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 of the SX-200 DIGITAL 350 l-l -- 350 l-2 Revision 0 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 2 ’ TROUBLESHOOTING - GENERAL Emergency 2.V Procedures When any switching machine is totally inoperative, the prime requirement is the restoration of service to the system or the part that has been affected. Table 9-I shows how to achieve this in the shortest possible time. Once service has been restored, the other procedures (see Table of Contents) may be used to determine the cause of the failure. Table 2-l Emergency Troubleshooting Procedures on the Main Control the front panel of the Main Control card. For 672~port nk, go to step 3; otherwise Systems: Check if the POWER ON indicator on the Bay Power Supply (BPS) of Bay 0 (Control Bay) is on (ensure switch is in ON position). l If the problem persists, go to step 6. Page 1 of 2 9109-096-35&NA issue 1 Revision 0 Troubleshooting Table 2-l Troubleshooting (continued) Description Check power rails and continuity on the backplane. See Figure 2-2 / Figure 2-3 / Figu.re 2-4. 8. Power down the Control Bay/FD Control ‘cabinet, remove the Main Control card, and check if EPROM IC is securely installed see Figure 2-5. Remove Tl clock module (ii present), replace flea clip W8 (ii pm-Rev A). See Figure 2-l. Does problem persist? / Follow-Up Verify that the required voltage signals actually are present at the Main Control card edge connectors. l Once verified, go to step 7. l 7. Procedures Action Step 6. Emergency Yes: Possible EPROM problem (check revision label) - replace Main Control card. 0 Install EPROM properly and go back to step 2. l No: No: Power down and replace the Tl clock module. Faulty Main Control card Yes: replace. If neither is applicable, go to step 9. l l l 9. Ensure power supply is firmly seated into the backplane. Is power cord firmly connected to the rear of the Control Bay’s power supply? No: YeS: Check for loose PSU power cable connections in the SX-200 FD Control cabinet 10. Attempt a station-to-station Processing functioning? call - is Call 11. Power down Control cabinet, pull out the check if flea clip W6 Rev A or later, go to Bay/FD Control Main Control card, and is properly attached. (If step 12.) 12. Check for error codes on the Main Control card numeric display. Yes: No: l 9 Plug in securely; go back to step 2. Check all other AC connections through the AC distribution frame, to the AC source. . If no wiring problems are found, refer to the Bay Power Supply procedures. l l l l Stop. Continue to monitor system. Press the SYSTEM RESET pushbutton on the Main Control card front panel, and go to step 11. If clip is attached properly, reinsert card, power up bay, and go to stepl2. If not, attach it properly, and go back to step 2. Refer to Table 2-2. Page 2 of 2 350 2-2 Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Troubleshooting -General Main Control Card Power-Up Error Codes Table 2-2 shows the all of the Main Control card numeric display error codes which may appear during start-up. Also shown are the most likely causes of the error condition. Table 2-2 Main Control Card Error Code Summary Faulty Main Control card. 6 7 8 or 9 9 Faulty Main Control card. . Faulty DRAM Module - replace Main Control l Faulty disk drive connections. l Faulty installation incorrect or damaged diskette -ensure that the wriie protect sticker has been removed. l 9 Faulty diskette - replace. . Incorrect setting of switch S3 on Main Control card-ensure that it is in the OFF, or OPEN position (pointed upward with respect to the board). Faulty disk drive. l 2 8 9 b of diskette. . Faulty power system - refer to that procedure. Page 1 of 2 9109-096-350-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 Troubleshooting Table 2-2 Main Control Card Error Code Summary (continued) Error Code Likely Cause(s) 2 0 3 0 ._ 4 0 5 0 6 0 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 n _’ ’ 7 0 or or 7 n l l (where n is any number) E. n l (where n is any number) - . l (any other code) l Problem in a digital bay/node- upper digit is the bay number. Refer to Bay Control card procedures. Problem in a peripheral is the bay/node number, slot number. Use SHOW gain further information. bay/node - upper digit lower digit is the card ALARMS command to (see note 2.) Please note difference between “E” and “E.“. (see above in this table for “E” codes) Problem with Disk Subsystem -refer Disk Subsystem Troubleshooting. to Floppy Nothing - indicates successful software download. This display may be immediately changed to display post boot-up codes. (see note 2.) Faulty Main Control card (see note 2.). Page 2 of 2 Notes: 1. The SX-200 the 336,456 FD system & 46O-port must be equipped with the Switch Matrix Module not the DX Module systems nor Switch Matrix Card as used in the 672 -port system. 2. A normal running system may show other codes (card diagnostics only the codes in this table are possible. Any other code shown Control Card. Revision 0 by or errors). However, during start-up, during start-up indicates a faulty Main 3. Codes possible AFTER start-up indude card diagnostics codes (last card location indicates bay number, bottom number indicates card slot number-maintenance test, i.e., pass or fail with cause), or disk error codes (see Floppy Disk Subsystem). 350 2-4 as used tested, top number logs give results of 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 I RESET ALARM PLANE TRANSFER ~ 0 Al3 El 58 0 NOSE: All. S3 SWITCHES MUSTBE OFF OR OPEN (UP POSrrIONJ. 0 ACTlVE 0 MINORALARM 0 MAJORALARM 0 CRrX4LALARM Troubleshooting BAY 2 SLOT 3t4 BAY 1 SLOT 7t6 Jl9 . . . . . . . . . J21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J13 PFT MGHT BELL CONNECTION BAY 1 SLOT 5t6 = J17B ’ PCMTO BAY4 I -% +12 2s +$ MAINTENANCE PANEL ;.. . 527 DG: i-t5v III l5 111 l5 111~ !!!30 PKFR .,,I 2. J29 0 III 25 !!! 30 P3 P3 1 5 \ 10 0 15P3 20 25 30 lJFsAl.AmuP T+RTEST UNE . .. BAY 2 SLOT 1 t2 BAY 1 SLOT 3t4 BAY 1 SLOT 1t2 NOTE: JlS.LOCALRS-2PCONNECTORONMAlNTENANCEPANEL 521E REMOTEFI%232 CONNECTORON CABINETREAR CABLE PAKL Figure 350 2-6 2-2 336 / 460 / 466 Port Backplane Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Troubleshooting Jlaooo .._ - General 0 .NBA J4BB JOBC 0 RINQER v 0 0 -12v +12v 0 RINQBR REF J480 JaBA J42A J4BB J42B J4Bc J42C Figure 2-3 672 Port Backplane 9109-096450-NA issue 1 Revision 0 350 2-7 Troubleshooting BAY1 SLOT7t6 BAY 2 SLOT 3t4 BAY 1 SLOT 5t6 0 fit@c&)w JZ5 Ei ‘@K&d DG) J,g ..a . . . . . . iii E4 @G) Jl, .. . . . In .. . YC” . . . . . . . . . . .,. J,3 - . ... Ji NOT USE-6 NOT USED I TEMP SENSE I Ll DISK DRIVE POWER PA%. 521 w lo T&pTiSrUNE .I31 0 J410 BAY 1 SLOT 3t4 BAY 2 SLOT 1 t2 Figure 24 350 2-8 BAY 1 SLOT 1t2 480 Port Backplane (Welded Cabinet) Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Troubleshooting r - General Tl CLOCKMODULE DECRIPTDN DRAM MODULE ,----I \ Figure 2-5 Main Control Card Module Locations 9109-09645&NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 2-9 Troubleshootina Troubleshooting Methodology General 2.2 Troubleshooting a malfunction in any complex electronic system a series of logical steps. This Section assumes the following troubleshooting of a malfunction: \ l GATHERING l CLARIFICATION of the problem l CONFIRMATION 0f l ISOLATION l CORRECTION is accomplished in basic steps in the of information the problem of the problem and DOCUMENTATION When investigating a problem, the troubleshooter should continually verify each step in the isolation process so as to ensure that the system and the symptoms of the malfunction are clearly understood. This will ensure that the malfunction is accurately categorized so that appropriate diagnostics, where applicable, may be invoked. Information Gathering and Problem Clarification Chart 2-1 provides a list of the information which may be necessary in order to adequately categorize a fault. All relevant information should be gathered and entered into a site fault record. If the fault has resulted in total or partial shutdown of the system, much of this data will be unobtainable or irrelevant. In such cases, reference should be made to the EMERGENCY TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES. Chart 2-l ,Step 1. 2. Information Action Talk to station users. Check Maintenance Alarm indications. 350 2-10 Gathering and Clarification Description Follow-up Obtain the following information: - frequency of occurrence intermittent or continuous nature time period during which the fault occurs. Check maintenance log for fault/ alarm reports (see Note 1) Check system LED and numeric display indicators for error codes, Page 1 of 2 Revision 0 9109-99635O-NA Issue 1 Troubleshooting Chart 2-l Information Gathering (continued) - General and Clarification environmental - power fluctuations ssively high temperature at any changes have been made in accordance propriate practices, and to the prescribed - Check the main distribution field for loose or damaged improperly seated connectors, or other signs of - Record relevant data and note the affected area of the Check for minor alarm indications -these assist in isolating and categorizing faults. Page 2 of 2 Notes: 1. Refer to Practice 9109-096-351 2. Refer to Practice 9109496-l 3. Refer to Practices Elltfy. 9109-096-350-NA 9109-096-l Issue 1 -NA, FLS-232 8O-NA, Engineering 0544, Features Maintenance Information, Description Revision 0 Terminal ,for details for the specified and 910949621 on procedures. operating O-NA, parameters. Customer Data 350 2-11 Troubleshooting Problem Confirmation Many faults, particularly intermittent faults, “disappear” before the troubleshooter is able to make a positive trace. Wherever possible, attempts should be made to force the problem to recur, such that the effects may be observed and hence the cause determined. The information gathered up to this point may be used to set up conditions relating as closely as possible to those under which the fault originally manifested itself. Problem Isolation The aids listed in Table 2-3 are useful in isolating Table 2-3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Aid fault conditions. Aids Description and Use Maintenance Log - Provides a record of maintenance activities and causes of alarms (the primary source of troubleshooting information). Maintenance Terminal - Primary access to the maintenance log. - Provides ability to query Alarm status, along with a variety of status reports. - Allows testing of individual functional units, using directed diagnostics. Circuit card Numeric Displays - Allow system power-up Status LEDs (on peripheral cards) - Used to determine if circuit is in use, idle, or not functioning. Maintenance - Provide ability to manually initiate activity switches and software reloads. Panel testing and operation to be monitored. Correction and Documentation Once a problem is isolated, the table of contents of this document and the appropriate procedure referenced. Many procedures .requiring control circuit cards to be reset, removed, powered down circumstances it should be noted that these actions will cause a service. If possible, these procedures should be performed during traffic, All repairs or adjustments to the system should be kept permanently at the site. Faulty equipment packaging as the replacement part (FRU), with the F). For further information on FRU items, refer Field-Replaceable Units. 350 2-12 Revision 0 should be consulted, contain instructions or replaced; in these partial or total loss of periods of little or no recorded into a log book which is should be returned in the same repair tag filled out (see Appendix to Practice 9109-096-355-NA, 9109-096435O-NA Issue 1 3. PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES _’ -._ Peripheral Interface Circuit Cards ONS / OPS / Station Line Cards \ 3.1 This section covers the ONS Line card (PN 9109-OIO), the OPS Line card (PN 9109-040), and the Station Line card (Pi 911 O-II 0). Table 3-l outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. For ONS card problems involving Voice Mail, see Voice Mail - ONS Port. Table 3-1 ONS Line Card Troubleshooting Step Possible Malfunction 1. Faulty connections between the telephone 2. Faulty connections between the cross-connect 3. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: e COS Define l Stations I SUPERSET” . Device interconnection Summary Source and the cross-connect field. field and the SX-200 DIGITAL system. Telephones Table 9 System Configuration 4. Faulty telephone 5. Faulty line card. 6. Faulty backplane cable connections. Note: (for Station Line cards only - 456 & 48O-port systems): check for faulty connections between analog and digital bays; verity connection between digital bay backplane (J17A or J17B) and the analog bay Digital Interface card (J2) - see Figure 8-l. 7. Faulty DIC card or Peripheral Control card (Station Line card only - 456 & 480 port systerns). 8. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 9. Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load). 10. Problem with analog bay junctor shortages -was system configured properly for expected traffic load (ii applicable)? (456 & 48O-pott systems) Note: set. Useful maintenance commands: RS-232 Maintenance Terminal. 9108-09W5O-NA issue 1 SHOW STATUS, TESI, Revision 0 Peripheral Equipment SHOW ALARMS - see Practice Procedures’. 91 OQ-O96-351-NA, 350 8-I Troubleshootina COV I SUPERSET Line Cards This section covers both the COV Line card (PN 9109-020) and the SUPERSETLine card (PN 911 O-41 0). Table 3-2 outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. For COV card problems involving Voice Mail, see Voice Mail - COV Port. Table 3-2 COV Line Card Troubleshooting _’ Summary ._ Step Possible . 1. ’ Faulty connections 2. Faulty connections 3. Faulty CDE programming; l Malfunction Source between the SUPERSETtelephone between the cross-connect ; and the cross-connect field and the SX-200 field. DIGITAL system. likely forms: COS Define l Stations / SUPERSETTelephones l Device Interconnection l System Configuration Table 4. Faulty SUPERSETtelephone 5. Faulty line card. 6. Faulty backplane cable connections. Note: (for SUPERSET Line cards only - 456 &48O-port systems): check for faulty connections between analog and digital bays; verify connection between digital bay backplane (J17A or J17B) and the analog bay Digital Interface card (J2) - see Figure 3-l. 7. Faulty DIC card or Peripheral Control card (SUPERSET systems). 8. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 9. Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load), 10. Problem with analog bay junctor shortages -was system configured traffic load (if applicable)? (456 8t 48&port systems) Note: - 350 3-2 Useful maintenance commands: Practice 9109-09-l-NA, set. SHOW STATUS, RS-232 Maintenance Peripheral Equipment TEST, SHOW Commands. Revision 0 Line card only - 456 & 48O-port ALARMS, SHOW Procedures’. properly for expected ERRORS 9109-09635O-NA SS3-SS4 - see Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Procedures Digital Line Card General Intermittent problems can be caused by improper bridge taps, or incorrect loop lengths, The following table lists the maximum loop lengths in meters with 24 or 26 AWG twisted pair wiring. _’ :... Table 3-3 Digltal Line Card Loop Lengths Peripheral \ Maximum Loop Length Device SUPERSET3”DN Mkl (9183-000-001) SUPERSET 3 DN Mk2 (918HOO-200) Mkl SUPERSET4”DN (9184-00~01) DN Mk2 (9184-000-200) SUPERSET 1 OOOm II 1 OOOm I 1 OOOm I 1 OOOm I SUPERSET410” 1OOOm I 1 OOOm I SUPERSET 420” 1OOOm 1 OOOm SUPERSET 430” 1OOOm 1 OOOm Dataset 1101 1 OOOm 1 OOOm Dataset 1102 2000m 1OOOm Dataset 1103 2000m Dataset 2 102 2000m 1OOOm Dataset 2103 2000m 1 OOOm MiLink” 2000m SUPERSET 401” Data Module SUPERCONSOLE 9109-09C35O-NA 1000” Issue 1 I I 1OOOm 1 OOOm console Revision 0 350 3-3 I I Troubleshooting SHOW ERRORS Command The SHOW ERRORS DATASET command can be a useful tool in the troubleshooting of both the Digital Line card and the Dataset. The following table lists the possible causes of the error types. Table 3-4 SHOW ERRORS Command 350 3-4 Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Additional Troubleshooting Digital Line cards are used for many applications. For additional information, refer to procedures for the specific application; i.e.: l SUPERSET DN Telephone l SUPERSET DN Telephones l SUPERSET 401 Telephones l SUPERSET 4 IO Telephones l SUPERSET 420 Telephones l SUPERSET 430 Telephones . SUPERSET DSS” l DATASET 1101 l DATASET 1102 l DATASET 1103 0 DATASET 2102 DATASET 2103 l l MiLink Data Module l Application 9109-99635O-NA Procedures Platform Issue 1 troubleshooting Module Package Revision 0 350 3-5 Troubleshooting _‘. .._ Figure 3-l 350 3-6 Digital Interface Card Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Procedures Trunk Cards - General The procedures detailed below cover the isolation and correction of faults with the various trunk cards. Supplementary procedures are provided for specific trunk types where required. Table 3-5 summarizes troubleshooting for trunk cards. Note: do not use this procedure for digital trunks - refer to Tl Trunk procedures. Table 3-5 Trunk Card Troubleshooting ._ Possible step Malfunction Summary ; Source 1. Faulty connections (see Note 3.). between the external trunk equipment 2. Faulty connections between the cross-connect 3. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: COS Define 9 Trunk Circuit Descriptors 9 Non-Dial In Trunks 9 Dial In Trunks Trunk Groups Device Interconnection Table System Configuration and the cross-connect field field and the system. l l l l 4. Faulty external trunk equipment 5. Incorrect jumper settings (LS/GS Trunk card only) - see Figure 3-2. 6. Incorrect switch settings (E&M Trunk module or E&M card only) - see Figure 3-3 (and Note 5.). 7. Faulty Universal card (E&M Trunk module only). 8. Faulty LS/GS or DID trunk card (see Note 3.). 9. Faulty backplane cable connections. Note: (for 9110 type trunk cards only - 456 & 48O-por-t systems): check for faulty connections between analog and digital bays - verify connection between digital bay backplane (J17A or J17B) and the analog bay Digital Interface card (J2) - see Figure 3-l. 10. Faulty DIC card or Peripheral Control card (9110 type cards only - 456 & 480-port tems) . 11. Faulty switching matrix - refer to ‘Supplementary 12. Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load, see Note 2.). 13. Problem with analog bay junctor shortages -was system configured traffic load (ii applicable)? (456 & 48O-port systems) properly for expected Notes: -see 1. Useful maintenance 9109-095-351-NA, 2. Refer to Practice provisioning. 9109-09635WNA (see Note 4.). commands: SHOW RS-232 Maintenance 9109-096-l Issue 1 80-b& Peripheral Equipment STATUS, TEST, Terminal. Engineering Revision 0 SHOW Information, ALARMS for details sys- Procedures’. Practice on CO Busy Hour and receiver 350 3-7 Troubleshootina 3. If periodic ‘opens’ in loop current are experienced during call progression through a central office, and disconnect timing has been set for a short interval, loop disconnects may cause the trunk to drop. In such cases, the timing should be increased one step at a time, until the calls are no longer dropped. 4. When the system detects a trunk protocol failure, it removes the affected trunk circuit from service. protocol failures may indicate fault(s) with the trunk circuit, in which case the card should be tested replaced. However, they may also indicate that the external trunk is faulty. In this case, the affected trunk circuit must stay out-of-service until the external equipment is repaired. 5. For further information on the 9110 type trunk cards, refer to the 9105/911 O-091 series Trunk and of documents. -- SHOWN FOR LOOPSTARTTRUNK J I I I ; 0 TRY TRUNK 5 I f I I I l I I I I I . L-------L-------i--------j l I n TRUNK 1 0 TRUNK 2 I [7 TRUNK 3 Figure 3-2 LS/GS Trunk Jumper Locations 350 3-a Revision 0 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Table 3-6 Trunk Voltage and Loop Current Circuit E&M ._ LS/GS (Loop Start) Tiptognd=OV Ring to gnd = 0 V Ring to gnd = 0 V Tip to Ring = OV TiptoRing=OV Elead=48V Elead=OV Mlead=OV M lead =48V EtoMiead=48V EtoMlead=48V I loop = OmA I loop = OmA Tiptognd=OV Tiptognd=-14Vto-22V Tip to Ring = 48 LS/GS (Ground Start) V TiptoRing=4Vto-20V Tiptognd=48V Tiptognd=-14Vto-22V V Ring to gnd = -34 V to -26 V TiptoRing=OV TiptoRing I loop = OmA I loop = 1 OmA to 1 OOmA Tiptognd Tiptognd =-2V Tip to Ring = 46 V V =4Vto-20V =-33Vto44V Ring to gnd =-17vto-6v TiptoRing = 16Vto38V I loop = OmA I loop = 12mA to 30mA Tiptognd=-2V Tiptognd Ring to gnd = 48 Tip to Ring = 46 V V I loop = OmA Issue 1 Ring to gnd = -34 V to -26 V I loop = 1OmA to 1 OOmA Ring to gnd = 48 Loopme V ; I loop = OmA Ring to gnd = 48 DID Seized Tiptognd=OV Ring to gnd = 48 9109-09WW-NA Readings Idle CrwO Procedures Revision 0 =-17VtoaV Ring to gnd = -33 V to 44 V TiptoRing=-16Vto38V I loop = 12mA to 30mA 350 3-9 Troubleshooting I =5? I MUSICON HOLC/PAGER MODULE 0 RECEll5URELAY MODULE 0 E&M TRUNK CONSOLE MOWLE 0 0 0 IO UNIVERSALCARD Figure 34 350 3-10 E&M Trunk Module With Universal Card Revision 0 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Supplemental E&M Trunk Card Troubleshooting Table 3-7 Supplementary cross-connect Procedures Procedures E&M Trunk Troubleshooting Procedures field. incoming - connect butt-set to E lead and ground. Circuit indicator should light when butt-set goes off-hook (see Figure 34). l If not, replace card/module; if fault persists, possible control problem -go tostep sists, possible control problem -go to step 10. Connect butt-set to the E lead and ground, and dial the access code for a trunk group. The reading should be a steady 48V (see Figure 34). l l 11. If not, replace card/module; if fault persists, possible control problem -go to step 11. Otherwise card is functioning. Possible control problem - refer to Supplementary Peripheral Equipment Procedures. 9109--09-5O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 3-11 Troubleshooting Supplemental DID / Loop-Tie Table 3-8 Supplementary Step Trunk Troubleshooting DID / Loop-Tie Description Perform General Trunk procedures Table 3-5. 2. Disconnect the affected circuits from the cross-connect field. 3. Connect the butt--set across the Tip and Ring of the trunk circuit-the circuit indicator should light when the butt-set goes off-hook (see Figure 35). 5. Trunk Troubleshooting Actlon 11 4. in Check if circuit is a DID trunk. l Go to step 2. l Go to step 3. l l Yes: No: Use butt-set to simulate incoming digits connection should be made to an extension/ attendant, etc., depending upon call routing. The trunk circuit indicator should wink following digits pulsed. l l 6. Procedures TIE TRUNK - dialing, or going off-hook from the butt-set should connect to an extension/attendant, etc., depending upon call routing. l l 7. Connect voltmeter across the Tip and Ring of the trunk circuit (see Figure 3-5). 8. Check the results during a simulated incoming call from the butt-set. l l l l l 9. Replace card with a known working card. 10. Refer to Peripheral Equipment 350 3-12 l Procedures / Follow-Up I If not, replace card; if fault persists, possible control problem - go to step 9. Otherwise go to step 4. l l Go to step 5. Go to step 6. If not, ensure extension/attendant console, etc. is functioning properly -replace card; if fault persists, possible control problem - go to step 9. Otherwise go to step 7. If not, ensure extension/attendant console, etc. is functioning properly-replace card; if fault persists, possible control problem - go to step 9. Otherwise go to step 7. To check wink start or answer back supervision, go to step 8. When seized, meter should read -18 to -20 v. For a wink start, the meter should read a 180 ms positive flash, and back to -18 to -20 v. For answer backsupervision, deflection to +18 to t20 V should be seen. If these readings are not seen, retry. If this persists, replace the suspect card; if fauH still persists, possible control problem-gc to step 9. If problem persists, reinstall the original card, and go to step 10. Procedures. Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment I Procedures TRANSMISSIONI SIGNALING EQUIPMENT CROSS-CONNECT FIELD PBXEBM TRUNKClRCUlT Troubleshooting I I .SENSOR TX 3 Rx 3 ?Il 4s NOTE:X= NORMALLYOPEN + = WRMAU?I CLOSED Figure 3-4 E&M Type 1 Trunk Testing PSX DID/TIE TRUNKGIRCM CROSS-CONNECT FIELD VOLTMETER Figure 3-5 Loop Trunk Testing 9109-096435O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 3-13 Troubleshooting Tl (DS-1) Trunk The Tl Trunk card provides an interface between the SX-200 DIGITAL system and external digital trunk facilities. Each card contains one 24 channel interface. The Tl Trunk card must be installed in a high power card slot, and there may be only one installed per bay. Table 3-9 Tl Trunk Card Troubleshooting Summary r Possible step Malfunction Source 1. Faulty external equipment or far end. 2. Tl card not installed in proper slot. (Card must be installed in a high power slot - slot 6 (preferred) or slot 8 in Digital bays, or slot 4 in Combo Bay 2). Note: only one Tl Trunk card may be installed per bay. 3. Faulty connections between the Tl Channel Service Unit and the cabinet end of the Tl Adapter Cable Assembly. See Figure 3-7 / Figure 3-8. 4. Faulty connection between the Tl Adapter Cable Assembly and the Tl Adapter card. 5. Faulty connection between the Tl Adapter card and the shelf backplane. 6. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: Tl Link Descriptor Tl Link Assignment Tl Network Sync COS Define Trunk Circuit Descriptors Non-Dial In Trunks Dial In Trunks Trunk Groups Device Interconnection Table System Configuration l l l l l l l l l l 7. Faulty Tl Channel Service Unit (see Note 2.). 8. Incorrect switch settings on Tl Trunk card (see Note 3.). 9. Jumper clip W8 on/not on Main Control card (see Note 4.). See Figure 2-l. 10. Faulty Tl Trunk card (see Note 2.). 11. Faulty Tl Clock module on Main Control card. 12. Faulty Main Control card. 13. Faulty switching matrix - refer to ‘Supplementary Notes: 1. Useful maintenance Tl-TRUNK - see Peripheral Equipment commands: SHOW STATUS, TEST, Practice 9109-096-351-NA, RS-232 Procedures’. SHOW ALARMS, SHOW Maintenance Terminal. ERRORS 2. When the system detects a trunk protocol failure, it removes the affected trunk circuitlchannel from service. Trunk protocol failures may indicate fault(s) with the trunk circuit/channel, in which case the card should be tested and replaced. However, they may also indicate that the external trunk is fautty. In this case, the affected trunk circuit/channel must stay out-of-service until the external equipment is repaired. 350 3-14 Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting 3. The switch settings are for cable length (not loop length) between Figure 3-6. The correct settings are: 0 to 149 fb set Sl CLOSED; S2S8 OPEN. 150 to 449 ft; set S2, S3, S4 CLOSED: Sl , S5-S8 OPEN. 450 to 655 ft; set S5, S6, S7 CLOSED; SlS4, S8 OPEN. These switch settings all assume 22 gauge wire. 4. For “pre-REV A” MCC cards, there is no Tl dock module, Issue 1 and the CSU. if the Tl clock module is installed, jumper clip W8 must the jumper must be installed (see Figure 2-l). Figure 3-6 Tl Trunk Card 910949%35O--NA the Tl card Revision 0 Procedures See be removed. If Troubleshooting -- .’ 7 Tl ADAFlER CABLEASSEMBLY TO Cl-WNE!mSERVICEUNIT Figure 3-7 Tl Adapter Card and Cable Assembly Connections 350 3-16 Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting _ Procedures Tl ADAPTERASSEMBLY P/N94oo-l~u2-NA (OPTIONAL-SHOWN INSTALLED -. 1. - BAY PSUAC PLUG ACCESSPANEL AC POWER CURD CONNECTOR Ax OPTICAL FIBERCABLECONNECTOR 7-XOPWXL FIBERCAME CONNECTOR SFT WNNECTCfl SYSTEMGROUND LUG Figure 3-8 SX-ZOO FD Peripheral Node Rear View (with optional Tl Adapter) 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 3-17 Troubleshooting Universal Card 3.2 The Universal card is used for several specific application; i.e.: applications. l DTMF Receivers l Music On Hold l LCD Attendant l Loudspeaker / Pager l E&M Trunks (see Trunk Cards - General) Refer to procedures for the / Relays Console ; ‘DTMF Receivers / Relay The DTMF Receiver module is installed on the Universal card. The module can be used as a DTMF receiver (4 circuits) and/or a relay (2 circuits) - see practice 9109-096-125--NA, Circuit Card Descriptions, for further information. The following table outlines the most likely causes of DTMF failure. Table 3-10 / Relay Troubleshooting Posslble 1. Insufficient receiver circuits to handle peak traffic load (see Note 2.). 2. Faulty connection between MDF and the system or MDF and the external equipment (applies to the relays only -for Night Bell control or external System Alarm indication). See Note 4. 3. Faulty external equipment (applies to the relays only -for System Alarm indication). See Note 4. 4. Faulty CDE programming; l l Malfunction Summary Step l . DTMF Receiver Source likely forms: System Configuration Miscellaneous System Ports Call Rerouting Table 5. Faulty or improperly installed DTMF Receiver module. 6. Faulty Universal card. 7. Faulty Universal card modules (see Note 3.). 8. Faulty PCM cable connections 9. Faulty DSP (replace Main Control card). 10. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary Notes: 1. Useful maintenance Practice 9109-098-351 2. Refer 3. Receiver card. to practice / relay commands: SHOW STATUS, -NA, RS-232 Maintenance 9109-998-l module between Bay Controller and Main Controller. 80-h& malfunction Engineering could Peripheral Equipment TEST, SHOW Terminal. Information, be caused 4. A simple test for a relay circuit is: (a) disconnect nect ohmmeter across relay leads -an open is a problem with the module. 350 3-18 Night Bell control or external ALARMS, for details by the failure of other Procedures’. SHOW on receiver module(s) ERRORS-see provisioning. on the Universal the relay from external equipment at the MDF; (b) concircuit should be read when the relay is open. If not, there Revision 0 9109-098-35O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Procedures Music On Hold (MOH) The Music On Hold / Pager module interfaces the SX-200 DIGITAL system to an external music source for MOH. The module is installed on the Universal card. See practice 9109-095-l 25-NA, Circuit Card Descriptions, for further information. The following table outlines the most likely causes of MOH failure. Table 3-11 -- Musk On Hold Troubleshooting Possible Step Malfunction Summary Source 1. Faulty music source. 2. Faulty connection between the music source and the MDF 3. Faulty connection between the MDF and the system. 4. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: 9 System Configuration l Miscellaneous l COS Define System Ports 0 Call Rerouting Table 5. Faulty or improperly installed MOH / Pager module. 6. Faulty Universal card. 7. Faulty Universal card modules (see Note 2.). 6. Faulty PCM cable connections 9. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary Notes: between Bay Controller and Main Controller (ii applicable). 1. Useful maintenance commands: see Practice 9109-096451-NA, 2. MOH / Pager card. 9109-09635O-NA module Issue 1 mabnction Peripheral Equipment SHOW STATUS, TEST, RS-232 Maintenance could be caused SHOW ALARMS, Terminal. by the failure Revision 0 of other SHOW module(s) Procedures’. ERRORS - on the Universal 350 3-19 Troubleshooting Pager The Music On Hold / Pager module interfaces the SX-ZOO DIGITAL system to an external paging amplifier. The module is installed on the Universal card. See practice 9109-09S-125-NA, Circuit Card Descriptions, for further information. The following table outlines the most likely causes of paging failure. Table 3-12 Pager TroubleshootIng ._ Summary r Step Possible Malfunction 1. Faulty paging equipment. 2. Faulty connection between the paging equipment 3. Faulty connection between the MDF and the system. 4. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: System Configuration Source and the MDF. l l Miscellaneous System Ports l COS Define l Call Rerouting Table 5. Faulty or improperly 6. Faulty Universal card. 7. Faulty Universal card modules (see Note 2.). 8. Faulty PCM cable connections 9. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary Notes: between Bay Controller and Main Controller (ii applicable). 1 .Ueeful maintenance commands: Practice 9109-096-351 -NA, 2.MOH 350 3-20 installed MOH / Pager module. / Pager module matfunction SHOW RS-232 could Peripheral Equipment STATUS, TEST, SHOW Maintenance Terminal. ALARMS, be caused of other Revision 0 by the failure SHOW module(s) 9109-99635O-NA Procedures’. ERRORS -see on the Universal card. Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Procedures MLIBIC SOURCE I L MWCONHOlD/PAGING -mm-- MODULE I d I I ~JSTOhlEi?-SUPPUED EQUIPMENT -m--- -I -mm-- J=iOM J33 ON BACKVANE 1 (UNlVERSALCABINETONLY) I (NIGHT BELL CONNECTION) FROM RELAY ON RELAYMODULE ~JSTOMEFI-WPUED -mm-I NIGHT BELL -l BWOHMS Ed NO relay contact maybe usedto conbol a date?, as required. SUBuRCUrr 6 RELAYMODULE The SLPERCONSOlE1OOUmatterdani con&which comedstothedofadtpositmmustuse draitZtomatchd&dtwiringfromthemaintensnce panel. other SUPERCUNSOLElWOettendantm& maycom&tornypcrtmaD!#tdUneCard. Figure 3-9 Music, Paging, Relay and Console Connections Issue 1 Revision 0 350 3-21 Troubleshooting Analog Junctors / Channels If analog bays are present in an SX-200 DIGITAL system (456 & 480 port systems), the analog cards are connected to 32 common junctors, or voice paths, via analog crosspoint chips. These are located on the cards themselves, and are in turn connected to the 32 channels of the bay’s digital linkvia the Digital Interface Card. Refer to practice 9109-098-I 80-NA, Engineering Information, for further details on this interface. The following table outlines the most likely causes of junctor failure. Table 3-13 Analog Step 1. Junctor Possible Troubleshooting Malfunction Summary Source Faulty line or trunk card: Follow this process on a busy switch, wait for all LED’s on the card to be off: A. Unseat the card in slot 1 (or the closest card to slot 1) of the affected bay. If the problem disappears, that was the faulty card. If not, reseat the card, and go to B 8. Repeat A for all of the peripheral cards on the affected shelf. Follow thls process on an idle switch and only one card in the bay is suspect: A. Unseat all of the cards in the affected bay. If the problem remains, the DIC card is faulty. If the problem disappears, the fault is in the peripheral cards and go to B. B. Install half of the suspected cards back in the bay. If the problem appears the faulty card is this half, if not the faulty card is in the other half, go to C. C. Unseat the “good half’ and go to B. Repeat until the faulty card is isolated. Follow this process on an idle switch and multiple cards In the bay are suspect: A. Unseat all of the cards in the affected bay. If the problem remains, the DIC card is faulty. If the problem disappears, the fault is in the peripheral cards and go to B. B. Install each peripheral card back in one at a time and check if the fault returns. Do this for each card ensuring only one peripheral card is plugged in at a time. Replace each faulty card found. C. Reseat all of the “good” cards and recheck for a fault. 2. Faulty inter-bay connection - check for faulty connections between analog and digital bays; verify connection between digital control bay backplane (J17A or J17B) and the analog bay Digital Interface card (J2). 3. Faulty CDE programming; likely form: System Configuration l 4. Faulty Digital Interface card. 5. Faulty Peripheral Control card. 6. Faulty Scanner card. 7. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 350 3-22 Revision 0 Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. 9109-OMG35O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Notes: 1. Useful maintenance commands: SHOW STATUS, TEST, see Practice 9109496451 -NA, RS-232 Maintenance 2. The analog Link2: Link5: Link7: For further 9109-096-35O-NA bay link assignments SHOW ALARMS Terminal. Procedures - are as follows: Bay3 Bay4 Bay5 information, Issue 1 refer to practice 9109496-l Revision 0 80-NA, Engineering Information. 350 3-23 Troubleshooting Special Sets Attendant Console - LCD Console This procedure applies to the LCD Console only. Do not use this procedure for the SUPERCO/VSOLE 1000 attendant console - instead, refer to “Attendant Console SUPERCONSOLE 1000’. Table 3-14 outlines the most likely items to cause LCD Console malfunction. ‘- Table 3-14 LCD Console ,Step Possible Troubleshooting Malfunction Summary ; Source 1. Ensure that the LCD Console is connected to a Console Module on a Universal Card and not connected to a SUPERCONSOLE 7000 attendant console port (i.e., a Digital Line Card circuit). 2. Faulty connections between the console and the cross-connect 3. Faulty connections Note 3. between the cross-connect 4. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: 9 COS Define field (see Figure 3-9). field and the SX-ZOO DlGITAL system. See Console Assignment l l Console LDN Assignments l Tenant Forms 05,06 l Device Interconnection l System Configuration Table 5. Console requires reset (disconnect, reconnect line cord). See Figure 3-l 0 and Table 3-15. 6. Faulty console, handset and cord assembly, or headset assembly. 7. Faulty / improperly installed Console module. 6. Faulty Universal card. 9. Faulty Universal card modules ( see Note 2.). 10. Faulty backplane cable connections. 11. Bay Control Card requires reload (ii applicable) - power down bay, reseat BCC, power up bay. 12. Main Control Card requires reload - press SYSTEM RESET button (see Figure 2-l). 13. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary Notes: 1. Useful maintenance commands: SHOW STATUS, TEST, see Practice 9109496451 -NA, RS-232 Maintenance 2. Console module malfunction 3. Loop length can be no more across Tip and Ring should 350 3-24 could be caused than 1000 ft with be 46 volts dc. Peripheral Equipment SHOW ALARMS Terminal. Procedures’. - by the failure of other module(s) on the Universal card. 26 AWG (twisted pair-with no bridge Voltage Revision 0 wire 9109-096G350-NA taps). Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting UQUlD CRYSTAL DlS[l.AY Procedures 10 DISPLAYk3SoClATb’E KEYS (SOFrKFYS) I FRI. JAN. 27,lSW : III Fl> ( P> ( [Fb 0 F4> 0 14AlTENDANT CONSOLE KEYS (FWD KEYS) 7m INDICATORS (Fs> ( 12DlALWS 2 VOLUME CONTROL KEYS 2 CONTRASTCONROL KEYS 4 cwis0A CONTROL KEYS EEOOSS Figure 3-l 0 Attendant Console 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 3-25 Troubleshooting Table 3-15 Attendant Console Error Indications Indication Meaning HOLD 7 indicator flashing (after reset) Console fault - replace console. HOLD _’ 2 indicator flashing (after reset) Console fault - replace console. HOLD 3 indicator flashing (after reset) Console fault - replace console. All indicators on always (after reset) Console fault - replace console. message: CONSOLE HARDWARE PROBLEM 123456789 ERROR CODE 1 PLEASE NOTE DETAILS ON REPAIR TAG Console fault - replace console. message: WAITING FOR SYNCHRONIZATION 123456789 PLEASE WAIT Wiring problem. l l l l Problem with programming. Problem with Universal card or Console module (LCD Console only). Problem with Digital Line card (SUPERCONSOLE message: WAITING FOR COMMUNICATION PLEASE WAIT 350 3-26 lOOa). l Problem with console. l Problem with programming. l Problem with console. 123456789 Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Attendant Console - SUPERCONSOLE Procedures 1000 This procedure applies to the SUPERCONSOLE 7000 only. Do not use this procedure for the LCD Console attendant console - instead, refer to “Attendant Console - LCD Console”. Table 3-l 6 outlines the most likely items to cause SUPERCONSOLE 7000 malfunction. Table 3-16 1OOOTroubleshootSng SUPERCONSOLE Possible Step Malfunction Summary ; Source 1. Ensure that the SUPERCONSOLE 1000 attendant console is connected to a Digital Line Card circuit and not connected to an LCD Console port (i.e., a Console Module on a Uniiersal Card). 2. Faulty connections between the console and the cross-connect 3. =aulty connections Vote 2. between the cross-connect 4. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: COS Define field (see Figure 3-9). field and the SX-200 DlGlTAL system. See l l Console Assignment l Console LDN Assignments * Data Assignment l Data Circuit Descriptor l Tenant Forms 05,06 9 Device Interconnection l Table System Configuration 5. Console requires reset (disconnect, reconnect line cord). See Figure 3-l 0 and Table 3-15. 6. Digital Line Card requires reinitialization - reseat card. 7. Faulty console, handset and cord assembly, or headset assembly. 8. Faulty Digital Line Card. 9. Faulty backplane cable connections. 10. Bay Control Card requires reload (if applicable) bay. 11. Main Control Card requires reload - press SYSTEM RESET button (see Figure 2-l). 12. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary Notes: 1. Useful maintenance commands: - see Practice 9109-098-351-NA, 2. Loop resistance 48 volts dc. 9109-09635O-NA should Issue 1 not exceed - power down bay, reseat BCC, power up SHOW STATUS, TEST, RS-232 Maintenance 200 ohms. Voltage Revision 0 Peripheral Equipment SHOW ALARMS, Terminal. acrossTp and Ring Procedures’. SHOW ERRORS CONSOLE should be between 40 and 350 3-27 Troubleshootinn SUPERSET 3” Telephone The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. Table 3-l 7 SUPERSET 3 Troubleshooting Step -- Possible Malfunction Summary Source 1. Faulty connections between the SUPERSETtelephone 2. , Faulty connections Note 2. between the cross-connect 3. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: COS Define and the cross-connect field and the SX-200 DIGITAL field. systerrk See l l Stations I SUPERSETTelephones l Device Interconnection l System Configuration Table 4. Set requires reset - disconnect, 5. Faulty SUPERSET telephone 6. Line card requires reinitialization 7. Faulty line card. 6. Faulty backplane cable connections. Note: (for SUPERSETLine cards only - 456 & 480 port systems): check for faulty connections between analog and digital bays: verify connection between digital bay backplane (J17A or J17B) and the analog bay Digital Interface card reconnect line cord. set or handset/cord assembly. (reseat card). (J2b 9. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 10. Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load). 11. Problem with analog bay junctor shortages -was system configured properly for expected traffic load (ii applicable)? (456 & 48O-por-t systems) Notes: 1. Useful maintenance commands: - see Practice 9109-096-351-NA, SHOW STATUS, TEST, RS-232 Maintenance 2. Loop resistance should not exceed 200 ohms. Voltage 46 volts dc. Loop length limits are: for SUPERSETLine circuits: 3300 ft with 26 AWG wire (twisted pair-with 350 3-28 Peripheral Equipment Revision 0 SHOW ALARMS, Terminal. SHOW Procedures’. ERRORS SS3SS4 across lip and Ring should be between 40 and circuits: 1550 ft with 26 AWG wire; for COV Line no bridge taps). 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Procedures RINGER VOLUME CONTROL SWlTCHHOOK -._ SPEWER VOLUME M)NTROL SPEED DW KEYS I SPEAKER ASSEMBLY 3LlNE INDICATORS ~E:CWPEED DIALKEYS MiCROPHONE INPUT Figure 3-I 1 SUPERSET 3 General View 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 3-29 Troubleshooting SUPERSET Telephone The following table outlines Table 3-18 Step the most likely items to cause malfunction. SUPERSET Possible .- Troubleshooting Malfunction Summary Source 1. Faulty connections between the SUPERSETtelephone 2. Faulty connections Note 2. between the cross-connect 3. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: COS Define and the cross-connect field. field and the SX-200 DIGITAL system. See l l Stations / SUPERSETTelephones l Device Interconnection l System Configuration Table 4. Set requires reset - disconnect, 5. Faulty SUPERSETtelephone 6. Line card requires reinitialization 7. Faulty line card. a. Faulty backplane cable connections. Note: (for SUPERSETLine cards only - 456 & 46O-port systems): check for faulty connections between analog and digital bays; verify connection between digital bay backplane (J17A or J17B) and the analog bay Digital Interface card (J2). 9. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 10. Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load). 11. Problem with analog bay junctor shortages -was system configured properly for expected traffic load (ii applicable)? (456 & 46O-port systems) Notes: 1. Useful -see reconnect line cord. set or handset/cord maintenance commands: Practice 9109-096-351 assembly. (reseat card). SHOW STATUS, -NA, Maintenance TEST, SHOW Terminal. 2. Loop resistance should not exceed 200 ohms. Voltage 48 volts dc. Loop length limits are: for SUPERSETLine circuits: 3300 ft with 26 AWG wire (twisted pair-with 350 3-30 Revision 0 Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. ALARMS, SHOW ERRORS SS3SS4 across Tip and Ring should be between 40 and circuits: 1550 ft with 26 AWG wire; for COV Line no bridge taps). 9109-99635O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting SWTTCtOiOOK Procedures LOUDSPEAKERVOLUMECONTROL \ RINGERVOLUMECONTROL UNE IDENnFlCATlON CARD /, COVERASSEMBLY UNE STATUS DISPLAY JNE SELECT/SPEED CALLBlJTrOr6 hdt BUITON KEYPAD - \ / I ‘mic. m-&V BUTrON I INF SELECTIONI ZRTORY DIALMODULE ‘seledfealwes’ BLKKN \ RINGER P~CH-CONTROL (UNDERNEATHBASEASSEMBLY) MAINDISPLAY \ ‘speaketmwr BUITON I I MlcROPl-tONE EEUXS Figure 3-l 2 SUPERSET 4 General Wew 9109-09M5O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 3-31 Troubleshooting CROS%CONNECT FIELD Figure 3-I 3 SUPERSET 350 3-32 Revision 0 Connections 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting SUPERSET Procedures 3 DN Telephone The following table outlines Table 3-19 the most likely items to cause malfunction. SUPERSET 3 DN Troubleshooting Possible step Malfunction Summary Source 1. Faulty connections between the SUPERSETtelephone i. Faulty connections between the cross-connect 3. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: l COS Define and the cross-connect field. field and the SX-200 DIGIThL system. l Stations / SUPERSETTelephones l Device Interconnection l System Configuration Table 4. Set requires reset - disconnect, reconnect line cord. 5. Faulty SUPERSET telephone set or handset/cord 6. Digital Line card requires reinitialization 7. Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press SYSTEM RESET on MCC) . 8. Faulty Digital Line Card. 9. Faulty backplane cable connections. 10. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 11. Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load). Notes: assembly. (reseat card). Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. 1. Useful maintenance commands: DIGITAL-SETS - see Practice SHOW STATUS, TEST, SHOW ALARMS, 9109496451 -NA, RS-232 Maintenance SHOW ERRORS Terminal. 2. Loop 26 AWG taps). 9109-09635O-NA length limit is: 3300 Issue 1 ft with wire (twisted Revision 0 pair -with no bridge 350 333 Troubleshooting ; - !ikRANOE KEYS HANDSET T- MICROPHONE EECOS7 Figure 3-14 SUPERSET 350 3-34 DN General View Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral SUPERSET Equipment Troubleshooting 4 DN Telephone The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. Table %20 SUPERSET 4 DN Troubleshooting Possible step Malfunction Summary Source 1. Faulty connections between the SUPERSETtelephone i. Faulty connections between the cross-connect 3. Faulty CDE programming; and the cross-connect field and the SX-200 D/G/mL field. system. likely forms: COS Define l l Stations I SUPERSETTelephones l Device Interconnection 9 Table System Configuration 4. Set requires reset - disconnect, 5. Faulty SUPERSETtelephone 6. Digital Line Card requires reinitialization 7. Procedures reconnect line cord. set or handset/cord assembly. (reseat card). Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press SYSTEM RESET on MCC). 8. Faulty Digital Line Card. 9. Faulty backplane 10. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 11. Problem with DTMF Receivers Notes: cable connections. SHOW STATUS, 91 OQ-O96-351-NA, 2. Loop 26 AWG 9109-096-350-NA limit is: 3300 Issue 1 Procedures’. (not enough for peak traffic load). 1. Useful maintenance commands: DIGITAL-SETS - eee Practice length Peripheral Equipment f-t with wire TEST, SHOW ALARMS, RS-232 Maintenance (twisted Revision 0 pair -with no bridge SHOW ERRORS Terminal. taps). 350 3-35 Troubleshooting LIQUID CFIYSTAL DISPLAY -----.------.---e--. i--:0:0: ,------+------+r----:L------2------.------~ 000 888 - &is000 888 000 - SOFKEYS - LINE APPWCE KEYS :n:o: 888 888 888 888 000 IO00 onlcfi I.~__ r MICROPHONE EEOB Figure 3-l 5 SUPERSET 4 DN General View 350 3-36 Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting SUPERSET Procedures Telephone The following malfunction. table outlines, in descending Table 3-21 order, the most likely items to cause SUPERSET 401 Procedures ._ Possible Item Malfunction Source 1. Faulty connections between the set and the Main Distribution Frame. 2. Faulty connections between the Main Distribution 3. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: COS Define Frame and the system. l l Stations / SUPERSETTelephones l Device Interconnection l System Configuration Table 4. Set requires reset - disconnect, 5. Faulty SUPERSETtelephone 6. Digital Line Card requires reinitialization 7. Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press SYSTEM RESET on MCC). 8. Faulty Digital Line Card. 9. Faulty backplane cable connections. 10. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 11. Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load). Notes: reconnect line cord. set or handset/cord 1. Useful maintenance commands: DIGITAL-SETS -see Practice 2. A synchronization Message Lamp. 3. Loop length limit is: 3300 4. Refer to Practices vices, for details 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 error ft/l 000 m with 9109-096-l of features (reseat card). SHOW STATUS, 9109-096-351-NA, or communication assembly. Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. TEST, SHOW ALARMS, RS-232 Maintenance with the telephone 24 or 26 AWG 26-f&4, Peripheral and options. wire Devices, Revision 0 is indicated (twisted SHOW ERRORS Terminal. by the rapid pair -with and 9109-096-l flashing or without O+NA, of the bridge Features taps). and Ser- 350 3-37 Troubleshooting IDENTlflCATlON CARD MESSAGEKEY MESSAGELAMP VOLUXWTONE KEYS TRANWCONF KEY DIALPAD Figure 3-16 SUPERSET 350 3-38 Revision 0 General View 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Procedures SUPERSET 470 Telephone The following malfunction. table outlines in descending Table 3-22 SUPERSET order, the most likely items to cause Procedures :_ Possible Rem Malfunction Source ; 1. Faulty connections between the set and the Main Distribution Frame. 2. Faulty connections between the Main Distribution 3. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: COS Define Frame and the system. l l Stations / SUPERSETTelephones l Device Interconnection l System Configuration Table 4. Set requires reset - disconnect, reconnect line cord. 5. Faulty SUPERSETtelephone 6. Digital Line Card requires reinitialization 7. Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press SYSTEM RESET on MCC) . a. Faulty Digital Line Card. 9. Faulty backplane cable connections. 10. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 11. Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load). Notes: set or handset/cord 1. Useful maintenance commands: DIGITAL-SETS - see Practice 2. A synchronization Message Lamp. 3. Loop length 9109-096-35O-NA or communication 9109-096-l of features Issue 1 (reseat card). Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. SHOW STATUS, TEST, SHOW ALARMS, 9104-096-351 -NA, RS-232 Maintenance limit is: 3300 ft/lOOO 4. Refer to Practices vices, for details assembly. error with the telephone m with 24 or 26 AWG 26-h& Peripheral and options. wire Devices, Revision 0 is indicated (twisted SHOW ERRORS Terminal. by the rapid flashing pair -with and 9109-096-l or without O+NA, of the bridge Features taps). and Ser- 350 3-39 Troubleshooting _ SPEAKERASSEhm DEN-m:IC?OlON ’ CARD a STATUSINDICATOR LINEAPPEWANCE KEYS // FIXEDFUNCTION KR MICflOPHONE Figure 3-17 SUPERSET 350 3-40 Revision 0 General View 9109-09645CMJA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting SUPERSET Procedures Telephone The following malfunction. table outlines in descending Table 3-23 the most likely items to cause SUPERSET 420 Procedures Possible Item order, Malfunction Source 1. Faulty connections between the set and the Main Distribution 2. Faulty connections between the Main Distribution 3. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: COS Define ; Frame. Frame and the system. l Stations I SlJPERSETTelephones l 0 Device Interconnection . Table System Configuration 4. Set requires reset - disconnect, reconnect line cord. 5. Faulty SUPERSETtelephone 6. Digital Line Card requires reinitialization 7. Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press SYSTEM RESET on MCC). 6. Faulty Digital Line Card. 9. Faulty backplane cable connections. 10. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 11. Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load). Notes: set or handset/cord 1. Useful maintenance commands: DIGITAL-SETS -see Practice (reseat card). SHOW STATUS, QlOQ-OQ&351-NA, 2. The set’s LCD display will indicate synchronization cation problems, “NO COMMUNICATION”. 3. Loop length limit is: 3300 ft/lOOO 4. Refer to Practices vices, for details 910949%35O-NA m with Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. TEST, SHOW ALARMS, RS-232 Maintenance problems, 24 or 26 AWG 912-Q-125-NA, Peripheral of features and options. Issue 1 assembly. wire Devices, Revision 0 SHOW ERRORS Terminal. “NO SYNCHRONIZATION”, (twisted pair -with and 9125-Q50-lO&NA, and communi- or without bridge Features taps). and Ser- 350 341 Troubleshooting I SPEAKERASSEMBLY STATUSINDICATOR ’ IDEt4TlRCATlON CARD UQUD CRYSTAL DISPLAY SOFTKEYS DIAL PAD MICROPIKINE - FlX!ZDFUNCTION I(3 EELWE Figure 3-l 8 SUPERSET 350 3-42 Revision 0 General View 9109-0964504A issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting SUERSET Procedures Telephone The following malfunction. table outlines in descending Table 3-24 order, the most likely items to cause SUPERSET 430 Procedures -Possible Fern Malfunction Source 1. Faulty connections between the set and the Main Distribution Frame. 2. Faulty connections between the Main Distribution 3. Faulty CDE programming; l Frame and the system. likely forms: COS Define l Stations / SUPERSETTelephones l Device Interconnection l System Configuration Table 4. Set requires reset - disconnect, reconnect line cord. 5. Faulty SUPERSETtelephone 6. Digital Line Card requires reinitialization 7. Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press SYSTEM RESET on MCC). 8. Faulty Digital Line Card. 9. Faulty backplane cable connections. 10. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 11. Problem with DTMF Receivers (not enough for peak traffic load). Notes: set or handset/cord 1. Useful maintenance commands: DIGITAL-SETS -see Practice (reseat card). SHOW STATUS, 9109-993-35l-NA, 2. The set’s LCD display will indicate synchronization cation problems, “NO COMMUNICATION”. 3. Loop length limit is: 3300 4. Refer to Practices vices, for details 9109-09635O-NA Peripheral Equipment TEST, SHOW ALARMS, RS-232 Maintenance problems, ft/l 000 m with 24 or 26 AWG 9109-099-126NA, Peripheral of features and options. Issue 1 assembly. wire Devices, Revision 0 Procedures’. SHOW ERRORS Terminal. “NO SYNCHRONIZATION”, (twisted pair -with and 9109-093-l and communi- or without O+NA, bridge Features taps). and Ser- 350 3-43 Troubleshooting . SPEAKERASSEMBLY STATUSINDICATOR . IDENWIC~TION CARD . UNEAPPEAMNCE KEYS UPUD CRYSTAL DISPLAY som DIALPAD FlXED FUNCTIONKCI MICRUPHONE Figure 3-l 9 SUPERS/T 430 General View 350 3-44 Revision 0 9109-09645CkNA Issue 1 5 I Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting SUPERSET The following Procedures DSS Module table outlines Table 3-25 the most likely items to cause malfunction. SUPERSET DSS Module Troubleshooting Possible SW Malfunction Summary Source 1. .2. 3. Faulty connections between the DSS Module and the cross-connect field. Faulty connections between the cross-connect field and the system. f Faulty connections between the associated device (SUPERSETtelephone, attendant sole) and the system. (If applicable.) See Figure 3-20. 4. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: COS Define con- l l Stations I SUPERSETTelephones l Device Interconnection l 5. 6. 7. 6. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Table System Configuration DSS Module requires reset - disconnect / reconnect line cord. Associated device requires reset (if applicable) - disconnect / reconnect line cord. DSS Module’s Digital Line Card requires reinitialization - reseat card. Associated device’s interface card requires reinitialization (if applicable) - reseat card. Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press SYSTEM RESET on MCC). Faulty DSS Module. Faulty associated device (if applicable). Fautty Digital Line Card. Faufty associated device interface (ii applicable) - see Figure 3-20. Fautty backplane cable connections. Fautty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. Notes: 1. Useful maintenance commands: SHOW STATUS, TEST, SHOW ALARMS, DIGITAL-SETS, SHOW ERRORS DATASETS - see Practice 9109-096-351 Maintenance Terminal. 2. Loop length limit is: 3300 ft with 24 or 26 AWG wire (twisted pair-with SHOW ERRORS -NA, RS-232 no bridge taps). ‘-. ” 9109-09H5O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 3-45 Troubleshooting DIGKALLINE DSS/BLFwithSUPERSET3mDN o( /, SUPERSET3” OR ’ SUPERSET4m DN TELEPHONE i DN, I I I i SUPERSET4m DN tdephme SUPERsET&Xm DIGKALLINE Module I I L --------- J ---------1 T COV UNE , DSSiBLFwtb SUPERSET31M or SUPERSET3,m OR I SUPERSET48 TELEPHONE I I I SUPERSET4@ telephone I I SUPERSETDSSN Module DIGITALLINE I--------- l I r DlGlTAlUNE/UNlVERWLCARD I ! ---------1 ATKNDANT CONSOLE I DSS/BLFvith Attend&-atCcmde SUPERSETLXS~ Module --------- Figure 3-20 SUPERSET DSS Module Configurations 350 3-46 Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting DATASET 1103 / DATASET Procedures 2103 (DTE Mode) The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. Note that this table applies to stand-alone DATASET 1103 and DATASET 2103 units interfaced to DTE devices. See Table 3-36 for the DATASET 1101 Cartridge unit. For applications involving modems (DCE devices), refer to “DATASET 1100 / DATASET 2100 - DCE Mode”. -- Table 3-26 DATASET 1103 / DATASET 2103 - DTE Mode ; Step Posslble Malfunction Source 1. Faulty connections between the data station and the cross-connect field. 2. Faulty connections between the cross-connect 3. Faulty connections phone). between the DATASET and the connecting device(s) (terminal, tele- 4. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: COS Define field and the SX-200 DIGITAL system. l * Stations I SUPERSETTelephones l Data Circuit Descriptor l Data Assignment * DTE Profile l Device Interconnection l System Configuration Table 5. Incorrect DATASET switch settings (DATASET 2163 only) - see Table 3-27 through Table 3-32. 6. Faulty far end (if applicable). 7. Faulty external equipment 8. DATASET requires reset - disconnect, 9. Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press SYSTEM RESET on MCC). 10. Faulty DATASET unit, or power cord assembly (or no AC power). 11. Digital Line Card requires reinitialization 12. Faulty Digital Line Card. 13. Faulty backplane cable connections. 14. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary Notes: (terminal, telephone reconnect power cord. See Table 3-33 /Table 3-34. 1. Useful maintenance commands: SHOW DATASETS - see Practice 9109-096-351 2. See Table 3. Loop 9109-096-356-NA length 341 for proper limit is: 3300 Issue 1 device ft with set). indicator (reseat card). STATUS, -NA, Peripheral Equipment TEST, RS-232 SHOW ALARMS, SHOW Maintenance Commands. Procedures’. ERRORS states. 24 or 26 AWG wire (twisted Revision 0 pair -with no bridge taps). Troubleshooting SX-ZO& MDF I I 1.’ I I I Table 3-27 - Position No. ( Set - PBX operation Hunt - Back to back mode 2 UP Down Synchronous Operation Asynchronous Operation The DATASET should (Mode Selection) Meaning Down UP Note: DTE Configuration (ADL) DATASET 2100 Switch Settings 1 350 3-48 I DATASETZlM Figure 3-21 DATASET 1103/2103 Stand-alone Switch DIGITAL I be in the SET mode when connected Revision 0 to the SX-200 I DIGITAL system. 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Procedures Table 3-28 DATASET 2100 Switch Settlngs (Asynchronous Flow Control) Asynchronous Control _’ Flow Switch Type 3 Flow control disabled XON/XOFF flow control CTS flow control Flow control disabled Down UP Down UP Down UP Down UP Down UP Down 150 200 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 8 Down Down UP UP Down Down UP UP Down Down UP Down UP Down UP Settings Switch 5 Autobaud 110 4 Down Down UP UP Table 3-29 DATASET 2100 Switch Asynchronous Speed No. (Async Speed) No. 7 Down Down Down Down UP UP UP UP Down Down Down 8 Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down UP UP UP Table 3-30 DATASET 2100 Switch Settlngs (Sync Operating Mode Selection) Switch 5 9109-096435O-NA No. Position Down UP Issue 1 Meaning Transparent X.31 mode mode Revision 0 350 3-49 Troubleshootinn Table 341 DATASET 2100 Switch Settings (Synchronous Clock Source) Clock Source .._ Note: 350 3-50 “x” indicates “don’t Down UP Down up Down Down UP UP DATASET 2100 Switch Settings Synchronous Speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 4 3 Internal clock System clock TX external clock TX and Rx external clock Table 3-32 I Switch No. Asynchronous 6 1 (Sync Speed) Switch No. 7 Down UP Down UP Down Down UP UP X X 6 Down Down Down Down UP care”. Revision 0 9109-096-35&NA Issue 1 Peripheral xi-232 CONNECTOR POWER LED ASYNC LED READY LED DEVICE LED Equipment Troubleshooting PHONE JACK MODE SWrrCHES ATENTION KEY POWER Procedures LINE JACK DISCONNECT KEY Figure 3-22 DATASET 2103 Indicators and Connectors 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 341 Troubleshootinn Table 3-33 Indicator DATASET 2103 LED indicators Meaning DEVICE ON - .’ FLASHING OFF - READY ON FLASHING OFF - Indicates that the Dataset is involved in an active call. ’ Indicates that the Dataset is receiving data. Indicates that the Dataset (and the line card) are in the idle state. OSNF FLASHING - Indicates that the Dataset is operating in asynchronous mode. Indicates that the Dataset is operating in synchronous mode. Indicates that the Dataset is in an illegal connection with a DATASET 2100 in sync mode, or that the Dataset is in sync with something other than a DATASET 1100 or DATASET 2100. ON - FLASHING - OFF - Indicates that the Dataset corresponding Digital Line Indicates that the Dataset corresponding Digital Line Indicates that the Dataset plug-in transformer. ASYNC POWER Note: 350 3-52 See Figure indicates that the attached device is connected to the Dataset, and is supplying DSR or DTR on pin 21 of the RS-232 connector. Indicates that the Dataset is transmitting data Indicates that the device is not supplying DTR or DSR, or is not connected. has power, and is in sync with the card. has power, but is not in sync with the card. is not receiving power from the 9 Vat 3-22. Revision 0 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment PHONE POWER READY W) DiVlCE W’) FIB-232 CONNECTOR AllEiiTlON KEY Troubleshooting POWER Procedures UNE DlSiDNNECT KEY BBM29 Figure 3-23 DATASET 1103 Indicators and Connectors 9109-09M5O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 3-53 Troubleshooting Table 3-34 Indicator DATASET 1103 indicators Meaning ON - FLASHING OFF - R&DY ON FLASHING OFF - indicates that the Dataset is involved in an active call. indicates that the Dataset is receiving data. indicates that the Dataset (and the line card) are in the idle state. POWER ON - FLASHING - OFF - indicates that the Dataset corresponding Digital Line indicates that the Dataset corresponding Digital Line indicates that the Dataset plug-in transformer. DEVICE ._ Note: 350 354 See Figure indicates that the attached device is connected to the Dataset unit, and is supplying DSR or DTR on pin 21 of the RS-232 connector. indicates that the Dataset is transmitting data. indicates that the device is not supplying DTR or DSR, or is not connected. has power, and is in sync with the card. has power, but is not in sync with the card. is not receiving power from the 9 Vat 3-23. Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting DATASET Procedures 1103 / 2103 (DCE Mode) The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. Note that this table applies to stand-alone DATASET 1103 and DATASET 2103 units interfaced to CDE devices. See Table 3-36 for the DATASET 1101 Cartridge unit. For applications involving DTE devices, refer to “DATASET 1103 / DATASET 2103 - DTE Mode”. For modem pool troubleshooting, refer to Table 5-12. .._ Table 3-35 DATASET 1103 / DATASET 2103 - DCE Mode Step Possible Malfunction Source 1. Faulty connections between the data station and the cross-connect 2. Faulty connections between the cross-connect 3. Faulty connections between the DATASET and the connecting 4. Faulty CDE programming; . field and the SX-200 field. DIGITAL system. device(s) (modem). likely forms: COS Define 9 Stations / SUPERSETTelephones 9 Data Circuit Descriptor * Data Assignment l DTE Profile l Modem Assignment l Device Interconnection l System Configuration Table 5. Incorrect DATASET switch settings (DATASET 2103 only) -see Table 3-32. 6. Faulty far end (if applicable). 7. Incorrect modem switch settings or modem software set-up characteristics 8. Modem requires reset - refer to manufacturer’s 9. Faulty external equipment 10. DATASET requires reset - disconnect, 11. Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press SYSTEM RESET on MCC). 12. Faulty DATASET unit or power cord assembly 13. Digital Line Card requires reinitialization 14. Faulty Digital Line Card. 15. Faulty backplane 16. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 9109-09635O-NA Table 3-27 through (ii applicable). instructions. (modem). reconnect power cord. See Table 3-33 / Table 3-34. (or no AC power). (reseat card). cable connections. Issue 1 Revision 0 Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. Troubleshooting Notes: 1, Useful maintenance DATASETS - see 2. See Table 3. Loop length 341 commands: SHOW STATUS, Practice 9109-096-351~NA, for proper limit is: 3300 device ft with indicator TEST, RS-232 SHOW ALARMS, SHOW Maintenance Terminal. ERRORS states. 24 or 26 AWG wire (twisted pair-with no bridge taps). .._ REMOTECOMPUTER w41 Figure 3-24 DATASET 1103 / DATASET 2103 Modem Configuration 350 3-56 Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting DATASET Procedures 1101 The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. Note that this table applies to the DATASET 1101 Cartridge unit installed in either a SUfERSET3DN or SUPERSET DN telephone set. Table 3-36 DATASET 1101 Cartridge Possible Step Malfunction Unit Source ; 1. Faulty connections between the data station and the cross-connect 2. Faulty connections between the cross-connect 3. Faulty connections between the DATASETISUPERSETand nal). See Figure 3-25. 4. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: COS Define field. field and the SX-ZOO DIGITAL system. the connecting device (termi- l l Stations I SUPERSETTelephones l Data Circuit Descriptor l Data Assignment . DTE Profile l Modem Assignment l Device Interconnection Table 9 System Configuration 5. Faulty far end (if applicable). 6. Faulty external equipment 7. DATASlWSUPERSETrequires cord. See Table 3-37. a. Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press SYSTEM RESET on MCC). 9. Faulty DATASET Cartridge unit or power cord (or no AC power). 10. Faulty SUPERSET telephone. 11. Digital Line Card requires reinitialization 12. Faulty Digital Line Card. 13. Faulty backplane cable connections. 14. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary Notes: reset - disconnect, reconnect SUPERSETtelephone 3. Loop length 341 for proper limit is. 3300 Issue 1 device it with indicator line (reseat card). Peripheral Equipment 1. Useful maintenance commands: SHOW STATUS, TEST, SHOW ALARMS, DIGITAL-SETS, SHOW ERRORS DATASETS - see Practice 9109-0~51-NA, Maintenance Terminal. 2. See Table 9109-09~5O-NA (terminal). SHOW Procedures’. ERRORS RS-232 states. 24 or 26 AWG wire (twisted Revision 0 pair -with no bridge taps). 350 3-57 Troubleshooting .SUPERSET4mDN WTIH DATASET11Ol CARTRIDGE BBO243 Figure 3-25 DATASET 11OlISWERSET4 350 3-58 Revision 0 DN Configuration 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Procedures i%ATASETllOi CARTRIDGEISAN MTEGRALINTElWiLPARTOFTHETELEPHONESEL ITISNOT FIELD ACCESSIBLE, DATA LCD III -’ 1 ~ I I I TYPICALLINEAPPEARANCE KEYASSIGNMENTON A 5YlPEt?SET4m DN TELEPHONE TxD POWER RECEPTlCLE Figure 3-26 DATASET 1101 Indicators and Connectors 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 3-59 Troubleshootinn Table 3-37 DATASET 1101 LEDs Indicator Meaning AlTN (note 1) ON - OFF - DISC (note 1) ON OFF - indicates that the Dataset is involved in an active call. * Indicates that the Dataset (and the line card) are in the idle state. TxD (note 2) ON - FLASHING OFF - Indicates that the attached unit, and is supplying DTR Indicates that the cartridge Indicates that the attached connected. ON FLASHING OFF - RxD (note 2) Notes: Indicates that the attached device is connected to the Dataset, and is supplying DSR or DTR on pin 21 of the RS-232 connector. Indicates that the device is not supplying DTR or DSR, or is not connected. Indicates that the Dataset is involved in an active call. Indicates that the cartridge is receiving data. Indicates that the Dataset (and the line card) are in the active state. 1. These indicators as ATTENTION QlOQ-O96-105-NA, are located on the host SU?E/?S~telephone. and DISCONNECT Feature Keys. Refer Features Description. 2. These are located at the rear of host and Figure 5-l indicators 3. See Figure S-26 device is connected to the Dataset on pin 21 of the RS-232 connector. is transmitting data. device is not supplying DTR, or is not 4 / Figure Line Appearance keys to ‘Feature Keys’ in Practice are programmed SlJPERSETtelephone. 3-15. 4. The DATASET 1101 is powered by an external 9 Vat plug-in transformer, not by the set itself. Ensure this external power is properly connected to the DATASET before attempting to operate the data port (disconnect/reconnect the power connection to m-initialize the DATA-SET). 350 3-60 Revision 0 9109-096-35&NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting DATASET 1102 / DATASET Procedures 2102 The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. Note that this table applies to the DATASET 1102 and DATASET 2102 cards interfaced to modems. For applications involving stand-alone Datasets with modems, refer to Table 335. Table 3-38 DATASET 1102 / DATASET 2102 Troubleshooting Possible 3tep Malfunction Summary Source ; 1. Faulty connections between the DATACABINET 9000 and the cross-connect field. 2. Faulty connections between the cross-connect 3. Faulty connections Figure 3-25. between the modem and the Modem Interconnect 4. Faulty connections between the Dataset card and the Modem Interconnect 5. Faulty connections between the Dataset card and the modem (must have a modem adapter). See Figure 3-32. 6. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: COS Define field and the SX-200 DIGITAL system. Panel. See Panel. l l Stations / SUPERSETTelephones l Data Circuit Descriptor l Data Assignment l DTE Profile l Modem Assignment l Device Interconnection l System Configuration Table 7. Faulty far end (if applicable). 8. Incorrect modem switch settings or modem software set-up characteristics 9. Modem requires reset - refer to manufacturer’s 10. Incorrect DATASET switch settings (DATASET 2102 only) - see Table 3-27 through Table 3-32, and Figure 3-27. 11. DATASET card requires reset - reseat card. 12. Digital Line card requires reinitialization 13. Faulty modem. 14. Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press SYSTEM RESET on MCC). 15. Faulty DATASET card. 16. Faulty Digital Line card. 17. Faulty backplane cable connections. (if applicable). instructions. (reseat card). Page 1 of 2 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 3-61 Troubleshooting Table 3-38 DATASET 1102 / DATASET 2102 Troubleshooting (continued) Step Possible Malfunction Summary Source 18. Faulty Modem Interconnect Panel. 19.. Faulty DATASHELF 9100 assembly - see DATACABINET 20. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 9000 procedures. Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. Page 2 of 2 Notes: 1, Useful maintenance DATASETS - see 2. Refer to the modem connector pin-out. commands: SHOW STATUS, Practice 9109-096-351-NA, manufacturer’s TEST, RS-232 instructions 3. Some modems are configured to go off-hook ufacturer’s instructions for further information. SHOW ALARMS, SHOW Maintenance Commands. for information during a manual on correct analog switch loopback ERRORS settings test. Refer and its RS-232 to the man- 4. The RS-232 connedon between the modem and the Dataset must be controlled totally by the system/ Dataset. No modem which controls any part of the RS-232 connection may be used. The modem must also be able to be placed into originate mode when the Dataset asserts DTR (RS-232 pin 20) or when the Dataset shorts Ml and MIC (pins 2 and 5) of the modem’s PHONE jack. Note that many “smart modems” do not allow this; therefore, the use of “dumb modems” is recommended. 5. A synchronous 6. See Table 7. Loop 350 3-62 length Dataset 3-41 for proper limit is: 3300 may not be used device indicator with an asynchronous modem, and vice-versa. states. ft with 24 or 26 AWG wire Revision 0 (twisted pair -with no bridge taps). 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Figure 3-27 DATASET 2102 Card Connectors and Indicators 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 Procedures Troubleshooting Table 3-39 Indicator Meaning DEVICE .._ RtiDY ON - FLASHING OFF - ON FLASHING OFF - Indicates that the Dataset card is involved in an active call. Indicates that the card is receiving data. Indicates that the Dataset card (and the line card) are in the idle state. ::F FLASHING - Indicates that the card Indicates that the card Indicates that the card 2100 in sync mode, or other than a DATASET ::F - Indicates that the 2 on-board fuses are functional. Indicates that one or both of the 2 on-board fuses has blown. ON - FLASHING - Indicates that the card has corresponding Digital Line Indicates that the card has corresponding Digital Line OFF - ASYNC POWER 1 POWER 2 Note: 350 3-64 DATASET 2102 LED Indicators See Figure Indicates that the attached device is connected to the Dataset card, and is supplying DSR or DTR on pin 21 of the RS-232 connector. Indicates that the card is transmitting data. Indicates that the device is not turned on, supplying DTR or DSR, or is not connected. is operating in asynchronous mode. is operating in synchronous mode. is in an illegal connection with a DATASET that the card is in sync with something 1100 or DATASET 2100. power, and is in sync with the card. power, is not in sync with the card. Indicates that the card is not receiving power from the shelf backplane. 3-27. Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Figure 3-28 DATASET 1102 Card Connectors and Indicators 9109-09M5O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 Procedures Troubleshooting Table 3-40 DATASET 1102 LED Indicators Meaning Indicator ON - FLASHING OFF - READY 1 ON FLASHING OFF - DEVICE 2 Same as for DR/ICE READY 2 Same as for READY 1. DEVICE 1 _’ -._ POWER 1 ON OFF - POWER 2 ON - FLASHING OFF Note: 350 3-66 See Figure Indicates that the attached device is connected to the Dataset card, and is supplying DSR or DTR on pin 21 of the RS-232 connector. Indicates that the card is transmitting data. Indicates that the device is not turned on, supplying DTR or DSR, or is not connected. ; Indicates that the Dataset card is involved in an active call. Indicates that the card is receiving data. Indicates that the Dataset card (and the line card) are in the idle state. 1. Indicates that the 2 on-board fuses are functional. Indicates that one of the 2 on-board fuses has blown. Indicates that corresponding - Indicates that corresponding - Indicates that backplane. the card has power, and is in sync with the Digital Line card. the card has power, is not in sync with the Digital Line card. the card is not receiving power from the shelf 3-28. Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Table 341 Data Switching Device Status Indicators Device lndkator Terminal Dataset Idle State on on on on on on Terminal Digital Line circuit card LED Off Or; Modem Element Dataset DEVICE SYSTEM ASYNC POWER 1 POWER 2 Off on on on on on on Modem Element Digital Line circuit card LED Off on Modem Element Digital Line circuit card LED Off on Modem Element ONS Line circuit modem card LED DTR LED carrier LED DSR LED speed LED Off on on on on on Notes: 1. The terminal the Dataset. 2. POWER 3. ASYNC 9109-096-35O-NA Dataset DEVICE 1 and POWER indicators apply issue 1 LED will be on only 2 indicators apply only to DATASET on Connected DEVICE READY ASYNC POWER 1 POWER 2 :- Procedures Off Off Off Off Off Off if the terminal is powered only to rack-mounted Datasets. 2100 no effect units, Revision 0 and have up, and is supplying on idle and connected State DTR to states. 350 3-67 Troubleshootinn Milink Data Module Table 3-42 outlines in descending Table 3-42 order, the most likely items to cause malfunction, Data Module /Wink Possible Item 1. Faulty connections 2. 3. ’ Faulty connections Faulty connections phone set). 4. Procedures Malfunction Source between the data module and the Main Distribution between the Main Distribution Frame. r Frame and the system. between the data module and the connecting device (terminal, tele- Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: l COS Define l Stations I SUPERSETTelephones l Data Circuit Descriptor l Data Assignment l DTE Profile l Device Interconnection l System Configuration Table 5. Faulty far end. 6. Faulty external equipment (terminal or the SUPERSET 470, SUPERSET 420 or SlJPERSET430 telephone). 7. DATASET requires reset - disconnect, a. Digital Line Card requires reinitialization 9. Bay Control Card / Main Control Card requires reset (power down bay or press SYSTEM RESET on MCC). 10. Faulty DATASET unit, or power cord assembly (or no AC power). 11. Faulty Digital Line Card. 12. Faulty backplane cable connections. 13. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary Notes: 1. Useful maintenance DATASETS - see reconnect power cord. See Table 343. (reseat card). commands: SHOW STATUS, Practice 91 OQ-OQ5-351 -NA, TEST, RS-232 Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. SHOW ALARMS, SHOW Maintenance Commands. ERRORS 2. To ensure the most thorough testing, the ‘Dataset Auditing” and “Attached Device Loopback” entries the Dataset Circuit Descriptor Assignment form must be enabled (see Practice QlOQ-OQ6-2104A, Customer Data Entry, for further details). 350 3-6a Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA in Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting READY ONICE DISCONNECT key ATTENTION km I Procedures COVER I -- TOPVIEW Is-232 CONNECTOR Figure 3-29 9109-09C35O-NA MiLink Issue 1 POWER hW&A Data Module, Indicators and Connectors Revision 0 350 3-69 Troubleshooting AC ADAWEFI EIAW TEFMNAL MWNKDATA MODULE Figure 330 MiLink Table 3-43 Data Module Configuration M/ink Date Module LEDs Meaning Indicator IDEVICE (TW EEWQS ON - OFF - FLASHING - Indicates that the attached device is connected to the data module, and is supplying DSR or DTR on pin 21 of the B-232 connector. Indicates that the device is not supplying DTR or DSR, or is not connected. Indicates that the data module is transmitting data. IXAdY I7-Q ON OFF FLASHING - Indicates that the data module is involved in an active call. Indicates that the data module (and the line card) are in the idle state, Indicates that the data module is receiving data. POWER ON - OFF FLASHING - Indicates that the data module has power, and is in sync with the line circuit. Indicates that the data module is not receiving power. Indicates that the data module has power, but is not in sync with the line circuit. - 350 3-70 Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 QI Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Procedures PRMARY NPLT FUSE 3 D 0 25 PAIR coraEcl0R 4 / Figure 3-31 DATASHELF 9100 wo9-096-350-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 3-71 Troubleshooting COMBINED ONS AND MIMC Rs-232 CABLE 25-PAIR CONNECTOR TO PBX ONS PORTS . FROM MODEMS MODEM iNTERCONNECT PANEL DATASHELF91M) 1 1 2PAIR CONNECTOR TO PBX DIGKU LINEPOFlTS Figure 342 OFp c BBU249 Connections at Modem Interconnect Panel l 1 TO DATASETS . 0 EECG%2 Figure 3-33 Modem Interconnect Panel 350 3-72 Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting DATACABIN Procedures ET 9000 The DATACABlNET9000 houses the Modem Interconnect Panel and the DATASHELF 9100. This section covers all three of these units. The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. Table 3-44 DATACABINET 9000 Troubleshooting Summary I.. _’ Posslble Step \ Malfunction Source ; 1. Faulty connections between the DATACABINET 2. Faulty connections between the cross-connect 3. Blown primary input fuse on the DATASHELF 9100 unit (see Figure 3-31). 4. Blown front panel fuse(s) on the DATASHELF 9100 unit. 5. Faulty connections Figure 3-32. between the modems and the Modem Interconnect 6. Faulty connections between the Dataset cards and the Modem Interconnect 7. Faulty connections ers). between the Dataset cards and the modems (must have modem adapt- 8. Faulty connections Figure 3-35. between the Datacabinet PDU and the Distribution 9. Faulty connections between the Distribution Panel and the Datashelf. 10. Faulty CDE programming; l 9000 and the cross-connect field. field and the SX-,200 DIGITAL system. Panel. See Panel. Panel. See likely forms: COS Define 9 Stations / SUPERSETTelephones l Data Circuit Descriptor & Data Assignment l DTE Profile l Modem Assignment l Device Interconnection l System Configuration Table 11. Incorrect modem switch settings or modem software set-up characteristics 12. Incorrect Dataset switch settings. 13. Faulty Dataset card(s) or modem(s). 14. Faulty Digital Line card(s). 15. Faulty Modem Interconnect 16. Faulty DATASHELF 9100 unit(s). 17. Faulty fan unit. 18. Faulty Datacabinet 19. Faulty SX-200 Digital backplane cable connections. 20. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 9109-09~5O-NA Panel. PDU and/or Distribution Issue 1 (if applicable). Panel. Revision 0 Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. 350 3-73 Troubleshootina I-T 0 0 0 MODEM INTERCONNECl PANEL DATbSHELFglOO > - FAN UNK Figure 3-34 DATACABINET 9000 - Front View (Typical Installation) Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Peripheral Equipment Troubleshooting Procedures SHELF POWER CORDS DlSTRlBUll ON PANEL - POWER MSTR~~JT~ONUNm PANEL CABLE EN-IW SLOTSAND wvERs ‘25PAlk SIGNAL CABLES Figure 3-35 DATACABINET 9000 Rear View (Typical Installation) 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 3-75 Troubleshooting Supplementary Peripheral Equipment Procedures The purpose of this section is to determine the cause of peripheral card/device failures which were not solved using their corresponding troubleshooting summaries. It is assumed, at this point in the troubleshooting process, that the cause of failure is not due to peripheral interface card / peripheral device failure, but rather failure of some part of the switching matrix. The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. Tab!e 345 Supplementary Possible Step I. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. a. 9. 10. 11. 12. Peripheral Equipment Malfunction Troubleshooting Summary ; Source Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Analog Digital Interface card (if applicable). Peripheral Control card (ii applicable). Scanner card (if applicable). intercabinet / interbay connections Bay: - check for faulty connections between analog and digital bays - verify connection between digital bay backplane (Jl7A for Bay 3, or Jl7B for Bay 4) and the analog bay Digital Interface card (J2). - verii connection between analog bays 4 and 5. 336 Port Bay: - check for faulty connections between digital bays - verify connection between the control backplane (Jl7A for Bay 3, or J17B for Bay 4) and the bay backplane (Jl7A). 672 Port Bay: - check for faulty connections between digital bays -verify connection between Bay 0 (J4OC) and Bay 3 (Jl7A) -verify connection between Bay 0 (J4OB) and Bay 2 (Jl7A) -verify connection between Bay 0 (J42A) and Bay 5 (Jl7A) - verify connection between Bay 0 (J42C) and Bay 7 (Jl7A) - verify connection between Bay 0 (J42B) and Bay 6 (Jl7A). FD System: - Check for faulty connections between the control and peripheral nodes -verify the Optical Fiber cable TX & Fix connections between the Control Node (Bay 0) and the Peripheral Nodes (Bay 1 to Bay 7) - Bay O’s FIM TX connects to the Peripheral Bay’s FIM Rx (FIM LED’s are on) - Bay O’s FIM Rx connects to the Peripheral Bay’s FIM TX (FIM LED’s are on) Faulty Bay Control card (ii applicable). Faulty Peripheral FIM Carrier Module (if applicable). Faulty Quad FIM Carrier (ii applicable). Faulty Fiber Interface Module (FIM) (ii applicable). Faulty Optical Fiber Cable (ii applicable). Faulty DX Module / Switch Matrix card / Switch Matrii Module (as applicable). Faulty Control Resource Card (if applicable). Faulty Main Control card. Notes: 1. Useful maintenance commands: 9109-096-351 -NA, RS-232 2. Items 1, 2 and 3 apply SHOW STATUS, TEST, Maintenance Terminal. only to systems with analog peripheral 3. In item 10, DX Module applies to 336,456 and 48O-port systems; Switch Matrix Module applies to FD systems. 350 3-76 Revision 0 SHOW ALARMS -see Practice bays. systems; Switch Matrii card 9109-09635O-NA applies to 672 port Issue 1 4 ’ SUBSYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES Main Control Card :- _’ 4.1 \ The following paragraphs outline the troubleshooting for the Main Control Card. Configuration The Main Control Main Control l Card consists Card (without l DX Module l Switch Matrix Card (672-par-t l Switch Matrix Module of the following: modules) (SX-200 system) FD system) 0 DRAM module l Decryption l EPROM l module Tl Clock Module (optional) Main Control Card Power-Up Tests The Main Control Card power-up tests are run automatically upon operation of the located on the Main Control Card front panel. The test results are indicated in code form on the Main Control Card’s numeric displays, also located on the Main Control Card front panel. SYSTEM RESET pushbutton Note: . The Main Control Card numeric displays are also used for the troubleshooting of the Floppy Disk Subsystem - refer to the Floppy Disk Subsystem troubleshooting procedures. First-Step Checks Prior to replacing cards as directed by the procedures, carry out the following checks: e Reseat the suspect Control Card troubleshooting card. 0 Check for bent pins at the backplane If the above Main or module does not clear the fault, proceed connector, as applicable. to replace the card. Power-Up Sequence The Main Control 9109-096-353-NA, 9109-09645O-NA Card diagnostic power-up sequence General Maintenance Information. Issue 1 Revision 0 is described in Practice 350 4-l Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Procedures Troubleshooting procedures for the Main Control card are covered under “Emergency Troubleshooting Procedures” (Table 9-l). Table 4-l outlines the most likely causes of Main Control failure for the 336, 466, 480 and 672 port systems and those for the SX-200 FD system’s Control Node. ._ Step, 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. a. 9. 10. 11. Table 4-l Possible Main Control Troubleshooting Malfunction Source for 336,466,460 Summary & 672-part Systems ’ Main Control card requires a reset - press SYSTEM RESET pushbutton on the Main Control card front panel. See Figure 4-l. Failure of initialization / power up tests - check for error codes on the Main Control card numeric displays -see Table 2-2. Faulty installation of the floppy drive(s) - verify both drives are seated firmly. Also verify the disk drive backplane connections (older systems only) - see Figure 4-l 0. Faulty or improperly installed floppy disks. (Disk A in right hand drive; Disk B in left hand drive) Incorrect flea clip locations on MCC - see Figure 2-l. (if applicable) Faulty disk drive. Faulty Bay Power Supply unit - refer to that procedure. Faulty Main Control card. Faulty Switch Matrix card / DX Module (as applicable). Faulty PAM Module. Faulty backplane cable connections. Step Posslble 1. Malfunction Source for the SX-200 FD System Main Control card requires a reset - press SYSTEM RESET pushbutton on the Main Control card front panel. See Figure 4-l. Failure of initialization / power up tests - check for error codes on the Main Control card numeric displays - see Table 2-2. Faulty installation of the floppy driie(s) - verity that the cables connecting the disk drives are seated correctly into the back of the drives and the backplane connectors. Fautty or improperly installed floppy diskettes. (Disk A in top drive, Disk B in bottom drive) Incorrect flea clip locations on MCC - see Figure 2-l. Faufty disk driie. Faulty Control cabinet Power Supply unit - refer to that procedure. Faufty Main Control card. Faulty Control Resource Card. Faulty Switch Matrii Module (ii applicable). Faulty PAM Module. Faulty Control Cabinet FIM Module. Faulty FIM(s). Faulty backplane cable connections. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. a. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Note: 350 4-2 Useful maintenance commands: KS-232 Maintenance Terminal. SHOW STATUS, TEST, Revision 0 SHOW ALARMS -see Practice 9109-09635O-NA QlOQ-OQ6-351-NA, Issue 1 Subsystem Troubleshooting 7-SEGMENT DISPLAYS Procedures < 21 PIN CONNECT0 MAIN CONTROL CARD SCANNER CARD SAYCONrROL CARD Figure 4-I 9109-09C35O-NA Issue 1 DIGKU INTERFACE CARD PERIPHERAL CONTR0L CARD Control Cards Revision 0 350 4-3 Troubleshooting - PCWERSUPPLYUNil (PSU) - MAJNCONROL CARD (MCC) - CONTROLRESOURCECARD -CONTROL INTERCONNECTCARD Figure 4-2 SX-ZOO FD Control Cabinet Front view (front cover removed) 350 4-4 Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 r Subsystem Troubleshooting - Procedures POWER SUPPLYUNK (PSUJ SYSTEM PRINTERPOFii MAINENNOE TWMlN4L FORT cm78 Figure 4-3 SX-ZOO FD Control Cabinet Rear View 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 4-5 I Troubleshooting Digital Bay Control Subsystem 4.2 The following paragraphs Control subsystem. detail the troubleshooting procedures for the Digital Bay Configuration The Digital Bay Control subsystem No. 9109-017-000). consists of one card -the In the SX-200 FD system, the Digital Bay Control subsystem ,two modules -the Bay Control Card as above, the Peripheral Interface Module (FIM). Bay Control Card (Part consists of one card and FIM Carrier and the Fiber Bay Control Power-Up Tests The Bay Control card power-up tests are run automatically upon power-up of the associated bay, or a reset of the Main Control Card. Failure of any of the power-up tests will result in the flashing of the Bay Control Card ALARM LED soon after initialization. First-Step Checks Prior to replacing cards troubleshooting procedures, l l as directed by the carry out the following Digital Bay checks: subsystem At the Maintenance terminal, SHOW ERRORS and check the DX channel links; also check for HDLC and the Disk Drive errors. Refer to Practice 9109-096351 -NA, RS-232 Maintenance Terminal, and Practice 9109-096-353-NA, General Maintenance Information. Ensure the PCM/fiber cable connections are secure between Node and Control Bay/Node (Bay2/ Bay 0) as appropriate. l Reseat the suspect card and modules l Check for bent pins at the backplane the Peripheral Bay/ as appropriate. or module connector, If the above does not clear the fault, replace the modules - Control as applicable. and card. Power-Up Sequence The Bay Control Card power-up sequence is described in Practice 9109-096-35~NA, General Maintenance Information. Table 4-2 summarizes the troubleshooting procedures for the Bay Control Card. Troubleshooting Procedures The following 350 4-6 table outlines the most likely causes Revision 0 of Bay Control failure. 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Subsystem Troubleshooting Table 4-2 Digital Bay Control Step Posslble Malfunction Troubleshooting Procedures Summary Source for 336,466,460 & 672-part Systems 1. Bay Control card requires a reset - power down bay, reseat card, and power up bay. 2. -3. Note the indicators on the Bay Control card - see Table 4-3. 4. Faulty or improperly installed PCM backplane connections - refer to practice 91094X36-20O-NA, Installation Information, for details. ‘ Incorrect Bay Control card switch settings - read Note 2. See Figure 4-4. 5. Faulty Bay Power Supply unit - refer to that procedure. 6. Faulty Bay Control card. 7. Faulty Main Control card. 8. Faulty Switch Matrix card (if applicable). 9. Faulty backplane cable connections. Possible Step Malfunction Source for the SX-200 FD System 1. Bay Control card requires a reset - power down bay, reseat modules and card, and power up bay. 2. Note the indicators on the Bay Control card (see Table 4-3 and Table 4-4.) and on the Fiber Interface Module (TX & Rx must be ON to show “in sync”) 3. Faulty or improperly installed FIM or Fiber Optical cable assembly - refer to practice 9109-096-20&NA, Installation information, for details. 4. Incorrect Bay Control card switch settings - read Note 2. See Figure 44. 5. Faulty Bay Power Supply unit - refer to that procedure. 6. Faulty Bay Control card, Peripheral FIM carrier or FIM 7. Faulty Main Control card. 8. Faulty Switch Matrix module. Notes: 1. Useful maintenance commands: SHOW see Practice 9109-096-351-NA,RS-232 2. Ail of the switches 9109-09635WNA Issue 1 (SWl-1, SW1 -2, STATUS, TEST, SHOW Maintenance Terminal. SW2-1, SW2-2) Revision 0 should ALARMS be in the closed - position. 350 4-7 Troubleshootina Figure 4-4 Bay Control Card Device Locations LOCAL 0 TX REMOTE 0 Figure 4-5 Fiber Interface Module 350 4-8 Revision 0 9109496-35O-NA Issue 1 Subsystem Troubleshooting Table 4-3 TX LED RX LED on on Bay Control ALARM Procedures Card Status LEDs LED Meaning on Bay Control Card is either waiting for, or has lost communication with the Main Control Card. If this state persists for more than a few seconds, there is no communication. ._ _ flashing flashing on Bay Control Card is being downloaded the Main Control Card. off/flashing off / flashing Off Bay Control Card is up and running and communicating to the Main Control Card. - flashing Table 44 FIM LED ( LED STATUS LOCAL REMOTE SX-200 FD FIM Status LEDs Meaning ( Receiver in sync. (normal operation) Off No power to FIM Local Receiver not in sync on Remote Receiver in sync. (normal operation) Off No power to FIM flashing Notes: There is a failure on the Bay Control Card. on flashing by 1 Remote Receiver not in sync I 1. FIM status LEDs are located on the Fiber interface Modules of the SX-200 FD System. The status indicated applies to the FlMs in both the control and peripheral nodes. If both LEDs are flashing, the problem may lie in the TX or FIX path. 2. mashing LED status on the FIM can be caused by the following - unconnected fiber cable. -improperly connected fiber cable. -reversed fiber connection (i.e., TX and RX are inverted). -exceeding maximum allowable cable loss of 1 OdB (light -broken or cracked fiber cable. -faulty FIM. 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 conditions: intensity). 350 4-9 Troubleshooting Analog Bay Peripheral 4.3 Control Subsystem The following paragraphs detail the troubleshooting Peripheral Control Subsystem. procedures for the Analog Bay Configuration The Analog Bay Peripheral Control Subsystem Name 6 Peripheral consists Control PCC EPROM l Digital Interface l DIC EPROM l Scanner cards: Part No. Card (PCC) 9108-203-100 \ l of the following 9108-002-000 Card (DIC) 911 O-l 04-000-NA or 911 O-004-000-NA Card Peripheral Control Subsystem Power-Up Tests The Peripheral Control Subsystem power-up tests are run automatically upon operation of the MASTERRESETpushbutton located on the Scanner card front panel, The test results are indicated in code form on the Scanner card’s numeric displays, located on the Scanner card front panel. See Figure 4-l. First-Step Checks Prior to replacing cards troubleshooting procedures, as directed by the carry out the following l Reseat the suspect l Check for bent pins at the backplane Control Subsystem card. or module If the above does not clear the fault, replace a Peripheral checks: connector, as applicable. the card. Power-Up Sequence ,The Peripheral Control subsystem power-up sequence 9109-095353-NA, General Maintenance Information. is outlined in detail in Practice Troubleshooting Procedures The following 350 4-10 table outlines the most likely causes Revision 0 of Analog Bay Control 9109-09645O-NA failure. Issue 1 Subsystem Troubleshooting Table 4-5 Analog Step 1. Bay Control Possible Troubleshooting Malfunction Procedures Summary Source 5. 6. Bay requires a reset - press MASTER RESET on the Scanner card front panel - see Figure 4-l. Check indicators on the DIC card and refer to Table 4-6. Cards require reinitialization - power down bay, reseat DIC, PCC and Scanner cards, power up bay. Faulty or improperly installed PCM connections between the 2 DIC cards (ii applicable) see Figure 4-6. See Note 2. Faulty or improperly installed PCM connections between the Bay 4 DIC and the control cabinet. See Figure 4-6 and Note 2. Faulty DIC card(s). Faulty PCC card. 7. 8. 9. Faulty Scanner card. Faulty Main Control. Faultv backolane cable connections. 2. 3. 4. Notes: 1. Useful maintenance 9109-096-351-NA, 2. Refer to practice commands: SHOW STATUS, TEST, RS-232 Maintenance Terminal. 9109-095-2OO-NA, Installation Table 4-6 Scanner SHOW Information, Likely Cause(s) b 4 0 A A or A (see Note) l Faulty power system - refer to that procedure. * Faulty Scanner card. . Unseated * Faulty DIC card. l Faulty PCC card. l Faulty Scanner card. l Main Control Droblem - see Table 4-l. l Faulty PCC card. l EPROM chip on PCC card. Nothing -this is normal operation. Faulty cabling from DIC card to DIC card, or from DIC card to digital bay backplane. l Faulty DIC card. Main Control problem -see Note:Theseindicateproblemsiftheypersist-theyindicatethatthe the condition persists, a problem is indicated. 9109-096-3501VA Practice Card Error Code Summary (blank) or - see for details. Error Code b 3 ALARMS Issue 1 Revision 0 bay(s)arewatingtobe Table 4-l. loaded bythe maincontrol. 350 4-11 If Troubleshootina Figure 4-6 Location of PCM Cables Floppy Disk Subsystem 4.4 The following paragraphs detail the troubleshooting procedures for the Floppy Subsystem. Chart 4-3 outlines the troubleshooting procedures for the Floppy Subsystem. Note that some troubleshooting of the Floppy Disk Subsystem is implicitly through the troubleshooting of the Main Control Card. Systems Generic 1005 are equipped with 3.5” disk drive units. a Configuration The Floppy Disk Subsystem consists of the following Name 350 4-12 Disk Disk done with components: Part. No. l Floppy Disk Drive l Main Control l Interconnecting l Bay 1 Cable Adapter 9103--037--OO&NA (not all systems) l Bay 2 Cable Adapter 910&-03&-00&NA (not all systems) Card 9109-024-000-NA 9109-I 24-000-NA or 9400-300-305-NA (5 l/4” cabled), (5 l/4” plug-in), (3 l/2” plug-in) 9109-035-000-NA - cables Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Subsystem Troubleshooting Procedures Action in Case of Power Loss In order to prevent corruption of the data on the floppy diskettes, care should be taken to disable system access to the disk drive unit prior to taking it off-line for troubleshooting purposes. Always release the lock-latch before removing power from the unit (NOTE: ensure that the system IS NOT accessing the disk when this is done). Always ensure power is applied to the disk drive before inserting the diskette. -- Troubleshooting Procedures The following table outlines the most likely causes of Floppy Disk Subsystem These apply to both the 5.25” and 3.5” floppy disk drive units. f Table 4-7 Floppy Disk Troubleshooting Step 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. a. Possible Malfunction failure. Summary Source Drive units require resets - power down the control bay (Bay 2 or Bay 0), and power up again. Check for error codes on the Main Control card numeric display - see Table 4-6. Faulty backplane connections - see Figure 4-l 0. Faulty or improperly installed floppy disk. Faulty / corrupt / obsolete software - reload with correct software. Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Note: power supply unit(s) - refer to Power System Troubleshooting. Disk Drive unit. Main Control. backplane cable connections. Useful maintenance commands: see Practice 9109-096-351-NA, 9109-09EK%5O-NA Issue 1 SHOW STATUS, TEST, RS-232 Maintenance Revision 0 SHOW ALARMS, Terminal. SHOW ERRORS DISK- 350 4-13 Troubleshooting PUSHTO RIGHTAFTER b!ETF TURN LEVEFI TO RIGHT AFTER INSERTINGDISKEm No~mcst8skQiveu~arenoteqr6pp~~~s. Figure 4-7 5 l/4” Disk Drives (Generic 1001 to Generic 1004) CONNECTOR LATCH LCCKING SCREW CC4031 Figure H 350 4-14 5 l/4” Disk Drive, PN 9109-I 24-OOO-NA (Generic 1001 to Generic 1004) Revision 0 9109-09635CMA Issue 1 Subsystem Troubleshooting Procedures BACKPLANCONNECTOR :- LATCH LOCKINGSCREW cc41 70 Figure 4-9 3 l/2” Disk Drives, PN94004004054lA Table 4-8 Floppy (Generic 1005) Disk Drhe Error Code Summary are pending. Either reinsert original l Notes: 1. Please 2. If system 9109-09645O-NA There is a note the difference is restarted Issue 1 at this ction over the diskette ‘Wite between point, the code “E” and the code the pending logs will be lost. Revision 0 notch” (a writ ‘E.” 350 4-15 Troubleshooting Older systems may be equipped with one of these backplane cable assemblies. In newer systsms, the disk drive units plug directly Into the backplane. JND DISK DRNE ADAPTER - DIN CONNECTOR POWER CABLE RIBBON CABLE GROUllD WlRE Figure 4-10 Floppy Disk Drive Backplane Connections 350 4-16 Revision 0 9109-096435O-NA Issue 1 Subsystem Troubleshooting Procedures Power Subsystem 4.5 ._ The SX-200 supplies, and configuration power supply user-supplied. Supply failure Bay Power DIGITAL PABX power subsystem consists of one to eight bay power optionally one or two rear-door power supplies, depending upon the of the system. The SX-200 FD Control Node is equipped with PC style assembly. The uninterruptable power supply (UPS) is optional, and is The following table outlines the most likely causes of Bay Power Supply Table 4-9 Bay Power Supply Troubleshootlng Step 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Possible Malfunction Summary Source Power supply unit switched off - switch back on. Faulty connection to AC power source. insufficient input voltage. See Note 1. Faulty connections between the BPS unit and the AC Distribution Panel - see Figure 16. Faulty connection between the AC Distribution Panel and the AC Line Filter unit (mounted on the inside of the rear door). See Note 3. Faulty cabinet ground connections - see Figure 4-12 / Figure 4-l 3. Blown fuse(s) on power supply - see Figure 4-14. Faulty power supply unit - see indicators on unit (the POWER indicator should be ON). Also see Note 2. Faulty AC Distribution Panel -verify internal wiring. Faulty analog bay power supply - refer to Rear Door Power Supply Troubleshooting (ii applicable). see Table 4-l 3 Faulty SX-200 FD Control Node power supply (PSU) - refer to SX-200 FD Control Node Power Supply Troubleshooting (if applicable). See Table 4-l 1. Faulty backplane - check for shorts and/or foreign material. Notes: -if 1. The Bay Power Supply has low voltage protection the output will shut off. The unit will no longer provide threshold. the input voltage falls below output until the input voltage 2. The 0. Test points proper test point voltages are shown in Table 3. The AC line filter is installed on the rear door located within the AC Distribution Panel. 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 only Revision 0 4-l in older systems. are labelled In newer a minimum threshold, rises above that clearly systems, on the backplane. the line filter is 350 4-17 Troubleshooting u BAY 2 H BAY 1 01 //II NOTE: SHELFGROUND3 ARE BEIWEENSHELFSIDE PANELSM-D THE CbBIF%T. WATER -~EDCGFiOUNDWlREB Figure 4-11 336 Port AC Distribution 350 4-18 PIPE aROUND :~j-JAcPawmcAmw Revision 0 Panel and Ground Connections 9109-096-35O-NA issue 1 Subsystem Troubleshooting Procedures SHELF ONOUND Eoo ._ . . .. .- _. .- .. .. .. . -. . .. .. _. . . .. KITE SHELFGROVNDS ARE BDWEEN SK3FSIDE PANELSAND THE CABINET. -,EDO --I. II GROUND WllW6 F TO wlLMNci WATER PIPE ONOUND y” .-~~FowERcMLEs Figure 4-12 672 Port Control Cabinet AC Distribution and Ground Connections 9109-096435O-NA PARTOF INTERCASJNET CABLEASSEMBLY issue 1 Revision 0 Panel 350 4-19 Troubleshootina - 4OTE SHELFGROUNDS ARE WWEEN SHELFSIDE PAWS AND THE CABINET. - DO OROUND WIRE6 -^ COO OROUND WIRES PARTOF INTERCbBlNEl CASLEASSEMSLY :-.Ac-fzmLEb Figure 4-13 672 Port Peripheral Cabinet AC Distribution and Ground Connections 350 4-20 CABINET GROUND STUD Revision 0 Panel 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Subsystem Troubleshooting Procedures FUSES CCOlW Figure 614 Bay Power Supply and Fuse Locations Table 4-10 Voltage +5Vdc - II Minimum II -1 Maximum + 5.07 + 5.23 + 12 Vdc + 10.8 + 13.2 -12Vdc - 13.2 - 10.8 -5Vdc 9109-096G35O-NA Bay Power Supply Test Point Voltages - 4.5 - 5.5 - 28 Vdc - 30.8 - 23.8 -48 Vdc - 53.76 - 40.8 90 Vat 63.0 99 .o Issue 1 Revision 0 350 4-21 Troubleshootina SX-200 FD Control Cabinet Power Supply The Control Cabinet supply. The following Supply failure. Table 4-11 of the SX-200 FD PABX is equipped with a “PC Style” power table outlines the most likely causes of Control Cabinet Power SX-200 FD Control Node Power Supply Troubleshooting Summary ._ Step 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Note: Possible Source Power supply unit switched off - switch back on. Faulty connection to AC power source. Insufficient input voltage. Faulty connection between the Power Supply Unit (PSU) and the backplane Faulty Power Supply unit. Faulty Control Interconnect Card (backplane), see Figure 4-l 5 Faulty Quad FIM carrier (QFC). The proper operating voltages Table 4-12 Notes: Malfunction 1. The PSU Connector 2. CIC = Control are shown in Table 4-l SX-200 FD Control label Interconnect is the label printed Card (backplane); 2. Node Power Supply Voltages on the PSU QFC Revision 0 = Quad connector. FIM Carrier; (see Figure 4-15) 9109-096-35O-NA Issue Subsystem Troubleshooting Procedures FDDA d \ CONTROLINTERCONNECT CARD (COmOL NODE BACKPLANE) PFC 1 Jl J2 53 J4 J5 JB J7 I JD SACKVIEW OF QUAD FIM CARRIER (AS SEEN FROM THE FRONT OF THE CASINE’Q ? --*--- QFC 2 Jl J2 J3 J4 J5 JB 57 I BACKVIEW OF QUAD FM CARRIER NOTEl: Jll ANDJl2ARELOCAT~ONTHER~ESlDEOFTHEMGCCARRlERBOTHAREDPIN’VCO~E~ORS. NOTE2: FDD POWERCASl.EREQlJIRESCAME ASSEMBLYPaWT#13SOSWM (CONVERTSCONNECTORAMP4W424TOAMPl7l.S22) CC0160 Figure 4-15 Control Node Cable Connections 9109-09H5O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 4-23 Troubleshooting Rear Door PowerSupply The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX can be configured with up to 2 rear-door power supplies, depending upon the configuration of the system (456-port and 480 port systems). The following table outlines the most likely causes of Rear Door Power Supply failure. Table 4-13 Rear Door Power Supply Troubleshooting Summary ._ Step Possible 1. Malfunction Source ; Power supply unit switched off -switch back on. Maintenance panel / top panel switch in OFF position - switch to ON position. Faulty connection to AC power source. Insufficient input voltage. Blown LlNEfuse (rear panel of the power supply unit). See Figure 4-16. Tripped CONVERTER /NPUTcircuit breaker (also located on the rear panel of the power supply unit). Faulty connection between the Rear Door Power Supply (harness) and the shelf backplane - see Figure 4-l 7 and Figure 4-l 8. Faulty connections / blown fuse(s) on the Interconnect card - see Note 1. Faulty cabinet ground connections - see Note 1. Blown fuse(s) on power supply - see Figure 4-l 6. Faulty Interconnect card. Faulty Rear Door Power Supply unit. Faulty backplane. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 6. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Notes: 1. For further information series of documents. 2. The proper test point on the rear door voltages Table 4-14 I TB I 1 I 2 350 4-24 Pin are shown supply in Table 4-l and related hardware, refer to the MITLSI 05/9110 4. Rear Door Power Supply Test Point Voltages I Voltage 4 +8Vdc 3 0 Vdc 2 power I I Minimum I + 7.6 Maximum t 8.4 - -5 Vdc 1 -1OVdc - 10.5 - 9.5 5 - 48 Vdc - 52.0 - 45.0 4 GND or 0 Vdc - - 2 90 Vat 65.0 95.0 Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Subsystem Troubleshooting Procedures 4SV MGHT BELL FUSE /- N’GHT BELL WNGING VOLTAGEFUSE coNw3TEFi ‘NPLII)E CONVERTER INPUT SWITCH MUIWENT SHELFPOWER ONLED RESERVE RATrFuv CONNECTEDLED _....-... AC POWERLED III 111111111 111111 ACUMFUSE AC POWER INPUT L REARVIEW Figure 4-16 Rear Door Power Supply Indicators, Switches, Fuses 9109-09~5O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 4-25 Troubleshootina Figure 4-17 Rear Door Power Supply Connections 350 4-26 Revision 0 9109-096-3504A Issue 1 Subsystem Troubleshooting Procedures Figure 4-18 Rear Door Power Supply Power Harness Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) Any UPS may be used with the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, provided that it meets the requirements specified in Practice 9109-098-l 80-NA, Engineering Information. Since these are available from a number of suppliers, no troubleshooting procedures for the UPS are provided in this document, Reference should be made to the appropriate manual provided by the manufacturer of the UPS for any self-diagnostic capabilities. 9109-096435O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 4-27 350 4-28 Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 5. MISCELLANEOUS TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES Maintenance 5.1’ Terminal The device used as a Maintenance Terminal must satisfy the following: \ l compatibility l 80 columns l compatibility with RS-232C type interface with ANSI X3.64-1 protocol 977 special character set for special graphics. These procedures deal with the interface only. Reference should be made to the appropriate manual provided by the manufacturer of the terminal for any problems with the terminal itself. The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. Table !5-1 Maintenance Step 1. 2. 3. Possible Terminal Malfunction Procedures Source Keyboard locked - reset terminal. Blown terminal fuse (if applicable). Inconsistent communication parameters between terminal and port; default values are: 0 8data bits * 1 stop bit no parii ASCII character set a Xon/Xoff flow control Terminal in LOCAL mode - put into ON LINE mode - see manufacturer’s instructions. Terminal requires reset (or X-ON, or CONTROL-Q if applicable - see manufacturer’s instructions) . Faulty connection between the terminal and its power source. Faulty connection between the terminal’s communication port and the SX-200 DIGITAL maintenance panel TERMlNAL or LOCAL MAINTENANCE PORT port (see Figure 5-l). Faulty terminal. Main Control requires reload - press SYSTEM RESETon the Main Control card front panel. Faulty Main Control card. Faulty Maintenance Panel. (see Note 3.) Faulty Backplane. l l 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Page 9169-096-35&NA Issue 1 Revision 0 1 of 2 350 5-1 Troubleshooting Table 5-I Maintenance Terminal (continued) Possible Step 13. 14. 15. Malfunction Procedures Source - SX-200 FD Systems A terminal is already logged into the CDE or Maintenance application at another location Control Resource Card switches set incorrectly. see Table 5-2. Faulty Control Resource Card. Faulty Control Interconnect Card. 16. Page Notes: 1, Refer to Practice communication 2. The SX-200 QlOQ-OQ~l-NA, parameters. DlGlTAL PABX RS-232 backplane Maintenance communications Terminal, port uses for details RS-232 2’ of 2 on setting pins 2,3,4,5 and 7. 3. The SX-200 FD system does not have a maintenance panel. The maintenance port is accessed at the rear of the Control cabinet (J12) (see Figure 4-2) or can connect to the 9 pin “D” connector on the FIM Carrier module of the Peripheral cabinets (see Figure 5-2). 4. To connectthe terminal’s 25 pin RS232 use of a 9 pin to 25 pin RS232 adapter. supply stores. Table 5-2 I I I I Note: 350 5-2 connector to the system’s 9 pin mini D connector requires the This is a standard off-the-shelf part found in most computer Control Resource Switch Setting Sl CLOSED Card Switch Settings Function Normal operation; Maintenance port 1 available at Control or Peripheral cabinets s2 I CLOSED Sl I OPEN 1 Forced maintenance s2 II OPEN 1 terminal access only at Control cabinet Sl OPEN 1 Forced maintenance s2 CLOSED s3 - Switch not used: set to CLOSED - 1 Switch not used: set to CLOSED Ensure all the Control maintenance ports. Resource to Control cabinet; I to Peripheral cabinet terminal access only at Peripheral cabinets Card switches are set to CLOSED Revision 0 for normal operation 9109-096-35O-NA and access to the Issue 1 Miscellaneous Figure 5-I 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Troubleshooting SX-200 DIGITAL Maintenance Panel Revision 0 Procedures Troubleshooting MAlNTENANCETERh4lNALPORT BAY CONTROLCARD PEFWHERALFM GAMIER FIBER INIERFACE MODlJl.!Z(FlM) FM CARRIERSFT RELAYCONNECTOR (CA&ED TO SFT GONNECTORASSEMSLY) SFT CONNECTORASSEhBLY ax176 Figure 5-2 SX-200 FD Peripheral Node Front View (front cover removed) 350 5-4 Revision 0 9109-09%3504A Issue 1 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Procedures System Printers 5.2 System printers 1, compatibility 7) must satisfy the following: with RS-232C type interface protocol (and support pins 2,3,4,5, and 2. 80 columns Printers can be installed ._ with the SX-ZOO DIGITAL 1, Connected to backplane 2. Connected to the SUPERCONSOLE 3. Connected to a Dataset Printers can be installed K-232 P RlNTER PABX in 3 different port 1000 console with the SX-200 FD PABX in 3 different to the Control Cabinet’s 9 pin PRlNTER 2. Connected to the SUPERCONSOLE 1000 console 3. Connected to a Dataset Printer port port. 1, Connected Backplane configurations: configurations: port (Jll) port port. Port These procedures deal with the interface only. Reference should be made to the appropriate manual provided by the manufacturer of the printer for any problems with the printer itself. The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. Table 5-3 Backplane Possible Step 1. 2. Printer Port Procedures Malfunction Source Blown printer fuse (if applicable). Inconsistent communication parameters between printer and port; PABX default values are: 8data bits . 1 stop bit no panty . ASCII character set * Xon/Xoff flow control . 1200 baud (baud setting may be adjusted in Maintenance from 300 to 9600 baud) Faulty connection between the printer and its power source. Faulty CDE programming: likely form: Directed I/O. Faulty connection between the printer’s communication port and the SX-200 DIGITAL backplane W-232 PRINTER port (see Figure 2-4). Printer in LOCAL mode - put into ON LINE mode - see manufacturer’s instructions. Printer requires reset (or X-ON, or CONTROL-Q). Faulty printer. l l 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Page 1 of 2 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 5-5 Troubleshooting Table 5-3 Backplane Printer Port Procedures (continued) Step Possible 9. Malfunction Source 10.’ Main Control requires reload - press SYSTEM RESETon panel. Ftii~lty Main Control card. 11. Faulty backplane I the Main Control card front cable connections. - Page 2rof Note: Useful maintenance SPEED, RS-232 350 5-6 commands: TEST DEVICE-TYPE Maintenance Terminal. LOGS PRINT, SUSPEND-PRTR, MORE-KEYS PRINTER-PLID Revision 0 RESUME PRTR, SHOW DEVICE, / PORT - see Practice QlOQ-O96451-NA, 9109-096-35O-NA 2 SET Issue 1 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Procedures SX-200 FD Control Cabinet Printer Port These procedures deal with the interface only, Reference should be made to the appropriate manual provided by the manufacturer of the printer for any problems with the printer itself. The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. Table 5-4 SX-200 FD Control Step 1. 2. Possible Cabinet Printer Port Procedures Malfunction Source Blown printer fuse (if applicable). Inconsistent communication parameters between printer and port; PABX default values are: 8 data bits 1 stop bit no panty 0 ASCII character set Xon/Xoff flow control 0 1200 baud (baud setting may be adjusted in Maintenance from 300 to 9600 baud) Faulty connection between the printer and its power source. Faulty CDE programming: likely form: Directed I/O. Faulty connection between the printer’s communication port and the SX-200 FD Control Cabinet PRlNTER port (Jll). (see note 2.) Printer in LOCAL mode - put into ON LINE mode - see manufacturer’s instructions. Printer requires reset (or X-ON, or CONTROL-Q). Faulty printer. Main Control requires reload - press SYSTEM RESETon the Main Control card front panel. Faulty Main Control card. Faulty backplane cable connections. l l l l 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Notes: 1. Useful maintenance SET SPEED, 9109-095-351 TEST -NA, commands: LOGS PRINT, SUSPEND-PRTR, DEVICE-TYPE MORE-KEYS PRINTER-PLID RS-232 Maintenance Terminal. RESUME / PORT-see PRTR, SHOW Practice 2. To connect the printer’s 25 pin RS232 connector to the system’s 9 pin mini D connector requires the use of a 9 pin to 25 pin RS232 adapter. This is a standard off-the-shelf computer supply stores. 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 DEVICE, (see Figure 4-2) part found in most 350 5-7 Troubleshooting SUPERCONSOLE 1000 Printer Port These procedures deal with the interface only. Reference should be made to the appropriate manual provided by the manufacturer of the printer for any problems with the printer itself. The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. Table 5-S SUPERCONSOLE Possible Step, 1. 2. 7000 Printer Port Procedures Malfunction Source Blown printer fuse (if applicable). inconsistent communication parameters (both the SUPERCONSOLE printer port and the printer should have exactly the same parameters - NOTE: 2400 is the maximum baud rate for this port). Faulty connection between the printer and its power source. Faulty connection between the printer’s communication port and the SUPERCONSOLE 7uuo port. Faulty CDE programming: likely forms: Directed IO 9 Console Assignment Data Circuit Descriptor Data Assignment COS Define System Configuration Printer in LOCAL mode - put into ON LINE mode - see manufacturer’s instructions. Printer requires reset (or X-ON, or CONTROL-C if applicable - see manufacturer’s instructions). Faulty printer. Suspect SUPERCONSOLE 1000 unit - refer to that procedure. 3. 4. 5. l l l l l 6. 7. a. 9. Note: 350 5-8 Useful maintenance commands: SPEED, TEST DEVICE-TYPE RS-232 Maintenance Terminal. LOGS PRINT, SUSPEND-PRTR, MORE-KEYS PRINTER-PLID Revision 0 RESUME / PORT - see PRTR, SHOW DEVICE, Practice 9109-096351-NA, 9109-09635O-NA SET issue 1 mI . Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Procedures Dataset Printer Port These procedures deal with the interface only. Reference should be made to the appropriate manual provided by the manufacturer of the printer for any problems with the printer itself. The following table outlines the most likely items to cause malfunction. I.. Table 5-6 Dataset Possible Step 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Printer Port Procedures Malfunction Source Blown printer fuse (ii applicable). Inconsistent communication parameters (both the Dataset port and the printer should have exactly the same parameters). Faulty connection between the printer and its power source. Faulty connection between the printer’s communication port and the Dataset port. Faulty CDE programming: likely forms: Directed IO Data Circuit Descriptor (see Note 2.) Data Assignment COS Define System Configuration l l l l l 6. 7. Printer in LOCAL mode - put into ON LINE mode - see manufacturer’s instructions. Printer requires reset (or X-ON, or CONTROL-Q if applicable - see manufacturer’s structions). a. 9. Faulty printer. Faulty Dataset - refer to the applicable procedure. Notes: 1. Useful maintenance SET SPEED, DEVICE-TYPE Terminal. 2. Ensure 9109-096-35O-NA commands: LOGS PRINT, SUSPEND-PRTR, TEST DEVICE-TYPE MORE-KEYS PRINTER-PLID DATASETS / CONSOLE-see Practice 9109496-351 that the Session Issue 1 Inactivity Timer in- RESUME PRTR, SHOW DEVICE, / PORT, SHOW ERRORS -NA, RS-232 Maintenance is set to 0. Revision 0 350 5-9 Troubleshootina Cabinet 5.3 Cooling System The following table outlines Table 5-7 Cabinet step 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 5.4 the most likely items to cause fan malfunction. Cooling - System Troubleshooting Possible Ambient temperature Malfunction too high - room temperature Summary Source must be less than 40” C. ’ Air inlet vents obstructed - remove obstruction, or move system. Air filter requires cleaning, or replacement. Faulty power connection between the AC Distribution panel and the fans. Problem with power system - refer to. that procedure. Faulty fan(s) . Note that these procedures are intended to deal with failure of the PFT system; not the activation of it. The following tables outlines the most likely items to cause PFT malfunction. Note that on the SX-200 FD system, only a System Fail Transfer (SW connector is provided (marked RJll connector on peripheral cabinets). 6-Circuit PFT Card The 6-Circuit PFT Card is found in the control cabinet of the 336-port systems, as well as in the peripheral cabinet of the 672-part system. supports up to three cards. Table 58 Step 6-Circuit PFT Card Troubleshooting Possible 1. Maintenance 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Note: 350 5-10 Malfunction and 672-port Each cabinet Summary Source panel switch set to POWER FAIL TRANSFER -set to NORMAL. PFT connections - see Figure 5-5 / Figure 5-6. connections at the cross-connect field - see Figure 5-7. PFT Card # 6 (if applicable). PFT Card # 5 (if applicable). PFT Card # 4 (if applicable). PFT Card # 3 (if applicable). PFT Card # 2 (ii applicable). PFT Card #l (top PFT card). loop start to ground start conversion module (if installed) - see Figure 54. power system - refer to that procedure. Items 4 through 6 apply only to 672-part systems. Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Miscellaneous I d -.F... i cl :: :; i’ :: :: :: :; lh Procedures y cl .a Troubleshooting . . Pil CARD :: :: :: :: i . . I; . . PFr CARD PFrCAFB Figure 54 9109-096435O-NA Issue 1 PFT Card Locations Revision 0 Troubleshooting --I 1 I . a - If II I POWERFALTFl4NSFER CARD 9 b ,Q b DDOOSO Figure 5-4 6-Circuit Power Fail Transfer Card 350 5-12 Revision 0 9109-09645CLNA Issue 1 QI Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Procedures 25 PAIR CROSS-CONNECT BLOCK AT MDF 25 PAIR CROSSCONNECT BLOCK AT MDF Jl 25 PAIR CROSS-CDNNECT BLOCKATMDF . Figure 5-5 PFf Connections (Control Cabinet - Most Variants) 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 5-13 Troubleshootina CONTROL- E7E PORTPENIPNERUCUNNEl Figure 6-6 PFT Connections (672-Part Variant) Revision 0 9109-09C35O-NA Issue 1 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Procedures II\ i!zl STATION l---1 ONsaOPs 1 UNECMID T --- R --- I I T I I R I I l I I ! R I T r A * I I R 1 - -L, L---- r--B/a TRUNK CARD I T T --- R --- I L---l- -- i r- I 1 I 1 I 1 ’ L-R I- -- L, T 1 PFrCAFiD Co TRUNK FAClUl-Y Ll SW& CROSS-CONNECT FIELD DlgltelCABINET NOTE: PFT RELAYSmlWN IN RELEASEDPOSTnON. Figure 57 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 PFT Cross--Connect Field Connections Revision 0 350 5-15 Troubleshooting 12-Circuit PFT Card The 12-Circuit PFT Card is found in the control cabinet of the 480-ports system, as well as the peripheral cabinet of the 458-par-t and 480+101-t systems. Each of these cabinets supports one such card. -Step 1. Table 5-9 12-Circuit \ 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 350 5-16 Possible Maintenance Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty PFT Card Troubleshooting Malfunction Summary Source panel switch set to POWER FAIL TRANSFER-set to NORMAL. PFT connections - see Figure 5-6. connections between the Interconnect card (TB301) and the PFT card (TBl). connections at the cross-connect field - see Figure 5-7. PFT Card. Interconnect card. power system - refer to that procedure. Revision 0 9109-09%35O-NA Issue 1 Miscellaneous JaDE E Troubleshooting Procedures NOl?Si AU PLUGS AND CONNECTORS EXCEPT AS NOTED ARE STANDARD :; PAIR. THE MALE AND FEMALE DESIDNATORS REFER TO THE CONNBZTORS MOUNTED ON THE EQUIPMENT, EWIPMENT, NOT TO THE CABLE CONNECTORS. CONNECTOR& 0 r ---Pw GL6 . Pll I I I LE I 1 MALE 1 1 MALE 1 I BAY6 IMILE JlS J14 PlO Jl5 BAY INTERCDNNECT :w 4 BOARD BOARD Figure 5-8 12-Circuit PFT Card Connections 9109-096-35&NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 5-17 Troubleshootina SX-200 FD System Fail Transfer Connector The System Fail Transfer Connector is found at each of the Peripheral cabinets of the SX-200 FD systems. Each peripheral cabinet provides one SFT connector. This connector is used to interface and control SFT equipment available from external suppliers. .’ Table 5-10 SX-200 FD System Fail Transfer Possible Step \ 1. Bernal Connector Malfunction Troubleshooting Summary Source SFT Equipment’s override switch set to POWER FAlL TRANSFER -set to NORif applicable) MAL. (or equivalent, 2. 3. Faulty PFT connections - refer to External SFT Equipment manufacturer’s instructions Faulty connections between the Peripheral FIM Carrier and the system’s SFT connector assembly - see Table 7-1, see Figure 5-2. Faulty connections between the SFT connector and external SFT equipment. see Figure 5-9 Faulty connections at the cross-connect field - refer to External SFT Equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Faulty External SFT Equipment. Faulty Peripheral FIM Carrier (if the SFT Relay is not working) - see Figure 5-2. Faulty power system - refer to that procedure (ii the -48 volt supply is not working). 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Note: Relay contact is open during normal system operation. Table 5-11 SX-200 FD System Pin No. Wire Color Signal 2 Yellow -48 3 Green 4 5 350 5-18 48 It is closed Fail Transfer to indicate SFK (SFQ Connector Comment Voltage source for the external SFT Transfer Equipment. Note, this is limited to 250 mA. return WV Ground reference (return) for the external SFT Transfer Equipment Red SFT Relay (4 First side of “nornally closed” SFT control relay Black SFT Relay return (B) Second side of “normally closed” SFT control relay Revision 0 910W9m5O-NA Issue 1 Miscellaneous _ Troubleshooting Procedures Tl iUKlERASSEMBLY P/NDm-1 m-So24 (OPTIONAL- SHOWN INSTALLED _’ \ - COMMUMCATION BAY PSUAC PLUG ACCESSPANEL COMMUNICATION TXOPTlCALFlBERCABLECDNNECXOR SFT CONNECTOR I SYSTEMGROUND LLIG Figure 5-9 SX-200 FD Peripheral Node Rear View (with optional Tl Adapter) 9109-0964504A Issue 1 Revision 0 350 5-19 Troubleshooting Modems / Modem Pools Figure 5-I 0 is a block diagram of the modem pool configuration. Reference should be made to the appropriate manual provided by the manufacturer of the modem for any problems with the modem itself. The following table outlines the most likely items to cause modem / modem pool malfunction. 5.5 Table 5-12 Modem / Modem Step ’ Possible Pool Troubleshooting Malfunction Summary Source 1. Faulty originating station, or destination station (if applicable) - refer to the applicable cedure. 2. 3. 11. Blown modem fuse (ii applicable). Inconsistent communication parameters (the Dataset port, the modem and the originating station should all have the same parameters). Faulty connection between the modem and its power source. Faulty connection between the modem’s communication port and the modem adapter unit, See Figure 5-l 0. Faulty connection between the Dataset communication port and the modem adapter unit, Faulty connection between the Dataset and the system - refer to the applicable Dataset procedure if necessary. Faulty connections between the modem, the cross-connect field, and the system. Faulty CDE programming: likely forms: Modem Assignment Data Circuit Descriptor Data Assignment COS Define Device Interconnection System Configuration Incorrect modem switch settings or modem software set-up characteristics - see manufacturer’s instructions. Modem requires reset - refer to manufacturer’s instructions. 12. Faulty modem. 13. DATASET requires reset - disconnect, Table 3-34. 14. BCC / MCC requires reset (power down bay or press MASTER RESETon 15. Faulty DATASET unit or power cord assembly. 16. Digital Line card requires reinitialization 17. Faulty Digital Line card. 18. Faulty backplane cable connections. 19. Faulty switching matrices - refer to ‘Supplementary 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. pro- l l l l l l 10. Note: 350 5-20 Useful maintenance commands: DEVICE-TYPE DATASETS - see SHOW Practice reconnect power cord. See Table 3-33 / MCC). (reseat card). Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. DEVICE, TEST DEVICE-TYPE 9109-096451 -NA, RS-232 Revision 0 ONS / DNIC, SHOW Maintenance Terminal. 9109-09635O-NA ERRORS Issue 1 Miscellaneous SW& rII ., _------ Procedures DIGITALPABX -,-----,Lt,, [------------=~-,~ . .. .. . ..-^*- I -- Mcdml I I Troubleshooting I Adepta OrlgmaUngData Station LSES TRUNK clR3Jrr MODEM i---------Bi -I- L-------- CzesSnabbn DataStab POOLED MODEM Figure 5-I 0 Typical Pooled Modem Configuration 9109-09G35O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 5-21 Troubleshooting Recorded Announcement Devices (RADs) 5.6 Reference should be made to the appropriate manual provided by the manufacturer of the RAD unit for any problems with the RAD unit itself. The following table outlines the most likely items to cause RAD malfunction. Table 5-13 _’ Step 1. RAD Troubleshooting Summary Possible Source Malfunction Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty PAD device. (See Note 2.) connection between the PAD device and the cross-connect field. connection between the cross-connect field and the system. CDE programming: likely forms: (See Note 3.) l COS Define 9 Hunt Groups 9 StationlSUPERSETTelephones l System Configuration Faulty ONS port. Check items listed in Table 5-14. Faulty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Notes: 1 .Useful maintenance commands: SHOW STATUS, SHOW DEVICE, TEST DEVICE-TYPE SHOW STATUS SWID SW-HUNT-GRP CP-DWA (check stagger and o-msglen), TRAFFIC-MEAS READ (check hunt group busy peg) - see Practice 91 OQ-O96-351-NA, Maintenance Terminal. 2Refer to the manufacturer’s For cassette type units, failures. 3.Avoid using discriminating Table 5-14 instructions tape wearout ringing Supplementary for information or dirty heads in the RAD COS. on the repair / dirty tape/dirty Some RADs RAD Troubleshooting Problem ONS, RS-232 and troubleshooting of the RAD capstan are the most common will operate only with standard unit. ringing. Procedures Possible Cause(s) No recordings at all. PADS are in busy-out or DND status - use SHOW STATUS command on the corresponding ONS circuit. RAD message is cut off. Check that the Message Length Timer in the Hunt Groups CDE form is long enough. PADS go into DND state. Check if Failure To Hang Up Timer (COS 494) is long enough for proper PAD clear down. No message heard, but PAD rings and answers. Check that the Message Length Timer in the Hunt Groups CDE form is long enough. Page 1 of 2 350 5-22 Revision 0 9109-09~5O-NA Issue 1 Miscellaneous Table 5-14 Supplementary RAD Troubleshooting (continued) Troubleshooting Procedures Possible Problem PAD Staggering is selected, but PADS don’t operate in staggering fashion. l l Staggered PADS not starting at evenly distributed times. l Procedures Cause(s) Ensure PAD Staggering For Listen Only Conferences is enabled in the Hunt Groups CDE form. Allow one PAD in the group to run to the end of its message -this allows the system to measure the group’s message length. NOTE: staggering is not possible until this preliminary step is done. Ensure there are no 2-par-Q call users of this PAD group. 0 Verify all PADS in the group have the same length of message -they must. Check if PADS are available after message length - some PADS (tape) also require time to rewind, or play to the end of the tape, long after the system has hung up. May be necessary to add more FtADs to the group. l Staggered PAD stagger times longer than they should be. Check that none of the RADs are in busy-out or DND status - use SHOW STATUS command on the corresponding ONS circuit. Staggered HAD group busy peg increases. PADS aren’t available when they should be check if turn-around time is too long. Page 2 of 2 Note: For further information “FiAD Support”. 9109-096-3504A Issue 1 on FtADs, refer to practice 9109-096105-NA, Revision 0 Features Dexription, under 350 523 Troubleshooting Night Bell Equipment 5.7 Night Bells are connected in 2 basic configurations: 1)birect Connect Method: Night bells can be connected directly if the total current the relay contact ratings (see Figure 5-11); 2) Auxiliary Relay method: Night bells must be connected through an auxiliary relay if the total current requirement exceeds the relay contact ratings (see Figure 5-12). requirement does not exceed The DTMF Receiver / Relay module is installed on the Universal card; it can be used as night bell relay (2 circuits) - see practice 9109X)96-125-NA, Circuit Card Descriptions, for further information. The following tables outline the most likely causes of night bell failure. Table 5-15 Night Bell Troubleshooting Step Possible Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Malfunction Summary Source night bell device. external relay (auxiliary relay configuration only). external relay connections (see Note 2.). connection between the night bell device and the cross-connect connection between the cross-connect field and the system. CDE programming: likely forms: 9 System Configuration l Miscellaneous field. System Ports Call Rerouting Table Faulty or improperly installed DTMF Receiver module on Universal card. Faulty Universal card. Faulty Universal card modules (see Note 3.). Faulty backplane cable connections between Bay Controller and Main Controller (672 port systems only). Faulty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. l 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Notes: 1, Useful maintenance commands: see Practice 9199-096-351-NA, 2. Refer to Practice 9109-093-200-h& using an auxiliary relay. 3. Receiver card. / relay module malfunction SHOW STATUS, TEST, RS-232 Maintenance Installation could 350 5-24 Information, be caused 4. A simple test for a relay circuit is: (a) disconnect nect ohmmeter across relay leads -an open module. SHOW ALARMS, Commands. for details by the failure SHOW ERRORS on the installation of other module(s) - of night bells on the Universal the relay from external equipment at the MDF; (b) concircuit should be read. If not, there is a problem with the Revision 0 910909H5O-NA Issue 1 Miscellaneous I MODULE I Troubleshooting Procedures CRUSS-CONNECTION FIB-D MODULAR ATTENDANTUJNSOLE 12 DlGK4L UNE CARD GN Rz (see Note R 6) I ------ 1 I I 1 r II -----1 I I PA SYSTEM I I I L MUSICON HOLD/PAGINGMODULE mm--- TOMERWT’PUED EQUIPMENT -m---mm-- -I 1 I FROM RELAYON RELAYMODULE I TOMER-SUPPUEDNIGHT BELL -mm-- 1 Each NO relaycm&t may be wed to ix&d a device, as required. NOTE 5. WTEl. NOTE 6. NOTE 2. NOTE 7. KITE 3. NOTE4. RelaycontadM*tlngr: 9oVrmsat0.1 A 48Vdcat0.5A Figure 5-11 Music, Paging, Relay and Console Connections 9109-096-35CLNA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 5-25 Troubleshootina Extemd BOVAC supply (lndqmdmt ftiqhg wrca) PBX I I PBX Relay Contact Fhtblgr: 90Wmsat0.1 A TypM24Vdca49Vdc E&d Paver sup& 48Vdcat05A Figure 5-I 2 Night Bell Auxiliary Relay Configuration 350 5-26 Revision 0 9109-09~504A issue 1 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Procedures Hotel / Motel 5.8 -_ The SX-200 DIGITAL Hotel / Motel features can be accessed by 2 major interfaces -the attendant console, or the front desk interface. Some features can be accessed via SUPERSETtelephones as well. Note that this section covers only the Hotel / Motel feature, and not the PMS Interface feature. See Practice 9109496--602-NA, Hotel / Motel Feature Package Description, for further information. The following table outlines the most likely causes of Hotel / Motel feature failure. Table 6-16 Hotel / Motel Troubleshootlng Step 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Possible Faulty Blown Faulty ters. Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Malfunction front desk terminal device. terminal fuse (if applicable). communication parameters -terminal connection between connection between connection between connection between CDE programming: Summary ’ Source and Dataset must have the same parame- the terminal and its power source. the terminal’s communication port and the Dataset port. the Dataset and the cross-connect field. the cross-connect field and the system. likely forms: l System Configuration l COS Define * all Dataset and/or console forms - refer to the appropriate procedure. Suspect Dataset - refer to DATASET 1103/2103 - DTE MODE. Suspect Digital Line card - refer to DATASET 1103/2103 - DTE MODE. Suspect console - refer to the appropriate procedure. Faulty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. Notes: 1. Useful maintenance commands: SHOW STATUS, Practice QlOQ-O96451-NA, RS-232 Maintenance 2. Loop length limit for devices bridge taps). 3. Loop length for consoles (with no bridge taps). 9109-09-5&NA Issue 1 connected connected to Digital to Universal tine TEST, SHOW Commands. ALARMS, card circuits is: 3300 cards Revision 0 can be no more than SHOW ERRORS ft with 26 AWG 1000 ft with -see wire (with no 26 AWG wire 350 5-27 Troubleshooting Property Management System Interface 5.9 The following table outlines the most likely items to cause PMS malfunction. Table 5-l 7 PMS Procedures Possible Step 1. 2. Malfunction Source Faulty external equipment (front desk system, PMS interface system). Faulty connection between the external equipment devices (if applicable) see Figure 5-l 3. Faulty connection between the PMS Interface system and the Dataset port, Faulty connection between the Dataset and the cross-connect field. Faulty connection between the cross-connect field and the system. Faulty CDE programming; likely forms: l Hotel Options Assignment l COS Define l Data Circuit Descriptors l Data Assignment l Console Assignment l System Configuration Dataset / Digital Line card requires reset - refer to DATASET 1103/2103 - DTE MODE. Faulty Dataset / Digital Line card. Faulty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Note: Useful maintenance commands: see Practice 9109496351 -NA, SHOW RS-232 STATUS, TEST, SHOW Maintenance Terminal. ALARMS, SHOW ERRORS DATASETS ROOM STATUSAND MESSAGEREGISTRAT!ON MESSqOES I 8 I CHECMNAND CHECK-OLIT MEfSAGiS +q HOTEL/MOTEL FRONT DESK SYSTEM PMS INTERFACE I 1 sx-zod3 Digna! SYSTEM Figure 5-I 3 PMS Configuration 350 5-28 Revision 0 (Typical) 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 - Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Procedures Voice Mail Interface COV Port Voice Mail 5.10 The following malfunction. -- table outlines Table 5-18 Step 1. 2. 3. 4. the most likely items to cause COV Voice Mail COV Voice Mail Procedures Possible Malfunction Source Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty external equipment (Voicf+mail system) - see Note 2. connection between the Voice-mail device and the cross-connect field. connection between the cross-connect field and the system. CDE programming; likely forms: COS Define StationslSUPERSETTelephones Hunt Groups System Configuration COV card requires reset (reseat card). Faulty COV card. Faulty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. l l l l 5. 6. 7. Notes: 1. Useful maintenance commands: - see Practice 9109-096-351-NA, 2. For further information, VX-2OO/vx~OQ~~OO refer 3. Loop resistance on the COV between40and48vottsDC. 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 SHOW STATUS, TEST, RS-232 Maintenance to 9150-953-003-NA, Systems. circuit should not exceed SHOW ALARMS, Terminal. VX Voice Processor 200 ohms. Revision 0 Voltage SHOW Installation across ERRORS and Tip and SS3SS4 Repair Ring Manual should be 350 5-29 Troubleshooting ONS Port Voice Mail The following table outlines the most likely items to cause ONS Voice Mail malfunction. Table 5-19 step 1. 2. 3. 4. ONS Voice Mail Procedures Possible ‘- Malfunction Source Faulty Faulty ’ Faulty Faulty external equipment (Voice-mail system) - see manufacturer’s instructions. 1 connection between the Voice-mail device and the cross-connect field. connection between the cross-connect field and the system. CDE programming; likely forms: l COS Define l StationslSUPERSETTelephones l Hunt Groups l System Abbreviated Dial Entry l Feature Access Codes l System Configuration Faulty ONS card. Faulty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Peripheral Equipment Procedures’. 5. 6. Notes: 1. Useful maintenance 9109-096-351-NA, 2. Loop 350 5-30 length commands: SHOW RS-232 Maintenance limit is: 1400 ft with 26 AWG STATUS, Terminal. wire (with TEST, no bridge Revision 0 SHOW ALARMS -see Practice taps). 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Procedures Application PlatForm Pat kage Feature Pat kage 5.11 ,“_’ The APP Feature Package allows a host computer to communicate SX-200 DIGITAL PABXvia a DATASET 21 Ob unit. The following descending order, the most likely items to cause malfunction. -- Table 5-20 APP Troubleshooting Siep Possible 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty Faulty l l l l l 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. . Summary Malfunction ; Source host computer. connection between the Dataset and the cross-connect field (see Figure 5-14). connection between the cross-connect field and the system. connections between the Dataset and the host computer. See Note 2. CDE programming: likely forms: l 6. 7. directly with the table outlines in Directed IO Data Assignment Data Circuit Descriptor Ass’t System Options (Option # 18 - Mite1 Application Feature Access Code System Configuration Interface). Incorrect Dataset switch settings. SeeTable 3-27 to Table 3-32. Dataset requires reset. Faulty Dataset. See Note 4. Digital Line card requires reload. Faulty Digital Line card. MCC or BCC requires reload - power down / power up bay, or press MASTER RESETon the MCC front panel. Faulty BCC or MCC. Faulty peripheral switch or circuit switch - refer to ‘Supplementary Procedures’. Notes: 1. Useful maintenance DATASETS -see 2. If the Dataset commands: Practice 3. Installation of the software tion. Further information 4. If the Dataset shooting. 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 verify RS-232 connections Maintenance as per Dataset Terminal. 1102/2102 and Datasets is covered in Practice 9109-096-2OO-NA, is provided in Practice 9109-096-l 05-W, Features is rack-mounted, Equipment SHOW STATUS, TEST, SHOW ALARMS, SHOW ERRORS 9109-096+X+NA, is rack-mounted, Peripheral other equipment may be faulty Revision 0 - refer Troubleshooting. Installation Description. to the Dataset Informa- 1102/2102 Trouble- 350 5-31 Troubleshootinn DlGlTAL LINE CIRNT : DATASET2lW HOSTCDMPLITER LJ Cr-rmect Field sx-aJ@ Dig&l PABX Figure 5-14 APP Configuration 350 5-32 Revision 0 9109-096435O-NA Issue 1 EEI 6. SOFTWARE TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES These procedures are intended for the sole purpose of troubleshooting problems with programming and setup of applications. Fully functional hardware is assumed in all cases. Key System Features Table &I Key System Troubleshootling Possible Problem Cause/Solution KEY SYSTEM PAGING You dial the Key System Direct Paging feature access code and get reorder tone and the NO ACCESS message, or rerouted to the illegal number intercept. Verll that the set is programmed ( form 45 ). as a key system set GROUP PAGE After dialing the access code or pressing the Feature key you dial the # sign ( end of dial character ). You then get NO ACCESS and reorder tone, or are rerouted to the illegal number intercept Verify that a page group has been assigned. After dialing the access code or pressing the Feature key you dial the # sign ( end of dial character ). You then get 1234 BUSY and busy tone. Possibly due to one of the following: l There is currently a group page in progress for your page group l There are no members totally idle (idle or hfi) l No channels ( system resource ) available Try the group page later. Page 1 of 5 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 6-l Troubleshootina Table 6-l Problem Key System Troubleshooting (continued) Possible Cause/Solution DIRECTED PAGE After dialing-the access code or pressing the Feature key you dial a destination, You then get NO ACCESS and reorder tone (or are rerouted to the illegal number intercept point). After dialing the access code or pressing the Feature key you dial a destination. You then get xxxx BUSY and busy tone at this point. l l l l l Verify that the destination number. is a valid Key System set extension Check if the set is restricted from accessing the destination through tenanting - dial the destination directly and see whether you get NO ACCESS again. If so, this is NOT a problem with paging but rather the set is barred from ever calling this destination. the destination is not idle or hfi the set’s INTERCOM another set line is in use by no channels ( system resource ) available GROUP PAGE MEET ME ANSWER Dial the Group Page - Meet Me Answer access code and you get reorder tone and NO ACCESS on the display, or you get rerouted to the illegal number intercept. You get NO PAGE ACTIVE on a display set and reorder tone. l Verify that the set is programmed as a key system set ( form 45 ) l Verify that the set has a page group assigned. 9 The last page for the group was done more than 15 minutes ago (timed out) l l l The last telephone to page is no longer programmed base in the data The last telephone to page is no longer programmed in Form 45 ( now programmed in Form 9 ) There has not been a group page for the group since the last system reset. STORE PERSONAL SPEED CALL You dial the access code and get NO ACCESS and REORDER tone. You dial the access code followed by an index number and get NO ACCESS and REORDER tone, or you get rerouted to the illegal number intercept. THE SET IS NOT PROGRAMMED AS A KEY SYSTEM SET (FORM 45). THE INDEX NUMBER DIALED WAS NOT BETWEEN 1 AND 5. Page 2 of 5 350 6-2 Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Software Troubleshooting Procedures Table 6-1 Key System Troubleshooting (continued) Problem Possible You dial the access code followed by an index number and get INVALID # and REORDER tone. \ You dial the access code followed by a VALID index and then digits and you get INVALID # and reorder tone. Cause/Solution THE INDEX NUMBER WAS DIALED AFTER THE INTERDIGIT TIMER EXPIRED. l The index number was dialed after the interdigit timer expired. l invalid number combination dialed: - * must be followed by 3,5 or * - *3 must be followed by 01 to 14 - *5 must not be followed by further digits RETRIEVE PERSONAL SPEED CALL You dial the access code and VERIFY THAT THE SET IS PROGRAMMED AS A KEY get NO ACCESS and SYSTEM SET REORDER tone. (FORM 45). You dial the access code followed by an index number and get NO ACCESS and REORDER tone, or you get rerouted to the illegal number intercept. You dial the access code, followed by a valid index number, and get INVALID # and reorder tone. The index number dialed was not between 1 and 5 l The interdigit timer expired. l Verify that the digits stored translate to a valid destination. 0 The speedcall number translation looped too many (more than 4) times within speedcall translation. (The speedcall translated into another speedcall which in turn translated into another speedcall, etc -and this occurred more than 4 times.) CO LINE KEY You get NO ACCESS and REORDER tone when the CO line key is pressed. You get INVALID # and REORDER tone after dialing a digit or several digits on the CO line. The CO trunk associated with the key is NOT a member of a trunk group. 9 The set has hotel/motel feature enabled and the user is disallowed to make external calls. l l l l The user is restricted to dial this specific number based on the user’s COR (check the COR restriction on the dialed number in Forms 20 and 46 ). The user is required to dial account code prior to dialing. The user is restricted from dialing this specific number on this CO Line ( check digit string entries in Form 46 ). Page 3 of 5 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 6-3 Troubleshooting Table &I Key System Troubleshooting (continued) Possible Problem Cause/Solution You get NO ACCESS and REORDER tone after dialing FIfew digits. .- THE USER HAS EXCEEDED THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS THAT CAN DIAL BASED ON THE USER’S COR (CHECK FORM 27). +ss a CO line key and the an’t get recordings. Check path programming. l Check PADS in PAD group using MAINT SHOW console STATIONS softkey. If all are in the DND programming on the PAD group and in the COS see above section on recording malfunction ) to not setup properly. l STATUS or the state, check the of the PADS ( see if timers are Call PAD group directly and check that a PAD answers and gives the correct message. l Can’t get first recording, but xm get second recording. The time for the second recording is occurring while waiting for the first recording, and the first recording is being abandoned. Make more recordings available in first group and increase the start time for the second recording (and subsequent recordings). Silence between recordings. . System music is not programmed l System music not connected properly l System music does not have enough gain. ALTERNATE MUSIC SOURCE @Jternate music source not ieard. l l l Check path (see above - Ca//ing a Path). Check the party state of the alternate music source -via SHOW STATUS. If state is ALTMUS, the port is plugged in and ready. Check the connections on the port. If the party state is not ALTMUS, the system has not seen the port go offhook, or the port was offhook when programmed as an alternate music source. It must be programmed first and then make the transition from IDLE to ALTMUS. Simply unplug and plug back in the alt music source and it should go to altmus state. If the alternate music source is functioning, check the recordings. Music will not be applied, unless a caller has been given a PAD to listen to first. Page2 350 6-12 Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA of 4 Issue 1 Software Troubleshooting Table &4 ACD Troubleshooting (continued) Possible Problem Procedures Cause/Solution 4CD POSITIONS h-ACD n. position cannot log l l A valid login feature access code and position id code must be used ( check CDE). The display will indicate an invalid number dialed (all of the other errors will cause the display to indicate an invalid feature access attempt). The position must not already be logged in. Try dialing the position code - do you complete a call to the position? 9 The telephone type must be SUPERSET 4. No other telephone type may be used. l l The SUPERSETtelephone cannot have a party on consultation hold when the login is attempted. The number of agents logged in must not exceed the maximum number. Check the number of agents logged in using the ACD MONITORS feature. . The position must have an ACD template enabled in its COS. Can the position log in at another SUPERSET 4 where another position of the same type was able to log in? l To log in, the set must not having any appearances of its prime line anywhere in the system. To confirm this, do a review on the SUPERSET in form 9. l An ACD position cannot log Nt. Agents going make busy jtate. The SUPERSETtelephone must not have a SUPERSETDSS Module associated with it. Check the ASSOC field in Form 09 for the circuit. Check that the agent is not an an ACD call when this is attempted. This includes ACD calls on consultation hold and hold on a line at the SUPERSETtelephone. l If the SUPERSETis connected to a circuit in an analog bay, check traffic measurement report for junctor shortage problems (as well, check if the SUPERSETusers in the same bay report the message “NO DIAL TONE” or “SYSTEM BUSY” on their display. This indicates a receiver or junctor shortage problem). * Check set errors via SHOW ERRORS DEVICE-TYPE command. l l SS3-SS4 The set will be put make busy if the set is disconnected, or loses communication with the system. Check call forward no answer time in the COS of the set -this controls the automatic call failure timing. Increase the time if necessary. Page 3 of 4 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 6-13 Troubleshooting Table 6-4 ACD Troubleshooting (continued) Problem GD positions are mexpectedly logged out. _’ ._ qorwarding does not work lfter position logs in. Possible Cause/Solution If a SUPERSET telephone is unplugged, and SUPERSET telephone while an ACD position that position, the ACD position is automatically system. . Could be caused by a system reset - check for l l replaced with a is logged in at logged out by the this. ’ Problems with forwarding to a speedcall key may arise with ACD position sets. . Forwarding to a speedcall key works by reference to the speedcall key number and not to the digits in the speedcall key. If a position logs at a set that has forwarding to a speedcall key, the forwarding on the set is not altered -the reference to the old speedcall key number remains. If the speedcall key is replaced by an ACD feature key because of the login, the forwarding will be to a key key which is now a feature key -this is illegal. When someone calls the set and the forwarding takes place, the forwarding will fail and the caller will get reorder tone. A similar problem will occur even if the speedcall key is not replaced by a feature key - it will be replaced by a blank speedcall key and so the forwarding will fail because there are no digits to dial. Page 4 of 4 350 6-14 Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Software Troubleshooting Automatic Attendant Overtlow (AAO) Table 6-S Auto Attendant 3alls come in to a :onsole/LDN but get the Nrong message. for the RAD group in form 17 Ensure that Day, Night1 and Night2 answer points are programmed in Form 19, l Ensure that RADs are usable (i.e. not all DND, and have a message recorded). This can be done by calling the RAD group directly, or by calling them indiiidually. Ensure that time to start recording is small enough. If it is set too high, the caller may be answered by the console before hearing l l Ensure that the call is not being dropped (due to the final Ring rior to hearing a message (i.e. the final Ring timer may l Ensure that the call is not being dropped due to the final Ring timer, which runs while listening to the recording. It should be at ime to the recording plus the time to hear the l silence. l l Issue 1 Troubleshooting Ensure that the FlADs programmed l 9109-0964504A Ovetilow Ensure that the RAD group (see CDE form 19) for the tenant group of the called party is the correct one, and that the called party is in the correct day/night service. r l nessage. Procedures Check via MAINTENANCE SHOW STATUS, the OTHER field for the caller, to see if it actually gets connected up to the recording. There may not be a properly recorded message on the RAD (the Revision 0 350 6-15 Troubleshootina Automated Attendant Table 6-6 Automated Problem l Check the wait-for-resources time for the group. It may be too short, resulting in there being not enough recordings for the number of callers (given the length of time that the recording plays). The time must be at least as long as the turn around time for the RADs in the group, since this is the longest time that a waiting caller will have to wait if there are receivers available. Competition for receiver resources will increase this waft time. Ensure that there is a default destination for the group. Ensure that the option “Dialing Over Recording” that auto-attendant group. l l 350 6-16 Ensure that message was recorded correctly . Ensure that RAD is programmed in the correct group (use the EXT NUM softkey in CDE form 17 to find the RAD). l Dialing is slow and f%JPERSET users report seeing SYSTEM BUSY on their displays. is ENABLED for In the case of an attendant calling, the console must have TONES ON in order to perform end-to-end signalling and dial over the auto-attendant recording. l Zaller gets the wrong nessage. Ensure that RAD is functioning (not all DND or busied-out). Use MAINTENANCE or the attendant console to check the DND status of the device. (Use SHOW STATUS command.) r Check traffic measurement for skip pegs for the group. This will indicate a shortage of RADs or receivers. l qecording does not end Nhen digits are dialed. Cause/Solution Ensure that the RAD message length is not too short. If the message length for the RAD group is very short, the RAD may not even get a chance to play its message. l l 3all is dropped when caller fials no digits. Troubleshooting Possible >all’is- never answered by 3AD. The call always routes :o the default destination. \ Attendant Ensure that RAD is plugged in at correct extension RAD extension number directly. by dialing the There may not be enough non-auto-attendant receivers allocated. Check traffic measurement for receiver attempt pegs and adjust the receiver count for non-auto-attendant features in the system options form if necessary. Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Software Troubleshooting Procedures Call Forwarding 6.3 This procedure deals with the Generic 1004 Call Forwarding; Forwarding in software releases prior to Generic 1004. Table 6-7 Call Forwarding it does not apply to Call Troubleshooting Forward Setup And Cancel is enabled. If an extension user, ensure that at least one of the fol.lowing COS options is enabled: - 209 - Call Forward - Follow Me l - 206 - Call Forward - Busy - 207 - Call Forward - Don’t Answer one of the following : - an industry standard telephone - a SlJPERSETtelephone - an attendant console - a hunt group (not data or modem) - an ACD path - a dial 0 access code l c The extension must be allowed ( i.e. device interconnection connect to the forwarding destination. * The forwarding destination ) to must NOT have the COS option 234 Page lof 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 4 350 6-17 Troubleshootino Table 6-7 Call Fowarding Troubleshooting (continued) Problem Reorder tone and/or INVALID error message (corit’dj. - Posslble Cause/Solution . The forwarding destination cannot be the same as your extension number (i.e. you can’t forward to yourselfj. l \ l If entering a personal abbreviated dial access code as a forwarding destination, the forwarding extension must be programmed as a key system set. < If entering a personal or system abbreviated dial access code as a forwarding destination, the forwarding extension must have the following COS option settings: - 245 -Abbreviated ENABLED Dialing Access - - 208 - Call Forwarding ENABLED - External - - 200 - Account Code, Forced Entry - External Calls DISABLED. l If entering a personal speedcall button as a forwarding destination, the forwarding extension must have the following COS option settings : - 208 - Call Forwarding ENABLED - l l l 200 -Account DISABLED. - External - Code, Forced Entry - External Calls - Programming call forwarding while a system copy database operation is in progress is NOT permitted. If programming “I’m Here” forwarding, the “from” party must be a industry standard telephone or a SUPERSfltelephone, and cannot be a member of any type of voice mail hunt group. If programming forwarding using dialed forwarding codes, verify the following : access - the extension is permitted access to the feature, - For feature access codes 03,04 and 05, the access code is entered, followed by one of: 1 (always), 2 (busy), 3 (no answer) or 4 (busy/no answer). Page 2of 350 8-18 Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA 4 Issue 1 Software Troubleshooting Procedures Table 6-7 Call Fowarding Troubleshooting (continued) ‘orwarded properly. .._ current forwarding settings. The forwarding may have been changed by the attendant console or a sub-attendant. l l If the forwarding was set using a personal speedcall button, ensure that the contents of the button still translate into a valid forwarding destination. Ensure using form 9/ form 45 that the key is still in fact programmed as a speedcall key. Ensure that the COS options permit Call Forwarding. Check specifically COS options 200,206,207,208,209,245, and 260. Consult Practice 9109-096-l 05-NA, Features Description, for * Ensure that the forwarding destination is idle and has COS option 234 - Never A Forwardee disabled. l Ensure that the forwarding destination has not been l Note that calls will NOT be forwarded if : - it is the attendant or a SUfERSETtelephone overriding/intruding. l that is - it already has been forwarded via any type of speedcall - it already has been forwarded or rerouted. twice without being answered If a logical line appears on the extension and on another extension, calls to the first extension on the logical line will not be . If the last programmed call forwarding with COS option 260 Ils will be forwarded Page 3of 9109-09M5O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 4 350 6-19 Troubleshooting Table 6-7 Call Fonvarding Troubleshooting (continued) Problem Possible Calls are not being forwarded properly (cont’d). l l l l l l Cause/Solution Any changes in device interconnection rules may prohibit calls from being forwarded. Ensure that the calling party can indeed connect to the forwarding destination. Trunk calls to the extension will not be forwarded if calls are forwarded using any type of speedcall, with System Option21 (Incoming To Outgoing Call Forward) disabled. Calls will not be forwarded if the forwarding destination is the same as the calling party ( i.e. calling party cannot be forwarded to itself). Cannot forward a caller to a busy hunt group if the caller does not have the capability of camping on to the hunt group. Cannot forward calls from the attendant destination is a Dial 0 Access Code. console if the forwarding If forwarded via a speedcall of any type, the system may be encountering difficulty acquiring the necessary resources to complete the forwarding. Ensure that there are ample available receivers and/or outgoing trunks to allow this type of forwarding. Page 4of 4 SU/W?SE7’Telephones Table 6-8 SUPERSETTelephone Problem 4udio always come out of :he handset, even when unhook. Possible l l l 350 6-20 Troubleshootlng Cause/Solution Check that COS Option 612 - Headset Operation is not enabled in the set COS, the ACD position COS or the COS of a verified account code that the user dialed. This is usually the source of the problem. Ensure that the call is not being answered handsfree when COS Option 612 - Headset Operation enabled in the set’s COS. The call will go to the handset even if the call is answered using the speaker key or a line key. Run the loopback test to ensure that the hookswitch is working correctly. Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A. MAINTENANCE LOG MESSAGES General A.1. \ This Appendix contains the complete set of information messages which are recorded in the maintenance log when a significant event occurs. Each message is self-explanatory, identifying the event and providing details about it. Information on options available to maintenance personnel is included under the “Action Required” heading. There are three types of log reports: 1, Fault Report - a report generated ing detects a fault, or an abnormal 2. Reset Report - a report generated 3. Alarm Report- a report generated when the maintenance condition, system when a bay or the system or Call Process- is reset. when a change in any of the alarm levels occurs. This Appendix is divided into three sections which correspond to the three types of log messages. The ‘Fault Reports’ section is arranged using the Alarm Code, an index number specific to the type of fault indicated, The Reset and Alarm Report sections are arranged in a logical manner. Information on access to the maintenance log, and the use of may be found in Practice 9109-096-351-NA, RS-232 Information on overall maintenance philosophy and specific found in Practice 9109-096-353-NA, General Maintenance 9109-0964504A Issue 1 Revision 0 other maintenance tools Maintenance Terminal. diagnostic tests may be Information. 350 A-l Troubleshooting Table A-l Alarm Code Fault Reports Message 00 Action Required Link 07 Channel 19 failed Junctor test .Alarm Code = 00 Do a directed test on the specified link to verify the problem. Refer to Practice 9109-096-I 8O-NA, Engineering Information, for link assignments. If the problem persists, refer to the Analog Junctor Part of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS command. 01 Link 07 Channel 19 failed Junctor dgl codec Alarm Code = 01 Do a directed test on the specified link to verify the problem. Refer to Practice 9109-096-I 8O-NA, Engineering Information, for link assignments. If the problem persists, refer to the Digital Interface Card Part of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS command. 02 Link 07 charnel 19 failed Alarm Code = 02 Junctor ang codec Do a directed test on the specified link to verify the problem. Refer to Practice 9109-096-I 8O-NA, Engineering Information, for link assignments. If the problem persists, refer to the Digital Interface Card Part of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS command. 03 DLIC module failed at 02 03 0100 console test Alarm Code = 03 Do a directed test on the specified circuit to verify the problem. If the problem persists, refer to the Console/DLIC module Part of this Practice. Replace as required. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS commands. 04 DLIC module failed at 02 03 0100 Alarm Code = 04 console dgl codec Do a directed test on the specified circuit to verify the problem. If the problem persists, refer to the Console/DLIC module Part of this Practice. Replace as required. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS commands. 05 DLIC module failed at 02 03 0100 console ang codec AlarmCode= Do a directed test on the specified circuit to veri@ the problem. If the problem persists, refer to the Console/DLIC module Part of this Practice. Replace as required. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS commands. \ Page 1 of 20 350 A-2 Revision 0 9109-0964504A Issue 1 Appendix A - Maintenance Log Messages Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Action Alarm Code Message 06 ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 inject codec test Alarm Code = 06 ._ COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 1501 inject codec test Alarm Code = 06 LWGS truk card failed at 02 02 0100 inject codec test Alarm Code = 06 Requked Do a directed test on the specified circuit to verii the problem. If the problem persists, refer to the Fault Isolation Part of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS ahd SHOW STATUS commands. E&M module failed at 02 02 0100 inject codec test Alarm Code = 06 DTMF RX module failed at 02 02 0100 inject codec test Alarm Code = 06 07 ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 Dgl L/B codec test Alarm Code = 07 COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 1501 Dgl L/B codec test Alarm Code = 07 L.S/GS truk card failed at 02 02 0100 Dgl L/B codec test Alarm Code = 07 Do a directed test on the specified circuit to verii the problem. If the problem persists, refer to the Fault Isolation Part of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS commands. E&M module failed at 02 02 0100 Dgl L/B codec test Alarm Code = 07 DTMF RX module failed at 02 02 0100 Dgl L/B codec test Alarm Code = 07 08 ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 Ang L/B codec test Alarm Code = 08 COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 1501 Ang L/B codec test AlarmCode= LS/GS tmk card failed at 02 02 0100 Ang L/E3codec test AlarmCode= Do a directed test on the specified circuit to verify the problem. If the problem persists, the fault is isolated to the specified circuit. Refer to the appropriate Part of this Practice. Replace as required. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS commands. E&M module failed at 02 02 0100 Ang L/B codec test Alarm Code = 08 DTMF RX module failed at 02 02 0100 Aug L/B codec test AlarmCode= 09 ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 Alarm Code = 09 Message lamp test The specified station has been unplugged, or lamp bulb needs to be replaced. Page 2 of 20 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 A-2 Troubleshooting Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Alarm Code Message 10 ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 222 Hook test Alarm Code = 10 Do a directed test on the specified circuit to verii the problem. If the problem persists, refer to the ONS Line card Part of this Practice. Replace as required. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS commands. ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 Adc reference test Alarm Code = 11 Do a directed test on the specified circuit to verify problem. If the problem persists, refer to the Fault Isolation Part of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS commands. _’ Action \ 11 LWGS tmk card failed at 02 02 0100 Adc reference test Alarm Code = 11 Required 12 Card read test Alarm code = 12 13 LS/GS tmk card failed at 02 02 0100 Hybrid Ioopback test Alarm Code =13 Do a directed test on the specified circuit to verify the problem. If the problem persists, the fault is isolated to the specified circuit. Refer to the appropriate Part of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS commands. 14 DIG line card failed at 0108 0101 ext 111 DNIC output L/B test Alarm Code =14 DNIC chip failed at circuit 01. Problem with DIGITAL Line Card. 15 DIG line card failed at 0108 0101 ext 111 Alarm code = 15 DNIC input L/B test DNIC chip failed at circuit 07. Problem with DIGITAL Line Card. 16 DIG line card failed at 0108 0101 ext 111 dn set c/s test Alarm Code = 16 Replace the specified digital SUPERSET telephone. 17 DIG line card failed at 0108 0101 ext 122 dn set bphone test AlarmCode = 17 Replace the specified digital SUPERSET telephone. 18 DIG line card failed at 0108 0101 ext 122 dn set t’ducer test Alarm Code=18 Replace the specified digital SUPERSET telephone. 19 DIG line card failed at 0108 0102 ext 222 Alarm Code = 19 dataset L/B test Replace the specified dataset. 20 DTMF RX module failed at 02 02 0100 DTMF receiver test Alarm Code = 20 Do a directed test on the specified circuit to verify the problem. If the problem persists, the fault is isolated to the specified DTMF Receiver. Refer to the DTMF Receiver Part of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS and SHOW STATUS commands. Page 3 of 2C 350 A-4 Revision 0 9109-99635O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Maintenance Log Messages Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Alarm Code = 22 DSP tone detect test Alarm Code = 23 problem. If it persists, refer to the Main Control Card Part of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS command. Alarm Code = 24 trol Card Part of this Practice. Otherwise, Alarm Code = 25 PCM loopback test Alarm Code = 29 Failure on DX module. Replace Main Link 07 Channel 19 Failed isol to mcc PCM loopback test Alarm Code = 32 Alarm Code = 34 9109-096-3504A Issue 1 Revision 0 350 A-5 Troubleshooting Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Alarm Code Message Action Required 34 Link 07 Channel 19 Failed isol to mcc PCM loopback test Alarm Code = 34 Failure on DX module. Replace Main Control Card. 36 DIG line card passed at 0108 0101 ext 111 Alarm Code = 36 Information corrected. 40 ONS card failed at 03 010100 Analog 8804 test AlarmCode= Card fault - replace card. 41 ONS card failed at 03 010100 Analog 8804 test Alarm Code = 41 Card fault - replace card. 42 ONS card failed at 03 010100 No path to junct # # AlarmCode= Card fault - replace card. 43 DIG line card failed at 0108 0101 ext 111 dn set earpiece test Alarm Code = 43 Refer to Digital set troubleshooting procedures, 44 DIG line card failed at 02 02 0100 ext 111 dn set speaker test Alarm&de=44 Refer to Digital set troubleshooting procedures. 45 DIG line card failed at 02 02 0100 ext 111 dn set microphe test Alarm Code = 45 Refer to Digital set troubleshooting procedures. 46 DIG line card failed at 02 02 0100 ext 211 dn AlarmCode= set mouthpce test Refer to Digital set troubleshooting procedures, 47 Tl trunk card failed at 0106 0100 Trk 19 tl channel L/B test Alarm Code =47 Refer to Tl Trunk troubleshooting procedures, 48 DIG line card failed at 05 0101 Modem answer test Alarm Code = 48 The modem at this location is not able to answer a call. Refer to applicable Dataset Troubleshooting procedure. 49 DIG line card failed at 05 0101 Modem originate test Alarm&de=49 The modem at this location is not able to originate a call. Refer to applicable Dataset Troubleshooting procedure. 52 ONS card failed at 03 010100 Analog 8804 test Alarm Code = 52 Card fault - replace card. 53 ONS card failed at 03 010100 No path to junct # # AlarmCode= Card fault - replace card. 57 Link 07 Channel 19 failed Junctor l/back test Alarm Code = 57 350 A-6 only. Previous problem Do a directed test on the specified link to verify the problem. Refer to Practice 9109-096-l 8O-NA, Engineering Information, for link assignments. If the problem persists, refer to the Analog Junctor Part of this Practice. Otherwise, investigate further, using the MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS command. Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Maintenance Log Messages Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) ’ Alarm Code Message 100 .- DSP failed at 00 00 06 00 DSF’went insane Alarm Code = 100 101 ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 OFF hook too long Alarm Code = 101 Action Required Do a directed test on the DSP to verify the problem. If the problem persists, refer to Main Control Card troubleshooting procedures. ; Information only. Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 221 OFF hook too long Alarm Code = 101 COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 1501 OFF hook too long Alarm Code = 101 Superset card failed at 03 010100 ext 21 OFF hook too long Alarm Code = 101 102 ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 Card removed Alarm Code = 102 Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 120 Card removed Alarm Code = 102 Verify card has been removed. If alarm is raised due to this, either replace/reinstall the card, or deprogram it via CDE. Refer to Practice 9109-096-21 O-NA, Customer Data Entry, for details. COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 1501 Card removed Alarm Code = 102 Superset card failed at 03 01 01 00 ext 21 Card removed Alarm Code = 102 DIG line card failed at 03 010101 Card removed Alarm Code = 102 LWGS trnk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk 9 Card removed Alarm Code = 102 CO trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk 09 Card removed Alarm Code = 102 E&M trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk9 Card removed Alarm Code = 102 DID trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk9 Card removed Alarm Code = 102 UNIVERSAL card failed at 02 03 0100 Card removed Alarm Code = 102 Tl trunk card failed at 02 06 00 00 Card removed Alarm Code = 102 103 ONS card passed at 02 010100 ext 2101 Card installed Alarm Code =103 Information only. Page 6 of 20 9109-09N5O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 A-7 Troubleshooting Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Alarm Code Message 103 (Cotit.) Stn line card passed at 03 010100 ext 21 Cird installed Alarm Code =103 \ Action Required COV card passed at 0105 0100 ext 32 C&d installed Alarm Code = 103 Superset card passed at 03 010100 ext 4 Card installed Alarm Code =103 DIG line card passed at 03 010101 Card installed Alarm Code = 103 LS/GS tmk card passed at 02 02 0100 Tk 9 Card installed Alarm Code = 103 CO trunk card passed at 02 02 0100 TkO8 Card installed Alarm Code = 103 E&M trunk card passedat 02 02 0100 Tk8 Card installed Alarm Code = 103 DID trunk card passed at 02 02 0100 Tk 8 Card installed Alam Code = 103 UNIVERSAL installed card passed at 02 03 0100 Card Alarm Code = 103 Tl trunk card passed at 02 06 00 00 Card installed Alarm Code = 103 Page 7 of 20 350 A-8 Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Maintenance Log Messages Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Alarm Code = 104 Stn line card failed at 03 010100 Wrong card in slot ext 312 COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 1501 Alarm Code = 104 Superset card failed at 03 010100 ext 31 Wrong card in slot Alarm Code = 104 LS/GS trk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk 08 Wrong card in slot Alarm Code = 104 CO trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk 8 Wrong card in slot Alarm Code = 104 E&M trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk 8 Alarm Code = 104 Wrong card in slot DID truuk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk 09 Alarm Code = 104 Wrong card in slot UNIVERSAL card failed at 02 03 0100 Superset unplugged Alarm Code = 105 The specified extension has been unplugged. If this is not the case, check wiring. Is IS a warnrng. Serious ram shortage Alarm Code 108 message. Watch for further occurrences. 107 Database failed at 00 00 03 00 Alarm Code = 107 Serious dsk shortage This is a warning. Stop CDE activity. Wait for a low traffic period, perform a COPY DATABASE, and reset the system using the new database. If this persists, search for an Alarm Code 109 message. Watch for further occurrences. Page 8 of 20 9109-09~5O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 A-9 Troubleshooting Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Alarm Code Message 108 _’ RAMfai1e4lat00000400 N&Ram space left Action Alarm Code = 108 \ Required No further CDE programming will be possible. There is no RAM space available. Wait for a period of low traffic, and reset the system. If further programming is required, other devices, account code numbers, ARS strings, or speed call numbers will have to be deprogrammed. 109 DISK failed at 00 00 03 00 No Disk space left Alann Code = 109 No further CDE programming will be possible. There is no disk space available. Wait for a period of low traffic, perform a COPY DATABASE, and reset the system using the new database. If further programming is required, other devices, account numbers, ARS strings, or speed call numbers will have to be deprogrammed. 110 ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 120 Alarm Code = 110 Msg reg overflow The message registration counter for the specified extension has overflowed. The overflow threshold is 50,000. Ensure that the counters are periodically reset at the Attendant Console. Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111 Msg reg overflow Alarm Code = 110 COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 1501 Msg reg overflow Alarm Code = 110 Superset card failed at 03 010100 ext 12 Msg reg overflow Alarm Code = 110 111 LS/GS tmk card failed at 02 02 0100 Trk 1 Can’t seize trunk AIarmCode=lll CO trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Trk 01 Can’t seize trunk AIam Code = 111 Verify the wiring from the trunk circuit to the public network. Correct as required. Refer to Practice 9109-098-20O-NA, Installation Information. If this is not the problem, suspect failure or bad wiring at the Central Office. E&M trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk2 Can’t seize trunk Alarm Code = 111 DID trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk7 Can’t Alarm Code = 111 seize trunk 112 LS/GS tmk card failed at 02 02 0100 Trk 1 Can’t release trunk Alarm Code = 112 CO trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Trk 1 Can’t release trunk Ahrm Code = 112 No release signal was received from the Central Office. Veriljt wiring. Refer to Practice 9109-098-200-NA, Installation lnforma tion, for details. E&M trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Tk7 Alarm Code = 112 Can’t release trunk DID trunk card failed at 02 02 0100 Trk 7 Can’t release trunk Alarm Code = 112 Ds-..-.r.n .4 rw 350 A-10 Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Maintenance Log Messages Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Installation Information for d&tails. Alann Code = 114 Alann Code = 115 Alam Code = 116 arm Code = 117 Card in low pwr slot Alarm Code = 118 CONFIG command to obtain information on the card slot. Re-install/reprogram the card Card in low pwr slot DID card failed at 0105 0100 Card in low pwr slot Alarm Code = 118 arm Code = 119 BAY failed at 03 00 00 00 Bay has cut through Alarm Code = 121 ing that other bays have cut through. Use SHOW ALARMS command and examine s further to find the actual cause of the 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 A-11 Troubleshooting Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Alarm Code 122 Message Action PFT seuse passed at 00 00 08 00 Alarm Code = 122 Bay has cut back BAY passed at 03 00 00 00 Bay has cut back Alarm Code = 122 123 ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 123 Recording dev failed Alarm Code = 123 ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 Recording device failed -false origination Required The specified bay has been cut back to normal operation. Verify that appropriate action was taken to rectify the event which caused the cut through. GENERAL: The recording device attached to the specified port has malfunctioned. Check wiring. Refer to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the recording device. Alanu Code = 123 ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 Recording device failed to hang up-lok Alarm Code = 123 PAD failed to hang up - locked out. ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 Recording device failed to hang up - sus Alarm Code = 123 ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 Recording device failed to answer Alarm Code = 123 PAD failed to hang up - suspect state. ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext 2101 Recording device failed -nil error Alarm Code = 123 Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111 Recording device failed ... unknown reason .. . Alarm Code = 123 Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111 Recording device failed -false origination Alarm Code = 123 Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111 Recording device failed to hang up-lok Alarm Code = 123 PAD failed to hang up - locked out Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111 Recording device failed to hang up-sus Alarm Code = 123 PAD failed to hang up - suspect state. Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111 Recording device failed to answer Alann Code = 123 Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111 Recording device failed - nil error Alarm Code = 123 Page 11 of 20 350 A-12 Revision 0 9109-99635O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Maintenance Log Messages Table A-i Fault Reports (continued) Wakeup printer down is off-line or not AlarmCode= Wakeup not answered AlarmCode= Stn line card failed at 03 010100 ext 111 Wakeup not answered Alarm Code=125 COV card failed at 0105 0100 ext 111 Wakeup not answered Alarm Code=125 DISK failed at 00 00 03 00 Alarm Code = 127 nance. Reset the system at the earliest low traffic period. New diskette will likely be re- DTIMF RX module failed at 02 02 0100 Reseat the affected Universal card. er occurrences ** anything ** failed at 00 00 00 00 Group-Lid-Test Invalid Group Link Alarm Code = 129 Service. ** anything ** failed at 00 00 00 00 Group-Link-Test many members in Group Alarm Code = 129 **anything**failedat00000000 Group-Lid-Test nil error Alarm Code = 129 Page 12 of 2( 91094964504A issue 1 Revision 0 350 A-13 Troubleshooting Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Alarm Code Message Action 130 .’ ** anything ** failed at 00 00 00 00 Plid to Swid failed Alarm Code = 130 Record this and watch for further occurrences. Perform a Verify Database operation and check for further occurrences of this Alarm Code. If system performance is degraded substantially, contact MITEL Field Service. 131 RAM failed at 00 00 04 00 Disk VS Ram Failed Alarm Code= 131 Record this and watch for further occurrences. Perform a Verify Database operation and check for further occurrences of this Alarm Code. If system performance is degraded substantially, contact MITEL Field Service. 132 * * anything* * failed at 00 00 00 00 Key DB corrupt. Set has no prime key. A CDE audit has failed. If this persists, attempt a COPY DATABASE as soon as possible. Perform a Verify Database operation and check for further occurrences of this Alarm Code. If this still persists; contact MITEL Field Service. \ ** anything ** failed at 00 00 00 00 Key DB corrupt. Key data not for set. ** anything **failed at 00 00 00 00 Key DB corrupt. Invalid key number. Required ** anything **failed at 00 00 00 00 Key DB corrupt. Prime is not key 1. ** anything **failed at 00 00 00 00 Key DB corrupt. Prime is not immediate ring. ** anything **failed at 00 00 00 00 Key DB corrupt. Prime not in and out. * * anything* * failed at 00 00 00 00 Key DB corrupt. Line WA index wrong. ** anything** failed at 00 00 00 00 Key DB corrupt. Line owner swid wrong. ** anything** failed at 00 00 00 00 Key DB corrupt. Nil error. Page 13 of 20 350 A-14 Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Maintenance Log Messages Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) be an INTERCOM key. The INTERCOM key is not programmed IMMEDIATE RING - must baso. as The DIRECTION for the INTERCOM key is not programmed as In/Out - must be so. Key-DB-test failed at 00 00 00 00 Trk DTS and CO A trunk has been programmed as a DTS key on a PBX SUPERSETtelephone and a CO Line on a Key System SUPERSETtelephone -this is not permitted. failed at 00 00 00 00 Key-DB-test Trk Private and CO A trunk has been programmed as a PRIVATE key on a PBX SUfERSETtelephone and a CO Line on a Key System SUPERSETtelephone -this is not per- ** failed at 00 00 er occurrences and check for further occurrences of this still persists; contact MI- tion). Refer to the UPS Part of this Practice. 136 137 138 UPS sense passed at 00 00 09 00 UPS available Alarm Code = 136 Information only. UPS sense failed at 00 00 09 00 ac voltage failure Alarm Code = 137 The line ac voltage has failed. Ensure UPS is functioning. UPS sense failed at 00 00 09 00 Battery/charger Alarm Code = 138 Either the battery is failing, or the battery charger is not functioning. Examine battery, charger, and wiring. Also refer to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the UPS. Page 14 of 2C 9109-09%35O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 A-15 Troubleshooting Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Alarm Code Message 139 _’ UPS sense failed at 00 00 09 00 Alarm Code = 139 AC/battery/charger There is no line ac voltage. Also, the battery is failing, or the charger is/was not functioning properly. Examine battery, charger and wiring. Also, refer to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the UPS. * 141 Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00 PMS is down Alarm Code = 141 The PMS system failed to respond to 20 consecutive queries from the SX-200 DIGITAL system. Refer to PMS procedures. 142 Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00 PMS is up Alarm Code = 142 After failing to respond, the PMS system has now responded to an SX-200 DIGITAL enquiry. 143 Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00 PMS buffer is full Alarm Code = 143 The system attempted to send a message to the PMS message buffer; buffer was full. If persistent, refer to PMS procedures. 144 Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00 No STX from PMS Alarm Code = 144 PMS has sent the PBX an invalid STARTOF-TEXT message. Refer to PMS procedures. 145 Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00 No ETX from PMS Alarm Code = 145 PMS has sent the PBX an invalid END-DFTEXT message. Refer to PMS procedures. 146 Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00 Bad PMS function Alarm Code = 146 PMS has sent the PBX an invalid function message. Refer to PMS procedures. 147 Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00 Alarm Code = 147 Bad PMS status PMS has sent the PBX an invalid status message. Refer to PMS procedures. 148 Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00 AlarmCode= Bad PMS room number PMS has sent the PBX an invalid room number message. Refer to PMS procedures. 149 Nil device failed at 00 00 00 00 Camrot send PMS msg Alarm&de=149 If the PMS refuses to accept a transaction from the PBX after five tries, the PBX will generate this log. 150 LS/GS trk card failed at 0105 0100 trk 001 TN& no dial tone Alarm Code = 150 This trunk was seized and after 10 seconds dial tone was not detected. The trunk has been busied out. 151 Link 07 Channel 19 Busied out Alarm Code = 151 Device busied out by maintenance personnel. 151 ONS card failed at 01010100 ext 1101 Busied out Alarm Code = 151 Device busied out by maintenance personnel. 152 ONS card passed at 01010100 ext 1101 Returned to service Alarm Code = 152 Device returned to service by maintenance personnel. 152 Link 07 Channel 19 Returned to service Alarm Code = 152 Device returned to service by maintenance personnel. Darar. i lz m$ Qf Action \ 350 A-16 Revision 0 Required 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Maintenance Log Messages Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Message Alarm Code _’ 155 I-. Action Required Tl trunk card passed at 0106 0100 Trk 019 has exceeded the maintenance slip threshold The link has exceeded the specified threshold -this is a warning - watch for further occurrences. If persistent, refer to Tl troubleshooting procedures. , Tl trunk card passed at 0106 0100 Trk 019 is now below the maintenance slip threshold Link was running with errors, is now running at an acceptable error rate. Information only. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 has exceeded the service slip threshold The link has exceeded the specified threshold. A yellow alarm has been sent to the far end, and the link has been removed from service, and a new sync source selected. The RTS - Service Limit timer has been started. Refer to Tl Trunk troubleshooting procedures. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 has exceeded the maint loss frame threshold The link has exceeded the specified threshold -this is a warning -watch for further occurrences. If persistent, refer to Tl troubleshooting procedures. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 is now below the maint loss frame threshold Link was running with errors, is now running at an acceptable error rate. Information only. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 has exceeded the service loss frame threshold The link has exceeded the specified threshold. A yellow alarm has been sent to the far end, and the link has been removed from service, and a new sync source selected. The FITS - Service Limit timer has been started. Refer to Tl Trunk troubleshooting procedures. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 has exceeded the maintenance ber threshold The link has exceeded the specified threshold -this is a warning - watch for further occurrences. If persistent, refer to Tl troubleshooting procedures. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 is now below the maintenance ber threshold Link was running with errors, is now running at an acceptable error rate. Information only. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 removed from service and transmitting yellow alarm Refer to Tl troubleshooting Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 is returned to service The link yellow alarm has been cleared. Possibly the RTS service limit timer has expired, and the link is within an acceptable threshold allowing it to be returned to service. The link may now be used as the network sync source. Information only. procedures. Page 16 of 20 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 A-17 Troubleshooting Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Alarm Code Message 155 ‘cord.)- Action Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 is receiving a yellow alarm The link has received a yellow alarm condition from the far end, and has been removed from service. If this is the network sync source, a new source has been selected. Problem with either the local Channel Service Unit, or at the far end. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 is in red alarm condition due to loss of sync There is no synchronization detected on the link; it has been removed from service. If this is the network sync source, a new source has been selected. Problem with either the local Channel Service Unit, or at the far end. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 is in red alarm condition due to loss of power No power on the link; it has been removed from service. If this is the network sync source, a new source has been selected. Problem with either the local Channel Service Unit, or at the far end. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 exceeded sync slip thresh as current sync source The link is the current network sync source a new sync source has been selected. Refer to Tl troubleshooting procedures. If this message persists, may be necessary to make changes to the network synchronization source list. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 is now below the net sync slip threshold The RTS net slip timer has expired, and the link is within an acceptable threshold allowing it to be returned to service. The link may now be used as the network sync source. Information only. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 alarm condition is now cleared A red or yellow alarm has been cleared, and the RTS after alarm timer has expired. The link has returned to service. Information only. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 System in freerun mode no sync source available There is no network synchronization source that can be used (the source list has been exhausted) -the system is therefore in freerun mode. Refer to the Tl Trunk troubleshooting procedures. May be necessary to make changes to the network synchronization source list. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 is current sync source and is in auto mode The link is the new sync source, and the system is in auto mode. Information only. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 is current sync source and is in manual mode The link is the new sync source, and the system is in manual mode. Information only. D.-.“r. 4 7 -G Qll \ .- 350 A-18 Required Revision 0 9109-09645O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Maintenance Log Messages Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Alarm Code 155 Message Action Requited Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 The system’s previous sync source was freerun mode There was a change in the network sync source. The system was previously in freerun mode. Information only. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 was previous sync source in manual mode There was a change in the network sync source. The link was the old sync source, and the system was in manual mode. Information only. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 was previous sync source in auto mode There was a change in the network sync source. The link was the old sync source, and the system was in auto mode. Information only. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 is reporting unstable link (phase error) The link is reporting phase errors. If this is the network sync source, a new source has been selected. Problem with either the local Channel Service Unit, or at the far end. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 is reporting unstable link (no phase error) The link is no longer reporting phase errors. It is now avaialable for use as the network sync source. Information only. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 sync source manual timer has expired The network sync source manual timer has expired and the system is changing from manual to auto or freerun mode. A network sync source is picked from the network synchronization source list. Information only. Tl trunk card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 No Tl clock module, running in freerun mode Links for network sync have been specified, but there is no Tl clock module in the system. The system is running in freerun mode as a result. Check if Tl module is installed. If so, refer to Main Control card procedures. Tl tmrik card at 0106 0100 Trk 019 created log for unknown reason Non problem. If persistent, contact MITEL Field Service. 156 DIG line card and failed at 05 0101 PST checksum failed Alarm Code = 156 Checksum of dataset firmware failed, replace set. Device will be busied out. 157 DIG line card failed at 05 0101 PST RAM failed Alarm Code = 157 PAM in dataset failed (external or 6803). Replace set. Device wil be busied out. 158 DIG line card failed at 05 0101 PST UART l/b failed Alarm Code =158 UART loopback power up test failed; replace set. Device will be busied out. 159 DIG line card failed at 05 0101 PST DNIC l/b failed Alarm Code =159 DNIC loopback power up self test failed; replace set. Device will be busied out. 160 DIG line card failed at 05 0101 PSC HDLC failed Alarm Code = 160 HDLC controller failed in power up test; replace set. Device will be busied out. Icont.) Page 18 of 2C 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 A-19 Troubleshooting Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Alarm Code Message Action Required 161 DIG line card failed at 0102 1102 ext 123 Firmware trap Alarm Code = 161 Firmware trap occurred in set; check power supply. The device will not be busied out. 162 DIG line card failed at 0102 1102 ext 123 Flood of EIA input Alarm Code = 162 Call Processing received more than 125 EIA input reports within 2 minutes while in the idle state; the data device was busied out. When the device is replaced, the data device will be unbusied. Check the equipment attached to the data device for a faulty EIA output. 163 DIG line card failed at 0102 1102 ext 123 Flood of Ascii input Alarm Code = 163 A flood of ASCII characters (100 more than the maximum input) was received, and the data device was busied out. If the device is replaced the data device will be unbusied. Check the equipment attached to the data device for flooding of ASCII characters (such as a large file being dumped to the DTRX process). 164 NIL PLID failed at 00 00 00 00 Bad PMS Name Alarm Code = 164 The name field received from the PMS system is improperly formatted, or is inconsistent with the name operator. Refer to PMS procedures. 165 NIL PLID failed at 00 00 00 00 Bad PMS Time Alarm Code = 165 The time field received from the PMS system is improperly formatted. Refer to PMS procedures. 166 NIL PLID failed at 00 00 00 00 PMS requires console Alarm Code= 166 Dial 0 routing for the PMS is not a console LDN or a console prime number. Problem either with PMS database or local SX-200 DIGITAL programming. 170 DIG line card failed at 05 0101 Firmware trap Alarm Code = 170 Firmware trap occurred in set; check power supply. The device will not be busied out. \ Page 19 of 2C 350 A-20 Revision 0 9109-096435O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Maintenance Log Messages Table A-l Fault Reports (continued) Alarm Code Message 171 C-. DIG line card failed at 05 0101 Flood of EIA input Alarm Code = 171 Call Processing received more than 125 EIA input reports within 2 minutes while in the idle state; the data device was busied out. When the device is replaced, the data device will be unbusied. Check the equipment attached to the data device for a faulty EIA output. 172 DIG line card failed at 05 0101 Flood of ASCII input Alarm Code = 172 A flood of ASCII characters (100 more than the maximum input) was received, and the data device was busied out. If the device is replaced the data device will be unbusied. Check the equipment attached to the data device for flooding of ASCII characters (such as a large file being dumped to the DTRX process). Action Requiied Page20 Table A-2 Alarm Log Reports Alarm Code Tot alarm went irom No Alarm to MAJOR Alarm Reasons’ in Table A-3 Tot alarm went from MINOR to MAJOR Alarm Reasons’ in Table A-3 Tot alarm went from MAJOR to CRITICAL Alarm Reasons’ in Table A-3 Tot alarm went from MAJOR to MINOR Alarm Reasons’ in Table A-3 Action see see see see Tot alarm went from MINOR to No Alarm see Alarm Reasons’ in Table A-3 9109-096435O-NA Issue 1 of 20 Required Use SHOW ALARMS command for more detailed information. Also see the applicable entry in Table A-3. Use SHOW ALARMS command for more detailed information. Also see the applicable entry in Table A-3. Use SHOW ALARMS command for more detailed information. Also see the applicable entry in Table A-3. This is an improvement only. in service. Information This is an improvement only. in service. Information Revision 0 350 A-21 Troubleshooting Table A-3 Alarm Reset Reasons Alarm Level Change Reason Alarm level change Alarm level change Alarm-level-change Alarm level change due due due due to to to to Bay Bay Bay Bay Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm due due due due to to to to system system system system level-change Jevel change level change level change XX XX XX XX Due Due Due Due to to to to threshold threshold threshold threshold change change change change of of of of Bay Bay Bay Bay Due Due Due Due to to to to threshold threshold threshold threshold change change change change of of of of system system system system Actlon Required pcm rcvrs trunks lines Check the status of the specified bay (XX) via the SHOW ALARMS and SHOW STATUS commands. Refer to the ‘Analog Bay Peripheral Control Subsystem’ Part of this Practice. pcm rcvrs trunks lines ; Check the system status via the SHOW ALARMS and SHOW STATUS commands. Refer to the ‘Analog Bay Peripheral Control Subsystem’ Part of this Practice. XX XX Xx XX pcm rcvrs trunks lines Check the status of the specified bay (XX) via the SHOW ALARMS and SHOW STATUS commands. Refer to the ‘Analog Bay Peripheral Control Subsystem’ Part of this Practice. PCM rcvrs trunks lines Check the status via the SHOW ALARMS and SHOW STATUS commands. Refer to the ‘Analog Bay Peripheral Control Subsystem’ Part of this Practice. Table A-4 Maln Control Reset Log Reports Action Reset Log Message Required Main Control was reset due to power up Information power-up. only. Main Control Card is reset at Main Control was reset due to pushbutton The SYSTEM RESET pushbutton on the Main Control Card was pushed. Investigate. Main Control was reset due to watch dog timer Main Control was reset due to local bay cause Main Control was reset due to msg link failure In all cases, check if Main Control Card is functioning; if not, go to Emergency Troubleshooting procedures (Table 9-l). Main Control was reset due to software error Process 00 ANYTHING at address 012345 Main Control was reset due to software error RAM parity error at address = 012345 Main Control was reset due to parity failure RAM parity error at address = 012345 Main Control was reset due to software error Process 00 has overflowed its stack Main Control was reset due to software error Exception = ANYTHING at address 012345 Main Control was reset due to Copy Database Upgrade disks left in driies. 350 A-22 A copy was done and the update disks were left in causing a reset. Revision 0 9109-096-35&NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Maintenance Table A-5 Log Messages Bay Reset Log Reports Reset Log Message Action Required Bay X was reset due to msg link failure Bay X reported cause: scanner/power The main control was unable to communicate with the bay, and therefore reset the bay. Bay may have lost power; possibly faulty Scanner card. -. Bay was reset due to msg link failure Bay X reported cause: cutover The PCM cable may be faulty. Possibly faulty Main Control or DIC card. ; Bay X was reset due to local bay cause Bay reported cause: Scanner/power Push button may have been pushed on the Scanner card. If not, possibly faulty Scanner card. Bay number X reported cause: parity failure at address XXXXXX Failure of on-board DRAM. If persistent, replace the Bay Control card. Bay number X reported cause: power up at address XXXXXX Information power-up. Bay number X reported cause: reset by MCC at address XXXXXX Bay was reset because Main Control card was reset. Investigate possible Main Control card problem. Bay number X reported cause: watchdog at address XXXXXX Software failure. Check if Main Control Card is functioning: if not, go to Emergency Troubleshooting procedures (Table 9-l). timer Bay number X reported cause: * anything else* at address XXXXXX Table A-6 Bay X recovered DIC : Lower/Upper 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 only. Bay Control Card is reset at Software failure. Check if Main Control Card is functioning; if not, go to Emergency Troubleshooting procedures (Table 9-l). DIC Recovery Type 3 Log Reports The PCC reset the DIC -the DIC did not require et. If persistent, could be a defective PCC Revision 0 350 A-23 Troubleshooting Table A-7 Bay Log Reports Log Message Action Required Bay number X reported cause: Lower DIC failed The PCC forced an expected lower DIC recovery -the DIC did not require one. If persistent, could be a defective PCC card. Bay numberX reported cause: Upper DIC failed The PCC forced an expected upper DIC recovery -the DIC did not require one. If persistent, could be a defective PCC card. ; Bay number X reported cause: DIG’s failed -Type 1 The PCC forced an expected upper DIC recovery - but the DIC required a reboot. If persistent, could be a defective DIC card in bay 5. Bay number X reported cause: DE’s failed -Type 2 The PCC forced an expected upper DIC recovery - but the DIC required a reboot. If persistent, could be a defective DIC card in bay 3 or bay 4. Bay number X reported cause: Lower DIC reset The lower DIC unexpectedly reset, but did not require it. If persistent, could be a defective DIC card in bay 3 or bay 4. Bay number X reported cause: Upper DIC reset The upper DIC unexpectedly reset, but did not require it. If persistent, could be a defective DIC card in bay 5. Bay number X reported cause: DIG’s reset - Type 1 The upper DIC unexpectedly reset, and required a reboot. If persistent, could be a defective DIC card in bay 5. Bay number X reported cause: DIG’s reset -Type 2 The lower DIC unexpectedly reset, and required a reboot. If persistent, could be a defective DIC card in bay 3 or bay 4. Bay number X reported cause: Power up The analog bay has been powered up, or the power monitor circuit caused the reset. Bay number X reported cause: Scanner The Scanner watch dog reset the bay - if persistent, indicates faulty Scanner card. Bay number X reported cause: Software error XXXX The PCC watchdog timer expired - if persistent, indicates faulty PCC card. Bay number X reported cause: Scanner/Power Caused by pushbutton reset of the Scanner card. If not, could be caused by power tuned off at the bay, ac power failure, or power system failure. Also could be defective Scanner card. Bay number X reported cause: Cut over Information 350 A-24 Revision 0 only. 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Maintenance Table A-8 _’ Miscellaneous Log Messages Log Reports Reset Log Message Action Required System Configuration/Decryption module conflict Change system configuration to clear error. Check the installation of the decryption module. Log(s) deleted by user A user logged in to the maintenance facility (maintenance terminal or console) deleted one or more log entries via the DELETE LOGS command. Involved in recovery is 01 04 04 04 ext 1100 01 03 03 03 Trk 001 Main Control trace back at address = XXXXXX (anything) CP Process recovered from software error # XX (anything) In all cases, this indicates a software error. Refer the problem to MITEL Field Service. 9109-09K35O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 A-25 Troubleshooting 350 A-26 Revision 0 9109-0963504A Issue 1 Appendix B. CALL PROCESSING INFORMATION _’ Table B-l Digital Bay to Digital Bay Call \ Event Step 1. The Main Control Card (MCC) scans for on-hook/off-hook 2. An extension goes off-hook in Bay I. 3. The MCC detects the off-hook 4. MCC checks for the COS of the extension to determine if the call is allowed. 5. The MCC checks for an idle receiver. 6. The MCC connects the DTMF receiver to the line circuit through the DX matrix on a PCM channel. 7. The MCC connects the same channel to the Digital Signal Processor (DSP) to provide dial tone. a. The MCC monitors the circuit for rotary pulses. 9. The DTMF receiver detects any DTMF tones and sends a message to the MCC indicating the value of the dialed digits. IO. On receipt of the first digit, the MCC removes the DSP from the assigned channel. 11. The MCC monitors the digits dialed and checks the idle/busy condition of the destination, 12. If the destination supplied. 13. The MCC sends the originator a cadence message to provide interruption tone. 14. The MCC sends ringing to the Bay Power Supply from the DSP via a DX link. 15. The Bay Power Supply amplifies and routes the ringing to the destination. 16. The MCC sends a message to the destination to turn ringing on. 17. When the destination 18. Ringing is removed from the destination. 19. Ringback is removed from the originator. 20. A channel is connected between the originator and the destination. 21. The MCC scans for on-hook/off-hook 22. When an on-hook 9109-096-350-NA change of state. during its line card scan. is idle, the MCC connects the DSP to the originator and ringback is of the ringback answers, the MCC detects the off-hook change of state. changes of state. is detected, the MCC removes the channel, and the call is terminated. Issue 1 Revision 0 350 B-4 r Troubleshooting Table B-2 Analog Bay to Analog Step Bay Call Event 1. The Scanner card scans the line circuits for on-hook/off-hook 2. An extension goes off-hook 3.’ The Scanner detects an off-hook 4. The Scanner sends an IRQ to the Peripheral Control Card (PCC). 5. changes of state. in Bay 3. during the line card scan. , The PCC determines the originator, generates Interface Card (DIC). a message and passes it to the Digital 6. The DIC formats and sends a message to the MCC. 7. The MCC checks the originator’s a. The MCC checks for an idle DTMF receiver. 9. The MCC sends a message to the PCC to connect a junctor to the originator. 10. The MCC assigns a channel of the link to the junctor, and connects the DTMF receiver to the channel through the DX matrix. 11. The MCC connects the same channel to the Digital Signal Processor (DSP) to provide dial tone. 12. The PCC monitors the circuit for rotary pulses. 13. The DTMF receiver detects any DTMF tones and sends a message to the MCC indicating the value of the tones. 14. On receipt of the first digit, the MCC removes the DSP from the assigned channel. 15. The MCC monitors the digits dialed and checks the idle/busy condition of the destination. 16. If the destination supplied. 17. The MCC sends a cadence message to the PCC of the originator to provide interruption of the ringback tone. ia. The MCC sends a message to the PCC to ring the destination. 19. When the destination 20. The Scanner sends an IRQ to the PCC. 21. The PCC stops ringing and sends a message to the MCC indicating that the destination off-hook. 22. Ringback is removed from the originator. 23. Since both parties are in Bay 3, the MCC sends a message to the PCC to provide a connection between the originator and the destination using a speech path (there are no PCM channels used in this connection). 24. The Scanner scans for on-hook/off-hook 25. When an on-hook is detected, the PCC sends a message to the MCC indicating that the extension(s) has gone onhook; the call is terminated. 350 B-2 COS to detemine if the call is allowed. is idle, the MCC connects the DSP to the originator and ringback tone is answers, the Scanner detects the off-hook is changes of state. Revision 0 9109-09635GNA Issue 1 5 I Appendix B - Call Processing Table B-3 Digital Bay to Digital Bay Call (672 Port System) Step 1. Information Event Caller in Bay 1 goes Off-Hook (the event). .2. The Bay Control Card (BCC) scans circuits on each card in its bay for events (hardware). 3. When an event occurs, the BCC assembles a message (in HDLC format) describing the event, the associated PLID, and the device which caused the event. r 4. The message is then sent via a dedicated message channel, over one of the 3 links which interconnect the peripheral bay to the control bay, to the Main Control Card (MCC). The Switch Matrii Card (SMC) provides the digital crosspoint (DX) connection between the BCC and the MCC. 5. The message is picked up by the message system and routed to the appropriate destination; in this case, the call processing (CP) processes messages in a first in - first out manner. 6. CP, taking the message from its message queue, then accepts the message and looks up the Device Work Area (DWA). This work area allows CP to determine the COS, COR, and other features enabled for the device which caused the event. 7. CP checks for an available receiver and channel, and connects them to the device via the DX matrices on the SMC and on the BCC. 8. Once the Receiver is connected to the device, dial tone is sent from the Digital Signal Processor (DSP) on the MCC. This also must be connected to the device via the DX matrices. 9. The caller then hears dial tone and begins dialing digits. 10. For ONS calls only, the Receiver decodes the first digit and passes lt to the MCC. For SUERSETtelephones, digits are sent to Call Processing (CP). 11. The MCC accepts the digit and turns off dial tone from the DSP; it then waits for further digits. 12. While waiting for and receiving the digits, the MCC checks validity of digits dialed against database and against COS/COR limits for the device. 13. Once all digits are accepted, the MCC uses the information received to find the destination device and set up a channel to initiate the call. 14. Assuming the destination is idle, the MCC sends the ringing message to the BCC to ring the destination. The receiver is dropped during ringback. 15. The BCC then instructs the Bay Power Supply (BPS) to send ringing votage via the backplane and dry contact relays on the line card to the destination. Ringing reference is supplied by the DSP and cadenced by the BCC for a specified pattern such as 1 second ON, 3 seconds OFF. SUPERSETtelephones are sent a message to cause the set to begin warbling.. 16. While the destination is being rung, ringback tone is sent to the calling party. This is supplied by the DSP from the MCC. 17. Destination hears ringing and goes OFF-HOOK. Page 9109-096-35(rNA Issue 1 Revision 0 1 of 2 350 B-3 Troubleshootinn Table B-3 Digital Bay to Digltal Bay Call (672 Port System) (continued) Step Event 18. ’ 19. BCC detects off-hook while scanning all ports in its bay and sends the answer message to-the .._ MCC. MCC accepts the answer message, instructs the BCC to turn off the ringing being sent to the destination, turns off ringback tone being sent to the source, and then instructs the SMC to connect the source to the destination. This establishes the voice connection. \ 20. Conversation is carried out and completed. 21. One party hangs up. BCC detects and sends disconnect message to MCC. MCC puts other party in ‘suspended - xxx hung up’ or ‘lockout - locked out’ until he also hangs up. Then the MCC returns the set to idle. Page Revision 0 9109-098-35O-NA 2 of 2 Issue 1 Appendix C. TROUBLESHOOTING KIT ._ The following is a recommended Troubleshooting Kit: l \ list of items required One of each circuit card as a spare, including in the Field Service Engineering modules 9 Butt set l Digital multimeter l Moving coil multimeter l Static strap l Ground l Assorted l Long nose pliers l Spare fuses l Wire strippers mat screwdrivers, wrenches . Fan filter 0 Breakout 9109-09M5O-NA Box (for Data) Issue 1 Revision 0 350 c-l Troubleshooting 350 c-2 Revision 0 9109-096-3504A Issue 1 Appendix D. LOOP CURRENT MEASUREMENT There are two methods l In-Line method. l Voltage conversion available to measure loop current: measurement. ; If it is not possible to break the loop (i.e., open the Tip or Ring lead) the second may be used; however, it is not as accurate. In-Line Method. shown The procedure for the in-line method in Figure D-l and is described as follows: of measuring 1. Open either the Tip or Ring lead of the trunk facility by removing clips on the MDF. 2. Insert an ammeter method loop current is one of the bridge where the clip was. 3. Take current readings at the instant the trunk is seized, and after the call has been completed. Do this in both incoming and outgoing directions. 4. Release the trunk and repeat the measurements Office at peak and low traffic hours. 5. Repeat the above using different Central several times on the same Central Office trunks. Voltage Conversion Method. used only in such instances procedure is as follows: 1. With the trunk seized, Ring of the trunk. 2. This voltage This method of loop current measurement should be when it is not desirable to open the Tip or Ring leads, The use a voltmeter is then used to calculate to measure the loop current 3. Release the trunk and repeat the measurement tral Office trunk at peak and low traffic hours. 4. Repeat the above measurements 5. Typical equivalent is approximately 6. The following resistance 250 ohms. is a simple Loop Current = 9109-096-G350-#A Issue 1 using different seen between calculation the voltage between the Tip and (see below). several times using the same Cen- Central Office trunks. Tip and Ring, when the trunk is seized, used to obtain the loop current value: measured Tit~ to Rina voitaae 250 Revision 0 350 D-l Troubleshootinn TRUNK TRLMK FACM-Y Figure D-i 350 D-2 In-Line Current Measurement Revision 0 9109-096-35O-NA Issue 1 Appendix E. LOOP START VS GROUND START CHECK _’ The loop start VS ground Figure E-l): \ start check should be performed as follows (also refer to 1. Locate the PBX trunk circuit Tip and Ring on the connecting block.at 2. Remove the bridge clips on the Tip and Ring (i.e., disconnect from the Central Office Tip and Ring). the PBX trunk circuit 3. Connect the butt set across the Central 4. Go off-hook with the butt set. If Central Office trunk is loop start. the MDF. OfFice Tip and Ring. OfFice dial tone is returned, then the Central 5. If no dial tone is returned, then momentarily ground the Ring lead with a butt set offhook across Tip and Ring. If Central Office dial tone is returned, then the Central OfFice is ground start. 6. If still no dial tone is returned, repeat the previous step and ground the Tip lead instead. If Central Office dial tone is returned, the Central Office trunk is ground start (however, the Tip and Ring are reversed). 7. If still no dial tone is returned in either of these cases, there is a problem (perhaps Tip and Ring opened or shorted, or a large ground differential between PABX ground and Central Office ground.) Check PABX ground. If PABX ground is good, then report problem to telephone company. Note: In most cases with ground start trunks, dial tone may be returned by grounding either Tip or Ring. If this should occur, repeat the 5th and 6th steps using the butt set in its “on-hook” or “monitor” state. Hold the ground lead on for a few seconds; CO should return dial tone as long as the ground lead is connected. 9109-096-350-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 350 E-l Troubleshootina I I I I TO PASX TRUNK ClRCUlT ) CE&L OFFICE SFilDGECUP HOOKSWmCH PASX GROUND Cc0058 Figure E-l 350 E-2 Loop Start Versus Ground Start Check Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 Appendix F. MITEL REPAIR TAG Any card or any other device found faulty must be returned with a Mite1 Repair Tag (see Figure F-l). The following information must be included on the repair tag: 1, The date on which the device was returned. 2. The location 3. The company of the point of origin (the installation site). name. 4. The product name (i.e., SX-ZOO DIGITAL) 5. The system serial number 6. The software generic 7. The software Revision 8. The assembly 9109416400). part number (located on the front of the cabinet). (i.e., GENERIC 1003 or GENERIC (i.e., 480P/D64.1 9. The assembly serial number on the card itself. 1002). S-SEP-1986). of the item being returned (i.e., DTMF Receiver of the item being returned-this Module- is a white sticker located IO. Any pertinent alarm/error displays; this may include circuit card alarm LEDs, 7-segment displays, console or maintenance terminal error messages, or maintenance log messages. 11. A brief description 12. Indicate service. whether 13. Include any further 9109-096350-NA of the symptoms the fault occurred Issue 1 information of the problem. during installation, or while the system was in that may be useful on the rear of the repair tag. Revision 0 350 F-l Troubleshooting Repair Tag Order No.: l..Dak 2 Location: Furthor 9110-098-019-NA, l8mw 3 Details 3. Company: 4. ,Product Mme: 5. System 5. s0mk Srrial No.: 33 Danerie: 7. Aawmbly Rwirion: No.: 5. Aamnbly sorlat 9. AlwmlError 11. Failun No.: Dlaplaya: Dccurmd A) During lnrlallation CAUTION: 6) h Sorvico PLEASE ENSURE PCB ASSEMBLY RETURNED IN ANTISTATIC BAG. IS ccmz5 Figure F-l 350 F-2 The Mite1 Repair Tag Revision 0 9109-09635O-NA Issue 1 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal NOTICE The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mite1Corporation (MITELB). The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mite1 and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes. vT700” is a trademark of Digital Equipment Co. Revision o 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 1 ’ GENERAL Introduction 1 .l :... \ This Practice is intended to assist maintenance personnel in obtaining the maximum benefit from the extensive built-in maintenance features of the SX-2Om DIGITAL PABX. It provides information on the setting up and use of the W-232 Maintenance Terminal, which is the prime maintenance tool on the SX-200 DIGITAL system. The maintenance terminal is also used for Customer Data Entry (CDE) and Traffic Measurement. All of those functions are also accessible from the Attendant Console. Since the scope of this Practice is primarily maintenance-related, refer to Practices 9109-096-210-NA, Customer Data Entry (CDE), and 9109-096-450-NA, Traffic Measurement, for information on these topics. Reason for Issue 1.2 This Practice forms technical information (Fiber Distributed). part of the MITELB Standard Practices issued to provide for the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX including the SX-200 FD How to Use this Practice 1.3 This Practice has been arranged in such a way as to serve two distinct functions: first, as a self-teaching guide for those using the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX maintenance terminal for the first time; secondly, as a reference manual for those requiring review material. For the first group, it is recommended that the section be read through carefully, preferably with a maintenance terminal available so that the various commands may be tried out as the material is studied. For the second group,‘it is recommended that this document and its Table of Contents be used as a reference to the features and commands available. Note: Some displays and messages (such as ACD or Tl Trunk related) are not available with Generic 1001, Generic 1002, or Generic 1005 FPKG 1 and LIT96. 9109-096-351 -NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 l-l 351 l-2 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 2 ’ SETTING UP Terminal Type 2.k _’ \ The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX maintenance subsystem is designed to interface with most 8O-column terminals having an W-232 type interface. The terminal may be either a video display terminal or a hard copy teleprinter. For ease of operation, a video display terminal capable of using the ANSI X3.64-1977 special character set for special graphics (i.e., VT1 00’” compatible) is preferred. The system prompts the user to specify the terminal type at the start of the login sequence (see paragraph 2.4 ). To ensure compatibility with the maintenance subsystem, the terminal should be set up for the following data characteristics: l 8 data bits l 1 start bit l 1 stop bit l no parity. The maintenance subsystem will automatically set itself to the terminal’s however, the terminal baud rate must be one of: l 300 l 600 l 1200 l baud rate; 2400 0 4800 l . 9600. Connection to the System (Terminal) SX-200 DIGITAL 2.2 The maintenance terminal is connected to the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX by means of a standard 25-pin RS-232 cable. One end of the cable is plugged into the main RS-232 communication port of the terminal; the other end is plugged into the RS-232 Maintenance Connector port on the system Maintenance Panel (see Figure 2-l and Figure 2-2). The Maintenance Port Selection Switch on the panel should be set to “TERMINAL (DTE)“. Alternatively, a modem may be plugged into the “REMOTE” connector, located on the rear maintenance panel, for communication with a remote maintenance terminal. The port selection switch should be set to “MODEM (DCE)“. 9109-096451-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 2-l W-232 Maintenance Notes: Terminal 1. A terminal MAY NOT be connected directly to the “REMOTE” connector. 2. The “REMOTE” and “LOCAL” connectors may not be used concurrently. SX-200 FD TherMaintenance terminal can be connected to either the Control Cabinet or one of the Peripheral Cabinets (Bays) of the SX-200FD. A standard W-232 cable is connected to the main W-232 communication port of the terminal. The other end of the cable ,is connected to the g-pin W-232 cable connector which is located at the bottom left rear of the Control Cabinet (see Figure 2-3). Alternatively, the Maintenance terminal can be connected to the S-pin W-232 connector located at the bottom of the Peripheral FIM Carrier which is plugged into the Bay Control Card (see Figure 2-4). Notes: 1. If the RS-232 cable for the maintenance terminal uses the standard 25-pin connector, a 25-pinto 9-pin connector adaptor must be used. 2. The RS-232 Maintenance port in the Peripheral Cabinet is deemed to be a service port only. Therefore when a Maintenance Session is completed at the Peripheral Cabinet the cabling that was used for the session must be removed. 3. Two dip switches are provided on the Control Resource Card (located in the Main Control Cabinet) to allow the maintenance person to switch connectivity to either the control or the peripheral node. See Table 6-1 for the switch settings. Table 2-1 Control Resources Card Switch Settings Switch Settings Forced Maintenance to Control Sl s2 s3 s4 Open Open Not Used Not Used Closed Not Used Not Used Clz!!ed Forced Maintenance to Peripheral 351 2-2 Open Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 Setting Up Connection 2.3 -_ to the System (Printer) If required, a printer (or any other ASCII output device) may be connected to the system by means of a standard g-pin or 2%pin RS-232 cable. On the SX-200 DIGITAL one end of the 25-pin cable is connected to the RS-232 port of the printer and the other end is connected to the connector on the bottom left rear of the Control Cabinet (see Figure 2-2). On the SX-200 FD one end of the RS-232 cable is connected to the RS-232 port of the printer and the other end is connected to the g-pin connector (beside the maintenance terminal connector) on the bottom left rear of the Control Cabinet (see Figure 2-4). The printer should initially be set up for the following data characteristics: 9 8 data bits 0 1 start bit l 1 stop bit 0 no parity l 1200 baud. Note: The baud rate of the printer port may be changed via a command from the maintenance terminal. Login Procedures 2.4 With the terminal powered-up, or reset, the system is ready for the user to log in. Pressing the RETURN key twice within 1 second causes the system to automatically determine the terminal’s baud rate, and to query the user for the terminal type as follows: 1 - VT1 00 COMPATIBLE 2-T-T-YTYPE 3-IBMPC SELECT A TERMINAL TYPE : If the terminal is capable of using special graphic characters, enter 1; if not, enter 2. The system will then query the user for the type of action or application intended; i.e., Maintenance or Customer Data Entry (CDE): I- MAINTENANCE 2-CDE 6 -QUIT SELECT AN APPLICATION If the maintenance attendant console, key twice: ( OR QUIT TO START OVER ) : system (or CDE) is being accessed the following message will be returned MAINTENANCE or CDE in use by Console Please Try Again Later 9109-09%351-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 by another terminal, or an after pressing the RETURN Ext 1234. 351 2-3 Maintenance W-232 Terminal This will happen because only one user may access maintenance or CDE at any one time. Assuming that there are no users currently logged in, the system will return the username prompt after an application number (1 or 2) is chosen: ENTER USERNAME : Users of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX system have five levels of system access priority available when logging-in to the maintenance terminal. Each level has its own username, and corresponding command privileges. The usernames, in descending _’ order of priority, are: l INSTALLER l MAINTI l MAINT2 l SUPERVISOR l ATENDANT. \ Respond to the username prompt by entering then query the user for a password: ENTER PASSWORD one of these usernames. The system will : The SX-200 DIGITAL system database contains one default password for all of the usernames. Passwords may be changed as required (see paragraph 4.06). The default password for all users is “1000”. Observe that for security reasons the system does not echo the password back to the terminal. If the password is accepted, the system will prepare to set up the maintenance screen, displaying the following message briefly: Please Wait.. . Logout Procedures 2.5 I To ensure the security of the system, the logout procedure should be used whenever the maintenance terminal is to be left unattended. To log out, the user presses the QUIT softkey to get out of the maintenance application. At this point, the application prompt is returned: Enter “6” to log out or System 351 2-4 will log out when the 10 second logout time out is reached. Revision 0 9109-096451-NA Issue 1 5 Setting Up Figure 2-l . 9109-096451 -NA Issue 1 SX-200 DIGITAL Maintenance Panels Revision 0 351 2-5 FE-232 Maintenance Terminal LOCAL TERMINAL REMOTE - DEDICATED, PUBLIC NEiWORK REMOTELYLOCATED TERMML REMOTE -DIAL-UP RO DPASXVM CENTRALOFRCE GNED TIP 8 FilW FOR ALITMWER REMOTELYLOCATED TBWINbl CONNECT NOTE: THE AUTO-ANSWR MODEMIS PERMANENTLYCONNECTEDTO ONE LOCAl STATIONCIRCW (EkXENSION). Figure 2-2 Maintenance Terminal Connection 351 2-6 Revision 0 9109-096451-NA Issue 1 Setting Up .- TERMINAL II r REMOTE -DEDICATED, PUBLIC NEl-VKFK Rx REMOTELYLOCATED TERMlN4l. TX REMOTE-DIAL-UP TO PABXVlA CENTRALOFFICE CmtrdCebhi NOTE: ., ’ /\ THEAUVJ-ANSWER MODEMIS PERMANEtdTLY COhc NECTEDTO ONE LOCALSTATlONClRCUm (EKKNSIONJ ! Figure 2-3 SX-200 FD MaintenanceTerminal 9109-096-351 -NA Issue 1 MODEM ASSIGNEDTIP 8 RING PAlRFORALJTC4NSWER MODEM. REMOTELYLOCATED TERMINAL Connections for the Control Cabinet Revision 0 351 2-7 W-232 Maintenance Terminal Ii-i \ Peripheral Cabinet CC0189 Figure 2-4 SX-200 FD Maintenance Terminal Connections for the Peripheral Bay 351 2-8 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 3. MAINTENANCE INPUT Maintenance ._ 3.1 COMMAND Terminal Display The maintenance display screen separate areas to the screen: is shown in Figure 3-1. There are five distinct and \ Status Line: This occupies and date, and the system a single line above the bordered alarm status. area, and displays the time Header Line: This occupies the top line within the bordered area. It identifies the running software version, and its creation date. It also describes which MAINTENANCE menu is currently being displayed; one of Main Menu, System, Diagnostics, Traffic Measurement, Logs, or Reports. Applications information Area: This occupies the next 12 lines resulting from command input is displayed in the bordered in this area. Command Line: This occupies the line directly below the Applications are echoed onto this line as they are input by the user. Responses (other than data; e.g., error messages) are also returned here. area. Output Area. Commands to command input Softkey Area: The Softkey Area changes dynamically with the MAINTENANCE mode (System, Diagnostics, Traffic Measurement, Logs, or Reports) and identifies the functions of the maintenance terminal’s IO softkeys. The Softkey Area occupies the bottom two lines of the bordered area: the first line identifies the functions of softkeys 1 through 5; the second line identifies the functions of softkeys 6 through 10. Softkey Presentation 3.2 Command entry on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is designed to make commands easy to use, especially for those using the maintenance terminal for the first time. All commands are entered using softkeys. “Softkeys” are programmable keys, the functions of which may be changed to suit any particular application. The maintenance terminal has IO such keys; they are the number keys (1 through 0) on the terminal keyboard. The “1” key corresponds to softkey 1 in the Softkey Area; all other softkeys are similar. 9109-096451-NA Issue1 Revision 0 351 3-l Maintenance IS-232 SX-200 DIGITAL I- Terminal G1005 ACD-APP I 672P/FO6 28--OCT-1991 1 I l-SYSTEM 2- 6-QVrr 7-LOGS Figure 3-l 3- DIAGNOSTICS 8-ACD-REPORTS Top Level Maintenance Main menu t 49- REPORTS 5-TRAFFIC O- MEAS Terminal Screen Layout Entering of Commands 3.3 Commands are entered by pressing the desired softkeys in sequence, terminating each command sequence with softkey 0, the ENTER softkey. Note that pressing the conventional keyboard RETURN key has the same effect as the ENTER softkey. As softkeys are pressed, they are displayed on the Command Line. After the ENTER softkey is pressed, the command is processed by the maintenance system, and the appropriate response is returned. Pressing the QUIT softkey ends the current operation and returns to the previous level of access. Incorrect Command Entry 3.4 - The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX user interface provides a comprehensive set of error messages to inform the user of incorrect command entry. While the softkey-oriented command input interface minimizes the chance of incorrect command entry, the error messages provide concise descriptions of the input error. A summary of the error messages with descriptions may be found in Appendix B. NorHlT’CP Compatible Terminal Use 3.5 When using a terminal not compatible with VT700 softkeys are presented as described above, but without the graphic bordering. Similarly, commands are entered in exactly the same manner. Instead of a Title line, the current menu is identified by the command input prompt: l 351 3-2 SYS> - System level menu Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 Maintenance l DIAG> - Diagnostics l TRAFF> l LOGS> - Logs level menu - Traffic 9 REP> - Reports Command Input level menu Measurement menu level menu. Device N urn ber Parameters 3.6 \ Some commands require the inclusion of card/circuit location numbers (referred to as physical location identification numbers - bay number, slot number, circuit number, sub-circuit number) or extension numbers as part of the input, The user is prompted for these, one at a time on the Command Line of the screen: enter enter enter enter Bay then press RETURN: Slot then press RETURN: Circuit then press RETURN: Sub-circuit then press RETURN: or enter Ext. Number then press RETURN: When these prompts occur, the softkeys are disabled, and the required numbers must be entered in the conventional manner; using the keyboard number keys and pressing the RETURN key after each entry, Note that if a24git number is entered, the RETURN key is not required after each digit. When all of the required device numbers have been entered, the appropriate softkeys will again be presented. When entering circuit location numbers, the sub-circuit qualifier is often not required, and may be answered by simply pressing the RETURN key. The only devices that require sub-circuit numbers are Digital Line Card circuits and Universal card modules such as DTMF/Receiver Modules and Music-On-Hold/Pager Modules, Wild Card Characters 3.7 Wild card characters may be used to petiorm some command-initiated functions on a range of devices. This is done simply by not specifying circuit location numbers when prompted (pressing only the RETURN key). For example, entering Bay 1, but not specifying the slot, circuit or sub-circuit would translate to “all circuits on all cards in Bay 1”. Note that this does not apply to all commands; refer to the individual command descriptions. 9109-096451-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 RS-232 Maintenance Canceling 3.8 a Command The user may cancel any command at this is done by pressing the CANCEL that were entered and echoed back leaving the Command Line empty and Command 3.9 Terminal any point before entering softkey. The effect of this onto the Command Line ready for new command the ENTER softkey; is that any softkeys are now canceled, input. line Correction The user may correct a current command input line before entering the ENTER \ softkey, without having to cancel and enter the command over again. This is done by pressing the DELETE key. Each time the DELETE key is pressed, the most recently entered softkey or device number is deleted. 351 3-4 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA issue 1 4 ’ SYSTEM LEVEL FUNCTIONS Introduction 4.1. ._ \ The System Level of operation contains commands that are not necessarily maintenance applications, but affect maintenance in some way (e.g., the setting of time, date, and passwords). To access the system level commands, press the SYSTEM softkey. All of the following operations are done while in the System Level. Table 4-1 provides a quick reference for all operations available in system level functions. Set and Show Time 4.2 The system time-of-day may be set and verified from the maintenance terminal although the hour format used is specified during CDE. Note that the user may set the time in either 12-hour or 24-hour format by using the PM softkey as required. To set the system time from the maintenance terminal, press the following softkeys: SET TIME At this point the softkeys time: are disabled, and the user is prompted to press the desired enter Time HH:MM After entering a valid time, the user may implement the new time-of-day by pressing the ENTER softkey, or cancel the new time by pressing the CANCEL softkey. The user may verify the time-of-day by pressing the following softkeys: SHOW TIME ENTER - Set and Show Date 4.3 The system date may be set and verified from the maintenance system date from the maintenance terminal, press the following terminal. softkeys: To set the SET DATE 9109-096-35l-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 4-1 Maintenance W-232 Terminal At this point the softkeys date: are disabled, and the user is prompted to press the desired enter Date DDIMM/W After entering a valid date, the user may implement the new date by pressing ENTER softkey, or cancel the new date by pressing the CANCEL softkey. The user may verify the date by pressing -_ the following the softkeys: SHOW DATE ENTER \ Show Device Status 4.4 The maintenance user may view the DIGITAL PABX maintenance terminal includes communication speed (baud and the number of stop bits. To view press the following softkeys: current data characteristics of the SX-200 and printer ports. Information in the reports rate), the parity sense (odd, even, or none) the status of the maintenance terminal port, SHOW DEVICE MAI NT-PORT ENTER To view the status of the printer port, enter the following softkeys: SHOW DEVICE PRINTER-PORT ENTER Show Firmware Identity s 4.5 The firmware identity report provides the firmware identities of the installed base. The information includes card name, bay number, PROM ID, and debug capability. The PROM ID consists of two bytes. To be compatible with PROMS that do not have an identity, the PROM checksum is displayed as **FD, where FD is the checksum. SHOW IDENTITY ENTER 351 4-2 Revision 0 9109-096351-NA Issue 1 System Level Functions .: Table 4-1 System Level Functions Page 1 of 2 9109-09M51-NA issue 1 Revision 0 351 4-3 FS-232 Maintenance Terminal Table 4-l LEVEL COMMAND PARAMETER 7-RESUME~PFlTR 7-PRNTER-PUD System Level Functions (continued) QUALIFIER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER l-MY/SLDT/CCT SEX-LNUM 6-PRlNrER~POm E-tlFSTART 2-RESET-SYSTEM O-STOP 7-LDGs I Page 2 of 2 Set Password 4.6 It is recommended, for system security, that passwords be changed regularly once the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX has been put into service. Password changes may be made by the affected username, or any other username with a higher priority (see paragraph 2.05). A password may be any string of alphanumeric characters of up to 20 characters in length (any more characters are ignored). Entering new passwords with alphabetic characters will Inhibit login from the Attendant Console, as only numeric characters may be entered from the console. To change the password, SET PASSWORD (select the required ENTER The system then prompts Enter Old Password The user enters password: then prompts Enter New Password softkeys: Username) the user for the old password (see Note): then press RETURN/ENTER: the old password, Enter New Password The system press the following and the system prompts the user for the new then press RETURN/ENTER: the user to verify the new password: to verify then press RETURN/ENTER: After the user verifies the new password, the system implements the password change; the old password is no longer valid. An incorrect entry of the old or new passwords will cause the password changing process to be aborted. Observe that neither the old nor the new passwords are echoed back to the maintenance terminal display. 351 4-4 Revision 0 9109-096351-NA issue 1 I System Level Functions Note: If the Username selected is the one used when logging in, the system will prompt for the old password. When the usernameselected is a lower level than the login user, the system will not require verification of access priority and will prompt for the new password only. Set Maintenance Port Baud Rate 4.7 .-. To change maintenance terminal port baud rate from its value at login time, any one of six different baud rates may be chosen: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 baud. To change the terminal baud rate, press the following softkeys: ; SET SPEED MAI NT-PORT (select the softkey for the desired baud rate) ENTER Note: This operation changes the baud rate of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX maintenance terminal port only. The maintenance terminal baud rate must be changed separately. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for the particular terminal being used. At this point, the softkeys terminal speed: Change terminal are disabled, speed and the system and press RETURN prompts the user to change the when ready Set System Printer Port Baud Rate 4.8 To change system printer port baud rate from its default value of 1200 baud, any one of six different baud rates may be chosen: 300, 600, 1200,2400, 4800 or 9600 baud. To change the printer port baud rate, press the following softkeys: SET SPEED PRINTER-PORT (select the softkey ENTER for desired baud rate) Before pressing the ENTER softkey, the entry may be canceled it by pressing the CANCEL softkey. Note that this operation changes the baud rate of the SX-200 DIGITAL system port only; the baud rate of the printer itself must be changed separately. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for the particular printer being used. Printer Port Assignment 4.9 Printouts Practice 91094r96-351 are produced at the device specified in CDE Form 34, DIRECTED IO. See 9109-096-210-NA, Customer Data Entry, for details. Setting speed for -NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 4-5 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal printer ports other than the system Descriptors. printer port is done in CDE Form 11, Data Circuit Copy Database 4.10 The user a backup already _’ following may make a copy of the system database on another floppy disk for use as source. Only the database is copied; the diskette being written to must have the system software stored on it. To copy the database, press the softkeys: COPY DATABASE ENTER \ Insert new disks, close doors and press CONTINUE At this point the user may press the CONTINUE softkey to write to the new disks, or the CANCEL softkey to abort the process. If the user presses the CONTINUE softkey the saved database will be written to the new disks; the save will take several minutes, depending upon the size of the database. When the process is successfully completed, the following message is returned to the terminal: Copy successful. If upgrading then RESET - else press CANCEL to continue. Note: Pressing CANCEL at this time with the new software installed in the disk drives causes a SYSTEM RESET. R is important to note that these procedures involve a complete reset of the system (needed to initialize the new software). Therefore, this procedure should be done only at night, or during a period of low traffic to ensure minimum effect upon system users. The backup disks and the original disks will now have identical databases. Refer to Practice 9109-0963%--NA, General Maintenance Information, for additional information, Notes: 1. The copy database operation can only be initiated once the system is ready after a reset. An error message appears if a copy database is started before the system is ready. System busy, please try again later. 2. When upgrading from a Generic1 003 release that can store 100 call-rn~ack messages to one that can store 250 messages (Generic 1003 DO5 and later) or downgrading from 250 to 100, all messages will be lost. 351 4-6 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 System Level Functions The Monitor Command Monitor Diagnostics 4.11 --. The Monitor Diagnostics command is a “window” into the maintenance system’s diagnostic controller, the Maintenance Manager. With this, the user may monitor the progress of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX diagnostics as they are being run. See Part 7 of this Practice for further information on diagnostics, To monitor softkeys: the progress of the currently running diagnostic, press the following MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS \ At this point the user may press the ENTER softkey to begin the monitor process, or the CANCEL sotikey to cancel the command. If the user presses the ENTER softkey, diagnostic data will be written on the Application Area of the screen. The user may alter the manner in which the monitor display is updated, through the use of the “STEP”, “SLOW-SCAN” and “FREE-RUN” softkeys. Either the “SLOW-SCAN” or the “FREE-RUN” softkey is displayed; they do not appear concurrently (unless STEP is selected). The “STEP” step-by-step. time softkey softkey enables the user to advance through the diagnostic process This manual control permits user viewing of one diagnostic state each 1 - STEP is pressed. The “SLOWTSCAN” softkey results in the display of each diagnostic test as it is run until a command IS given to stop. The Maintenance Manager decreases the speed at which the monitoring of the diagnostics occurs, and the Maintenance Terminal display is updated as each test is run. The “FREE-RUN” softkey causes the monitor to run the diagnostic tests at full speed. The Maintenance Terminal display is only updated intermittently. This permits the user the ability to progress quickly through the diagnostic tests, until the area of specific interest is encountered. An example Table 4-2). 9109-096451 -NA of the monitor Issue 1 output is shown in Figure 4-I Revision 0 (for definition of terms, see 351 4-7 RS-232 Maintenance -r.zL I Iv-I’Li- Terminal I alamll SX-200 DIGITAL Generic 1003 336P/D64.1 SYST : BAY : CARD: DEV : I-DEVPLID CARDTYPE CARDSTAT DEV TYPE DEV STN TXLKXH SYSTEM PWRUP 4 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 EXTTRNK BCKGR EN PWRUP EN NUM ccrs RX LK-CH = 6-PER1987 BKGRND :2332 : rcvr mod : instld : rcvr : avail : 12-23 YLawS FLT IS0 IYU f-ukuuv System PWRRET FLTRET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 :: on : off CUR MODE MODESTPIT DIAG NAM DIAGSTAT DIAGRSLT :4 USRDIR : backgmd : dg av&l : digl cod l/b : state 2 : pass : 12-23 DIAGNOSTICS l- STEP 2-SLOW 6- 7- SCAN (For definition of terms, see Table 4-2) Figure 4-l The following 3-FREERUN 4- 5- CANCEL 8- 9- o- Note: softkeys 2 and 3 will not appear together Example of MONITOR DIAGNOSTICS Display is a summary of the terms used in the “Monitor Table 4-2 Terms Used In Monitor Term SYST Diagnostics Diagnostics” display: Display Meaning The total systemwide queues: number of devices waiting to be tested on the following BKGRND - Background diagnostic queue SYSTEM - system request diagnostic queue PWR UP - Power-up diaanostic aueue FLT IS0 - second chance test queue PWR RET - Power-up diagnostic retry queue (CP had device) FLT RET - second chance test retry queue (CP had device) USR DIR - User (directed diagnostic) queue The number of devices in this Bay (see “DEV PLID”) waiting to be tested, on the same queues as above. CARD The number of devices on this card (see “DEV PLID”) waiting to be tested, on the same queues as above. DEV Tests pending for the device being monitored. Page 1 of 6 351 4-6 Revision 0 9109-096351-NA Issue 1 System Level Functions Table 4-2 Terms Used In Monitor (continued) Term Diagnostics Display Meaning DEV PLID The physical location identification of the circuit being monitored; number representing Bay, slot, circuit and sub-circuit numbers. CARDTYPE The type of card being monitored; a 4 to &digit one of the following: nil - nil card r ons - ONS line card lsgs trk - CO trunk card universal - Universal card dlc - Digital line card superset- COV line card did trunk - DID trunk card em trunk - E&M trunk card ops - OPS line card main cntl - Main Control card bay cntl - Bay Control card digtl if - Digital Interface card perip ctl - Peripheral Control card ram mod - DRAM module Tl trunk - Digital Trunk card dx mod - DX module rcvr mod - DTMF Receiver module moh mod - Music on hold module cons mod - DLIC (digital line interface circuit) module modem mod - Is-modem_modJype emtrk mod - E&M trunk module CARDSTAT The status of the card being monitored; instld -the unplug -the one of the following: correct card type is installed card is either unplugged, or not installed wrong - an incorrect card type is installed DEV TYPE The type of device being monitored; one of the following: dsp - Digital signal processor ons - ONS line circuit ops - OPS line circuit rcvr - DTMF receiver module moh - Music on hold module Page 2 of 6 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 4-9 W-232 Maintenance Terminal Table 4-2 Terms Used In Monitor (continued) Term Diagnostics Display Meaning lsgs - CO trunk circuit cons - DLIC (digital line interface circuit) module --. jnctr - junctor set - COVdigital \ set or data set dnic - Dinital line circuit did - DID trunk circuit e & m - E&M trunk circuit pcm - Bay DX circuit Tl -Tl circuit poolm - pooled modem dncon - DNIC based console IEV STAT The status of the device being monitored; one of the following: avail - available to CP and maintenance progr - programmed in CDE but not installed unpro - not programmed in CDE suspt - suspect, failed one diagnostic test flty0 -faulty fltvl -faultv with one pass flty2 -faulty with two passes flty3 -faulty with three passes flty4 -faulty with four passes flty5 -faulty with five passes flty6 -faulty with six passes bsout - forced busy, busied-out Wl-TRNK Extension numbertrunk number of the device being monitored BCKGR EN Background PWRUP EN Power-up NUM CCTS Number of circuits programmed SUR MODE The current test mode; one of the following: diagnostics diagnostics enable flag; either “on” or “off’ enable flag; either “on” or “off for the specified card type system - system request diagnostics backgrnd -background power up - power-up pwr rtry - power-up fault isol - diagnostic diagnostics diagnostics diagnostics retry second-chance Page 3 of 6 351 4-10 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 Svstem Level Functions Table 4-2 Terms Used In Monitor (continued) 9109-096451-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 Diagnostics Display RS-232 Maintenance Terminal Table 4-2 Terms Used In Monitor (continued) Term Diagnostics Display Meaning printer port - printer port test dnic o/p I/b - dnic output loopback test -- dnic i/p l/b - dnic input loopback test dnic chksum - dnic set eprom checksum test \ dnic bphone - dnic set bphone test dnic transdu - dnic set transducer test dataset lb - dataset data loopback test earpiece tst - dnic set transducer earpiece test speaker test - dnic set transducer speaker test microph test - dnic set transducer microphone mouthpce tst - dnic set transducer mouthpiece test test DSP memory - digital signal processor memory test DSP tone det - digital signal processor tone detect test DSP tone gen - digital signal processor tone generation test DSP conferen - digital signal processor conference PCM loopback -full test pcm loopback test link shared? - is link shared test rd bc dx+l - read next bay dx rd mc dx+l - read next mcc dx rd bc dx - read bay dx tx fr bc dx - send from bay dx k fr bcdx+l - send from next bay dx tx fr mcdx+l -send from next mcc dx b fr mcdx+l - send from next mcc dx to bay only voice set? - is there a voice set data set? - is there a data set other half? - does other half have a set dig bay test - digital bay test get jnc test - get junctor test 8804 test - analog 8804 test no failures - analog no failures test alt dev - analog alt dev test alt dev lb - analog alt dev loopback test Tl chn LB - Tl channel loopback test Page 5 of 6 351 4-12 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 System Level Functions Table 4-2 Terms Used In Monitor (continued) Diagnostics Display I Page 6 of 6 Monitor Logs The user may monitor the progress of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX maintenance logs as they occur. When the monitor logs process is running, the maintenance logs will be output to a device as well as being recorded on the system floppy disk. The output device may be either the maintenance terminal, or the system printer, as specified in CDE Form 34, Directed IO. If monitoring logs on the system printer port, the user may log out from the maintenance terminal without first stopping the monitor process. However, if the user is monitoring logs on the maintenance terminal, the monitor process must first be stopped before logging out. 9109496451 -NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 4-13 RS-232 Maintenance To monitor Terminal logs, press the following softkeys: MONITOR LOGS MAI NT-PORT ENTER To stop monitoring logs, press the following softkeys: - STOP LOGS ENTER \ For further information on maintenance Practice 9109-096-353-NA, General logs, see Part 6 of this Practice, Maintenance Information. and refer to Monitor SMDR The user may monitor the progress of the SX-200 DIGITAL system SMDR reports as they occur. Unlike the MONITOR LOGS command, monitoring of SMDR may only be done at the maintenance terminal. It is not necessary to select a print device in this case, as monitoring will be output to the maintenance terminal automatically. This does not affect the spontaneous printing of SMDR data to the system printer port. To monitor SMDR reports at the maintenance terminal, press the following softkeys: MONITOR SMDR ENTER Refer to Practice 9109-094-221-NA, information on SMDR. Station Message Detail Recording, for further Monitor DATA-SMDR The user may monitor the progress of the SX-200 DIGITAL system DATA SMDR reports as they occur. Unlike the MONITOR LOGS command, monitoring of DATA-SMDR may only be done at the maintenance terminal. It is not necessary to select a print device in this case, as monitoring will be output to the maintenance terminal automatically. This does not affect the spontaneous printing of DATA-SMDR data to the system printer port. To monitor DATA-SMDR reports at the maintenance terminal, press the following softkeys: MONITOR DATA-SMDR ENTER Refer to Practice 9109496-221 information on DATA-SMDR. 351 4-14 -NA, Station Revision 0 Message Detail Recording, 9109-096351-NA for further Issue 1 System Level Functions Reset System 4.12 The Re-start command allows the maintenance user to reset the system. The purpose of this is to optimize the integrity of the system software. This should be done only during a period of low or no call processing traffic, as the system will be totally inoperative for a period of approximately 1 minute. To initiate a system reset, press the following softkeys: RESTART RESET-SYSTEM ENTER Set Reset Time 4.13 The maintenance user may also program the system to reset in the event of a fault occurrence, at a predetermined time of day. This may be set for a particular day or daily. To program a system reset, press the following keys: SET RESET-TIME DAY/-R ME (press one of the seven “day” softkeys or DAILY) TIME (enter the hour and minutes in 24 hour format - hours must be Ol- 24) ENTER Note: The system will reset only if a fault occurs. Set Immediate Reset 4.14 The maintenance system software user may also program faults. To program the system following softkeys: to reset immediately the system to reset after one or after 5 after a single software fault, press the SET RESET-TIME IMMEDIATELY ENTER To program the system to reset after 51 such anomalies, press the following softkeys: SET RESET-TIME AFTER -- N FLTS ENTER 9109-09M51-NA issue 1 Revision 0 351 4-15 W-232 Maintenance Terminal Show Reset Time 4.15 The maintenance user may obtain a report indicating when, and under what conditions a system reset will occur. To obtain such a report, press the following softkeys: SHOW RESET-TIME ENTER ; Set Alqrm Thresholds 4.16 Alarm thresholds may be programmed by the maintenance user to facilitate the requirements of a particular system. Table 4-3 shows the default values of the alarm thresholds. Refer to Practice 9109-094-353-NA, General Maintenance Information, for further details on the alarms and alarm thresholds. To change the alarm thresholds for lines throughout the entire system, press the following softkeys: SET ALARM-THRESH LINES ENTER SYSTEM (enter the desired MINOR Alarm threshold percentage, or press RETURN to leave unchanged) (enter the desired MAJOR Alarm threshold percentage, or press RETURN to leave unchanged) (enter the desired CRITICAL Alarm threshold, or press RETURN to leave unchanged) ENTER CONFIRM s The procedure for changing alarm thresholds for trunks, DTMF receivers and PCM channels (junctors) is the same as that shown for lines. The only difference is that the TRUNKS, RECEIVERS or PCM-CHANNELS softkeys are used in place of the LINES softkey. Alarm thresholds may be changed on a bay basis as well. The procedure is the same as that shown above, the only difference being that the BAY softkey is used in place of the SYSTEM softkey. DTMF receiver thresholds may be changed only in digital bays. In all cases, the Alarm Threshold 351 4-16 table is shown in the Applications Revision 0 area of the screen, 9109-096451-NA issue 1 System Level Functions Table 4-3 Default Alarm Thresholds ALARM CATEGORY (Peripheral Devices) ALARM THRESHOLDS Minor Major Critical Lines 0% 20% 0 Trunks 0% 20% 0 DIM F Receivers 0% 20% 0 20% 0 PCM Channels 9109-096-351-NA (Junctors) Issue 1 0% Revision 0 351 4-17 RS-232 Maintenance 351 4-18 Terminal Revision 0 9109-096-351 -NA Issue 1 5 ’ REPORTS LEVEL FUNCTIONS Introduction 5.1.- \ The Reports Level designed to display configuration, alarm clearing of device REPORTS softkey. Level. of operation is a conglomeration of static commands that are maintenance information. Types of reports available are: status, circuit status, PCM path status and the displaying and errors. To access the Reports Level commands, press the All of the following operations are possible while in the Reports Show Configuration 5.2 The Configuration report provides the maintenance user with information on the hardware which is currently installed in the system. The user may request a configuration report on a specific card slot, a specific extension number, or the entire system. The information provided includes: the physical number l location(s), in terms of bay number, l the type of card / module installed l the type of card / module programmed slot number, and circuit (module) in a location for that location. Specific Card Slot To obtain a configuration SHOW CONFIG BAY/SLOT/CCT (enterthe required each one) ENTER report on a specific card slot, press the following bay, slot and circuit numbers, pressing the RETURN softkeys: key after Specific Extension To obtain softkeys: a configuration SHOW CONFIG EX--NUM (enter the required ENTER The system 9109-096-351 -NA displays report on a specific extension number, extension press the following then press the RETURN the Bay and Slot numbers Issue 1 number, Revision 0 at which this extension key) is terminated. 351 5-l W-232 Maintenance Terminal Entire System To obtain a configuration SHOW CONFIG ALL ENTER report on the entire system, press the following softkeys: ( or MORE or CANCEL) In allcases, the system outputs the configuration data in the Applications Area of the screen. In cases where the data requires more space than is available on the screen, the user is prompted to request more data via the MORE softkey, or to cancel the output via the CANCEL softkey. Table 5-l Reports Level Functions S-SV~HIJNT~GW HUNT GROUPSSee Note O-h!ORE~KWS S-En-NUM [nmber] ‘l-ALL l-CP_DwA Page 1 of 2 351 5-2 Revision 0 9109-096351-NA Issue 1 Reports Level Functions Table 5-l Note: Reports Level Functions (continued) The following softkeys are presented when a SWID selection GMT-DWA, 74lT_DWA_MEM, @-UP-l-PAGE, g-DOWN-l-PAGE. work area for the selected device. is made; l-CP_DWA. Press CP-DWA 2-CP-DWA-MEM, to view the device Show Alarms Report 5.3 The Alarms Manager is a software SX-ZOO DIGITAL PABX, compares performance is below the specified 9109-096351 -NA Issue 1 program which monitors the performance of the it to a set of default thresholds and, if the system level, causes an alarm to be raised. Revision 0 351 5-3 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal There are four alarm categories: 1. Lines 2. Trunks 3. DTMF Receivers 4. PCM Channels (junctors). There are four alarm levels: 1. Ii0 ALARM 2. MINOR ‘3. MAJOR 4. CRITICAL There are three alarm types: 1. Bay Alarms - these are the alarm levels of the categories each separate bay in the system. 2. System Alarms -these temwide basis. 3. Overall Alarm-this is the overall system alarm level, taking into account all of the bay alarms and system alarms in all categories. It is displayed at all times above the upper right corner of the enclosed area of the maintenance display. are the alarm levels of the categories For more information on alarms, Maintenance Information. Show Alarms refer to Practice specific to on a sys- 9109-096-353-NA, General All The user may obtain an alarm report on the entire system bays of the system) by pressing the following softkeys: (i.e., all device types, in all SHOW ALARMS ALL ENTER ( or MORE or CANCEL) a ’ Enter MORE to step through displays of specific types are not summed together on one display). Show Alarm - Device (different device Type The user may obtain an alarm report on a specific the following softkeys: SHOW ALARMS DEVICE TYPE (LINES or TRUNKS ENTER 351 !5-4 device type alarms device type (category) or RECEIVERS Revision 0 by pressing or PCM-CHANNELS) 9109-096-351-NA Issue1 Reports Level Functions In all cases, the system will output the alarm status data in the Applications Area of the screen, In cases where the data requires more space than is available on the screen, the user is prompted to request more data via the MORE softkey, or to cancel the output via the CANCEL softkey. An example of an alarm report is shown in Figure 5-l. 6-FIB-1987 (For definition of terms, see Table 5-2) Figure 5-I Table 5-2 summarizes Note: Alarm display differs slightly with earlier Generic releases. Example of LINE ALARM Status Display the terms used in the alarm status report: Table 5-2 Terms Used In The Alarm Status Report em; I.e., a specs a total of 13 lines in Bay 1. Catego Page 1 of 2 9109-096451-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 54 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal Table 5-2 Terms Used In The Alarm Status Report (continued) Term Meaning ALARM LEVEL 1The current alarm level in the specified range. MINOR The Minor Alarm threshold - a percentage vices in the specified range. of the total number of de- MAJOR The Major Alarm threshold - a percentage vices in the specified range. of the total number of de- CRITleAL The Critical Alarm threshold -the actual minimum number of devices in the specified range allowed before the system will reset. Page 2 of 2 Show Status Equipment 5.4 Status Report The equipment status report provides the maintenance concerning the current Call Processing and Maintenance range of devices. The information provided includes: l physical location(s), circuit number in terms of bay number, l Software Identification l extension or trunk number l programmed type of circuit l maintenance status of the circuit . software ( SWID ) of device (where status of the circuit l hardware status of the circuit l background l power-up l PCM link and channel diagnostics diagnostics slot number, (where user with information states of any device or circuit number, and sub- applicable) applicable) (where applicable) (where applicable) status status number used (where applicable). An example of an Equipment Status Report is shown in Figure 5-2. The CP-DWA CP-DWA-MEM softkeys only appear if the device has such a work area. 351 5-6 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA and Issue 1 Recotts Level Functions Status - Entire Bay To obtain an equipment status report on an entire bay, press the following softkeys: SHOW STATUS BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required bay number, press the RETURN key, and enter only the RETURN key for the slot, circuit and sub-circuit prompts) ENTER Status - Specific Card Slot To obtain softkeys: an equipment status report on a specific card slot, press the following SHOW STATUS BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required bay and slot numbers, pressing the RETURN key after each one; enter only the RETURN key for the circuit and sub-circuit prompts) ENTER Status - Specific Circuit (or Subcircuit) To obtain an equipment status report on a specific circuit, press the following softkeys: SHOW STATUS BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required bay, slot and circuit numbers, pressing the RETURN key after each one; enter only the RETURN key for the sub-circuit prompt) ENTER Status - Specific Extension To obtain an equipment following softkeys: SHOW STATUS EXT-NUM ENTER 9109-09M51-NA status report (enter the required Issue 1 on a specific extension Revision 0 number, extension number, press then press the RETURN the key) 351 5-7 RS-232 Maintenance 427 Terminal alarm status = NO ALARn lo-FE13-87 SX-200 DIGITAL Generic 1003 336P/D64.1 BB SS CC SC SoFlwm~lD 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 6 1 0 0 0 station 0 station 1 co-trk 0 1105 1106 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 2--o 3 4-o 0 co_trk co_trk cc-trk 1 1 1 3\ 3 5 5 6 1 0 0 1 cc-trk 4 cc-trk 5 console 0 &FEB-1987 EWTK’IYPE 1 2 3 BG PWR OILS ens ls/gs on on off 2 3 4 slgs ls/gs ls/gs 5 6 1511 ls/gs ls/gs cons System Ml-SW SWSTAT HWSTAT off off off avail avail pwr idle idle bsout idle idle down on on on Off off off avail avail avail idle dialg idle maint idle idle on on on off off off avail avail avail idle idle idle ; idle idle idle DEVICE STATUS l- CP-DWA 2-CP-DWA-MEM 3- 4- 6+f-DWA 7-MT-DWA-MEM %UP --1 PAGE 94DOWN --1 PAGE O- 5- CANCEL (For definition of terms, see Table 5-3 ) Figure 5-2 Example of EQUIPMENT STATUS Report Table 5-3 summarizes the terms used in the Equipment Table 54 Terms Used In The Equipment Term Status Report: Status Report Meaning BB The bay in which the device is located ss The card slot in which the device is located cc The circuit number of the device SC The sub-circuit SOFTWARE-ID Type of device installed and its software identification W-K The extension or trunk number of the device (where applicable); a number up to five digits in length. TYPE The circuit type; one of the following: number of the device (where applicable) number ( SWID ) ons - ONS line circuit (digital bay) set - COV line circuit (digital bay) ops - OPS line circuit (digital bay) dnic - DNIC line circuit (digital bay) Page 1 of 4 351 5-3 Revision 0 9109-096351-NA Issue 1 Reports Level Functions Table 53 Terms Used In The Equipment (continued) Term Status Report Meaning rcvr - DTMF Receiver module moh - Music on Hold module lsgs - CO trunk circuit (digital bay) cons - DLIC (digital line interface circuit) module Tl - Tl trunk circuit poolm - pooled modem dncon - DNIC console cutvr - cutover sensor ups - UPS sensor temp -temperature sensor lamp - ONS lamp test jnctr - junctor did - DID trunk e&m - E&M trunk pcm - pcm channel dsp - digital signal processor stn - ONS line circuit (analog bay) sset - COV line circuit (analog bay) cotrk - CO trunk circuit (analog bay) I3G Background diagnostics enabled; either “on” or “off PWR Boot diagnostics enabled: either “on” or “off MTSTAT The current maintenance status; one of the following: avail - available to CP and maintenance progr - programmed in CDE but not installed unprog - installed but not programmed suspt - suspect -failed in CDE diagnostic test once bsout - busied-out by maintenance busietiut by maintenance user -failed diagnostic test at least twice, or flty0 faulty with no passes fltyl faulty with one pass fHy2 faulty with two passes flty3 faulty with three passes flty4 faulty with four passes Page 2 of 4 9109-996351-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 5-9 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal Table 5-3 Terms Used In The Equipment (continued) Term Status Report Meaning flty5 faulty with fiie passes flty6 faulty with six passes SWSTAT - The current call processing the following: (CP) software status; for lines and trunks, one of altms - alternate music acdwt - ACD wait bsout - busied-out bst - receiving busy tone cwait - using Auto Attendant overflow dlgrd - using Auto Attendant kspag - directed or broadcast paging idlks - receiving broadcast page bsgks - receiving directed page onstk - using ONS Voicemail feature COLre - CO line is reserved campd - camped on On dialg - dialing dnd - do not disturb error - receiving reorder tone hfi - handsfree idle hfree - handsfree ringing hfs - handsfree suspended hold - consultation hold idle - idle lockd - locked-out wwg - paging parkd - parked (held by attendant) rngbk - ringback rngng - ringing rs232 - data station is establishing RS-232 protocol stowd - stowed (hard or call hold) suspd - suspended talkg -talking Page 3 of 4 351 5-10 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 Reports Level Functions Table 53 Terms Used In The Equipment (continued) Term Status Report Meaning tkd -trunk dial wdtrx - data station waiting for dtrx response -- wfjct -waiting for call resources (receiver, junctor, channel) wflin -waiting for line The current call processing one of the following: (CP) software status, for receivers and junctors; free - ready for use by CP busy - currently in use by CP down - currently unavailable to CP HWSTAT The current hardware status; one of the following: idle - available to CP busy - busy down - card not present - unavailable to CP dwnld - downloading prompts to a SUPERSFT4”DN maint - maintenance busy - busied-out by maintenance telephone diagnostics Page 4 of 4 9109-096-351 -NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 5-11 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal Show Status - SWID This operation enables a user to show software status by selection of a device type. To obtain an equipment status report on a software identifier, press the following softkeys; SHOW STATUS SWID -- (press one of the softkeys ENTER shown in Table 5-4) Thesystem outputs the equipment status data in the Applications Area of the screen. Where the data requires more space than is available on the screen, the user is prompted to request more datavia the &UP -- 1 PAGE or g-DOWN-1 -PAGE softkeys, or to cancel the output via the CANCEL softkey. Table 54 Software ldentlfication ( SWID ) Types Device Types Softkey SW-STATION single line port - analog or digital SW-CO-TRUNK CO trunk - 6 cct LS/GS or 4-cct CO SW-RECEIVER receivers show the 32 pseudo receivers and the “real” receivers on the receiver module(s) (Generic 1001 has 10 pseudo receivers) SW-DID-TRUNK DID trunks - 2 cct analog or 6 cct digital SW-CONSOLE console SW-TIE-TRUNK TIE trunk - 2 cct E&M TIE analog, 2 cct loop/tie analog, or E&M module SW-LINE SUPERSET line work areas SW-DISA-TRUNK DISA trunk - 4 cct analog or 6 cct LS/GS SW-DTMF-GEN DTMF generator SW-CAP call announce SW-SET SUPERSET3” I SUPERSET4Q SlJPERSET3”DN / SUPERSET4”DN SUPERSm401” I SUPERSET410” SUPERSET 430” port SW-TRUNK-GRP trunk group SW-DATA-STN dataset - cartridge, standalone, SW-HUNT-GRP hunt group 351 5-12 Revision 0 or, /SUPERSET420” / or rackmount 9109-09rX851-NA Issue 1 Reoorts Level Functions Device 5.5 Status Reports Device Status Reports are provided following for devices that are programmed into the PABX. Devices may be specified by extension/trunk number, Bay/Slot/Circuit/Subcircuit (plid), or software identification (SWID). The call processing device work area (CP-DWA) gives an English format of the call processing device work area. To view the CP-DWA for the device identified by the cursor on the Device Status Report, press Softkey 1: CP-DWA The user may then view the CP-DWA’s softkeys. Note: of other active devices, by pressing displayed Definitions and softkey functions that are displayed on the screen are explained (as necessary) in Practice91 09-096-35O-NA, Troubleshooting. The information is primarily for Mite1 engineering personnel. Monitor Tl Trunk Activity 5.6 The user may monitor the activity on the ST bus to and from the Tl Trunk module. This monitoring may only be done at the Maintenance Terminal; it is not necessary to select a print device, as the monitoring will be output to the Maintenance Terminal automatically. Four buses, DSTi, DSTo, CSTi, and CSTo may be monitored. Through this feature, is able to: l Send a yellow l Put the Tl Trunk l Manually l Send data values the user may also modify the data on selected alarm to the receiving loopback select the synchronization source 0 Change the transmit 0 Change the A B signaling l Put selected trunks The user end card into analog down the selected trunks. mode for the Tl link trunk and receive gains bits into digital loopback. To monitor the Tl Trunk activity from the Maintenance softkeys when in MAINTENANCE mode: Terminal, press the following REPORTS SHOW STATUS BAY/SLOT/CIRCUIT (enter PLID.....) LINK-STATUS 9109496451 -NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 5-13 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal The display shown Note: 427 in Figure 5-3 appears. The LINK-STATUS softkey will only appear if the affected circuit is a Tl circuit. alarm status = NO ALARI’ lO-FEB-87 SX-200 DIGITAL Generic 1003 336P/D64.1 DSTi 82 00 00 00 DSTo FF’92 ’ 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 6-FEB-1987 00 00 0000 00 00 00 00 REPORTS SYNC 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 0000000000000000 XSl ~3 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000000000000000 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 B7 FC CSTo TRKTx 01 82 ‘bui’hBTxPD 1 1 100 RxRxARxBRxPDLPBKDACSRCEMODE 92 1 1 10 NO 7FF 2400 0 00 1 BPV g+& CsTi YES SLIP AUTO %? SKHZ BSZS No TxYLW No ccs MCW MST 1 OlO!kKl 1OOOOOOO Press UPDATE for update of screen data l- TRUNK-NUM 2- YELLOW 3- 4- LOOPBACK 5-CANCEL 7-MANUAL 8- 9-RETURN O-MORE %UPDAI‘E Figure 54 Monitor Tl Trunk Activity Screen Display Table 5-5 lists the commands monitor or test the Tl link. To monitor KEYS that may be entered the Tl link, press the following TRUNK-NUM Enter the trunk number ENTER from the Maintenance Terminal to softkeys: of the trunk to be monitored The data used on the selected trunk buses, DSTi, DSTo, CSTi, and CSTo. is highlighted in the information from the four To test (send test data): TRUNK-NUM Enter the trunk number ENTER MORE-KEYS Enter the test data - hex 00 to FF (Note: if nothing is entered, test data 00 is sent) ENTER 351 5-14 Revision 0 if 00 is entered, no test data is sent; 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 Reports Level Functions To manually change the clock source while monitoring: MANUAL Enter the bay number of new source and press RETURN * Enter the slot number of new source and press RETURN * ENTER * These must be the locations of a functioning Digital Line Cord. To return to the original clock source: AUTO ENTER To start a loopback test: LOOPBACK INTERNAL/EXTERNAL/CLEAR ENTER Notes: 1, INTERNAL LOOPBACK the receive channels. 2. EXTERNAL LOOPBACK the transmit channels. (See notes) causes the DX to route transmit data signals back into causes the DX to route receive data signals back out to 3. CLEAR clears the loopback test that is currently in progress. 4. If the Tl link is not in synchronization, or is transmitting a yellow alarm, or if the TX or RX pads are not set to zero, the data received is altered. Bit 0 changes due to the transmission of AB bits. Table 5-S Softkey 9109--09%351-NA Issue 1 Definitions Revision 0 351 5-15 W-232 Maintenance Terminal Table 5-5 Softkey Definitions (continued) Softkey Definition RxPad Increments Tx/AB-00 Transmits A = 0 , B = 0 Tx/AB-01 .- receive attenuation control bits. TransmitsA=O,B=l Tx/AB-10 TransmitsA= 1 , B=O Tx/AB,l 1 TransmitsA=l ,B=l LOOPBACK INTERNAL Analog loopback. Toggles the loopback relay for the card. Loops the signals back through the hardware in the card. LOOPBACK EXTERNAL External loopback causes the DX to route receive data signals back out to the transmit channels. External loopback function sends PABX “A” “B” signaling bits, not incoming ‘A” “B” bits. LOOPBACK-D Digital loopback. Toggles the loopback bit for the selected channel. The DSl channel is looped internally to replace the corresponding receive channel. UPDATE This softkey updates the values on the screen. Page2 The information the terminal. in Table 5-6 is displayed Table 5-6 Display Definition for information Of Uaintenance 1 of 2 only; it cannot be altered from Terminal Display Meanlnq DSTI Data ST bus Input (32 channels DSTo Data ST bus Output (32 channels 24 active). cm Control ST bus Input (32 channels 25 active). CSTo Control ST bus Output (32 channels SYNC This indicates if there is svnchronization SLIP This bit changes state once a slip condition occurs between the RECEIVED DSl data and the ST-BUS data. BPV This bit changes state after 256 bipolar violations, other than the B8ZS code, within a sample period of 200 ms. XSl This EXTERNAL SCAN POINT bit contains the data sampled at the XSl pin once per frame. Page 1 of 2 351 5-16 24 active). 25 active). to the RECEIVED Revision 0 DSl link. 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 Reports Level Functions Table 5-6 Definition Of Maintenance (continued) Terminal Display AUTO -the Tl process is adjusting the system clock to lock on to the incoming 1.544 Mhz signal. The link the process looks at for an external source is based on the order of the links in the network synchronization form. FREERUN -the system clock is not being adjusted to lock on to the incoming 1.544 Mhz signal. The reason for this is there is nothing programmed in the network sync form or the links all exceed the error threshold. I I I I I no -there are none Ext - External loopback has been activated for the card Int - Internal loopback has been activated for this card. dig - digital loopback has been activated for this channel (is not seen if the card is in : Page 2 of 2 9109-096-351 -NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 5-17 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal Data Fault Analysis Procedures 5.7 Generic information and procedures for analyzing problems is provided here; refer to it for troubleshooting specific data device troubleshooting charts, Table S-7 Posslble Causes Of Data-related POSSIBLE ERROR \ . CALL STATE CRCERR DATASET ANY CABLIN G DX datasets problems and data-related before referring to Errors CAUSE DLC DTE / ‘DCE No Yes Yes Yes (DNWHDLC) (EC, HDLC) RESETS ANY YeS Yes Yes Yes Yes LINK FAILURES CALL SETUP OR TALKING Yes Yes YeS Yes No LINK CALL Yes Yes Yes YeS YeS A CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) error will be logged whenever the HDLC chip reports a CRC ERROR, FIFO OVERFLOW, or FRAME ABORT They are recorded on both the B and the D channel. The probable cause is a hit on the transmission line; the protocol usually recovers gracefully. If the errors become so bad ,that the protocol cannot continue to run, then a link reset will occur. If the link resets, the link reset may not be successful - if the dataset is on the B-channel it will return to the D-channel with a disconnect reason of link abort. CRC Error: s CRC errors happen on one end of a call if the dataset at the other end is unplugged. The connected dataset records a large number of CRC errors, followed by a link reset, and then a link abort. A link reset occurs when the dataset sends a message, does not receive a response, retransmits the message more times, and still cannot get a response. At this point, the dataset will log a link reset, and then try to re-establish communication by sending SABMs (Set Asynchronous Balance Mode) to the far end. Link resets can occur on both B and D channels. Llnk Resets: 351 5-18 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 Reports Level Functions Link Aborts: A link abort occurs when the dataset, after sending a SABM 8 times, cannot get avalid response from the far end. Thus, a link abort often follows a link reset (specifically when the link reset happened because of many transmission line errors, set unplugged, or circuit switch path broken). _’ .-. Link aborts can also occur just after the dataset is sent to the B-channel. The dataset will send up to 64 SABMs in an attempt to achieve communication; if it does not receive a valid response, a link abort will occur, and the dataset will return to the D channel. There will NOT be an associated link reset (because the link was never in a “normal” state). Link Failures: link failure: l l There are two events which occur on the B-channel that can cause a If the dataset is connected on the B-channel, in “normal” mode (NOT go-ahead mode), and the dataset receives an idle “1 “s pattern rather than flags for more than 0.5 second, the dataset will disconnect from the B-channel, the B-to-D reason being link failure. If the dataset is connected on the B-channel in go-ahead mode, and the dataset does NOT receive a go-ahead after transmitting flags, it will return to the D-channel, and report a link failure. Overflows: Overflows occur when the device attached to the dataset sends data to the dataset faster than the dataset can send it off to the far end. Two scenarios are: l Dataset A is at a high baud rate, dataset B is at a lower baud rate, and flow control is NOT enabled on the datasets. In this case, overflows will occur in dataset A. This should NWER happen; software should not allow two datasets at different baud rates to communicate unless flow control is enabled. 9 Dataset A and dataset B both have flow control enabled. The device attached to dataset A is transmitting a large amount of information. The device attached to dataset B flow-controls dataset B. Dataset B stores up as much data from A as it can, then tells A to stop transmitting. Dataset Asends a flow control character to the attached device, but the device ignores it and continues to transmit. Overflows occur. This can happen as a result of a defective attached device, an attached device not having flow control enabled, or the dataset using different flow control characters or kind of flow control (e.g., CTS) than the device is expecting. I/F Framlng Errors: Framing errors occur as a result of the device being at a different baud rate than the dataset. A common cause is the user changing his terminal baud rate during a session (or while idle, if the dataset is not programmed for autobaud operation). One possible scenario is: l A user establishes a call at 1200 baud. l The user decides l The user then sets his terminal that is too slow. baud rate to 9600. Framing errors occur and the user cannot communicate, because the dataset 1200 baud. The only recovery is to disconnect the call and start over. 910949C351 -NA Issue 1 Revision 0 is still at 351 5-19 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal NOSYNC Errors: NOSYNC errors occur when the dataset has lost sync with the PABX; this usually occurs when a dataset has been powered off or a data connection has been broken. Power Up Self Test Causing the Dataset to be Busied Out: If a dataset fails its power up self test, it will be busied out. Maintenance logs will have two log entries: the busied out log and the power up self test failure reason. If a new dataset is installed that passes the power up self test, the device will be returned to service, without an installer using a maintenance command. ; Error l?ep&ts Show Errors 5.8 The Error Reports provide the maintenance user with an up-to-date record of all the transmission checksum errors which have occurred since the system was initialized, or since they were last cleared (see Clearing Error). To obtain an error report, press the following softkeys: SHOW ERRORS DEVICE-TYPE At this point softkeys are presented for device selection: ss3-ss4 DISK DIGITAL-SETS HDLC CONSOLE DATASETS Tl-TRUNK ENTER s The system outputs the error data in the Applications Area of the screen. In cases where the data requires more space than is available on the screen, the user is prompted to request more data via the MORE softkey, or to cancel the output via the CANCEL softkey. Examples of error reports are provided following. 351 5-20 Revision 0 9109-096351-NA Issue 1 Reports Level Functions SUPERSET 4:27 3 and SUPERSET alarm status = NO ALARM lo-F'EB-87 PLID 1 1 -_ 1 _’ Telephone Errors 8 8 8 EXT.# 50 30 20 ERRORS 2 4 1861 1811 1851 1 \ SHOW ERRORS SS3 SS4 lh 2- 3- 4- 5- CANCEL 7- Q- Q- n- Figure 54 Example of SUPERSET 3 or SUPERSET Error Report Explanation of error types: COV Errors: The error counter is incremented (SUPERSET 3 or SUPERSET 4 telephone). telephone is unplugged, the system on the tip/ring line or a bad telephone Investigate 9109-09M51-NA whenever a COV line circuit is reset In most cases, this occurs when a is reset, or a COV line card is plugged in. Noise or COV circuit card can increment this error count. if the error rate is greater than 25 errors per hour. Issue 1 Revision 0 351 5-21 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal Disk Errors 4:27 lo-FEB-87 alarm status = NO ALARM EQUIP ERRS POSITION ERRS Disk Drive A 0 1 2 1 Disk Fve 4 5 >255 3 DISK _’ B DATA ERRS WRITEiERRS SHOW ERRORS DISK l6- 2- 3- 4- 5- CANCEL 7- s- 9- o- Figure 5-5 Example of DISK Error Statistics Report Explanation of error types: Equipment Errors: Whenever the system initiates a recalibrate sequence on a disk drive, it expects the disk drive heads to move to the first track on the disk. If this does not happen, it increments the equipment error counter for the disk, and retries the If after two retries the heads are not over the first track, the disk drive recalibration. is considered bad, the operation is aborted, and a disk failure log is generated. I Position Errors: Whenever the system tries to perform a read or write operation, it looks for the correct sector by scanning each sector header on the current cylinder for the correct cylinder#, head#, and sector#. If it does not find the cylinder # that it is looking for, the position error counter is incremented. The disks are then re-calibrated and the whole operation is tried again. If the disks are recalibrated 5 times and the operation ,still fails, the disk drives are considered bad, the operation is aborted and a log is generated. DISK failed at 0 0 3 0 NIL type test Alarm code = xx Data Errors: Whenever the system performs a read operation, it calculates the CRC of the data being read. If the resulting CRC calculation does not correspond to the CRC byte read from the disk, the data error counter for the disk is incremented, and the read is retried. If after four retries the operation has not completed successfully, the disks are recalibrated and the operation is restarted for another five tries. If the disks are re-calibrated 5 times and the operation still fails, the disk drives are considered bad, the operation is aborted and a disk failed log is generated. 351 5-22 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue1 Reoorts Level Functions Write Errors: Whenever the system performs a write operation, it reads the sector back and compares the data with the data written. If this comparison does not match, the write error counter for this drive is incremented, and the write operation is retried. If after four retries the comparison has not been completed successfully, the disk drives are considered bad, and the operation is terminated and a disk failure log is generated. -m Number of Errors: With respect to an acceptable number of errors, any value over zero shows that the system had trouble performing an operation and gives an indication to the maintenance person that either the drives or the disks may be degrading. Several disk errors are not a sign that the system is faulty, although any time a ‘disk failed’ log is generated, immediate action is required. When disk errors occur, first change the disks. If the errors do not go away, change the drives. If changing the drives still does not get rid of the errors, the last recourse is to change the MCC. Note: Changing the driie or the MCC may not be necessary since the software which controls the disk drives is written to handle occasional soft errors. Digital Set Errors 427 lo-NOV-91 PLID alarm status = NO ALARM EXT.# DEVICE NO-SYNC RESETS 1806 1807 1807 1801 ss3dn ss401 25 00 25 1831 1803 ss410 1891 1809 1841 1804 ss420 ss430 1861 1871 1871 1811 SS4dIl RETRANS CHECKSUM 3 22 00 00 00 00 3 0 0 50 1 0 0 25 50 0 3 0 0 0 0 SHOW ERRORS DIGITAL-SETS ,l6- 2- 3- 4 5- CANCEL 7- 8- 9- o- Figure 5-6 9109-096G351 -NA Issue 1 Example of Digital Set Error Report Revision 0 351 5-23 FG-232 Maintenance Explanation Terminal of error types: No Sync: A synchronization signal is sent between digital circuit and set. The digital circuit monitors the physical line for the presence of this signal. Synchronization is lost when a set is unplugged or when a line is very noisy (external interference or bad connection). A loss of synchronization increments the ‘no sync’ counter; hpwever maintenance reports are updated only after every 25 occurrences. In normal operation, .’ A set will get about reset. ,lnvestigate this counter will not exceed about 50 for the operating life of a set. 25 occurrences each time the set is unplugged or the system is a set getting 50 or more ‘no syncs’ a day: - check noise - swap - swap tip/ring connection (remove sources, loop length) set circuit card bridge taps, proximity to Link Reset: A link reset will occur when communications between a digital set and circuit is torn down. In most cases, this is because a set was unplugged or the system was reset but can also occur due to a protocol violation. In most cases, a set will get only one link reset during its life. In a 24 hour period, 20 or more link resets may affect set operation and the problem should be investigated. Retransmits: The retransmit counter increments each time a digital circuit has to resend just sent information to a set. If the set has not responded to having received the just sent information, the circuit resends. This problem - a can be caused by: a noisy line bad set bad circuit software error (protocol violation) In most cases, a set will have no retransmits in a 24 hour period; however this counter can be influenced by the amount of traffic to the set. The more messages sent to a set, the greater the possibility that a message may not make it to that set and will have ‘to be retransmitted. Investigate more than 50 retransmits in a 24 hour period, although the user will probably not observe any problem at this rate. 351 5-24 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue1 Reports Level Functions HDLC Link Errors HDLC LINK TX-ERR =-ERR OVRFLW CRCERR ABORTS ODDPKIJ RETRAF :a:: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 to MC Bay 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 bay 5 to MC MC to Bay 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0; 0 0 0 It%2 Bay MC to SHOW ERRORS HDLC 27- _6- 49- 38- 5- CANCEL o- I Figure 57 Example of HDLC Link Error Statistics Report Explanation of HDLC Link Error types: HDLC Link errors Notes: 9109-09~514A are explained following: 1. Dependent upon message traffic on a main-bay link but should be low, less than1 0. 2. Dependent hours. upon message traffic on a main-bay link but should be low, generally 3. Possible faulty hardware Issue 1 - MCC, BCC, DIC, PCM cables; Revision 0 refer to 9109-09W50-NA, less than 30 per 24 Troubleshooting. 351 5-25 RS-232 MaintenanceTerminal Console Errors 4~27 lo-FEE&87 PLID alarm status = NO ALARM EXT.# 2311 2311 DEVICE NO-SYNC RESETS RETRANS CONSOLE 4 4 0 CHEcmuM .- SHOW ERRORS CONSOLE l6- 27- 3s- 5- CANCEL 49- o- Figure 5-8 Example of Console Error Report Explanation of error types: No Sync: A synchronization signal is sent between digital circuit and console. The digital circuit monitors the physical line for the presence of this signal. Synchronization is lost when a console is unplugged or when a line is very noisy (external interference or bad connection). A loss of synchronization increments the ‘no sync’ counter; however maintenance reports are updated only after 25 occurrences. In normal operation, this counter will not exceed about 50 for the operating life of a console. A console will get about 25 occurrences each time the console is unplugged or the system is reset. Investigate a console getting 50 or more ‘no syncs’ a day. - check tip/ring connection (remove bridge taps, proximity to noise sources, loop length) - swap console - swap circuit card Link Reset: A link reset will occur when communications between a digital console and circuit is torn down. In most cases, this is because a console was unplugged or the system was reset but can also occur due to a protocol violation. In most cases, a console will get only one link reset during its life. In a 24 hour period, 20 or more link resets may affect console operation; investigate the problem. 351 5-26 Revision0 9109-096451-NA Issue 1 Reports Level Functions Retransmits: The retransmit counter increments each time a digital circuit has to resend just sent information to a console. If the console has not responded to having received the just sent information, the circuit resends. This problem In most counter sent to console 24 hour by: a noisy line bad console bad circuit software error (protocol violation) cases, a console will have no retransmits in a 24 hour period; however this can be influenced by the amount of traffic to the console. The more messages a console, the greater the possibility that a message may not make it to that and will have to be retransmitted. Investigate more than 50 retransmits in a period, although the user will probably not observe any problem at this rate. Checksum: DATASET PLID can be caused Bad checksum in CONSOLE ROM will report error to maintenance. Errors EXT. FAILRS ABORTS 3310 3301 0 0 3320 3302 1 0 CRCERR RESETS PARITY OVRFLW NOSYNC 5 3 0 4 0 2 1 0 0 0 SHOW ERRORS DATASET l6- 38- 27- Figure 5-9 49- 5- CANCEL o- Example of DATASET Error Statistics Report Explanation of error types: FAILRS: The dataset sends flags requesting communication but does not receive acknowledgement from the Digital Line Card; the HDLC on the DLC is time-shared with up to 12 datasets, and sends “go-aheads” to each dataset when it is ready to communicate; if it is busy with one dataset for too long, other datasets will not receive “go-ahead”. 9109-096-351 -NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 5-27 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal This error can also apply to situations achieve link reset after 64 tries. Check the dataset which and the Digital involve link layer errors such as failing to Line Card. The link is up but the command - response exchange (Set Asynchronous Balance Mode - Unnumbered Acknowledgement) does not succeed. The SABM-UA could happen between the dataset and the PABX when they are programmed as DTRX, or between the two datasets. ABORTS: This error can also apply to situations expected. Check the dataset such as received idle HDLC link when flags were and the Digital Line Card. CRCERR: number of retransmissions synchronization is lost on the link; this value is set to zero when DNIC The line is noisy or of poor quality. RESETS: number of times the link initiated link reset; this value is set to zerowhen DNIC synchronization is lost. This number is also incremented by linkaborts and link failures. Check the dataset and the Digital Line Card. PARITY: number of bytes received from the attached device value is set to zero when DNIC synchronization is lost Check that the DTE device and the dataset OVRFLW: because DATASET locally attached Series: of overflows of PLL buffer (Async-mode) overflows on receive information from the (Async-mode) overflows on receive from the information device DATASET Error values are set to zero when DNIC synchronization NOSYNC: This occurs when dataset and the system The most common 351 5-28 number can be caused device DATASET 1100 Series: locally attached (Sync mode) this have the same parity settings. number of buffer overflows in the following cases; overflows the dataset cannot flow control the DTE device. DATASET 2100 Series: Note: with parity errors; there has been loss of synchronization cause is a disconnected Revision 0 is lost. between the dataset. 9109-0984351-NA Issue 1 Reports Level Functions Tl Trunk Errors 4:27 lo-FXB-87 alarm status = NO ALARM PLID HOUR SLrPS BIPOLAR 1600 0 i ii z - 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 :.3 4 5 i 0 0 Fl 0 0 i 0 0 G z z z 1600 lz : ii) ii 1600 10 11 : ii ii STmS clear STATE ’ active SHOW ERRORS Tl-TRUNK l- 27- 6- Figure 5-10 49- 38- 5- CANCEL o- Example of Tl Trunk Error Statistics Report Explanation of error types: HOUR - data is accumulated hourly SLIPS - number of data slips due to internal and external timing clocks FRAME - number of framing errors BIPOLAR - number of bipolar violations STATUS - appears only for the current hour, and shows current link status. Valid values are: clear-when there is no alarm condition on the link active - not currently used yellow - receiving a yellow alarm red - link is in a red alarm condition shrt term -this link is the current sync source and is using the short term formula to adjust the system clock long term -this link is the current sync source and is using the long term formula to adjust the system clock STATE - appears for the current hour only, and shows the current link state. Valid values are: no sync - the status of the link is red because it is not in sync no power -the status of the link is red because it has a power fault active -there is no alarm on the link inactive -there is an alarm condition on the link 9109496451 -NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 5-29 W-232 Maintenance Terminal Clear Error Counter For Specific Devices 5.9 To clear the Error Counter _’ ._ for a specific device, press the following softkeys: CLEAR ERRORS DNICEJ-YPE The following softkeys are presented for device selection: ss3-ss4 DISK DIGITAL-SETS HDLC CONSOLE DATASETS Tl-TRUNK ENTER \ Note: Tl Trunk errors are tracked on a 24 hour basis. Every hour that the Tl Trunk operates it generates a new report. The error count is a series of 24 on&our reports, that is updated every hour: the oldest entry is deleted. If CDE Form 42, Tl Link Descriptors, is cleared. is changed or a new card is plugged in, the counter For Specific Circuits To clear the Error Counter for a specific circuit, press the following softkeys: CLEAR ERRORS BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required bay, slot, circuit and sub-circuit numbers, pressing the RETURN key after each one) ENTER For Specific Extensions To clear the counter for a specific CLEAR ERRORS EXT-NUM (enter the required ENTER 351 530 extension extension, number, Revision 0 press the following softkeys: then press the RETURN 9109-096-351+lA key) Issue 1 Reports Level Functions For All Devices To clear all error counters, press the following softkeys: ..z CLEAR ERRORS ALL ENTER CONFIRM ENTER The user may verify the error counter clearing via the ‘SHOW ERRORS” command, ; which operates in the Reports Level. Show Channel 5.10 Map The Channel Map Report provides the maintenance user with the current status of the system’s PCM links. The user may choose between either PHYSICAL or LOGICAL channels. Physical links will show what bay the link is connected to if it is used for voice connection. To obtain a channel map report, press the following softkeys: SHOW CHANNEL-MAP PHYSICAL LINK-NUMBER or BAY NUMBER (enter the desired LINK or BAY number, followed by the RETURN key) ENTER or SHOW CHANNEL-MAP LOGICAL CHANNEL-NUM (enter the desired CHANNEL number, followed by the RETURN key or simply press the RETURN key to view all busy channels) ENTER The system outputs the Channel Map Report in the Applications area of the screen. In cases where the data requires more space than is available on the screen, the user is prompted to request more data via the MORE softkey, or to cancel output via the CANCEL softkey. An example of a Physical Channel Map Report is shown in Figure 5-11. Table 5-8 gives a summary of the terms used in the Channel Map Report. 9109-096451-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 5-31 W-232 427 Maintenance Terminal lo-FEB-87 alarm status = NO AJARM Channel # Rx Status 0 os-msg free free free free free os-msg free free free free free free free free free i 6 8 10 12 ‘14 TX Status Charnel # 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Rx Status TX Status free free free free free free free free free free free free free free free free 1 Link number 2 is connected to bay 3 SHOW CHANNEL,-MAP PHYSICAL LINK-NUMBER 02 l- 2- 3- 4- 5- CANCEL 6- 7- 8- 9- 0- MORE Figure 5-11 Example of PHYSICAL CHANNEL MAP Report Table 5-8 Terms Used In The Channel Meaning Term I channel I- Channel number Rx - Receive channel TX -Transmit free I mt-busy - being tested by maintenance b syout - busied out by maintenance I- music on hold I - ringback tone a - channel connected to tone a tone b - channel connected to tone b tone c - channel connected to tone c os-msg 351 5-32 - currentlv unavailable to CP ringbk faulty I - ready for use by CP - currently in use by CP mist I channel cp-buw down music Map Report - channel connected to mist tone -failed test, unavailable to CP - channel used by operating system Revision 0 9109-096351-NA Issue 1 6 ‘ MAINTENANCE LOG FUNCTIONS Introduction 6.l \ The purpose of the Maintenance Log is to record all maintenance-related information, including anything which affects the functioning or the capacity of the system. Typical maintenance log entries would be circuits failing diagnostics, cards being unplugged, and alarm level changes. The user may read, delete and print log entries, as well as set a variety of printing options. For the READ, PRINT and DELETE commands, the following qualifiers apply: ALL - causes all log entries to be read, printed or deleted. NEWEST - causes the most recent user-defined number of log entries to be read, printed, or deleted. OLDEST - causes the oldest user-defined number of log entries to be read, printed, or deleted. For further information on the Maintenance Log, refer to Practice 9109-096-353-NA, Practice 9109-096-350-NA, General Maintenance Information, and to Troubleshooting. To access the logs level commands, press the LOGS softkey. All of the following operations are possible while in the Logs Level. Table 5-l offers a quick reference for log operations. Reading log Entries Note: Logs cannot be read and printed concurrently. All Log Entries To read all of the maintenance log entries, press the following softkeys: READ ALL ENTER Newest Log Entries To read the newest user-defined number of maintenance log entries, press the following softkeys: READ NEWEST (enter the number of log entries to be read) ENTER 9109-096435l-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 6-I W-232 Maintenance Oldest Terminal Log Entries To read the oldest user-defined softkeys: READ OLDEST (enter the number ENTER number of log entries of maintenance log entries, press the following to be read) In all cases, the system will output the requested number of log entries into the Applications Area of the screen. In cases where the log data requires more space than Is available on the screen, the user is prompted to request more log datavia the MORE softkey, or to cancel the output via the CANCEL softkey. An example of reading logs is shown in Figure 6-l. Table 6-l LEVEL COMMAND 7-LOGS l-SET PARAMETER / 4-AUTOPRINT Logs Level Functions QUALIFIER 1 l-ON 2-OFF P-READ l-NEWEST [number] 2-OLDEST [number] QUALIFIER I QUALIFIER QUALIFIER I I I I I I I I I 4-ALL 1 g-TRACE-INFO 3-PRINT 1 l-NEWEST [number] 24LDEST [number] 4-ALL 4-DELETE l-NEWEST [number] 2-OLDEST [number] 84ONFIRM 4-ALL g-TRACE-INFO 6-QUIT g-STOP Note: 351 6-2 I I TRACE-INFO is a diagnostic tool used in the event of a System Reset with provides information to help correct the fault. Contact Mite1 Field Service. Revision 0 Generic 1003 9109-096-351-NA and Generic 1004; Issue 1 it Maintenance 427 lo-FEB-87 SX-200 Log Functions alarm status = MINOR DIGITAL Generic 1003 336P/D64.1 1987-JAN-2115:33:01 6-PER1987 WY ONS card failed at 02 010100 ext = 2101 OFF hook too long Alarm Code = 101 -- 1987-JAN-2111:11:19 OV card failed at 03 03 0100 ext = 3301 SUPERSET unplugged Alarm Code = 105 1987-JAN-2109:23:2 Tot alarm went from No Alarm to MINOR ’ Alanu level change due to Bay 03 trunks 1987-JAN-2109:23:25 trunk card failed at 03 09 0100 trk = 01 Can’t seize trunk Alarm Code = 111 READLOGSALL L- 2- 3- 4- 5- CANCEL 6- 7- 8- 9- 0- MORE Figure 6-l Deleting Example of LOGS READ Display log Entries All Log Entries 6.2 To delete all of the maintenance log entries, press the following softkeys: DELETE ALL ENTER CONFIRM ENTER Newest Log Entries To delete the newest following softkeys: DELETE NEWEST (enter the number ENTER 9109-096-351 -NA Issue 1 user-defined of log entries number of maintenance log entries, press the to be deleted) Revision 0 351 6-3 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal Oldest Log Entries To delete the oldest following softkeys: user-defined DELETE OLDEST (enter the number ENTER number of log entries of maintenance log entries, press the to be deleted) In allcases, the system will echo the command into the Applications Area of the screen. The user may verify that the particular log entries have been deleted, using the READ ,command. Printing logs on System Printer Note: Logs cannot be read and printed concurrently. All Log Entries 6.3 To print all of the maintenance log entries onto the printer, Customer Data Entry, press the following softkeys: which is defined during PRINT ALL ENTER Newest Log Entries To print the newest following softkeys: user-defined PRINT NEWEST (enter the number ENTER number of log entries of maintenance log entries, press the to be printed) Oldest Log Entries To print the oldest user-defined softkeys: PRINT OLDEST (enter the number ENTER In all cases, the system 351 6-4 number of maintenance of log entries to be printed) ethos the command Revision 0 log entries, into the Applications press the following Area of the screen. 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 Maintenance Loa Functions Setting Print Device Log entries are produced Practice 9109-096-210-NA, at the device Customer named in CDE Form 34, DIRECTED Data Entry, for details. IO. See Setting Automatic Printing .-. Maintenance log entries may be printed without the need of a maintenance user to explicitly request printing using the “PRINT” command. This is accomplished by automatic printing. Requesting automatic printing eliminates the danger of losing maintenance log information due to overflow. When the maintenance log contains 75% new (unprinted) log entries, the new entries are automatically printed. Once this initial 75 % is printed, logs are printed frequently thereafter (usually four at a time). When the logs are deleted, the system accumulates 75 % of entries, then prints them out followed by groups of four, until the logs are deleted again. The maintenance log contains a maximum of 96 log entries, To initiate the automatic printing of logs, press the following softkeys: SET AUTOPRINT ON ENTER The system ethos To stop automatic the command printing into the Applications of logs, press the following Area of the screen. softkeys: STOP ENTER 9109-096451-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 6-5 RS-232 Maintenance 351 6-6 Terminal Revision 0 9109-096451-NA Issue 1 7. DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS Introduction 7.-l- \ The Diagnostics commands that SX-200 DIGITAL allow the user equipment out diagnostics are Level of operation is a conglomeration of active testing-related are designed to assist the maintenance user in ensuring that the PABX is operating at peak performance. The available commands to enable, schedule and initiate diagnostic testing, and to take of service, and return it to service. All operations available in shown in Table 7-l. Four types of diagnostics are available to the maintenance user: PROM-Based Diagnostics - are run only on system initialization and are not usercontrolled. These are the only tests that verify the Main Control and Peripheral Control cards. l l Power-up Diagnostics fault is disabled. - if enabled, run once, starting 9 Background Diagnostics - if enabled, have completed, and run continuously. Directed Diagnostics - tests initiated nance terminal, console, or butt set. l Power-up, devices: background, and directed by the maintenance diagnostics ONS line circuits l CO trunk circuits l DTMF receiver circuits (in digital bays only) l Analog junctor circuits (in analog interface (in digital initialization. start running after power-up Default is enabled. l * Console at system are capable De- diagnostics user from the mainteof testing the following bays only) bays only) 0 PCM channels Tl trunk circuits l l E&M trunks l COV line circuits l DID trunks l OPS line circuits l DNIC line circuits . Printer port and printer PLID (or system l printer) Digital Signal Processor 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 7-l RS-232 Maintenance Terminal Note: The DEVICETYPE softkey must be used to test enable/disable diagnostics forthe analog junctors and PCM channels. Referto Practice 9109-096-353-NA, General Maintenance Information, for further information. The user may check the status of the Power-up and Background SHOW STATUS command for a specified group of devices). diagnostics via the The Maintenance Manager 7.2 The Maintenance Manager is a software program which manages the running of \ diagnostics on the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. Its duties include the scheduling of tests, the invoking of tests, the logging of errors, and the removal of faulty devices from service. The Maintenance Manager tests devices one at a time from one of six prioritized queues. The priority scheme of the queues is as follows, in ascending order: l Background diagnostic queue l Power-up diagnostic queue . Power-up diagnostic retry queue l Diagnostic second-chance queue l Diagnostic second-chance retry queue l User (directed diagnostic) queue. For further information on diagnostics, refer to Practice 9109-095-353-NA, General Maintenance Information. To access the diagnostic level commands, press the DIAGNOSTICS softkey. All of the operations described in the following paragraphs are possible while in the Diagnostics Level. Enable Power-up Diagnostics For an Entire Bay -7.3 The user may enable following softkeys: MORE-KEYS ENABLE-DIAG POWER-UP BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required ENTER power-up diagnostics bay number for an entire then press the RETURN bay by pressing the key four times) For an Entire Peripheral Card The user may enable power-up the following softkeys: 351 7-2 diagnostics Revision 0 for an entire peripheral 9109-096-351 card by pressing -NA Issue 1 Diagnostic Functions MORE-KEYS ENABLE-DIAG POWER-UP BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required (enter the required ENTER bay; press the RETURN key) card slot number; press the RETURN keythree times) For a Specific Circuit The user may enable following softkeys: power-up diagnostics MORE-KEYS ENABLE-DIAG POWER-UP BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required bay, slot, circuit, RETURN key after each) ENTER Table 7-l ZLR_FEATURE for a specific and sub-circuit circuit by pressing numbers, pressing the the Diagnostics Level Functions l-FORWARD l-Et4Y/SLOT,CCT Z-DO_N_DISTURB l-R4Y/SLOT/Xr S-SLL 1-BAyIsLOTiCCf s-Exr_NUM ?-ExT_NUM BACK I 9109-09M51 Page 1 of 3 -NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 7-3 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal Table 7-1 LEVEL COMMAND Diagnostics Level Functions (continued) SUBCOMMAN D PARAMETE R QUALIFIER QUALIFIER QUALIFIER I 2&%-r-NUM 14-ALL l-MY/SDT,CCT .._ 2-lxr~NuM I6-oLJrr 1 %STOP-TEST 1 EfRlNlERS Ll-MOE_KEyS \ 2-ENABl..I_OlAG l-BACKGROUND l-E%AY/SLOT/CCT MMCE TYPE l-ONS I 1 2-LS/GS-TRUNK I 44JNCTOR 7-CONSOLE &DSP Q-EM O-h!ORE_KCIS l-COV 2-LlNK/CMNNEL S-DID MPS GDNIC Q-TimTRUNK I I O-MORE-KEYS I 2-m-r-NuM S-DlAG%O&S I- C-MORE_KEYS ~~~____ 2-ENASLE4AG I2-PJwER-lJP I--l-SAY/SLOT/CC3 I 2-DMCEJYPE I 1 I I I I-ONS 2-LS/GS-TRUNK I I 2-RECEiVERS I 44JNCTOR ‘I-CONSOLE aDSP S-EM C-MORE-KEYS l-COV 2-LlNK&tlANNEL S-DID 44x3 EDNIC 1 S-Tl-TRUNK I 1 1-&4Y/SLOT,CCT I 2-DMCE_TrPE WNWCHANML 2-EKr-NUM .%JUNCTOR I s-ourr I 7-DiSAW-DlAG I-MCKGROUND l-SAY!SLOTIcGT I Page 2 of 3 351 7-4 Revision 0 9109-0964351-NA Issue 1 1 Diagnostic Functions Table 7-l LEVEL COMMAND Diagnostics Level Functions (continued) SUBCOMMAN D PARAMETE R QUALIFIER QUALIFIER MMCEJ-YF’E I- QUALIFIER l-ONS I-LWGWRUNK 1 S-RECEIVERS 7-CONSoLE MSP S-EM c40RE~Km I I l-COV I Z-LlNKWANNEL I S-DID 4-OPS S-DNIC 7-DlSASLE4XAG 2-POwEPrUP l-E%AYjSLOTFXT 1 MEVlCE_PIPE I I l-MS I 2-LS/GS-TRUNK I I I I2-RECElVERS I I I I I 4-JUNCTOR I I ‘I-CONSOLE &DSP S-EM O-MORE_KEYS 1-COV 2-LlNKJJ4ANNEL MID 4-OPS B-ONE I I I I Ml-TRUNK 1 O-MORE_KEYS 2-ExT-wM HE-TO-WC l-MYiSLOT/CCT 2-DEVlCE-TYPE WNKJXANNEL 2-EXf-NUM MJNCTOR S-DSC-TRUNK l-MY,‘SLOT,CCT Page 3 of 3 For a Specific Extension To enable softkeys: power-up diagnostics for a specific extension number, press the following MORE-KEYS ENABLE-DIAG 9109-096-351 -NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 7-5 I RS-232 Maintenance Terminal POWER-UP EX-NUM (enter the required ENTER For a Specific Device To enable power-up extension diagnostics key) for a specific device type, press the following shown Softkey softkeys: in Table 7-2) Table 7-2 I then press the RETURN Type MORE-KEYS ENABLE-DIAG POWER-UP DEVICE TYPE (press one of the softkeys ENTER \ number, Device Types Meaning I I 1 ONS 1 ONS line card I 1 LS/GS TRUNK 1 LS/GS trunk card I I RECEIVERS DTMF receiver module JUNCTOR Junctors CONSOLE Attendant console DSP Digital signal processor EM E&M trunk module cov COV line card DID DID trunk card OPS OPS line card DNIC Digital line card LINK/CHANNEL PCM Channels Tl-TRUNK Tl trunk card In all cases, the system echoes particular power-up diagnostics 351 7-6 I the command into the Applications have been enabled via the SHOW Revision 0 Area of the screen. STATUS command. The 9109-096-351 user may -NA verify that the Issue 1 Diagnostic Functions Disable Power-up Diagnostics For an Entire Bay To disable power-up diagnostics MORE-KEYS DISABLE-DIAG POWER-UP BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required ENTER .-. for an entire bay, press the following bay number, then press the RETURN softkeys: key four times) For an Entire Peripheral Card To disable power-up diagnostics MORE-KEYS DISABLE-DIAG POWER-UP BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required (enter the required ENTER for an entire peripheral card, press the following bay; press the RETURN key) card slot number; press the RETURN keys: key three times) For a Specific Circuit To disable power-up diagnostics for a specific MORE-KEYS DISABLE-DIAG POWER-UP BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required bay, slot, circuit RETURN key after each) ENTER circuit, press the following and sub-circuit numbers, softkeys: pressing the For a Specific Extension To disable softkeys: power-up diagnostics MORE-KEYS DISABLE-DIAG POWER-UP EXT-NUM (enter the required ENTER 9109-09M51-NA Issue 1 for a specific extension number, extension number, press the following then press the RETURN Revision 0 key) 351 7-7 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal For a Specific Device Type To disable soltkeys: power-up diagnostics MORE-KEYS DISABLE-DIAG POWER-UP DEVICE TYPE - (press one of the softkeys ENTER for a specific shown device type, press the following in Table 7-2) !n all’cases, the system will echo the command into the Applications Area of the screen. The user may verify that the particular power-up diagnostics have been disabled via the SHOW STATUS command. Enable Background Diagnostics For an Entire Bay 7.4 To enable background diagnostics MORE-KEYS ENABLE-DIAG BACKGROUND BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required ENTER for an entire bay, press the following bay number; then press the RETURN softkeys: key four times) For an Entire Peripheral Card To enable keys: background diagnostics for an entire peripheral card, press the following MORE-KEYS ENABLE-DIAG BACKGROUND BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required bay; press the RETURN key; enter the required number; press the RETURN key three times) ENTER card slot For a Specific Circuit To enable background diagnostics for a specific circuit, press the following softkeys: MORE-KEYS ENABLE-DIAG BACKGROUND BAY/SLOT/CCT 351 7-8 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 Diagnostic Functions (enter the required bay, slot, circuit RETURN key after each) ENTER and sub-circuit numbers, pressing the For a Specific Extension To enable softkeys: .- \ background diagnostics MORE-KEYS ENABLE-DIAG BACKGROUND EX--NUM (enter the required ENTER for a specific extension extension number, number, press the following then press the RETURN key) For a Specific Device Type To enable softkeys: background diagnostics MORE-KEYS ENABLE-DIAG BACKGROUND DEVICE TYPE (press one of the softkeys ENTER for a specific shown device type, press the following in Table 7-2) In all cases, the system will echo the command into the Applications Area of the screen. The user may verify that the particular background diagnostics have been enabled via the SHOW STATUS command. Disable Bat kground Diagnostics For an Entire Bay 7.5 To disable background MORE-KEYS DISABLE-DIAG BACKGROUND BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required ENTER diagnostics for an entire bay, press the following bay number, then press the RETURN softkeys: key four times) For an Entire Peripheral Card To disable keys: 9109-096-351-NA background Issue 1 diagnostics for an entire peripheral Revision 0 card, press the following 351 7-9 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal MORE-KEYS DISABLE-DIAG BACKGROUND BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required bay; press the RETURN key; enter the required number; press the RETURN key three times) ENTER card slot For a Specific Circuit To disable background diagnostics for a specific MORE-KEYS DISABLE-DIAG BACKGROUND BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required bay, slot, circuit RETURN key after each) ENTER circuit, press the following and sub-circuit numbers, softkeys: pressing the For a Specific Extension To disable softkeys: background diagnostics MORE-KEYS DISABLE-DIAG BACKGROUND EXT-NUM (enter the required ENTER for a specific extension extension number, number, press the following then press the RETURN key) For a Specific Device Type To disable softkeys: - background diagnostics MORE-KEYS DISABLE-DIAG BACKGROUND DEVICE TYPE (press one of the softkeys ENTER for a specific shown device type, press the following in Table 7-2 ) In all cases, the system will echo the command into the Applications Area of the screen. The user may verify that the particular background diagnostics have been disabled via the SHOW STATUS command. 351 7-10 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA issue 1 Diagnostic Functions Directed Testing 7.6 .-. Directed diagnostics consist of exactly the same tests as the power-up and background diagnostics, but are initiated by the user from the maintenance terminal, and have priority over power-up and background diagnostics. Directed tests also differ from power-up and background tests in that they return immediate responses to the user via the maintenance terminal. On a Specific Circuit To run a directed test on a specific circuit, press the following TEST BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required bay, slot, circuit RETURN key after each) ENTER and sub-circuit softkeys: numbers, pressing the On a Specific Extension To run a directed test on a specific TEST EX--NUM (enter the required ENTER extension extension number, number, press the following then press the RETURN softkeys: key) On a Specific Device Type To run a directed test on a specific device type, press the following TEST DEVICE TYPE (see note) (press one of the softkeys shown ENTER softkeys: in Table 7-2) Note: Testing can be performed on system printer. Selection of DEVICE TYPE will be followed by entering one of the softkeys in Table 7-2 and two printer related softkeys; PRINTER PLID and PRINTER PORT. In all cases, the system will output the test results in the Applications To stop a directed test, press the following Area of the screen, softkey: STOP-TEST ENTER Range Testing It is possible for the maintenance user to test a range of devices characters. To test an entire bay, press the following softkeys: 9109-096-351 -NA Issue 1 Revision 0 using wild card 351 7-11 R8-232 Maintenance Terminal TEST BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required bay number) (answer the slot, circuit and sub-circuit ENTER prompts by pressing the RETURN key) To test an entire card, specify the bay and the slot, but answer the circuit and sub-circuit prompts by pressing only the RETURN key. .- Busy Out Equipment 7.7 ; Peripheral circuits may be placed in a state such that they are accessible only through maintenance. While in this state, the device will appear busy when requested by Call Processing. The following circuit types can be busied out in this manner: l ONS lines l LS/GS Trunks l CO trunks l E&M Trunks 9 DTMF l receivers DID Trunks l Analog junctors l 8 Station l SUPERSET Lines l PCM Channels Lines Specific Circuits To busy out a specific circuit, press the following MORE-KEYS BUSY-OUT BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required bay, slot, circuit RETURN key after each) ENTER softkeys: and sub-circuit numbers, pressing the Specific Extensions To busy out a specific extension number, press the following softkeys: MORE-KEYS BUSY-OUT EXT-NUM 351 7-12 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 Diagnostic Functions (enter the required ENTER extension number, then press the RETURN key) Specific Link/Channels To busy out a specific Link/Channel, MORE-KEYS BUSY-OUT DEVICE-TYPE LINK/CHANNEL (enter the required after each) ENTER Note: press the following link number On System Reset as replacement and channel number softkeys: pressing the RETURN key of a card, any circuit that had been busied out, will remain busied out. The exception is DTMF receiver modules, which reboots or powers up to the idle state. Specific Junctors To busy out a specific following softkeys: analog junctor, MORE-KEYS BUSY-OUT DEVICE-TYPE JUNCTOR (enter the required BAY-NUM (enter the required ENTER junctor found number, bay number, in 458 and 480-+01-t systems, then press the RETURN then press the RETURN press the key) key) In either case, the system will echo the command into the Applications Area of the screen, The user may verify that the particular circuit or extension number has been busied-ut via the SHOW STATUS command. In the event that a circuit is in use by call processing when the maintenance user tries to busy it out, the circuit will not be busied-out until the extension goes on-hook. This, however, does not apply to junctors or PCM channels. The user must wait for these to become idle before they are busiedout. Return Busy Equipment to Service Specific Circuits 7.8 To return a specific circuit to service, press the following softkeys: MORE-KEYS RET-TO-S/C 9109-09C351-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 7-13 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required bay, slot, circuit RETURN key after each) ENTER and sub-circuit numbers, pressing the Specific Extensions To return a specific \ extension .- MORE KEYS RET-Ta-SVC EX--NUM (enter the required ENTER number extension to service, number, press the following softkeys: then press the RETURN key) ‘ Specific Link/Channels To return a specific Link/Channel MORE-KEYS RET-TO-WC DEVICE-TYPE LINK/CHANNEL (enter the required after each) ENTER to service, link number press the following and channel number softkeys: pressing the RETURN key Specific Junctors To return a specific junctor MORE-KEYS RET-TO-WC DEVICE-TYPE JUNCTOR (enter the required BAY-NUM (enter the required ENTER to service, junctor press the following number, bay number, softkeys: then press the RETURN then press the RETURN key) key) Forced Trunk Disconnect To force release a locked-up MORE-KEYS DISC-TRUNK BAY/SLOT/CCT (enter the required after each) ENTER 351 7-14 trunk, press the following bay, slot, and circuit numbers, Revision 0 softkeys: pressing the RETURN 9109~6-351-NA key Issue 1 Diagnostic Functions Clear Extension Features - From Remote Terminal The Maintenance Terminal can be used to clear CALL FORWARDING, DO NOT DISTURB, and CALL BACK features that are active on an extension (previously this could only be done from an Attendant console). This allows all features on a card in a PABX to be deprogrammed from a remote maintenance terminal without requiring a local Attendant console. Only SUPERSETtelephones and industry standard sets may be cleared from the maintenance terminal. .- The extension to be cleared may be identified by either extension number of Bay/Slot/Circuit; standard error messages are returned if invalid values are entered. If the identification or extension number entered is not that of an extension, the following message is displayed: Device type must be a SUPERSET telephone or industry standard telephone set. Enter this application PRESS The screen from the maintenance SOFTKEY displays diagnostic menu, as follows: 2 CLR-FEATURE 4 softkey prompts: I-FORWARD 2-DO-N-DISTURB 3-CALL-BACK 4-ALL Select the feature The screen displays (or ALL features) 2 softkey to be cleared, by pressing the softkey. prompts: 1-BAY/SLOT/CCT 3-EXT-NUM Enter bay, slot, circuit, and sub-circuit numbers standard prompt format) or enter the extension When all information has been entered, prompt and all the entered parameters. Press O-ENTER Note: Softkey 5-CANCEL 9109-99C-j351-NA issue 1 (sub-circuit is not used, but is part of number, when prompted. the screen to clear the specified telephone displays the O-ENTER softkey set. is also available with these prompts. Revision 0 351 7-15 IS-232 Maintenance _’ 351 7-16 Terminal -. Revision 0 9109-096451-NA issue 1 8 ’ OTHER MAINTENANCE TERMINAL APPLICATIONS Customer Data Entry (CDE) .8.1 The W-232 Maintenance Terminal is also the main device used for the programming of customer data. At the start of the login procedure, the. user is queried to start either a Maintenance session or a CDE session (see paragraph 2.4 ). Only a VT100 compatible terminal may be used for CDE. For further information on CDE, refer to Practice 9109-096-210-NA, Customer Data Entry. Traffic Measurement 8.2 Traffic Measurement is a separate level in Maintenance. All of the information in Part 3 (Command Input) of this Practice applies to Traffic Measurement as well. Refer to Practice 9109-096-450-NA, Traffic Measurement, for command descriptions and further information. Table 8-1 contains the operations available in Traffic Measurement Functions. Table 8-l Traffic Measurement 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 Functions RS-232 Maintenance 351 8-2 Terminal Revision 0 9109-096-3514lA Issue 1 Appendix A. MAINTENANCE TERMINAL ERROR MESSAGES .- TableATerminal lists status and error messages during a maintenance session: Table A-l Maintenance which Terminal may appear at the Maintenance Error Messages entered. annot use extension nu Card not installed. errors is no Page 1 of 6 9109-09M51-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 A-l RS-232 Maintenance Terminal Table A-l Maintenance Termhal (continued) Message Data value 0% outside of valid range Error Messages Meaning Enter new value within range of 0 - 255. (o-255). Database Corrupt in: templates. The verification of the database section may be corrupted. has failed. The template Database Corrupt in: static section. \ The verification of the database may be corrupted. has failed. The static section Database Corrupt in: b-tree. The verification of the database has failed. The b-tree section (ARS or Account codes) may be corrupted. Note: Ifmore than one section is corrupted, one of these may be displayed instead: - Database Database Database Database Corrupt Corrupt Corrupt Corrupt in: in: in: in: templates and static section. templates and b-tree. static section and b-tree. templates, static section, and b-tree. Device is currently in use. Wait until device is idle (device is locked up). Device not programmed. An attempt was made to RET-TO-SVC or BUSY-OUT device by specifying a PLID which is not programmed. Disk busy-Please The user has tried to READ, PRINT, or DELETE logs and the disk is busy. try again later. a Disks are not responding. System may be too busy to handle the COPY DATABASE sequence -try when the system is less busy. May be communication problem with diskette - check the connections to the disk drive. Verify that there is a diskette in the drive. Repeated failure indicates a problem - refer to Practice 9109-696-35O-NA, Troubleshooting. Disks corrupt. Insert backups and RESET. The disks in the system are corrupt. The original disks should be reinserted. Disk IO failure - database may be corrupted. Disk access has failed, perhaps corrupting the database. One of the following is likely: - disk drive door is open -there is no diskette installed -the diskette has a write protect sticker - a disk read or write failed. Disk is write-protected - data was not written to disk. Disks inserted are write protected. Remove copy protect tab, or insert new diskettes as required. Disks mismatched. Reinsert disks properly and press CANCEL. After the ‘Insert new disks, close doors and press CONTINUE’ prompt the disks are checked to make sure that they are a compatible pair. If for some reason they are not compatible, this message is displayed. Verify new diskettes have been inserted. Verify disk drive doors are closed. Verify new diskettes are in appropriate disk drives. Disks mismatched. Insert original disks and press CANCEL. After the ‘Disks mismatched. Reinsert disks properly and press CANCEL’ prompt the disks are not compatible, the original disks must be reinserted and the copy operation is aborted. This error message may also appear after a successful copy, if the original disks are inserted incorrectly. Page 2 of 6 351 A-2 Revision 0 9109-996-3514A Issue 1 Appendix A - Maintenance Table A-l Maintenance Terminal (continued) Message Terminal Error Messages Error Messages Meaning Error initializing new disks. Insert original disks and press CANCEL. Verii new diskettes have system software. New diskettes may be corrupted. Insert original diskettes as required. Error reading load tag. Press CANCEL to continue. The load tag was not successfully read. The original disks should be reinserted and the copy is aborted. Error updating disk database. Insert original disks and press CANCEL. At the start of the is updated before stage. If not, new system software, Error writing load tags. Press CANCEL to continue. The load tags were not successfully copied. The copy operation is aborted. The original disks should be reinserted. Error writing system type. Press CANCEL to continue. The system type was not successfully copied. The copy operation is aborted. The original disks should be inserted. Illegal operation. Copying to different configuration. Insert originals. Disks of a different configuration have been inserted following “Insert new disks, close doors and press CONTINUE”. Insert original disks and press CANCEL; copy operation is then aborted. Illegal operation. Copying to different stream. Insert originals. Disks of a different stream have been inserted following “Insert new disks, close doors and press CONTINUE”. Insert original disks and press CANCEL; copy operation is then aborted. Invalid data station specified. The user has tried to SHOW DEVICE DATASTN-PLID specifies a PLID which is not a data station. Invalid day for the month specified. Date not set. Valid month entries are dependent upon the Roman calendar. For example, an attempt may have been made to set the date to the 30th of February. Invalid parameter “XX”. TIME (or DATE) not set. Time may be set to 00:0&23:59, date may be set to 0131 for days, 01-l 2 formonths, 00-99 for years. Valid month entries are dependent upon the Roman calendar. Invalid qualifier. The qualifier specified is invalid for this device type. Logical channel specified is not in use. The user has tried to SHOW CHANNEL-MAP LOGICAL CHANNEL NUM ###which is idle. This function shows only those channels which are in use. MONITOR LOGS already in use A second attempt was made to monitor logs. Monitor logs was already in progress. Must specify at least a bay number in Bay/Slot/C&. When entering bay number for junctor diagnostics, value must be used. Must specify at least a link number. The user has tried to BUSY-CUT or RET-TOSVC a pcm channel and uses a wild card for the link parameter. NO CONSOLE programmed. Program a console first. No Data Sets programmed. Program a data set first. No Digital Sets programmed. Program a digital telephone COPY DATABASE sequence, the database it is read. This may indicate failure of this diskette may be corrupted, or may not have or database is corrupted. and a specific set first. Page 3 of 6 9109-096351-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 A-3 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal Table A-l Maintenance Terminal (continued) Message No errors found within specified range. .’ .-. Error Messages Meaning The user attempted to SHOW ERRORS and the devices specified (SS3-SS4, DISK, DIGITAL-SETS, HDLC, DATASETS, CONSOLE, Tl-TRUNK) have no errors. Note: This function always gives the Tl Trunk error form, even though there are no errors. No loopbacks are presently set. \ An analog loopback test has been started after clear loopbacks (internal or external). No programmed devices within specified range. There are no programmed devices within the specified range. Use SHOW CONFIG command to check range. No disks in drives, please insert original and press CANCEL. If there are no disks in the drives or the door was left open. No wild cards allowed for this function. The user has specified wild cards in a PLID parameter trying to BUSY-OUTor RET-TOSVC. Not original disks. Please insert originals and press CANCEL. The original disks should be reinserted. This message will be printed as long as the original disks are not reinserted. Please wait, accessing disk... This is a status message only. The system needs time to access the disk. Original disks reinserted or backups left in. This is a status message only printed after a successful copy sequence. The original disks were reinserted or disks of the same load version as the originals were inserted at the appropriate time. PRINTER PLID is invalid as a printer de&e. The user has tried to SUSPEND-PRTR or RESUME-PRTR. The specified PLID is not a printer PLID. Read failure, resetting system. During COPY operation, the disks are read to determine their identity. This may indicate failure of this stage. Reading database, please wait... This is a status message only. Database is being read from disk to system RAM as part of the COPY DATABASE command. Reading disks, please wait... This is a status message only. The disks are being read to determine their identity and compatibility. i.e., 64.8. Serious Disk Shortage. Database file on disk has only 4K of disk space left. Do a copy DB to recover free space. Stop of print pending or no print currently in progress. There was no PRINT process running when STOP PRINT was entered. System busy, please try again later. Copy database is inhibited for several minutes following a system reset; maximum time is approximately eight minutes. The access code “XXX” does not exist. The specified extension number does not exist. Use SHOW STATUS command to check the status code. The Bay/Slot/Circuit - XXXXXX used is inappropriate. The user attempted to clear errors through Bay/Slot/Circuit an inappropriate device. . ’ when of Page 4 of 6 351 A-4 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 Appendix A - Maintenance Table A-l Maintenance Terminal (continued) Message Terminal Error Messages Error Messages Meaning The extension number “XXXX” is not The user has specified an extension number when he tries to CLEAR ERRORS. Errors are only compiled for these types of a SUPERSETtelephone, CONSOLE, devices. or DAIASET. The hour value “XX” is out of range. Start time not set. Used in traffic measurement START TIME command. for invalid values in the SET The link “X” cannot be tested. The user has tried to test or enable diagnostics on a pcm link which is not used as a telephony link. Links 0, 1, 14 and 15 are not available for testing. The minor threshold may not be greater than the major threshold. Assign a higher value to the major threshold or else assign a lower threshold to the minor threshold - SET Alarm threshold. The minute value “xx” is not a multiple of ten. Start time not set. Used in ACD Report traffic measurement for an invalid minute value in the SET START TIME command. The minute value “XX” is out of range. Start time not set. Used in traffic measurement START TIME command. The value “X” is invalid for BAY-NUM. The user has tried to enable or disable diagnostics and the bay specified is not an analog bay. The value “XX” is invalid for JUNCTOR. The user has tried to enable or disable diagnostics on junctors and has specified a junctor outside the valid range (O-31). The value “XX” is outside the valid range for SUBCIRCUIT. The specified sub-circuit number is invalid for this particular device type. Use SHOW STATUS command to verify card type and number of programmed circuits. There are no logs currently on the disk. There are no logs on the diskette to READ or PRINT. This function is not available for this device. The feature requested is not available for this device. This function is not available for this console. The feature requested is not available for this console. This function is not available for this device. The user has tried to BUSY-OUT console. This function is not available on the console. The user has tried to perform a command which is not available when logged into maintenance from the console. TIMEOUT PERIOD EXPIRED. Press Return to login. After being prompted for the username, the user has 10 seconds to begin entering characters. Traffic measurement already in progress. STOP first. In traffic measurement, the following parameters can not be changed while traffic measurement is collecting data: PERIOD, DURATION, and START TIME. Trunk value “XX” outside of valid trunk range (l-24). The user requested to monitor the LINK STATUS of a trunk which was outside the valid range of 24circuits for the Tl-Trunk card. for invalid values in the SET or RET-TO-SVC on junctors the Page 5 of 6 9109-09~51-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 351 A-!5 RS-232 Maintenance Terminal Table A-l Maintenance Terminal (continued) Message Error Messages Meaning Unable to print. Maintenance print already in progress. There can be only one PRINT or READ occurring at one time. If required, enter STOP PRINT command to initiate a second PRINT. Unable to read the disk. Occurs in conjunction with the READ PRINT and ALARMS commands, Verify there is a diskette alarm present. Ensure disk drive door is closed. Unable io update disk. When doing operation with the logs, i.e., READ, PRINT or even the ALARMS command from the console, the diskette is first updated. This message indicates failure of this stage. Check for presence of a diskette in the drive. Ensure the disk drive door is closed. Universal Card. Module “X” in Bay Slot Module is out of range (14). The user has chosen a Universal Card but the module number is out of range (i.e., not between 1 and 4). Universal Card. Sub-circuit “X” does not exist on module. The user has chosen a Universal Card; the module number is valid and exists but the sub-circuit number specified does not. Unrecognized qualifier %s. All others ignored. The qualifier in ‘Test” command Upgrade disks in drives, resetting system. This is a status message only printed after a successful sequence. Upgrade disks were left in the disk drives. Value cannot be greater than 100. Assign a new value that is less than1 00 for alarm threshold. Value must be less than 256. Whenever there is a prompt for “Number of Entries”, up to three digits may be entered but only values up to 255 are acceptable. Verifying database, please wait... This is a status message only. The database in RAM and on disk is compared. If any differences are found the database is said to be corrupt and the copy operation is aborted. Warning. Invalid qualifier found. %s will be ignored. The qualifier specified during set time will be ignored. Warning. Sub-circuit field ignored for Sub-circuit this card. information is unrecognized. copy parameter was entered, but was not required. For only. Writing database, please wait... This is a status message only. Database is being written from system RAM to disk as part of the COPY DATABASE command. Wrong bay type for specified device. An incompatible bay number is given for the device selected (i.e., Bay 0 is selected for receivers). Page 6 of 6 351 A-6 Revision 0 9109-096-351-NA Issue 1 SX-ZOO@ DIGITAL PABX ene Maintenance Information m,@-TmdemarkotMltelcolpalatlon. 0 copytlgM1992, Yltel corparatlon. All rlghls resewed. Printed In Canada MITEL 8 General Maintenance information NOTICE The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mite1 Corporation (MITELB). The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mite1 and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes. VU&Y” is a trademark /BAR8 PC is a trademark ii of Digital Equipment Corp. of International Business Machines Corp. Revision 0 9109-096353-NA Issue 1 Table of Contents 1. GENERAL lntroduction................................................................ Reasonforissue..........................................................~. 2. MAINTENANCE 353 l-l 353 l-l TOOLS TheMaintenanceTerminal ,..,.,...,....,.,...,....,.,..~.,..,,,,............. 353 Control Cabinet Maintenance Panels , , , . . . , . . . . . , , . . . , . . . , , , , , . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Peripheral Cabinet Maintenance Panel . , . , . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . , . . . . , , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . , 353 SystemMaintenanceLog .,..,.,..,,,..,,....,,....,,.,,.,...,,,,....,....,... 353 2-l 2-l 24 24 3. ALARMS General ................................................................... Alarm Levels.. ............................................................. AlarmCategories ........................................................... AlarmTypes ............................................................... ........................................................... AlarmThresholds AlarmTotals ............................................................... 4. THE MAINTENANCE e 3-l 3-l 3-l 3-2 3-2 3-2 353 353 353 353 353 353 4-l 4-l 4-2 4-2 4-3 4-4 353 353 353 353 353 5-l 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-4 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 6-l 6-l 6-l f%l 6-2 6-2 6-3 m 6-4 6-4 MANAGER General ................................................................... ...................................................... DiagnosticTestQueues Testing ................................................................... ............................................................. Far&Recovery The Maintenance Database ................................................... Maintenance Device Work Area ................................................ 5. DIAGNOSTIC 353 353 353 353 353 353 TESTS General ................................................................... Main Control Card Tests ...................................................... ..................................................... BayControlCardTests.. Peripheral Control Complex Tests .............................................. Peripheral Device Tests ...................................................... 6. TEST LINE General......................................................~~ ...................................................... ConnectiontoTestLine Programming .............................................................. TestLineAccess ............................................................ CommandsAvailable ........................................................ Commandlnput ............................................................ Test Line Indicator LEDs ...................................................... TestLineTones ............................................................. ........................................................ SpecifyingEquipment Normal Extension Calls ...................................................... 9109-096353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 ........... ... III General Maintenance Information Busyout Channel Command (BC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . , , , . . . . . . , . . . . . , . . . . , , , . . . Copy Database Command (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . , . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . , , . . . Busy-Cut Junctor Command (BJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . , . . . . . . , . . . . , . . . . . . . , . . . Busy-Cut Command (BO) . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . , . . . . . , . . . . . . . ,. . . Dump Logs Command (DL) . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Trunk Select Command (DT) . . . . . . . . . s . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ReturnChannel Command (RC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop Dump Logs Command (SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return Junctor To Service Command (RJ) . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . Return Device To Service Command (RS) . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‘. . Stop Test Printers Command (ST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Channel Command (TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Device Command (TD) . . , . , , , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . , . , . . . . . . . , . . . . . , . . . . . . Test Junctor Command (TJ) . . . . . , . . , . . . . . , . . . . . . . , . . . . . . , . , . , . . . , , . . . . . , . . . . . . Test Printer Bay-Slot-Circuit Command (TPB) , . . . . . . , , . . . . , . . , . , . . . , , , . . . . , . , . . . . Test Printer Extension-Number Command (TPE) . . . . . . . , . , . . . . , , . . . . , , . , . . . , , . . . . . Test Printer Port Command (TPP) . , , , . . . . . , , . . , . . . . , , . . . . . . , , . , . . , , . . . . . . , , . . . . 7. MAINTENANCE I CONTROLS AirFilter APPENDIX Procedure APPENDIX iv 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 7-1 7-l 7-l 74 74 74 74 7-9 7-9 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-15 A. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 A-l B. SYSTEM INITIALIZATION General...........................................,,..................,... APPENDIX 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-8 8-8 8-8 8-8 8-8 6-7 8-7 8-7 8-7 8-7 8-8 8-8 8-8 8-8 AND INDICATORS General...................................,.,.....,......,................ MaintenancePanels ......................................................... Main Control Card . . . . . . , . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay ControlCard ........................................................... Peripheral Control Card . . . , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitallnterfacecard ........................................................ FiberlnterfaceModule ....................................................... ScannerCard .............................................................. Peripheral Circuit Cards . . . . . , . . . , , , . . . . . . . . . , . , , . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . AttendantConsole .......................................................... PowerSupplies............................................................. Floppy DiskDrive ..,...,......................,............................. Power Fail Transfer Card , . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 353 B-l C. SAVE DATABASE ,.....,...,......,..,,,.........,.,,............................. D. USERNAME COMMAND 353 C-l PRIVILEGES Revision 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 D-I 9109-098-353-NA Issue 1 Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 2-l Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 4-l Figure 7-1 Figure 7-2 Figure 7-3 Figure,74 Figure 7-5 Figure 7-6 Figure 7-7 Figure 7-8 Figure7-9 Figure 7-l Figure 7-l Figure 7-l Figure7-13 Rear of the Control Node .......................................... Maintenance Terminal Connection to Peripheral Cabinet (Bay) ............. SX-200@ DIGITAL PABX Maintenance Panels ......................... Maintenance Device Work Area ..................................... Control Card Front Panels ........................................ .- Fiber Interface Module ............................................ SX-200 FD Control Cabinet Rear View ............................... Peripheral Card Front Panels ................................. ; ...... Attendant Console Keyboard ....................................... 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive ............................................. SX-200 DIGITAL Disk Drive ........................................ Rear Door Power Supply Indicators .................................. BayPowerSupply.. ............................................. 0 Power Fail Transfer Card Location - Peripheral Cabinet .................. 1 Power Fail Transfer Card Location - Universal Control Cabinet ............. 2 PFT Card (48O-Por-t Configuration and Welded Control Cabinet) ........... PFTCardforaUniversalCabinet .................................... 353 2-2 353 2-3 353 2-5 353 4-5 353 7-2 353 7-7 353 7-8 353 7-l 0 353 7-l 2 353 7-14 353 7-15 353 7-l 6 3537-16 353 7-l 7 353 7-l 8 353 7-19 353 7-20 List of Tables Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table I Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table l-l 3-l 4-l 4-2 5-l 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-l 5-l 5-l 5-l 5-l 5-l 5-l 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Practices ................................... AlarmThresholds .............................................. Diagnostic Test Queues ........................................... The Maintenance Device Work Area ................................. DiagnosticTypes ............................................... DiagnosticCoverage ............................................ OPS Line Card Initialization ........................................ ONS Circuit Lamp Test Initialization .................................. CO Trunk Card Initialization ........................................ DID Trunk Card Initialization ........................................ Receiver Module Initialization ....................................... Console Circuit Initialization ........................................ Junctorlnitialization ............................................. PCM Testing in COMBO Bays ...................................... Main Control Card Initialization ..................................... COV Card Initialization ............................................ E&M Trunk Module Initialization ..................................... DID Card Initialization ............................................. Digital Line Card Initialization ....................................... SUPERCONSObE 1000” Initialization ............................... 9109-096353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 .353 l-l ..35 3 3-2 ,353 4-l ,353 4-3 ..35 3 5-l ..35 3 5-2 .353 5-7 .353 5-7 .353 5-8 .353 5-9 .353 5-9 .353 5-9 ..353510 ,353 5-10 .353 5-11 ,353 5-12 .353 5-l 2 .353 5-l 3 .353 514 .353 5-l 4 V General Maintenance Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table vi 5-17 5-l 8 8-l 8-2 8-3 7-l 7-2. 7-3 7-4 7-5’ 7-8 7-7 7-8 B-l B-2 C-l D-l Information TlTrunkCard ................................................. PooledModemlnitialization ........................................ Test Line Command Codes ........................................ Test Line Status Indicator Codes .................................... Test Line Status Tones ............................................ Main Control Card Test Status Codes ................................ DisketteErrorCodes ............................................ Bay Control Card Status Leds ...................................... Peripheral Control Card Test Status Indicators .......................... Digital Interface Card Test Status Indicators ......................... SX-200 FD Bay Control Card FIM Status LEDs ......................... Attendant Console Maintenance Led Indicators ......................... Attendant Console LCD Display Messages ............................. Initial Power-up Procedures From The Terminal ......................... Initial Power-up Procedures From The Attendant Console ................. New Software Installation ......................................... Username Command Privileges .................................... Revision 0 9109-098-353-NA ..35 3 5-15 .3535-15 .353 8-2 .353 8-3 .353 8-4 .353 7-3 ..35 3 7-5 .353 7-5 353 7-8 1. . 353 7-8 .353 7-7 .353 7-11 353 7-11 353 B-l 353 B-2 .353 C-l .353 D-l Issue 1 1 ’ GENERAL Introduction 1 .l- \ This Practice describes the maintenance philosophy, features, and facilities of the SX-2Om DIGITAL Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX). Included are the use of diagnostic tests, maintenance aids, local and remote terminals, and other tools available to assist maintenance users in ensuring a continued high standard of efficiency and performance. Further details concerning SX-200 DIGITAL PABX maintenance may be found in the Practices listed in Table 1-I. Table 1-I SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Practices 9109-096-lOO-NA General Description 9109-09~105-NA Features Description 9109-098-l 8o-NA Engineering 9109-09~5O-NA Information Troubleshooting 9109-096-351-NA RS-232 Maintenance Terminal Reason for Issue 1.2 This Practice forms technical information Trunks, Automatic configuration, are not part of the MITEL@ Standard Practices issued to provide for the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. Some features, such as Tl Call Distribution (ACD), modem pooling, and 672-port available with Generic 1001 or Generic 1002. Features not supported in Generic1 005 FPKG or Generic 1005 LIT96 1 are: Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), Data Communications features, Automatic Number Identification/Dialed Number Identification Service, Application Plateform Package, and Call Centre Manager (CCM). 9109-09fFX53-NA Issue1 Revision 0 353 l-l General Maintenance 353 l-2 Information Revision 0 9109-096353-NA Issue 1 2. MAINTENANCE TOOLS The Maintenance Terminal 2.t- \ The RS-232 ASCII Maintenance Terminal is the primary maintenance tool for the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. It is connected by means of a standard 25-pin RS-232 cable. One end of the cable is plugged into the main RS-232 communication port of the terminal; the other end is plugged into the RS-232 Maintenance Connector port on the system Maintenance Panel. With the SX-200 FD system the maintenance terminal can be connected to all nodes. A wide range of commands are available at the maintenance terminal to help the user locate and replace faulty equipment. For further information, refer to Practice 9109-096-351-NA, RS-232 Maintenance Terminal. Notes: 1. The “REMOTE” 2. The maintenance and “LOCAL” connectors may not be used concurrently. terminal user must “LOGOUT” after every session. 3. Maintenance terminals connected to peripheral nodes are for “SERVICE ONLY” no permenant connections should be maintained. The SX-200 DIGITAL Attendant workstation. All of the commands at the attendant console. Console may be used as an alternate available at the maintenance terminal maintenance are available Control Cabinet Maintenance Panels 2.2 Located at the front of the control equipment cabinet is the control maintenance panel. This provides maintenance personnel with access to the system through the maintenance ports and test line connectors. Also housed on the control maintenance panel are the Power Fail Transfer control switches, and the power ON/OFF switch and LED power indicator for Bay 3 (48&Port Configuration only). Maintenance Port. These connectors are provided to allow the maintenance person a port to connect an RS-232 ASCII terminal to the system for maintenance or programming purposes. The terminal may be connected either directly to the system (using the LOCAL port), or indirectly, via a modem (using the REMOTE port). Note that only one of the Maintenance Ports may be used at any point in time. Note that the Remote Maintenance port is located on the Universal cabinet’s rear panel. With the SX-200 FD the maintenance ports are located on the rear of the control node (See Figure 2-l), and the front of the peripheral node (See Figure 2-2). Refer to Practice 9109-096-351-NA, RS-232 Maintenance Terminal, for further information. 910949M53-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 2-l General Maintenance Information - - - POWERSUPPLYUNiT (F’SV) FM5 SYSTEMPFUNTERPORT MAINTENANCETERMINALPORT ax178 Figure 2-l 353 2-2 Rear of the Control Node Revision 0 9109-096453-NA Issue 1 Maintenance Tools \ Figure 2-2 Maintenance Terminal Connection to Peripheral Cabinet (Bay) Power Fail Transfer Control Switches. These switches allow the maintenance person to determine the type of failure that will cause a power fail transfer to occur (refer to Practice 9109-096-105-NA, Features Description, for information on power fail transfer). These switches apply only to 480-port configurations with a welded Control Cabinet. There are three options: transfer on power supply failure, transfer on common control failure, or transfer on either power supply or common control failure. These options are selected by switching the POWER SUPPLY and COMMON CONTROL switches to the ENABLE and DISABLE positions as required. The MASTER SWITCH allows the maintenance person to manually force a power fail transfer, by switching to the TRANSFER position, For normal system operation, this switch should always be in the NORMAL position. On the SX-200 FD, transfer switches are on the optional System Fail Transfer (SFT) unit (refer to Practice 9101-09&201-NA, or the manufacturer’s instructions). Maintenance Console. This connector allows the maintenance person to connect an Attendant Console directly to the maintenance panel for maintenance or programming purposes, instead of using an RS-232 ASCII terminal. To allow operation of the console, there is one console connection available at the default console position located in bay 2, slot 3, circuit 1 in a 480 port, 336 port, or 456 port system, or at bay 1, slot 5, circuits 1 and 2 in a 672 port system. Note: There are two console types; the LCD Console interfaces to a Console Module on a Universal Card, while the SUPERCONSOLE 7000” Attendant Console interfaces to a Digital Line Card. When connecting a console to a maintenance panel, make sure that the console matches the type of card that is installed in the default position, Test Line Connectors. These connectors individual capability 9109-096-353-NA lines, trunks of removing Issue 1 allow the maintenance person to access and receivers for testing purposes. The test line also has the circuits from service, and accessing speech paths and the Revision 0 353 23 General Maintenance Information printer. To facilitate operation of the test line, there must be an ONS line card installed in bay 2, slot 1; in CDE, Bay 2, Slot 1, Circuit 1, must be programmed as the test line. Refer to Part 7 of this Practice for further information on the test line. There are no Test Line Connectors on a 672 Port Maintenance Panel, or on some other panels. In these instances, the connection must be made at the MDF system Peripheral .’ 2.3 Cabinet Maintenance Panel Located at the top of the welded peripheral equipment cabinet is the peripheral maintenance panel. This provides maintenance personnel with access to the power ‘fail transfer switches for the peripheral equipment cabinet. These switches allow the maintenance person to determine the type of failure that will cause a power fail transfer in the peripheral equipment cabinet. There are three options: transfer on power supply failure, transfer on common control failure, or transfer on either power supply or common control failure. These options are selected by switching the POWER SUPPLY and COMMON CONTROL switches to the ENABLE and DISABLE positions as required. The MASTER SWITCH allows the maintenance person to manually force a power fail transfer, by switching to the TRANSFER position. For normal system operation, this switch should always be in the NORMAL position. Important: The switches CONSOLE l labeled MAINTENANCE CONSOLE, NO. 2 must always be in the DISABLE position. The 672 port peripheral System Maintenance 2.4 does not have a maintenance NO. 1 and panel. log The system maintenance log is a floppy-disk-based record of maintenance-related information. Any event which has the potential of affecting the functioning or the capacity of the system is entered into this log. There are three types of log reports possible: l Fault report -A report is generated system e cabinet CONSOLE detects whenever Call Processing an error or an abnormal condition. l Reset report-A l Alarm level change report-A all system 353 2-4 report is generated whenever or the maintenance a bay or the Main Controller report is generated whenever is reset. a change in the over- alarm level occurs. Revision 0 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Maintenance Tools Figure 2-3 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Maintenance Panels 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 2-5 General Maintenance information Y 353 2-6 Revision 0 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 3 ’ ALARMS General 3.1- _’ \ Alarms are the means through which the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is able to determine its own functional state. The Alarm Manager software program monitors the performance of all peripheral devices in the system, and compiles up-to-date statistics on anomalies. The level of alarm is determined by the actual or potential effect on service that the anomalies cause. Alarm levels 3.2 There are four distinct levels of alarm defined for the SX-ZOO DIGITAL maintenance system. These levels are intended to give the maintenance person up-to-date information on the severity of existing anomalies, The four alarm levels are: . NO ALARM - This indicates that the system is functioning properly. MINOR -This indicates that there are problems affecting the system in small proportion. l MAJOR -This indicates that there are problems causing a serious degradation of service. l CRITICAL -This indicates that there has been a very serious loss of call processing capability; an automatic power fail transfer (PFT) is invoked and the system is reset. l Alarm Categories 3.3 There are four basic alarm categories, all relating to peripheral equipment. All problems affecting system performance will fall into one or more of these categories. Failure of other system components will indirectly cause failure of peripheral equipment. The categories are: l Lines l Trunks l DTMF Receivers l PCM Channels (junctors). 9109496453-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 3-l General Maintenance Information Alarm Types 3.4 Since the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is modular in design, the Alarm alarm statistics in a modular fashion. For this reason, the alarms three types: l l Manager keeps are divided into Bay Alarms -These are the alarm levels of the categories specific to each separate bay in the system. In the SX-200 FD the “peripheral nodes” are equivalent to “bays” in maintenance. System Alarms - These are the alarm levels of the categories on a systemwide basis. ’ l Overall Alarm -This is the overall system alarm level, taking into account all of the bay alarms and system alarms in all categories. This is the alarm that is displayed on the upper right corner of the console Alarm Thresholds 3.5 For each alarm category, the thresholds represent the alarm level trip points; the precise divisions between the alarm levels. The thresholds are simple percentages, indicating availability; the number of working devices is compared to the number of programmed devices. The critical alarm threshold, however, is not a percentage, but rather a precise numerical value. When the number of available devices falls below this number, a Critical Alarm is raised. The thresholds are programmable (refer to Practice 9109-096-351-NA, FE-232 Maintenance Terminal); the default values are specified in Table 3-1. Table 3-l ALARM Alarm Thresholds CATEGORY (Peripheral Devices) ALARM THRESHOLDS MINOR MAJOR CRlTlCAL Lines 0% 20% 0 Trunks 0% 10% 0 DTM F Receivers 0% 25% 0 PCM Channels (Junctors) 10% 25% 0 Alarm Totals 3.6 The Alarm Manager keeps a record of the total numbers of the various devices that should be available to Call Processing, as well as the actual number that are available. Alarm totals are maintained for each of the alarm categories in each bay, as well as for the entire system. These totals are compared to the alarm thresholds, to determine the level of alarm that is raised. 353 3-2 Revision 0 9109496353-NA Issue1 4 ’ THE MAINTENANCE MANAGER General 4% \ The Maintenance Manager is the central maintenance software program in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX system software. Its responsibility includes the receiving of requests to run diagnostic tests, managing the test schedules (queues), and initiating testing. Diagnostic 4.2 Test Queues Diagnostic tests are grouped into three different categories: Power-up, Background, and Directed. To reflect this, the test schedules (queues) are prioritized along the same categories. Table 4-1 describes the queues in ascending order of priority. When the Maintenance Manager schedules a device for a particular type of diagnostic test, it places the device in the appropriate diagnostic test queue. When the maintenance person disables a diagnostic test type via the maintenance interface, the corresponding test requests are removed from the associated test queue. The priority scheme is designed to ensure that testing requested by the maintenance person via the maintenance terminal is handled immediately. Table 4-l Diagnostic Test Queues . as soon as ‘SUSPECT” and tested again from this queue. If it fails here, it is d on this higher priority queue to be tested as 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 4-l General Maintenance Information Testing 4.3 The Maintenance test; the general Manager controls the entire test sequence test sequence for any peripheral device is: 1. The Maintenance Manager locates on the highest priority test queue. a device with diagnostic 2. The device is requested quest is granted. from Call Processing 3. Any resources \ to perform required for testing. 5. When testing the status of the device 7. Resources required for testing pending ’ tests on the device are allocated. device 6. If the device status has changed, alarm levels are updated. test requests under If the device is idle, the re- 4. The series of tests for the particular has been completed, on any device is invoked. this is logged is updated. into the Maintenance log, and the are released. 8. The device is then returned to Call Processing, providing all tests passed. If any of the tests failed, the device will be retested; failure in this case results in the device being removed from service. When the Maintenance Manager has control of a device for testing purposes, it must follow a set of “guidelines” designed to make diagnostic testing both transparent to system users, and efficient. These include: (a) If Call Processing ager immediately requires a device while it is being tested, aborts the test and releases the device. the Maintenance Man- (b) When a device fails a diagnostic test, it is tested a second time to verify the fault. If it fails again, it is removed from service. (c) When a device fails diagnostic tests, and is subsequently remains out of service until it passes seven successive removed diagnostic from service, tests. it s (d) If a device scheduled for power-up or fault-isolation diagnostic testing cannot be tested, it is rescheduled for testing on a higher priority test queue, and retried at 5 minute intervals, (e) Each device may have background and/or power-up abled by the maintenance person via the maintenance diagnostics interface. selectively dis- Fault Recovery 4.4 Once a device fails diagnostic testing, it is removed from active service; it can no longer be used by Call Processing. The three different circumstances through which the device can be returned to active service are: 353 4-2 Revision 0 9109-09~53-NA Issue 1 The Maintenance Manager 1. The most common method should be through the troubleshooting procedures outlined in Practice 9109-096-350-NA, Troubleshooting. This entails repairing or replacing the affected card. When reinstalled, the device is automatically tested, and if it passes, is returned to service. 2. The maintenance person has the option of returning a faulty device to service, if desired. This is done via the maintenance interface (terminal, console, or test line) see Practice 9109-096-351 -NA, RS-232 Maintenance Terminal. 3. When a device fails diagnostic testing and is subsequently removed from service, the Maintenance Manager continues testing it. If a device passes seven consecutive tests after being removed from service, it is returned to service. The Maintenance 4.5 Database All cards that are programmed via Customer Data Entry (CDE) have associated with them an up-to-date status record located in system DRAM memory. These are known as the Maintenance Device Work Areas (DWA), and aid the system in determining the state of every device in the system at any point in time. Table 4-2 describes the information stored in the device work areas. Table 4-2 The Maintenance instld -the Device Work Area correct card type is installed unplug -the card is programmed, but is either unplugged or not - available to CP and maintenance - programmed in CDE but not installed unprog - installed but not programmed suspt - suspect -failed in CDE diagnostic test once Page 1 of 2 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 4-3 General Maintenance Information Table 4-2 The Maintenance Device Work Area (continued) DWA Entry Description fltyl - faulty with one pass L flty2 -faulty with two passes flty3 -faulty with three passes flty4 -faulty with four passes flty5 -faulty with five passes ffty6 - faufty with six passes bsout -forced >ower-up 3ackground Enable busy, busied-out Indicates for each circuit on the card, if power-up enabled. diagnostics are Indicates for each circuit on the card, if background are enabled. Enable diagnostics Page 2 of 2 Maintenance Device Work Area 4.6 When which a card is first programmed, a maintenance device work area is assigned can be accessed by two softkeys: MT-DWA and MT-DWA-MEM. MT-DWA - gives an English format maintenance of the diagnostics of the of the contents of the work area MT-DWA-MEM maintenance of the status for it, - is a hexadecimal device work area memory dump Figure 4-1 shows a typical display of a Maintenance Device Work Area. Definitions the terms used in the screen display follow Figure 4-1. 353 4-4 Revision 0 9109-096353-NA of Issue 1 The Maintenance 0:04 AM 23-APR-90 Manager alarm status = NO ALARM CARDDATA DBV STATUS BGR PWR DBVPLID: 2150 CARD TYPE: ONS 1 2 CARDSN INSTLD NUN CCTS: 12 3 4 AVAIL AVAIL AVAIL, AVAIL ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF DtiSWlD:MTCARD19 DWA ADD 1336C0 DISK ADD: OB49 OlA6 5 6 7 8 AVAIL AVAIL AVAIL AVAIL ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF BGR SYS PUP FIS PRT FRT USR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 12 CARDREQ: MTCE WORK AREA l- 2- 3- 4- 5- CANCEL 6- 7- 8- 9- MORE-DEVICES 0- RETURN Figure 4-l Maintenance Device Work Area DEV PLID CARDTYPE CARDSTAT NUM CCTS DEV SWID DWA ADD DISK ADD Bay / Slot / Circuit / Subcircuit Type of card status of the card number of circuits on the card software identity of the device device work area address device disk address DR/ STATUS BGR PWR BGR SYS PUP FIS PRT FRT USR CARD REQ device identification device status background diagnostics on / off power up diagnostics on / off number of background tests pending number of system tests pending number of power up tests pending number of fault isolation tests pending number of power up diagnostic retries number of fault diagnostic retries number of user specified diagnostic retries number of requests for this card 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 4-5 General Maintenance 353 4-6 Information Revision 0 9109496-3534A Issue 1 5. DIAGNOSTIC TESTS General 5.f- \ For each physical device in the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX there is a special set of diagnostic tests specifically designed to test the device as thoroughly as possible. If faults are detected, broader ranges of tests may be run in an attempt to isolate the fault to the board level, and to ensure that isolated faults are not merely side effects of other problems. The diagnostics are divided into four different functional groups. This is necessary to facilitate the different characteristics of the various devices in the system. For example, a line circuit may be tested at any time; whereas the system RAM or the CPU may not, as the system software requires them at all times, Note that cards in the analog bays may be tested only indirectly, by testing the voice paths that they are connected to. Table 5-1 describes the four types of diagnostic tests. Table 5-2 shows which devices are tested by each of the four types of diagnostics. Table 5-I Diagnostic Diagnostic Types Description Type PROM-Based These are the only tests that thoroughly verify the Main Control Card and Peripheral Control Card. They can be initiated only by resetting the system. Power-up If enabled (by defauft they are disabled) run once, starting at system ~initialization, or when the card is installed. These tests can be enabled from the maintenance terminal or the console. Background If enabled (by default they are enabled), start running after power-up diagnostics have completed, and run continuously. These tests can be enabled from the maintenance terminal or the console. Directed These are tests initiated by the maintenance nance terminal, console, or test line. user from the mainte- Power-up, Background, and Directed diagnostics are actually the same set of tests; the difference lies onlv in the manner in which thev are invoked. 9109-09G353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 5-1 General Maintenance Information Table 5-2 Diagnostic 353 5-2 Revision 0 Coverage 9109-09W53-NA Issue 1 DiagnosticTests Main Control Card Tests 5.2 ._. Due to the nature of the Main Control Card, it is not possible to thoroughly test it in the on-line environment. Therefore, most testing is performed only on initialization (i.e., power-up and reset). These tests reside in the Main Control Card’s onboard EPROM, and test virtually all of the card’s main functional blocks. If any of the tests should fail, a unique error code will be displayed on the dual 7-segment display status indicators located on the front panel of the card. These codes are shown in Table 7-1. The following tests are performed on the Main Control Card: 9 Processor Viability Test 9 PROM Checksum Test l Dynamic RAM Chip Select Independence Test 0 Dynamic RAM Data Bit Independence Test l Memory Address Line Independence Test l Memory Address Space Independence Test l DMA Controller Test. Bay Control Card Tests 5.3 Like the Main Control Card, it is not possible to thoroughly test the Bay Control Card in the on-line environment. Therefore, most testing is performed only on initialization (power up and reset). The tests reside in the Bay Control Card’s on-board EPROM, and test most of the card’s functional blocks. If any of the tests should fail, the alarm LED on the card’s front panel will flash. The following tests are performed on the Bay Control Card: l Processor Viability Test l PROM Checksum Test 0 Dynamic RAM Chip Select Independence Test l Dynamic RAM Data Bit Independence Test l Memory Address Line Independence Test 0 Memory Address Space Independence Test. Peripheral Control Complex Tests 5.4 The Peripheral Control Complex consists of one Peripheral Control (PCC) Card, one Digital Interface (DIC) Card, and one Scanner card. Like the Main Control Card, it is not possible to thoroughly test the Peripheral Control Card, in the on-line environment. Therefore, testing is performed only on initialization (i.e., power-up and reset). These tests reside in the onboard EPROM on both the DIC card and the PCC, 9109-096453-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 5-3 General Maintenance Information and test most of the functionality of the DIC and PCC cards, along with indirect testing of the Scanner card. If any of the tests should fail, a unique error code will be displayed on the dual 7-segment display status indicators located on the front panel of the Scanner card. These codes are shown in Table 7-4 and Table 7-5. Peripheral 5.5 .’ Device Tests There is a unique sequence of tests specifically designed for each type of peripheral device in the system. These test sequences include some device-specific tests along with some common tests. The test sequences are described in Table 5-3 \ through Table 5-l 8. The actual tests are described in the following paragraphs. Refer to Practice 9109-095-I 25-NA, Circuit Card Description, for information on peripheral circuit hardware. AC CODEC loopback test: This test verifies the CODEC encode, decode and filter functions as well as the PCM paths from the DX Matrix. Since this test will always follow the dc CODEC test, failure of the test will isolate the fault. AC hybrid loopback test: This test is similar to the ac CODEC carries the test further, device under test. to the hybrid. Again, loopback test, but if this test fails, the fault is isolated to the ACDC loopback test: This is the digital CODEC loopback test, used to determine if the PCM path and the digital signal processor are functioning from the Main Control DX module to the bay. After the dc CODEC test is performed, this test is called without involving the CODEC so the only difference between the two tests is the connections in the DX chip. Failure of this test will not isolate the fault to the CODEC under test. Alternate device available: This test is for isolation of the fault responsible for the failure of the analog 8804 loopback test. This routine tries to get alternate devices from every card in the bay. An incomplete test will result if less than half the devices are available. Alternate device loopback: This routine runs the analog 8804 loopback test on the alternate - devices. Analog 8804 loopback test: This test sends a tone down the first junctor, through ,8804, and tries to receive the tone on the second Analog no failures: Any juctors involved undergo alternate an junctor. in analog 8894 loopback test failures now device tests. Check ADC ref voltage: This test verifies the operation of the Analog-to-Digital converter by checking the level on the PCM Encoder/Decoder (CODEC) reference source. All digital lines and trunks, with the exception the Digital Line Card, undergo this test. Check for a data set: This function checks for a DNIC data set connected under test. This software test, providing information deciding what hardware tests are to be done. 353 5-4 Revision 0 about the device, 9109-096353-NA to the device is an aid when Issue 1 DiagnosticTests Check for a voice set: This function checks for a DNIC voice set connected to the device under test. This software test, providing information about the device, is an aid when deciding what hardware tests are to be done. Check if other half has a set: This function checks for a DNIC voice/data set connected to the other half of the circuit of the device under test. This software test, providing information about the device, is an aid when deciding what hardware tests are to be done. .-:-. Conference test: A three party conference is attempted. The test is a pass if the attempt is successful, otherwise a failure of the device is indicated. , Console status: This test verifies the operation of the console. It consists of a status message being sent from the console to the Maintenance Manager. If the test fails, the fault cannot be isolated to the console. Dataset loopback: This routine performs a dataset data loopback by forming a loopback path from the dataset UART transmitter back to the UART receiver. Once the path is formed, a block of data is sent to the dataset and the set should send the block back. The test passes if the data received is the same as the data sent. This loopback test is done over the D Channel. DC CODEC test: This test verifies the operation of the PCM paths from the DX Matrix to the CODEC on the peripheral card and back again. It also verifies the integrity of a tone transmitted from the Main Control Card’s digital signal processor (DSP) along these paths. If the test fails, it is not possible for the system to isolate the fault completely. Digital bay type test: Used to decide which set of diagnostics to run, if this routine returns a pass, digital bay diagnostics are run. Analog bay diagnostics are run if a fail is returned. DNIC set bphone: This test sends bphone-test-request messages to a DNIC voice set. The set verifies the BPHONE chip interface by ensuring one can read and write to/from some of the internal chip registers, and replies back with a pass/fail message. Failure of the test will isolate the fault to the set itself. DNIC set eprom checksum: This test sends eprom-checksum-request messages to a DNIC voice/data set. The set performs a checksum test and replies back with a pass or fail message. Failure of the test will isolate the fault to the set itself. DNIC set transducer earpiece: This test sends a transducer register-contents message to a Digital SUPERSETtelephone. The set replies back 4th the contents of the transducer control register. The contents are compared to what is expected to be for the earpiece field, in the call processing work area and a pass or fail is determined. Failure of the test will isolate the fault to the set. DNIC set transducer microphone: This test sends a transducer register-contents message to a Digital SUPERSETtelephone. The set replies back ?ith the contents of the transducer control register. The contents are compared to what is expected to be for the microphone field, in the call processing work area and a pass or fail is determined. Failure of the test will isolate the fault to the set itself. 9109-09643534A Issue 1 Revision 0 353 545 General Maintenance Information DNIC set transducer mouthpiece: This test sends a transducer register-contents message to a Digital SUPERSETtelephone. The set replies back 4th the contents of the transducer control register. The contents are compared to what is expected to be for the mouthpiece field, in the call processing work area and a pass or fail is determined. Failure of the test will isolate the fault to the set. .’ DNIC set transducer speaker: This test sends a transducer register-contents message to a Digital SUPERSETtelephone. The set replies back 4th the contents of the transducer control register. The contents are compared to what is expected to be for the speaker field, in the call processing work area and a pass or fail is determined. Failure of the test will isolate the fault to the set. ‘Get free junctor test: This function attempts to get a junctor for use by the analog 8804 test. Junctor AC CODEC loopback: This test, performed on analog bays, if present, is similar to the Junctor dc CODEC loopback test, but verifies the DIC CODEC encode, decode and filter functions as well. Since this test will always succeed the Junctor dc CODEC loopback test, failure of the test will isolate the fault to the DIC CODEC. Junctor DC CODEC loopback: This test, performed on analog bays, if present, is similar to the dc CODEC test: it verifies the operation of the PCM paths from the Main Controller Card to the Peripheral Control Card, to the CODEC on the DIC Card, and back again, using a tone transmitted from the tone generator. If the test fails, it is not possible for the system to isolate the fault. Modem pooling test: The first part of this test verifies that the Digital Line Card, the ONS Card, and the DATASET 2100 are each functional; it also determines the mode of the modem. The second part of the test is to make a call through the ONS card to the modem (ANSWER ONLY mode) to detect answer tone and to terminate the call successfully, or to make a similar call through the DLC to the modem (ORIGINATE ONLY mode) to detect answer tone and to terminate the call successfully. If the modem is BOTHWAY, these two parts of the second test are performed to verify bothway operation. - Junctor test: If analog bays are present, this test verifies the operation of the analog junctors. This is done by ensuring that the junctor can independently be forced to high state, low state and ground state. If the test fails, the fault is isolated to the junctor under test. Receiver test: The digital signal verifies that the receiver correctly processor sends digit tones detects the digits. to the receivers Switch hook test: This tests the ability of a line card to detect an off-hook and for the device under test. Test DNIC input: This test is used to loop the data internally at DNIC input. Failure of the test will isolate the fault to the card but will not isolate it to the particular DNIC chip on the card. Test DNIC output: This test is used to loop the data internally at DNIC output. Failure of this test will isolate the fault to the particular 353 5-6 Revision 0 DNIC chip under test on the card. 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Diagnostic Tests Tone detection test: This test generates a test tone of 440 Hz, and loops it back to the digital signal processor. The energy level of the tone must fall in a particular range to pass this test. Failure of the test indicates a faulty device. Tone generation test: This test collects two consecutive samples from the digital signal processor for a test tone of 440 Hz. The validity of the two samples is checked to determine a pass or fail. Failure of the test indicates a faulty device. :2. Test Tl channel: This test is used to loop back one Tl trunk channel everything is OK. Failure of the test will isolate the fault to this particular Pooled modem answer mode test: See Modem Pooled modem originate mode test: See Modem Pooling and check if channel. Test. Pooling Test. Table 5-3 OPS Line Card lnitlalizatlon I Diagnostic I State Test Name Circuit State if Test Passes Circult State if Test Fails State 1 adc reference test state 2 device failure unisolated State 2 digital CODEC test state 3 device failure unisolated State 3 digital CODEC loopback test state 4 device failure unisolated State 4 analog CODEC loopback test state 5 device failure isolated State 5 hookswitch test passed device failure isolated State 6 message lamp test 1passed device failure isolated Table 5-4 ONS Chuit Diagnostic State State 1 9109-096-353-l\lA Test Name message lamp test Issue 1 Lamp Test Initialization Circuit State if Test Passes device passed Revision Circuit State If Test Falls device failure isolated 0 353 5-7 I I General Maintenance Information Table 5-5 CO Trunk Card Initialization device failure isolated Revision 0 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Diagnostic Tests Table 5-6 DID Trunk Card lnltializatlon device failure isolated Table 5-7 Receiver Table 5-8 Console I Diagnostic State I State 1 I State 2 I State 3 9109-096-353-NA Test Name I I console test Module Initialization Circuit lnltlalizatlon Circuit State If Test Passes device passed 1console dc CODEC test 1state 3 console ac CODEC testtest Issue 1 Clrcult State if Test Fails I I device failure unisolated 1device failure unisolated device passed I device failure isolated I Revision 0 353 5-9 General Maintenance Information Table 5-9 Junctor Initialization Circuit State if Test Passes test incomplete Circuit State If Test Fails 1state 2 state 3 than failure isolated state 4 than failure isolated - State 4 junctor test state 5 than failure unisolated State 5 analog alternate device test state 6 state 7 State 6 analog alternate device loopback for junctor channel passed state 5 State 7 enough alternate devices for junctor test channel failure isolated test incomplete Table 5-10 PCM Testing in COMBO Bays Diagnostic State Test Name CircuR State If Test Passes Circuit State if Test Fails State 1 full pcm loopback state 2 state 14 State 2 is link shared state 3 state 4 State 3 read next bay dxd state 4 channel isolated to bay State 4 read next MCC dx state 5 channel isolated to MCC State 5. read next MCC dx state 6 channel isolated to MCC State 6 send from next MCC dx state 7 channel isolated to MCC State 7 send from next MCC dx state 23 channel isolated to MCC State 14 read next MCC dx channel isolated to MCC state 17 State 15 read bay dx state 16 state 20 State 16 send from bay dx channel isolated to bay state 18 Page 1 of 2 353 5-10 Revision 0 9109-096353-NA Issue 1 Diagnostic Tests Table 5-10 Diagnostic State PCM Testing in COMBO Bays (continued) Test Name Circuit State if Test Passes Circuit State if Test Falls State 17 send from next MCC dx channel isolated to MCC state 15 State 18 is link shared state 19 channel failure unisolated State 19 send from next bay dx channel isolated to bay channel faiiure unisolated State 20 is link shared state 21 state 22 State 21 read next bay dx channel isolated to bay state 22 State 22 send from next MCC dx to bay only channel isolated to MCC channel failure unisolated State 23 send from bay dx state 24 channel isolated to bay State 24 is link shared state 25 channel passed State 25 send from next bay dx channel passed channel isolated to bay .T Page 2 of 2 Table S-11 Diagnostic State Test Name Circuit Card Initialization State if Test Passes Circuit State if Test Falls state 2 device failure isolated DSP tone detector test state 3 device failure isolated DSP tone generator test device passed device failure isolated State 1 DSP conference State 2 State 3 9109-096-353-NA Main Control issue 1 test Revision 0 353 5-11 General Maintenance Information Table 5-12 Diagnostic State COV Card Initialization Test Name Circuit State if Test Passes CircuR State if Test Fails State 1 digital bay test state 2 state 10 ‘State 2; digital CODEC test state 3 device failure unisolated State 3 digital CODEC loopback test state 4 device failure unisolated State 4 analog CODEC loopback test device passed device failure isolated State 9 get junctor test state 10 state 22 junctor dc CODEC test state 11 state 13 State 11 1junctor ac CODEC test 1state 12 state 13 State 12 1junctor test state 13 State 13 1make junctor suspect State 10 state 14 I state 9 state 9 I State 14 State 15 analog DSP test I retest primary state 9 state 15 state 15 state 16 State 16 retest secondary state 16 state 17 State 17 has junctor been isolated state 18 device failure isolated State 18 analog alternate device test state 19 state 20 State 19 analog alternate device loopback test device failure isolated state 18 State 20 enough alternate devices state 21 device failure isolated State 21 make junctor suspect 1device passed 1device passed State 22 enough junctors 1device passed device passed I Table 5-13 Diagnostic State Test Name E&M Trunk Module Initialization Circuit State if Test Passes Circuit State if Test Fails State 1 digital CODEC test state 2 device failure unisolated State 2 digital CODEC loopback test state 3 device failure unisolated State 3 analog CODEC loopback test device passed device failure isolated Revision 0 9109-096353-NA Issue 1 Diagnostic Tests Table 5-14 DID Card lnltlalizatlon State 19 analog alternate device loopback test device failure isolated state 18 State 20 enough alternate devices state 21 device failure isolated State 21 make junctor suspect device passed device passed State 22 enough junctors device passed device passed 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 5-13 General Maintenance Information Table 5-15 Diagnostic State Digital Line Card Initialization Test Name State 1 Circuit State If Test Passes Circuit State if Test Fails does other half have a set? state 2 state 11 State 2 is there a voice set? state 3 state 6 State 3 \ digital set EPROM checksum test state 4 device failure isolated State 4 digital set Bphone test state 5 device failure isolated State 5 digital set transducer earpiece test state 12 device failure isolated State 6 is there a data set? state 7 device failure isolated State 7 digital set EPROM checksum test state 10 device failure isolated State 8 does other half have a set? device passed state 9 State 9 DNIC output loopback test device passed device failure isolated State 10 dataset data loopback test device passed device failure isolated State 11 DNIC input loopback test state 2 device failure isolated State 12 digital set transducer speaker test state 13 device failure isolated State 13 digital set transducer microphone test state 14 ddevice failure isolated State 14 digital set transducer mouthpiece test device passed device failure isolated .T Note: States 1,2,6 and 8 are Software tests, used to find which device (data/voice) is connected, and are helpful when planning which tests to execute. 353 5-14 Revision 0 9109-096353-NA Issue 1 Diagnostic Tests Table 5-17 Diagnostic State State 1 _,I,’ . Test Name Tl channel loopback test Table 5-18 Tl Trunk Card Circuit State if Test Passes device passed Pooled Modem Circuit State if Test Fails device failure isolated initialization device failure unisolated ure unisolated 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 General Maintenance Information .i 353 5-16 Revision 0 9109-09&353-NA Issue 1 6 ’ TEST LINE General 6.1.; \ The test line interface is designed to provide the maintenance person with a portable, inexpensive and readily available tool for diagnosing system failures and performing maintenance functions. A powerful subset of the maintenance functionality available via the maintenance terminal is available at the test line interface. In addition, the maintenance person can place calls without having a permanently wired extension on the premises. Connection to Test line 6.2 Connection points for the test line may be provided on the maintenance panel on the Control cabinet (See Figure 2-3); either an RJ-11 jack type connector or a pair of “banana jacks” may be used. These connectors are hardwired directly from the maintenance panel to the port located in Bay 2, Slot 1, Circuit 1 of the control cabinet. The system accepts either rotary dial or DTMF dialing through this interface. Test line connections have been removed from maintenance panels currently being manufactured; connection to the programmed test line must be made at the MDF. On 672-port systems there are no test line connectors on the maintenance connection to the programmed test line must be made at the MDF. panel; Programming 6.3 . Before the test line package may be used, an access code must first be programmed through Customer Data Entry (CDE). Information on programming may be found in Practice 9109-G%-210-NA, Customer Data Entry. The user must first call up Form 02 (Feature Access Codes). Once in this form, the user must assign an access code to Feature Number 18 (Maintenance Function -Test Line); this must not conflict with existing access codes or with the system numbering plan. Test line Access 6.4 To access test line, connect a telephone to one of the test line connections. handset, wait for dial tone and enter the following: l The test line access code; as specified in CDE e One of the valid test line command codes (see Table 6-1) 0 If required, number 9109-096-353-NA enter the circuit location Issue 1 Lift the Revision 0 or junctor number. 353 6-l General Maintenance Note: Information When CDE Console, the upon dialing taken for 90 or maintenance is accessed via the maintenance terminal or Attendant test line cannot be accessed. In these cases, the userwill receive busytone the test line access code. Also, after accessing the test line, if no action is seconds, the test line session will be automatically terminated. Commands Available . 6.5’ Although “‘-- the complete set of maintenance commands are not provided, the available test line commands permit the maintenance person to perform most maintenance functions. For a complete list of the available commands, see Table 6-l. The tones ’ are described below. Command Input 6.6 Commands are entered on the test line by dialing command codes using the DTMF keypad or rotary dial of the set being used. These command codes are listed in Table 6-l. Table 6-l Numeric Alpha Command Codes Codes Description 22 1 BC 1Busyout Channel (Remove Channel) 23 1 CD 1Copy Database 25 BJ Busyout Junctor 26 BO Busy-Cut 35 I DL Direct Trunk select 72 RC Return Channel 73 SD Stop Dump Logs 75 RJ Return Junctor to service RS I Return 78 Stop Test Printers 82 T3 Test Channel 83 TD Test Device 85 TJ Test Junctor I TPB I I device to Service ST 872 I 1Dump Logs DT I 1 device 38 77 353 6-2 Test Line Command I I Test Printer Bay-Slot-Circuit 873 TPE Test Printer Extension-Number 877 TPP Test Printer Port Revision 0 I 9109-096453-NA Issue 1 Test Line Test line Indicator 6.7 LEDs The test line software uses the dual 7-segment display status indicators on the Main Control card as status indicators. When the user enters the test line access code on the test line set, the LEDs go blank, indicating that the system is wait,ing for command input. After the user enters a command sequence, the LEDs will display the results of the action performed. See Table 6-2. Table 6-2 Test Line Status Indicator * Failure available Terminal. 6.8 of any of the test line command sequenceswill from the maintenance terminal or console. Codes necessitatethe use ofthe more sophisticated maintenancetools Refer to Practice 9109-096451-NA, FE-232 Maintenance The test line software uses some of the existing system-generated tones as audible status indicators. Approximately IO seconds after the user enters the test line access code on the test line set, a short ring burst, followed by dial tone is heard, indicating that the system is waiting for command input. After the user enters a command sequence, the returned tone will indicate the result of the action performed. See Table 6-3 for a complete list of the tones. 9 109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 6-3 General Maintenance Information Table 6-3 Test Line Status Tones Tone Type Meaning Dial tone Camp-on _’ System is waiting for command tone (single beep) Recrder tone* Trunk camp-on \ tone (double beep) input. The attempted operation was successful (Pass). The attempted operation* was unsuccessful Test was inconclusive. Ringback tone (continuous) Diskette information sert new diskette. Ringback tone (single beep) Initial maintenance Busy Tone Device was busy. Try again later. Silence Test line software is being read from disk. *Failure available Terminal. (fail). of any of the test line command sequenceswill from the maintenance terminal or console. has been loaded into RAM; inaccess. necessitatethe useofthe more sophisticated maintenancetools Refer to Practice 9109-09&351-NA, FE-232 Maintenance Specifying Equipment 6.9 Many of the test line command sequences require the maintenance person to specify a circuit or junctor as part of the command input. Circuits are specified using their physical location numbers (bay, slot, circuit, subcircuit). For example, a receiver circuit at location Bay 2, Slot 3, Circuit 3, Subcircuit 4 would be specified as “02 03 03 04”. A line circuit at location Bay 2, Slot 1, Circuit 6 would be specified as “02 01 06 00”. Note that circuits with no subcircuit number (i.e., lines and trunks) must be specified with “00” as the subcircuit. Junctors are specified using their assigned junctor numbers and the required bay number. The junctor number is a 2-digit number from 00 to 31; the analog bay number is a 2-digit number from 03’ to 05. For example, Junctor 5 in Bay 3 would be specified as “05 03”. . Channels are specified using the required Link and Channel number. The link number is a 2-digit number. Note that Link 0,l ,I4 or 15 cannot be tested. The Channel number is a 2-digit number from 00 to 31. Channel 30 on Link 9 is specified as “09 30”. Normal Extension Calls 6.10 The test line has access to normal extension facilities, and is subject to Class Of Service (COS) and Class Of Restriction (COP!) restrictions. It is not necessary to enter the test line access code or a special command code to make normal extension calls. 353 64 Revision 0 9109-0964353-NA Issue 1 Test Line Busyout Channel Command (BC) 6.11 This command allows the maintenance person to busy out any channel on the system. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Busyout Channel code (22), followed by the Link/Channel number. “PA” on the status indicator and a single beep tone indicates the successful operation. “FA” and reorder tone indicates failure. See Table 6-2. Copy Database Command (CD) ’ 6.12 This command allows the maintenance person to copy the database from the system floppy diskette onto another system floppy diskette. To copy the database, do the following: 1. Enter the test line access code. 2. Enter the Copy Database code (23) - silence 3. Wait until ringback 4. Remove tone is heard, the original diskette will be heard. and the status indicators - ringback read ‘CC”. continues. 5. Enter “1” to begin copying to the new diskette - silence will be heard. 6. If the disks are not properly inserted or do not match the status indicator will display “E.6”. Dial tone will be heard. The disks must be reinserted properly and enter “1” to continue the copy operation - silence will be heard. 7. Wait for “CC” to appear copy successful. on the status indicators 8. Enter any digit to continue database. normal operation - both diskettes 9. Wait for “PA” to appear on the status indicators copy operation has completed. IO. If the upgrade disks were left in the system and a single beep tone - indicates and a single now have the same beep tone - indicates will reset itself. Busy-Out Junctor Command (BJ) 6.13 This command allows the maintenance person to remove from service any analog junctor in the system. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Busy-Out Junctor code (25), followed by the junctor number, and the bay number. “bb” on the status indicators and a single beep tone will indicate that the junctor was busied-out, “FA” and reorder tone indicate failure - see Table 6-2. 9109-096453-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 6-5 General Maintenance Information Busy-Out Command 6.14 This command allows the maintenance person to busy-out any peripheral device in the system except consoles and the test line circuit. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Busy--Cut device code (26), followed by the physical location number of the device. If the device was in use (busy) at the time of access, the status indicators will read “PA” and the trunk will be busied as soon as it reaches the idle state. If the operation succeeds, the status indicators will read “PA” and a single beep tone will be heard. “FA” and reorder tone indicate failure -see Table 6-2. Dump logs Command 6.15 (BO) (DL) This command allows the maintenance person to print the system maintenance log on to the system printer. To print (dump) the logs, enter the test line access code, followed by the Dump Logs code (35). “PA” on the status indicators and a single beep tone indicate that the system has started sending the logs to the printer. “FA” and reorder tone indicate failure - see Table 6-2. Direct Trunk Select Command 6.16 (DT) This command allows the maintenance person to directly select any trunk in the system from the test line. To select a trunk, enter the test line access code, followed by the direct trunk select code (38), followed by the physical location number of the required trunk. If the trunk is not busy and is in working order, the status indicators will revert to whatever was present before the testline was accessed and dial tone will be heard. The trunk is then ready for use. If the trunk is in use (busy) at the time of access, functional, the status indicators will read “FA”. Return Channel Command it is not selected; if the trunk is not (RC) s 6.17 This command allows the maintenance person to return to service any channel on the system. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Return Channel code (72), followed by the Link/Channel number. “PA” on the status indicator and a single beep tone indicates the successful operation of the channel being returned to service. “FA” and reorder tone indicates failure. See Table 6-2. Stop Dump logs Command 6.18 (SD) This command allows the maintenance person to stop print the system maintenance log on to the system printer. To stop print (dump) the logs, enter the test line access code, followed by the Stop Dump Logs code (73). “PA” on the status indicator and a single beep tone indicates that the system has stopped sending the logs to the printer. “FA” and reorder tone indicates failure. See Table 6-2. 353 6-6 Revision 0 9109-096453-NA Issue 1 Test Line Return Junctor To Service Command (RJ) 6.19 This command allows the maintenance person to return to service any analog junctor that was previously removed from service via maintenance. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Return Junctor to service code (752, followed by the junctor number and the bay number. “PA” on the status indicators and a single beep tone indicate that the junctor was returned to service. ‘RI” and reorder tone indicate failure - see Table 6-2. ./-. \ Return Device To Service Command (RS) 6.20 This command allows the maintenance person to return to service any peripheral device that was previously removed from service via maintenance. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Return Device to Service code (77), followed by the physical location number of the device. “PA” on the status indicators and a single beep tone will indicate that the device was returned to service. “FA” and reorder tone indicate failure - see Table 6-2. Stop Test Printers Command (ST) 6.21 This command allows the maintenance person to stop test the printers on the system. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Stop Test Printers code (78). “PA” on the status indicator and a single beep tone indicates that the system has stopped testing the printers. “FA” and reorder tone indicates failure. See Table 6-2. Test Channel Command (TC) 6.22 This command allows the maintenance person to test any channel on the system. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Test Channel code (82), followed by the Link/Channel number. “PA” on the status indicator and a single beep tone indicates that the test passed. “FA” and reorder tone indicates that the test failed. See Table 6-2. Test Device Command (TD) 6.23 This command allows the maintenance person to test any peripheral circuit in the digital bays. To test a device, enter the test line access code, followed by the Test Device code (83)) followed by the physical location number of the device. “PA” on the status indicators and a single beep tone indicate that the test passed. “FA” and reorder tone indicate that the test failed. 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 6-7 General Maintenance Information Test Junctor Command (TJ) 6.24 This command allows the maintenance person to test any of the analog junctors in any bay in the system. To test a junctor, enter the test line access code, followed by the Test Junctor code (85), followed by the junctor number and the bay number. If the junctor was in use (busy) at the time of access, the status indicators will read “bb”; attempt the test later. “PA” on the status indicators and a single beep tone indicate that the test passed. “FA” and reorder tone indicate that the test failed. Test Printer Bay-Slot-Circuit Command (TPB) \ 6.25 This command allows the maintenance person to test any printer on the system, other than the system printer using the physical location number of the printer port. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Test Printer Bay-Slot-Circuit code (872), followed by the physical location number of the printer port, The printer should then print two full pages of all the printable characters. “PA’ on the status indicators and a single beep tone indicates that the system has started sending test data to the printer. “FA” and reorder tone indicates that the test failed. SeeTable 6-2. Test Printer Extension-Number Command (TPE) 6.26 This command allows the maintenance person to test any printer on the system, other than the system printer using the extension number of the printer port. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Test Printer Extension-number code (873), followed by the extension number of the printer port. The printer should then print two full pages of all the printable characters. “PA” on the status indicators and a single beep tone indicates that the system has started sending test data to the printer. “FA” and reorder tone indicate that the test failed. See Table 6-2. Test Printer Port Command (TPP) -6.27 This command allows the maintenance person to test the system printer. To do this, enter the test line access code, followed by the Test Printer Port code (877). The printer should then print two full pages of all the printable characters. “PA” on the status indicators and a single beep tone indicate that the system has started sending test data to the printer. “FA” and reorder tone indicates that the test failed. See Table 6-2. 353 6-8 Revision 0 9109-096453-NA Issue 1 7 . MAINTENANCE INDICATORS CONTROLS AND General -. _’ 7.1 \ The following paragraphs describe the maintenance controls and indicators found on the components of the SX-200 DIGITAL Private Automatic Branch Exchange. Most of the indicators are software-controlled, and provide maintenance personnel with information on the current status of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. Maintenance Panels 7.2 Most of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX maintenance functionality is accessed through the maintenance panels. The maintenance panels are described in detail in Part 3 of this Practice; further functionality is described in Practice 9109-096-351 -NA, RS-232 Maintenance Terminal. Main Control Card 7.3 The Main Control Card contains status LEDs, two ‘/-segment LED status indicators, and two pushbuttons; these controls and indicators are labelled clearly on the MCC front panel (See Figure 7-l). The functions of the controls and indicators are described in the following paragraphs. System Reset Button. As the name suggests, this is the manual system reset button, When pressed, the system will cease all activity, run all initialization tests, and reload the software from the floppy diskette. Note: Never do this while the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is handling traffic, as all calls will immediately be dropped, and the system will switch to Power Fail Transfer mode. Plane Transfer Button. This is similar in function to the system reset button. When pressed, the system will cease all activity and run a checksum test on the software; if this fails, the software will be reloaded from the floppy diskette. Otherwise, the system will reinitialize. Note: 9109-096453-NA Never do this while the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is handling traffic, as all calls will immediately be dropped, and the system will switch to Power Fail Transfer mode. Issue 1 Revision 0 353 7-l General Maintenance Information MEGMENI MSPLAYS 21 PIN CONNECT0 MAIN CONTROL CARD SCANNER CARD INTERFACE CARLI cm043 Figure 7-l Seven-Segment Control Card Front Panels Display Status Indicators. The Main Control card status indicators consist of two 7-segment display LEDs, arranged vertically, as shown in Figure 7-1. The top display LED is the most significant while the lower display LED is the least significant. The function of the Main Control card status indicators depends upon the software currently being executed. At system initialization, they indicate the status of the Main Control card tests; this is summarized in Table 7-l. When the maintenance person is accessing the test line facility, the status indicators are totally dedicated to this 353 7-2 Revision 0 9109-096353-NA Issue 1 Maintenance .-. Controls and Indicators function; refer to Part 7 of this Practice for further details on the test line. Problems with the system floppy disk drive will be indicated by error codes on the displays (See Table 7-2). Finally, the status indicators will show the physical location of the most recent card to have a problem entered into the Maintenance Log. The card’s bay number (top) and slot number (bottom) will be displayed. During normal operation when no applications are using the status indicators, a pair of horizontal dashes will be displayed. The 7-segment displays on the MCC do not clear after reading logs of the problem area. Once the logs have been read in Maintenance, the display is cleared of the previous problem areas. Table 7-l Main Control Card Test Status Codes Test Code Test Name Bus Error Vector/Stack Error Code Test Processor Viability Test 1 PROM Checksum 2 Test El E2 I PAM Load Checksum Test 1 E3 I 14 I E4 I DMA Controller Test/PFS OK* 5 E5 PAM Chip Select Test 6 Limited PAM Test E6 I RAM Data Bit Indep. Test 17 1 E7 Memory Address Test 8 E8 Memory Space Test 9 E9 * Booting System Software b or b. I Eb or Eb. I Parity Test IP Top of PAM determined and displayed Main load being read in from disk Huffman encoded 1 EP 01. or 02. or 52. or c2. or 04. L load being decoded H I E (flashing) L I E (flashing) H I Main load running * * Power Supply Power Fail Sense can cause this test to fail. Upon test failure, test error codes will be flashed for 1 second, Reset Alarm LED. This indicator after which testing will light when the system will begin again from test # 1. has been reset. Active LED. This green LED serves as an indication of the health of the system. A steady 1 second pulse cycle indicates that the system is up and running. If the LED remains constantly on or off, it indicates that the system is not running; in this case consult Practice 9109-096-350-NA, Troubleshooting. 9109-096353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 7-3 General Maintenance Information Alarm Status LEDs. The bottom three LEDs on the main control card are the alarm status LEDs; only one of these LEDs may be on at any one time. They indicate the overall system alarm level; one of: MINOR ALARM, MAJOR ALARM, CRITICAL ALARM or no alarm. If none of the alarm status LEDs are on, the system should be in perfect working order. Refer to Part 3. of this Practice for further information on alarms. Bay’ ‘Ckmtrc)l Card 7.4 The’Bay Control card has three status LEDs, labelled TX, Rx and ALARM. The “TX” ‘and “Rx” LEDs indicate communication (transmit and receive) with the Main Control card. The ALARM LED has two functions. A flashing ALARM LED indicates a failure on the Bay Control card. A permanently lit ALARM LED indicates that the Bay Control card is waiting for, or has lost communication with the Main Control card. See Table 7-3 for a summary of the Bay Control card status LED states. Peripheral Control Card 7.5 The Peripheral Control card (PCC) has two status LEDs, labelled “1” and “2”, located on the card’s front panel (See Figure 7-l). These LEDs are used along with the Scanner card’s 7-segment display status indicators during the Peripheral Control card initialization sequence. Table 7-4 summarizes the functions of the PCC LEDs. Digital Interface 7.6 - The Digital Interface Card (DIC) has two status LEDs, labelled “TX” and “Rx”, located on the card’s front panel (See Figure 7-l). These LEDs have two different functions, During DIC initialization, they are used along with the Scanner card’s 7-segment display status indicators to display initialization status. Table 75 summarizes the LED information for this case. During peripheral bay loading, they are used to indicate message traffic between the main control and the peripheral control. In this case, the TX LED indicates message information is being transmitted from the peripheral control to the main control. Similarly, the Rx LED indicates message information being transmitted from the main control to the peripheral control. Fiber Interface 7.7 Card Module The Fiber Interface Module (FIM) has two status LEDs, labelled “TX” and “Rx,” located on the card’s front panel (See Figure 7-2). The two LED indicators show the status of the local and remote clocks. Table 7-6, summarizes what it means when the LED is; flashing, on, or off. The maintenance port is located at the rear of the Control Node (See Figure 7-3). 353 7-4 Revision 0 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Maintenance Table 7-2 Diskette Table 7-3 1 TxLED ) RxLED Error Codes Card Status Leds Alarm LED 1 Meaning on on on Bay Control card is either waiting for, or has lost communication with the Main Control card. If this state persists for more that a few seconds, there is no communication. flashing flashing on Bay Control card is being downloaded card. flashing flashing Off Off Off Off I I Bay Control Controls and Indicators - 9109-096-353-NA I 1 flashing Issue 1 by the Main Control Bay Control card is up and running and communicating the Main Control card. to This is the normal operating condition of the Bay Control card when the PABX is idle and diagnostics are off. I 1There is a failure on the Bay Control card. Revision 0 I I 353 7-5 General Maintenance information Table 7-4 Peripheral Control Card Test Status Indicators * The “PCC RAM Test” is run only if this test fails; hence there is no “test fail” error code. ** OAindicatesthat Bay3isreadyfordownloading; AAindicatesthat Bays4and 5are ready. Similarly, has finished loading; b4 indicates Bays 4 and 5 have finished. Table 7-6 Dlgital Interface b3 indicates Card Test Status Indicators Test Name Test Pass Test Pass Test Fall Test Fall DIC LEDs Scanner LEDs DIC LEDs Scanner LEDs both off DIC to PCC Link Test DIC RAM Test 03 both off Fb IA III W I II/ FS Fb I= b 14AllENDANT CONSOLE KEYS (FIXEDKFYS) INDkkS I N 12DlALKEYS 2 VOLUMECOMROL KEYS 2CONW4STCONTROLK 4 C4HSORcOMROL KEYS Figure 7-5 Attendant Console Keyboard -Power Supplies 7.11 Rear Door Power Supplies. Any SX-200 DIGITAL PABX cabinet that includes analog bays includes a rear door power supply (see Figure 7-8). The ac Power LED indicates the presence of ac power connected to the power supply. The CONVERTER INPUT LED indicates the presence of transformed power at the DC converter input. The EQUIPMENT SHELF POWER ON LED indicates whether or not the TOP SHELF POWER ON switch on the maintenance panel is in the ON position. The RESERVE BA-TTERY CONNECTED LED is not used. Bay Power Supplies. Each digital equipment bay requires one Bay Power Supply are two LED indicators located on the front panel of the bay power supply; the top LED is the power ON indicator, and the bottom LED is the ring generator indicator. The ring generator indicator will flash on only when ringing signal is applied. (see Figure 7-9). There 353 7-12 Revision 0 9109-096453-NA Issue 1 Maintenance Controls and Indicators Floppy Disk Drive 7.12 ._ The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX 5.25” floppy disk drive has one LED on its front panel. For the LED indicator on the SX-ZOO DIGITAL PABX 5.25 floppy disk drive see Figure 7-7 The LED indicators light up when the disk drive magnetic heads are in contact with the floppy diskette. Power should never be turned off while this LED is on. Powering down with the heads engaged can cause corruption of data on the diskette. If powering down is necessary, first wait for the LED to go off, then turn the lever to the ‘diskette removal position’ (see Figure 7-7). Both disk drives are powered from the BPS in Bay 2 (see Figure 7-9). On a 672-port cabinet, both disk drives are powered from Bay 0. The SX-200 FD 3.5” floppy disk drive indicator on the SX-200 FD 3.5 floppy light up when the disk drive magnetic Power should never be turned off while engaged can cause corruption of data 9109-096-453-NA Issue 1 has one LED on its front disk drive See Figure 7-6. heads are in contact with this LED is on. Powering on the diskette. Revision 0 panel. For the LED The LED indicators the floppy diskette. down with the heads 353 7-13 General Maintenance Information FLDPPY DISK DFilVE (FDD) ‘A’ : FLDPPY DISK DFA’E (FDD) ‘B POWER SUPPLYUNlT WJI Figure 7-6 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive 353 7-14 Revision 0 9109-096353-NA Issue 1 Maintenance Controls and Indicators LED indicat- PUSHTO RIGHTA+ INSEFfllNG DISKEKE TURN LEVER ‘0 RlGH-rAFrER SERTlNO DlSKEllE USH IN TO REMOV DISKEITE Figure 7-7 SX-200 DIGITAL Disk Drive Power Fail Transfer Card 7.13 The Power Fail Transfer card is located on the inside of the equipment cabinet on the side panel (see Figure 7-10 and Figure 7-11). The power fail transfer LED is located at the top of the card (see Figure 7-12). When this LED is on, the system is in normal operation; when the LED is off, the system is in power fail transfer mode. The PFT card in the Universal Cabinet has no status LEDs, and is mounted on the right side as viewed from the rear, (see Figure 7-13). 9109-0964353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 7-15 General Maintenance Information coNvERTEFl INPUT LED CONVERTER INPUT SWTRH REsEFivE BATTERY CONNECTED LED AC POWER LED AC LINEFUSE AC POWER INPUT Figure 7-9 Rear Door Power Supply Indicators POWER SWKCH -) 1 I 0 POWER ON IN)ICATOR KAToR INDICATOR /\ 4--in.E w w@ V Figure 7-9 Bay Power Supply 353 7-16 Revision 0 9109-096453-NA issue 1 Maintenance Controls and Indicators INIERCONNECT CARD BAYS , PFr CARD BAY4 Figure 7-10 Power Fail Transfer Card Location - Peripheral Cabinet 9109-09643534A issue 1 Revision 0 General Maintenance Information PERIPHERAL POWER FAIL TRANSFERCARD FANASSEMBLY POWER SUPPLY ccou54 Figure 7-11 Power Fail Transfer Card Location - Universal Control Cabinet 353 7-18 Revision 0 9109-096453-NA Issue 1 Maintenance Controls and indicators POWER FAIL TFLANSFEREDON NORMAL OFF SYSTEMIN PFT Figure 7-12 PFT Card (480-Port Configuration and Welded Control Cabinet) 9109-09&353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 7-19 General Maintenance I Information I I POWER FAILTRWSFER CARD L . . . .. . .. .. . .. LO OPTlON4L LSjGS COWERSION MODULEFOR PFT CARD Figure 7-13 PFT Card for a Universal Cabinet 353 7-20 Revision 0 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Appendix A. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE The procedures described in the following paragraphs are the only routines required for the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, and are necessary due to the mechanical nature or limited operational life of the components concerned. Air Filter A.1 Each digital equipment cabinet has an air filter to remove dust and particles incoming air flow to maintain a clean environment within the cabinet. It is that the filter be checked frequently, and cleaned regularly, since failure to cause a reduction in the airflow, and a consequent buildup of excess heat cabinet, leading ultimately to component failure. from the important do so will within the The air filter is located on the inside of the cabinet front door, at the bottom. It is held over the intake vent by a self-sticking strip bordering the vent. To remove the filter, simply pull it from the self-sticking strip border. To install the filter, simply place it over the vent, and firmly press the edges onto the self-sticking border. The filter may be cleaned by washing in warm water and detergent, rinsing, and drying. After several washings, the filter may begin to deteriorate; at this point, it should be replaced. The intervals at which this should be done will depend upon the environment in which the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX is located. Regardless of environmental considerations, however, the filter should be changed at least every 6 months. 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 A-l General Maintenance 353 A-2 information Revision 0 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Appendix B. SYSTEM INITIALIZATION B.l When the system is first installed, the default data must be loaded into the system. Refer to Table B-l I Initial Power-up Procedures from the Terminal ‘and Table B-2, Initial Power-up Procedures from the Attendant Console and to Practice 9109-096-200-NA, Installation Information, for details. Note: Generic 1001 software requires only one diskette and one disk drive in Bay 2. Table B-l Initial Power-up Procedures From The Terminal and diskette B into the lower disk drive. Correct diskette orientation is with the read/write access edge first and the write protect notch down. Do not power up or power down while Page 1 of 2 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 353 B-l General Maintenance Information Table B-l lnltial Power-up Procedures (continued) Step 9. 1 0.’ From The Terminal Action Enter the INSTALLER level of access. The display returns the following: ENTER PASSWORD : Enter the required password to gain Customer Data Entry access. The password is defined in Form 27, Form Access Restriction Definition, The default password is 1000. If the correct password is entered, the display returns the following: PLEASE WAIT... ’ and then shows a list of the system’s forms. I Page2 Table B-2 Initial Power-up Procedures Step From The Attendant of 21 Console Action 1. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 from Table B-l, Initial Power-up Procedures from the Terminal. 2. All LEDs on the console light and the LCD displays the following on two rows: oooo~ooon~noooonooooOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 3. If the HOLD 1 LED flashes, the RAM Test failed. If the HOLD 2 LED flashes, the EPROM Test failed. If the HOLD 3 LED flashes, the IRQ Interrupt Test failed. Refer to Practice 9109-094-35&NA, Troubleshooting and this Practice. 4. The Attendant Console LEDs go dark and the LCD now displays the console EPROM version in the top right corner. 5. If any one of the following messages appear on the LCD, refer to Practice 9109-09435&NA, Troubleshooting and to this Practice: CONSOLE HARDWARE PROBLEM ERROR CODE 1 PLEASE NOTE DETAILS ON REPAIR TAG 6. While the system establishes communication with the Attendant Console, the LCD displays NO COMMUNICATION. If communication is not established within 5 seconds, the LCD displays the following: POSSIBLE WIRING ERROR OR SYSTEM FAILURE CHECK FOR CROSSED PAIRS CHECK CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY 7. When communication TUE. JUN 21,1988 [Fl> [F6> is established, the Attendant Console LCD displays the following: 8:54 AM NIGHT 1 [F5> [FO> Page 1 of 353 B-2 Revision 0 9109-096-353-NA 2 Issue 1 Appendix B - System Initialization Table B-2 Initial Power-up Procedures (continued) From The Attendant Console TUE. JUN 21,1988 FORMS01 = SYSTEM CONFIGURATION02 = FEATUREACCESS CODES Page2 9109-098-353-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 of 2 353 B-3 General Maintenance 353 B-4 information Revision 0 9109-096-353-NA issue 1 Appendix C. SAVE DATABASE .-. \ This Appendix DIGITAL PABX When upgraded database from to re-enter the Notes: outlines the procedures to copy the system database. The SX-200 software is stored on floppy diskettes; the database is also stored here. software is obtained, it is desirable to simply copy the customized the old software diskettes onto the new software diskettes, rather than database manually. The procedures are outlined below. 1. Generic 1001 software requires only one diskette and one disk driie in Bay 2. 2. These procedures are not possible across releases. Procedure Cl These procedures involve a complete reset of the system (needed to initialize the new software). Therefore, they should be done only at night, or during a period of low traffic to ensure minimum effect upon system users. To save the database, follow the procedures in Table C-l. . - Table C-l Save Database found, an error message containing the reason for failure is issued is aborted (see Appendix B). Once a successful verification is obtai base to be read into DRAM; this has completed when the following on the maintenance terminal: Page 1 of 2 9109-096-353-NA issue 1 Revision 0 353 Cl General Maintenance Information Table C-l Save Database (continued) Step Procedure 9. If it is not desirable to reset the system at this point, remove the new software diskettes from the disk drives, insert the original diskettes, press the CANCEL softkey, and wait for an appropriate time. Otherwise, proceed to Step 10. Press the SYSTEM RESET pushbutton on the Main Control Card. If the CANCEL softkey is pressed to continue and the upgrade diskettes are in the PABX, it will automatically reset itself. _’ 10. 11. Wait for the reset to complete; this is indicated by the green ACTIVE LED indicator on the Main Control card flashing on and off. The system is now running the new software. Note: It will be possible to log into the maintenance pressing the SYSTEM RESET pushbutton. terminal approximately 2 minutes after Page 2 of 2 Note: The following items, which are stored set call-me-back l . system messages traffic measurement l timed reminders l wake-ups . forwarding are copied tothe new destination diskette when upgrading. (see Note) parameters information l room status, l console l auto answer l trunk meter pulses l digital SUPERSETvolume l printer UART speed l log autoprint Notes: RAM, ID l s in CMOS call type, and call restriction language settings setting setting (message register) levels and ringer pitch 1. If the Main Control Card is changed, a copy data base onto itself should be done in order to obtain the latest version of these fields. 2. When upgrading from a Generic release that can store 100 call-me-back messages to one that can store 250 messages (Generic 1004 or Generic 1003 DO5 and later) or downgrading from 250 to 100, all messages will be lost. 353 C2 Revision 0 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 Appendix D. USERNAME COMMAND PRIVILEGES Table D-l lists the command Table D-l 9109-096-353-NA Issue 1 privileges Username of all of the valid username Command Revision 0 levels: Privileges 353 D-l General Maintenance Information Table D-l COMMAND 1 I Username Command (continued) Installer 1 Maintl I I I Privileges Maint2 I Supervisor Attendant I TRAFFIC PRINT X X TRAFFIC READ X X X X X TRAFFIC STOP X X X X X X X LOGS SET AUTO LOGS READ LOGS PRINT I I X X I X X X I I X I I I I I I I I I 1 X I STOP PRINT LOGS X LOGS DELETE X X SHOW ALARMS X X SHOW CONFIG X X X SHOW STATUS X X X SHOW CHANNEL-MAP X X X X I I 1 I Page 2 of ~21 Revision 0 9109-096353-NA Issue 1 SX-200@ DIGITAL PABX FieldReplaceable Units TM, @ -Trademark ol MIteI Corpomtlon. 0 copyrlghl 1982, Ylbl cG.wmdh. All tights n?~etwd. Phted In canada MITEL 8 Field-Replaceable Units NOTICE The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mite1 Corporation (MITELB). The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mite1 and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes. DEC” and VT700” ii are trademarks of Digital Equipment Revision 0 Corporation. 9109-0964355-NA Issue 1 IMPORTANT Failure to follow all Instructions may result in Improper equipment operation and/or the risk of electric shock. piiq l This product is to be installed and serviced only by qualified personnel. l Read all instructions before attempting -Install all assemblies l to install or use this product. using the procedures described in this Practice. Configure this product with only the assemblies l \ SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS specified in this Practice. Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication equipment. Never operate telecommunication equipment with grounding conductor disconnected. Ensure grounding conductor is installed before connecting telecommunication cabling to any system. l EXPLANATION A A DANGEROUS VOLTAGE l OF USE FOR SYMBOLS AND NOTICES The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, triangle, is intended to alert the user to the uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute electric shock to persons. within an equilateral presence of an product’s enclosure that a significant risk of The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. INSTRUCTIONS I 0 The ground symbol within a circle identifies the terminal which is intended for connection to an external protective conductor. This connector must be connected to earth ground prior to making any other connections to the equipment. PROTECTNE GROUNDING TERMINAL 1 DANGER )I Danger indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not 1 avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Caution indicates a potentially hadardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or damage to the equipment or property. 9109-09~55-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 . .. III Field-Replaceable Iv Units Revision 0 9109-096455-NA Issue 1 Table of Contents 1. INTRODUCTION Reasonforissue..................................................,......... 2. ORDERING Warranty Spares 355 l-l INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 2-l Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 2-1 3. FIELD-REPLACEMENT Precautions.......... PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 3-l List of Figures Figure 3-l Removal/Installation Figure 3-2 Control Cabinet with Digital Peripheral Shelf (336-par-t Configuration) Figure 3-3 Control Cabinet with Digital Peripheral Shelf (672-Part Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5 Figure 3-7 Locating the PFT Card in a Control Cabinet ............................ Power Fail Transfer Card .......................................... PFT Card Connections (336-pat-t Configuration) ........................ PFT Card Connections ............................................ Figure 3-8 Printed Circuit Card Packaging Figure 3-6 Figure 3-9 of Digital Peripheral Bay and Panel .................. Configuration) 355 3-4 ....... ....... ...................................... MainControlCardJumpersandSwitches ............................. Figure 3-l 0 InstallationofModules ............................................ ............................................... - (SX-2008 Welded Cabinet) 355 3-14 355 3-l 5 355 3-20 355 3-23 355 3-25 355 3-27 355 3-33 355 3-37 Figure 3-l 4 Bay Power Supply ................................................ Figure 3-l 5 Floppy Disk Drive ................................................ Figure 3-l 6 Adapter Connections 355 3-11 355 3-l 2 355 3-24 Figure 3-l 1 Main Control Card and Decryption Module ............................. Figure 3-l 2 Installation of a Tl Clock Module onto an MCC ......................... Figure 3-l 3 PowerSupplyUnit 355 3-8 355 3-9 355 3-39 ....................... 355 340 Figure 3-l 7 Remove/Install 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive ................................ Figure 3-l 8 SX-200FDFIMCarrier ........................................... 355 346 Figure 3-l 9 Cable Connection 355 347 Figure 3-20 for the Second (Optional) FIM Carrier .................. 355 342 Figure 3-21 Peripheral FIM Carrier and the FIM .................................. Front view of SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet .......................... 355 349 355 3-50 Figure 3-22 Installing Fiber Cables from the Control Node to the Peripheral Node ........ 355 3-51 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 V Field-Replaceable Units List of Tables Table 2-l Digital Peripheral Cards Table 2-2 Spares ....................................................... Analog Peripheral Cards ............................................ ..35 5 2-2 Table 2-4 Peripheral Equipment Table 2-5 UpgradeKits 355 2-5 ..35 5 2-8 Table 2-6 Table 3-l Documentation PSU Connectors Table 2-3 355 2-l ............................................ 355 25 ............................................. .................................................. ................................................. and Cable Adapters (SX-,200 FD System) ..35 5 2-9 ................ 355 3-34 List of Charts Chart 3-l 355 3-2 ..35 5 3-2 Chart 3-2 Power Down System .............................................. PowerUpSystem .............................................. Chart 3-3 Install digital Peripheral Bay Chart 3-4 Install Control Cabinet Chart 3-5 Install Six-Circuit Chart 3-6 Chart 3-7 Remove / Install Analog Peripheral Bay ............................... Remove / Install Printed Circuit Cards ................................. ......................................... ............................................. Power Fail Transfer Card Remove a Module from the Main Control Card Chart 3-9 Install Modules on Main Control Card Chart 3-l 1 Remove/Install .355 3-6 355 3-l 0 ............................ Chart 3-8 Chart 3-l 0 Remove/Install 355 3-3 355 3-l 6 355 3-l 8 .......................... 355 3-21 ,355 3-22 ................................. Control Resource Card in the SX-200 FD Control Node Bay Control Card .................................... ....... ......................... Chart 3-l 2 Chart 3-l 3 Remove/Install SX-200 FD Power Supply Unit Remove/ Install Bay Power Supply .................................. Chart 3-l 4 Remove / Install 5.25” Floppy Disk Drive Chart 3-l 5 Remove / Install 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive .............................. ............................... Chart 3-l 6 Open and Close SX-200 FD Cabinet Door ............................ ....................... Chart 3-l 7 Install a FIM Carrier in SX-200 FD Control Node Chart 3-l 6 Install Peripheral _ Chart3-19 Chart 3-20 Chart 3-21 vi 355 3-28 FIM Carrier and FIM in a SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet Remove Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM in a SX-200 .355 3-29 ,355 3-31 .355 ,355 3-35 3-38 .355 3-41 .355 3-43 .355 3-44 .... 355 3-48 FD Peripheral Cabinet ... 355 3-52 Remove / Install Rear Door Fan Assembly on an SX-200 DIGITAL Universal Cabinet ................................................ .355 3-53 Repacking Equipment ,355 3-54 For Shipment ................................. Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 1 ’ INTRODUCTION This document contains ordering information and field replacement SX-2OoB DIGITAL Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX). instructions for the Reason for issue ’ 1.1 This document reflects the content of SX-200 DIGITAL and the SX-200 FD softvvare release Generic1 005. This document also applies to Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1003, and Generic 1004 9109-096455-NA issue 1 Revision 0 355 l-l Field-Replaceable 355 l-2 Units Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 2 ’ ORDERING INFORMATION The ordering information is divided into the following l Table 2-1 lists all digital cards and modules l Table 2-2 lists spares for all configurations. l Table 2-S lists all analog l Table 2-4 lists all peripheral l Table 2-5 lists upgrade l Table 2-S lists system .- tables: required. cards required. equipment. kits. documentation, Note: A complete list of circuit card part numbers, engineering provided in Practice 9109-096-203-NA, numbers and revision levels is Safety Instructions. Warranty 2.1 The MITELB SX-200 DIGITAL communications system is warranted against defective material and workmanship. Equipment requiring service or repair during the warranty period must be packaged in accordance with Chart S-21 and returned prepaid to the supplier. Repaired or replacement equipment is returned to the customer, post prepaid by MITEL. Spares level 2.2 MITEL recommends that the minimum sparing level be one replacement unit for any part installed in the field for the first system installed. This would be 100% spares for the first system installed. As the number of installed systems increases, the sparing level should decrease to 10% of the installed units. Table 2-l Common Name Digital Peripheral Part Number Cards Comments ONS Line Card 9109-01 MOO-SA For Rotary and DTMF Telephones circuits per card) COV Line Card 9109-02O-OOO-SA 6 COV Circuits per card OPS Line Card 9109-04O-OOO-SA 6 OPS Circuits per card Digital Line Card 9109-012-OOO-SA 12 DNIC Circuits per card (12 Page 1 of 2 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 2-l Field-Replaceable Units Table 2-1 Digital Peripheral (continued) Common Part Number Name Cards Comments LSGS Trunk Card - CSA 9109-011-001-SA 6 CO Trunk Interfaces (for use in Canada and the United States) DlD.Trunk 9109-031~0O-SA 6 DID Circuits per card Tl Trunk Card SX-200 DIGITAL 9109-021~OO-SA Includes Tl Trunk Adapter. Tl Truhk Adapter DIGITAL 9109-l _ SX-200 Tl Trunk Card SX-200 Tl Trunk Adapter 21 -OOO-NA FD SX-200 FD 9400-l 00-302-NA Tl Clock Module 9109-06O-OOO-SA Stratum 3 Clock Module Tl Clock Module 9109-061-00O-SA Stratum 4 Clock Module Universal Card 9109-005-OOO-SA supports: - E&M Trunk Module - Music On Hold/Pager Module - Receiver/Relay Module - Console Module E&M Trunk Module 9109-013-OOO-SA 1 E&M Trunk Circuit per Module 9109-016-00O-SA Music Input, Paging Preamp Output, and Relay to control external amplifier 9109-016-OOO-SA 4 DTMF Rece’wers and 2 General Purpose Relays 9109-025-OOO-SA Console Interface (LCD Console) Music On Hold/Pager Receiver/Relay Module Module Console Module Page 2 of 2 Table 2-2 Spares Marketlng Name Part Number Comments Basic Control Cabinet 9106-00&001~1 Universal Cabinet with COMBO Control Bay (Bays 1 and 2) - 115 volt (for use in the United States) Basic Control Cabinet 9106-000-005-01 Universal Cabinet with COMBO Control Bay (Bays 1 and 2) - 230 volt Basic Control Cabinet 9106-000-011-01 Universal Cabinet with COMBO Control Bay (Bays 1 and 2) - 115 volt (for use in Canada) Page 1 of 4 355 2-2 Revision 0 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Ordering Information Table 2-2 Spares (continued) Page 2 of 4 9109-09H55-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 2-3 Field-Replaceable Units Table 2-2 Spares (continued) Marketing Name Part Number Comments System Disks Generic 1003 ACD 9109-034-302-NA 6 Floppy Diskettes System B72+oti System 372-part 9109-0343ll-NA 6 Floppy Diskettes 9109-034-312-NA 6 Floppy Diskettes System Disks Generic 1004 3ase 9109-034-40O-NA 6 Floppy Diskettes System Disks Generic 1004 ACD 9109-034-41 6 Floppy Diskettes Wain Control Card 2 Meg Memory Module 9109-03~0O-SA 9109-002-003SA Without modules Generic 1001, Generic 1002 and Generic 1003 4 Megabyte Memory Module 3X Module 9109-002-005SA 9109-004-00OSA Switch Matrix Card Switch Matrix Module for Zeneric 1005 Control Resource Card for Generic 1005 13ay Power Supply 9109-006-00O-SA 940&l 00-30O-NA Generic 1003 ACD and Generic 1004 for 336,456, and 48O-ports (mounts on MCC) For 672-par-t system only For SX-200 FD 9400-I 00-303-NA For SX-200 FD 9109-008-000-!3A 115 volt - one required in each equipped digital Bay Bay Power Supply 9109-008-002-NA 230 volt - one required in each equipped digital Bay Bay Control Card Power Fail Transfer Card PCM Cable (Bay 2-3) PCM and Ground Cable (Bay 24) PCM Cable (Bay 4-5) 9109-017-00oSA Disks Generic 1003 B&e Disks Generic 1003 ACD PFT Monitor Cable Rear Door Power Supply IIOV Rear Door Power Supply 230V Digital Interface Card O-NA 9109-023-OOO-SA 9108-025-OOO-NA 9108-026-OOO-NA 6 Power Fail Transfer Circuits For 48O-port system For 48O-port and 456-part systems 9108-027~0O-NA 9108-028-OOO-NA 911 O-l OS-003NA For 48O-pott and 456-par-t systems 91 IO-208-000-NA For 48O-port analog Bay 3 and analog Peripheral cabinet (with 20 Hz ringer) For 48O-port and 456-par-t systems For 48O-port analog Bay 3 and analog Peripheral cabinet 9108-002-00O-SA Page 3 of 4 355 24 Revision 0 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Ordering Information Table 2-2 Spares (continued) Marketlng Name Peripheral Control Card LSGS Conversion Module I Part Number Comments 9108-203-l OO-SA 9109-043-OOO-SA Converts 6 Circuits from Loop Start to Ground Start (mounts onto PFTcard) I Page 4 of 4 Table 2-3 Analog Marketing Name Part Number E&M Trunk Card - CSA 9110-013-001-NA DIDTIE Trunk Card - CSA 9110-031-001-NA Scanner Card (1200 BAUD) 911 O-l 04-000-NA Peripheral Cards Comments Line Card @-Station) I9110-llO-OOO-NA 1 I CO Trunk Card - CSA I9110-211-001-NA 14-Circuit CO Trunk Card I SlJPERSE7- Line Card 911 O-41 O-000-NA Table 24 Marketlng Name Peripheral 8-Circuit SLJPERSET3” and SUPERSET 48 Line Card I Equipment Part Number Comments 9150-ACD-02D-NA ACD Telemarketed Reporting System LCD Console SUPERCONSOLE I91 08-007-001 1000” -NA 9189-OOO-OOl-NA Console with tilt LCD display (interfaces to Digital Line Card) and English documentation 9189-000-003-NA Console with tiit LCD display (interfaces to Digital Line Card) and French documentation 9108-036-OOO-NA Keypad Label and Protective Lens attendant console (English) SUPERCONSOLE attendant console (French) LCD Console Lens and Label Kit 1ESD enhanced Page 1 of 4 9109--09r%%-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 2-5 Field-Replaceable Units Table 2-4 Peripheral Equipment (continued) Marketing Name Part Number Comments Console Cable 9109-007-90O-NA Spare 3.5 m (12 ft.) console cable LCD Console French Sonve.rsion.-Kit 9108-04O-OOO-CA French Keypad Label and French Attendant Console Guide SUPERSET 3 Telephone 9173-000-021-NA Multi-feature SUPERSET 3 French Sonversion Kit 9173-07O-OOOCA French Labels and User Reference (quantity: 25) SUPERSET 3 Lens Kii 9173-002-OOONA SUPERSET 3 Protective Lens (quantity: 10) SUPERSET 4 Telephone 9174-OOm25-NA Full Feature Multiline Telephone SUPERSET 4 Telephone French 917aOo-022-CA French SUPERSET 4 Telephone SUPERSET 4 Label Kit [Mark I) 9174-002XrOl-NA Telephone number and Line Identification labels (quantity: 25) SUPERSET 4 Lens Kit (Mark I) 917m02-OOO-NA SUPERSET 10) SUPERSET 4 Label Kii (Mark II / Ill) English and French 9174-002-004-NA Telephone number and Line Identification labels (quantity: 25) SUPERSET 4 Lens Kit (Mark II and Mark Ill) 9174-002-003-NA SUPERSET 4 Protective (quantity: 10) SUPERSET 4 Support Stand 9174-OOl-OOO-NA Spare Stand for SUPERSET 4 Telephone (quantity: 8) iandset 9170-048-002-NA Spare Handset for SUPERSETB and SUPERSET Telephones (quantii: 10) 917&048-001 Spare Handset Cord for SUPERSET 3 and SUPERSET 4 Telephones (quantity: 10) iandset Cord SUPERSET Line Cord Pack -NA 9170-048-004-NA 3-line Telephone Protective Cards Lens (quantity: Lens Spare Line Cord for SUPERSET telephones and for SUPERCONSOLE Attendant Consoles (quantity: 10) 700C SUPERSET 401 Telephone 9113-000-060-NA Single line digital telephone SUPERSET 407 Label Kit (Mark II / Ill) English and French 9113-005-001-NA Telephone number and Line identification labels (quantity: 12) SUPERSET 407 Lens Kit (Mark II and Mark Ill) 9113-004-001 SUPERSET 12) SUPERSET 410 Telephone 9114-00&000-NA Multi-line SUPERSET 410 Label Kit (Mark II / Ill) English and French 9114-002-001-NA Telephone 9114-003-001-NA Line number identification -NA set Protective Lens (quantity: digital telephone set number identification labels labels Page 2 of 4 355 2-6 Revision 0 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Ordering Information Table 2-4 Peripheral Equipment (continued) SUPERSET Label Kit SUPERSET DSS” Module Page 3 of 4 9109-09N55-NA issue 1 Revision 0 355 2-7 Field-Replaceable Units Table 2-4 Peripheral Equipment (continued) Marketing Name DATASET 1102 card Part Number Comments 9141-l l O-200-NA Dual Rack-Mounted DATASET 9141-l 1 O-300-NA Standalone Milink Data Module 9112-l 00-000-NA For the SX-200 DATASET 2102 card \ 9141-21&20O-NA Rack-Mounted DATASET Standalone 9141-210-30O-NA Standalone DATASET 9141-900-l OO-NA Cabinet to hold datashelves 9141-901-l OO-NA Shelf to hold rack-mounted StandaloneDATASET 1103 DATASET 2103 DATACABINET 9000 DATASHELF 9100 Modem Interconnect Panel 9141-940-lOO-NA asynchronous asynchronous DATASET FD synchronous/asynchronous synchronous/asynchronous Installs in DATACABINET DATASETs 9000 cabinet Paae 4 of 4 Table 2-5 Marketing Name Upgrade Part Number Analog Bay 5 kit 9106-013-OOO-NA 12-circuit 9106-03O-OOO-NA PFT Kii Kits Comments 6-circuit PFT Kii 9109-03O-OOO-SA LSGS Conversion Module for 6-circuit PFT Card 9109-043-OOOSA Converts 6 Circuits from Loop Start to Ground Start (mounts onto PFTcard) Digital Peripheral Bay Kit with Shelf - 115Volt 9109-046-OOOSA Includes bay power supply, Bay Control Card and Digital Peripheral Bay with backplane. Digital Peripheral Bay Kit with Shelf - 23OVolt 9109-046-OOl-NA Includes bay power supply, Bay Control Card and Digital Peripheral Bay with backplane. Digital Peripheral Bay Kit without Shelf - 115 Volt 9109-047-OOO-SA Includes bay power supply, Bay Control Card and peripheral backplane. Digital Peripheral Bay Kit without Shelf - 230 Volt 9109-047-001 Includes bay power supply, Bay Control Card and peripheral backplane. 336-to 672 -port Upgrade Kit (for USA) 9109-l 29-OOOSA 336 to 672 -port Upgrade Kit (for Canada) 9109-l 29-01 O-NA 355 2-8 -NA Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 Ordering Information Table 2-6 Documentation 9109-952-006-CA stem User Guide Guide 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 2-9 Field-Reolaceable Units Table 2-6 Documentation (continued) Marketing Name Part Number SUPERSET Guide 420 Installation 9115-953-050-NA SU&RSET 430 User Guide 9116-953-001-NA SUPERSET Guide installation Comments 9116-953-05CkNA \ 355 2-10 Page Revision 0 9109-096355-NA 2 of 2 Issue 1 3 ’ FIELD-REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES .I_ Only persons who have successfully training course for the SX-200 replacement procedures. completed a MITEL Installation and Maintenance DIGITAL PABX should perform removal and Instructions must be followed explicitly when they Involve work &th and changes to the primary power supply of the unit. Precautions 3.1 Observe handling l the following precautions when working on the system, PCB cards or using test equipment to measure voltages. particularly when When replacing PCB cards turn power off (when possible), but maintain the ground connections to the equipment. Power must be OFF, when inserting or removing common control cards, which are identified with appropriate warnings on their faceplates. 0 Always wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling printed circuit cards. Handle PCB cards only by the edges and avoid contact with any exposed electrical connections. When removing a new card from its package, touch the package to the cabinet frame first to release any static voltage buildup, prior to removing the card and inserting it into the equipment. l Conductive packages (antistatic bags) should be grounded prior to opening them to remove the contents, and similarly grounded prior to placing a card in the package. Suspected faulty cards should be placed in conductive packages to prevent further possible damage to the cards. Cards that are not correctly packed in antistatic bags when returned will not be covered by any warranty. 9109-09M55-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-l Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-l When you have completed l this chart you will have: Powered down the system. -2 step Power Down System Action Comments power Down System 1. \ Unlock and open rear and front doors. 2. Remove diskettes from floppy driie(s) (access via the front of the cabinet). Ensure disk drive LEDs are OFF before removing diskettes. 3. Turn off Bay Power Supply switches, Peripheral Shelf power switches (if present), and remove cabinet line cord(s) from the wall outlet. The system is now properly powered down, and its doors are open, to provide access to all equipment contained within. Chart 3-2 When you have completed l Power Up System this chart you will have: Powered up the system. Step Comments ActIon Power Up System I 1. Plug cabinet line cord(s) into the wall outletTurn on Bay Power Supply switches and Peripheral Shelf power switches (if present). 2. Reinsert diskettes into floppy d&e(s), and press RESET on the Main Control card front panel. 3. Replace any covers or barriers that were removed previously. Close and lock the front and rear doors. 355 3-2 Revision 0 The system is now properly powered up, and its doors are closed and locked, to prevent unauthorized access to equipment contained within, 9109-0964355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-3 Install Digltal Peripheral When you have completed l l l \ l Procedures Bay this chart: The original shelf will be disconnected and removed. The equipment to be installed as digital peripheral bay will be inventoried, unpacked, and inspected. The original cards, Bay Control Card and the Bay Power Supply will be set aside. The shelf and backplane will be installed. . Shelf grounds will be connected. . PCM cables will be connected. Step Comments Action defer to Chart 3-l. Power Down System Remove Shelf 1. Remove cards from shelf. l l Remove all cards from the shelf. Identify each card with the location from which it was removed. 2. Disconnect wiring from shelf backplane. dentify and label all wires and cables .emoved from backplane. 3. At the front of the cabinet, remove and retain screws holding the shelf, and slide the shelf out of the cabinet. see Figure 3-l. Unpack New Equlpment, - rlote that the bay power supply has a ine cord (which must be unplugged) xttached to it at the back of the shelf. store each card nearby in an antistatic lag. The Floppy Disk Drive and the Bay ‘ower Supply are secured to the shelf )y locking screws at the front. Inspect 4. Unpack all cartons. 5. Tag defective items. 6. Fill in the relevant portion of damage report. 7. Repack tagged items and return according to local procedures. Install Shelf 6. If digital peripheral bay 3 is being added to an operating system, power it down. 9. Open the front door of the control cabinet. Page 1 of 3 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-3 Field-Replaceable Units Chart M Step Install Digital Peripheral (continued) Action Bay Comments 10. Slide the digital peripheral shelf onto top of existing shelf. 11’. Fasten it to the front rails with eight 1O-32 x 0.5 in screws. Shown in Figure 3-l. Install the blanking panel above the shelf, and Shown in Figure 3-l. 12. \ fasten it to the front rails with two 1 O-32 x 0.5 in. screws. 13. Replace original cards, Bay Power Supply, Floppy Drive in shelf. 14. Close the front door. Figure 3-l Removal/Installation Use antistatic wrist strap. Reconnect Disk Drive line cord at backplane. of Digital Peripheral Bay and Panel Page 2 of 3 355 3-4 Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-3 Install Digital Peripheral (continued) Action Step Connect Shelf Ground Bay Comments Wires 15. Open the rear door. -i-S. Connect the original ground wires from the new shelf to the cabinet frame using a 1 O-32 x 0.5 in. screw and external tooth lock washer. Connect Procedures Details of ground connections are shown Practice 9109-096-20O-NA, Installation Information. . PCM Cables 17. Connect original PCM cables to the backplane. CAUTION: The connector plug must be positioned so the cable hangs downwards from it. If a connector plug is reversed, equipment function will be impaired. 16. Connect original PCM ground leads to associated Fasten connectors. Shown in Practice 9109-096-20O-NA, Installation Information. 19. Close rear door. Page 3 of 3 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-5 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-4 Install Control Cabinet When you have completed this chart: l The original cabinet will be disconnected, l The new control cabinet will be in its assigned position. l Power requirements l Shelf screws will be tightened. will be checked. l Bays will be numbered l The cabinet will be powered up. Notes: emptied and removed. 1. When positioning the control cabinet, allow room for any PABX accessories, such as a UPS or AC surge suppressor, or peripherals such as a maintenance terminal. 2. Arrange for the power requirements for these peripherals and accessories. These power requirements are described in the documentation provided with the items. Comments Step Action 1. Unpack and inspect new cabinet - check for damaged, or missing items. Position it near the cabinet to be replaced. 2. Power down system. Refer to Chart 3-l. 3. Move the existing cabinet aside (with the green ground cable still connected). This will allow for cards and other components to be transferred directly from the old cabinet to the new cabinet. Position New Cablnet 4. Put the new control cabinet in its assigned position. Equlpment Location: The cabinet has a fan assembly mounted in the rear door for cooling. Therefore, the bottom area of the cabinet must be unobstructed and not too close to a wall or other equipment so the air vents are clear. All cabinet installation conditions listed in Practice 9109-09620O-NA, Installation Information, must be met. 6. Make sure there is adequate room for access. The minimum floor space is 75 cm (30 in.) front and rear, 60 cm (24 in.) at one side, and 5 cm (2 in.) at the other side. 6. Allow enough room for cables to enter the rear base of the cabinet. 7. Make sure the cabinet is within reach of the cross-connect block. Page 1 of 4 355 3-6 Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-4 Install Control (continued) Step 8. Action 9. System Cabinet Comments Make sure it is within reach of the AC receptacle. Connect \ Procedures The plug should be accessible enough SOyou can unplug the cabinet for naintenance. However, you shouldn’t )e able to unplug the cabinet accidentally. Ground To New Cabinet Connect the green ground wire to the ground stud in the new cabinet; then make a temporary connection between that ground stud, and the ground stud in the old cabinet. Transfer Wires and Cables 10. Identify and remove wires and cables from the old cabinet, and reconnect to same locations in the new cabinet. Tighten 11. f a peripheral shelf is present, transfer t when its cables have been disconnected (see applicable )rocedure). The upper PFT card must )e removed after the shelf is removed. Similarly, it must be installed in the new :abinet before the shelf is installed. Shelf Screws Tighten all shelf retaining screws. Transfer Cards 12. While wearing an antistatic wrist strap, remove cards from the old cabinet, and install directly into the same locations in the new cabinet. Remove Old Cabinet - 13. When all items have been transferred to the new cabinet, remove the temporary ground connection, and remove the old cabinet. 14. Power Up System. Refer to Chart 3-2. Page 2 of 4 9109-09&355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-7 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-4 Install Control (continued) Cabinet DIGKAL PERIPHERU SHELF ” .hFb BAY 1 BAY2 CONTROL SHELF POWERDISTM~ION AC FILTER Figure 3-2 Control Cabinet with Digital Peripheral Shelf (33Gpo1-t Configuration) Page 3 of 4 355 3-8 Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-4 install Control (continued) PERlPnEflu Procedures Cabinet snlw I I SAYS - l-----l- / MAINTENANCE PANEL Figure 3-3 Control Cabinet with Digital Peripheral Shelf (672-Po1-t Configuration) Page 4 of 4 910M9M55-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-9 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-5 Install Six-Circuit When you have completed Power Fail Transfer Card this chart: . The old PFT card(s) will be removed. 9 The new PFT card(s) will be installed. An alarm will be connected l (optional). Notes:, 1. The PFT card connects central office trunks to selected station lines when there is a power failure. Calls in progress are dropped. Calls made in PFT mode and in progress when the system returns to normal operation are not dropped and end normally when the call ends. Dial pulse trunks must connect to rotary dial telephones. DTMF trunks can connect to either DTMF or rotary dial telephones. 2. In 336-par-t systems, the PFT relays are controlled from bay 2; in 672-port they are controlled from bay 0. systems, 3. All systems are delivered with a six-circuit PFT card installed. Two more six-circuit PFT cards can be added in the control cabinet. In the 672-par-t system, PFTs in the peripheral cabinet can be connected to the optional PFf alarm. Step 1. Action Power Down System Disconnect 2. Comments See Chart 3-1. PFT Wiring. Identify and disconnect wires and cables from the PFT card to be replaced. Identifying / labeling simplifies the reconnecting of cables to the replacement PFT card. Remove PFT Card 3. Attach antistatic wrist strap, and remove the screws which hold the PFT card in place; remove the PFT card. - The top PFT card is held in place by 4 screws. To access 2 of them, it is necessary, (if an SAE socket set is used then this is not necessary) to go to the front of the cabinet and remove the screws which hold the shelf in place. necessaryThen slide the shelf out to expose the PFT screws After replacing the PFT card, slide the shelf back in, and put the shelf mounting screws back in. Remove 4. LS/GS Module If there is a Loop Start to Ground Start module on the PFT card, remove it, and retain it, to connect it to the replacement PFT card. Place it in an antistatic bag until it required. Page 1 of 6 355 3-10 Revision 0 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-5 Install Six-Circuit Power Fail Transfer (continued) Card Comments Action Step Procedures RlGHT-HAND FROM REAR SIDE OF CABINET I Figure 3-4 Locating the PFT Card in a Control Cabinet Unpack, 5. Inspect New PFT Card(s) Install LS to GS Conversion 6. A PFT card is shown in Figure 3-4. Carefully unpack PFT card. Module Position the LS to GS conversion module on the card, and attach it to the standoffs with the screws supplied. Page 2 of 6 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-11 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-5 Install Six-Circuit Power Fail Transfer (continued) SW 1 4 Comments Action 3-2 1 1 1 11 c-1 c I[ TBl 1 II Card II II f 3. 1 0 Jl 0 7 Figure 3-6 Power Fail Transfer Card Page 3 of 6 355 3-12 Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-5 Install Six-Circuit Power Fall Transfer (continued) Card Comments Actlon Step Procedures Install Card 7. Position the PFT card - line up with holes, and screw on with the two self-tapping screws. Connect \ a. The PFT card is Cables to New PFT Card Reconnect cables to new PFT card - see Figure 3-5 or Figure 3-6. Connect Shown in Figure 34. already installed. Optional Reference Practice 9109-09&20O-NA, nstallation Information, if required. Alarm 9. Connect an optional remote alarm (customer-supplied) to TBI-2 and TBl-4 of the upper PFT card in the control cabinet. 10. Connect the ALARM pair from TBI-1 and TBl-3 of the upper card to TBG2 and TBl-4 respectively, of the second card. 11. Connect the ALARM pair from TBI-1 and TBl-3 of the second card to TBI-2 and TBl-4 respectively, of the third card. The PFT card supplies a closed contact signal when in PFT mode. Page 4 of 6 9109-096-655-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-13 Field-Redaceable Units Chart 3-5 Step( Install Six-Circuit Power Fail Transfer (continued) Action Card Comments 1 J15 I TBl Upper PFT Card PFT Card 2 I TO1 25 PAIR CROSS-CONNECT BLOCK AT MDF PFT Card 3 25 PAIR cRo55soNNEcT BLOCK AT MDF 25 PAIR CROgsCONNECT Bl.ocK AT MDP J’I Figure 3-6 PFT Card Connections (336-port Configuration) Page 5 of 6 355 3-14 Revision 0 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Field-ReDlacement Chart 3-5 Step install Six-Circuit Power Fail Transfer (continued) Card Comments Action Figure Procedures 3-7 PFT Card Connections Page 6 of 6 9109-096455-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-15 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-6 When you have completed l l l Remove / Install Analog Peripheral Bay this chart: The original shelf will be disconnected and removed. The equipment to be installed as a new peripheral bay will be inventoried, unpacked, and inspected. The original cards will be set aside. t The new shelf and backplane will be installed, . Shelf grounds will be connected. l Signal cables will be connected. Step Comments Actlon Refer to Chart 3-l. Power Down System Remove Shelf 1. Remove cards from shelf. b Remove all cards from the shelf. B Identify each card with the location from which it was removed. If there is a surge clamp connected to the backplane, remove it and retain. 2. Disconnect wiring from shelf backplane. Identify and label each all wires and cables removed from backplane. This will simplify the connection of cables to the new shelf. 3. 4t the front of the cabinet, remove and retain screws holding the shelf, and slide the shelf out of the cabinet. Unpack New Equlpment, - Store each card nearby in an antistatic bag. 4. Unpack all cartons. 5. Tag defective items. .6. 7. Inspect Fill in the relevant portion of damage report. Repack tagged items and return according to local procedures. Install New Shelf 6. Place the replacement shelf on to the shelf guides, slide into place, and fasten with the eight screws removed previously. Page 1 of 2 355 3-16 Revision 0 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-6 Step Action Connect 9. .- Remove I Install Analog (continued) Peripheral Procedures Bay Comments Cables to New Shelf At rear of cabinet, connect ground, power and signal cables to the new shelf in the same way that the original shelf was connected. Install Cards \ IO. Replace original cards into shelf in the same slots they were located in the old shelf. Use antistatic wrist strap. If there was a surge clamp connected to the old backplane, install it on to the new backplane. Its top pins connect to pins 9 and 10 of slot 16. 11. Close the front door. Power up system. Refer to Chart 3-2. Page 2 of 2 9109-096455-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-17 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-7 When you have completed l : Remove / Install Printed Circuit Cards thls chart: You will know how to remove circuit cards from the PABX. : You will know how to repack printed circuit cards for return. piq Power must be off when you are removing the Main Control Card, Bay Control Card, Bay Power Supply, Control Resource Card, Floppy Disk Driie and Switch Matrix Card. Cards that are not correctly packed in antistatic bags and foam packing when returned will not be covered by any warranty. Step Removing 1. Comments Action Cards If you are removing cards from an operating system, turn power off, if possible. CAUTION: The cards that must not be smoved while the system power is on :arry a Caution notice. These cards are: Maln Control Card, Bay Control Card, 3ay Power Supply unlt, Control qesource Card, Floppy Disk Drive, and Switch Matrb< Card. For Bay Power Supply, refer to Chart 3-10; for 5.25” Floppy Disk Drive, refer to Chart 3-14; 2. Make sure the PABX ground is connected. 3. Put on the antistatic wrist strap when removing and repacking cards, The antistatic wrist strap must be connected to the PABX chassis, which must be connected to an approved ground to provide protection from static discharges. 4. Remove the card by using the extractor as a lever and pulling the card towards you. Each digital peripheral card has one card extractor.The extractor helps seat the card firmly in the backplane. - The extractor is used to provide leverage to pull the card free of the backplane connector. Page 1 of 3 355 3-18 Revision 0 9109-098355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-7 Remove / Install Printed (continued) Procedures Circuit Cards Action Comments 5. .-. Unpack the replacement card; if there are modules or jumpers on the original card, transfer them to the replacement card. Ensure that any switches on the replacement card are in the same position as the original card. detain the packaging material for the -epacking of the original card for return. 6. Install the replacement Step Install New Card \ Repacking card into the card slot. Cards ‘ackaging 7. Handle printed circuit cards by their edges only, except when seating connectors. 6. Do not touch the gold edge connectors, 9. Avoid contact with any exposed electrical connections. 10. Use the sleeve, foam packing, and antistatic bag kept after unpacking. 11. Ground the antistatic bag before putting a card in ft. 12. As soon as you remove a card from a slot, place it in an antistatic bag. is shown in Figure 3-6. iandling the card faces or components nay cause damage. The original, or similar, packaging naterial should be used. Suspected faulty cards should be Dlaced in antistatic bags to prevent Lrther possible damage. CAUTION: Cards that are not correctly Dacked in antistatic bags and foam oacking when returned will not be covered by any warranty. 13. When you are finished, replace the antistatic wrist strap in the cabinet. 14. If you have powered down the system, power it up again. - Return Card .15. Return a damaged procedures. card according to local Page 2 of 3 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-19 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-7 Step Remove / Install Printed Circuit Cards (continued) Action Figure 34 Comments Printed Circuit Card Packaging Page 3 of 3 355 3-20 Revision 0 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-8 When you have completed Remove a Module from the Main Control Procedures Card this chart: A module will be safely removed from the MCC. l rzG6i-j Remove conductive articles such as rings and watches before handling the . , , .cA;;;Wrr Card. Do not use a screwdriver or any similar object to pry the modules away from the main control card. Damage to components or circuit card tracks may result. step Action 1 Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. Given in Chart 3-7. 2. Pop the module from the standoffs by applying pressure with your thumb onto the short portion of the standoff projecting through the hole in the module, while pinching with one or two fingers on the opposite side of the module right near the standoff. This “pinching action” avoids bending the circuit card any more than is necessary to release it from the standoff. 3. Carefully separate the connectors by applying pressure at each end of connector. 4. Lift the module from the MCC. DO NOT BEND OR FLEX the module by pulling up on the corners. 9109-996355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-21 Field-Reolaceable Units Chart 3-9 Install Modules When you have completed Card this chart: The memory module will be installed on the MCC. l _’ on Main Control The DX module will be installed on the MCC (336-pat-t configuration only). l The Switch Matrii module will be installed on the MCC (SX-200 \ tern only). l Notes: l The decryption l The Tl clock module will be installed on the MCC (optional). l The MCC will be installed. FD sys- module will be installed on the MCC. 1, 33Gport Conflguratlon: The MCC is located in the control shelf in Bay 2. It is powered by the bay 2 power supply unit. 2. 672-part Configuration: The MCC is located in the control shelf in Bay 0. 3. SX-200 FD PABX: The MCC is located in slot 1 of the Control Node. Remove conductive main control card. Step 1. articles such as rings and watches before handling the Comments Actlon Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. Siven in Chart 3-7. Inspect MCC - 2. Attach the antistatic wrist strap. 3. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. 4. Put the MCC, component side up, onto the bag on top of the PABX or any nearby firm surface. Do not put it on a deformable surface. 5. Make sure that the jumpers (if applicable) are correctly positioned on the MCC and that the S3 switches are set to the OFF or OPEN position. CAUTION: The card may bend as pressure is applied to seat the connectors. Shown in Figure 3-9. Note: Only Revision 3 and 4 MCCs require jumpers. There are no jumpers on Revision A MCCs. The revision number is printed on the card. Page 1 of 6 355 3-22 Revision 0 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-9 Install Modules on Main Control (continued) Figure 3-9 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Procedures Card Main Control Card Jumpers and Switches Revision 0 355 3-23 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-9 Install Modules on Main Control (continued) Card Inspect Standoffs 6. inspect the plastic standoffs on the MCC (where required to mate with the modules). Shown in Figure 3-10. Figure 3-10 Installation of Modules nstall Memory - Module 7. >osition it on the MCC. 6. Press its connector your hand. 9. Press the standoffs into place. 10. Reseat the connector. into place with the palm of Does not apply to SX-200 Install DX Module 11. Unpack the DX module. 12. Position it on the MCC. 13. Press its connector your hand. 14. Press the standoffs into place. FD systems. into place with the palm of Page 3 of 6 355 3-24 Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-9 Install Decryption Install Modules on Main Control (continued) Procedures Card Module 15. Unpack the decryption module. It is packaged with the system software diskette. Each software release has a unique decryption module. .t6. Position it on the MCC. Shown in Figure 3-11. 17. Press its connector into place with the palm of your hand. There are no standoffs for it. Figure 3-11 Main Control Card and Decryption Module Install Swttch Matrlx Module. 16. 19. I Applies only to the SX-200 FD systems. Unpack the Switch fvlatrix module. Position the Switch Matrix module over the Jl and J2 connectors on the MCC. Shown in Figure 3-l 0 Page 4 of 6 9109-09W55-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-25 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-9 Install Modules on Main Control Card (continued) 20. Press the connector into place with the palm of your hand. 21. Press the standoffs _’ into place. Install Tl Clock Module 22. At the top front of the card, locate connector J4. 23. Remove the jumper clip from within the connector. 24. Position the module over J4 and the standoff mounting holes. 25. Press into place with the palm of your hand. 26. Press standoffs Install 27. Shown in Figure 3-12. into place. MCC The MCC and its card slot are each marked with a star. Slide the MCC into its slot. Page 5 of 6 355 3-26 Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-9 Install Modules on Main Control (continued) 28. 1Reseat the connectors. wrist strap 0 Attach @ At top tmnt of card, connector J4; mmova clip irem wlthln thp locate the Jumper connector. @ Place the module over JO and standott mo< hole% and prass Into plrcb, l pmlng gentle won m8s~un ovw cmwmctor - DO NOT BEND OR PI&X @ Press Into plaw Figure 3-12 Card I Plaa the standoff8 Tl clock module, 8tmndoth Procedures Into the flanged and. PC& dso. Installation of a Tl Clock Module onto an MCC Page 6 of 6 9109-096455-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-27 Field-Replaceable Chart 3-10 Units Remove/Install When you have completed l Control Resource Card In the SX-200 FD Control Node this chart: The original Control Resource Card (CRC) will be disconnected, removed. l The new CRC will be unpacked and inspected. l The CRC will be installed in the SX-200 FD PABX Control Node. and Note: ‘The Control Resource Card (CRC) is installed only in the SX-200 FD PABX. Actlon Step Comments Follow General Procedures 1. 2. Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. Given in Chart 3-7. Remove Orlglnal Attach the antistatic wrist strap. CRC Remove original CRC from slot 2 of the Control Node. Unpack and Inspect New CRC 3. Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect the CRC for damage. 4. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. Retain packaging for shipment of original unit. Install New CRC 5. 355 3-28 Slide the CRC into slot 2 of the Control Node Revision 0 CAUTION:The card may flex as pressure is applied to seat the connectors. 9109-096-3554A Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-11 When you have completed Remove/Install Bay Control and l The new Bay Control Card will be unpacked and inspected. l The Bay Control Card will be installed in each peripheral bay. l Notes: Card thls chart: 9 The original Bay Control Card (BCC) will be disconnected, removed. \ Procedures In the SX-,200 FD PABX, the Fiber Interface Module will be installed on the Peripheral FIM Carrier card which will be installed on the Bay Control Card. 1. 33cport Configuration: Install one BCC in digital peripheral Bay 3, and one BCC in the digital peripheral Bay 4. 2. 672-port Configuration: Install one BCC in digital peripheral Bays 1 through 7. 3. SX-ZOO FD PABX: Install one BCC in each digital peripheral Bay (1 through 7). Action Step Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards, Remove 2. Original Given in Chart 3-7. BCC Attach the antistatic wrist strap, and remove original BCC from the digital peripheral Bays. The BCC and its slots are marked with a semicircle. Unpack and Inspect New BCC - 3. Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect the BCC for damage. 4. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. 5. If this is a 336-par-t or a 672 port configuration, go to step 7; if this is a SX-200 FD, go to step 6. Retain packaging for shipment of original unit. Page 1 of 2 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-29 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-11 Remove/Install Bay Control (continued) Action Step Card Comments Install New BCC in Digital Bays 6. 7. Install the Peripheral FIM Carrier and Fiber Interface Module on the BCC, as described in Chart 3-l 8. To remove the FIM Carrier and FIM module, go to Chart 3-l 9. Slide the BCC into its slot in each digital The BCC and its slots are marked ,with a semicircle. \ peripheral bay. Page 2 of 2 Revision 0 9109-0963554A Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-12 When you have completed l Remove/Install SX-200 FD Power Supply Procedures Unit this chart: The SX-200 FD Power Supply Unit will be installed. Note: Only personnel who have successfully completed a MITEL Installation and Maintenance training course for the SX-200 FD PABX should perform this procedure. Action Comments Power down the Node 1. Power down the node as described in Chart 3-1, Power Down System. Open Control 2. Node Cablnet Open the Control Cabinet as described in Chart 3-16, Open and Close the Control Cabinet. Disconnect AC Power Input Line Cord 3. Disconnect the AC power cord from the input receptacle on the PSU, located on the Control Node backplate. See Figure 3-l 3 4. Remove the white cover from the PSU. Disconnect Power Dlstrlbutlon Cables 5. Ensure that the AC power switch on the backplate is in the OFF position and that all cables are clear. 6. Unplug DC power distribution cables from the back of the PSU to the Control Interconnect Card(CIC), the FIM Carrier, the floppy disk drive. Remove Nhere adapter cables are present, disconnect the adapter cable at both ?nds and mark them for later dentification. Adapter cables may have :o be changed with the replacement ‘SU. see Figure 3-13 PSU 7. Unscrew the 4 remaining screws and remove the PSU from the top rear of the node. 6. Remove pushbutton power switch from the backplate by removing the 2 screws holding it in place, and the ground connection from the power switch cable to the cabinet frame. Page 9109-09&355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 1 of 2 355 3-31 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-12 Remove/Install SX-200 FD Power Supply Unit (continued) Comments Action SW Unpack PSU Klt 9. _’ Check contents against packing list and inspect for -loose damaged or missing items. Posltlon and fasten PSU In Node 10. \ Place the PSU on the upper shelf of the node, Jvith the rear of the PSU placed in the opening on the rear panel of the node. Make sure to align the mounting slots of the PSU with the 4 screw slots of the backplane. 11. Fasten the PSU to the backplate with the 4 screws and washers. Connect Power Distribution see Figure 3-l 3 Cables 12. Mount the pushbutton power switch from the PSU in the backplate power switch cutout next to the PSU opening. Attach the ground connector to a screw in the node frame near the PSU. 13. Connect the appropriate power distribution cable to the Control Interconnect Card (CIC), the FIM Carrier, the floppy disk driie. 14. Replace the white PSU cover. see Table 3-l for PSU connector nformation. Power up the Node 15. Power up the node as described in Chart 3-2, Power Up System. Close Control 16. Node Cabinet Close Control Node cabinet as described in Chart 3-l 6. Page 2 of 2 355 3-32 Revision 0 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Procedures Figure 3-13 Power Supply Unit 9109-09C355-4A Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-33 Field-Replaceable Units Table 3-l PSU Connectors and Cable Adapters (SX-ZOO FD System) SX-200 FD System PSU Type 1 Connector PSU Connector PSUType2 Adapter Cable PSU Connector Adapter Cable J6 Control Interconnect Card PSI - P2 - J7 Control. Interconnect Card PS2 - Pl -. J2 fop Floppy Disk Drive PD - P5 - J2 Bottom Floppy Disk Drive PA 136060 P6 - J7 Top FIM Carrier PC - P3 - 355 3-34 Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-13 When you have completed l l l l l Notes: Remove/ Procedures install Bay Power Supply thls chart: The original Bay Power Supply (BPS) will be disconnected, removed. and The new bay BPS will be unpacked and inspected. In the 336-part configuration, the BPS will be installed in the Control Bay (BAY 0) and in digital peripherals Bays 1 through 7. In the SX-200 inet FD PABX, the BPS will be installed in each peripheral cab- The power cable will be plugged into the unit. 1. The BPS is an AC-to-DC convertor. The BPS faceplate is labeled “BAY PSU”. It has a ringing voltage generator used by the card slots it supports. There should be one BPS for each digital peripheral bay. 2. In the 336-port configuration, a BPS is not needed in BAY 1 when a Floppy Disk Drive is installed in Bay 1. The Floppy Disk Drive in Bay 1 is powered by the BPS in Bay 2. 3. In the SX-200 FD PABX, a BPS must be installed in each Peripheral not required in the Control Node. Step Action Cabinet. A BPS is Comments Follow General Procedures =ollow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. Remove Orlginal Siven in Chart 3-7. BPS Turn off the unit. If the unit is in Bay 2 of a 336 port, 456 port, or 480 port system, or in Bay 0 of a 672 port system, perform the PDS procedures (see Chart 3-l). Unpack and Inspect New BPS Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect the BPS. Retain packaging for shipment of original unit. Complete repair tag, repack, and return the original unit. Page 1 of 3 9109-09HI55-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-35 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-13 Remove/ install Bay Power Supply (continued) Action Step Comments Install New BPS 5. Insert the BPS into its slot, and tighten the thumbscrew at the upper front of the BPS to secure it to the cardfile. 6. \ Make sure that the BPS I/O (on/off) switch is in the 0 (off) position. 7. The BPS and its slot are each marked Gth a right triangle. The slot is located n the upper left corner of each bay. See =igure 3-l 4 936-port Configuration: The first BPS nust be installed in Bay 2. If any cards are to be installed in any other digital Day, a BPS must also be installed in :hat bay. If this is an SX-200 FD system, go to step 12. 572~port Configuration: The first BPS nust be installed in Bay 0. If cards are :o be installed in any other digital bay, a 3PS must also be installed in that Bay. SX-200 FD PABX: A BPS must be ‘nstalled in each peripheral bay. Route Power Cable-upper digital bays 6. At the rear of the cabinet, cut off the cable ties securing the power cables to the bottom of the cabinet. 9. Route the power cable from AC distribution along the inside of the cardfile side plates. 10. Tte the power cable and the braided ground cable to the cardfile. Connect 11. and lower bays Connect the plug to the BPS. Connect - Power-upper The power supply cables to the upper digital bays are long cables that are zoiled in the bottom of the cabinet. Power Cable 12. Remove the cover plate on the node backplane ,. : from the internal AC power cord access cutout . 13. Plug the internal AC power cord into the back of the Bay Power Supply, directly under the access cutout. 14. Replace the access cover plate back over the cutout and secure with the two screws removed in step1 2. To remove the cover plate unscrew the two screws and place them nearby. If PDS was performed, see Chart 3-2. perform a PUS - Page 2 of 3 355 3-36 Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-13 Step Remove/ Install Bay Power Supply (continued) Action Figure Procedures Comments 3-14 Bay Power Supply Page 3 of 3 .. 91094964554A Issue 1 Revision 0 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-14 When you have completed l Remove / Install 5.25” Floppy Disk Drlve this chart: The original 5.25” Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) will be disconnected moved. l The new 5.25” Floppy Disk Drive will be unpacked and inspected. l The new 5.25” Floppy Disk Drive will be installed, Note: Remove or install diskette from drive while power is ON and drive indicator is OFF. Step Action Follow 1. Comments General Procedures Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. Remove and re- Original 5.25” Floppy Given in Chart 3-7 Disk Drive 2. Power down system. See Chart 3-l. 3. If working on an SX-200 welded cabinet, open the rear door, and disconnect the adapter from the rear of the FDD. See Figure 3-l 6. 4. Unfasten locking screw. Unlock latch and withdraw disk drive through front of card slot. Note: drive PN 9109-024-000 lock latch. Unpack and Inspect 5. has no New Unlt While wearing antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect FDD. Shown in Figure 3-15. Retain packing material for shipment of original FDD. Page 1 of 3 355 3-38 Revision 0 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-14 Step Remove / Install 5.25" Floppy (continued) Procedures Disk Drive Action Comments PNOloe-124-ooo Figure 3-15 Floppy Disk Drive Install 5.25" Floppy Disk Drive 6. Install FDD into its slot. The unit plugs directly into the backplane. If working on an SX-200 FD welded cabinet, reconnect the adapter at the rear of the FDD. See Figure 3-l 6. 7. Secure it with its extractor and locking screw. 6. Power up system. See Chart 3-2. Page 2 of 3 9109-0964355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-39 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-14 Step Remove / Install 5.25” Floppy (continued) Action Disk Drive Comments i ccml3 Figure 3-l 6 Adapter Connections (SX-200 Welded Cabinet) Page 3 of 3 355 3-40 Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 Field-Reblacement Chart 3-15 When you have completed l -- Remove / Install 3.5” Floppy Procedures Disk Drive this chart: The original 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) will be disconnected moved. and re- 0 The new 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive will be unpacked and inspected. l \ The new 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive will be installed. Notes: 1. The SX-200 FD has two 3.5” Floppy Disk Driies already installed in the Control Node. 2. Remove or install diskette from drive while power is ON and drive indicator is OFF. Action Step Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. Remove Origlna13.5” Floppy Disk Drlve 2. Power down system. See Chart 3-l. 3. While wearing antistatic wrist strap, remove the two locking screws located at the front of the FDD. See Figure 3-l 7. Place the two screws on top of the Control Node to use when installing the new FDD. The antistatic wrist strap must be :onnected to the PABX chassis, which nust be connected to an approved Jround to provide protection from static discharges. 4. Gently pull the FDD forward. 5. Disconnect the signal and power cables at the rear of the Floppy Disk Drive. 6. Pull the Control Node forward. 7. Remove the FDD. Unpack and Inspect s .- See Chart 3-7. 6. New Unit While still wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect FDD. Install 3.5” Floppy Dlsk Drive 9. Install FDD into its slot. 10. Connect the signal and power cables to the rear of the FDD. 11. Secure the two locking screws located at the front of the FDD. 12. Power un svstem. 9109-09M55-NA Issue 1 detain packing material for shipment of xiginal FDD. See Chart 3-2. Revision 0 355 3-4 1 Field-Replaceable Units 2. DISCONNECTCABLES PPY DISK DNVE 9. PULL DRIVECARRIERFORWARD ccolsl Figure 3-17 Remove/Install 3.5” Floppy Disk Drive 355 3-42 Revision 0 9109-096355-NA issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-16 When you have completed Open and Close SX-200 FD Cabinet \ FD Cabinet front door. Action Open Cabinet Comments Front Door 1. Pry open the 2 latches on the right hand side of the black cover panel on the front door, and swing the cover panel off to the left. 2. Remove the 2 Phillips screws under the black panel to release the front door panel. 3. Pull the top of the front door out from the node cabinet and lift off the lower front cabinet rail. 4. Remove screws holding cabinet sleeve in place on the back of the node, and lift the sleeve off of the node. Close Cabinet Only remove the sleeve if you are replacing the PSU. Front Door 5. Lower the front door panel down over the front cabinet rail and position it on the front of the node so that the 2 screw slots are aligned. 6. Hold the door panel on the front of the node and replace the 2 Phillips screws. 7. if the sleeve was removed, replace it. Lower the cabinet sleeve down over the cabinet, making sure that the screw holes in the sleeve are on the back of the cabinet, and that the lips of the sleeve slide down over the top of the backplate. 6. Place the black cover panel over the appropriate opening, first catching the latch on the left hand side, and then the 2 latches on the right hand side. 9109-09M55-NA Door this chart you will have: . Opened or closed the SX-200 Step Procedures issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-43 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-17 When you have completed l Note: Install a FIM Carrier In SX-200 FD Control Node this chart: The Second FIM Carrier will be installed, in the opening under the first Ft!j Carrier. The Control Node is delivered with one FIM Carrier installed. It can hold up to 4 FIMS, for interconnection with up to4 Peripheral bays. If more than 4 Peripheral bays are to be installed, then a second FIM Carrier is required. The following chart describes the installation of the second FIM Carrier. Action -+P Unpack and inspect Comments the FIM Carrier 1. Turn the power OFF during this procedure. If the Control Node is presently powered ON, power down now. 2. Attach the antistatic wrist strap to unpack and handle the FIM Carrier. 3. Unpack the FIM Carrier and inspect it for damage. 4. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. Remove Cabinet Sleeve 5. Open the front panel on the Control Node 6. Remove the screws that are holding the cabinet sleeve in place on the node backplate. 7. Lift the sleeve up off of the node cabinet. See Chart 3-l 6 Remove Cover Plate from FIM Carrler Openlng s 6. Remove the 4 screws that are holding the cover plate in place over the opening for the FIM Carrier, on the backplate . Connect 9. Lay the directly place it installed Power and Signal Cables FIM Carrier on the Control Node floor, below the installed FIM Carrier, and in the same position as the first FIM Carrier The FIM backplane should be away from the cabinet backplate, and the cable connectors on the side of the FIM Carrier should be away from the cabinet side. Page 1 of 4 355 3-44 Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-17 ..- 11. Node Comments Action -+P 10. Install a FIM Carrier in SX-200 FD Control (continued) Procedures Connect the extender power cable from connector J7 on the FIM Carrier to the PB or P4 cable connector on the PSU. There should only be one PSU cable connector not in use when you install a second FIM Carrier. This is the cable connector for the second FIM Carrier. Connect the signal ribbon cable from J6 on the FIM Carrier backplane to JlO on the Control Interconnect Card. See Figure 3-l 9. Mount FIM Carrier in Cablnet 12. Position the FIM Carrier in the Control Node so that the screw holes on the FIM Carrier align with the 4 screw holes in the backplate around the opening directly below the first FIM Carrier. 13. Mount the FIM Carrier securely in place with the 4 screws provided See Figure 3-l 8. Install FIM Slot Filler Plates 14. On the backplate, cover each F IM slot that will not be used with a FIM filler plate (provided). Secure each filler plate in place with 2 screws (provided). Replace - Cabinet Sleeve 15. Lower the cabinet sleeve down over the cabinet, making sure that the screw holes in the sleeve are on the back of the cabinet, and that the lips of the sleeve slide down over the top of the backplate. 16. The sleeve should catch on 2 lip plates on the bottom sides of the cabinet. Press down firmly until the screw holes on the back align. 17. Secure the sleeve in place, using the screws removed in step 6. Page 2 of 4 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-45 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-17 SW Install a FIM Carrier in SX-200 FD Control (continued) Action Node Comments POWER CABLE TO PSU CONNECTOR PB Jl SX-200 FD CONTROL NODE BACKF’LATE Figure 3-l 8 SX-200 FD FIM Carrier cc0163 Page 3 of 4 355 346 Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-17 Step Install a FIM Carrier in SX-200 FD Control (continued) Action Procedures Node Comments FDDA PSU I Jl 52 J3 54 J5 JB 57 1 J9 1. . BACKVlEWOF QUAD flM CARRlER (AS SEEN FROM THE FRONT OF THECASINEI) -em I .- I-- E%TENDER CA5LE Yl (01 I WC2 Jl J2 J3 54 I J5 JB JlO J7 I BACKVIEWOF QUADFM CARRIER (O~OW t 1 513 n NOTEl: Jll ANDJlPAREUXATEDONlHE REVERSESlDEOFTHECONTROLINTERCONNE(ECTCARD. BOTHARE~PIN’D’CONNECTO~IS. Figure 3-19 Cable Connection for the Second (Optional) FIM Carrier Page 4 of 4 9109-09M55-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-47 Field-Replaceable Chart 3-18 Units Install Peripheral When you have completed .’ FIM Carrler and FIM in a SX-200 FD Peripheral this chart: . The Peripheral FIM Carrier will be installed. . The Fiber Interface Module will be installed in the Peripheral FIM Carrier. . The Bay Control Card will be ready to install in the peripheral bay. Comments Action Follow 1. Cabinet General Procedures Follow the general procedures for handling circuit cards. 3iven in Chart 3-7. Unpack and Inspect 2. Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect the FIM Carrier and the Fiber Interface Module for damage. 3. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. Install Peripheral FIM Carrier on the BCC 4. Position the Peripheral FIM Carrier on the component side of the BCC so that the connectors are properly aligned. 5. Snap the Peripheral FIM Carrier into place on the BBC. Install Fiber Interface See Figure 3-20. Module 8. Slide the FIM into the Peripheral FIM Carrier until it connects firmly with the DIN connector on the Carrier. 7. Fasten the FIM faceplate to the Peripheral FIM Carrier with 2 screws. - Retain packaging for shipment of xiginal unit. Page 1 of 4 355 3-48 Revision 0 9109-098-355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Procedures 1 (continued) Connect Fiber Interface Cable to the FIM a. Remove the protective caps from the cable connectors on the cables, and from the TX and RX connectors on the FIM faceplate. ‘9. Connect the optical fiber cable from the TX of the control node to the Rx of the peripheral. See Fiaure 3-21. .-. \ Comments Action SW The cables have TX and;% labels at the ends connecting to the FIM. See Figure 3-22. FIM PERIPHERALFIM CARRlEFi Figure 3-20 Peripheral FIM Carrier and the FIM Page 2 of 4 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-49 Field-Replaceable Chart 3-18 Units Install Peripheral SW FIM Carrler and FIM in a SX-200 FD Peripheral (continued) Action Cabinet Comments h , MAMENANCE TERMINALPORT , SAYCONTROL CAFlD , PERIPHWAL FM CARRIER , FIBER INTERFACEMODULE(FIM) , FIM CARFUERSFT RELAYCOM4ECTOR (CABLEDTO SFT COKNECTORASSEMBLY) / cm176 Figure 3-21 Front View of SX-200 FD Peripheral Cabinet Page 3 of 4 355 3-50 Revision 0 9109-096355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-18 SW install Peripheral FIM Carrier and FIM in a SX-200 FD Peripheral (continued) Procedures Cabinet Comments Action , ccom Figure 3-22 Installing Fiber Cables from the Control Node to the Peripheral Node Page 4 of 4 9109-096-355-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 355 3-51 Field-Reolaceable Chart 3-19 Units Remove Peripheral When you have completed FIM Carrier and FIM from a SX-200 FD Peripheral this chart: l The Bay Control Card will be removed from the peripheral bay. l The Fiber Interface l The Peripheral Module will be removed from the Peripheral FIM Carrier. FIM Carrier will be disconnected, Action Step Cabinet and removed. Comments Follow General Procedures 1. Follow the general procedures circuit cards. Disconnect FIM Fiber interface for handling Siven in Chart 3-7. Cable from the 2. Attach the antistatic wrist strap. 3. Disconnect and label the Fix and the TX fiber cables from the faceplate of the FIM on the BCC. 4. Unstrap the internal optical fiber cables from the inside panel of the Peripheral cabinet. 5. Remove the BCC from its slot. Remove Fiber Interface Follow instructions Module 6. Unfasten the FIM faceplate from the Peripheral FIM Carrier by removing the 2 screws. 7. Slide the FIM from the Peripheral FIM Carrier until it disconnects from the DIN connector on the Carrier. Remove the Peripheral BCC s .a. given in Chart 3-11. FIM Carrier from the See Figure 3-20 Unsnap the Peripheral FIM Carrier from the component side of the BCC . Unpack and Inspect the FIM Carrier and FIM 9. Wearing the antistatic wrist strap, unpack and inspect the FIM Carrier and Fiber Interface Module for damage. 10. Complete repair tag, repack, and return any damaged or incorrect items. install Peripheral 11. 355 3-52 FIM Carrier on the BCC Retain packaging for shipment of original unit. Given in Chart 3-l 8 Proceed with installation. Revision 0 9109-098-355-NA Issue 1 Field-Replacement Chart 3-20 Remove / Install Rear Door Fan Assembly Unlversal Cablnet When you have completed . Replaced the fan assembly. Comments Action Remove Old Fan Assembly 1. Power down system. 2. Unplug fan supply cord at each fan. 3. Remove each fan by removing the 4 mounting screws. Retain all mounting hardware and the fan guards. Unpack 4. on an SX-200 DlGlTAL this chart you will have: Step \ Procedures Replacement Unpack the replacement See Chart 3-l. Part fan assembly. Retain the packaging material for shipment of the original assembly. Install New Part 5. Mount each fan such that its terminals are on its upper left corner, and air flow is OUT of the cabinet. Four external tooth lockwashers are required between each fan and the door panel (one for each screw). The mounting nuts hold the fan guard against the fan. 6. Connect both fans to the fan supply cord. 7. Power up system. 9109-09%355-NA Issue 1 Apply thread locking adhesive to hold each nut. See Chart 3-2. Revision 0 355 3-53 Field-Replaceable Units Chart 3-21 When you have completed l . Notes: Repacking Equipment For Shipment this chart you will have: Properly repacked equipment -.:_. for shipment. 1. Do not disconnect the system ground until printed circuit cards have been properly .packed. The system must be properly grounded for the wrist strap to be effective, \ 2. Whenever possible, m-use original packing material to repack equipment for shipment. Comments Step Action 1. Pack ail circuit cards in antistatic bags and PC card shipping cartons. 2. Handle cards by the edges only, and follow the card handling procedures. 3. Wrap ail items with air-cushion type material, and surround with loose paper to minimize movement within the carton. 4. Repack ail items carefully, and list the contents of each carton on the label. Revision 0 Wear the antistatic wrist strap while handling circuit cards. Ensure that items within the carton cannot shift about, and will not get scratched or damaged. 9109-09M55-NA issue 1 SX-ZCWQ DIGITAL PABX Engineering Information m, @-Trademark 0 copyrlghl1992, All tights reserved. Rlnled In Canada oi MM Corporation. MIteI corpontlon. e MITEL Engineering Information NOTICE The information contained in this document is believed to be accurate in all respects but is not warranted by Mite1 Corporation (MITELB). The information is subject to change without notice and should not be construed in any way as a commitment by Mite1 or any of its affiliates or subsidiaries. Mite1 and its affiliates and subsidiaries assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. Revisions of this document or new editions of it may be issued to incorporate such changes. ii Revision 0 9109-096-18O-NA Issue1 IMPORTANT Failure to follow all instructlons may result in Improper equipment operation and/or the risk of electric shock. p&i-j This product is to be installed and serviced only by qualified personnel. l l \ SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS .- Read all instructions before attempting to install or use this product. l Install all assemblies l Configure this product with only the assemblies specified in this Practice. l using the procedures described in this Practice. ’ Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication equipment. Never operate telecommunication equipment with grounding conductor disconnected. Ensure grounding conductor is installed before connecting telecommunication cabling to any system. EXPLANATION A DANGEROUS VOLTAGE OF USE FOR SYMBOLS AND NOTICES The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, triangle, is intended to alert the user to the uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute electric shock to persons. within an equilateral presence of an products enclosure that a significant risk of The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. INSTRUCTIONS I0 The ground symbol within a circle identifies the terminal which is intended for connection to an external protective conductor. This connector must be connected to earth ground prior to making any other connections to the equipment. PROTECTNE GROUNDING TERMINAL - Danger indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Warning indicates a potentialy hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. ( CAUTION 9109-096-18O-NA Caution indicates a potentially hadardous situation which, if not 1 avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or damage to the equipment or property. Issue 1 Revision 0 ... III ._ Iv Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Table of Contents INTRODUCTION General................................................................... Reasonforlssue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~. 180 l-l 180 l-l FEATURES General..~~-................................................................ 180 2-l SYSTEM.OVERVIEW General................................................................... 180 3-l SX-ZWE’DIGITALPABX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 3-l 80 3-l SX-200FDPABX ....................................................... 80 3-2 ........................................................... Generic1001 80 3-2 ........................................................... Generic1002 80 3-2 Generic1003 ........................................................... 80 3-2 Generic1004 ........................................................... 180 3-3 Generic1005 ........................................................... 180 3-3 Generic1005FPKGl ..................................................... 180 3-3 Maintenance ............................................................... 4. CONFIGURATIONS General ................................................................... Maximum Number of Digital Line Cards .......................................... Additional Non DLC Ports Available .......................................... ......................................................... MaximumPorts 336-Part Configuration ....................................................... 456-Part Configuration ....................................................... 672-Par-t Configuration ....................................................... 672-Par-t Configuration FOR SX-200 FD ......................................... 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 4-l 4-l 4-l 4-l 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-6 Maximum Number Of SUfERSET3” And SUPERSET Telephones Per Bay 180 4-8 (Or Peripheral Cabinet) Per System .................................. . . . . . , , , . . . . , . . , , . . . , . . m. . 180 4-8 - Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Configuration Guidelines 5. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION General ................................................................... Circuit Switch Links ......................................................... Control ................................................................... DigitalSwitching.. .......................................................... .......................................................... MainControlCard ........................................................... CircuitSwitch PeripheralSwitch ........................................................ ControlResourcesCard ...................................................... ........................................................ MessageSubsystem 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 5-l 180 5-l 180 5-l 180 5-2 1805-7 180 5-7 180 5-7 180 5-7 180 5-8 V Engineering information Switch Matrii Card .......................................................... Switch Matrix Module ........................................................ Analog Switching ........................................................... Analog Bay Interface ........................................................ Peripheral Interface Cards ................................................. Peripheral Interface Card Distribution (456-Part Configuration) .................... Fiber Distributed Systems .................................................... Fiber Interface Module (FIM) .................................................. ........................................................... QuadFIMCanier Peripheral FIM Carrier ..................................................... Fiber Link Specifications and Requirements ...................................... SX-200 DIGITAL PCM Circuit Switch Link Assignments ............................. Speech Path Accessing - Digital ............................................ Speech Path Accessing-Analog ........................................... SoftwareLimitations ......................................................... DynamicRAMAllocation .................................................. 6. SIGNALING 80 80 80 80 80 : .. 80 80 80 180 : . 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-10 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-l 2 5-12 5-15 5-16 AND SUPERVISION General................................................................... 180 6-l 7. TRANSMISSION . General ................................................................... FrequencyResponse ........................................................ Overload - Digitally Switched Analog Card Types .................................. Overload - Locally Switched Analog Card Types ................................... Quantization Distortion ....................................................... Intermodulation Distortion ..................................................... ReturnLoss ............................................................... Crosstalk .................................................................. ............................................................ EchoPathDelay Envelope Delay Distortion .................................................... LongitudinalBalance ........................................................ System Impedances ......................................................... Idle Channel Noise - C Message ............................................... IdleChannelNoise-3kHzFlat.. .............................................. 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 80 80 80 80 80 7-l 7-l 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-6 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 8-l 8-l 8-l 8-l 8-3 8-4 8-5 8. LOSS AND LEVEL PLAN General ................................................................... North American Loss and Level Plans ........................................... WLPlan .............................................................. SDNLossPlan .......................................................... SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Loss And Level Plan .................................. .......................................................... SatellitePABX Analog Transmission Pad Arrangements - Digital Interfaces ...................... vi Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Table of Contents Analog Transmission Pad Arrangements -Analog Interfaces . . Local Switching Loss Plan . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . , . . . . . Conferencing Loss Plan . , , , . . . . , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . ToneLevels ........................................... ..,....,,....., ,.,.,...,....., ..,,,...,.....s . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~ 180 180 180 180 8-5 8-6 8-16 8-24 North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TonePlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~.. RingerCadencing ....................................................... Mexico ..;......,........................,..................,,...........I TonePlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RingerCadencing ,,.....~.......,..................,,.....,,,.,,..~...,. HongKong/Taiwan ......................................................... TonePlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~................... RingerCadencing ,...............,,.........,..,.......,...,....,,...... Malaysia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TonePlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~........ RingerCadencing ....................................................... 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 9-l 9-l 9-l 9-2 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-4 9-4 9-5 9-5 9-5 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 10-l 1 O-l 1 O-l 1 O-2 1 O-3 10-4 10-5 1 O-6 9. CALL PROGRESS 10. TRAFFIC TONES AND RINGING CADENCES CONSIDERATIONS General.................................................,.,...,....,.,,... Traffic Limitations , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . , 336-Par-t Configuration ........................, 456-Pat-t Configuration .......,................, ........................, 672-Par-t Configuration GradeofService.........................................................,.. Receiver Provisioning , , . . , . . . . 0 , . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . Trunk Distribution , , , . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. SYSTEM ,..,, ..,,. ..,,, ..... ...... .,.... .,.... .,.... ,.,..... ,....,.. ,....,.. ,...,,.. .....,.,. ......,,. ......... ......... ... ,.. ,.. ,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0. , . .......................... CHARACTERISTICS General.....................................................,,..........., 180 11-l Environmental Conditions , , , , . . . , . . . . . . . . II . . . , . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . , 180 II-I _ Heat Dissipation . . . . . . , , , , . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . 0 . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . , 180 II-I ShippingandStorage........................................................ 180 11-2 Loop Lengths and Cable Lengths , . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . , 180 II-3 12. POWER SUPPLIES Electrical Characteristics , , , . . . . , . . . a. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , BayPowerSupply .......................................................... Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input and Output Protection . , . . . . , , , . , . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . PowerFailSense........................................................ SX-200 FD Control Cabinet Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Cord and Switches . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9109-096-I 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 12-l 12-2 123 12-3 123 12-4 12-5 vii Engineering Information Input and Output Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 12-5 PowerFailSense........................................................ 13. RESERVE 180 12-5 POWER SUPPLY 14. POWER FAIL TRANSFER PFTOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 14-I i List of Figures Figure 3-l Bay and Slot Assignment - 336-Part Configuration ...................... 180 3-4 Figure 3-2 Bay and Slot Assignment - 456-Part Configuration Figure 3-3 Bay and Slot Assignment - 672-Part Configuration ...................... ...................... 180 3-5 180 3-6 Figure 3-4 Slot Assignment - SX-200 FD - Control and Peripheral Cabinet System Architecture (336+01-t Configuration) .......................... Figure 5-l Figure 5-2 Figure 5-3 System Architecture (456-Par-t Configuration) System Architecture (672-Port ............ 180 3-7 180 5-3 .......................... 180 5-4 180 5-5 Figure 8-l .......................... ................. SX-200 FD System Architecture (672-Pat-t Configuration) Analog Speech Paths ............................................. Local to Local Central Cffices WL Objectives .......................... Figure 8-2 Local to Local Central Cffices Fixed Loss Plan Objectives Figure 8-3 Figure 8-4 Types of Trunk and Line Interfaces Analog Pad Arrangements - Configuration A ........................... Figure 8-5 Analog Pad Arrangements - Configuration Figure 8-6 B ........................... ............................. Local Switching Analog Pad Arrangements Bay Power Supply ................................................ 180 8-l 5 SX-200 FD Contol Cabinet Power Supply 180 12-6 Figure 5-4 Figure 5-5 Figure 12-I Figure 12-2 Configuration) 180 5-6 180 5-l 9 180 8-2 ................. 180 8-2 ................................... 180 8-6 180 8-14 180 8-l 5 180 12-4 ............................. List of Tables Table 2-l Table 4-l Feature Limitations ................................................ 336-Part Digital Line Card (DLC) Feature Limitations Table 4-2 Table 4-3 456-Part 672-Part DLC Feature Limitations DLC Feature Limitations .................................... Table 4-4 Table 5-l 672-Part DLC Feature Limitations (SX-200 FD Specific) Table 5-2 Table 5-3 Table 5-4 ... VIII Peripheral 180 2-l 180 4-2 ..................... 180 4-3 .................................... 180 4-5 .................. 180 4-6 Interface Cards .......................................... ................................. PCM Circuit Switch Link Assignments ............................................... Software Limitations PAM Space Limitations ............................................. Revision 0 180 5-l 0 180 5-l 3 180 5-l 6 180 5-l 7 9109-096-I 8O-NA Issue 1 Table of Contents Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table 5-5 6-1 6-2 7-l 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 8-l 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-l 0 9-l 1 9-l 2 9-l 3 9-l 4 1 O-l 1l-l 11-2 11-3 12-l 12-2 12-3 12-4 12-5 126 12-7 9109-096-l RAM Space Requirements For Features ............................... DTMF Tone Parameters ............................................ Dial Pulse Reception Limits ......................................... FrequencyResponse ........................................... Overload Levels - Digitally Switched Analog Card Types ............... Signal To Distortion Ratio ........................................... Intermodulation Requirements (4.8 KB/s) .............................. Return Loss Characteristics ......................................... .......................................... Envelope Delay Distortion LongitudinalBalance ........................................... .............................................. Interface References SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Loss Plan ................................... SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Local Switching Loss Plan ...................... Conferencing Loss Plan ............................................ Call Progress Tone Interface Levels ................................... DTMF Levels - Trunk Interface Into 600 Ohms .......................... DTMF Tone Interface Levels ........................................ North America Tone Generation Table ................................. North America Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing ............................ ........................... North America Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing Mexico Tone Generation Table ....................................... Mexico Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing ................................. Mexico Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing ................................. Hong Kong /Taiwan Tone Generation Table ............................. Hong Kong / Taiwan Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing ....................... Hong Kong / Taiwan Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing ...................... Malasia Tone Generation Table ...................................... ................................. Malasia Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing Malasia Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing ................................. Malasia Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing ................................ ................................ Malasia Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Grade Of Service (GOS) ........................ System Environmental Operating Conditions ............................ Storage Conditions ................................................ LoopLengths.................................~...................l8 Electrical Input Power Characteristics ................................. Bay Power Supply Specifications ..................................... SX-200 FD Control Cabinet Power Supply Specifications .................. Bay Power Supply Output Ratings .................................... Bay Power Supply Test Point Voltages ................................. PC Power Supply Output Ratings ..................................... PC Power Supply Test Point Voltages .................................. 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 180 180 ...18 0 .' .. 180 180 180 180 180 ..‘.18 0 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 0 180 180 180 180 180 180 180 5-l 8 6-2 6-2 7-l 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-5 8-3 8-7 8-l 6 8-l 6 8-24 8-26 8-27 9-l 9-2 9-2 9-2 9-3 9-3 9-4 9-4 9-5 9-5 9-6 9-6 9-6 9-7 1 O-5 11-l 11-2 11-4 12-l 12-l 12-2 12-2 12-3 12-5 12-5 ix Engineering X Information Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 1 ’ INTRODUCTION General 1 .l-- \ This Practice provides basic engineering information for the SX-200@ DIGITAL PABX, with Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1003, Generic 1004 or Generic 1005 software. It describes the physical aspects of the system, configurations, and technical characteristics. Reason for Issue 1.2 This section is issued to provide basic engineering information for the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX including the SX-200 FD (Fiber Distrubuted). 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 l-l Engineering information _’ 180 l-2 Revision 0 9109-098-l 8O-NA Issue 1 2 ’ FEATURES General 2.l The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX and the SX-200 FD offer many features which are provided by a software package. A full description of these features appears in Practice 9109-096-105-NA, Features Description. Certain limitations which apply to System Features are listed in Table 2-1. Table 2-l Feature Limitations (336- and 456-port) axlmum num Maximum number of simultaneous call forwards that can Wie 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 1 of 3 180 2-l Engineering Information Table 2-l Maximum number of SUPERSET3” SUPERSET 48 telephones 336-pat-t configuration Feature Limitations (continued) and 78 78 78 78 4!%-port configuration 118 118 118 118 672-pott configuration na na 162 162 Maximum number of SUPERSET3mDN SUPERSET 4”DN telephones and 336-part configuration na 324 324 324 456-part configuration na 228 228 228 672-pott configuration na na 400 500 Page 2 of 3 180 2-2 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Features Table 2-l Feature Limitations (continued) Feature Generic 1001 Maximum number of SUPERSET407”, SUPERSET 4 lo”, SUPERSET 420”, SUPERSET 430” telephones 336-part configuration Generic 1002 Generic 1003 Generic 1004/ 1005 and na na na 324 456-part configuration na na na 228 672-part configuration na na na 500 672-part configuration FD) na na na 500 (SX-200 Maximum number of lines (336-part systems) 300 300 300 300 Maximum number of lines (456-part systems) 400 400 400 400 Maximum number of lines (672-part systems) na na 500 500 na na 1 1 Maximum number of Tl Trunks per digital bay Maximum number of 11 Trunks per system 336-part configuration na na 4 4 456-part configuration na na 3 3 672-part configuration na na 7 7 Maximum Number of Page Groups na na na 50 Maximum Number of Stations in a Page Group na na na 16 Maximum Number of Subattendants na na na 25 Maximum Number of LDN Appearances na na na 16 Page 3 of 3 Notes: 1. SlJPERSET401, with Generic 2. 9109-096-l SUPERSET 8O-NA SUPERSET Generic 1001, not available Issue 1 1002, SUPERSET420, Generic 1003, with Generic 1005 SlJPERSET430, and Generic 1004. FPKGl Revision 0 and SX-200 FD not available . 180 2-3 Engineering 180 2-4 information Revision 0 9109-096-l 80-NA Issue 1 3 ’ SYSTEM OVERVIEW General --. 3.1 \ SX-200 DIGITAL PABX The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX employs digitally controlled solid-state, space and time division switching with stored-program control. Depending on system configuration, the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX can be either a one or two cabinet system. The system is available in three variants: 336port (fully digital), 456-pot-t, and 672-pot-t (fully digital). Note: The 456-pott configuration is available only to upgrade an installed SX-200 PABX to become an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX by adding a digital Control cabinet to the existing analog cabinet. The maximum quantities of trunk and line cards which can be accommodated configuration are illustrated in Figure 3-1 through Figure 3-3. Note: in each Generic 1001 is a single 5.25 inch disk drive system; Generics 1002, 1003, and 1004 require two 5.25 inch disk drives. SX-200 FD PABX The SX-200 FD (Fiber Distributed) PABX employs the same digital technology as the SX-200 DIGITAL. It consists of separate Control and Peripheral cabinets connected by Fiber Optic Cables. Each Peripheral cabinet or Bay is 96-parts and up to seven Peripheral Bays can be connected to the Control cabinet (672-ports). This allows remote locating of the Peripheral Bays close to the devices they support, reducing installation costs. Note: The SX-200 FD is not available with Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1003, and Generic 1004. An installed 338-par-t SX-200 DIGITAL PABX can be upgraded to an SX-200 FD by replacing the Control Bay with a Fiber Distributed Control Cabinet. Existing Peripheral Bays can beconnected to the Control Cabinet. Additional ports can be installed by adding new Peripheral Bays. Note: Generic 1005 FPKGl cannot be used for upgrades. The maximum quantities of trunk and line cards which can be accommodated Bay are illustrated in Figure 3-4. Note: 9109-096-I in each Peripheral The SX-200 FD (Generic 1005) uses two industry standard 3.5 inch disk drive units mounted directly in the Control Cabinet. 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 3-l Engineering Information All configurations branch exchange, are compatible with most existing and central office equipment. station, key telephone, private Generic 1001 Generic 1001 provides: . use of a flexible numbering plan l simultaneous use of DTMF and rotary dial stations l optional l extensive l data port facility for traffic analysis l automatic l six to 36 power fail transfer l optional l SUPERSET 3 telephone l SUPERSET 4 telephone. use of attendant selection consoles of standard and optional features and other requirements diagnostics reserve trunks power supply or UPS Generic 1002 Generic 1002 also includes with Generic 1001: the following features in addition to the features available . SUPERSET 3 DN telephone l SUPERSET 4 DN telephone l DATASET 1100 Series. Generic 1003 Generic features 1003 also includes the following features available with Generics 1001 and 1002: . DATASET - l Tl trunks l Automatic l Automated l 672-port. and configuration in addition to the 2100 Series Call Distribution Attendant Generic 1004 Generic 1004 also includes the following with Generics 1001, 1002, and 1003: 180 3-2 l Application Platform l Enhanced Hotel/Motel l Enhanced Subattendant features in addition to the features available Package Features Revision 0 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Svstem Overview Departmental l Key Applications. Generic 1005 Generic 1005 also includes the following features with Generics 1001, 1002, 1003 and 1004: 0 SX-200 i 401 telephone 9 SUPERSET 4 IO telephone SUPERSET 420 telephone 9 SUPERSET 430 telephone l to the features available FD (Fiber Distributed) SUPERSET l in addition l A&Link Data Module l ISDN interface capability 9 DTMF Automatic Number Identification 0 DTMF Dialed Number Identification (ANI) Service (DNIS). Generic 1005 FPKGl Generic 1005 FPKGI is a functionallity has the following limitations: l operates only on the SX-200 l SUPERSET reduced version of Generic 1005 that FD 430 not available 0 A&Link Data Module not available ANI and DNIS not available l l ACD, HCI, and Data not available l Hotel/Motel l Property Management l Automated l ONS Voice Mail not available Front Desk Terminal not available Attendant System not available not available 0 Printing (only one RS-232 port is available). Maintenance 3.2 Modular design and functional packaging of the equipment permits rapid location and replacement of defective components. Circuit malfunctions are detected by diagnostic routines automatically initiated by the Main Control Card (MCC). Diagnostic routines, detailed in Practice 9109-096-353-NA, General Maintenance Information, and Practice 9109-096-350-NA, Troubleshooting, direct service personnel to the defective circuit card or assembly, and identify the required field-replaceable unit. Diagnostic routines and maintenance procedures do not interfere with users unaffected by the malfunction. 9109-096-I 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 3-3 Engineering Information VOlCE/LIATACARDS: 6 CCT/CARDTRUNK 12 (XZT,‘XRD REGULAR 6 CCT CONROL OVERVOICE 6 CCT OFF PREMISESTATION 6 CCT DIRECTINWRD DIAL UMVERSAL Figure 3-l 180 3-4 Bay and Slot Assignment Revision 0 - 336-Port Configuration 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 System Overview PEWPHERALCABINET DlGliAL MAIN COMROL CABlNEl VOlC&‘DATACARDS: VOlCE CARDS: 6 CCT,CARDTRUNK 12 CCT/cARD REGULAR 6 CCT CONTROL OVERVOICE 8 CCT OFF PREMISESTATION 6 CCT DRECT INWARD DlAL UNWEFiSAL 6 CCTjCARDSS OR REGULAR 4 CCT,‘CARDC.O. TRUNK 2 CCT/CARDE&M, LOOP TIE TFIUNK cc01 06 Figure 3-2 Bay and Slot Assignment 9109-09&l 8o-NA Issue 1 - &X-Port Revision 0 Configuration 180 3-5 Engineering Information CONTROL CABINET PERPHERALCASJNET VOICGDATACARDS 384 PORTS VUICUDATACARDS: 6 CIRCUWRUNKCARDS 12 ClRcUlT ONS, DPXTALLINECARDS 6 CIRCUS COV, OFS UNE CARDS UNIVERSALCARDS 1 ClRcUlT (24 CHANNEL)Tl TRUNK CARD Figure 3-3 Bay and Slot Assignment 180 3-6 Revision 0 - 672-Part Configuration 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Svstem Overview PERIPHERALCABINET 63 POFITS r 6 CIRCUITTRUNK CARDS 12 CIRCIJTONS, DlGlTALUUE CAFIDS 6 CIRCUITCOV, OFS LINECARDS UNWERSALCARDS 1 CIRCUIT (24 CMNNEL) Tl TRUNKCARD cm171 Figure 3-4 Slot Assignment - SX-200 FD - Control and Peripheral Cabinet 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 3-7 Engineering 180 3-8 information Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 4 ’ CONFIGURATIONS General 4.1 \ The following paragraphs and their associated headers in the tables following describe the various configurations, equipment bays, and associated cards available with SX-200 DIGITAL PABX and the SX-200 FD PABX. Each variant can be expanded modularly from a basic to a full configuration, Maximum Number of Digital line Cards 4.2 The maximum number of Digital Line Cards (DLC) that can be programmed depends on whether the ports are programmed as “dual” or “single”. The “Dual” column, in the tables that follow, represents the number of DLCs if dual port devices are programmed, such as DATASET 1102 or SUPERSET 3 DN and SUPERSET 4 DN telephones with a DATASET 1101 cartridge installed. The “Single” column represents the number of DLCs if single port devices are programmed, such as DATASET 1103, or SUPERSET3 DN and SUPERSET DN telephones without a DATASET 1101 cartridge. The SUPERSET401, SUPERSET 4 10, SUPERSET 420, and SUPERSET 430 telephones are also single port devices. Note: Digital Line Cards are not available with Generic 1001. The upper and lower digital bay shelves have 30 dedicated channels each, and an additional 30 shared channels between them, for a total of 90 channels. DLCs programmed for data should be evenly distributed between the upper and lower shelf to maximize the non-blocking channels available. For example, if 4 DLCs programmed for DATASET 1102 (dual rack mounted, 96 circuits) were placed in the upper shelf of a digital bay, only 60 (30 + 30) channels are available. If the DLCs were evenly distributed, the upper and lower bay would be able to access all 90 channels, thus reducing the blocking probability. The same consideration applies to Bays 1 and 2 of a combo bay of a 336port SX-200 DIGITAL, since there are only 62 channels going to each of upper Bay 1, lower Bay 1, and Bay 2. Additional Non DLC Ports Available This is the maximum number of ports per bay that are available after 4 DLCs have been programmed; this figure assumes the highest possible density cards for that bay. Maximum Ports This column identifies l Maximum density non-DLC l Maximum density Digital Line Card: 0 Maximum density analog 9109-096-18O-NA Issue 1 the maximum number of ports using high density digital card: card: cards. 12 ports 24 ports 8 ports Revision 0 180 4-l Engineering Information 336-Port Configuration The 336-port configuration is completely digital and consists of one cabinet. The Control cabinet for the 336port system is created by installing a 192-port digital shelf (Bays 3 and 4) above the Control shelf. The configurations are as follows: 4.3 Bays I,2 Control shelf (digital) Control shelf plus one digital Peripheral Control shelf plus two digital Peripheral Bays1,2,3 Bays 1,2,3,4 Bay Bays 33Wot-t Equipment - If a digital shelf is added to the Universal configuration can be equipped as follows: \ Optional Peripheral Cards (Quantity) Control Card(s) Bay Cabinet, the 336port 2 MCC, BPS, FDD ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 04) 1 BPS, FDD ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08) 3 BPS, BCC ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08) 4 BPS, BCC ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08) Note: Each bay in use must have all its Control cards present; Peripheral cards are installed as required. The maximum number Table 4-l of ports available 336-Port DigItal Line Card (DLC) Feature Llmltations Available Channels MOH noMOH Max DLC Ports Non Block Data 1 124 126 144 144 6 2 62 83 3 90 91 96 91 4 90 91 96 TOT: 366 371 336 Bay l l 200 Maximum is: Additional Non DLC Ports Available (If dual DLC used) Max Ports 12 72 216 4 8 48 144 91 4 8 48 144 326 14 28 168 504 Simultaneous Maximum DLC Cards Dual Single calls 371 Maximum Non-Blocking Channels grammed (refer to section 4.2 ) available if music on hold is NOT pro- l 336 Maximum DLC Ports (Voice or Data). l 504 Maximum ports available l 163 x 163 Data Users to Host in a 1 to 1 Non Blocking depending on card densities (refer to section ) configuration. 9 224 x 112 Data Users to Host ports in a 2 to 1 configuration. 180 4-2 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Configurations 456Port 4.4 Configuration The 455-port configuration is available only to upgrade an installed SX-200 PABX to become an SX-200 DIGITAL PABX by adding a digital Control cabinet to the existing analog cabinet. The 455-port system is available in six different configurations. The Control cabinet for the 45S-port variant is created by installing a 96-part digital shelf (Bay 3) above the Control shelf and adding a 215-port Peripheral cabinet to the Control cabinet. The configurations are: Bays I,2 Bays 1,2,3 Bays1,2,4 Bays 1,2,4,5 Bays 1,2,3,4 Control Control Control Control Control shelf of Control shelves Bays 1,2,3,4,5 fiGPort Equipment shelf (digital) only (single cabinet) * shelf plus one digital Peripheral Bay shelf and lower shelf of Peripheral cabinet shelf and both shelves of Peripheral cabinet shelf plus digital Peripheral bay and lower Peripheral cabinet shelf plus digital Peripheral bay and both of Peripheral cabinet - The 455-Port configuration can be equipped as follows: Bay Control Card(s) Optional Peripheral Cards (Quantity) 2 MCC, BPS, FDD ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 04) 1 BPS, FDD ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08) 3 BPS, BCC ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08) 4 DIC, PCC, Scanner CO Trk, Line, SUPERSET, E&M Trk, DIDme 5 DIC CO Trk, Line, SUPERSET, E&M irk, DID/Tie (up to 12) (up to 15) Note: Each bay in use must have all its Control cards present; Peripheral cards are installed as required. The maximum number of ports available Table 4-2 456-Port is: DLC Feature Limitations Maximum DLC Cards Page 1 of 2 9109-09&l 8o-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 4-8 Engineering Information Table 4-2 456-Port DLC Feature (continued) Available Channels MOH noMOH Bay Max DLC Ports Non Block Data Limitations Maximum DLC Cards Dual Single Additional Non DLC Ports Available (If dual DLC used) Max ‘Ports 5 31 31 0 0 0 0 96 96 TOi: 33; 342 240 235 10 20 336 576 Page 2. of 2 \ l l 200 Maximum Simultaneous calls 342 Maximum Non-Blocking Channels grammed (refer to section 4.2 ) available if music l 240 Maximum DLC Ports (Voice or Data) l 576 Maximum ports available l 117 x 117 Data Users to Host ports in a 1 to 1 Non Blocking l 160 x 80 Data Users to Host ports in a 2 to 1 configuration depending on card densities on hold is NOT pro- (refer to section configuration 4.2 ) Configurations 6 BPS, BCC ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08) 7 BPS, BCC ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08) Each bay in use must have all its Control cards present; Peripheral cards are installed as required. Note: The maximum number of ports available Table 4-3 Available Channels MOH noMOH Bay 672-Port Max DLC Ports Non Block Data is: DLC Feature Limitations Maximum DLC Cards Dual Single Additional Non DLC Ports Available (If dual DLC used) Max Ports 1 90 91 96 91 4 8 48 144 2 90 91 96 91 4 8 48 144 90 1 91 1 96 1 91 3 ( 1 4 1 I 4 1I 90 I I I I 1 4 5 1 90 1 91 1 96 1 91 1 4 6 90 91 96 91 7 90 91 96 TOT: 630 637 672 1 91 1 96 9 248 Maximum 9 637 Maximum grammed Assuming 1 91 1 48 I 1 144 I 48 I 144 8 48 1 144 4 8 48 144 91 4 8 48 144 637 28 56 336 1008 Simultaneous Non-Blocking a maximum 8 I 8 I I I calls Channels available if music on hold is NOT pro- 98 DLC ports per bay: - 672 Maximum DLC Ports (Voice or Data) 400 Maximum DLC Voice Ports 1008 Maximum ports available depending on card densities. 248 x 248 Data Users to Host in a 1 to 1 Non Blocking configuration (32 Digital Line Cards) - 448 x 224 Data Users to Host in a 2 to 1 configuration (47 Digital Line Cards) Assuming no restrictions on Digital Line Cards: - 1344 Maximum DLC Ports (Voice and Data). 400 Maximum DLC Voice Ports (no COV or ONS ports) 1344 Maximum ports available depending on card densities 248 x 248 Data Users to Host in a 1 to 1 Non Blocking configuration (32 Digital Line Cards) - 496 x 248 Data Users to Host in a 2 to 1 configuration (52 Digital Line Cards) - 576 x 192 Data Users to Host in a 3 to 1 configuration (56 Digital Line Cards) 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 4-5 Engineering Information 672-Port Configuration For SX-ZOOFD 4.6 The SX-200 FD is available with Generic 1005, Generic 1005 FPKG 1 and Generic 1005 LIT96. With Generic 1005 LIT96, only one peripheral bay is supported. The 672-port configuration consists of a Control Cabinet and seven 96-par-t Peripheral Bays or Cabinets. The Contol Cabinet and the Peripheral Bays are linked by Fiber Optic Cables. This allows for remote locating of the Peripheral Cabinets close to the devices they support reducing installation costs. BayS.0, 1 BaysO,1,2 BaysO, 1,2,3 BaysO, 1,2,3,4 Bays0,1,2,3,4,5 BaysO,1,2,3,4,5,6 Bays0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 Control Control Control Control Control Control Control 672-po1-t configuration Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet - The 672-port plus plus plus plus plus plus plus one Peripheral Cabinet two Peripheral Cabinets three Peripheral Cabinets four Peripheral Cabinets five Peripheral Cabinets six Peripheral Cabinets seven Peripheral Cabinets configuration s can be equipped Bay Control Card(s) Optional Peripheral Cards (Quantity) 0 SMM, MCC, PS none as follows: CRC, FIMs, 2 Disk Driies (3.5 in.) Notes: BPSU, BCC, FIM ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, (up to 08) BPSU, BCC, FIM ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08) BPSU, BCC, FIM ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, 11 (up to 08) BPSU, BCC, FIM ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08) BPSU, BCC, FIM ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, 11 (up to 08) BPSU, BCC, FIM ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, 11 (up to 08) BPSU, BCC, FIM ONS, LS/GS, Universal, COV, DID, OPS, DLC, Tl (up to 08) 1. Each cabinet in use must have all its Control cards present; Peripheral cards are installed as required. 2. Only one Tl card is permitted per Peripheral Cabinet. - The maximum Table 4-4 Periph. Cab. Available Channels MOH noMOH number 672-Part of ports available is: DLC Feature Limitations Max DLC Ports Non Block Data (SX-200 Maximum DLC Cards Dual FD Specific) Max Ports Single Additional Non DLC Ports Available (If dual DLC used) 1 90 91 96 91 4 8 48 144 2 90 91 96 91 4 8 48 144 Page 180 4-8 Revision 0 9109-998-l 8o-NA 1 of 2 Issue 1 Configurations Table 4-4 672-Part DLC Feature Limitations (SX-200 FD Specific) .’ \ l 248 Maximum Simultaneous calls l 637 Maximum Non-Blocking Channels available if music on hold is NOT programmed Assuming a maximum 96 DLC ports per Peripheral Cabinet: - 672 Maximum DLC Ports (Voice or Data) 400 Maximum DLC Voice Ports 1008 Maximum ports available depending on card densities. 248 x 248 Data Users to Host in a 1 to 1 Non Blocking configuration (32 Digital Line Cards) - 448 x 224 Data Users to Host in a 2 to 1 configuration (47 Digital Line Cards) Assuming no restrictions on Digital Line Cards: - 1344 Maximum DLC Ports (Voice and Data). 400 Maximum DLC Voice Ports (no COV or ONS ports) 1344 Maximum ports available depending on card densities 248 x 248 Data Users to Host in a 1 to 1 Non Blocking configuration (32 Digital Line Cards) - 496 x 248 Data Users to Host in a 2 to 1 configuration (52 Digital Line Cards) - 576 x 192 Data Users to Host in a 3 to 1 configuration (56 Digital Line Cards) Note: 9109-096-l Generic 1005 LIT96 supports only one peripheral bay. 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 4-7 Engineering Information Maximum Number of SUPERSET 3 and SUERSET 4 Telephones ripheral Cabinet) per System per Bay (or Pe- 33cPol-t Bay Bay Bay Bay 1 2 3 4 (4 (1 (4 (4 High High High High Total Power Power Power Power Slot Slot Slot Slot x x x x = 78 \ 6 6 6 6 ccts/slot) ccts/slot) c&s/slot) ccts/slot) SUPERSET = 24 = 6 = 24 = 24 SUPERSET SUPERSET SUPERSET SUPERSET Telephones Telephones Telephones Telephones * Telephones 456-POf-t Bay 1 (4 High Power Slots x 6 ccts/slot) Bay 2 (1 High Power Slot x 6 c&s/slot) Bay 3 (4 High Power Slots x 6 ccts/slot) Bays 4&5 (Power Supply Limited) Total = 118 SUPERSET = 24 = 6 = 24 = 64 SUPERSET SUPERSET SUPERSET SUPERSET Telephones Telephones Telephones Telephones * Telephones 672-Part Bay Bay Bay Bay Bay Bay Bay 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (3 (4 (4 (4 (4 (4 (4 high High High High High High High Total Slots Slots Slots Slots Slots Slots Slots = 162 * One Universal Automatic - Power Power Power Power Power Power Power x x x x x x x 6 c&/slot) 6 ccts/slot) 6 ccts/slot) 6 ccts/slot) 6 cc&/slot) 6 ccts/slot) 6 ccts/slot) SUPERSET = = = = = = = 18 24 24 24 24 24 24 SUPERSET SUPERSET SUPERSET SUPERSET SUPERSET SUPERSET SUPERSET Telephones Telephones Telephones Telephones Telephones Telephones Telephones * Telephones Card required Call Distribution (ACD) Configuration Note: Automatic Call Distribution Guidelines is not available with Generic 1001, Generic1 002, and Generic 1005 FPKGl . RECOMMENDATION: Configure the ACD portion where there is no blocking or junctor limitation. 4.7 Each Analog Bay has are in use, new calls retrieved from hold, answer are placed in of the system into the digital bays, a maximum of 31 junctors available for calls. When all junctors cannot be established, existing calls cannot be transferred or and Recorded Announcement Devices RADs that cannot Do Not Disturb. With Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), the number, type, and distribution of peripherals located in each analog bay is very important. A junctor must always be available when all Agents are logged in. If a RAD is in the same bay, a junctor must 180 4-8 Revision 0 9109-098-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Configurations always be available for it; if no junctor is available, the HAD goes into Do Not Disturb. Set messaging is independent of the junctors; Agent sets will ring but cannot be answered. If no junctor is available for an Agent, the system assumes (when the ringing timer expires) that the Agent did not answer the call and then changes the Agent’s status to “Make Busy”. If there are other stations in the Bay, junctors must be available for them also. There is a link to each analog bay for system messaging by which the system sends messages to all peripherals, even if no junctor is available. No set of rules clearly identifies how to configure a given system. There are too many variables; path setup, local switching, numbers of agents, trunks, and RADs, location of RADs, transfers, etc. However, the following rules must be followed. 9 The number of ACD Agent SUPERSETtelephones, RADs, and ACD Trunks assigned in an analog bay running only ACD traffic must be less than 32; otherwise blocking will occur. l l 9109-096-l If the number of junctors is reduced due to “busy out” or “removed from service” by Maintenance, the total of Agent sets, trunks, plus RADs must be reduced accordingly. For configuration purposes each active ACD Trunk, Agent, and HAD should be allocated a junctor. If an analog bay is configured with 20 SUPERSET 4 Agent telephones, then 11 junctors would remain for general business traffic in that bay. 8O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 180 4-9 Engineering 180 4-10 Information Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 5 ’ TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION General 5.1- The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX uses the PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) form of time-division multiplexing as its digital conversion format. The PABX employs both digital peripheral cards and digitally-interfaced analog peripheral cards. System architecture is illustrated in Figure 5-1 through Figure 5-4. The major component blocks are described in the paragraphs below. Circuit Switch links 5.2 The subsystems of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX communicate over 2,048 kHz serial links. Each link is a continuously repeated data frame comprising 32 channels; each channel contains an 8-hit word which occupies an equal time slot within the frame. Certain channels on some links are segregated into message channels; the remainder are used for circuit switch applications. Circuit switch links provide paths through the system for the transfer of peripheral-related data; i.e., PCM audio, or TDM data. Each digital peripheral interface card has dedicated to it one-and-one-half circuit switch links which connect the card to the peripheral switch. Control 5.3 The main processor, which has overall control of the system, is a 16 bit MC68000 CPU. It is supported by up to 4.0 megabytes of Dynamic Random Access Memory, which is used for the storage of system software, programmed devices, abbreviated dial digit strings, ARS digit strings, and SUPERSETline appearances. The system also provides 2.48 megabytes (formatted) of disk space; this is used for the permanent storage of the system software and the customer database. The SX-200 FD provides 2.95 megabytes of disk space on two 3.5 inch Disk Drive Units. Peripheral processors control the analog cards in the 456port configuration. These processors are 8 bit MC6809 CPUs, and are supported by 32 kilobytes of static RAM. Each analog bay contains a Digital Interface Card (DIC) which interfaces the analog peripheral cards to the digital end of the system. Controlling each DIC is one 8 bit MC6809 CPU, supported by 8 kilobytes of static RAM. The Bay Control Card in digital bays has 256 kilobytes of RAM and interfaces its bay to the MCC. It is controlled by the MC68008 microprocessor. The Attendant Console (without W-232 connector) contains a MC6809 CPU, supported by 16 kilobytes of EPROM and 4 kilobytes of static RAM, which controls the display, and monitors keystrokes. The Console module on the Universal card contains one 8 bit MC681 21 CPU supported by 4 kilobytes of EPROM and 2 kilobytes of RAM, 9109-09&18O-NA Issue1 Revision 0 180 5-l Engineering Information which formats console. and controls the routing of data between the system PCM bus and the The SUPERCONSOLE 7000” Attendant Console interfaces to a Digital Line card by Tip and Ring. It contains a HD6303 CPU, supported by 16 kilobytes of EPROM, and 8 kilobytes of static RAM. A printer can be attached to the console by an RS-232C port. The connector is configured so that the console is data communication equipment (DCE). ; On each analog trunk circuit card is an MC6802 CPU with up to 4 kilobytes of PROM that controls low level functions such as seizing and releasing trunk circuits. Digital Switching 5.4 The SX-200 DIGITAL PABX uses a custom analog/digital combined integrated circuit to implement the analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion functions. The basis of this encode/decode process is the MT8960 Integrated PCM Filter/Codec (commonly known as a CODEC), which is used throughout the system to convert analog to PCM and PCM to analog. The CODEC combines a low pass filter and an analog-to-digital PCM encoder in the transmit direction (towards the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX) and a digital-to-analog decoder and low pass filter in the receive direction (towards the peripheral). The PABX uses another custom VLSI circuit as its main PCM switching matrix element -the 8 linkx32 channel MT8980 Digital Time/Space Crosspoint Switch (DXChip). The DX chip is arranged with eight incoming links and eight outgoing links; each link comprising 32 channels. Under control of the main CPU, any channel of the incoming links can be connected to any channel of the outgoing links. Thus, one DX chip is equivalent to a 65,536 (256 x 256) crosspoint array. This chip type forms the Circuit Switch and Peripheral Switch Matrices on the Main Control card, and forms part of the interface between the digital PCM links and the analog speech paths in the analog bays. I The 672-port variant of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX requires the removal of the DX module from the Main Control Card and the addition of a single Switch Matrix Card (SMC). The circuit switch on the SMC consists of a 24 link by 24 link square array made up of nine DX devices. Each peripheral bay requires 3 links, and several links are .required for the HDLC messaging and DSP resources, thus 21 links are available to support up to 7 bays. The SX-200FD PABX uses the Switch Matrix Module (SMM) in place of the DX module and the Switch Matrix Card. The SMM attaches to the Main Control Card. The circuit switch on the SMM is functionally equivalent to the SMC and consists of a 24 link by 24 link square array made up of nine DX devices. Each peripheral cabinet requires 3 links, and several links are required for the HDLC messaging and DSP resources, thus 21 links are available to support up to 7 peripheral cabinets. 180 5-2 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Technical Description r -------------------------_ DIGlTAL BAYS1 & 2 MAIN CONTROL CARD I-. I MEMOflY (EmoM) I DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS CONTROLLER ww MAlNlEN4NCE TERMlN4. I PRINTER PORT UWT L:: 7 I I I I ADDRESS,DATAAND COhVROL BUS MGWL SIGbUd PROCESSOR P-w 1 DATA LINK MESSAGE SUBSYSTEM r I -I- ClRCLJll SWrl’CH DX ARRAY (16Xl6UNKS) (512X512 CHANNELS) -e--- 1 1 SPARE LINK 6 DATALINKS 1 RING UNK I I PERIPHERAL DXARRAY (BXWUNKS) I L I 1 DATALINK ----’ ------UNKS “Ol&ATA CARDS I 1 TO/FROM PERlPHEWl DEVlCES cm377 Figure 5-I 9109-096-l 8O-NA System Architecture Issue 1 (336-Port Configuration) Revision 0 180 53 Engineering Information DIGmALBAYS < & 2 --------------------------- 1I MAJNWNt’ROLCARD DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS CONTROLLER MEMOW ww WNTEN4NCE TERMINAL PORT UART I PRINrER PORT UART \ \ I I .ADDRESS,DATAANDCONTROL BLlS \ I I -B-e- I 1 DATALINK -- --------------.------ ETA LINKS “OIC&ATA CARDS 1 1 TO/FROM PERlPHEFl4 DEVlCES 3 DATALINKS DIGITALBAY9 ANALOG GAY4 1 DATAUNK DMCES &E CARDS N T R 0 L I I I “ZE CARDS \ I TOiFFiOM PERIPHERALDMCES I I I TO/FROM PERIPHERALDMCES I cc0076 Figure !5-2 System Architecture 180 5-4 (456-Port Configuration) Revision 0 9109496-l 8O-NA issue 1 Technical Descrbtion ----------------------MAIN CONTROL r I I I I I MAIN CONTROLLER (TWO) CARD DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS CONTROLLER MEMORY MAlNTENANCE TERMINAL PORT UART I I DlGlTAL BAY 0 I I I I I I ADDRESS, DATA AND CONTROL BUS I I I I I I I MESSAGE SUBSYSTEM (HDLC) 4 24X24 LlNK DX ARRAY 766 X 766 CHANNELS L I I SWITCH MATRD[ I CARD -- 3 DATA LINKS e------- v DIGITAL BAY 1 SAY CONROLLE=i TO DlGlTAL EAYS2l-o 7 PERIPHERAL DE- CCOOWRl Figure 53 9109-096-l 8O-NA System Architecture (672-Port Configuration) Issue 1 Revision 0 180 5-5 Engineering Information ----------------------- 1 MAIN CONTROL CARD r II MAIN CONTROLLER (66000) I I I DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS CONTROLLER MEMORY I I I ADDRESS, DATA AND CONTROL BUS I I I MAINTENANCE TERMINAL PORT UART CONTROL CABINET (DIGITAL BAY 0) I I I I MESSAGE suBsYsrEM (HDLC) PROCESSOR -----a -------------- 1I I I I II DRIVE UNITS NVRAM I I I I - 24X24 LINK DX ARRAY 76.3 X 768 CHANNELS SWbTCH MATRlX MODULE I I 3 DATA LINKS 3 DATA U NKS TO DIGITAL BAYS 2 TO 7 VIA FIBER INTERFACE MODULES AND FIBER CABLES. (PERIPHERAL CABINETS) “OlC&ATA CARDS I TO/FROM PERlPHERA!m D& VlCES CCO172 Figure !54 SX-ZOO FD System Architecture 180 5-6 Revision 0 (672-Port Configuration) 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Technical Description Main Control Card 5.5 The Main Control card is the highest level in the intelligence hierarchy of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. It contains the following: . 68000 CPU . EPROM containing system power-up routines . Decryption Module . Dynamic RAM . Floppy disk interface circuitry for two 5.25 inch drives (SX-200 DIGITAL), or for two 3.5 inch drives (SX-200 FD). Two communication Ports (UARTs) Digital Signal Processor for tone generation/detection and conferencing DX module containing the Circuit Switch Matrix, and the Peripheral Switch Message interface (HDLC) . Switch Matrix Module (SMM) (for use in the SX-200 FD only). Circuit Switch The circuit switch matrix provides a nonblocking switching matrix which, in conjunction with the peripheral switch, interconnects the digital peripherals (i.e., digital lines and digital trunks) and the links from the analog bays. The matrix comprises four DX chips arranged in tandem such that the matrix has 16 receive links and 16 transmit links. The function of each link is outlined in Table 5-2. As a nonblocking matrix, the circuit switch matrix is fully switchable; i.e., all incoming links have access to all outgoing links, and forms a 256 port hi-directional switching hub. Peripheral Switch The peripheral switch concentrates the circuit switch links from up to 12 digital peripheral cards (and 18 links) on one side, down to the six links provided by the circuit switch matrix on the other side. Note that only Bays 1 and 2 are switched through the peripheral switch. The peripheral switch comprises three DX chips; one concentrates Bay 2 and Wo concentrate Bay 1. Control Resources Card 5.6 The Control Resources Card (CRC) provides all the miscellaneous circuitry required for fiber distributed systems. The CRC interfaces to the MCC and the Fiber Interface Modules (FIMs). Powering off or unplugging the CRC will result in system fail transfer becoming active in all peripheral nodes. It will also cause the loss of the fiber maintenance links, the loss of terminal and printer ports, and the loss of the Floppy Disk Drive Units. The CRC is used only with the SX-200 FD in Generic 1005. 9109-098-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Revision0 180 5-7 Engineering Information Message Subsystem 5.7 The message subsystem facilitates the transfer of control messages and program loading between the main Peripheral Control Processor and lower node processors such as Bay Control Cards, SUPERSET telephones, and consoles. This transfer of information occurs over the PCM links of the Circuit Switch Matrix (see Table 5-2). The protocol used in the message system is based on the OSI (Open Systems Interconnection) widely used HDLC (High Level Data Link Control) protocol format, Switch Matrix Card \ 5.8 The Switch Matrix Card (SMC) is required in a 672-port configuration; it supersedes the DX module on the MCC. The DX module must be removed from the MCC when the Switch Matrix Card is used. The circuit switch and peripheral switch are not used in a 672-par-t system; each peripheral bay connects through its Bay Control Card to the SMC. The Switch Matrix Card is not required in the SX-200 DIGITAL FD. Switch Matrix Module 5.9 The Switch Matrix Module (SMM) is required for the SX-200 FD. The SMM replaces the DX module on the MCC. The SMM contains the DX Array, the Dial Tone Filter, the SRAM and the Power Backup for the SRAM, and is address mapped identically to the SMC. The SMM is not available with Generic 1001, Generic 1002, Generic 1003, and Generic 1004. Analog Switching 5.10 The system uses an established LSI circuit to implement a space-division switching matrix in the analog bays. The basis of this space division is the 4-by-8 bit MT8804 Analog Switch Array, which is used throughout the analog bays to connect any one of the 32 analog speech paths to any one (or more) extension or trunk circuit(s). -Analog Bay Interface 5.11 The task of connecting the 32 digital PCM channels from the digital DX network to the 32 analog speech paths (junctors) in the analog bays is performed by the Junctor Interface Circuit (JIC). The JIC converts PCM channels into 4-wire analog signals with a CODEC, and then converts the 4-wire (separate transmit and receive) signals from the CODEC to 2-wire junctor signals. Peripheral Interface Cards 5.12 Peripheral interface cards provide an interface between the terminations of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (i.e., lines and trunks) and the circuit switch. The card type 180 5-8 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Technical Descriotion depends upon the type of peripheral interfaced to the system; i.e., an E&M Trunk card caters to E&M trunks only. The number of interface circuits that each card provides varies with the type, complexity, and space requirements of the circuit. A list of peripheral interface cards and the number of circuits on each is provided in Table 5-l. :. x_ \ Operation of the digital peripheral cards in Bays 1 and 2 (COMBO backplane only) is controlled by signals received from the peripheral switch on the MCC. In digital Bays 3 and 4 of a 336port configuration and digital Bay 3 of a 456port configuration, digital peripheral cards are controlled by the MCC through the Bay Control Card (BCC). Operation of the analog peripheral cards is controlled by the MCC through the Digital Interface Card and Peripheral Control Card in the associated analog shelf. In the 672-par-t configuration for the SX-ZOO DIGITAL and the SX-200 FD, all digital peripheral cards are controlled by the MCC through the BCC. The clocks provided by the Main Control Card for the digital peripheral cards and the Digital Interface Cards are as follows: Frame Pulse. This signal synchronizes the start of a PCM frame which consists of a complete sequence of 32 channels. It occurs every 125 microseconds (8 kHz). 244 ns Clock (C244+). The positive going edge of each clock pulse is used to generate channel counting. Peripheral Interface Card Distribution (456-Part Configuration) Since the digital bays are non-blocking, while the analog bays are blocking, as many trunks as possible should be distributed in the digital bays. Analog type trunks should be evenly distributed throughout the analog bays; then most trunk calls will require only one speech path for completion. Place Direct-In Line (DIL) trunks in the same analog Bay (4,5) as the extension(s) to which they ring. For example, a fully configured system in a heavy traffic environment might have four to five trunk cards in each of the analog bays. 9109-09~18O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 180 5-9 Engineering information Table 5-l Card Name Peripheral Cards Card Description ONS Line On-Premise LS/GS Trunk Central Office trunk interface COV Line Card Interface SUPERSET Bay Type line interface 3 / SUPERSET 4 Telephone control over Circuits digital 12 digital 6 digital 6 digital 6 voice line interface OPS Line Card Off-premise line interface DID Trunk Card Direct Inward Dial trunk interface digital 6 E&M Trunk Module E&M Trunk interface (module on Universal Card) digital 1 Digital Line Card SUPERSETB DN / SUPERSET 4 DN Telephones, SUPERSET401/SlJPERSET410/SUPERSET420 / SUPERSET 430 Telephones, SUPERCONSOLE 7000, and DATASET 1100 series digital 12 ; interface Tl Trunk Digital trunk interface (24 channels) digital 1 8 Station Line On-Premise analog 8 SUPERSET SUPERSET 3 / SUPERSET 4 line interface analog 8 CO Trunk Central Office Trunk interface analog 4 E&M Trunk E&M Trunk interface analog 2 DIDme Trunk Direct Inward Dial/Tie trunk interface analog 2 line interface Line Fiber Distributed Systems -5.13 The SX-ZOO FD Control Cabinet is linked fiber optically to the Peripheral Cabinets. The Fiber Interface Module (FIM) provides the interface. Up to two Quad FIM Carriers may house up to seven FIMs in the Control Cabinet while one FIM is plugged into the Peripheral FIM Carrier in the Peripheral Cabinet. Fiber Interface Module (FIM) 5.14 The Fiber Interface Module (FIM) provides a fiber optic based communication link between the nodes of a distributed PABX system. The FIM contains a transmit section, a receive section, and a common control section. The FIM is used in the Control Cabinet and in the Peripheral Bays. 180 5-10 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Technical Description Quad FIM Carrier 5.15 The quad FIM Carrier (QFC) provides the physical and electrical interface for up to four FIMs. Two quad FIM carriers can be installed in the Control Cabinet. The QFC connects to the Control Backplane via a ribbon cable. Peripheral --:. 5.16 \ FIM Carrier The Peripheral FIM Carrier (PFC) plugs into the module position on the Bay Control Card. It acts as a FIM carrier for one Fiber Interface Module. The PFC provides the interface between the FIM and the BCC. It also provides the following functions: l R!S-232 Port with surge and over voltage Terminal . System l Fail Transfer closure and control for the Remote Maintenance circuitry Single ended to balanced conversion of C244 and Frame Pulse to the Bay Controller and the balanced to single ended conversion of the DX Links from the Bay Controller. Fiber link Specifications 5.17 contact protection and Requirements The following items are the Fiber Link optical and cable specifications requirements for the Fiber Interface Module used on the SX-200 FD: l Transmitter 0 Transmitter Wavelength: Source: LED l Fiber Link Bit Rate: 20.48 l Fiber Cable Type: l Fiber Diameter: 850 nm Mbaud 62.5/125 MHz) urn System: “ST” 0 Maximum Distance (Cable 0 Maximum Optical 9109-096-l (10.24 Glass Multi-mode 0 Connector l and Loss: Length): 1 km 10 dB (including splices and connections) The grade or type of cable must be suitable for the installation (i.e., light or heavy duty, plenum, outdoor, etc.) Consult local building codes and your Fiber Cable supplier. 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 5-11 Ennineerinn Information SX-200 DIGITAL PCM Circuit Switch Link Assignments Speech Path Accessing - Digital 5.18 For each digital card, there are 1.5 PCM links allocated, connecting it to the circuit switch matrix on the Main Control card. Under control of the Main Control card (via the message subsystem), the transmit and receive channels of an originating circuit can be connected to the receive and transmit channels of any other circuit through the-circuit switch matrix. In the 672-port configuration there are three links from the Switch Matrix Card (or from the Switch Matrix Module in the SX-200 FD) to each digital peripheral bay. s In the ‘336-par-t configuration there are three links from the Main Control Card to Bays 3 and 4. Speech Path Accessing - Analog Each speech path is directly wired to an MT8804 on each analog line and analog trunk circuit card in the system. Under control of the Peripheral Control card, any speech path may be connected to any of the circuits on the card. This is illustrated in Figure 5-5. 180 5-12 Revision 0 9109496-l 8CWA Issue 1 Technical Description Table 5-2 PCM Circuit Switch PCM Link Assignment Link # 336-Part 910949&l Link Assignments 8O-NA Issue 1 Configuration Revision 0 180 5-13 Engineering information Table 6-2 PCM Circuit Switch Link Assignments (continued) PCM Link Assignment Link # 14 dial tone, filter, codec, Bays 1 and 2 ringing reference 15 unused 672-Port Configuration 0 HDLC message 1 \ Digital Signal Processor link from MCC 2 Reserved 3 Bay 1 voice link and ringing 4 Bay 1 voice link and messaging 5 Bay 1 voice link and miscellaneous 6 Bay 2 voice link and ringing 7 Bay 2 voice link and messaging 8 Bay 2 voice link and miscellaneous 9 Bay 3 voice link and ringing 10 Bay 3 voice link and messaging 11 Bay 3 voice link and miscellaneous 12 Bay 4 voice link and ringing 13 Bay 4 voice link and messaging 14 Bay 4 voice link and miscellaneous 15 Bay 5 voice link and ringing 16 Bay 5 voice link and messaging 17 Bay 5 voice link and miscellaneous 18 Bay 6 voice link and ringing 19 Bay 6 voice link and messaging 20 Bay 6 voice link and miscellaneous 21 Bay 7 voice link and ringing 22 Bay 7 voice link and messaging 23 Bay 7 voice link and miscellaneous link tone tone tone tone tone tone tone Page 2 of 3 180 5-14 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Technical Description Table 5-2 PCM Circuit Switch (continued) Link Assignments PCM Link Assignment Link # 672-Port SX-200 FD Configuration Bay 7 voice link and miscellaneous 23 tone Page 3 of 3 Software limitations 5.19 Software limitations exist that restrict the number of devices that can be programmed. Refer to Table 5-3 when the number of devices proposed for a system is close to system limits. CDE will prevent the user from programming any more than these amounts. 9109-098-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 5-15 Engineering Information Table 5-3 Software -- Limitations ACD Sr. Supv. na na 1 1 ACD Agent Group na na 1 1 ACD Path na na 1 1 Modem Pool na na 1 1 TOTAL: For Generic 1001, must be less than 1003. For Generic 1002 and 1003, must be less than 1956 for 672-port ACD and 336/456-par-t DO6 and later; less than 942 for 336/456+01-t pre-D06 software; less than1 966 for 336/456+101-t DO6 and later software; less than 932 for 672-part preD06. For Generic 1004 and Generic 1005, must be less than 1956. Dynamic RAM Allocation The database is 250 kilobytes for 336- and 456-part systems, and 300 kilobytes for 672-pat-t systems; for Generic 1004 and Generic 1005, it is 300 kilobytes for all configurations. Table 5-4 identifies the percentage of RAM used for programmed devices. 180 5-16 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Technical DescriDtion To calculate the space required programming, use Table &. Table 5-4 for Speed Call, ARS, Account Code, and Feature Key RAM Space Limitations ‘/ Page 1 of 2 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 517 Engineering Information Table 5-4 RAM Space Limitations (continued) Device Multiplier Generic 1001 Multiplier Generic 1002 Multiplier Generic 1003 Multlplier Generic 1004 /I 005 Number in System Total TOTAL (in-bytes) Divide this TOTAL as follows: For Generic 1001 by 1053. For Generic 1002 and 1003, by 5868 for 672-par-t ACD and 336/456--part DO6 and later; or by 2355 for 336/456-part preDO6 software; or by 4915 for 336/456-part DO6 and later software; or by 2796 for 672-par-t pr+DOG. For Generic 1004 and Generic 1005, by 5868. This will give the percentage of data base space used for devices. The sum of this figure plus the speed call, ARS digits, and account code percentages must be less than 100%. % ’ Page 2 of 2 Table 5-5 RAM Space Requirements Feature For Features Description Formula ARS Digits Take the total number of ARS digits (D) plus twice the number of ARS entries (S). Add to this a 5% overhead. 1.05 ( D + 2s ) Account Codes Take the total number of Account Code digits (D) plus twice the number of Account Code entries (S). Add to this a 5% overhead. 1.05 ( D + 2s ) Speed Calls Take the total number of Speed Call digits (D) plus the number of Speed Call entries (E). D+E Feature Keys Take the number of sets with Feature Keys programmed (S) and multiply by sixteen. Sx16 Total TOTAL (in bytes) Divide the TOTAL by 2560 for 336- or 456-par-t machines, or by 3072 for 672-part machines, to get the percentage of data base space used for features. The sum of the device 180 5-18 and feature calculations, Table 5-4 and Table 5-6, Revision 0 must be leee than 100%. 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Technical Description LINECARD NUMBER1 1 2 3 4 SPEECH PATHS 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 MUSIC ON HOLD EQUIPMENT NUMBER ccolo3 Figure 5-5 Analog Speech Paths 9109-4296-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 5-19 Engineering Information 2 180 5-20 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 6. SIGNALING AND SUPERVISION General 6.1.; This Part outlines PABX. the signaling and supervision The standard range of tones are available Signal Processor: l l l 12 DTMF sets of tones, A set of call progress ble Tone Plan. One ringing parameters from the SX-200 of the SX-200 DIGITAL DIGITAL PABX’s Digital as listed in Table 6-I. tones as listed in Part 9, which form part of the country’s Audi- tone of 20 Hz. The SX-ZOO DIGITAL PABX is capable of accepting and repeating telephone sets which have the parameters shown in Table 6-1, Parameters and Table 6-2, Dial Pulse Reception Limits. signals DTMF from Tone Where any of the frequencies shown in Part9 are present at the system input, any other single frequency (200 - 3400 Hz) should be a minimum of 40 dB below the signal frequency. DTMF pulses are registered in the presence of precise dial tone at a level of -10 dBm. The SX-200 l DIGITAL PABX gives the following signal conditions: Dial Pulse Conditions: Pulse Rate Break Interval Interdigit Time l output DTMF Dialing Conditions Frequency Deviation Tone Duration Interdigit Time Level, low group Level, high group Level, DTMF signal Level, third Harmonic Twist 9109-09~18O-NA Issue 1 :9toll pps : 50% to 62% : 800 ms. for North America: : : : : : : : : + 1% greater than 90 ms greater than 100 ms greater than -4 dBm greater than - 4 dBm less than -1 dBm better than 40 dB Frequency 0 dB. Revision 0 below DTMF signal 180 6-l Engineering Information Table 6-l DTMF Tone Parameters High Frequency (Hz) I Low Frequency 1209 1336 1477 697 1 2 3 ._. 770 4 5 6 w 7 8 9 L 941 * 0 # .’ (Hz) Frequency deviation: Signal interval (2 frequency): Per frequency, minimum level: Twist, maximum (at -10 dBm): 2 1.5 % 40 ms (min) -17 dBm on line circuit +4 to -8 dB (high frequency frequency) Table 6-2 Dial Pulse Reception I relative to low Llmlts Mln Max Pulse Rate 8 PPS 12 PPS Break Duration 58% 64% Interdigit Time 300 ms 15 s Pulse Rate 8Pps 12 PPS Break Duration 50% 80% Interdigit Time 300 ms 15s Parameter ONS Line: 6 Station Llne: OPS Line: Pulse Rate 8 PPS Break Duration 42% 84% Interdigit Time 300 ms 15 s 180 6-2 Revision 0 9109-096-I 12 PPS 8O-NA Issue 1 7 ’ TRANSMISSION General 7.-l- The following descriptions detail some apply to the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. ’ Frequency 7.2 of the transmission characteristics which Response The frequency interconnections response is shown relative to 1004 in Table 7-l. Table 7-l Frequency Hz at 0 dBm for different types Response or Line to 2-W Analog Trunk or 2-W Analog Trunk to 2-W or 2-W Analog Trunk to 4-W Analog Trunk 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 3200 0.3 -1.5 3400 0 -3.0 Revision 0 180 7-1 of Engineering Information Overload 7.3 Switched Analog Card Types The overload levels shown in Table 7-2 define the maximum signal levels which may be applied to an analog interface before clipping occurs, The Input Overload (IOL) defines the maximum analog input signal level which can be applied to a digital interface circuit before clipping of the encoded PCM word occurs. The ‘Output Overload (OOL) defines the maximum analog output signal which can be produced at the output of an interface by the application of a 3 dBm0 digital signal to the input. Overload 7.4 - Digitally - locally Switched The change in attenuation +7 dBm shall not exceed Table 7-2 Overload Analog Card Types when the level of a 1004 Hz signal is increased 0.4 dB. Levels - Digitally I Switched I interface I Connecting Circuit Overload Card Types Point (dB) IOL OOL 0 3.0 3.0 ONS(A) any circuit ACO(A) AC0 (A) ONS(D) 6.0 0 any trunk 3.0 Quantization 7.5 Type Analog from -9 to I Distortion The quantization distortion of a connection is a measure of the signal to distortion ratio as the input signal is varied. Note that this parameter does not apply to the analog card types. For 95% of connections the signal to distortion ratio will exceed the limits shown in Table 7-3. Table 7-3 Signal To Distortion 1004 Hz input Level (demo) Signal/Distortion Ratio Ratio (dB) 95% of ail connections oto-30 33 -40 27 22 180 7-2 Revision 0 9109-098-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Transmission Intermodulation 7.6 Distortion intermodulation (harmonic) distortion is measured using two pairs of equal level tones (851/863 Hz and 1372/l 388 Hz), at a total composite input power of -13.0 dBm0. Table 7-4 shows the second and third order products for the different types of connections. 95% of the connections in each category shall exceed the stated limits. Table 7-4 Intermodulation Connection Type Second Line to Line Line to Trunk Trunk to Trunk Requirements Order Product (dB) (4.8 KB/s) Third Order Product 40 (dB) 43 53 53 45 45 Return loss 7.7 The ERL and SFRL return losses for different are shown in Table 7-5. Table 7G types of interconnection or idle states Return Loss Characteristics * denotes analog card type 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 7-3 Engineering Information Crosstalk 7.8 The crosstalk attenuation, any frequency between connections. or coupling loss, between any two transmission paths, at 200 and 3200 Hz is greater than 75 dB for 95% of all Echo Path Delay _‘. Y_ 7.9 The round trip echo path delay with a frequency of 1500 Hz does stated values for the following types of interconnection: \ l not exceed the Line to Line: 3.0 ms 9 Line to Trunk: 3.0 ms l Trunk to Trunk: 3.0 ms. Envelope Delay Distortion 7.10 Table 7-6 details the maximum envelope delay distortion for the digital card types. These objectives are met by 95% of all connections, For the analog card types, the envelope delay distortion is less than 200 microseconds between 400 and 3200 Hz, for all connections. Table 74 Connection Line to Line Line to Trunk Trunk to Trunk 180 7-4 Type Frequency Envelope Band (Hz) Delay Distortion Envelope Delay Dlstortion (microseconds) 1000 - 3000 less than 280 400 - 3200 less than 560 1000 - 3000 less than 140 400 - 3200 less than 280 1000 - 3000 less than 140 400-3200 less than 280 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Transmission longitudinal Balance 7.11 All connections (except ONS) meet the longitudinal balance requirements Table 7-7. Note that these apply to OFF-HOOK circuits only. Table 7-7 Longitudinal outlined in Balance ._ Frequency Longltudinal (Hz) Balance Mlnlmum \ (dB) Average 200 58 63 500 58 63 1000 58 63 3000 53 58 System Impedances 7.12 System impedances - 9109-010 Station l are as follows: : 600 600 600 : 1200 -9110-110 ohms ohms ohms ohms input impedance DC loop resistance input impedance DC loop resistance. LS/GS Trunk Loop : 600 ohms input impedance, l 1600 ohms loop range. LS/GS Trunk T/R to ground Resistance ( - both in the IDLE state ): - greater than 30 Kohms (ground start) - greater than IO Mohms (loop start) l l Analog type lines: 600 ohms ac input impedance, l Analog type trunks: 600/900 nominal ohms ac input impedance, nominal Idle Channel Noise - C Message 7.13 The idle channel interconnection: 0 Average: l 9109-096-I C message values for any type of 16 dBrnC 95% of all interconnections: 8O-NA noise will not exceed the following Issue 1 20 dBrnC Revision 0 180 7-5 Engineering Information Idle Channel 7.14 Noise - 3 kHz Fiat The idle channel noise for 3 kHz fiat noise requirements values for any type of interconnection: l 95% of all interconnections: 39 dBrn0 l 50% of all interconnections: 35 dBrn0 do not exceed the following -:_ 180 7-6 Revision 0 9109-096-1804A Issue1 8 . LOSS AND LEVEL PLAN General 8.-l-- \ This Part describes the loss and level plan for North American applications of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. A large number of interconnections are possible, ranging from interconnections between on-premises (ONS) line circuits, to the interconnection of remotely located satellite PABXs with the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. This part describes the principles of the loss and level plans, their application to the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, and the arrangements for setting the transmission levels. North American 0.2 Loss and Level Plans The purpose of a transmission loss and level plan is to provide an acceptable transmission grade of service to all subscribers in the telephone network. At present, two loss plans exist for the public switched network in North America. They are the VIA NET LOSS (VNL) plan and the SWITCHED DIGITAL NETWORK (SDN) plan. VNL Plan The VNL plan consists of two parts: a fixed loss portion and a variable loss portion as follows: l l Fixed Portion. A minimum fixed amount of loss is introduced into all Toll connections, This loss is equal to 5 dB and is split equally between the two end trunks connected to the Toll network. In addition to the fixed portion, a variable loss is introduced into all trunks involved in a connection. This loss, known as VNL, is proportional to the trunk length and its propagation delay. The loss ranges from a minimum of 0.5 dB to a maximum of 3.0 dB, and covers trunk lengths from 0 to about 2900 km (0 to 1800 miles). Trunks in excess of this length employ echo suppressors and are designed to zero loss. Variable Portion. The loss objectives for Toll connections using the VNL plan range from a minimum of 5.5 dB to a maximum of 8.0 dB between end-to-end CO offices (CL5 to CL5). This is illustrated in Table 8-2. SDN Loss Plan The Switched Digital Network (SDN) loss plan was developed to meet the needs of the evolving digital public switched network. This plan does not assign losses to intermediate links in a connection. Under the plan, the local area public network (local CO to local CO) is operated at zero loss. This feature eliminates the need to introduce digital padding on intermediate digital trunk links and maintains data transparency throughout the network. Control of echo and noise with this plan is achieved by inserting fixed amounts of loss at the end points where the conversion to analog takes place. A 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 8-l Engineering Information compromise value of 6 dB was selected for line-to-line network. This loss is inserted in the receive (RX) direction software control. This is illustrated in Figure 6-2. LOCAL co TOLL (OR HIGHER) OFFICE connections of transmission TOLL (OR HIGHER) OFFICE over the Toll (D-A) under LOCAL co -- -\ VNLcZSdB TOLLCOt@lECTlNG TRUNK (2W ANALOG) I, 1 VNL INTERTOLL TFiUNKS (4W ANALOG) TOLLCONNECTING TRUNK (2W ANALOG) END-TO-END LOSS 5.5dB-B.WB Figure 8-I Local to Local Central Offices VNL Objectives LOCAL LOCAL co t co PAD 6dB END-END LOSS ccolol Figure 8-2 Local to Local Central Offices Fixed Loss Plan Objectives 180 8-2 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Loss and Level Plan SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Loss And Level Plan To illustrate the loss and level plan used for the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, reference is made to the layout illustrated in Figure 8-3. This layout is not intended to be a typical network, but is drawn to show the different types of trunk and line interfaces which the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX will accommodate. Table 8-1 explains the terms used for the different types of peripheral interfaces. L Table 8-1 Interface References DIDme Trunk card CO Trunk card Page 1 of 2 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 8-3 Engineering Information Table 8-l Circuit Ref Interface References (conthwed) Description Card Type (Part No.) ATT(A) E&M Trunk card 9110-013 ATi B&M Trunk module 9109-913 An(A) DIDfie ATT(D) \ DID Trunk card Trunk card 9110-031 91094x31 DC0 A Digital Central Office Trunk (DCO) connects a Digital CL5 office over digital facilities. DTO A Digital Toll Office Trunk (DTO) connects a Digital PABX to a Digital CL4 or higher office over digital facilities. DlT A Digital me Trunk (DlT) connects a Digital PABX to a Digital PABX over digital facilities. Tl Trunk l 9109-021 Digital Tl Trunk card. C-IT A Combination Tie Trunk connects a Digital PABX to a remote channel bank over digital facilities. The remote channel bank usually interfaces to an analog PBX and provides the A/D & D/A conversion. SAm SDTT SCTT This designation refers to a “satellite” tie trunk which connects a Main PBX to a Satellite PBX. The type of trunk cards used to interface are the same as those for the An, DlT, and Cl7 interfaces described above. Paae 2 of 2 e To implement the required loss objectives (Table 8-2) of the plan, combinations of fixed and software selectable analog and digital transmission pads are provided. All analog padding is provided by Mite1 8960 series combined Codec/Filter integrated circuits, over a 7 dB range in 1 dB increments. Padding is provided in both the Transmit (TX) and Receive (FIX) directions (see Part C). Satellite PABX A satellite PABX (shown in Figure 8-3) is defined as a PABX which has no direct connection to the serving central office for incoming traffic. It has no directory number, and receives all incoming calls through the main PABX over satellite trunks. The satellite PABX is usually in the same local area as its main PABX. Notr that the Loss Plan differs for “SATELLITE” trunks in the main PABX from “SATELLITE” trunks in the satellite PABX. Analog Transmission Pad Arrangements - Digital Interfaces The analog transmit pad (A/D) setting defines the input level required to produce a 0 dBm0 digital signal, as well as the overload point of the interface (approximately 3 dB 180 8-4 Revision 0 9109-098-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Loss and Level Plan above the 0 dBm0 signal level). The TX pad comprises a fixed portion and a variable portion. The fixed portion is incorporated into the analog interface to the codec/filter. The variable portion (0 to 7 dB) is incorporated into the codec/filter. The analog receive pad (D/A) defines the output level produced by a digital milliwatt input signal. The Rx pad comprises a fixed portion which is part of the,analog interface to the codec/filter, and a variable portion (0 to -7 dB) which is incorporated into the codec/filter. This pad arrangement is illustrated in Figure 8-4. Analog Transmission Pad Arrangements - Analog Interfaces The transmit pads for the analog type cards consist of a variable or fixed portion on the card itself, a fixed portion on the Digital Interface card, and a variable portion in the codec/filter. The variable transmit pad on the analog ONS line card may be set to either 4.0 dB or -10.7 dB. The fixed transmit pad on the analog trunk cards is set to -8.0 dB. The fixed portion on the Digital Interface card is set to 1.8 dB while the variable portion in the codec/filter can be set to anything between 0 dB and 7 dB, in 1 dBsteps. The input signal level and overload level are defined by the sum of the fixed and variable pads described in the Digital Interfaces paragraphs. The receive pads for the analog type cards consist of a fixed portion on the analog card itself, a fixed portion on the Digital Interface card, and a variable portion in the codec/filter. The fixed portions are set to 5.7 dB and -1.9 dB respectively, while the variable portion can be set from 0 to -7 dB in 1 dB steps. The output signal level and overload level are defined by the sum of the fixed and variable pads as described in the Digital Interfaces paragraphs. This pad arrangement is illustrated in Figure 8-5. 9109-096-l 8O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 180 8-5 Engineering - ,. Information Figure 8-3 Types of Trunk and Line Interfaces : Local Switching Loss Plan To maximize the traffic performance of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX, connections between analog interface circuits which are in the same analog equipment bay may be made by connecting both interfaces to the same analog speech path (junctor), without passing through the digital switching network in the Control shelf. This type of connection is known as a “locally switched connection”. The port-to-port losses for locally switched connections are shown in Table 8-3. All analog interfaces are locally switched. 180 8-6 may be represented by the block diagram Revision 0 Figure 8-6 when they 9109-096-18O-NA Issue1 Loss and Level Plan Table 8-2 Originating Circuit SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Connecting ONS(D) ONS(A) OPSS Circuit Loss Plan Loss (dB) TX Direction Loss (dB) Rx ‘Directlon ONS(D) -8.0 -8.0 ONS(A) -5.2 -5.2 OPSS -8.0 4.0 OPSL -3.0 -3.0 ACO(D) 0 0 ACO(A) -0.2 -0.2 AJ-W AJ-W -3.2 -3.2 -3.0 -3.0 AT0 (A) 4.2 -6.2 ATO -8.0 -8.0 DC0 -3.0 -3.0 DTO -3.0 -9.0 DlT -3.0 -9.0 sAll -3.0 -3.0 sDlT -3.0 -3.0 SC-l-r -3.0 -9.0 ONS(D) -8.0 -8.0 ONS(A) -5.4 5.4 OPSS -5.2 -5.2 OPSL -3.2 -3.2 ACO(D) -0.2 -0.2 AC0 (A) -0.4 -0.4 AJ-W ATD) -3.4 -3.4 -3.2 -3.2 AT0 (A) a.4 -6.4 ATO -6.2 -6.2 DC0 -3 3 DTO -3 .2 -9.2 Dl-l- -3 -9 sAlT -3.2 -3.2 sDTT -3 -3 scl-r 3 -9 ONS(D) -8.0 -8.0 ONS(A) 5.2 -5.2 OPSS -8.0 -8.0 ~Y-le r+- 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 1. nfWI A” 180 8-7 Engineering Information Table 8-2 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (continued) Originating CSrcuit -. \ OPSL ,. : ACO(D) 180 8-8 Connecting Circuit Loss Plan Loss (dB) TX Direction Loss (dB) Rx Directiori OPSL -3.0 -3.0 AGO(D) 0 0 ACO(A) 4.2 4.2 AJ-W) -3.0 -3.0 AJTA) 3.2 -3.2 ATO -8.0 -8.0 AT0 (A) -6.2 -6.2 DC0 -3 -3 DTO 3 -9 sAlT -3.0 -3.0 scl-r -3.0 -9.0 sDll- -3 -3 ONS(D) -3.0 -3.0 ONS(A) -3.2 -3.2 OPSL 0 0 OPSS -3.0 -3.0 ACO(D) 0 0 ACO(A) -0.2 -0.2 AVD) AJ-W) -2.0 -2.0 -2.2 -2.2 ATO -3.0 -3.0 AT0 (A) -3.2 -3.2 DC0 0 0 DTO 0 -8 DlT 0 -6 sAlT -2.0 -2.0 sDlT -2 -2 scl-r 0 -8 ONS(D) 0 0 ONS(A) -0.2 -0.2 OPSS 0 0 OPSL 0 0 ACO(D) 0 0 ACO(A) -0.2 -0.2 A’(D) -2.0 Revision 0 * -2.0 Page 2 of 8 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Loss and Level Plan Table 8-2 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (continued) Originating Circuit Connecting ACO(A) AJ-W 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Chcuit Loss Plan Loss (dB) TX Direction Loss (dB) Rx ‘Direction An(A) -2.2 -2.2 ATO -3.0 -3.0 AT0 (A) -3.2 -3.2 DC0 0 0 DTO 0 -8 Dll- 0 -8 SATT 0 0 SD-I-T 0 0 SCTT 3 -3 ONS(D) -0.2 -0.2 ONS(A) -0.4 -0.4 OPSS -0.2 -0.2 OPSL -0.2 -0.2 ACO(D) -0.2 -0.2 ACO(A) -0.4 -0.4 AJ-W) AJ=-W -2.2 -2.2 -2.4 -2.4 ATO -3.2 -3.2 AT0 (A) -3.4 -3.4 DC0 -0.2 a.2 DTO -0.2 -6.2 D-IT -0.2 -6.2 sAl-l- -0.2 -0.2 SD-I-I- -0.2 -0.2 SC-l-r 2.8 -3.2 ONS(D) -3.2 -3.2 ONS(A) -3.4 -3.4 OPSS -3.2 -3.2 OPSL -2.2 -2.2 ACO(D) -2.2 -2.2 ACO(A) -2.4 -2.4 AJ-W ATA) -0.2 -0.2 -0.4 -0.4 ATO -0.2 -0.2 AT0 (A) -0.4 Revision 0 -0.4 Page 3 of 8 180 8-9 Engineering Information Table 8-2 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (continued) Originating .‘. Circuit -._ \ Connecting Circuit Loss (dB) TX Dlrection -2.2 -2.2 DTO 2.8 -3.2 D-IT 2.8 -3.2 sAlT -0.2 -0.2 -02-2.2 4.2/2.2 2.8 -3.2 ONS(D) -3.0 -3.0 ONS(A) -3.2 -3.2 OPSS -3.0 -3.0 OPSL -2.0 -2.0 ATD) 0 0 AJ-W) -0.2 -0.2 DC0 -2 -2 DTO 3 -3 DlT 3 -3 sAlT 0 0 ACO(D) -2.0 -2.0 ACO(A) -2.2 -2.2 SD-IT ATO ATO SD-I-T 0 0 -0.2 -0.2 o/-2 01-2 ONS(D) a.2 -6.2 ONS(A) a.4 -6.4 OPSS -6.2 -8.2 OPSL -3.2 -3.2 ACO(D) -3.2 -3.2 ACO(A) -3.4 -3.4 A‘TT(D) -0.2 -0.2 AJ-W) -0.4 -0.4 ATO -0.2 -0.2 AT0 (A) a.4 -0.4 DC0 -3.2 -3.2 DTO 2.8 -3.2 D-IT 2.8 -3.2 D.-.-P. rc+jF; 180 8-10 Revision 0 c 3 3 scl-r ATO Loss (dB) Fix Dlrection’ DC0 scl-r AJ-W Loss Plan 9109-096-l 8o-NA A -t “I-* 9c Issue 1 Loss and Level Plan Table 8-2 SX-200 Originating Circuit Connecting DIGITAL PABX (continued) Circuit Loss (dB) TX Direction Loss (dB) Rx ‘Direction -3.2 -3.2 -3.2 -3.2 2.8 -3.2 ONS(D) -8.0 -8.0 ONS(A) -8.2 -8.2 OPSS -8.0 -8.0 OPSL -3.0 -3.0 ACO(D) -3.0 3.0 AC0 (A) -3.2 0 -0.2 -3.2 0 -0.2 0 0 -0.2 -0.2 DC0 -3 -3 DTO D-IT 3 3 -3 -3 sAlT -3.0 -3.0 SD-IT -3 -3 SC-IT 3 -3 ONS(D) -3.0 -3.0 ONS(A) -3.2 -3.2 OPSS -3.0 -3.0 OPSL -2.0 -2.0 ACO(D) 0 0 AC0 (A) AJ-UD) AWA) -0.2 0 -0.2 -0.2 0 -0.2 ATO -3.0 -3.0 AT0 (A) -3.2 -3.2 DC0 0 0 DTO 0 -6 D-IT 0 -8 SAT 0 0 sDlT 0 0 SCTT 0 sAl-iSD-IT - scl-r ATO AJ-W) ATA) ATO AT0 (A) SAT 9109-09&l 8o-NA Issue 1 Loss Plan Revision 0 -8 Page 5 of 8 180 8-11 Engineering Information Table 8-2 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (continued) Originating Circuit Connecting Circuit Loss (dB) TX Direction Loss (dB) Rx Direction’ -3 -3 ONS(D) DC0 \ ONS(A) -3 -3 OPSS -3 -3 OPSL 0 0 ACO(D) 0 0 ACO(A) -0.2 -0.2 AJ-W) -2 -2 Am(A) -2.2 -2.2 -3 -3 AT0 (A) -3.2 -3.2 DC0 0 0 DTO 0 -6 D-IT 0 -6 SAlT 0 0 SD-IT 0 0 SC-IT 0 -6 ONS(D) -9 ONS(A) -9 .2 -3.2 OPSS -9 -3 OPSL -6 0 ACO(D) -6 0 ACO(A) -6.2 -0.2 ATD) -3 3 AJ-W -3.2 2.8 ATO -3 3 -3.2 2.8 DC0 -6 0 DTO 0 0 DlT 0 0 sAlT -6 0 SD-IT -6 0 0 0 ONS(D) -9 -3 ONS(A) -9.2 -3.2 OPSS -9 ATO DTO AT0 (A) scl-r DlT Loss Plan ; -3 -3 Page 6 of 8 180 8-12 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Loss and Level Plan Table 8-2 SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (continued) Originating Circuit Connecting scl-r Circuit Loss (dB) TX Direction 9109-096-l 8o-NA issue 1 Loss (dB) Rx Direction OPSL -6 0 ACO(D) -8 0 AC0 (A) -6.2 -0.2 ATD) -3 3 ATA) -3.2 2.8 ATO -3 3 AT0 (A) -3.2 2.8 DC0 -8 0 DTO 0 0 DTO 0 0 D-l-r 0 0 sAlT -8 0 sDlT -8 0 SC-l-r 0 0 ONS(D) -9 -3 ONS(A) -9.2 -3.2 OPSS -9 -3 OPSL -6 0 ACO(D) -3 3 ACO(A) -3.2 2.8 AJ-W) -3 3 AJ-W -3.2 2.8 ATO -3 3 AT0 (A) -3.2 2.8 DC0 -6 0 DTO 0 0 DTO 0 0 D-IT 0 0 SAG -6 0 SD-IT -6 0 0 0 ONS(D) -3 -3 ONS(A) -3.2 -3.2 OPSS -3 -3 OPSL -2 scl-r sDlT Loss Plan Revision 0 -2 Page 7 of 8 180 8-13 Engineering Information Table 8-2 Originating Circuit SX-200 DIGITAL PABX (continued) Connecting Circuit Loss (dB) TX Direction Loss (dB) Rx Dlrectioni ACO(D) AC0 (A) 0 0 -0.2 -0.2 JWD) o/-2 o/-2 A-(A) -02-2.2 ATO ATO DC0 \ Loss Plan -0.21-2.2 -3 3 -3.2 -3.2 0 0 0 0 O 0 DTO DTT SAlT SD-I-Iscl-r ’ -a -a 0 0 -a 0 Page 8 of a TX PADS (:IRCUll N CONNECTING clRcurr TIP/RING C/ACCMI. FIXEO VARIABIE SWKCHING NEMlORK 4 VARIABLE < FbtPALB culG9a Figure 84 Analog Pad Arrangements 180 a-14 Revision 0 - Configuration A 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Loss and Level Plan I --) VARIABLE FIXED I VARIASLE __) %I’ PASX I :IRCU~ N JUNCTOR CONNECTING ClR3JlT CODEC TIP/RING -L I FIXED FLED Fb 4 a : I VARLASLE Ftx SWrP2HlNG NBWORK w l-l cm098 Figure 8-5 Analog Pad Arrangements - Configuration B Figure 8-6 Local Switching Analog Pad Arrangements 9109-096-l 8O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 180 8-15 Engineering information Table 8-3 Originating Circuit SX-200 DIGITAL PABX Local Swltchlng Connecting ONS(A) ACO(A) AJ-W Circuit Loss Plan Loss (dB) TX Dlrectlon Loss (dB) FIX Direction’ ONS(A) 4.0 -5.0 ACO(A) -0.3 4.3 Al-w) -2.3 -2.3 AT0 (A) * * ONS(A) -0.3 -0.3 ACO(A) -0.3 -0.3 AJ-W) -2.3 -2.3 AT0 (A) * * ONS(A) -2.3 -2.3 ACO(A) -2.3 -2.3 ATA) -0.3 4.3 * AT0 (A) * * The AT0 trunk cannot be locally switched. The AT0 trunk can be implemented with an analog CO trunk interface, but it does not have the 2 dB pad required to meet part of the loss plan for local switching. party. The conference loss plan is outlined in Table S-4. Table 8-4 Conferenclng Origlnatlng ONS(D) 180 8-16 Clrcult Connecting Clrcult Loss Plan Loss (dB) TX Direction Loss (dB) Rx Dlrectlon ONS(D) -8.0 4.0 ONS(A) -6.2 -6.2 OPSS -6.0 -6.0 OPSL -3.0 -3.0 ACO(D) -4.0 Revision 0 -4.0 Page 1 of 9 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Loss and Level Plan Table 8-4 Conferencing (continued) Originating Circuit Connecting ONS(A) OPSS Circuit Loss Plan Loss (dB) TX Dlrection Loss (dB) Rx Direction AC0 (A) -3.2 -3.2 AT-W) -5.0 -5.0 AJW) -5.2 -5.2 ATO -8.0 -8.0 ATO -6.2 -8.2 DC0 -3.0 -3.0 DTO -3.0 -9.0 DlT -3.0 -9.0 sATi -3.0 -3.0 SD-IT -3.0 -3.0 SC-r-r -3.0 -9.0 ONS(D) -6.2 -6.2 ONS(A) -8.4 -8.4 OPSS -8.2 -6.2 OPSL -3.2 -3.2 ACO(D) -4.2 -4.2 AC0 (A) -3.4 -3.4 AJ-J-P) -5.2 -5.2 ATA) -5.4 -5.4 ATO -6.2 -6.2 ATO -6.4 -6.4 DC0 -3.2 -3.2 DTO -3.2 -9.2 D-IT -3.2 -9.2 SAG -3.2 -3.2 SD-IT -3.2 -3.2 sc-rr -3.2 -9.2 ONS(D) -8.0 -8.0 ONS(A) -6.2 -6.2 OPSS -8.0 -8.0 OPSL -3.0 -3.0 ACO(D) -4.0 -4.0 ACO(A) -3.2 -3.2 A-TD) -5.0 5.0 Dnna 9109498-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 3 rrf 0 180 8-17 Engineering Information Table 8-4 Conferencing (continued) Originating \ OPSL ACO(D) Circuit Connecting Circuit Loss Plan Loss (dB) TX Direction Loss (dB) Rx Direction. ATA) -5.2 -5.2 ATO -8.0 -8.0 AT0 (A) -6.2 -6.2 DC0 -3.0 -3.0 DTO -3.0 -9.0 Dll- -3.0 -9.0 sAlT -3.0 -3.0 SD-IT -3.0 -3.0 scl-r -3.0 -9.0 ONS(D) -3.0 -3.0 ONS(A) -3.2 -3.2 OPSL 0 0 OPSS -3.0 -3.0 ACO(D) -1 .o -1 .o AC0 (A) -0.2 -0.2 ATD) -2.0 -2.0 ATA) -2.2 -2.2 ATO -3.0 -3.0 ATO -3.2 -3.2 DC0 0 0 DTO 0 -8.0 D-IT 0 -8.0 sAlT 0 0 SD-IT 0 0 SC-l-r 0 -8.0 ONS(D) 4.0 4.0 ONS(A) 4.2 4.2 OPSS 4.0 4.0 OPSL -1 .o -1.0 ACO(D) -2.0 -2.0 AC0 (A) -1.2 -1.2 ATD) -2.2 -2.2 ATA) -3.2 -3.2 ATO 4.0 4.0 * Page 3 of 9 180 8-18 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Loss and Level Plan Table 8-4 Conferencing (continued) Originating Circuit Connecting Circuit Loss Plan Loss (dB) TX Direction 4.2 -4.2 DC0 -1 .o -1.0 DTO -1 .o -7.0 D-IT -1 .o -7.0 sATT -1 .o -1 .o SD-IT -1 .o -1.0 scl-r -1 .o -7.0 ONS(D) -3.2 -3.2 ONS(A) -3.4 -3.4 OPSS -3.2 -3.2 OPSL -0.2 -0.2 ACO(D) -1.2 -1.2 ACO(A) -0.4 -0.4 ATD) -2.2 -2.2 AJ-UA) -2.4 -2.4 ATO -3.2 -3.2 AT0 (A) -3.4 -3.4 DC0 -0.2 -0.2 DTO -0.2 -6.2 DlT -0.2 -6.2 sAlT -0.2 -0.2 SD-IT -0.2 -0.2 SC-n- -0.2 -0.2 ONS(D) -5.2 -5.2 ONS(A) -5.4 -5.4 OPSS -5.2 -5.2 OPSL -2.2 -2.2 ACO(D) -3.2 -3.2 AC0 (A) -2.4 -2.4 AJ-W -5.2 -5.2 AJ-W) 4.4 -4.4 ATO -5.2 -5.2 ATO -5.4 -5.4 ATO AC0 (A) AJTA) DC0 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Loss (dB) Rx .Direction -2.2 Revision 0 -2.2 Page 4 of 9 180 8-19 Engineering Information Table 8-4 Conferencing (continued) Originating \ AJ-W) ATO 180 8-20 Circuit Connecting Circuit Loss Plan Loss (dB) TX Direction Loss (dB) Rx Direction. DTO -2.2 -8.2 D-IT -2.2 -8.2 sAlT -2.2 -2.2 sDlT -2.2 -2.2 SC-l-r -2.2 -8.2 ONS(D) -5.0 -5.0 ONS(A) -5.2 -5.2 OPSS -5.0 -5.0 OPSL -2.0 -2.0 A-W’) 4.0 -4.0 AWN 4.2 -4.2 ACO(D) -3.0 -3.0 AC0 (A) -2.2 -2.2 ATO -5.0 -5.0 ATO -5.2 -5.2 DC0 -2.0 -2.0 DTO -2.0 -8.0 D-IT -2.0 -8.0 sAlT -2.0 -2.0 sDlT -2.0 -2.0 SC-l-r -2.0 -8.0 ONS(D) -6.2 -6.2 ONS(A) -6.4 -6.4 OPSS -6.2 -6.2 OPSL -3.2 -3.2 ACO(D) 4.2 -4.2 ACO(A) -3.4 -3.4 ATD) -5.2 -5.2 ATA) -5.4 -5.4 ATO -6.2 -6.2 ATO -8.4 -6.4 DC0 -3.2 -3.2 DTO -3.2 -9.2 DTT -3.2 Revision 0 - -9.2 Page 5 of 9 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Loss and Level Plan Table 8-4 Conferencing (continued) Originating ‘. Circuit Connecting 2 ATO SA-I-T 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Circuit Loss Plan Loss (dB) TX Direction Loss (dB) Rx Direction sAlT -3.2 -3.2 sD=lT -3.2 -3.2 scl-r -3.2 -9.2 ONS(D) -6.0 -6.0 ONS(A) -6.2 -6.2 OPSS -6.0 -6.0 OPSL -3.0 -3.0 ACO(D) 4.2 4.2 AC0 (A) -3.2 -3.2 Am(D) -5.0 5.0 AJ-W) -5.2 5.2 ATO -6.0 4.0 AT0 (A) -6.2 -6.2 DC0 -3.0 -3.0 DTO -3.0 -9.0 DlT -3.0 -9.0 sAlT -3.0 -3.0 sDlT -3.0 -3.0 scl-r -3.0 -9.0 ONS(D) -3.0 -3.0 ONS(A) -3.2 -3.2 OPSS -3.0 -8.0 OPSL 0 0 ACO(D) -1 .o -1 .o ACO(A) -0.2 AWD) -2.0 -0.2 -2.0 A-WA) -2.2 -2.2 ATO -3.0 -3.0 ATO 3.2 -3.2 DC0 0 0 DTO 0 -6.0 D-IT 0 -6.0 sAlT 0 0 SD-IT 0 Revision 0 0 Page 6 of 9 180 8-21 Engineering Information Table 8-4 Conferencing (continued) Originating Circuit Connecting Circuit Loss Plan Loss (dB) TX Direction Loss (dB) Rx Direction. 0 -8.0 ONS(D) -3.0 -3.0 ONS(A) -3.2 -3.2 OPSS -3.0 -3.0 OPSL 0 0 ACO(D) -1 .o -1.0 AC0 (A) -0.2 ATD) -0.2 -2.0 ATA) -2.2 -2.2 ATO -3.0 -3.0 ATO -3.2 -3.2 DC0 0 0 DTO 0 -8.0 Dl-l- 0 -8.0 sAlT 0 0 SD-I-T 0 0 SC-IT -8.0 4.0 ONS(D) -9.0 -3.0 ONS(A) -9.2 -3.2 OPSS -9.0 -3.0 OPSL -8.0 0 ACO(D) -7.0 -1.0 ACO(A) -6.2 -0.2 An(D) -8.0 -2.0 AJ-WV -8.2 -2.2 ATO -9.0 -3.0 AT0 (A) -9.2 -3.2 DC0 -8.0 0 DTO -8.0 -8.0 DlT -8.0 -8.0 sAl-l- -8.0 0 SD-I-I- -8.0 0 scl-r -8.0 -8.0 ONS(D) -3.0 SClT ._ SD-IT \ scl-r 180 8-22 Revision 0 c -2.0 -3.0 Page 7 of 9 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Loss and Level Plan Table 8-4 Conferencing (continued) Originating Circuit Connecting DC0 ._ Circuit Loss Plan Loss (dB) TX Direction ONS(A) -3.2 -3.2 OPSS -3.0 -3.0 OPSL 0 0 ACO(D) -1 .o -1 .o AC0 (A) -0.2 -0.2 ATD) -2.0 -2.0 ATA) -2.2 -2.2 ATO -3.0 -3.0 ATO -3.2 -3.2 DC0 0 0 DTO 0 -8.0 D-IT 0 -8.0 sAlT 0 0 SD-IT 0 0 scl-r 0 -8.0 -9.0 -3.0 ONS(D) 9109-096-1804A Issue 1 Loss (dB) Rx .Direction Revision 0 180 8-23 Engineering Information Table 8-4 Conferencing (continued) Originating Circuit Connecting Circuit Loss Plan Loss (dB) TX Direction OPSL \ Loss (dB) Fix Direction 0 ACO(D) -8.0 -7.0 -1.0 AC0 (A) -6.2 -0.2 An(D) -8.0 -2.0 A-(A) ATO -8.2 -9.0 -2.2 -3.0 ATO -9.2 -3.2 DC0 -8.0 0 DTO -8.0 -8.0 Dll- -8.0 -8.0 sATT -8.0 0 sDlT -8.0 0 scl-r -8.0 -8.0 ’ Page 9 of 9 Tone levels 8.4 I All of the tones used by the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX are provided by the Digital Signal Processor on the Main Control card. The system provides eight tone channels, each of which can generate either a dual or single frequency tone. One channel is used to generate a signal which controls the frequency and amplitude of the ringing generator output. Three channels are used for DTMF tone generation, and the remaining four are used to generate the system call progress tones. Most call progress and DTMF tones require that the receive gain pad circuit interface codec be set to a specific value for the duration exception is the camp-on/override tone, which does not require any pads. The interface settings for the call progress tones are outlined DTMF levels and interface settings are outlined in Table 8-6 respectively. 180 8-24 Revision 0 9109-098-l in the line or trunk of the tone. The adjustment of the in Table 84. The and Table 8-7 8o-NA Issue 1 Loss and Level Plan Table 8-5 Call Progress Tone Tone Interface Interface Dial Tone 2 Reorder/Busy Ringback Levels Interface Level (dBm) ONS(D) -13.75 ONS(A) -13.95 OPSS -13.75 OPSL -13.75 ACO(D) -13.75 ACO(A) -13.9i Am(A) -13.95 An(D) -13.75 AT0 (A) -13.95 ATO -13.75 DC0 -13.75 DTO -13.75 D-IT -13.75 sAlT -13.75 SD-IT -13.75 scl-r -13.75 ONS(D) -24.0 ONS(A) -23.2 OPSS -24.0 OPSL -24.0 ACO(D) -18.0 AC0 (A) -18.2 AWA) -18.2 AJ-W) -18.0 ATO -18.2 ATO -18.0 DC0 -20.0 DTO -20.0 D-IT -20.0 sAlT -18.0 SD-IT -20.0 scl-r -20.0 ONS(D) -19.0 ONS(A) -18.2 OPSS -19.0 D.-v.- 3 ms ,-a 9109-098-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 8-25 Engineering Information Table 8-5 Call Progress Tone Interface (continued) Tone Interface L \ Interface Level (dBm) OPSL -19.0 ACO(D) -13.0 AC0 (A) -13.2 AJ-W -13.2 AJ-VD) -13.0 ATO -13.2 ATO -13.0 ’ DC0 -15.0 DTO -15.0 DTT -15.0 sAlT -13.0 SDlT -15.0 SC-IT -15.0 ONS(D) -20.0 ONS(A) -19.2 to -20.2 Executive OPSS -20.0 Override OPSL -17.0 to -19.0 ACO(D) -14.0 to -20.0 AC0 (A) -14.2 to -20.2 AWA) -17.2 to -20.2 AT-W) -17.0 to -20.0 AT0 (A) -17.2 to -20.0 AT0 (D) -17.0 to -20.0 DC0 -17.0 DTO -17.0 D-IT -17.0 sATT -17.0 to -19.0 sDTT -17.0 to -19.0 scl-r -17.0 Camp-on .- Levels / Page 2 of 2 180 8-26 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Loss and Level Plan Table 6-6 DTMF Levels -Trunk Nominal level -single Interface frequency: Nominal level -frequency into 600 Ohms 4.0 dBm pair : -1 .O dBm Nominal twist : 0.0 dBm Table 6-7 9109-098-l 8O-NA Issue 1 DTMF Tone Interface Revision 0 Levels 180 8-27 Engineering 180 8-28 Information Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA issue 1 9. CALL PROGRESS TONES AND RINGING CADENCES This Part describes available to support the different call progress PABX requirements. tones and ringing cadences that are 2 North America Tone Plan Table 9-1 identifies the tones that are generated by the PABX in North America. Table 9-l North America Tone Generation I Tone Frequency 1 Frequency Table 2 1 Level With No lntetface Gain/Loss Ringing 20 Hz Dial tone 350 Hz 440 Hz -10.75 dBm0 Busy tone 480 Hz 620 Hz -20.00 dBm0 Ringback tone 440 Hz 480 Hz -15.00 dBm0 440 Hz -17.00 dBm0 2025 Hz -15.00 dBm0 Miscellaneous tone Modem connect tone Notes: 1. Ringing 2. 1 voltage Dial Tone is measured passes 3. Busy Tone 4. Ringback 5. Miscellaneous through at source. a filter has +2 dB added Tone 90 Vrms at trunk has +2 dB added Tone (440 with 7 dB attenuation. interface at trunk Hz at - 17.02 for network interface dBm0) connectivity. for network is used connectivity. for the maintenance test tone. Ringer Cadencing Table 9-2 and Table 9-3 identify the ringer cadencing North America. 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 that is provided by the PABX in 180 9-l I Engineering Information Table 9-2 North America Digltal Bay Ringer Cadenclng Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating Ring Always (Option 18) disabled Discriminating ONS/OPS Internal (standard) ONS/OPS External (discriminating) SUPERSET .350 on .200 off ,350 on 3.1 off .‘.9 on 3i-7 off repeating SUPERSET Telephones Internal (standard) Telephones External (discriminating) .400 on ,200 off .400 on 3.0 off 1 on3off repeating repeating repeating ’ Table g-3 North America Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating Ring Always (Option 18) disabled Discriminating ONS/OPS Internal (standard) ONS/OPS External (discriminating) SUPERSET .400 on .200 off .400 on 3.0 off 1 on3off repeating SUPERSET Telephones Internal (standard) Telephones External (dlscrlminating) .400 on .200 off .400 on 3.0 off 1 on 3 off repeating repeating repeating Mexico Tone Plan 9.2 Table 9-4 identifies the tones that are generated by the PABX in Mexico. Table 9-4 Mexico Tone Generation Tone Frequency 1 -1 Table Frequency 2 Level With No Interface Gain/Loss Ringing 25 Hz Dial tone 440 Hz -10.00 dBm0 Busy tone 440 Hz -10.00 dBm0 Ringback tone 440 Hz -10.00 dBm0 440 Hz -10.00 dBm0 2025 Hz -15.00 dBm0 Miscellaneous tone Modem connect tone Notes: 180 9-2 1. Ringing voltage is measured 2. Dial Tone passes through 3. Busy Tone has +2 dB added 70 Vrms at source. a filter with 7 dB attenuation. at trunk interface for network Revision 0 connectivity. 9109-098-l 8O-NA Issue 1 iI Km Call Progress Tones and Ringing Cadences 4. Ringback Tone 5. Miscellaneous Ringer has +2 dB added Tone (440 at trunk Hz at - 17.02 interface dBm0) for network is used test tone. Cadencing Table 9-5 and Table 9-6 identify the ringer cadencing Mexico. that is provided ONS/OPS internal (standard) off repeating ONS/OPS External (discriminating) SUPERSET SUPERSET Telephones Internal (standard) Telephones External (discriminating) ,350 on .200 off 1 on4off .400 on .200 off ,350 on 4.1 off repeating .400 on 4.0 off repeating Discriminating by the PABX in Table 9-5 Mexico Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating Ring Always (Option 18) disabled Discriminating .9on4.1 connectivity. for the maintenance repeating Table g-6 Mexico Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating Ring Always (Option 18) disabled ONS/OPS internal (standard) ONS/OPS External (discriminating) SUPERSET SUPERSET Telephones internal (standard) 1 Telephones External (discriminating) 1 on4off .400 on ,200 off 1 on4off .400 on ,200 off repeating .400 on 4.0 off repeating ,400 on 4.0 off reoeatina 9109-098-I 8O-NA Issue 1 repeatina Revision 0 180 93 Engineering Information Hong Kong / Taiwan Tone Plan 9.3 Table 9-7 identifies Taiwan. I the tones that are generated by the PABX in Hong Table g-7 Hong Kong / Talwan Tone Generation I Tone Frequency Ringing 20 Hz Dial tone 380 Hz Busv tone 480 Hz Ringback tone 440 Hz Miscellaneous tone Modem connect tone Notes: 1. Ringing voltage 2. Dial Tone 3. Busy Tone 4. Ringback 5. Miscellaneous Level Wlth No Interface Gain/Loss 90 Vrms 620 Hz -10.00 dBm0 480 Hz -10.00 dBm0 440 Hz -10.00 dBm0 2025 Hz -10.00 dBm0 through at source. a filter with 7 dB attenuation. at trunk has +2 dB added Tone 2 dBm0 has +2 dB added Tone Frequency Table -10.00 is measured passes 1 Kong and (440 interface at trunk Hz at - 17.02 for network interface dBm0) connectivity. for network is used connectivity. for the maintenance test tone. Ringer Cadencing Table 9-8 and Table 9-9 identify the ringer cadencing Hong Kong and Taiwan. Table 94 Hong Kong /Taiwan Discriminating ONS/OPS External (dlscriminatlng) by the PABX in Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating ONS/OPS internal (standard) that is provided Ring Always (Option 18) disabled SUPERSET SUPERSET Telephones Internal (standard) Telephones External (discrlmlnating) .9 on 3.1 off ,350 on .200 off 1 on 3 off ,400 on .200 off repeating .350 on 3.1 off repeating ,400 on 3.0 off repeating 180 9-4 repeating Revision 0 9109-098-l 8O-NA Issue 1 I m;I Call Progress Tones and Ringing Cadences Discriminating Table g-g Hong Kong / Taiwan Analog Bay Ringer Cadenclng Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating Ring Always (Option 18) disabled ONS/OPS Internal (standard) .’ -.._ ONS/OPS External (discriminating) SUPERSET SUPERSET Telephones Internal (standard) Telephones External (dlscriminatlng) 1 on 3 off .400 on .200 off 1 on3off .400 on .200 off repeating .400 on 3.0 off repeating repeating .400 on 3.0 off repeating Malaysia Tone Plan 9.4 Table 9-10 identifies the tones that are generated by the PABX in Malasia. Table g-10 Malasla Tone Generation Notes: 1. Ringing voltage is measured at source. 2. Dial Tone passes through 3. Busy Tone has +2 dB added 4. Ringback Tone 5. Miscellaneous a filter with 7 dB attenuation. at Vunk has +2 dB added Tone (440 Table interface at trunk Hz at - 17.02 for network interface dBm0) connectivity. for network is used connectivity. for the maintenance test tone. Ringer Cadencing Table 9-11 thru Table 9-14 in Malaysia. 9109-098-l 8O-NA Issue 1 identify the ringer cadencing Revision 0 that is provided by the PABX 180 95 Engineering Information Table 9-11 Malasia DigItal Bay Ringer Cadencing Discriminating Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating ONS/OPS Internal (standard) ONS/OPS External (discriminating) Ring Always (Option 18) enabled SUPERSET Telephones internal (standard) SUPERSET Telephone’s External (discriminating) .350 on-.200 off .350 on .200 off ,400 on .200 off ,400 on ,200 off .350 on 2.1 off .350 on 2.1 off ,400 on 2.0 off ,400 on 2.0 off repeating repeating repeating repeating ’ Table 9-12 Malasia Digital Bay Ringer Cadencing Discriminating Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating ONS/OPS Internal (standard) ONS/OPS External (discriminating) Ring Always (Option 18) disabled SUPERSET Telephones Internal (standard) SUPERSET Telephones External (discriminating) .9 on 5.1 off ,350 on .200 off 1 on 5 off ,400 on .200 off repeating .350 on 2.1 off repeating ,400 on 2.0 off repeating Table %I3 Discriminating repeating Maiasia Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating ONS/OPS Internal (standard) ONS/OPS External (discriminating) Ring Always (Option 18) enabled SUPERSET Telephones Internal (standard) SUPERSET Telephones External (discriminating) .400 on ,200 off .400 on .200 off .400 on .200 off .400 on .200 off .400 on 2.0 off ,400 on 2.0 off ,400 on 2.0 off .400 on 2.0 off repeating repeating 180 9-6 repeating Revision 0 repeating 9109-096-l 8O-NA * Issue 1 miI Call Progress Tones and Ringing Cadences Discriminating Table g-14 Malasia Analog Bay Ringer Cadencing Ring (Option 17) enabled and Discriminating Ring Always (Option 18) disabled ONS/OPS Internal (standard) .-. 1 on 5 off repeating ONS/OPS External (discriminating) .400 on .200 off .400 on 2.0 off SUPERSET Telephones Internal (standard) 1 1 on 5 off .400 on ,200 off repeating ,400 on 2.0 off repeating 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 SUPERSET Telephones External (discriminating) repeating Revision 0 180 9-7 Engineering Information 180 9-8 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 10 ’ TRAFFIC CONSIDERATIONS General 1 OLI This part details traffic limitations for all configurations SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. Information includes: l Busy Hour Call Attempt l System Traffic l Grade of Service l Receiver l Trunk Distribution. available with the (BHCA) Capacity Provisioning Traffic limitations 10.2 Traffic capacities and CCS. are specified on a per line basis in terms of calls per hour, erlangs, 336-Port Configuration A basic system consists of 225 lines and 39 trunks. This configuration specified to meet the following heavy traffic characteristics: Busy Hour Call Attempts System Mean Per Second Bothway Calls/Hour 1259 9109-09f%18O-NA Issue 1 (BHCA) 99.9 % Peak 0.258 0.410 928 1475 Per Hour Traffic Capactty Erlang ccs 42.47 1529.0 Revision 0 has been 180 10-l Engineering Information Typical I I configured Light Lines system quantities -10% Medium Trunks I Bolded areas indicate analog trunk cards. 456-Port as per ATT 48002 I Lines possible - 50 I are: % Trunks configurations Heavy Lines I using Tl/D4 -90% Trunks I digital trunks Configuration A basic system consists of 250 lines and 42 trunks. This configuration specified to meet the following heavy traffic characteristics: Busy Hour Call Attempts System Mean 0.286 0.446 Per Hour 1029 1605 Bothway Calls/Hour 180 IO-2 Traffic Capactty Erlang ccs 47.00 1692.0 Revision 0 has been (BHCA) 99.9 % Peak Per Second 1401 to replace 9109-096-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Traffic Considerations Typical configured system Bolded areas indicate analog trunk cards. quantities possible as per ATT 48002 configurations are: using Ti/D4 digital trunks to replace 672-Pat-t Configuration A basic system consists of 500 lines and 71 trunks. This configuration specified to meet the following heavy traffic characteristics: Busy Hour Call Attempts System Mean (BHCA) 99.9 % Peak Per Second 0.554 0.768 Per Hour 1993 2765 Bothway Calls/Hour 2758 9109-098-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Traffic Capacity Erlang ccs 95.50 3438.0 Revision 0 has been 180 10-3 Engineering Information Typical configured system quantities as per ATT 48002 are: Grade of Service -10.3 The SX-200 DIGITAL in Table 10-l. 180 10-4 PABX Grade of Service Revision 0 (GOS) in terms of blocking 9109-096-l 8o-NA is outlined Issue 1 Traffic Considerations Table 10-I Link/FIesource SX-200 DiGiTAL PABX Grade Of Service (GOS) Blocking Blocking I Probability Link Blocking: Peripheral to Network c 0.1% Network to Network 0.0% Resource Blocking I I Software < 0.01% DTMF Receivers, Trunks provisioning Receiver 10.4 dependent Provisioning The number of receivers required to be installed in the PABX is dependent on various factors, such as the number of lines and trunks installed, the amount of traffic flow estimated for the system and the desired grade of service. In order to arrive at the quantity of receivers required the following assumptions were made: l Average receiver holding time for intercom l Average receiver holding time for a trunk call is 17.4 seconds 0 Holding l time for receivers Call originations call is 6 seconds is exponential are Poisson distribution * Call holding times are exponential 0 Receivers are provisioned For a given load (heavy, receivers was determined 0 ABSBH = 99.0: in multiples of 4. medium and light traffic), the minimum number for the following grades of service (ABSBH): 99.0 % of ail receiver requests 0 ABSBH = 99.99 : 99.99 % of all receiver The following Table 10-4: calculations are used Holding Time ( h ) = 6 x (% intercom Receiver Traffic 9109-09&l 8o-NA requests to generate Receiver {Oriainatina serviced of required within 3 seconds serviced within 3 seconds Table 10-2, Table 1 O-3, and traffic) + 17.4 x (“Y trunk traffic) Seconds (A) = Calls per hour) x (Receiver holding time (set)) 3600 Issue 1 Revision 0 Erlangs 180 10-!5 Engineering Information Multiple of holding Probability time (t) = 8&J h (4 of delay greater than t (P(>t)) = 1 - ABSBH /lOO Using Erlang C formula delay curves, receivers can be obtained. knowing t, A, P(>t), the minimum number of Trunk Distribution 10.5 , Since the digital bays are non-blocking, while the analog bays are blocking, as many trunks as possible should be distributed in the digital bays. Analog type trunks should be evenly distributed throughout the analog bays. For example, a fully configured system in a heavy traffic environment might have four to five trunk cards in each of the analog bays. Table IO-2 Heavy Traffic 340 5.38 1829 680 655 493 376 491 516 1007 31 28 53 16 24 360 5.37 1933 716 691 526 395 518 547 1065 32 30 55 20 24 180 IO-8 Revision 0 9109-098-l 8o-NA Issue 1 Traffic Considerations Table IO-3 Medium Traffic Table IO-4 Light Traffic Page 1 of 2 9109-09&l 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 IO-7 Engineering Information Table 10-4 Light Traffic (continued) Page 2 of 2 180 10-8 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 11 ’ SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS General ‘\’ 11 .I This section describes the environmental, of the SX-200 DIGITAL PABX. electrical, and operational characteristics Environmental Conditions 11.2 The systems Table 11-l. are designed Table 11-l to operate within the environmental System Environmental Operating Specification conditions outlined in Conditions Range Temperature 10” C to 40” C (50” F to 104” F) for SX-200 DIGITAL 0” C to 40” C (32” F to 104” F) for SX-200 FD 0” C to 30” C (32” F to 86” F) for console Relative humidity Acoustic noise 20% to 80% noncondensing The system radiates less than 50 dB SPL, “A” weighted, 1524 mm (60 in.) from the center of the cabinet. Maximum Altiiude 4000 metres measured Heat IDissipation 11.3 A fully configured SX-200 DIGITAL (figures are approximate): PABX will dissipate Digital Bays (each): Bay 4 (peripheral cabinet): 1000 BTU/hr Analog Bay 5 (peripheral cabinet): 750 BTU/hr Control Cabinet FD) 275 BTU/hr (SX-200 Bay/Cabinet Note: The Control 9109-096-l 8O-NA manner 500 BTU/hr Analog Peripheral heat in the following (SX-200 Cabinet Issue 1 FD) 500 BTU/hr for the SX-200 FD is cooled by the Power Supply Revision 0 Fan. 180 11-l Engineering Shipping 11.4 Information and Storage The equipment is designed to withstand shipping by truck, rail, air, or sea without damage, when packaged in conventional shipping containers of the manufacturer. The range of environmental conditions that the equipment is capable of withstanding in storage is shown in Table 11-2. Table 11-2 .’ Storage Conditions SRecifkation Temperature range Range -50” C to 71” C (-58’ F to 159.8“ F) for the system 10” C to 40” C (50” F to 104” F) for the floppy disk -20” C to 60” C (-4” F to 140” F) for the console qelative humidity Upto100%RHat18”C(64.4”F) 10 to 70% RH for the console Jibration 0.5 g (4.903 nW2) (sinusoidal) 5 to 1000 Hz 1.5 g (14.7 m/$2) (sinusoidal) 100 to 500 Hz Shock Up to 75 cm (30 in.) drop depending Mechanical Shock Up to 20 cm (8 in.) drop on any face or comer (SX-200 DIGITAL) Up to 61 cm (24 in.) drop on any face or corner (SX-,200 FD) -0w pressure 87 mm Hg 15,152 m (50,000 ft) remperature shock upon package -40” C to 21’ C (-40’ F to 70” F) in 5 minutes 66” C to 21’ C (150” F to 70” F) in 5 minutes 180 11-2 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Svstem Characteristics loop lengths 11.5 and Cable Lengths The following rules for loop lengths between the Digital Line Card within the PABX and the SUPERSET DN telephone, SUPERSET DN telephone, SUPERSET telephone, SUPERSET470telephone, SUPERSET420telephone, SUPERSET telephone, SUPERSET DSS’” module, or SUPERCONSOLE l&IO’” Attendant Console must be followed for proper operation of the device: Maximum loop length (twisted Maximum length of quad cable (22 AWG) Modular pair) 24 or 26 AWG see Table 50m Line Cord 3 m (10 ft) PABX Modular Connector MDF (16Oft) Telephone, Module, or Console IDF 24 or 26 AWGtwisted pair cable (see Table) 50 m maximum 22 AWG quad Peripheral Device Maximum Without (9183400401) Bridge Tap SUfERSET3 DN Mkl SUPERSET DN Mk2 (9183-00&200) 1000 m SUPERSET DN Mkl 1000 m (9184400401) 1000 m Mo3d$ar maximum 1 IOD Length With Bridge Tap not permitted 1000 m not permitted SUPERSET 4 DN Mk2 (9184-000-200) 1000 m 1000 m SUPERSET 1000 m 1000 m SUPERSET 1000 m 1000 m SUPERSET 420 1000 m 1000 m SUPERSET 430 1000 m 1000 m SUPERSET DSS Module 1000 m 1000 m Dataset 1101 1000 m 1000 m Dataset 1102 2000 m 1000 m Dataset 1103 MiLink Data Module 2000 m 1000 m 2000 m 1000 m Dataset 2102 2000 m 1000 m Dataset 2 103 2000 m 1000 m 1000 m 1000 m SUPERCONSOLE 9109-096-l 8O-NA 1000 console Issue 1 Revision 0 180 113 Engineering Information Loop lengths for various cards are given in Table 11-3: Table 113 Card Type Loop Lengths Wire Gauge (AWG) COV Card. Loop Length 22 2010 m 6600 ft 24 1524 m 5000 ft 26 1006 m 3300 ft 22 840 m 2750 ft 24 610 m 2000ft 26 470 m 1550ft DLIC Console Interface 26 305m DNIC line card (Digital set) 24 1006 m 3300 ft 26 1006 m 3300 ft 24 1006 m 3300 ft 26 1006 m 3300 ft 22 3560 m 117OOft 24 2250 m 7400 ft 26 1400 m 4600 ft 22 18290 m 60000 ft 24 11520 m 37800 ft 26 7225 m 23700 ft 22 2715 m 8900 ft 24 1708 m 5600 ft 26 1068 m 3500 ft na na na 2240 ohms na 1600 ohms SUPERSET Line Card (DNIC Console) ONS Card OPS Card E&M Trunk Tl Trunk - see Note DID Trunk Card -CO Trunk resistance LS/GS Trunk Card - CO Trunk resistance Note: 180 11-4 These are cable lengths, equalization depending lOOOtt not loop lengths for 22 gauge (AWG) wire. Set DIP switches on Tl Trunk card for correct on cable length between the Tl Trunk and the Channel Service Unit (CSU).. Loop Length Switch O-45.8m Sl only closed (0-15Oft) Setting 45.8 - 137.3 m (150 - 450 ft) S2, S3, S4 closed 137.3 - 200.5 m (450 - 655 ft) S5, S6, S7 closed Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 12 ’ POWER SUPPLIES This Part gives details of the electrical characteristics of the power supplies for the SX-200 DIGITAL and the SX-200 FD. Two power supplies are available: l l The Bay Power Supply (BPS) is card mounted and is located in the upper right slot of each Digital Bay (SX-200 DIGITAL) and each Peripheral Bay (SX-200 FD). A200WattstandardPCPowerSupplyismountedatthetoprearoftheControlCabinetofthe SX-200 FD. (Generic 1005 only). The electrical power characteristics are summarized in Table 12-I. Table 12-1 Electrical Characterlstlc Input Voltage Input Power Characteristics Details 102 Vat to 135 Vat (pn 9109-008-OOO-SA) 90 Vat to 132 Vat (pn 9400-300-2OO-NA) 204 Vat to 270 Vat (pn 9109-008-002-NA) Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz Holdover Time Minimum of: 40 ms at 120 Vat or 20 ms at 102 Vat delivering full rated load Input Current Maximum of: 2.0 Amps at 120 Vat or 1 .l Amps at 240 Vat Electrical 12.1 Characteristics All power is derived from either a commercial ac source or an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). The BPS is preset at the factory to one of two input voltage ranges. Table 12-2 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Bay Power Supply Specifications Revision 0 180 12-l Engineering Information Table 12-3 I SX-200 FDControl Commercial Cabinet Power Supply power lnverter power Specifications Current I I Range 90 Vrms to 132 Vrms. 90 Vrms to 132 Vrms. 3.5 A rms max. Frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz. 47 Hz to 63 Hz. - Waveform Sinusoidal, 5% THD max. Quasi-square wave, 0.71 duty cycle. - Bay Power Supply 12.2 A Bay Power Supply is card-mounted; one is located in the upper right slot of each Digital bay (SX-200 DIGITAL) and in the upper right slot of each Peripheral bay (SX-200 FD). The Bay Power Supply (BPS) connects to the backplane through a card-edge connector at the rear of the card; also at the rear is an IEC receptacle which connects to a line cord from the system ac distribution (see Figure 12-I). The dimensions of the BPS are as follows: Width Height Depth 5.1 cm 15.7 cm 36.8 cm (2.0 in.) (6.2 in.) (14.5 in.) The Bay Power Supply output voltages, current, and power rating for which the unit will operate within its design specifications are shown in Table 12-4; test points are shown in Table 12-5. Table 12-4 output I 12Vdc Maximum I +5 Vdc Current 2.5 A 15.0 A Power 3ow I t5 v (PC) TRANSIENT 5 Vdc l.OA 5w -12 Vdc 2.0 A 24W -20 Vdc 1.6A 45w 48 Vdc 1.5 A 72W 90 V-RING TOTAL POWER Note: 180 12-2 Ratings 75w - s I Bay Power Supply Output The maximum power values in Table 124 I 0.1 A rms low 14ow I (see Note) supply output is 140 watts; therefore are for each individual rail: however, Revision 0 I the output is partially the total power cannot 9109-096-I exclusive. exceed I Maximum 140 watts. 8O-NA current Issue 1 Power Supplies Table 12-5 Bay Power Supply Test Point Voltages Controls and Indicators The ON/OFF switch is mounted on the front of the BPS and is used to turn the power on or off to the unit. Two LEDs are also on the front; the upper LED indicates that the BPS is operating, and the lower LED is ON when the ringing amplifier is producing power (flashing in cadence with it). Input and Output Protection The input to the converter is protected by a fuse, and by low shuts off the converter if the input voltage falls below the converter will not be re-enabled until the input voltage minimum. The input also includes protection which limits the A. Each output overload/short is protected against short circuits, circuit protection is self-resetting. overloads, voltage protection which specified minimum. The returns to the specified peak inrush current to 20 and overvoltage. The Power Fail Sense The converter has a single alarm signal, PFS (power fail sense), which is driven low when the incoming ac falls below its minimum specified value. At this point there will be approximately IO ms before the outputs fall out of regulation. 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 12-3 Engineering Information Figure 12-1 Bay Power Supply s4Lll FD Control Cabinet Power Supply 12.3 The Control Cabinet Power Supply is a standard slim type 200 Watt PC Power Supply. It is factory installed at the top rear of the Contol Cabinet (see Figure 12-2). The dimensions of the PC Power Supply are as follows: Length Height Width 14.0 cm 8.6 cm 15.0 cm (5.5 in.) (3.4 in.) (5.9 in.) .The PC Power Supply output voltages, current, and power rating for which the unit will operate within its design specifications are shown in Table 12-6; test points are shown in Table 12-7. 180 12-4 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 Power Supplies Table 12-6 PC Power Supply Output Ratings I output 2 \ Maximum Current Power +5 Vdc 20.0 A 100.0 w -5 Vdc .3 A 1.5 w - +5 v (PC) TRANSIENT 12 Vdc 6.0 A 72.0 W -12 Vdc .3 A 3.6 W TOTAL POWER (see Note) 200.0 w Note: The maximum power supply output is 200.0 values in Table 12-6 are for each individual Table 12-7 watts; therefore rail; however, the output is partially the total power cannot I exclusive. Maximum exceed 200.0 watts. current PC Power Supply Test Point Voltages Power Cord and Switches The Power Cord plugs into the AC input connector (lower connector) at the rear cabinet as shown in Figure 12-2. The AC service connector (see Figure 12-2) used. The ON/OFF switch mounted on the rear of the Control Cabinet (top right corner) is used to turn power ON or OFF to the unit. The voltage selector (preset the factory) is located between the two AC connectors. of the is not hand from input and Output Protection An AC fuse provides input protection. It is located internally to the Power Supply and can be replaced only at the factory. Overvoltage protection is provided on +5V output. Each output overload/short is protected against short circuits, overloads, and overvoltage. circuit protection is self-resetting after 15 seconds. The Power Fail Sense The converter has a single alarm signal, PFS (power fail sense), which is driven low when the incoming ac falls below its minimum specified value. At this point there will be approximately 10 ms before the outputs fall out of regulation. 9109-096-l 8O-NA issue 1 Revision 0 180 12-5 Engineering Information 5.5 INCES(14Cmm) 3.4 INCHES(150 mm) 5.91 INCHES(15O.Omm) - \ VOLTAGESELECTOR AC IIWT FlEARVlEWCOErmOLCABlNET POWER SWTTCH Figure 12-2 SX-200 FD Contol Cabinet Power Supply 180 12-6 Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 13 ’ RESERVE POWER SUPPLY .‘. -_ The reserve power supply for the Control cabinet is a stand-alone Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) or Standby Power Supply (SPS) comprising a battery pack, a charger, and an inverter; it is not manufactured by Mite1Corporation. The UPS or SPS backup time is dependent upon the unit selected and the capacity of the batteries provided. The unit must meet the specifications provided below. The Peripheral cabinet can have its own standard reserve power supply (in the base of the cabinet of the SX-ZOO DIGITAL), or can be supported by an additional UPS or SPS. The UPS and SPS are assemblies not manufactured by MITEL Corporation. Please note that compliance to electrical, installation, and building codes is the responsibility of the purchaser of the equipment. Consult local municipal and electrical utility authorities before proceeding with the installation of equipment. The UPS should be a true Uninterruptible Power Supply (except for an SPS recommended by MITEL) which always supplies the output load from its inverter and which includes a reverse transfer switch to automatically bypass the UPS if it fails. The UPS must be capable of driving rectifier capacitor loads. Rating Input Voltage Output Voltage Output Waveform Transfer time Output Receptacle Holdup/Recharge Times 1.5 kVA minimum 120 Vrms +lO%,-15%, 60 Hz 15% 120 Vrms +I 0%,-l 5%, 60 Hz 5% Sinewave or Quasi square wave (not square wave) Less than 30 ms (includes fail detection and transfer time) NEMA 15 A 3-pin grounded Per customer requirements. An Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) can have an external connection (from an internal relay) which provides a closed contact to remotely indicate status or condition. Conditions which may be indicated include: l l an ALARM condition is present within the UPS the UPS is operating from its batteries (probably because commercial ac power has been interrupted). The relay contact may be connected to a remote alarm or to a “Contact Monitor” line circuit to promptly indicate the condition. Refer to the Manufacturer’s Installation Manual, which describes conditions that are indicated. Refer to Practice 9109-096-105-NA, Features Description, for a description of “Contact Monitor” line circuit operation. 9109-09~18O-NA Issue 1 Revision0 180 13-1 Engineering 180 13-2 Information Revision 0 9109-096-l 8O-NA Issue 1 14 ’ POWER FAIL TRANSFER PFT Operation 14;s _’ \ In the event of a major alarm condition on the SX-200 DIGITAL, the power fail transfer relays located on the Power Fail Transfer (PFT) card, will connect Central Office (CO) trunks to selected station lines. Calls in progress when PFT occurs will be dropped; however calls made while in PFT mode will not be dropped when the system returns to normal operation, but will terminate normally at the end of the call. No PABX features are available while PFT is in effect. Any of the following conditions will cause power fail transfer: l Commercial l Common l Manual power failure (if no reserve power supply is used) control failure transfer The maximum shown below: System Size 45%pot-t 336port 672-port from control number cabinet of Power Fail Transfer circuits for the various In Control Cabinet In Peripheral Cabinet 18 maximum 18 maximum 18 maximum 12 maximum n/a 18 maximum system sizes is Total Circuits 30 maximum 18 maximum 36 maximum The PFT card is not supported in the SX-200 FD, therefore an external System Fail Transfer (SFT) Unit is required. Control (relay contact) and Power (48V) is provided from the Peripheral Bay (Peripheral FIM Carrier). 9109-096-18O-NA Issue 1 Revision 0 180 14-1 180 14-2 Revision 0 9109-096-18O-NA Issue 1
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Page Count : 1142 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Layout : SinglePage Mod Date : 2002:01:05 02:19:00-06:00 Creation Date : 2000:03:03 12:52:46-08:00 Producer : Acrobat 4.0 Scan Plug-in for Windows Author : EZ Manuals Modify Date : 2002:01:05 02:19:00-06:00 Create Date : 2000:03:03 12:52:46-08:00 Metadata Date : 2002:01:05 02:19:00-06:00 Creator : EZ ManualsEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools